openSUSE Translation Commits

Download

translation-commit@lists.opensuse.org

November 2014

23 participants
274 discussions

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90706 - trunk/lcn/nl/po
by fdekruijf＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: fdekruijf Date: 2014-11-03 21:03:13 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90706 Modified: trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po Log: update Modified: trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po 2014-11-03 20:02:55 UTC (rev 90705) +++ trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po 2014-11-03 20:03:13 UTC (rev 90706) @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 15:57+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 18:25+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 21:02+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Freek de Kruijf <freek(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Dutch <opensuse-nl(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: nl\n" @@ -179,12 +179,18 @@ "for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please " "select above location.</quote>" msgstr "" +"Bij de initiële installatie, in de samenvatting van YaST, kan er een " +"volgende waarschuwing verschijnen onder de sectie van de bootloader: " +"<quote>Waarschuwing: geen locatie voor bootloader stage1 geselecteerd. " +"Tenzij u weet wat u doet, selecteer de bovenstaande locatie.</quote>" #: xml/release-notes.xml:168(para) msgid "" "This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely " "ignore it." msgstr "" +"Deze waarschuwing is een bug in YaST (nu in Factory gerepareerd) en u kunt " +"deze veilig negeren." #. bnc#900954 #: xml/release-notes.xml:175(title) @@ -214,7 +220,7 @@ #. bnc#897847 #: xml/release-notes.xml:189(title) msgid "Unbranded Grub2 on New Installs From Live" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Niet aangebrachte Grub2 bij nieuwe installaties vanuit Live" #: xml/release-notes.xml:190(para) msgid "" @@ -223,6 +229,10 @@ "the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader " "during the installation." msgstr "" +"Een bug in YaST voorkomt het aanbrengen in de GRUB2 bootloader bij " +"installatie vanuit het medium LiveCD. Merk op, de manier van voorkeur om " +"openSUSE 13.2 te installeren is met de DVD of de installatie met NET. " +"Beide media genereren een juist aangebrachte bootloader bij de installatie." # dialog title for ftp installation #. bnc#899895 @@ -420,7 +430,7 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:384(title) msgid "Information About the FGLRX Driver" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Informatie over het FGLRX-apparaatstuurprogramma" #: xml/release-notes.xml:385(para) msgid "" @@ -429,11 +439,15 @@ "-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/\">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-war" "ning-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/</ulink>." msgstr "" +"Voor meer informatie over de AMD FGLRX apparaatstuurprogramma's in openSUSE " +"13.2 en hun status, zie <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/" +"fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/\">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/" +"11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/</ulink>." #. bnc#899610 #: xml/release-notes.xml:394(title) msgid "Second Static Mouse Pointer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Tweede statische muisaanwijzer" #: xml/release-notes.xml:395(para) msgid "" @@ -442,6 +456,10 @@ "thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse " "pointer." msgstr "" +"Als u twee muisaanwijzers ziet en u hebt twee grafische kaarten, waarvan " +"een een Intel kaart is, probeer dan het pakket <systemitem>xf86-video-" +"intel</systemitem> te verwijderen en dus alleen de andere te gebruiken. " +"Dit zal de statische muisaanwijzer laten verdwijnen." #: xml/release-notes.xml:402(para) msgid "" @@ -450,11 +468,15 @@ "http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked " "on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." msgstr "" +"Aan dit en andere problemen met het Intel-apparaatstuurprogramma zoals (zie " +"<ulink url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">" +"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) zal gewerkt " +"worden en, indien mogelijk, opgelost worden met het online bijwerken." #. bnc#901869 #: xml/release-notes.xml:411(title) msgid "Missing Dependencies for virt-manager" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Ontbrekende afhankelijkheden voor virt-manager" #: xml/release-notes.xml:412(para) msgid "" @@ -462,12 +484,18 @@ "typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0<" "/systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." msgstr "" +"Als u een probleem tegenkomt bij uitvoeren van virt-manager, probeer dan " +"<systemitem>typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-" +"SpiceClientGtk-3_0</systemitem> en <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</" +"systemitem> te installeren." #: xml/release-notes.xml:418(para) msgid "" "In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made " "explicit." msgstr "" +"Bij het online bijwerken zal er een nieuwe versie komen met deze " +"afhankelijkheden expliciet gemaakt." #. bnc#900813 #: xml/release-notes.xml:425(title) @@ -528,11 +556,14 @@ "The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you " "are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" msgstr "" +"Het GTK-interface van YaST bevat niet de mogelijkheid van een zoekvak naar " +"een pakket. Dus als u in GNOME of XFCE zit en u hebt deze mogelijkheid " +"nodig, gebruik dan in plaats daarvan het QT-interface:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:459(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "sudo /sbin/yast2 --qt" -msgstr "" +msgstr "sudo /sbin/yast2 --qt" #. bnc#902947 #: xml/release-notes.xml:464(title) @@ -581,13 +612,16 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:499(title) msgid "Removing openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper After Upgrade" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Verwijderen van openSUSE 13.1 KDE achtergrondafbeelding na opwaarderen" #: xml/release-notes.xml:500(para) msgid "" "If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, " "remove it from the user cache manually:" msgstr "" +"Als de openSUSE 13.1 KDE achtergrondafbeelding nog steeds verschijnt na " +"opwaarderen van het systeem, verwijder het dan handmatig uit de cache van " +"de gebruiker:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:505(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -595,10 +629,12 @@ "rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/cont" "ents/images/*" msgstr "" +"rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/cont" +"ents/images/*" #: xml/release-notes.xml:509(title) msgid "MATE Desktop official integration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "MATE-bureaublad officiële integratie" #: xml/release-notes.xml:511(para) msgid "" @@ -607,17 +643,24 @@ "attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and " "other Unix-like operating systems." msgstr "" +"Het MATE-bureaublad is nu officieel beschikbaar onder openSUSE 13.2 met " +"MATE versie 1.8.1, de nieuwste stabiele uitgave. Het levert een intuïtieve " +"en attractieve bureaubladomgeving met traditionele metaforen voor Linux en " +"andere Unix-achtige besturingssystemen." #: xml/release-notes.xml:517(para) msgid "" "The objective, for openSUSE, is to provide the same experience users had when " "they used GNOME under openSUSE 11.4, with the main-menu and the Sonar theme." msgstr "" +"Het doel, voor openSUSE, is om dezelfde ervaring te leveren die gebruikers " +"hadden toen ze GNOME onder openSUSE 11.4 gebruikten, met het hoofdmenu en " +"het thema Sonar." #. bnc#901013 #: xml/release-notes.xml:525(title) msgid "Slow Start-up in GNOME" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Langzaam opstarten in GNOME" #: xml/release-notes.xml:526(para) msgid "" @@ -626,6 +669,11 @@ "will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable " "the GNOME autologin feature." msgstr "" +"GNOME automatisch aanmelden kan een langzaam opstartproces veroorzaken. " +"Waarschijnlijk is er een gevecht tussen services die niet juist zijn " +"gemarkeerd als afhankelijk van elkaar. Totdat de reparatie beschikbaar is " +"als met online bijwerken, is een workaround om tijdelijk de functie " +"automatisch aanmelden uit te schakelen." #. bnc#850058 #: xml/release-notes.xml:563(title) @@ -673,7 +721,7 @@ #. bnc#903243 #: xml/release-notes.xml:607(title) msgid "YaST (Qt GUI): \"Service Manager\" Icon Appears Twice" -msgstr "" +msgstr "YaST (Qt GUI): Pictogram \"Servicebeheerder\" verschijnt dubbel" #: xml/release-notes.xml:608(para) msgid "" @@ -682,10 +730,14 @@ "the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in " "the desktop files." msgstr "" +"In de sectie <guimenu>Systeem</guimenu> van YaST (Qt GUI) verschijnt het " +"pictogram <guimenu>Servicebeheerder</guimenu> dubbel. Er is een bug in de " +"Qt-versie van het YaST besturingscentrum die de vlag <quote>hidden</quote> " +"in de desktop-bestanden niet gehoorzaamd." #: xml/release-notes.xml:614(para) msgid "This will get fixed with the next YaST online update." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Dit zal gerepareerd worden in het volgende YaST online bijwerken." #. bnc#809347 #: xml/release-notes.xml:624(title) -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90705 - trunk/lcn/ru/po
by minton＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: minton Date: 2014-11-03 21:02:55 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90705 Modified: trunk/lcn/ru/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.ru.po trunk/lcn/ru/po/opensuse-org.ru.po trunk/lcn/ru/po/slideshow.ru.po trunk/lcn/ru/po/software-opensuse-org.ru.po Log: Translation update Modified: trunk/lcn/ru/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.ru.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/ru/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.ru.po 2014-11-03 19:00:38 UTC (rev 90704) +++ trunk/lcn/ru/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.ru.po 2014-11-03 20:02:55 UTC (rev 90705) @@ -10,14 +10,15 @@ "Project-Id-Version: RELEASE-NOTES.ru\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: translation(a)suse.de\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 15:57+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-29 23:49+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 23:01+0400\n" "Last-Translator: Alexander Melentev <minton(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Russian <opensuse-translation-ru(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: ru\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<" +"=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" #: xml/release-notes.xml:10(title) @@ -37,13 +38,26 @@ msgstr "13.2" #: xml/release-notes.xml:17(para) -msgid "openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your PC, Laptop or Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, do office work, play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" -msgstr "openSUSE — это свободная операционная система на базе Linux для Вашего ПК, ноутбука или сервера. Вы можете просматривать веб, управлять почтой и фотографиями, выполнять офисную работу, смотреть видео или слушать музыку. Have a lot of fun!" +msgid "" +"openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your PC, Laptop or " +"Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, do office work, " +"play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" +msgstr "" +"openSUSE — это свободная операционная система на базе Linux для Вашего ПК, " +"ноутбука или сервера. Вы можете просматривать веб, управлять почтой и " +"фотографиями, выполнять офисную работу, смотреть видео или слушать музыку. " +"Have a lot of fun!" #. Previous Release Notes #: xml/release-notes.xml:51(para) -msgid "If you upgrade from an older version to this openSUSE release, see previous release notes listed here: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Release_Notes\"/>" -msgstr "Если вы обновляетесь с более старой версии до этого выпуска openSUSE, см. предыдущие примечания здесь: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Release_Notes\"/>" +msgid "" +"If you upgrade from an older version to this openSUSE release, see previous " +"release notes listed here: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Releas" +"e_Notes\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Если вы обновляетесь с более старой версии до этого выпуска openSUSE, см. " +"предыдущие примечания здесь: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Rele" +"ase_Notes\"/>" #: xml/release-notes.xml:90(title) msgid "Installation" @@ -55,11 +69,17 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:103(para) -msgid "The Live CD installer presents a problem related with the keyboard settings. If the user changes from the QWERTY keyboard layout (the default en-US variant), this setting will not be properly applied, and the new system will stay with a QWERTY pre-configuration." +msgid "" +"The Live CD installer presents a problem related with the keyboard settings. " +"If the user changes from the QWERTY keyboard layout (the default en-US " +"variant), this setting will not be properly applied, and the new system will " +"stay with a QWERTY pre-configuration." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:109(para) -msgid "As a workaround, use the <command>localectl</command> command-line tool after the installation. For example (to install a German keyboard layout):" +msgid "" +"As a workaround, use the <command>localectl</command> command-line tool after " +"the installation. For example (to install a German keyboard layout):" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:115(screen) @@ -77,7 +97,10 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:124(para) -msgid "After updating from 13.1 to 13.2 using YaST, there are good chances that the new Wicked network method is running together with the old NetworkManager, if you are using a laptop with a wifi connection." +msgid "" +"After updating from 13.1 to 13.2 using YaST, there are good chances that the " +"new Wicked network method is running together with the old NetworkManager, if " +"you are using a laptop with a wifi connection." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:130(para) @@ -87,8 +110,10 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:134(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "" -"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop network.service\n" -"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop wickedd.service\n" +"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop " +"network.service\n" +"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop " +"wickedd.service\n" "systemctl disable wicked.service\n" "systemctl --force enable NetworkManager.service\n" "systemctl start network.service" @@ -97,7 +122,8 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:140(para) #, fuzzy #| msgid "To query the currently selected service, use:" -msgid "Then check whether the currently selected service is actually NetworkManager:" +msgid "" +"Then check whether the currently selected service is actually NetworkManager:" msgstr "Для опроса выбранной в данный момент сетевой службы:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:145(screen) @@ -116,35 +142,53 @@ msgstr "Получение обновлений" #: xml/release-notes.xml:153(para) -msgid "Or reboot after the <command>systemctl</command> commands to restart also <command>wpa_suplicant</command>." +msgid "" +"Or reboot after the <command>systemctl</command> commands to restart also <" +"command>wpa_suplicant</command>." msgstr "" #. bnc#898023 #: xml/release-notes.xml:161(title) msgid "Warning: No Location for Bootloader Stage1 Selected" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ВНИМАНИЕ: Не выбрано расположение для stage1 загрузчика" #: xml/release-notes.xml:162(para) -msgid "During the initial installation, in the summary view of YaST, a warning as follows can appear bellow the bootloader section: <quote>Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please select above location.</quote>" +msgid "" +"During the initial installation, in the summary view of YaST, a warning as " +"follows can appear bellow the bootloader section: <quote>Warning: No location " +"for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please " +"select above location.</quote>" msgstr "" +"Во время установки на экране обзора YaST в разделе загрузчика может появиться " +"следующее предупреждение: <quote>ВНИМАНИЕ: Не выбрано расположение для stage1 " +"загрузчика. Если только вы не полностью уверены в том, что делаете, выберите " +"расположение выше.</quote>" #: xml/release-notes.xml:168(para) -msgid "This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely ignore it." +msgid "" +"This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely " +"ignore it." msgstr "" +"Это предупреждение является ошибкой в YaST (уже исправлено в Factory) и вы " +"можете его проигнорировать." #. bnc#900954 #: xml/release-notes.xml:175(title) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Start Windows" msgid "BtrFS and Windows 7" -msgstr "Запустить Windows" +msgstr "BtrFS и Windows 7" #: xml/release-notes.xml:176(para) -msgid "If you have Windows XP and you want to install openSUSE 13.2 with Btrfs, an error message in YaST will inform you about problems during the bootloader installation." +msgid "" +"If you have Windows XP and you want to install openSUSE 13.2 with Btrfs, an " +"error message in YaST will inform you about problems during the bootloader " +"installation." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:181(para) -msgid "The safest option is to install in a partition with Ext4 instead of BtrFS. There is a fix that will reach Factory soon, but will be not present for 13.2." +msgid "" +"The safest option is to install in a partition with Ext4 instead of BtrFS. " +"There is a fix that will reach Factory soon, but will be not present for 13.2." msgstr "" #. bnc#897847 @@ -153,7 +197,11 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:190(para) -msgid "A bug in YaST prevents the branding in GRUB2 bootloader when installed from the LiveCD medium. Note, the preferred way to install openSUSE 13.2 is using the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader during the installation." +msgid "" +"A bug in YaST prevents the branding in GRUB2 bootloader when installed from " +"the LiveCD medium. Note, the preferred way to install openSUSE 13.2 is using " +"the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader " +"during the installation." msgstr "" # dialog title for ftp installation @@ -165,7 +213,10 @@ msgstr "Установка по FTP" #: xml/release-notes.xml:201(para) -msgid "Performing the NET install using Wifi presents some problems in YaST. Fixing this is work in progress and will be soon available. Meanwhile the only option is to use a wire connection to complete the NET installation." +msgid "" +"Performing the NET install using Wifi presents some problems in YaST. Fixing " +"this is work in progress and will be soon available. Meanwhile the only " +"option is to use a wire connection to complete the NET installation." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:210(title) @@ -177,16 +228,43 @@ msgstr "UEFI — Unified Extensible Firmware Interface" #: xml/release-notes.xml:280(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Prior to installing openSUSE on a system that boots using UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) you are urgently advised to check for any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends and, if available, to install such an update. A pre-installed Windows 8 is a strong indication that your system boots using UEFI." -msgid "Prior to installing openSUSE on a system that boots using UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), you are urgently advised to check for any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends and, if available, to install such an update. A pre-installed Windows 8 is a strong indication that your system boots using UEFI." -msgstr "Перед установкой openSUSE на систему, загружающуюся с помощью UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), вам настоятельно рекомендуется проверить наличие обновлений прошивки, рекомендованных производителем, и в случае их существования установить такие обновления. Предустановленная Windows 8 является верным признаком того, что ваша система использует UEFI." +msgid "" +"Prior to installing openSUSE on a system that boots using UEFI (Unified " +"Extensible Firmware Interface), you are urgently advised to check for any " +"firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends and, if available, to install " +"such an update. A pre-installed Windows 8 is a strong indication that your " +"system boots using UEFI." +msgstr "" +"Перед установкой openSUSE на систему, загружающуюся с помощью UEFI (Unified " +"Extensible Firmware Interface), вам настоятельно рекомендуется проверить " +"наличие обновлений прошивки, рекомендованных производителем, и в случае их " +"существования установить такие обновления. Предустановленная Windows 8 " +"является верным признаком того, что ваша система использует UEFI." #: xml/release-notes.xml:288(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "<emphasis>Background:</emphasis> Some UEFI firmware has bugs that cause it to break if too much data gets written to the UEFI storage area. Nobody really knows how much \"too much\" is, though. openSUSE minimizes the risk by not writing more than the bare minimum required to boot the OS. The minimum means telling the UEFI firmware about the location of the openSUSE boot loader. Upstream Linux Kernel features that use the UEFI storage area for storing boot and crash information (<literal>pstore</literal>) have been disabled by default. Nevertheless it is recommended to install any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends." -msgid "<emphasis>Background:</emphasis> Some UEFI firmware has bugs that cause it to break if too much data gets written to the UEFI storage area. Nobody really knows how much \"too much\" is, though. openSUSE minimizes the risk by not writing more than the bare minimum required to boot the OS. The minimum means telling the UEFI firmware about the location of the openSUSE boot loader. Upstream Linux Kernel features that use the UEFI storage area for storing boot and crash information (<literal>pstore</literal>) have been disabled by default. Nevertheless, it is recommended to install any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends." -msgstr "<emphasis>Обоснование:</emphasis> Некоторые прошивки UEFI содержат ошибки, приводящие к сбою в случае записи большого объёма данных в область хранения UEFI. Что характерно, никто точно не знает, насколько «большой» объём приводит к такому сбою. openSUSE минимизирует этот риск, записывая минимальный объём данных, необходимых для загрузки ОС. Под минимальным понимается указание прошивке UEFI на расположение загрузчика openSUSE. Специальные возможности ядра Linux, использующие область хранения UEFI для сведений о загрузках и сбоях (<literal>pstore</literal>), по умолчанию от� �лючены. Тем не менее, рекомендуется установить все рекомендованные производителем обновления прошивки." +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Background:</emphasis> Some UEFI firmware has bugs that cause it to " +"break if too much data gets written to the UEFI storage area. Nobody really " +"knows how much \"too much\" is, though. openSUSE minimizes the risk by not " +"writing more than the bare minimum required to boot the OS. The minimum means " +"telling the UEFI firmware about the location of the openSUSE boot loader. " +"Upstream Linux Kernel features that use the UEFI storage area for storing " +"boot and crash information (<literal>pstore</literal>) have been disabled by " +"default. Nevertheless, it is recommended to install any firmware updates the " +"hardware vendor recommends." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Обоснование:</emphasis> Некоторые прошивки UEFI содержат ошибки, " +"приводящие к сбою в случае записи большого объёма данных в область хранения " +"UEFI. Что характерно, никто точно не знает, насколько «большой» объём " +"приводит к такому сбою. openSUSE минимизирует этот риск, записывая " +"минимальный объём данных, необходимых для загрузки ОС. Под минимальным " +"понимается указание прошивке UEFI на расположение загрузчика openSUSE. " +"Специальные возможности ядра Linux, использующие область хранения UEFI для " +"сведений о загрузках и сбоях (<literal>pstore</literal>), по умолчанию " +"отключены. Тем не менее, рекомендуется установить все рекомендованные " +"производителем обновления прошивки." #. bnc#850056 #: xml/release-notes.xml:305(title) @@ -194,24 +272,54 @@ msgstr "UEFI, GPT и разделы MS-DOS" #: xml/release-notes.xml:306(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Together with the EFI/UEFI specification a new style of partitioning arrived: GPT (GUID Partition Table). This new schema uses globally unique identifiers (128-bit values displayed in 32 hexadecimal digits) to identify devices and partition types." -msgid "Together with the EFI/UEFI specification, a new style of partitioning arrived: GPT (GUID Partition Table). This new schema uses globally unique identifiers (128-bit values displayed in 32 hexadecimal digits) to identify devices and partition types." -msgstr "Вместе со спецификацией EFI/UEFI применяется новый способ разметки: GPT (GUID Partition Table). Он использует глобально уникальные идентификаторы (128-битные значения в виде 32 шестнадцатеричных цифр) для определения устройств и типов разделов." +msgid "" +"Together with the EFI/UEFI specification, a new style of partitioning " +"arrived: GPT (GUID Partition Table). This new schema uses globally unique " +"identifiers (128-bit values displayed in 32 hexadecimal digits) to identify " +"devices and partition types." +msgstr "" +"Вместе со спецификацией EFI/UEFI применяется новый способ разметки: GPT (GUID " +"Partition Table). Он использует глобально уникальные идентификаторы " +"(128-битные значения в виде 32 шестнадцатеричных цифр) для определения " +"устройств и типов разделов." #: xml/release-notes.xml:312(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Additionally, the UEFI specification also allows legacy MBR (MS-DOS) partitions. The Linux boot loaders (ELILO or GRUB2) try to generate automatically a GUID for those legacy partitions, and write them to the firmware. Such a GUID can change frequently, causing a rewrite in the firmware. A rewrite consist of two different operation: removing the old entry and creating a new entry that replaces the first one." -msgid "Additionally, the UEFI specification also allows legacy MBR (MS-DOS) partitions. The Linux boot loaders (ELILO or GRUB2) try to automatically generate a GUID for those legacy partitions, and write them to the firmware. Such a GUID can change frequently, causing a rewrite in the firmware. A rewrite consist of two different operation: removing the old entry and creating a new entry that replaces the first one." -msgstr "Кроме этого, спецификация UEFI разрешает использование устаревших разделов MBR (MS-DOS). Загрузчики Linux (ELILO или GRUB2) пытаются автоматически создать GUID для таких разделов и сохранить изменения в прошивке. Такие GUID могут часто изменяться, что приводит к перезаписи данных прошивки. Перезапись состоит из двух разных действий: удаления старой записи и создания новой записи на замену старой." +msgid "" +"Additionally, the UEFI specification also allows legacy MBR (MS-DOS) " +"partitions. The Linux boot loaders (ELILO or GRUB2) try to automatically " +"generate a GUID for those legacy partitions, and write them to the firmware. " +"Such a GUID can change frequently, causing a rewrite in the firmware. A " +"rewrite consist of two different operation: removing the old entry and " +"creating a new entry that replaces the first one." +msgstr "" +"Кроме этого, спецификация UEFI разрешает использование устаревших разделов " +"MBR (MS-DOS). Загрузчики Linux (ELILO или GRUB2) пытаются автоматически " +"создать GUID для таких разделов и сохранить изменения в прошивке. Такие GUID " +"могут часто изменяться, что приводит к перезаписи данных прошивки. Перезапись " +"состоит из двух разных действий: удаления старой записи и создания новой " +"записи на замену старой." #: xml/release-notes.xml:321(para) -msgid "Modern firmware has a garbage collector that collects deleted entries and frees the memory reserved for old entries. A problem arises when faulty firmware does not collect and free those entries; this may end up with a non-bootable system." -msgstr "В современных прошивках есть сборщик мусора, собирающий удалённые записи и освобождающий память, зарезервированную под старые записи. Проблема возникает в случае, когда глючная прошивка не освобождает такие записи; это может привести к невозможности загрузки системы." +msgid "" +"Modern firmware has a garbage collector that collects deleted entries and " +"frees the memory reserved for old entries. A problem arises when faulty " +"firmware does not collect and free those entries; this may end up with a " +"non-bootable system." +msgstr "" +"В современных прошивках есть сборщик мусора, собирающий удалённые записи и " +"освобождающий память, зарезервированную под старые записи. Проблема возникает " +"в случае, когда глючная прошивка не освобождает такие записи; это может " +"привести к невозможности загрузки системы." #: xml/release-notes.xml:327(para) -msgid "The workaround is simple: convert the legacy MBR partition to the new GPT to avoid this problem completely." -msgstr "Обходной путь очень прост: конвертируйте устаревший раздел MBR в новый GPT, чтобы полностью избежать подобных проблем." +msgid "" +"The workaround is simple: convert the legacy MBR partition to the new GPT to " +"avoid this problem completely." +msgstr "" +"Обходной путь очень прост: конвертируйте устаревший раздел MBR в новый GPT, " +"чтобы полностью избежать подобных проблем." #. bnc#850052 #: xml/release-notes.xml:335(title) @@ -220,13 +328,24 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:336(para) msgid "This only affects machines in UEFI mode with secure boot enabled." -msgstr "Это касается только машин с UEFI и включённым режимом безопасной загрузки." +msgstr "" +"Это касается только машин с UEFI и включённым режимом безопасной загрузки." #: xml/release-notes.xml:339(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "The new version of the shim loader allows more machines to boot with Secure Boot enabled than with openSUSE 12.3. Nevertheless, in case of trouble, first update the BIOS of your machine to the latest version. If the BIOS update does not help, report the model of your machine it the wiki (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Then we can track it for the next release." -msgid "The new version of the shim loader allows more machines to boot with Secure Boot enabled than with openSUSE 13.1. Nevertheless, in case of trouble, first update the BIOS of your machine to the latest version. If the BIOS update does not help, report the model of your machine to the wiki (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Then we can track it for the next release." -msgstr "Новая версия shim позволяет загрузиться с включённым Secure Boot большему числу машин, чем в openSUSE 12.3. Тем не менее, в случае проблем сначала обновите BIOS до последней версии. Если обновление BIOS не помогает, сообщите модель своей машины на страницу вики (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Таким образом мы сможем отследить это перед следующим выпуском." +msgid "" +"The new version of the shim loader allows more machines to boot with Secure " +"Boot enabled than with openSUSE 13.1. Nevertheless, in case of trouble, first " +"update the BIOS of your machine to the latest version. If the BIOS update " +"does not help, report the model of your machine to the wiki " +"(http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Then we can track it for the next " +"release." +msgstr "" +"Новая версия shim позволяет загрузиться с включённым Secure Boot большему " +"числу машин, чем в openSUSE 13.1. Тем не менее, в случае проблем сначала " +"обновите BIOS до последней версии. Если обновление BIOS не помогает, сообщите " +"модель своей машины на страницу вики (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) " +"Таким образом мы сможем отследить это перед следующим выпуском." #: xml/release-notes.xml:352(title) msgid "System Upgrade" @@ -242,19 +361,47 @@ msgstr "Артефакты на экране во время установки с драйвером nouveau" #: xml/release-notes.xml:364(para) -msgid "On some systems with NVIDIA cards, the installer may show garbage on the top part of the screen due to problems with the default nouveau driver. If you are affected by this problem, you can disable the nouveau kernel module to run the installer and then enable it again once the system is installed or upgraded." -msgstr "На некоторых системах с картами NVIDIA установщик может показывать артефакты в верхней части экрана из-за проблем с драйвером nouveau. Если вы заметили такую проблему, отключите модуль ядра nouveau перед запуском установщика, а потом включите снова после установки/обновления." +msgid "" +"On some systems with NVIDIA cards, the installer may show garbage on the top " +"part of the screen due to problems with the default nouveau driver. If you " +"are affected by this problem, you can disable the nouveau kernel module to " +"run the installer and then enable it again once the system is installed or " +"upgraded." +msgstr "" +"На некоторых системах с картами NVIDIA установщик может показывать артефакты " +"в верхней части экрана из-за проблем с драйвером nouveau. Если вы заметили " +"такую проблему, отключите модуль ядра nouveau перед запуском установщика, а " +"потом включите снова после установки/обновления." #: xml/release-notes.xml:371(para) -msgid "To disable the kernel module, once you boot from the installation media, select the 'Installation' entry in grub and press 'e' to edit the parameters. Then go to the line starting with 'linux' (or 'linuxefi') and add <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> at the end. Now press F10 to continue booting with the new parameter. After the system is installed, you can re-enable the nouveau module by editing <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> and removing the entry that blacklists nouveau." -msgstr "Для отключения модуля ядра при загрузке с установочного носителя выберите в grub пункт «Installation» («Установка») и нажмите «e» для редактирования параметров. Затем перейдите на строку, начинающуюся с «linux» (или «linuxefi»), и добавьте в конце <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal>. Теперь нажмите F10, чтобы продолжить загрузку с новым параметром. После установки системы вы можете включить модуль nouveau обратно, отредактировав <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> и удалив запись про nouveau." +msgid "" +"To disable the kernel module, once you boot from the installation media, " +"select the 'Installation' entry in grub and press 'e' to edit the parameters. " +"Then go to the line starting with 'linux' (or 'linuxefi') and add <literal>" +"brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> at the end. Now press F10 to continue booting " +"with the new parameter. After the system is installed, you can re-enable the " +"nouveau module by editing <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filenam" +"e> and removing the entry that blacklists nouveau." +msgstr "" +"Для отключения модуля ядра при загрузке с установочного носителя выберите в " +"grub пункт «Installation» («Установка») и нажмите «e» для редактирования " +"параметров. Затем перейдите на строку, начинающуюся с «linux» (или " +"«linuxefi»), и добавьте в конце <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal>. " +"Теперь нажмите F10, чтобы продолжить загрузку с новым параметром. После " +"установки системы вы можете включить модуль nouveau обратно, отредактировав <" +"filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> и удалив запись про " +"nouveau." #: xml/release-notes.xml:384(title) msgid "Information About the FGLRX Driver" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:385(para) -msgid "For more information about the AMD FGLRX drivers in openSUSE 13.2 and its status, see <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…</ulink>." +msgid "" +"For more information about the AMD FGLRX drivers in openSUSE 13.2 and its " +"status, see <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning" +"-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/\">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-war" +"ning-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/</ulink>." msgstr "" #. bnc#899610 @@ -263,11 +410,19 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:395(para) -msgid "If you see two mouse pointers and have two graphic boards, where one is an Intel board, try uninstalling <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem> and thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse pointer." +msgid "" +"If you see two mouse pointers and have two graphic boards, where one is an " +"Intel board, try uninstalling <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem> and " +"thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse " +"pointer." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:402(para) -msgid "This and other issues with the Intel driver like (see <ulink url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." +msgid "" +"This and other issues with the Intel driver like (see <ulink " +"url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">" +"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked " +"on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." msgstr "" #. bnc#901869 @@ -276,11 +431,16 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:412(para) -msgid "If you find a problem executing virt-manager, try installing <systemitem>typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0</systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." +msgid "" +"If you find a problem executing virt-manager, try installing <systemitem>" +"typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0<" +"/systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:418(para) -msgid "In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made explicit." +msgid "" +"In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made " +"explicit." msgstr "" #. bnc#900813 @@ -291,11 +451,16 @@ msgstr "Без авторизации" #: xml/release-notes.xml:426(para) -msgid "openSUSE 13.2 is a more strict in security tha 13.1. If you are connected via a UMTS or 3G modem and you suspend the machine, the system will ask you for the root password before reconnecting." +msgid "" +"openSUSE 13.2 is a more strict in security tha 13.1. If you are connected via " +"a UMTS or 3G modem and you suspend the machine, the system will ask you for " +"the root password before reconnecting." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:432(para) -msgid "You can change this behavior changing a line in /etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" +msgid "" +"You can change this behavior changing a line in " +"/etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:437(screen) @@ -324,7 +489,9 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:453(para) -msgid "The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" +msgid "" +"The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you " +"are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:459(screen) @@ -338,7 +505,10 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:466(para) -msgid "Mounting cifs shares at systems start via <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab</filename> has been discontinued and obsoleted. Now the generic <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> handles it." +msgid "" +"Mounting cifs shares at systems start via <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab<" +"/filename> has been discontinued and obsoleted. Now the generic <filename>" +"/etc/fstab</filename> handles it." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:472(para) @@ -346,15 +516,22 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:477(para) -msgid "Append all your mount points from <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave</filename> to <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgid "" +"Append all your mount points from <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave<" +"/filename> to <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:484(para) -msgid "Add <literal>0 0</literal> to the end of each new cifs mount line in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgid "" +"Add <literal>0 0</literal> to the end of each new cifs mount line in <" +"filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:491(para) -msgid "For more information and examples, see <filename>/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in the installed system." +msgid "" +"For more information and examples, see <filename>" +"/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in the " +"installed system." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:499(title) @@ -362,12 +539,16 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:500(para) -msgid "If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, remove it from the user cache manually:" +msgid "" +"If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, " +"remove it from the user cache manually:" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:505(screen) #, no-wrap -msgid "rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/contents/images/*" +msgid "" +"rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/cont" +"ents/images/*" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:509(title) @@ -375,11 +556,17 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:511(para) -msgid "The MATE desktop is now officially available under openSUSE 13.2 with MATE version 1.8.1, the latest stable release. It provides an intuitive and attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and other Unix-like operating systems." +msgid "" +"The MATE desktop is now officially available under openSUSE 13.2 with MATE " +"version 1.8.1, the latest stable release. It provides an intuitive and " +"attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and " +"other Unix-like operating systems." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:517(para) -msgid "The objective, for openSUSE, is to provide the same experience users had when they used GNOME under openSUSE 11.4, with the main-menu and the Sonar theme." +msgid "" +"The objective, for openSUSE, is to provide the same experience users had when " +"they used GNOME under openSUSE 11.4, with the main-menu and the Sonar theme." msgstr "" #. bnc#901013 @@ -388,7 +575,11 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:526(para) -msgid "GNOME autologin can cause a slow boot process. Probably there is a race between services not correctly marked to depend on each other. Until the fix will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable the GNOME autologin feature." +msgid "" +"GNOME autologin can cause a slow boot process. Probably there is a race " +"between services not correctly marked to depend on each other. Until the fix " +"will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable " +"the GNOME autologin feature." msgstr "" #. bnc#850058 @@ -399,8 +590,16 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:564(para) #, fuzzy #| msgid "AppArmor is enabled by default. This means more security, but might prevent services from working, if you run them in unexpected ways. If you encounter strange permission problems, try to switch the AppArmor profile for the affected service to complain mode with:" -msgid "AppArmor is enabled by default. This means more security, but might prevent services from working if you run them in unexpected ways. If you encounter strange permission problems, try to switch the AppArmor profile for the affected service to complain mode with:" -msgstr "AppArmor включён по умолчанию. Это повышает уровень безопасности, но может помешать работе нестандартно запускаемых служб. Если у вас возникают странные проблемы с правами доступа, попробуйте профиль AppArmor для этой службы в щадящий режим:" +msgid "" +"AppArmor is enabled by default. This means more security, but might prevent " +"services from working if you run them in unexpected ways. If you encounter " +"strange permission problems, try to switch the AppArmor profile for the " +"affected service to complain mode with:" +msgstr "" +"AppArmor включён по умолчанию. Это повышает уровень безопасности, но может " +"помешать работе нестандартно запускаемых служб. Если у вас возникают странные " +"проблемы с правами доступа, попробуйте профиль AppArmor для этой службы в " +"щадящий режим:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:567(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -408,14 +607,22 @@ msgstr "aa-complain /usr/bin/$ваша_служба" #: xml/release-notes.xml:568(para) -msgid "Complain mode means: allow everything, and log things that the profile would not allow." -msgstr "Щадящий режим означает: разрешить всё, но вести журнал действий, которые запрещены профилем." +msgid "" +"Complain mode means: allow everything, and log things that the profile would " +"not allow." +msgstr "" +"Щадящий режим означает: разрешить всё, но вести журнал действий, которые " +"запрещены профилем." #: xml/release-notes.xml:569(para) #, fuzzy #| msgid "Even if it helps report it as a bug! We want to fix AppArmor profiles to cover also corner cases." -msgid "Even if it helps, report it as a bug! We want to fix AppArmor profiles to also cover corner cases." -msgstr "Создайте сообщение об ошибке, если это поможет: мы хотим исправить профили AppArmor, чтобы они покрывали и крайние случаи." +msgid "" +"Even if it helps, report it as a bug! We want to fix AppArmor profiles to " +"also cover corner cases." +msgstr "" +"Создайте сообщение об ошибке, если это поможет: мы хотим исправить профили " +"AppArmor, чтобы они покрывали и крайние случаи." #: xml/release-notes.xml:602(title) msgid "Miscellaneous" @@ -427,7 +634,11 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:608(para) -msgid "In the <guimenu>System</guimenu> section of YaST (Qt GUI) the icon <guimenu>Service Manager</guimenu> appears twice. There is a bug in the Qt version of the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in the desktop files." +msgid "" +"In the <guimenu>System</guimenu> section of YaST (Qt GUI) the icon <guimenu>" +"Service Manager</guimenu> appears twice. There is a bug in the Qt version of " +"the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in " +"the desktop files." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:614(para) @@ -444,7 +655,8 @@ msgstr "Читать файлы README на CD." #: xml/release-notes.xml:631(para) -msgid "Get detailed changelog information about a particular package from the RPM:" +msgid "" +"Get detailed changelog information about a particular package from the RPM:" msgstr "Получить подробный журнал изменений конкретного пакета с помощью RPM:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:632(screen) @@ -457,20 +669,34 @@ msgstr "<ИМЯ_ФАЙЛА>. — это имя пакета RPM." #: xml/release-notes.xml:636(para) -msgid "Check the <filename>ChangeLog</filename> file in the top level of the DVD for a chronological log of all changes made to the updated packages." -msgstr "Хронологический журнал всех изменений в обновлённых пакетах приведён в файле <filename>ChangeLog</filename> на верхнем уровне DVD." +msgid "" +"Check the <filename>ChangeLog</filename> file in the top level of the DVD for " +"a chronological log of all changes made to the updated packages." +msgstr "" +"Хронологический журнал всех изменений в обновлённых пакетах приведён в файле " +"<filename>ChangeLog</filename> на верхнем уровне DVD." #: xml/release-notes.xml:640(para) -msgid "Find more information in the <filename>docu</filename> directory on the DVD." -msgstr "Больше сведений вы найдёте в каталоге <filename>docu</filename> на DVD." +msgid "" +"Find more information in the <filename>docu</filename> directory on the DVD." +msgstr "" +"Больше сведений вы найдёте в каталоге <filename>docu</filename> на DVD." #: xml/release-notes.xml:643(para) -msgid "<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> contains additional or updated documentation." -msgstr "Дополнительная и обновлённая документация на сайте <ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/>." +msgid "" +"<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> contains additional or " +"updated documentation." +msgstr "" +"Дополнительная и обновлённая документация на сайте <ulink " +"url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/>." #: xml/release-notes.xml:648(para) -msgid "Visit <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> for the latest product news from openSUSE." -msgstr "Последние новости от openSUSE на сайте <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/>." +msgid "" +"Visit <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> for the latest product news " +"from openSUSE." +msgstr "" +"Последние новости от openSUSE на сайте <ulink " +"url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/>." #: xml/release-notes.xml:653(para) msgid "Copyright © 2014 SUSE LLC" @@ -489,7 +715,8 @@ msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Переводчики:\n" -"Александр Мелентьев <minton(a)opensuse.org>, 2008-2013. Отдельная благодарность Илье Барило за контроль качества <http://sourcelocalizer.ru>, 2013" +"Александр Мелентьев <minton(a)opensuse.org>, 2008-2013. Отдельная благодарность " +"Илье Барило за контроль качества <http://sourcelocalizer.ru>, 2013" #~ msgid "N/A" #~ msgstr "N/A" Modified: trunk/lcn/ru/po/opensuse-org.ru.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/ru/po/opensuse-org.ru.po 2014-11-03 19:00:38 UTC (rev 90704) +++ trunk/lcn/ru/po/opensuse-org.ru.po 2014-11-03 20:02:55 UTC (rev 90705) @@ -1,19 +1,20 @@ # Alexander Melentiev <alex239(a)gmail.com>, 2010. -# Alexander Melentiev <minton(a)opensuse.org>, 2011, 2012, 2013. +# Alexander Melentiev <minton(a)opensuse.org>, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014. # Serge Yefimov <denver14(a)gmail.com>, 2011. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-org-theme\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-29 17:26+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-11-12 20:24+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 22:39+0400\n" "Last-Translator: Alexander Melentev <minton(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Russian <opensuse-translation-ru(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: ru\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<" +"=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" #. type: Attribute 'lang' of: <html> @@ -33,8 +34,12 @@ #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><form><div><select> #: en/index.shtml:33 -msgid "<input type=\"hidden\" name=\"language\" value=\"en\" /> <select id=\"searchscope\" name=\"searchscope\">" -msgstr "<input type=\"hidden\" name=\"language\" value=\"ru\" /> <select id=\"searchscope\" name=\"searchscope\">" +msgid "" +"<input type=\"hidden\" name=\"language\" value=\"en\" /> <select " +"id=\"searchscope\" name=\"searchscope\">" +msgstr "" +"<input type=\"hidden\" name=\"language\" value=\"ru\" /> <select " +"id=\"searchscope\" name=\"searchscope\">" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><form><div><select><option> #: en/index.shtml:35 @@ -58,15 +63,25 @@ #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><form><div> #: en/index.shtml:39 -msgid "</select> <input type=\"text\" name=\"searchstring\" class=\"textfield\" /> <input type=\"image\" alt=\"run search\" title=\"run search\" class=\"searchbutton\" src=\"/images/frontpage/magnifier.png\" />" -msgstr "</select> <input type=\"text\" name=\"searchstring\" class=\"textfield\" /> <input type=\"image\" alt=\"run search\" title=\"run search\" class=\"searchbutton\" src=\"/images/frontpage/magnifier.png\" />" +msgid "" +"</select> <input type=\"text\" name=\"searchstring\" class=\"textfield\" /> <" +"input type=\"image\" alt=\"run search\" title=\"run search\" " +"class=\"searchbutton\" src=\"/images/frontpage/magnifier.png\" />" +msgstr "" +"</select> <input type=\"text\" name=\"searchstring\" class=\"textfield\" /> <" +"input type=\"image\" alt=\"run search\" title=\"run search\" " +"class=\"searchbutton\" src=\"/images/frontpage/magnifier.png\" />" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><form> #: en/index.shtml:43 -msgid "<input type=\"submit\" name=\"searchbutton\" class=\"button\" value=\"run search\" />" -msgstr "<input type=\"submit\" name=\"searchbutton\" class=\"button\" value=\"run search\" />" +msgid "" +"<input type=\"submit\" name=\"searchbutton\" class=\"button\" value=\"run " +"search\" />" +msgstr "" +"<input type=\"submit\" name=\"searchbutton\" class=\"button\" value=\"run " +"search\" />" -#. #include virtual="../sponsors.html" +#. #include virtual="../sponsors.html" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div> #: en/index.shtml:46 en/index.shtml:112 en/index.shtml:153 en/index.shtml:186 msgid " " @@ -94,33 +109,71 @@ #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div> #: en/index.shtml:61 -msgid "openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your PC, Laptop or Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, do office work, play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" -msgstr "openSUSE — это свободная операционная система на базе Linux для Вашего ПК, ноутбука или сервера. Вы можете просматривать веб, управлять почтой и фотографиями, выполнять офисную работу, смотреть видео или слушать музыку. Have a lot of fun!" +msgid "" +"openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your " +"PC, Laptop or Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, " +"do office work, play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" +msgstr "" +"openSUSE — это свободная операционная система на базе Linux " +"для Вашего ПК, ноутбука или сервера. Вы можете просматривать веб, управлять " +"почтой и фотографиями, выполнять офисную работу, смотреть видео или слушать " +"музыку. Have a lot of fun!" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><ul><li> #: en/index.shtml:70 -msgid "<a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">   Get it: Download openSUSE or find additional software.   </a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">   Get it: Загрузите openSUSE или дополнительное ПО.   </a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">   <" +"span class=\"buttontext\"> Get it: Download openSUSE or " +"find additional software.   " +"</a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">   <" +"span class=\"buttontext\"> Get it: Загрузите openSUSE или " +"дополнительное ПО.   </a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><ul><li> #: en/index.shtml:80 -msgid "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org\">   Discover it: Learn more about openSUSE with tutorials, documentation, and more!   </a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org\">   Discover it: Узнайте больше об openSUSE с помощью документации и других учебных материалов!   </a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org\">   Discover it: Learn more about " +"openSUSE with tutorials, documentation, and more!   </a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org\">   Discover it: Узнайте больше об " +"openSUSE с помощью документации и других учебных материалов!   </a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><ul><li> #: en/index.shtml:90 -msgid "<a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">   Create it: Build packages for all major Linux distributions with the Build Service.   </a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">   Create it: Создавайте пакеты для всех ключевых дистрибутивов Linux с помощью Build Service.   </a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">   <" +"span class=\"buttontext\"> Create it: Build packages for " +"all major Linux distributions with the Build Service.   </a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">   <" +"span class=\"buttontext\"> Create it: Создавайте пакеты для " +"всех ключевых дистрибутивов Linux с помощью Build Service.   </a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div> #: en/index.shtml:100 -msgid "   " -msgstr "   " +msgid "" +"   " +msgstr "" +"   " #. type: Content of: <html><body><div> #: en/index.shtml:105 -msgid "<a href=\"../screenshots.php\" id=\"toggle_screenshots\">» Screenshots</a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"../screenshots.php\" id=\"toggle_screenshots\">» Снимки экрана</a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"../screenshots.php\" id=\"toggle_screenshots\">» " +"Screenshots</a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"../screenshots.php\" id=\"toggle_screenshots\">» " +"Снимки экрана</a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div><h2> #: en/index.shtml:116 @@ -154,13 +207,23 @@ #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div> #: en/index.shtml:128 -msgid "</a> The <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">forums</a> are the first place to go if you want answers to questions about openSUSE!" -msgstr "</a> <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">Форумы</a> — это первое место, куда следует обратиться, чтобы получить ответы на свои вопросы об openSUSE!" +msgid "" +"</a> The <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">forums</a> are the first " +"place to go if you want answers to questions about openSUSE!" +msgstr "" +"</a> <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">Форумы</a> — это первое место, " +"куда следует обратиться, чтобы получить ответы на свои вопросы об openSUSE!" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div> #: en/index.shtml:133 -msgid "Want to discuss openSUSE, participate in development, or contribute in other ways? Join one of the <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Mailing_lists\">mailing lists</a>." -msgstr "Хотите обсудить openSUSE, помочь в разработке или других областях? Присоединяйтесь к одному из <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Список_доступных_рассылок\">списков рассылки</a>." +msgid "" +"Want to discuss openSUSE, participate in development, or contribute in other " +"ways? Join one of the <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Mailing_lists" +"\">mailing lists</a>." +msgstr "" +"Хотите обсудить openSUSE, помочь в разработке или других областях? " +"Присоединяйтесь к одному из <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Список_д" +"оступных_рассылок\">списков рассылки</a>." #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div><h2> #: en/index.shtml:140 @@ -179,17 +242,25 @@ #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div> #: en/index.shtml:142 -msgid "</a> The <a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/\">shop</a> is the place to find official openSUSE gear. T-shirts, mugs, caps, bags and much more." -msgstr "</a> <a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/\">Магазин</a> — это место, где вы сможете найти товары с символикой openSUSE. Футболки, кружки, кепки, сумки и многое другое." +msgid "" +"</a> The <a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/\">shop</a> is the place to find " +"official openSUSE gear. T-shirts, mugs, caps, bags and much more." +msgstr "" +"</a> <a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/\">Магазин</a> — это место, где вы " +"сможете найти товары с символикой openSUSE. Футболки, кружки, кепки, сумки и " +"многое другое." #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div><ul><li> #: en/index.shtml:148 msgid "<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/shop-us.html\">Shop for Americas</a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/shop-us.html\">Магазин для Америки</a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/shop-us.html\">Магазин для Америки</a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><div><ul><li> #: en/index.shtml:149 -msgid "<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/shop-eu.html\">Shop for Europe & Asia</a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org/shop-eu.html\">Shop for Europe & Asia<" +"/a>" msgstr "<a href=\"http://shop.opensuse.org\">Магазин для Европы и Азии</a>" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><ul><li> @@ -257,7 +328,7 @@ msgid "---" msgstr "---" -#. #include virtual="../languages.html" +#. #include virtual="../languages.html" #. type: Content of: <html><body><div><div><form> #: en/index.shtml:175 msgid "</select>" @@ -286,33 +357,60 @@ #. type: Content of: <h2> #: en/whats_hot.html:1 msgid "openSUSE 13.2: green light to freedom!" -msgstr "" +msgstr "openSUSE 13.2: Зелёный свет свободе!" #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:4 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Dear contributors, friends and fans: <a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=16841\">The release is here</a>! Eight months of planning, packaging, adding features, fixing issues, testing and fixing more issues has brought you the best that Free and Open Source has to offer, with our Green touch: Stable and Awesome." -msgid "Dear contributors, friends and fans: <a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=18707\">openSUSE 13.2 is out</a>! After one year on continuous improvement in the tools and procedures and many hours of developing, packaging, testing and fixing issues a new stable release is here providing the best that Free and Open Source has to offer with our special green touch: stable, innovative and fun!" -msgstr "Уважаемые коллеги, товарищи, соратники: <a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=16841\">Вышла новая версия</a>! Восемь месяцев планов, исправлений, новых пакетов, добавленных возможностей, исправлений, тестирования и исправлений произвели на свет лучшее, что может предложить мир свободного ПО и открытого исходного кода, с нашим фирменным зелёным налётом стабильности и качества." +msgid "" +"Dear contributors, friends and fans: <a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=18" +"707\">openSUSE 13.2 is out</a>! After one year on continuous improvement in " +"the tools and procedures and many hours of developing, packaging, testing and " +"fixing issues a new stable release is here providing the best that Free and " +"Open Source has to offer with our special green touch: stable, innovative and " +"fun!" +msgstr "" +"Уважаемые коллеги, товарищи, соратники: <a " +"href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=18707\">Вышла openSUSE 13.2</a>! Целый " +"год постоянных улучшений инструментов и процедур и множество часов " +"разработки, создания пакетов, тестирования и исправлений произвели на свет " +"новый стабильный выпуск, предоставляющий лучшее, что может предложить мир " +"свободного ПО и открытого исходного кода, с нашим фирменным зелёным налётом " +"стабильности, инноваций и веселья." #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:12 -msgid "This is the first release after the change in the openSUSE development mode, with a much shorter stabilization phase thanks to the extensive testing done in a daily basis in the rolling distribution used now as a base for openSUSE stable releases. The perfect balance between innovation and stability with the great level of freedom of choice that openSUSE users are used to." +msgid "" +"This is the first release after the change in the openSUSE development mode, " +"with a much shorter stabilization phase thanks to the extensive testing done " +"in a daily basis in the rolling distribution used now as a base for openSUSE " +"stable releases. The perfect balance between innovation and stability with " +"the great level of freedom of choice that openSUSE users are used to." msgstr "" +"Это первый выпуск после изменения способа разработки openSUSE, с гораздо " +"более коротким периодом стабилизации благодаря расширенному ежедневному " +"тестированию rolling-дистрибутива, используемого теперь в качестве основы для " +"стабильных выпусков openSUSE. Идеальный баланс между инновациями и " +"стабильностью с высоким уровнем свободы выбора, к которому привыкли " +"пользователи openSUSE." #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:17 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "<a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=16841\">Read more ...</a>" msgid "<a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=18707\">Read more ...</a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=16841\">Читать далее…</a>" +msgstr "<a href=\"https://news.opensuse.org/?p=18707\">Читать далее…</a>" #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:21 -#, fuzzy #| msgid "You can <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Features\">learn what is new</a>, <a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org/131\">download it</a> and <a href=\"http://upgrade.opensuse.org\">upgrade</a>!" -msgid "You can <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Features\">learn what is new</a>, <a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">download it</a> and <a href=\"http://upgrade.opensuse.org\">upgrade</a>!" -msgstr "Вы можете <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Features\">узнать, что нового</a>, <a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org/131\">скачать</a> или <a href=\"http://upgrade.opensuse.org\">обновиться</a>!" +msgid "" +"You can <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Features\">learn what is new</a>, <a " +"href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">download it</a> and <a " +"href=\"http://upgrade.opensuse.org\">upgrade</a>!" +msgstr "" +"Вы можете <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Features\">узнать, что нового</a>, " +"<a href=\"http://software.opensuse.org\">скачать</a> или <a " +"href=\"http://upgrade.opensuse.org\">обновиться</a>!" #. type: Content of: <h2> #: en/whats_hot.html:29 @@ -321,8 +419,17 @@ #. type: Content of: <a> #: en/whats_hot.html:30 -msgid "Keep informed about openSUSE following our <a href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/\">new Google+ page</a><a style=\"text-decoration:none;\" href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/?prsrc=3\">" -msgstr "Будьте в курсе событий мира openSUSE, подписавшись на <a href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/\">английскую</a> и <a href=\"https://plus.google.com/102241590925437493205/\">русскую</a> страницы Google+<a style=\"text-decoration:none;\" href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/?prsrc=3\">" +msgid "" +"Keep informed about openSUSE following our <a " +"href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/\">new Google+ page</a><" +"a style=\"text-decoration:none;\" href=\"https://plus.google.com/1103121418342" +"46266844/?prsrc=3\">" +msgstr "" +"Будьте в курсе событий мира openSUSE, подписавшись на <a " +"href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/\">английскую</a> и <a " +"href=\"https://plus.google.com/102241590925437493205/\">русскую</a> страницы " +"Google+<a style=\"text-decoration:none;\" " +"href=\"https://plus.google.com/110312141834246266844/?prsrc=3\">" #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:30 @@ -336,8 +443,34 @@ #. type: Content of: #: en/whats_hot.html:34 -msgid "Whether you're an experienced Linux developer or an end user just getting started with Linux, there are many ways for you to participate in the openSUSE project. Join a <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">forum</a> to get help or help others with openSUSE, find and <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Submitting_bug_reports\">report bugs</a>, review the <a href=\"http://doc.opensuse.org\">documentation</a>, send your <a href=\"http://features.opensuse.org\">wish list</a> for new packages and features, create and submit <a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">patches</a>, or find other creative ways to contribute. Whatever you do, take a few minutes to discuss openSUSE with other users and become an active member of the openSUSE communities. <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:How_to_participate\">Would you like to know more?</a>" -msgstr "Являетесь ли вы опытным разработчиком Linux или простым пользователем, который только знакомится с Linux, есть много способов для Вас принять участие в проекте openSUSE. Заходите на <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/p-russian/\">форум</a>, чтобы получить помощь или помочь другим с openSUSE, находите ошибки и <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Сообщить_об_ошибке\">сообщайте о них</a>, изучайте <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация\">документацию</a>, присылайте <a href=\"http://features.opensuse.org\">пожелания</a> новых пакетов и возможностей, создавайте и отправляйте <a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">патчи</a> или найдит е другие способы помочь проекту и внести свой вклад. Чем бы Вы не занимались, найдите пару минут, чтобы обсудить openSUSE с другими пользователями и стать активным членом сообщества openSUSE. <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Как_принять_участие\">Хотите знать больше?</a>" +msgid "" +"Whether you're an experienced Linux developer or an end user just getting " +"started with Linux, there are many ways for you to participate in the " +"openSUSE project. Join a <a href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/\">forum</a> to " +"get help or help others with openSUSE, find and <a " +"href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Submitting_bug_reports\">report bugs<" +"/a>, review the <a href=\"http://doc.opensuse.org\">documentation</a>, send " +"your <a href=\"http://features.opensuse.org\">wish list</a> for new packages " +"and features, create and submit <a href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">" +"patches</a>, or find other creative ways to contribute. Whatever you do, " +"take a few minutes to discuss openSUSE with other users and become an active " +"member of the openSUSE communities. <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:H" +"ow_to_participate\">Would you like to know more?</a>" +msgstr "" +"Являетесь ли вы опытным разработчиком Linux или простым пользователем, " +"который только знакомится с Linux, есть много способов для Вас принять " +"участие в проекте openSUSE. Заходите на <a " +"href=\"http://forums.opensuse.org/p-russian/\">форум</a>, чтобы получить " +"помощь или помочь другим с openSUSE, находите ошибки и <a " +"href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Сообщить_об_ошибке\">сообщайте о них<" +"/a>, изучайте <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация\">" +"документацию</a>, присылайте <a href=\"http://features.opensuse.org\">" +"пожелания</a> новых пакетов и возможностей, создавайте и отправляйте <a " +"href=\"http://build.opensuse.org\">патчи</a> или найдите другие способы " +"помочь проекту и внести свой вклад. Чем бы Вы не занимались, найдите пару " +"минут, чтобы обсудить openSUSE с другими пользователями и стать активным " +"членом сообщества openSUSE. <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Как_принят" +"ь_участие\">Хотите знать больше?</a>" #~ msgid "openSUSE 13.1: Ready For Action!" #~ msgstr "openSUSE 13.1: Готова к действию!" Modified: trunk/lcn/ru/po/slideshow.ru.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/ru/po/slideshow.ru.po 2014-11-03 19:00:38 UTC (rev 90704) +++ trunk/lcn/ru/po/slideshow.ru.po 2014-11-03 20:02:55 UTC (rev 90705) @@ -11,14 +11,15 @@ "Project-Id-Version: slideshow.ru\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: translation(a)suse.de\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-10-28 11:14+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-06 19:10+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 22:52+0400\n" "Last-Translator: Alexander Melentev <minton(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Russian <opensuse-translation-ru(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: ru\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<" +"=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:14(title) @@ -30,139 +31,343 @@ msgstr "Добро пожаловать в openSUSE™!" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:19(para) -msgid "Whether you use your computer to communicate with friends, family, or colleagues; to manage and enjoy your pictures and music; to browse the Internet for the latest news or for fun; to write a report or budget; or to host a personal Web site or home network, you will find everything you need in openSUSE 13.2." -msgstr "Используете ли вы ваш компьютер для связи с друзьями, родственниками или коллегами, для управления коллекциями фотографий и музыки, путешествуете ли в интернете в поисках последних новостей или информации, составляете ли отчёт или финансовую смету, содержите ли личный веб-сайт или домашнюю сеть, вы найдете всё, что вам нужно, в openSUSE 13.2." +msgid "" +"Whether you use your computer to communicate with friends, family, or " +"colleagues; to manage and enjoy your pictures and music; to browse the " +"Internet for the latest news or for fun; to write a report or budget; or to " +"host a personal Web site or home network, you will find everything you need " +"in openSUSE 13.2." +msgstr "" +"Используете ли вы ваш компьютер для связи с друзьями, родственниками или " +"коллегами, для управления коллекциями фотографий и музыки, путешествуете ли в " +"интернете в поисках последних новостей или информации, составляете ли отчёт " +"или финансовую смету, содержите ли личный веб-сайт или домашнюю сеть, вы " +"найдете всё, что вам нужно, в openSUSE 13.2." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:29(title) msgid "openSUSE.org" msgstr "openSUSE.org" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:31(para) -msgid "openSUSE is a community project created and sponsored by SUSE to deliver the world's most user-friendly computing platform. Many people from around the world contribute to the openSUSE Project by packaging software, testing programs, writing documentation, and translating components into dozens of languages. All of that work is available for free in the openSUSE Linux distribution available at www.opensuse.org." -msgstr "openSUSE — это проект сообщества по созданию наиболее дружественной к пользователю вычислительной платформы, созданный и поддерживаемый SUSE. Многие люди со всего мира вносят вклад в проект openSUSE, собирая пакеты, участвуя в тестировании программ, написании документации и переводе компонентов на десятки языков. Вся их работа свободно доступна в дистрибутиве openSUSE Linux, доступном по адресу www.opensuse.org." +msgid "" +"openSUSE is a community project created and sponsored by SUSE to deliver the " +"world's most user-friendly computing platform. Many people from around the " +"world contribute to the openSUSE Project by packaging software, testing " +"programs, writing documentation, and translating components into dozens of " +"languages. All of that work is available for free in the openSUSE Linux " +"distribution available at www.opensuse.org." +msgstr "" +"openSUSE — это проект сообщества по созданию наиболее дружественной к " +"пользователю вычислительной платформы, созданный и поддерживаемый SUSE. " +"Многие люди со всего мира вносят вклад в проект openSUSE, собирая пакеты, " +"участвуя в тестировании программ, написании документации и переводе " +"компонентов на десятки языков. Вся их работа свободно доступна в дистрибутиве " +"openSUSE Linux, доступном по адресу www.opensuse.org." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:39(para) -msgid "Visit www.opensuse.org/How_to_Participate to learn how you can join the openSUSE community." -msgstr "Посетите www.opensuse.org/How_to_Participate, чтобы узнать, как можно присоединиться к сообществу openSUSE." +msgid "" +"Visit www.opensuse.org/How_to_Participate to learn how you can join the " +"openSUSE community." +msgstr "" +"Посетите www.opensuse.org/How_to_Participate, чтобы узнать, как можно " +"присоединиться к сообществу openSUSE." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:44(title) msgid "openSUSE in Many Languages" msgstr "openSUSE на многих языках" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:46(para) -msgid "The openSUSE distribution is available in many languages. Localization for openSUSE software occurs through the efforts of our hard-working, community-driven language teams. Thank you to all of our contributors. Find the localization portal at: http://i18n.opensuse.org/" -msgstr "Дистрибутив openSUSE переведён на многие языки. Перевод программного обеспечения для openSUSE осуществляется силами сообщества. Спасибо всем, кто принимает в этом участие. Портал локализации находится по адресу http://i18n.opensuse.org/, сообщения об ошибках в русском переводе принимаются на http://bugzilla.suse.ru" +msgid "" +"The openSUSE distribution is available in many languages. Localization for " +"openSUSE software occurs through the efforts of our hard-working, " +"community-driven language teams. Thank you to all of our contributors. Find " +"the localization portal at: http://i18n.opensuse.org/" +msgstr "" +"Дистрибутив openSUSE переведён на многие языки. Перевод программного " +"обеспечения для openSUSE осуществляется силами сообщества. Спасибо всем, кто " +"принимает в этом участие. Портал локализации находится по адресу " +"http://i18n.opensuse.org/, сообщения об ошибках в русском переводе " +"принимаются на http://bugzilla.suse.ru" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:55(title) msgid "Connect and Communicate" msgstr "Подключайтесь и общайтесь" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:57(para) -msgid "You can communicate more effectively with openSUSE 13.2 because it provides a complete set of tools for Web browsing and e-mail management — it even includes the newest Voice over IP technology." -msgstr "При помощи openSUSE 13.2 вы можете общаться более эффективно, потому что он предоставляет полный набор средств для обзора интернета и управления электронной почтой — он даже включает новейшие технологии VoIP." +msgid "" +"You can communicate more effectively with openSUSE 13.2 because it provides a " +"complete set of tools for Web browsing and e-mail management — it even " +"includes the newest Voice over IP technology." +msgstr "" +"При помощи openSUSE 13.2 вы можете общаться более эффективно, потому что он " +"предоставляет полный набор средств для обзора интернета и управления " +"электронной почтой — он даже включает новейшие технологии VoIP." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:63(para) -msgid "openSUSE 13.2 includes Mozilla Firefox, one of the best Web browsers in the world. Firefox includes all the features you need to enjoy the Web, including the newest HTML5 technologies. Firefox also boasts lightning-fast performance, and a number of improvements designed to protect your privacy and prevent phishing attacks." -msgstr "openSUSE 13.2 включает Mozilla Firefox, один из лучших веб-браузеров в мире. Firefox включает все возможности, необходимые вам, чтобы наслаждаться веб, включая новейшие технологии HTML5. Firefox может также похвастаться молниеносным быстродействием и большим числом улучшений, созданных для защиты вашей конфиденциальности и предотвращения фишинговых атак." +msgid "" +"openSUSE 13.2 includes Mozilla Firefox, one of the best Web browsers in the " +"world. Firefox includes all the features you need to enjoy the Web, including " +"the newest HTML5 technologies. Firefox also boasts lightning-fast " +"performance, and a number of improvements designed to protect your privacy " +"and prevent phishing attacks." +msgstr "" +"openSUSE 13.2 включает Mozilla Firefox, один из лучших веб-браузеров в мире. " +"Firefox включает все возможности, необходимые вам, чтобы наслаждаться веб, " +"включая новейшие технологии HTML5. Firefox может также похвастаться " +"молниеносным быстродействием и большим числом улучшений, созданных для защиты " +"вашей конфиденциальности и предотвращения фишинговых атак." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:69(para) -msgid "Also included with openSUSE 13.2 are Evolution and Kontact, complete e-mail and contact management applications. For instant messaging, openSUSE features easy to use IM clients that support all of the popular protocols: AIM, Facebook, Google Talk, Jabber, MSN, Yahoo!, Groupwise, and many others." -msgstr "Кроме того, в состав openSUSE 13.2 включены Evolution и Kontact, полноценные приложения для управления электронной почтой и контактами. Для мгновенного обмена сообщениями openSUSE имеет в наличии простые в использовании IM-клиенты, которые поддерживают все популярные протоколы: AIM, Facebook, Google Talk, Jabber, MSN, Yahoo!, Groupwise и многие другие." +msgid "" +"Also included with openSUSE 13.2 are Evolution and Kontact, complete e-mail " +"and contact management applications. For instant messaging, openSUSE features " +"easy to use IM clients that support all of the popular protocols: AIM, " +"Facebook, Google Talk, Jabber, MSN, Yahoo!, Groupwise, and many others." +msgstr "" +"Кроме того, в состав openSUSE 13.2 включены Evolution и Kontact, полноценные " +"приложения для управления электронной почтой и контактами. Для мгновенного " +"обмена сообщениями openSUSE имеет в наличии простые в использовании " +"IM-клиенты, которые поддерживают все популярные протоколы: AIM, Facebook, " +"Google Talk, Jabber, MSN, Yahoo!, Groupwise и многие другие." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:78(title) msgid "Create, View and Listen" msgstr "Создавайте, смотрите и слушайте" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:79(para) -msgid "Download tunes from the Internet. Rip CDs to create your own customized music library. Listen to your playlist online. Burn CDs or DVDs. Copy your files to an iPod or media player and take your music anywhere. Manage and edit digital pictures with powerful graphics editors. It's all easy with openSUSE 13.2." -msgstr "Загружайте мелодии из интернета. Копируйте музыку с компакт-дисков, чтобы создать свою собственную музыкальную библиотеку. Прослушивайте ваш плейлист по сети. Записывайте компакт-диски или диски DVD. Копируйте ваши файлы на iPod или проигрыватель мультимедиа, возьмите музыку в дорогу. Управляйте вашими цифровыми фотографиями и редактируйте их с помощью мощных графических редакторов. Всё это легко с openSUSE 13.2." +msgid "" +"Download tunes from the Internet. Rip CDs to create your own customized music " +"library. Listen to your playlist online. Burn CDs or DVDs. Copy your files to " +"an iPod or media player and take your music anywhere. Manage and edit digital " +"pictures with powerful graphics editors. It's all easy with openSUSE 13.2." +msgstr "" +"Загружайте мелодии из интернета. Копируйте музыку с компакт-дисков, чтобы " +"создать свою собственную музыкальную библиотеку. Прослушивайте ваш плейлист " +"по сети. Записывайте компакт-диски или диски DVD. Копируйте ваши файлы на " +"iPod или проигрыватель мультимедиа, возьмите музыку в дорогу. Управляйте " +"вашими цифровыми фотографиями и редактируйте их с помощью мощных графических " +"редакторов. Всё это легко с openSUSE 13.2." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:89(title) msgid "Documents, Spreadsheets and More" msgstr "Документы, электронные таблицы и многое другое" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:91(para) -msgid "The openSUSE 13.2 distribution comes complete with the latest version of the leading Linux productivity suite, LibreOffice. It features a word processor, spreadsheet application, HTML editor, presentation designer, and database manager. It reads and writes multiple formats—including Microsoft Office formats—so you can move back and forth easily between openSUSE and popular non-Linux productivity software. LibreOffice is the perfect choice for reports, papers, home budgets, simple graphics and more." -msgstr "В составе дистрибутива openSUSE 13.2 поставляется последняя версия LibreOffice — ведущего офисного пакета для Linux. В него входят текстовый процессор, приложение для работы с электронными таблицами, редактор HTML, конструктор презентаций и средство управления базами данных. Он может читать и записывать файлы в различных форматах, включая форматы Microsoft Office, так что вы можете легко передавать данные между openSUSE и популярными программами не из Linux. LibreOffice — это идеальный выбор для работы с отчётами, докладами, домашним бюджетом, простой графикой и мног� �м другим." +msgid "" +"The openSUSE 13.2 distribution comes complete with the latest version of the " +"leading Linux productivity suite, LibreOffice. It features a word processor, " +"spreadsheet application, HTML editor, presentation designer, and database " +"manager. It reads and writes multiple formats—including Microsoft Office " +"formats—so you can move back and forth easily between openSUSE and popular " +"non-Linux productivity software. LibreOffice is the perfect choice for " +"reports, papers, home budgets, simple graphics and more." +msgstr "" +"В составе дистрибутива openSUSE 13.2 поставляется последняя версия " +"LibreOffice — ведущего офисного пакета для Linux. В него входят текстовый " +"процессор, приложение для работы с электронными таблицами, редактор HTML, " +"конструктор презентаций и средство управления базами данных. Он может читать " +"и записывать файлы в различных форматах, включая форматы Microsoft Office, " +"так что вы можете легко передавать данные между openSUSE и популярными " +"программами не из Linux. LibreOffice — это идеальный выбор для работы с " +"отчётами, докладами, домашним бюджетом, простой графикой и многим другим." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:102(title) msgid "Graphics, Graphics, Graphics" msgstr "Графика, графика, графика" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:104(para) -msgid "Using the tools in openSUSE 13.2, you can create or edit almost any type of graphic. For advanced image manipulation and graphics creation, use The GIMP a powerful tool for image retouching, composition, and authoring." -msgstr "При помощи средств, входящих в состав openSUSE 13.2, вы можете создавать или редактировать практически любой тип графики. Для более сложной работы с изображениями и создания графики используйте GIMP, многофункциональное средство для обработки изображений, компоновки и дизайна." +msgid "" +"Using the tools in openSUSE 13.2, you can create or edit almost any type of " +"graphic. For advanced image manipulation and graphics creation, use The GIMP " +"a powerful tool for image retouching, composition, and authoring." +msgstr "" +"При помощи средств, входящих в состав openSUSE 13.2, вы можете создавать или " +"редактировать практически любой тип графики. Для более сложной работы с " +"изображениями и создания графики используйте GIMP, многофункциональное " +"средство для обработки изображений, компоновки и дизайна." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:109(para) -msgid "For vector graphics, openSUSE 13.2 includes Inkscape — a versatile graphics solution delivers support for transparent layers, bitmap tracing, text paths and much more." -msgstr "Для работы с векторной графикой в составе openSUSE 13.2 имеется программа Inkscape — универсальное графическое решение, поддерживающее прозрачные слои, векторизацию растров, расположение текста вдоль кривой и многое другое." +msgid "" +"For vector graphics, openSUSE 13.2 includes Inkscape — a versatile graphics " +"solution delivers support for transparent layers, bitmap tracing, text paths " +"and much more." +msgstr "" +"Для работы с векторной графикой в составе openSUSE 13.2 имеется программа " +"Inkscape — универсальное графическое решение, поддерживающее прозрачные слои, " +"векторизацию растров, расположение текста вдоль кривой и многое другое." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:117(title) msgid "Computing On-the-Go" msgstr "Работа в дороге" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:119(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "openSUSE 13.2 includes the most advanced mobility features. You can switch effortlessly between wireless and wired networks using NetworkManager. Connect with mobile devices like mobile phones, tablets and PDAs via Bluetooth, or use infrared ports to synchronize your data." -msgid "openSUSE 13.2 includes the most advanced mobility features. You can switch effortlessly between wireless and wired networks using NetworkManager. Connect with mobile devices like mobile phones, tablets and PDAs via Bluetooth." -msgstr "В дистрибутиве openSUSE 13.2 имеются наиболее современные функции для мобильного пользователя. Переключайтесь без усилий между беспроводными и проводными сетями при помощи NetworkManager. Подключайте мобильные устройства, такие как мобильные телефоны, планшеты и КПК, через Bluetooth или используйте инфракрасные порты для синхронизации ваших данных." +msgid "" +"openSUSE 13.2 includes the most advanced mobility features. You can switch " +"effortlessly between wireless and wired networks using NetworkManager. " +"Connect with mobile devices like mobile phones, tablets and PDAs via " +"Bluetooth." +msgstr "" +"В дистрибутиве openSUSE 13.2 имеются наиболее современные функции для " +"мобильного пользователя. Переключайтесь без усилий между беспроводными и " +"проводными сетями при помощи NetworkManager. Подключайте мобильные " +"устройства, такие как мобильные телефоны, планшеты и КПК, с помощью Bluetooth." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:123(para) -msgid "The newest innovations in power management from openSUSE increase your mobility and give you the freedom to take your work wherever you go." -msgstr "Последние инновации в управлении питанием в openSUSE повышают вашу мобильность и дают возможность взять с собой работу, куда бы вы ни ехали." +msgid "" +"The newest innovations in power management from openSUSE increase your " +"mobility and give you the freedom to take your work wherever you go." +msgstr "" +"Последние инновации в управлении питанием в openSUSE повышают вашу " +"мобильность и дают возможность взять с собой работу, куда бы вы ни ехали." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:131(title) msgid "Keep Your System Secure and Up to Date" msgstr "Держите свою систему защищённой и обновлённой" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:133(para) -msgid "Help secure your system and data from Internet intruders with SUSE Firewall. This security device is activated by default and easy to configure. But you can do even more to protect your system with openSUSE 13.2 because it also includes AppArmor, the most effective and easy-to-use Linux application security system available today. AppArmor proactively protects your operating system and applications from internal or external threats." -msgstr "Помогите обезопасить вашу систему и данные от злоумышленников в интернете при помощи брандмауэра SUSE. Эта функция безопасности активирована по умолчанию и проста в настройке, но в openSUSE 13.2 можно сделать ещё больше для защиты вашей системы, так как в состав этого дистрибутива входит AppArmor, наиболее эффективная и простая в использовании система безопасности приложений Linux из имеющихся сегодня. AppArmor осуществляет профилактическую защиту вашей операционной системы и приложений от внешних или внутренних атак." +msgid "" +"Help secure your system and data from Internet intruders with SUSE Firewall. " +"This security device is activated by default and easy to configure. But you " +"can do even more to protect your system with openSUSE 13.2 because it also " +"includes AppArmor, the most effective and easy-to-use Linux application " +"security system available today. AppArmor proactively protects your operating " +"system and applications from internal or external threats." +msgstr "" +"Помогите обезопасить вашу систему и данные от злоумышленников в интернете при " +"помощи брандмауэра SUSE. Эта функция безопасности активирована по умолчанию и " +"проста в настройке, но в openSUSE 13.2 можно сделать ещё больше для защиты " +"вашей системы, так как в состав этого дистрибутива входит AppArmor, наиболее " +"эффективная и простая в использовании система безопасности приложений Linux " +"из имеющихся сегодня. AppArmor осуществляет профилактическую защиту вашей " +"операционной системы и приложений от внешних или внутренних атак." #. for the online update feature, see bnc#793710 #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:142(para) -msgid "In addition to SUSE Firewall and AppArmor, openSUSE 13.2 also includes a special security patch update system. To ensure that the latest security patches are installed on your system, you can choose to perform an online update at the end of this installation procedure (if you did not choose the automatic installation modus at the beginning). And in the future, you will be automatically informed of the availability of important security updates, so you can install them at your convenience." -msgstr "Помимо брандмауэра SUSE и AppArmor, в состав openSUSE 13.2 входит специальная система исправлений и обновлений безопасности. Чтобы убедиться, что последние исправления безопасности установлены в системе, запустите обновление по сети в конце процедуры установки (если в начале не был выбран режим автоматической установки). В будущем вы будете автоматически извещены о наличии важных обновлений безопасности и сможете устанавливать их по вашему усмотрению." +msgid "" +"In addition to SUSE Firewall and AppArmor, openSUSE 13.2 also includes a " +"special security patch update system. To ensure that the latest security " +"patches are installed on your system, you can choose to perform an online " +"update at the end of this installation procedure (if you did not choose the " +"automatic installation modus at the beginning). And in the future, you will " +"be automatically informed of the availability of important security updates, " +"so you can install them at your convenience." +msgstr "" +"Помимо брандмауэра SUSE и AppArmor, в состав openSUSE 13.2 входит специальная " +"система исправлений и обновлений безопасности. Чтобы убедиться, что последние " +"исправления безопасности установлены в системе, запустите обновление по сети " +"в конце процедуры установки (если в начале не был выбран режим автоматической " +"установки). В будущем вы будете автоматически извещены о наличии важных " +"обновлений безопасности и сможете устанавливать их по вашему усмотрению." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:154(title) msgid "Virtualization Technology and Application Development Tools" msgstr "Технология виртуализации и средства разработки приложений" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:156(para) -msgid "Both Xen and KVM hypervisors are included with openSUSE 13.2. Xen is one of the most robust solutions for virtualization available. In addition, openSUSE provides tools for network file sharing (Samba, NFS, etc.), printing (CUPS) and Web hosting (Apache). For application development, openSUSE comes with a complete set of runtime environments plus extensive application development tools." -msgstr "В состав openSUSE 13.2 включены гипервизоры Xen и KVM. Xen — одно из доступных решений для виртуализации с самой высокой производительностью. К тому же openSUSE предоставляет средства для совместного использования файлов и принтеров по сети (Samba) и веб-хостинга (Apache). Для разработки приложений в составе openSUSE поставляется полный набор сред выполнения и дополнительные средства разработки приложений." +msgid "" +"Both Xen and KVM hypervisors are included with openSUSE 13.2. Xen is one of " +"the most robust solutions for virtualization available. In addition, openSUSE " +"provides tools for network file sharing (Samba, NFS, etc.), printing (CUPS) " +"and Web hosting (Apache). For application development, openSUSE comes with a " +"complete set of runtime environments plus extensive application development " +"tools." +msgstr "" +"В состав openSUSE 13.2 включены гипервизоры Xen и KVM. Xen — одно из " +"доступных решений для виртуализации с самой высокой производительностью. К " +"тому же openSUSE предоставляет средства для совместного использования файлов " +"и принтеров по сети (Samba) и веб-хостинга (Apache). Для разработки " +"приложений в составе openSUSE поставляется полный набор сред выполнения и " +"дополнительные средства разработки приложений." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:166(title) msgid "Learn More" msgstr "Узнайте больше" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:167(para) -msgid "openSUSE 13.2 provides extensive documentation for specific openSUSE questions as well as general Linux-related questions. The Help Center is accessible via the main menu. Manuals are also available in PDF and can be downloaded and printed (http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation)" -msgstr "В openSUSE 13.2 предоставлена обширная документация как по специфичным для openSUSE вопросам, так и по общим вопросам, связанным с Linux. Центр справки SUSE доступен через основное меню. Кроме того, можно загрузить и распечатать руководства в формате PDF (http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация)" +msgid "" +"openSUSE 13.2 provides extensive documentation for specific openSUSE " +"questions as well as general Linux-related questions. The Help Center is " +"accessible via the main menu. Manuals are also available in PDF and can be " +"downloaded and printed (http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation)" +msgstr "" +"В openSUSE 13.2 предоставлена обширная документация как по специфичным для " +"openSUSE вопросам, так и по общим вопросам, связанным с Linux. Центр справки " +"SUSE доступен через основное меню. Кроме того, можно загрузить и распечатать " +"руководства в формате PDF (http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация)" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:177(para) -msgid "Even more information is available in the openSUSE wiki at http://en.opensuse.org/. Under \"Documentation,\" you'll discover links to useful information created and maintained by other openSUSE users. You can also find links to the documentation available on the official SUSE Web site. For help with specific openSUSE problems, check out the Support Database at www.opensuse.org" -msgstr "Дополнительные сведения имеются на страницах вики openSUSE по адресу http://ru.opensuse.org/. В разделе \"Документация\" вы найдёте множество ссылок на различные полезные сведения, созданные и поддерживаемые другими пользователями openSUSE. Кроме того, на официальном веб-сайте SUSE есть ссылки на имеющуюся документацию. Для получения справки по решению специфических проблем openSUSE воспользуйтесь базой данных поддержки на www.opensuse.org." +msgid "" +"Even more information is available in the openSUSE wiki at " +"http://en.opensuse.org/. Under \"Documentation,\" you'll discover links to " +"useful information created and maintained by other openSUSE users. You can " +"also find links to the documentation available on the official SUSE Web site. " +"For help with specific openSUSE problems, check out the Support Database at " +"www.opensuse.org" +msgstr "" +"Дополнительные сведения имеются на страницах вики openSUSE по адресу " +"http://ru.opensuse.org/. В разделе \"Документация\" вы найдёте множество " +"ссылок на различные полезные сведения, созданные и поддерживаемые другими " +"пользователями openSUSE. Кроме того, на официальном веб-сайте SUSE есть " +"ссылки на имеющуюся документацию. Для получения справки по решению " +"специфических проблем openSUSE воспользуйтесь базой данных поддержки на " +"www.opensuse.org." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:188(para) -msgid "For support from other openSUSE users, visit the official openSUSE forums at http://forums.opensuse.org/. Here you'll find thousands of other openSUSE users, eager to help you get everything you can out of Linux. If you're an experienced openSUSE user, the forums are a great place to meet other users, and help out other Linux users." -msgstr "Для поддержки других пользователей openSUSE посетите официальные форумы openSUSE на http://forums.opensuse.org/. Здесь вы найдёте тысячи других пользователей openSUSE, жаждущих помочь вам получить от Linux всё, что вы можете. Если вы опытный пользователь openSUSE, форумы — отличное место для встреч с другими пользователями и помощи пользователям Linux. На форуме есть и русскоязычный раздел: http://forums.opensuse.org/p-russian/" +msgid "" +"For support from other openSUSE users, visit the official openSUSE forums at " +"http://forums.opensuse.org/. Here you'll find thousands of other openSUSE " +"users, eager to help you get everything you can out of Linux. If you're an " +"experienced openSUSE user, the forums are a great place to meet other users, " +"and help out other Linux users." +msgstr "" +"Для поддержки других пользователей openSUSE посетите официальные форумы " +"openSUSE на http://forums.opensuse.org/. Здесь вы найдёте тысячи других " +"пользователей openSUSE, жаждущих помочь вам получить от Linux всё, что вы " +"можете. Если вы опытный пользователь openSUSE, форумы — отличное место для " +"встреч с другими пользователями и помощи пользователям Linux. На форуме есть " +"и русскоязычный раздел: http://forums.opensuse.org/p-russian/" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:197(para) -msgid "Want to make openSUSE even better? You can build almost anything with openSUSE. It's easy to create and share new packages for multiple Linux distributions using the unique and powerful openSUSE Build Service. Join openSUSE.org to collaborate." -msgstr "Хотите сделать openSUSE ещё лучше? При помощи openSUSE можно собрать практически всё, что угодно. С помощью openSUSE Build Service с широкими возможностями создание и распространение новых пакетов для различных дистрибутивов Linux становится совсем простым делом. Присоединитесь к openSUSE.org для совместной работы." +msgid "" +"Want to make openSUSE even better? You can build almost anything with " +"openSUSE. It's easy to create and share new packages for multiple Linux " +"distributions using the unique and powerful openSUSE Build Service. Join " +"openSUSE.org to collaborate." +msgstr "" +"Хотите сделать openSUSE ещё лучше? При помощи openSUSE можно собрать " +"практически всё, что угодно. С помощью openSUSE Build Service с широкими " +"возможностями создание и распространение новых пакетов для различных " +"дистрибутивов Linux становится совсем простым делом. Присоединитесь к " +"openSUSE.org для совместной работы." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:206(title) msgid "SUSE and Linux" msgstr "SUSE и Linux" #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:207(para) -msgid "SUSE is committed to your success with Linux. In addition to openSUSE, SUSE also delivers an exciting suite of products designed to meet the needs of businesses large and small." -msgstr "Компания SUSE поставила себе задачу помочь вам добиться успеха при помощи Linux. В дополнение к openSUSE, SUSE предоставляет замечательный набор продуктов, предназначенных для удовлетворения потребностей большого и малого бизнеса." +msgid "" +"SUSE is committed to your success with Linux. In addition to openSUSE, SUSE " +"also delivers an exciting suite of products designed to meet the needs of " +"businesses large and small." +msgstr "" +"Компания SUSE поставила себе задачу помочь вам добиться успеха при помощи " +"Linux. В дополнение к openSUSE, SUSE предоставляет замечательный набор " +"продуктов, предназначенных для удовлетворения потребностей большого и малого " +"бизнеса." #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:212(para) -msgid "The enterprise Linux products from SUSE include SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop. Our enterprise products are delivered with a seven-year maintenance guarantee and optional support programs. For more information on enterprise Linux from SUSE, visit http://www.suse.com" -msgstr "В число производимых компанией SUSE продуктов Linux для предприятий входят SUSE Linux Enterprise Server и SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop. Наши продукты для предприятий поставляются с гарантированным семилетним обслуживанием и с дополнительными программами поддержки. Для получения дополнительных сведений о Linux для предприятий от SUSE посетите http://www.suse.com" +msgid "" +"The enterprise Linux products from SUSE include SUSE Linux Enterprise Server " +"and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop. Our enterprise products are delivered with " +"a seven-year maintenance guarantee and optional support programs. For more " +"information on enterprise Linux from SUSE, visit http://www.suse.com" +msgstr "" +"В число производимых компанией SUSE продуктов Linux для предприятий входят " +"SUSE Linux Enterprise Server и SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop. Наши продукты " +"для предприятий поставляются с гарантированным семилетним обслуживанием и с " +"дополнительными программами поддержки. Для получения дополнительных сведений " +"о Linux для предприятий от SUSE посетите http://www.suse.com" #. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2 #: SuSELinux/slideshow.xml:0(None) @@ -172,3 +377,4 @@ "Николай Деркач <nderkach(a)gmail.com>, 2007.\n" "Игорь Кондрашкин <poseidos(a)mail.ru>, 2007.\n" "Александр Мелентьев <alex239(a)gmail.com>, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011." + Modified: trunk/lcn/ru/po/software-opensuse-org.ru.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/ru/po/software-opensuse-org.ru.po 2014-11-03 19:00:38 UTC (rev 90704) +++ trunk/lcn/ru/po/software-opensuse-org.ru.po 2014-11-03 20:02:55 UTC (rev 90705) @@ -6,14 +6,15 @@ "Project-Id-Version: software-opensuse-org\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 14:36+0000\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-09-26 09:36+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 22:46+0400\n" "Last-Translator: Alexander Melentev <minton(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Russian <opensuse-translation-ru(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: ru\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<" +"=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" msgid " and " @@ -40,11 +41,32 @@ msgid "64 Bit PC" msgstr "64-битный PC" -msgid "<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">openSUSE startup guide</a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">Руководство по openSUSE для начинающих</a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">openSUSE " +"startup guide</a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">Руководство " +"по openSUSE для начинающих</a>" -msgid "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is an open standard that bundles the various ways (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) to get files into one format for easier downloads. This makes it good for downloading ISOs; particularly for people who can't use P2P because of restrictions from their ISP or University. It can deliver very fast download speeds since most clients support multiple connections, to multiple mirrors, automatically. In addition, it can do automatic error detection, and correction. It needs a special client to handle it though." -msgstr "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> — это открытый стандарт, объединяющий различные способы получения файлов (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) в один формат для облегчения загрузок. Поэтому он так хорош для загрузки файлов ISO, особенно для людей, которые не могут использовать P2P из-за ограничений, наложенных их провайдерами. Он может обеспечить очень высокие скорости загрузки, так как большинство клиентов поддерживает множественные подключения к нескольким зеркалам автоматически. Более того, он осуществляет автоматическое обнаружение и исправление ошибо� �. Для использования Metalink нужен специальный клиент." +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is an open " +"standard that bundles the various ways (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) to get files " +"into one format for easier downloads. This makes it good for downloading " +"ISOs; particularly for people who can't use P2P because of restrictions from " +"their ISP or University. It can deliver very fast download speeds since most " +"clients support multiple connections, to multiple mirrors, automatically. In " +"addition, it can do automatic error detection, and correction. It needs a " +"special client to handle it though." +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> — это открытый " +"стандарт, объединяющий различные способы получения файлов " +"(FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) в один формат для облегчения загрузок. Поэтому он так " +"хорош для загрузки файлов ISO, особенно для людей, которые не могут " +"использовать P2P из-за ограничений, наложенных их провайдерами. Он может " +"обеспечить очень высокие скорости загрузки, так как большинство клиентов " +"поддерживает множественные подключения к нескольким зеркалам автоматически. " +"Более того, он осуществляет автоматическое обнаружение и исправление ошибок. " +"Для использования Metalink нужен специальный клиент." msgid "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:License\">License</a>" msgstr "<a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:License\">Лицензия</a>" @@ -58,11 +80,19 @@ msgid "official update" msgstr "официальное обновление" -msgid "A GNOME desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as is (no upgrade)." -msgstr "Рабочий стол GNOME, который можно запустить с %s или USB-брелока. Только установка «с нуля» (без обновления)." +msgid "" +"A GNOME desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed " +"as is (no upgrade)." +msgstr "" +"Рабочий стол GNOME, который можно запустить с %s или USB-брелока. Только " +"установка «с нуля» (без обновления)." -msgid "A KDE desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as is (no upgrade)." -msgstr "Рабочий стол KDE, который можно запустить с %s или USB-брелока. Только установка «с нуля» (без обновления)." +msgid "" +"A KDE desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as " +"is (no upgrade)." +msgstr "" +"Рабочий стол KDE, который можно запустить с %s или USB-брелока. Только " +"установка «с нуля» (без обновления)." msgid "Add repository and install manually" msgstr "Добавить репозиторий и установить вручную" @@ -70,21 +100,29 @@ msgid "Add-On Downloads (optional)" msgstr "Загрузка дополнений (необязательно)" -msgid "After having successfully downloaded the ISO image(s), create a bootable USB stick or burn the image(s) to a DVD (or a CD if the chosen image fits)." -msgstr "После успешной загрузки ISO-образа можно создать загрузочный USB-брелок или прожечь образ на DVD (или на CD, если образ подходящего размера)." +msgid "" +"After having successfully downloaded the ISO image(s), create a bootable USB " +"stick or burn the image(s) to a DVD (or a CD if the chosen image fits)." +msgstr "" +"После успешной загрузки ISO-образа можно создать загрузочный USB-брелок или " +"прожечь образ на DVD (или на CD, если образ подходящего размера)." msgid "" "All data is used only for sending openSUSE promotional material\n" " and will not be spread to third parties. We store the data to\n" " inform the users if a new version is available. All requests have\n" " to be screened to fulfill the US export embargo. More information\n" -" about the embargo and a list of countries at wikipedia <a href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." +" about the embargo and a list of countries at wikipedia <a " +"href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>" +"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." msgstr "" "Все данные используются для отправки рекламных материалов openSUSE\n" "и не передаются третьим лицам. Мы храним данные для уведомления\n" "пользователей о выходе новой версии. Все запросы изучаются на\n" "предмет соответствия экспортному эмбарго США. Больше сведений об\n" -"эмбарго и список стран можно найти в википедии <a href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." +"эмбарго и список стран можно найти в википедии <a " +"href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>" +"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." msgid "An internal error happened :-(" msgstr "Произошла внутренняя ошибка :-(" @@ -98,8 +136,14 @@ msgid "BitTorrent" msgstr "BitTorrent" -msgid "Boot from the DVD, CD or USB stick. In case your computer does not automatically boot from the chosen device, open the BIOS setup to allow booting from it." -msgstr "Загрузитесь с DVD, CD или USB-брелка. Если ваш компьютер не загружается с выбранного устройства автоматически, откройте меню настройки BIOS для разрешения загрузки с него." +msgid "" +"Boot from the DVD, CD or USB stick. In case your computer does not " +"automatically boot from the chosen device, open the BIOS setup to allow " +"booting from it." +msgstr "" +"Загрузитесь с DVD, CD или USB-брелка. Если ваш компьютер не загружается с " +"выбранного устройства автоматически, откройте меню настройки BIOS для " +"разрешения загрузки с него." msgid "Bronze Sponsor" msgstr "«Бронзовый» спонсор" @@ -118,11 +162,16 @@ msgid "Category" msgstr "Категория" -msgid "Choose an installation medium by clicking it and hit the Download button to start the download. Optionally choose your computer type or an alternative download method." -msgstr "Выберите установочный носитель, кликнув на нём, и нажмите кнопку Загрузить. Также можете выбрать тип компьютера или альтернативный метод загрузки." +msgid "" +"Choose an installation medium by clicking it and hit the Download button to " +"start the download. Optionally choose your computer type or an alternative " +"download method." +msgstr "" +"Выберите установочный носитель, кликнув на нём, и нажмите кнопку Загрузить. " +"Также можете выбрать тип компьютера или альтернативный метод загрузки." msgid "Click here to display these alternative versions." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Нажмите здесь для показа этих альтернативных версий." msgid "Click to Download" msgstr "Нажмите для загрузки" @@ -130,8 +179,12 @@ msgid "Community" msgstr "Сообщество" -msgid "Contains a large collection of software for desktop or server use. Suitable for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Содержит огромный набор ПО для настольного или серверного использования. Подходит для установки или обновления." +msgid "" +"Contains a large collection of software for desktop or server use. " +"Suitable for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Содержит огромный набор ПО для настольного или серверного использования. " +"Подходит для установки или обновления." msgid "Countdown" msgstr "Обратный отсчёт" @@ -196,8 +249,12 @@ msgid "Downloads" msgstr "Загрузки" -msgid "Downloads the installation system and all packages from online repositories. Suitable for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Загружает систему установки и все пакеты из сетевых репозиториев. Подходит для установки или обновления." +msgid "" +"Downloads the installation system and all packages from online repositories.<" +"br/>Suitable for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Загружает систему установки и все пакеты из сетевых репозиториев. " +"Подходит для установки или обновления." msgid "Expand all sections ('e')" msgstr "Развернуть все разделы ('e')" @@ -217,8 +274,14 @@ msgid "For %s run the following:" msgstr "Для %s запустите:" -msgid "For Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf and add the following (note that the order of repositories in pacman.conf is important, since pacman always downloads the first found package):" -msgstr "Для Arch Linux отредактируйте /etc/pacman.conf и добавьте следующее (обратите внимание, что в pacman.conf важен порядок репозиториев, поскольку pacman всегда загружает первый найденный пакет):" +msgid "" +"For Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf and add the following " +"(note that the order of repositories in pacman.conf is important, since " +"pacman always downloads the first found package):" +msgstr "" +"Для Arch Linux отредактируйте /etc/pacman.conf и добавьте " +"следующее (обратите внимание, что в pacman.conf важен порядок репозиториев, " +"поскольку pacman всегда загружает первый найденный пакет):" msgid "Games" msgstr "Игры" @@ -247,8 +310,14 @@ msgid "How to Proceed" msgstr "Что делать дальше" -msgid "If you want to use a direct link but live in a place in the world where our download redirector has not enough information to redirect to the fastest mirror, you can pick a mirror yourself." -msgstr "Если вы хотите использовать прямую ссылку, но живёте в таком месте, о котором у нашей утилиты перенаправления недостаточно сведений для назначения самого быстрого зеркала, вы можете выбрать зеркало самостоятельно." +msgid "" +"If you want to use a direct link but live in a place in the world where our " +"download redirector has not enough information to redirect to the fastest " +"mirror, you can pick a mirror yourself." +msgstr "" +"Если вы хотите использовать прямую ссылку, но живёте в таком месте, о котором " +"у нашей утилиты перенаправления недостаточно сведений для назначения самого " +"быстрого зеркала, вы можете выбрать зеркало самостоятельно." msgid "Image:" msgstr "Образ:" @@ -272,8 +341,10 @@ msgid "" "Join the fast-growing community, put openSUSE into more hands by\n" -" getting the latest PromoDVD for your group, non-profit organization, school\n" -" university or event like LUG meetings, installfests, and conferences.\n" +" getting the latest PromoDVD for your group, non-profit organization, " +"school\n" +" university or event like LUG meetings, installfests, and " +"conferences.\n" " Promo DVDs help to increase awareness and visibility of openSUSE!" msgstr "" "Присоединяйтесь к быстро растущему сообществу, получите\n" @@ -282,8 +353,16 @@ "встречах LUG, инсталл-фестах и конференциях.\n" "Promo DVD увеличивают осведомлённость людей об openSUSE!" -msgid "Konqueror of KDE 3 is unfortunately unmaintained and its javascript implementation contains bugs that make it impossible to use with this page. Please make sure you have javascript disabled before you <a href='%s'>continue</a>." -msgstr "Konqueror из KDE 3, к сожалению, не поддерживается, и его реализация javascript содержит ошибки, делающие невозможным использование этой страницы. Убедитесь, что вы отключили javascript перед тем, как <a href='%s'>продолжить</a>." +msgid "" +"Konqueror of KDE 3 is unfortunately unmaintained and its javascript " +"implementation contains bugs that make it impossible to use with this page. " +"Please make sure you have javascript disabled before you <a href='%s'>" +"continue</a>." +msgstr "" +"Konqueror из KDE 3, к сожалению, не поддерживается, и его реализация " +"javascript содержит ошибки, делающие невозможным использование этой страницы. " +"Убедитесь, что вы отключили javascript перед тем, как <a href='%s'>" +"продолжить</a>." # label for language selection msgid "Language" @@ -304,8 +383,14 @@ msgid "Live KDE" msgstr "Live KDE" -msgid "Many applications can verify the checksum of a download. To verify your download can be important as it verifies you really have got the ISO file you wanted to download and not some broken version." -msgstr "Множество приложений может проверить целостность загрузки по контрольной сумме. Такая проверка поможет вам убедиться, что вы получили именно желаемый файл ISO, а не какое-то битое недоразумение." +msgid "" +"Many applications can verify the checksum of a download. To verify your " +"download can be important as it verifies you really have got the ISO file you " +"wanted to download and not some broken version." +msgstr "" +"Множество приложений может проверить целостность загрузки по контрольной " +"сумме. Такая проверка поможет вам убедиться, что вы получили именно желаемый " +"файл ISO, а не какое-то битое недоразумение." msgid "Metalink" msgstr "Metalink" @@ -313,14 +398,36 @@ msgid "More information on burning the ISO file to CD/DVD" msgstr "Больше сведений о записи файла ISO на CD/DVD" -msgid "More information on creating a <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Live_USB_stick'>bootable USB stick</a>" -msgstr "Больше сведений о создании <a href='http://ru.opensuse.org/Live_USB_брелок'>загрузочного USB-брелока</a>" +msgid "" +"More information on creating a <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Live_USB_stick'" +">bootable USB stick</a>" +msgstr "" +"Больше сведений о создании <a href='http://ru.opensuse.org/Live_USB_брелок'>" +"загрузочного USB-брелока</a>" -msgid "More information on downloading openSUSE is available from the <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Download Help</a> and <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">Network Installation</a> pages in our <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation\">Documentation Wiki</a>." -msgstr "Больше сведений о загрузке openSUSE доступно на страницах <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:Помощь_по_загрузке\">Помощь по загрузке</a> и <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Установка_через_Интернет\">Установка через Интернет</a> в нашей <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация\">вики</a>." +msgid "" +"More information on downloading openSUSE is available from the <a " +"href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Download Help</a> and <a " +"href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">Network " +"Installation</a> pages in our <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Document" +"ation\">Documentation Wiki</a>." +msgstr "" +"Больше сведений о загрузке openSUSE доступно на страницах <a " +"href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:Помощь_по_загрузке\">Помощь по загрузке</a> " +"и <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Установка_через_Интернет\">Установка через " +"Интернет</a> в нашей <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Документация\">" +"вики</a>." -msgid "Most new computers support <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (also known as AMD64 and Intel64), but some laptop processors and netbook processors do not support it. So you need to check wikipedia if you want to be sure your computer supports it." -msgstr "Большинство новых компьютеров поддерживает архитектуру <a href=\"http://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (также известную как AMD64 и Intel64), но некоторые ноутбуки и нетбуки не поддерживают её. Чтобы знать наверняка, поддерживает ли её ваш компьютер, уточните в Википедии." +msgid "" +"Most new computers support <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">" +"x86-64</a> (also known as AMD64 and Intel64), but some laptop processors and " +"netbook processors do not support it. So you need to check wikipedia if you " +"want to be sure your computer supports it." +msgstr "" +"Большинство новых компьютеров поддерживает архитектуру <a " +"href=\"http://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (также известную как " +"AMD64 и Intel64), но некоторые ноутбуки и нетбуки не поддерживают её. Чтобы " +"знать наверняка, поддерживает ли её ваш компьютер, уточните в Википедии." msgid "Multimedia" msgstr "Мультимедиа" @@ -358,8 +465,13 @@ msgid "Official Manuals" msgstr "Официальные руководства" -msgid "Only DVD and Network medias are fully tested. Alternatives, like live or rescue systems, are recomended for only limited use." +msgid "" +"Only DVD and Network medias are fully tested. Alternatives, like live or " +"rescue systems, are recomended for only limited use." msgstr "" +"Полностью протестированы только DVD и установка по сети. Альтернативные " +"версии, т.е. live-диски или спасательный диск, рекомендованы только для " +"ограниченного применения." msgid "Package %s not found..." msgstr "Пакет %s не найден…" @@ -380,29 +492,44 @@ msgstr "«Платиновый» спонсор" msgid "" -"Please be aware that the following packages are from unofficial repositories.\n" -" That means they are not reviewed by openSUSE and may contain unstable or experimental software." +"Please be aware that the following packages are from unofficial " +"repositories.\n" +" That means they are not reviewed by openSUSE and may contain unstable or " +"experimental software." msgstr "" "Пожалуйста, обратите внимание, что это пакеты из неофициальных репозиториев.\n" -"Это означает, что они не проверяются командой openSUSE и могут содержать нестабильное или экспериментальное программное обеспечение." +"Это означает, что они не проверяются командой openSUSE и могут содержать " +"нестабильное или экспериментальное программное обеспечение." -msgid "Please enter a brief reason (in English!) why you need the DVDs and provide a link of the event/purpose." -msgstr "Пожалуйста, укажите краткую причину (на английском!), по которой вам нужны DVD и предоставьте ссылку на событие." +msgid "" +"Please enter a brief reason (in English!) why you need the DVDs and " +"provide a link of the event/purpose." +msgstr "" +"Пожалуйста, укажите краткую причину (на английском!), по которой вам " +"нужны DVD и предоставьте ссылку на событие." msgid "Please enter more than 2 characters" msgstr "Введите не менее двух символов" -msgid "Please note that this is not the latest openSUSE release. You can get the latest version <a href='/'>here</a>. " -msgstr "Обратите внимание, что это не последний релиз openSUSE. Вы можете получить новейшую версию <a href='/'>здесь</a>. " +msgid "" +"Please note that this is not the latest openSUSE release. You can get the " +"latest version <a href='/'>here</a>. " +msgstr "" +"Обратите внимание, что это не последний релиз openSUSE. Вы можете получить " +"новейшую версию <a href='/'>здесь</a>. " msgid "" "Promo DVDs and all the related artwork -labels and sleeve- can be\n" -" downloaded from the <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">promodvd\n" -" download directory %s</a>. Keep in mind that this is a special version of openSUSE,\n" +" downloaded from the <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\"" +">promodvd\n" +" download directory %s</a>. Keep in mind that this is a special " +"version of openSUSE,\n" " namely designed for promotional distribution." msgstr "" -"Promo DVD и всё необходимое графическое оформление — ярлыки и упаковку — можно\n" -"скачать из <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">каталога promodvd %s</a>.\n" +"Promo DVD и всё необходимое графическое оформление — ярлыки и упаковку — " +"можно\n" +"скачать из <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">каталога " +"promodvd %s</a>.\n" "Учтите, что это особая версия openSUSE,\n" "специально предназначенная для рекламных целей." @@ -419,8 +546,12 @@ msgid "Rescue" msgstr "Диск восстановления" -msgid "Rescue system that you can run from CD or from USB stick. Can not be used for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Спасательная система, которую можно запустить с CD или USB-брелока. Установка «с нуля» и обновление не предусмотрены." +msgid "" +"Rescue system that you can run from CD or from USB stick. Can not be used " +"for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Спасательная система, которую можно запустить с CD или USB-брелока. " +"Установка «с нуля» и обновление не предусмотрены." msgid "Search" msgstr "Поиск" @@ -460,11 +591,21 @@ msgid "Silver Sponsor" msgstr "«Серебряный» спонсор" -msgid "Some alternative media (eg. live and rescue systems) are also available, although they are less tested and recommended for only limited use." +msgid "" +"Some alternative media (eg. live and rescue systems) are also available, " +"although they are less tested and recommended for only limited use." msgstr "" +"Доступны и другие носители (т.е. спасательный и live-диски), хотя они менее " +"протестированы и рекомендованы только для ограниченного применения." -msgid "Some of the live distributions based on openSUSE. Those interested in trying to build their own derivatives can take a look at <a href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." -msgstr "Дистрибутивы на основе openSUSE. Желающие попытаться собрать собственный дистрибутив могут взглянуть на <a href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." +msgid "" +"Some of the live distributions based on openSUSE. Those interested in trying " +"to build their own derivatives can take a look at <a " +"href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." +msgstr "" +"Дистрибутивы на основе openSUSE. Желающие попытаться собрать собственный " +"дистрибутив могут взглянуть на <a href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE " +"Studio</a>." msgid "Source" msgstr "Источник" @@ -493,20 +634,55 @@ msgid "Support" msgstr "Поддержка" -msgid "The installation process is available in many languages but, for most of them, the translation of the applications is not included in the image. If you want your openSUSE system to support some additional language, you need to download it from the Internet during the installation or any time after it. If you have easy access to the Internet you do not need this CD, but if you are planning to install openSUSE in some machine with no Internet connection, it will provide you access to all the available translations." -msgstr "Процесс установки переведён на множество языков, но для большинства из них переводы приложений в образ не входят. Если вы хотите, чтобы ваша система openSUSE поддерживала ещё какой-то язык, то придётся скачать его из интернета во время или после установки. Если у вас хороший доступ к интернету, то этот CD вам не нужен, но если вы планируете установить openSUSE на машину без доступа к интернету, то все имеющиеся переводы доступны на этом диске." +msgid "" +"The installation process is available in many languages but, for most of " +"them, the translation of the applications is not included in the image. If " +"you want your openSUSE system to support some additional language, you need " +"to download it from the Internet during the installation or any time after " +"it. If you have easy access to the Internet you do not need this CD, but if " +"you are planning to install openSUSE in some machine with no Internet " +"connection, it will provide you access to all the available translations." +msgstr "" +"Процесс установки переведён на множество языков, но для большинства из них " +"переводы приложений в образ не входят. Если вы хотите, чтобы ваша система " +"openSUSE поддерживала ещё какой-то язык, то придётся скачать его из интернета " +"во время или после установки. Если у вас хороший доступ к интернету, то этот " +"CD вам не нужен, но если вы планируете установить openSUSE на машину без " +"доступа к интернету, то все имеющиеся переводы доступны на этом диске." msgid "Then run the following as root" msgstr "Затем запустите от имени root" -msgid "There is no openSUSE release in testing phase at the moment. If you want to use bleeding edge software, please use <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." -msgstr "В настоящее время ни один выпуск openSUSE не проходит тестирование. Если вы хотите использовать новейшее ПО, воспользуйтесь <a href='http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." +msgid "" +"There is no openSUSE release in testing phase at the moment. If you " +"want to use bleeding edge software, please use <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." +msgstr "" +"В настоящее время ни один выпуск openSUSE не проходит тестирование. " +"Если вы хотите использовать новейшее ПО, воспользуйтесь <a " +"href='http://ru.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." -msgid "This CD contains free software distributed under proprietary licence not allowing its inclusion to main installation media together with free open-source software. All software from this CD could be downloaded from NON-OSS repository." -msgstr "Этот диск содержит бесплатное ПО, распространяемое под проприетарными лицензиями, не позволяющими включать его на главный установочный носитель вместе со свободным ПО с открытым исходным кодом. Всё ПО с этого диска можно скачать из репозитория NON-OSS." +msgid "" +"This CD contains free software distributed under proprietary licence not " +"allowing its inclusion to main installation media together with free " +"open-source software. All software from this CD could be downloaded from " +"NON-OSS repository." +msgstr "" +"Этот диск содержит бесплатное ПО, распространяемое под проприетарными " +"лицензиями, не позволяющими включать его на главный установочный носитель " +"вместе со свободным ПО с открытым исходным кодом. Всё ПО с этого диска можно " +"скачать из репозитория NON-OSS." -msgid "This version runs on all PCs including those that support 64 Bit. If you have more than 3 GB of RAM you should prefer the 64 Bit version though. openSUSE does not support processors before Pentium - the live CDs even support only i686 (Pentium Pro and later)." -msgstr "Эта версия запускается на всех PC, включая 64-битные. Если у вас более 3 ГБ оперативной памяти, выберите 64-битную версию. openSUSE не поддерживает процессоры ниже Pentium — LiveCD поддерживают только i686 (Pentium Pro и выше)." +msgid "" +"This version runs on all PCs including those that support 64 Bit. If you have " +"more than 3 GB of RAM you should prefer the 64 Bit version though. openSUSE " +"does not support processors before Pentium - the live CDs even support only " +"i686 (Pentium Pro and later)." +msgstr "" +"Эта версия запускается на всех PC, включая 64-битные. Если у вас более 3 ГБ " +"оперативной памяти, выберите 64-битную версию. openSUSE не поддерживает " +"процессоры ниже Pentium — LiveCD поддерживают только i686 (Pentium Pro и " +"выше)." msgid "Top 1-click downloads:" msgstr "Чаще всего устанавливают в 1 клик:" @@ -523,11 +699,33 @@ msgid "Unsupported distributions:" msgstr "Неподдерживаемые дистрибутивы:" -msgid "User manuals are available from <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, for example the <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Official Start-Up Guide</a>." -msgstr "Руководства пользователя доступны на <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, например, <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Руководство для начинающих</a>." +msgid "" +"User manuals are available from <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">" +"activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, for example the <a " +"href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Official " +"Start-Up Guide</a>." +msgstr "" +"Руководства пользователя доступны на <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\"" +">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, например, <a " +"href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Руководство " +"для начинающих</a>." -msgid "Using <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> is recommended on slow links, especially when downloading the DVD image. BitTorrent downloads have several benefits, the clients protect against data corruption and you help relieving the load on the servers by participating in the upload - if enough people participate it will also be faster than the centralized servers - for everybody. Whatsmore, it allows you to stop the download at any time and resume it later." -msgstr "Использование <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> рекомендовано для медленных соединений, особенно при загрузке образа DVD. Загрузки BitTorrent имеют несколько преимуществ: клиенты защищены от повреждения данных и вы уменьшаете нагрузку на серверы, участвуя в раздаче — при участии достаточного количества людей загрузка также будут быстрее, чем с централизованных серверов, причём для всех. Более того, вы можете остановить загрузку в любое время и возобновить её позже." +msgid "" +"Using <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> is " +"recommended on slow links, especially when downloading the DVD image. " +"BitTorrent downloads have several benefits, the clients protect against data " +"corruption and you help relieving the load on the servers by participating in " +"the upload - if enough people participate it will also be faster than the " +"centralized servers - for everybody. Whatsmore, it allows you to stop the " +"download at any time and resume it later." +msgstr "" +"Использование <a href=\"http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a>" +" рекомендовано для медленных соединений, особенно при загрузке образа DVD. " +"Загрузки BitTorrent имеют несколько преимуществ: клиенты защищены от " +"повреждения данных и вы уменьшаете нагрузку на серверы, участвуя в раздаче — " +"при участии достаточного количества людей загрузка также будут быстрее, чем с " +"централизованных серверов, причём для всех. Более того, вы можете остановить " +"загрузку в любое время и возобновить её позже." msgid "Verify your download before use" msgstr "Проверка загруженного образа перед использованием" @@ -541,28 +739,58 @@ msgid "" "We would like you, to keep us informed about your usage of the DVDs, so we\n" " can help you to promote your organization, event or school on our\n" -" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>news page</a>\n" -" or other resources. (Hint! We love photos. Take lots of them!). Please contact us at\n" -" <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" +" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>news " +"page</a>\n" +" or other resources. (Hint! We love photos. Take lots of them!). " +"Please contact us at\n" +" <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>" +"opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" " to discuss promotion and/or other ways we can assist you." msgstr "" "Мы бы хотели знать больше о вашем использовании DVD, чтобы помочь\n" "вам продвигать вашу организацию, событие или школу на нашей странице\n" -"<a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>новостей</a> или других ресурсах. (Кстати! Мы любим фоточки. Снимайте тысячи их!).\n" -"Свяжитесь с нами по адресу <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>,\n" +"<a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>новостей</a> или " +"других ресурсах. (Кстати! Мы любим фоточки. Снимайте тысячи их!).\n" +"Свяжитесь с нами по адресу <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>" +"opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>,\n" "чтобы обсудить это и/или другие способы взаимопомощи." -msgid "When downloading images other than the CD for network installation, it is strongly recommended to use a proper download manager to reduce the risk of corrupted data." -msgstr "При загрузке любых образов, кроме CD для установки по сети, настоятельно рекомендуется использовать менеджер загрузок для уменьшения риска повреждения данных." +msgid "" +"When downloading images other than the CD for network installation, it is " +"strongly recommended to use a proper download manager to reduce the risk " +"of corrupted data." +msgstr "" +"При загрузке любых образов, кроме CD для установки по сети, настоятельно<" +"/i> рекомендуется использовать менеджер загрузок для уменьшения риска " +"повреждения данных." -msgid "You can add the repository key to apt. Keep in mind that the owner of the key may distribute updates, packages and repositories that your system will trust (<a href=\"%s\">more information</a>). To add the key, run:" -msgstr "Вы можете добавить ключ репозитория в apt. Имейте в виду, что владелец ключа может распространять обновления, пакеты и репозитории, которым ваша система будет доверять (<a href=\"%s\">подробнее</a>). Для добавления ключа запустите:" +msgid "" +"You can add the repository key to apt. Keep in mind that the owner of the key " +"may distribute updates, packages and repositories that your system will trust " +"(<a href=\"%s\">more information</a>). To add the key, run:" +msgstr "" +"Вы можете добавить ключ репозитория в apt. Имейте в виду, что владелец ключа " +"может распространять обновления, пакеты и репозитории, которым ваша система " +"будет доверять (<a href=\"%s\">подробнее</a>). Для добавления ключа запустите:" -msgid "You could try to extend your search to development packages or search for another base distribution (currently )." -msgstr "Вы можете расширить свой поиск на пакеты для разработчиков или искать их для другого дистрибутива." +msgid "" +"You could try to extend your search to development packages or search for " +"another base distribution (currently )." +msgstr "" +"Вы можете расширить свой поиск на пакеты для разработчиков или искать их для " +"другого дистрибутива." -msgid "You could verify the file in the process of downloading. For example a checksum (SHA256) will be used automatically if you choose <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> in the field above and use the add-on DownThemAll! in <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Firefox'>Firefox</a>." -msgstr "Вы можете проверить файл в процессе загрузки. Например, контрольная сумма SHA256 будет использована автоматически при выборе <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> в качестве способа загрузки." +msgid "" +"You could verify the file in the process of downloading. For example a " +"checksum (SHA256) will be used automatically if you choose <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> in the field above " +"and use the add-on DownThemAll! in <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Firefox'>" +"Firefox</a>." +msgstr "" +"Вы можете проверить файл в процессе загрузки. Например, контрольная сумма " +"SHA256 будет использована автоматически при выборе <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> в качестве способа " +"загрузки." msgid "gpg signature" msgstr "Подпись gpg" @@ -583,7 +811,11 @@ msgstr "http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:Помощь_по_загрузке" msgid "http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help#Burn_the_ISO_image.28s.29" -msgstr "http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%BC%D0%BE%D1%89%D1%8C_%D0%BF%D0%B…" +msgstr "" +"http://ru.opensuse.org/SDB:%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%BC%D0%BE%D1%89%D1%8C_%D0%BF%D0%B…" +"D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%" +"B5#.D0.97.D0.B0.D0.BF.D0.B8.D1.81.D1.8C_.D0.BE.D0.B1.D1.80.D0.B0.D0.B7.D0.B0_." +"D0.B4.D0.B8.D1.81.D0.BA.D0.B0_.28ISO.29" msgid "http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Submitting_bug_reports" msgstr "http://ru.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Сообщить_об_ошибке" @@ -600,16 +832,19 @@ msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" -#, fuzzy #| msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" -msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" +msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" -msgid "is still the most commonly used checksum. Many ISO burners display it right before burning." -msgstr "всё ещё используется наиболее широко. Многие приложения для записи ISO показывают её перед началом записи." +msgid "" +"is still the most commonly used checksum. Many ISO burners display it right " +"before burning." +msgstr "" +"всё ещё используется наиболее широко. Многие приложения для записи ISO " +"показывают её перед началом записи." msgid "is the less known but more secure checksum than md5." msgstr "менее известна, но более безопасна, чем md5." @@ -617,8 +852,12 @@ msgid "md5 checksum" msgstr "Контрольная сумма md5" -msgid "offers the most security as you can verify who signed it. It should be <tt>%s</tt>." -msgstr "обеспечивает наибольший уровень безопасности, так как вы можете проверить, кто подписал файл. Должно быть <tt>%s</tt>." +msgid "" +"offers the most security as you can verify who signed it. It should be <tt>%" +"s</tt>." +msgstr "" +"обеспечивает наибольший уровень безопасности, так как вы можете проверить, " +"кто подписал файл. Должно быть <tt>%s</tt>." msgid "openSUSE Countdown" msgstr "Обратный отсчёт openSUSE" @@ -626,8 +865,12 @@ msgid "openSUSE Derivatives" msgstr "Производные дистрибутивы openSUSE" -msgid "openSUSE is available via http (direct link) or BitTorrent. The CD for network installation is only available via http." -msgstr "openSUSE доступна по http (прямая ссылка) или BitTorrent. CD для установки по сети доступен только по http." +msgid "" +"openSUSE is available via http (direct link) or BitTorrent. The CD for " +"network installation is only available via http." +msgstr "" +"openSUSE доступна по http (прямая ссылка) или BitTorrent. CD для установки по " +"сети доступен только по http." msgid "openSUSE only supports PCs with 32 Bits and 64 Bits." msgstr "openSUSE поддерживает только 32-битные и 64-битные компьютеры." -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90704 - trunk/yast/ca/po
by vertaal＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: vertaal Date: 2014-11-03 20:00:38 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90704 Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/sudo.ca.po Log: sudo.ca.po: more (Dmedina) Committed with Vertaal on behalf of Dmedina Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/sudo.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/sudo.ca.po 2014-11-03 18:31:46 UTC (rev 90703) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/sudo.ca.po 2014-11-03 19:00:38 UTC (rev 90704) @@ -9,15 +9,15 @@ "Project-Id-Version: YaST (@memory@)\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-17 11:11+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 20:35+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Catalan\n" -"Language: \n" +"Language: ca\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" -"X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.7\n" +"X-Generator: Poedit 1.6.9\n" #. Command line help text for the Xsudo module #: src/clients/sudo.rb:54 @@ -55,6 +55,9 @@ "(4 integers in the range 128 - 255 separated by dots) \n" "or single integer in the range 0 - 32" msgstr "" +"Una màscara de xarxa és o bé una notació quad amb punts \n" +"(4 enters entre 128 - 255 separats per punts) \n" +"o un enter sol entre 0 - 32." #: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:95 msgid "Add New Host to the Alias" @@ -160,11 +163,11 @@ #. encoding: utf-8 #: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:47 msgid "New RunAs Alias" -msgstr "Nou Executa_com_a àlies" +msgstr "Nou àlies Executa_com_a " #: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:54 msgid "Existing RunAs Alias" -msgstr "Executa_com_a àlies existent" +msgstr "Àlies Executa_com_a existent" #: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:64 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:64 msgid "Alias Members" @@ -190,7 +193,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:76 msgid "RunAs or RunAs Alias" -msgstr "Executa_com_a o Executa_com_a àlies" +msgstr "Executa_com_a o àlies Executa_com_a " #: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:80 msgid "No Password" @@ -325,29 +328,45 @@ #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:486 msgid "" "Host alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " +"delete it?\n" msgstr "" +"L'àlies d'amfitrió %1 s'està usant en una de les regles de sudo.\n" +"Suprimir-lo pot resultar en un fitxer de configuració de sudo inconsistent. " +"El voleu suprimir?\n" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:549 msgid "" "User alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " +"delete it?\n" msgstr "" +"L'àlies d'usuari %1 s'està usant en una de les regles de sudo.\n" +"Suprimir-lo pot resultar en un fitxer de configuració de sudo inconsistent. " +"El voleu suprimir?\n" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:612 msgid "" "RunAs alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " +"delete it?\n" msgstr "" +"L'àlies Executa_Com_a %1 s'està usant en una de les regles de sudo.\n" +"Suprimir-lo pot resultar en un fitxer de configuració de sudo inconsistent. " +"El voleu suprimir?\n" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:674 msgid "" "Command alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " +"delete it?\n" msgstr "" +"L'àlies d'ordre %1 s'està usant en una de les regles de sudo.\n" +"Suprimir-lo pot resultar en un fitxer de configuració de sudo inconsistent. " +"El voleu suprimir?\n" #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:36 @@ -416,8 +435,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:74 msgid "" "RunAs column is an\n" -"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access privileges\n" -"\twill be used to run commands. NOPASSWD is a tag, determining whether\n" +"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access " +"privileges\n" +"\twill be used to run commands. NOPASSWD is a tag, determining " +"whether\n" "\tusers need to authorize themselves before running commands.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -440,26 +461,37 @@ "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir una nova regla, cliqueu a Afegeix i empleneu les " +"entrades adequades. \n" +"\tEl nom d'usuari, el nom d'amfitrió i la llista d'ordres no han d'estar " +"buits. \n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. User Specification help 5/6 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "To edit existing rule, select an entry from the table and click on \n" -"\tEdit button. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button.\n" +"\tEdit button. To delete selected entry, click on Delete " +"button.\n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" -"Per editar una regla existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i cliqueu a \n" -"\tEdita. Per esborrar-ne una, seleccioneu-la i cliqueu a Suprimeix.\n" +"Per editar una regla existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i " +"cliqueu a \n" +"\tEdita. Per esborrar-ne una, seleccioneu-la i cliqueu a " +"Suprimeix.\n" "\t \n" "\t" #. Single User Specification help 1/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"User Name or Alias may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), group name prefixed\n" +"User Name or Alias may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), " +"group name prefixed\n" "\twith '%' (e.g. %bar), or user alias name. If \n" -"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, groups and aliases \n" +"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, " +"groups and aliases \n" "\tin drop-down menu, or enter your own value. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -467,10 +499,14 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:112 msgid "" -"Hostname or Alias entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www.example.com) single IP \n" -"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host alias. If commands may be\n" -"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched against your own hostname\n" -"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file between multiple machines, \n" +"Hostname or Alias entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www." +"example.com) single IP \n" +"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host " +"alias. If commands may be\n" +"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched " +"against your own hostname\n" +"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file " +"between multiple machines, \n" "\t'ALL' or 'localhost' entry will be sufficient for almost all purposes. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -479,11 +515,15 @@ #. Single User Specification help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"RunAs Username or Alias is an optional parameter specifying an user, \n" +"RunAs Username or Alias is an optional parameter specifying an " +"user, \n" "\twhose access privileges \n" -"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user root is the default\n" -"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or run_as alias name\n" -"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter your own value.\n" +"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user root is " +"the default\n" +"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or " +"run_as alias name\n" +"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter " +"your own value.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -491,8 +531,10 @@ #. Single User Specification help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"No Password is an optional tag. Normally, users have to authenticate\n" -"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running particular \n" +"No Password is an optional tag. Normally, users have to " +"authenticate\n" +"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running " +"particular \n" "\tcommand. Set No Password tag to 'Yes' if you want to\n" "\tdisable this authentication\n" "\t\n" @@ -503,8 +545,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "Commands to Run table is a list of commands (optionally with\n" -"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be allowed \n" -"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" +"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be " +"allowed \n" +"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be " +"run. \n" "\tAgain, keyword 'ALL' stands for any command, so use it with care.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -512,18 +556,28 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:149 msgid "" -"To add a new command, click on Add button, fill in command name with optional\n" -"\tparameters and click OK. To remove command, select appropriate entry from the table\n" +"To add a new command, click on Add button, fill in command name with " +"optional\n" +"\tparameters and click OK. To remove command, select appropriate " +"entry from the table\n" "\tand click on Delete button.\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir una ordre nove, cliqueu al botó Afegeix, empleneu el nom " +"de l'ordre amb els paràmetres \n" +"\topcionals i cliqueu a D'acord. Per suprimir l'ordre, seleccioneu " +"l'entrada adequada de la taula\n" +"\ti cliqueu al botó Suprimeix.\n" +"\t" #. User Aliases help 1/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<big>User Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of " +"users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " +"in sudo configuration. \n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -531,21 +585,29 @@ #. User Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:164 msgid "" -"To add a new user alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new user alias, click on Add button and fill in " +"appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir un nou àlies d'usuari, cliqueu a Afegeix i empleneu les " +"entrades adequades. \n" +"\tEl nom d'àlies i la llista d'usuaris a l'àlies no han d'estar buits. \n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. User Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" +"To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on " +"Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" -"Per editar un àlies d'usuari existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" +"Per editar un àlies d'usuari existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la " +"taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" "\t Per esborrar-ne un, cliqueu a Elimina. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -554,8 +616,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:178 msgid "" "<big>Host Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of hosts that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of " +"hosts that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set " +"in sudo configuration. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -563,21 +627,29 @@ #. Host Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:186 msgid "" -"To add a new host alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new host alias, click on Add button and fill in " +"appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of hosts in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir un nou àlies d'amfitrió, cliqueu a Afegeix i empleneu " +"les entrades adequades. \n" +"\tEl nom d'àlies i la llista d'amfitrions a l'àlies no han d'estar buits. \n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. Host Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" +"To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on " +"Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" -"Per editar un àlies d'amfitrió existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" +"Per editar un àlies d'amfitrió existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la " +"taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" "\t Per esborrar-ne un, cliqueu a Elimina. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -586,8 +658,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<big>RunAs Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of " +"users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " +"in sudo configuration. \n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -595,21 +669,29 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:208 msgid "" -"To add a new RunAs alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new RunAs alias, click on Add button and fill in " +"appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir un nou àlies Executa_com_a, cliqueu a Afegeix i " +"empleneu les entrades adequades. \n" +"\tEl nom d'àlies i la llista d'usuaris a l'àlies no han d'estar buits. \n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. RunAs Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" +"To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on " +"Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" -"Per editar un àlies d'executa_com_a existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" +"Per editar un àlies d'executa_com_a existent, seleccioneu una entrada de " +"la taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" "\t Per esborrar-ne un, cliqueu a Elimina. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -618,8 +700,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:222 msgid "" "<big>Command Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set of commands \n" -"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is then used to refer\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set " +"of commands \n" +"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is " +"then used to refer\n" "\tto all commands in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -628,21 +712,29 @@ #. Command Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:231 msgid "" -"To add a new command alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new command alias, click on Add button and fill in " +"appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of commands in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per afegir un nou àlies d'ordre, cliqueu a Afegeix i empleneu les " +"entrades adequades. \n" +"\tEl nom d'àlies i la llista d'ordres a l'àlies no han d'estar buits. \n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. Command Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:238 msgid "" -"To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" +"To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click " +"on Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" -"Per editar un àlies d'ordre existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula i cliqueu a Edita.\n" +"Per editar un àlies d'ordre existent, seleccioneu una entrada de la taula " +"i cliqueu a Edita.\n" "\t Per esborrar-ne un, cliqueu a Elimina. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -651,8 +743,11 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "<big>User Alias</big> \n" -"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with '%') or other\n" -"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in this alias.\n" +"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with " +"'%') or other\n" +"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, " +"numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in " +"this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -661,9 +756,12 @@ #. Single User Alias Help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:253 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add users or groups to the\n" -"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on Add button.\n" -"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add users or " +"groups to the\n" +"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on " +"Add button.\n" +"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " +"and click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -676,18 +774,26 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:262 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:292 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:315 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"Note: Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one member.\n" +"Note: Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one " +"member.\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Nota: el nom de l'àlies no pot estar buit. Cada àlies ha de tenir com " +"a mínim un membre.\n" +"\t" #. Single Host Alias Help 1/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:266 msgid "" "<big>Host Alias</big> \n" -"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP addresses\n" -"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" -"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. It is \n" -"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which \n" +"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP " +"addresses\n" +"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. " +"192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" +"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. " +"It is \n" +"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore " +"only), which \n" "\tis then used to refer to all hosts in this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -697,28 +803,45 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:277 msgid "" "Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add hosts to the\n" -"\talias, click on Add button. A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter\n" +"\talias, click on Add button. A pop-up window will appear, where you " +"can enter\n" "\tvalid hostname or IP address and then click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Introduïu un nom únic a l'entrada de text Nom d'àlies. Per afegir " +"amfitrions a\n" +"\tl'àlies, cliqueu a Afegeix. Apareixerà una finestra emergent, on " +"podeu introduir\n" +"\tun nom d'amfitrió vàlid o adreça IP i clicar a D'acord.\n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. Single Host Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:285 msgid "" -"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and " +"click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per suprimir un amfitrió de l'àlies, seleccioneu l'entrada corresponent de " +"la taula i cliqueu a\n" +"\tSuprimeix. Per acabar la configuració, cliqueu a D'acord.\n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. Single RunAs Alias Help 1/2 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:296 msgid "" "<big>RunAs Alias</big> \n" -"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more users, system groups \n" -"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must contain \n" -"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to refer to all users \n" +"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more " +"users, system groups \n" +"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must " +"contain \n" +"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to " +"refer to all users \n" "\tin this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -728,11 +851,15 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:319 msgid "" "<big>Command Alias</big> \n" -"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional parameters), directories, or\n" -"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and\n" +"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional " +"parameters), directories, or\n" +"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase " +"letters, numbers and\n" "\tunderscore only), which is \n" -"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally have one or more\n" -"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these parameters only. If a \n" +"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally " +"have one or more\n" +"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these " +"parameters only. If a \n" "\tdirectory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -741,21 +868,39 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:331 msgid "" -"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add a new command to the alias,\n" -"\tclick on Add button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter command name\n" -"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on Browse button. Additionally, you can\n" +"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add a new command " +"to the alias,\n" +"\tclick on Add button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can " +"enter command name\n" +"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on Browse button. " +"Additionally, you can\n" "\tspecify command parameters in Parameters text entry\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Introduïu un nom únic a l'entrada de text Nom d'àlies. Per afegir " +"una nova ordre a\n" +"\tl'àlies, cliqueu a Afegeix. Apareixerà una finestra emergent, on " +"podeu introduir\n" +"\tun nom d'ordre (o selecconar-ne un des del navegador de fitxers clicant a " +"Navega.\n" +"\tAddicionalment, podeu especifcar paràmetres d'ordre a l'entrada de text " +"Paràmeters\n" +"\t" #. Single Command Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:339 msgid "" -"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " +"and click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" +"Per suprimir una ordre de l'àlies, seleccioneu l'entrada corresponent de la " +"taula i cliqueu a\n" +"\tSuprimeix. Per acabar la configuració, cliqueu a D'acord.\n" +"\t\n" +"\t" #. if(issubstring(line[3]:"","NOPASSWD:")) { #. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) true; @@ -764,8 +909,11 @@ #. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) false; #. } #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:400 -msgid "This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" -msgstr "Aquesta regla és una regla de sistema necessària per al funcionament correcte de sudo.\n" +msgid "" +"This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" +msgstr "" +"Aquesta regla és una regla de sistema necessària per al funcionament " +"correcte de sudo.\n" #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:407 msgid "" @@ -785,8 +933,11 @@ #. end Commands #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:545 -msgid "All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" -msgstr "Es perdran tots els canvis. Esteu segur que voleu sortir de la configuració sense desar-la?" +msgid "" +"All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" +msgstr "" +"Es perdran tots els canvis. Esteu segur que voleu sortir de la configuració " +"sense desar-la?" #. Error message #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:573 -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90703 - trunk/yast/ca/po
by vertaal＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: vertaal Date: 2014-11-03 19:31:46 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90703 Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po Log: support.ca.po: done (Dmedina) Committed with Vertaal on behalf of Dmedina Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po 2014-11-03 17:41:40 UTC (rev 90702) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po 2014-11-03 18:31:46 UTC (rev 90703) @@ -8,14 +8,14 @@ "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 12:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 20:01+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: none\n" "Language: ca\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.7\n" +"X-Generator: Poedit 1.6.9\n" #. Command line help text for the Xsupport module #: src/clients/support.rb:56 @@ -44,7 +44,9 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:58 msgid "This will start a browser connecting to the SUSE Support Center Portal." -msgstr "Això iniciarà un navegador que es connectarà amb el SUSE Support Center Portal." +msgstr "" +"Això iniciarà un navegador que es connectarà amb el SUSE Support Center " +"Portal." #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:68 msgid "Open" @@ -160,7 +162,9 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:451 msgid "Include all log file lines, gather additional rotated logs" -msgstr "Inclou totes les línies de fitxer de registre, recull registres rotats addicionals" +msgstr "" +"Inclou totes les línies de fitxer de registre, recull registres rotats " +"addicionals" #. Support configure1 dialog contents #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:465 @@ -286,7 +290,8 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Avortar-ne l'inici:</big> \n" -"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració amb seguretat prement Avorta ara.\n" +"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració amb seguretat prement Avorta ara." +"\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:44 @@ -348,10 +353,20 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big> \n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use Open SUSE Support Center.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " +"Open SUSE Support Center.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " +"you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.\n" msgstr "" +"\n" +"<big>Obrir el centre de suport de SUSE</big> \n" +"Per iniciar un navegador web que obri el portal de SUSE Support Centerl, " +"useu Obre el centre de suport de SUSE.\n" +"Llavors podeu obrrir un Service Request amb Global Technical Support. " +"Assegureu-vos d'apuntar\n" +"el número de Service Request per incloure'l a la càrrega de dades de " +"supportconfig.\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:80 @@ -360,7 +375,8 @@ "To run the supportconfig data collection tool, use Collect Data" msgstr "" "<big>Recopilació de dades</big> \n" -"Per executar l'eina de recopilació de dades supportconfig, useu Recopila dades" +"Per executar l'eina de recopilació de dades supportconfig, useu Recopila " +"dades" #. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:84 @@ -377,11 +393,13 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<big>Supportconfig Options</big> \n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " +"settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" "<big>Opcions de supportconfig</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu una opció per sobreescriue els predeterminats. Podeu usar els paràmetres predeterminats,\n" +"Seleccioneu una opció per sobreescriue els predeterminats. Podeu usar els " +"paràmetres predeterminats,\n" "recopilar un màxim de dades o només un mínim." #. Configure1 dialog help 2/3 @@ -392,7 +410,8 @@ "to select specific data sets to collect.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Paràmetres avançats</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu Usa els personalitzats i cliqueu a Configuració avançada\n" +"Seleccioneu Usa els personalitzats i cliqueu a Configuració " +"avançada\n" "per seleccionar dades específiques per recopilar.\n" #. Configure1 dialog help 3/3 @@ -400,59 +419,88 @@ msgid "" "<big>Options</big> \n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</" +"p>\n" msgstr "" "<big>Opcions</big> \n" "Recopila informació addicional. Normalment aquestes opcions no són\n" -"necessàries, però es poden incloure si les circumstàncies requereixen més informació.\n" +"necessàries, però es poden incloure si les circumstàncies requereixen més " +"informació.\n" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<big>Default Options</big> \n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball." +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " +"supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" "<big>Opcions per defecte</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu o desmarqueu cada conjunt de dades que vulgueu incloure a supportconfig tarball." +"Seleccioneu o desmarqueu cada conjunt de dades que vulgueu incloure a " +"supportconfig tarball." #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<big>Contact Information</big> \n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file." +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " +"include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." +"txt file." msgstr "" "<big>Informació de contacte</big> \n" -"Empleneu cada un dels camps de la informació de contacte que vulgueu incloure\n" -"a la supportconfig tarball. Els camps es desen en un fitxer basic-environment.txt." +"Empleneu cada un dels camps de la informació de contacte que vulgueu " +"incloure\n" +"a la supportconfig tarball. Els camps es desen en un fitxer basic-" +"environment.txt." #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<big>Upload Information</big> \n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " +"upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " +"filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " +"tarball filename.\n" "See man supportconfig(1) for further details." msgstr "" +"<big>Informació de càrrega</big> \n" +"La destinació de la càrrega és l'URI de destinació de la supportconfig " +"tarball. Els serveis de càrrega suportats inclouen\n" +"ftp, http, https i scp. Si necessiteu incloure el nom de fitxer de la " +"supportconfig tarball a la destinació de càrrega,\n" +"useu la paraula clau tarball. Això es reemplaçarà pel nom de fitxer " +"real de la tarball.\n" +"Vegeu man supportconfig(1) per a més detalls." #. Contact dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<big>Upload Target Examples</big> \n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball \n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball</" +"i> \n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming \n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives" msgstr "" +"<big>Exemples de destinació de càrrega</big> \n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball</" +"i> \n" +"ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming \n" +"scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives" #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" +"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " +"Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " +"service request.\n" msgstr "" -"Nota: Si esteu carregant una supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support,\n" -"assegureu-vos d'incloure el número de petició de servei d'11 dígits des de la vostra petició de servei obert.\n" +"Nota: Si esteu carregant una supportconfig tarball a Global " +"Technical Support,\n" +"assegureu-vos d'incloure el número de petició de servei d'11 dígits des de " +"la vostra petició de servei obert.\n" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:137 @@ -467,23 +515,29 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<big>Collected Data Review</big> \n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " +"of the collected data,\n" "use Remove from Data and the selected file will be removed.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Resum de dades recopilades</big> \n" -"Reviseu les dades recopilades per supportconfig. Si no voleu compartir algunes de les dades recopilades,\n" -"useu Suprimeix de les dades i el fitxer seleccionat se suprimirà.\n" +"Reviseu les dades recopilades per supportconfig. Si no voleu compartir " +"algunes de les dades recopilades,\n" +"useu Suprimeix de les dades i el fitxer seleccionat se suprimirà.</" +"p>\n" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" +"b> \n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" " \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</big> \n" -"Si voleu desar una còpia de la supportconfig tarball, seleccioneu-ne el directori\n" +"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</" +"big> \n" +"Si voleu desar una còpia de la supportconfig tarball, seleccioneu-ne el " +"directori\n" "de destinació i assegureu-vos que l'opció està marcada.\n" " \n" @@ -492,13 +546,15 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<big>Upload URL</big> \n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " +"uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "<big>Càrrega d'URL</big> \n" -"Aquesta opció té la localització a la qual la supportconfig tarball es carregarà\n" +"Aquesta opció té la localització a la qual la supportconfig tarball es " +"carregarà\n" "com a valor per defecte.\n" "Canvieu-ne el valor només en casos especials.\n" "\n" @@ -517,13 +573,16 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" +"b> \n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the Package with log files field.\n" " \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</big> \n" -"Si ja heu creat la supportconfig tarball, escriviu-ne el camí complet al camp\n" +"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</" +"big> \n" +"Si ja heu creat la supportconfig tarball, escriviu-ne el camí complet al " +"camp\n" "Paquet amb fitxers de registre.\n" " \n" @@ -589,7 +648,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:42 msgid "Information related to capturing a system core dump. crash.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la captura de l'abocament del nucli. crash.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb la captura de l'abocament del nucli. crash.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:45 msgid "Information related to cron and at. cron.txt" @@ -597,7 +657,9 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:48 msgid "Disk, file system mounts and partition information. fs-diskio.txt" -msgstr "Informació de particions i punts de muntatge del sistema de fitxers i del disc. fs-diskio.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació de particions i punts de muntatge del sistema de fitxers i del " +"disc. fs-diskio.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:51 msgid "Domain Name Service information. dns.txt" @@ -605,19 +667,28 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:54 msgid "Novell eDirectory health check information. novell-edir.txt" -msgstr "Informació de la comprovació de salut de Novell eDirectory. novell-edir.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació de la comprovació de salut de Novell eDirectory. novell-edir.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" -msgstr "Informació de l'entorn del sistema, inclou sysctl i l'entorn d'arrel. env.txt" +msgid "" +"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." +"txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació de l'entorn del sistema, inclou sysctl i l'entorn d'arrel. env.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" -msgstr "Obté recursivament *.conf files, juntament amb altres diversos fitxers de configuració a /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "" +"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " +"in /etc. etc.txt" +msgstr "" +"Obté recursivament *.conf files, juntament amb altres diversos fitxers de " +"configuració a /etc. etc.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 msgid "Enterprise Volume Management System-related information. evms.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb Enterprise Volume Management System. evms.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb Enterprise Volume Management System. evms.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:66 msgid "Heartbeat/high availabilty cluster information. ha.txt" @@ -632,8 +703,12 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb LDAP, inclou una cerca arrel DSE. ldap.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb Novell Linux User Management, inclou un DSE arrel, cerques d'UNIX Config i d'estació de treball. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "" +"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " +"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb Novell Linux User Management, inclou un DSE " +"arrel, cerques d'UNIX Config i d'estació de treball. novell-lum.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 msgid "Linux Volume Management-related information. lvm.txt" @@ -661,7 +736,9 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:96 msgid "Network-related information, including firewall rules. network.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la xarxa, inclou les regles del tallafoc. network.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb la xarxa, inclou les regles del tallafoc. network." +"txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:99 msgid "Network File System-related information. nfs.txt" @@ -688,8 +765,12 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb OpenWBEM. openwbem.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el mòdul d'autenticació connectable, inclou informació del compte de l'usuari. pam.txt" +msgid "" +"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " +"information. pam.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb el mòdul d'autenticació connectable, inclou " +"informació del compte de l'usuari. pam.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 msgid "Printing and CUPS-related information. print.txt" @@ -701,15 +782,20 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:126 msgid "Update daemon-related information. updates-daemon.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el dimoni d'actualització. updates-daemon.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb el dimoni d'actualització. updates-daemon.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:129 msgid "Update client related information. updates.txt" msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el client d'actualització. updates.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" -msgstr "Informació relacionada amb informes d'activitat del sistema, inclou còpies de fitxers de dades SAR. sar.txt" +msgid "" +"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " +"data files. sar.txt" +msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb informes d'activitat del sistema, inclou còpies " +"de fitxers de dades SAR. sar.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 msgid "SLES Real Time kernel-related information. slert.txt" @@ -721,10 +807,20 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " +"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " +"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" +"Informació relacionada amb autoseguiment, anàlisi i tecnologia de " +"comunicació d'informes per als discos durs.\n" +"AVÍS: alguns controladors de discos durs i dispositius no es comporten del " +"tot bé. El sondeig de dades SMART és conegut per canviar sistemes de " +"fitxers \n" +"al mode de només lectura o fins i tot per penjar el servidor. Assegureu-vos " +"que el sondeig de dades SMART funciona al vostre entorn abans d'habilitar\n" +"aquesta opció. fs-smartmon.txt\n" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:146 msgid "Samba and CIFS-related information. samba.txt" @@ -755,32 +851,59 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la virtualizació XEN. xen.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" -msgstr "Indica a supportconfig de cercar tots els fitxers d'instàncies eDirectory al sistema de fitxers. Si està establert, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST també està establert automàticament. -e" +msgid "" +"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " +"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgstr "" +"Indica a supportconfig de cercar tots els fitxers d'instàncies eDirectory al " +"sistema de fitxers. Si està establert, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST també està " +"establert automàticament. -e" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" -msgstr "Una llista completa de fitxers que usen \"find\" del sistema de fitxers d'arrel. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "" +"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgstr "" +"Una llista completa de fitxers que usen \"find\" del sistema de fitxers " +"d'arrel. -L, fs-files.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" -msgstr "Inclou tot el fitxer de registre sencer, inclou comentaris, en comptes de només línies de VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT. Addicionalment els registres rotats s'inclouen si estan disponibles. -l" +msgid "" +"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " +"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " +"available. -l" +msgstr "" +"Inclou tot el fitxer de registre sencer, inclou comentaris, en comptes de " +"només línies de VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT. Addicionalment els registres rotats " +"s'inclouen si estan disponibles. -l" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 msgid "Minimizes the amount of disk information and detailed scanning. -d" msgstr "Minimitza la quatitat d'informació de disc i d'escaneig detallat. -d" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." -msgstr "Normalment s'inclouen tots els registres de /var/log/YaST2/*. Aquesta opció minimitza la quantitat que es recupera de cada fitxer." +msgid "" +"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " +"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgstr "" +"Normalment s'inclouen tots els registres de /var/log/YaST2/*. Aquesta opció " +"minimitza la quantitat que es recupera de cada fitxer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" -msgstr "Executa un rpm -V en cada paquet RPM instal·lat. Això triga força temps a completar-se. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "" +"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " +"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgstr "" +"Executa un rpm -V en cada paquet RPM instal·lat. Això triga força temps a " +"completar-se. -v, rpm-verify.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" -msgstr "Normalment només es llisten els tipus de serveis de base SLP. Aquesta opció us permet cercar cada un dels tipus de serveis descoberts individualment. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "" +"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " +"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgstr "" +"Normalment només es llisten els tipus de serveis de base SLP. Aquesta opció " +"us permet cercar cada un dels tipus de serveis descoberts individualment. -" +"s, slp.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 msgid "Company name to include in the basic-environment.txt" @@ -799,36 +922,64 @@ msgstr "Telèfon de contacte per incloure a basic-environment.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." -msgstr "El nombre de línies per incloure quan s'obté un fitxer de registre. Zero significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." +msgid "" +"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " +"entire file." +msgstr "" +"El nombre de línies per incloure quan s'obté un fitxer de registre. Zero " +"significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." -msgstr "La localització de supportconfig tarball. S'usa sempre la primera localització vàlida de la llista." +msgid "" +"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " +"always used." +msgstr "" +"La localització de supportconfig tarball. S'usa sempre la primera " +"localització vàlida de la llista." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." -msgstr "El màxim nombre de línies de /var/log/messages a obtenir. Zero significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " +"entire file." +msgstr "" +"El màxim nombre de línies de /var/log/messages a obtenir. Zero significa que " +"s'obté el fitxer sencer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." -msgstr "El màxim nombre de fitxers de registre del \"heartbeat policy engine\" per incloure a supportconfig tarball." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " +"supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "" +"El màxim nombre de fitxers de registre del \"heartbeat policy engine\" per " +"incloure a supportconfig tarball." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." -msgstr "El màxim nombre de fitxers de dades SAR per incloure a supportconfig tarball." +msgid "" +"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "" +"El màxim nombre de fitxers de dades SAR per incloure a supportconfig tarball." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " +"you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" +"Q." msgstr "" -"Quan està establert a 1, supportconfig s'executa en mode quiet. Aquesta opció és útil si\n" -"teniu pensat executar supportconfig regularment en un \"cron job\", per exemple. Establiu-ho amb -Q." +"Quan està establert a 1, supportconfig s'executa en mode quiet. Aquesta " +"opció és útil si\n" +"teniu pensat executar supportconfig regularment en un \"cron job\", per " +"exemple. Establiu-ho amb -Q." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." -msgstr "Usat per especificar on es carregarà la supportconfig tarball, quan s'usa l'opció d'inici -u srnum. Podeu especificar qualsevol servidor FTP que suporti càrregues anònimes. Per defecte és el servidor públic ftp de SUSE." +msgid "" +"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " +"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " +"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgstr "" +"Usat per especificar on es carregarà la supportconfig tarball, quan s'usa " +"l'opció d'inici -u srnum. Podeu especificar qualsevol servidor FTP que " +"suporti càrregues anònimes. Per defecte és el servidor públic ftp de SUSE." #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/support/wizards.rb:147 -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90702 - trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po
by ramax＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: ramax Date: 2014-11-03 18:41:40 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90702 Modified: trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.zh_TW.po Log: release note zh_TW update Modified: trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.zh_TW.po 2014-11-03 17:26:26 UTC (rev 90701) +++ trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.zh_TW.po 2014-11-03 17:41:40 UTC (rev 90702) @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: RELEASE-NOTES\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 15:57+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-01 00:44+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-04 00:13+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ramax Lo <ramaxlo(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional <kde-i18n-doc(a)kde.org>\n" "Language: \n" @@ -43,37 +43,37 @@ #. bnc#903242 #: xml/release-notes.xml:102(title) msgid "Live CD Installer and Keyboard Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Live CD 安裝程式與鍵盤設定" #: xml/release-notes.xml:103(para) msgid "The Live CD installer presents a problem related with the keyboard settings. If the user changes from the QWERTY keyboard layout (the default en-US variant), this setting will not be properly applied, and the new system will stay with a QWERTY pre-configuration." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Live CD 安裝程式帶有一個與鍵盤設定有關的問題。若使用者改變了 QWERTY 鍵盤佈局 (預設的 en-US 變形)，該變更將不會生效，新安裝的系統將會維持設定前的 QWERTY 佈局。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:109(para) msgid "As a workaround, use the <command>localectl</command> command-line tool after the installation. For example (to install a German keyboard layout):" -msgstr "" +msgstr "做為暫時性的解決方案，請在安裝完成後，使用命令列工具 <command>localectl</command> 設定。例如要安裝德文鍵盤佈局：" #: xml/release-notes.xml:115(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "localectl set-x11-keymap de pc105 nodeadkeys" -msgstr "" +msgstr "localectl set-x11-keymap de pc105 nodeadkeys" #: xml/release-notes.xml:116(para) msgid "This issue is not present in the DVD Installer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "這個問題不會出現在 DVD 版本的安裝程式。" #. bnc#895447 #: xml/release-notes.xml:123(title) msgid "Network After an Update With YaST" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 YaST 升級系統後的網路設定" #: xml/release-notes.xml:124(para) msgid "After updating from 13.1 to 13.2 using YaST, there are good chances that the new Wicked network method is running together with the old NetworkManager, if you are using a laptop with a wifi connection." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在使用 YaST 從 13.1 升級到 13.2 後，若您是使用筆電連接無線網路，會有很大的機會新的 Wicked 網路設定方法會與舊的 NetworkManager 一同執行。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:130(para) msgid "To solve this, first disable Wicked and enable again NetworkManager:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "要解決這個問題，首先停用 Wicked 並重新啟用 NetworkManager：" #: xml/release-notes.xml:134(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -84,12 +84,15 @@ "systemctl --force enable NetworkManager.service\n" "systemctl start network.service" msgstr "" +"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop network.service\n" +"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop wickedd.service\n" +"systemctl disable wicked.service\n" +"systemctl --force enable NetworkManager.service\n" +"systemctl start network.service" #: xml/release-notes.xml:140(para) -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "To query the currently selected service, use:" msgid "Then check whether the currently selected service is actually NetworkManager:" -msgstr "要查詢目前所選擇的服務，請使用：" +msgstr "然後檢查是否現在選擇的服務的確是 NetworkManager：" #: xml/release-notes.xml:145(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -98,66 +101,60 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:147(para) msgid "And update <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "並且更新 <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>：" #: xml/release-notes.xml:151(screen) -#, fuzzy, no-wrap -#| msgid "Getting updates" msgid "netconfig update" -msgstr "取得更新" +msgstr "netconfig update" #: xml/release-notes.xml:153(para) msgid "Or reboot after the <command>systemctl</command> commands to restart also <command>wpa_suplicant</command>." -msgstr "" +msgstr "或者在 <command>systemctl</command> 指令同時重啟 <command>wpa_suplicant</command> 後，重新開機。" #. bnc#898023 #: xml/release-notes.xml:161(title) msgid "Warning: No Location for Bootloader Stage1 Selected" -msgstr "" +msgstr "警告：所選擇的 Stage1 開機引導程式找不到位置" #: xml/release-notes.xml:162(para) msgid "During the initial installation, in the summary view of YaST, a warning as follows can appear bellow the bootloader section: <quote>Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please select above location.</quote>" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在初始安裝時，在 YaST 的摘要畫面上，一個如下的警告訊息會出現在開機引導程式設定區塊下：<quote>Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please select above location.</quote>" #: xml/release-notes.xml:168(para) msgid "This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely ignore it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "該警告訊息是 YaST 的一個臭蟲 (現已在 Factory 中修正)，您可以安心地忽略它。" #. bnc#900954 #: xml/release-notes.xml:175(title) -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Start Windows" msgid "BtrFS and Windows 7" -msgstr "開啟 Windows" +msgstr "BtrFS 與 Windows 7" #: xml/release-notes.xml:176(para) msgid "If you have Windows XP and you want to install openSUSE 13.2 with Btrfs, an error message in YaST will inform you about problems during the bootloader installation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "若您有安裝 Windows XP 且想要安裝 openSUSE 13.2 並使用 Btrfs，YaST 會有一個錯誤訊息通知您在安裝開機引導程式時出現問題。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:181(para) msgid "The safest option is to install in a partition with Ext4 instead of BtrFS. There is a fix that will reach Factory soon, but will be not present for 13.2." -msgstr "" +msgstr "最安全的選項是安裝系統到 Ext4 而不是 BtrFS 的磁碟分割區。近期已有修正將進入 Factory，但現時 13.2 並不會納入。" #. bnc#897847 #: xml/release-notes.xml:189(title) msgid "Unbranded Grub2 on New Installs From Live" -msgstr "" +msgstr "從 Live CD 安裝新系統，Grub2 布景主題失效" #: xml/release-notes.xml:190(para) msgid "A bug in YaST prevents the branding in GRUB2 bootloader when installed from the LiveCD medium. Note, the preferred way to install openSUSE 13.2 is using the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader during the installation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "YaST 有一個問題，使得當使用 LiveCD 安裝新系統時，GRUB2 的布景主題沒有作用。請注意，安裝 openSUSE 13.2 最推薦的方法是使用 DVD 或是網路安裝。這二種方式安裝可以產生有正確布景主題的開機引導程式。" # dialog title for ftp installation #. bnc#899895 #: xml/release-notes.xml:200(title) -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "FTP Installation" msgid "NET Installation Using Wifi" -msgstr "FTP 安裝" +msgstr "在無線網路環境下的網路安裝" #: xml/release-notes.xml:201(para) msgid "Performing the NET install using Wifi presents some problems in YaST. Fixing this is work in progress and will be soon available. Meanwhile the only option is to use a wire connection to complete the NET installation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在無線網路環境下使用網路安裝會使 YaST 發生一些問題。問題的修正仍在進行中，很快就會完成。在此同時唯一的解決方式就是使用有線網路來進行網路安裝。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:210(title) msgid "General" @@ -211,7 +208,7 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:352(title) msgid "System Upgrade" -msgstr "系統昇級" +msgstr "系統升級" #: xml/release-notes.xml:359(title) msgid "Technical" @@ -232,52 +229,50 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:384(title) msgid "Information About the FGLRX Driver" -msgstr "" +msgstr "關於 FGLRX 驅動程式的資訊" #: xml/release-notes.xml:385(para) msgid "For more information about the AMD FGLRX drivers in openSUSE 13.2 and its status, see <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…</ulink>." -msgstr "" +msgstr "關於更多 openSUSE 13.2 的 AMD FGLRX 驅動程式資訊及狀態，請參閱 <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…</ulink>。" #. bnc#899610 #: xml/release-notes.xml:394(title) msgid "Second Static Mouse Pointer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "出現第二個靜態滑鼠指標" #: xml/release-notes.xml:395(para) msgid "If you see two mouse pointers and have two graphic boards, where one is an Intel board, try uninstalling <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem> and thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse pointer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "若您看到有出現二個滑鼠指標，且您安裝了二張顯示卡，其中之一是 Intel 顯示卡，請嘗試移除 <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem>，並只使用另一張顯示卡。這樣滑鼠指標就會消失。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:402(para) msgid "This and other issues with the Intel driver like (see <ulink url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." -msgstr "" +msgstr "該問題及其他與 Intel 驅動程式相關的問題將會被處理。若可能的話，會提供線上更新來解決。" #. bnc#901869 #: xml/release-notes.xml:411(title) msgid "Missing Dependencies for virt-manager" -msgstr "" +msgstr "virt-manager 缺少相依套件" #: xml/release-notes.xml:412(para) msgid "If you find a problem executing virt-manager, try installing <systemitem>typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0</systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." -msgstr "" +msgstr "若您發現執行 virt-manager 有問題，請嘗試安裝 <systemitem>typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>、<systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0</systemitem> 以及 <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:418(para) msgid "In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made explicit." -msgstr "" +msgstr "將來在線上更新時，會有新版本將以上相依套件加入。" #. bnc#900813 #: xml/release-notes.xml:425(title) -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "No Authorization" msgid "Modem Authorization After Suspend" -msgstr "不需驗證" +msgstr "休眠後的新認證方式" #: xml/release-notes.xml:426(para) msgid "openSUSE 13.2 is a more strict in security tha 13.1. If you are connected via a UMTS or 3G modem and you suspend the machine, the system will ask you for the root password before reconnecting." -msgstr "" +msgstr "openSUSE 13.2 在安全性方面比起 13.1 更嚴格。若您已透過 UMTS 或是 3G 數據機連上網路，並且讓機器進入休眠，系統將會在重新連線前再次詢問您的 root 密碼。" #: xml/release-notes.xml:432(para) msgid "You can change this behavior changing a line in /etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以修改 /etc/polkit-default-privs.standard 其中一行來改變該行為。將" #: xml/release-notes.xml:437(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -286,10 +281,13 @@ "org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin:auth_admin:yes\n" " " msgstr "" +"# ModemManager\n" +"org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin:auth_admin:yes\n" +" " #: xml/release-notes.xml:441(para) msgid "with:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "改為" #: xml/release-notes.xml:445(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -298,20 +296,23 @@ "org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin_keep\n" " " msgstr "" +"# ModemManager\n" +"org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin_keep\n" +" " #. bnc#901511 #: xml/release-notes.xml:452(title) msgid "Package Search Missing in GTK UI of YaST" -msgstr "" +msgstr "YaST GTK 使用介面缺少套件搜尋功能" #: xml/release-notes.xml:453(para) msgid "The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "YaST 的 GTK 介面沒有套件搜尋欄位。故若您在 GNOME 或 XFCE 環境下且需要該功能，請使用 QT 介面的 YaST：" #: xml/release-notes.xml:459(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "sudo /sbin/yast2 --qt" -msgstr "" +msgstr "sudo /sbin/yast2 --qt" #. bnc#902947 #: xml/release-notes.xml:464(title) @@ -340,7 +341,7 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:499(title) msgid "Removing openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper After Upgrade" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在升級後移除 openSUSE 13.1 KDE 桌布" #: xml/release-notes.xml:500(para) msgid "If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, remove it from the user cache manually:" @@ -353,7 +354,7 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:509(title) msgid "MATE Desktop official integration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "MATE 桌面的官方整合" #: xml/release-notes.xml:511(para) msgid "The MATE desktop is now officially available under openSUSE 13.2 with MATE version 1.8.1, the latest stable release. It provides an intuitive and attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and other Unix-like operating systems." @@ -366,7 +367,7 @@ #. bnc#901013 #: xml/release-notes.xml:525(title) msgid "Slow Start-up in GNOME" -msgstr "" +msgstr "GNOME 啟動很慢" #: xml/release-notes.xml:526(para) msgid "GNOME autologin can cause a slow boot process. Probably there is a race between services not correctly marked to depend on each other. Until the fix will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable the GNOME autologin feature." @@ -401,7 +402,7 @@ #. bnc#903243 #: xml/release-notes.xml:607(title) msgid "YaST (Qt GUI): \"Service Manager\" Icon Appears Twice" -msgstr "" +msgstr "YaST (Qt 介面) 的 \"Service Manager\" 圖示出現二次" #: xml/release-notes.xml:608(para) msgid "In the <guimenu>System</guimenu> section of YaST (Qt GUI) the icon <guimenu>Service Manager</guimenu> appears twice. There is a bug in the Qt version of the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in the desktop files." -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90701 - trunk/lcn/nl/po
by fdekruijf＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: fdekruijf Date: 2014-11-03 18:26:26 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90701 Modified: trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po trunk/lcn/nl/po/software-opensuse-org.nl.po Log: update Modified: trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) +++ trunk/lcn/nl/po/RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE.nl.po 2014-11-03 17:26:26 UTC (rev 90701) @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: RELEASE-NOTES-openSUSE\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 15:57+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-31 09:48+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 18:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Freek de Kruijf <freek(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Dutch <opensuse-nl(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: nl\n" @@ -38,13 +38,25 @@ msgstr "13.2" #: xml/release-notes.xml:17(para) -msgid "openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your PC, Laptop or Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, do office work, play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" -msgstr "openSUSE is een vrij en op Linux gebaseerd besturingssysteem voor uw PC, Laptop of Server. U kunt over het web surfen, uw e-mailberichten en foto's beheren, kantoorwerk doen, video's of muziek afspelen en veel plezier hebben!" +msgid "" +"openSUSE is a free and Linux-based operating system for your PC, Laptop or " +"Server. You can surf the web, manage your e-mails and photos, do office work, " +"play videos or music and have a lot of fun!" +msgstr "" +"openSUSE is een vrij en op Linux gebaseerd besturingssysteem voor uw PC, " +"Laptop of Server. U kunt over het web surfen, uw e-mailberichten en foto's " +"beheren, kantoorwerk doen, video's of muziek afspelen en veel plezier hebben!" #. Previous Release Notes #: xml/release-notes.xml:51(para) -msgid "If you upgrade from an older version to this openSUSE release, see previous release notes listed here: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Release_Notes\"/>" -msgstr "Als u opwaardeert van een oudere versie naar deze uitgave van openSUSE, kijk dan naar de vorige uitgavenotities hier: <ulink url=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Release_Notes\"/>" +msgid "" +"If you upgrade from an older version to this openSUSE release, see previous " +"release notes listed here: <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Releas" +"e_Notes\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Als u opwaardeert van een oudere versie naar deze uitgave van openSUSE, kijk " +"dan naar de vorige uitgavenotities hier: <ulink " +"url=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/openSUSE:Release_Notes\"/>" #: xml/release-notes.xml:90(title) msgid "Installation" @@ -53,53 +65,84 @@ #. bnc#903242 #: xml/release-notes.xml:102(title) msgid "Live CD Installer and Keyboard Settings" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Installeren met Live CD en toetsenbordinstellingen" #: xml/release-notes.xml:103(para) -msgid "The Live CD installer presents a problem related with the keyboard settings. If the user changes from the QWERTY keyboard layout (the default en-US variant), this setting will not be properly applied, and the new system will stay with a QWERTY pre-configuration." +msgid "" +"The Live CD installer presents a problem related with the keyboard settings. " +"If the user changes from the QWERTY keyboard layout (the default en-US " +"variant), this setting will not be properly applied, and the new system will " +"stay with a QWERTY pre-configuration." msgstr "" +"Installeren met de Live CD levert een probleem gerelateerd aan de " +"toetsenbordinstellingen. Als de gebruiker verandert vanuit de QWERTY indeling " +"van het toetsenbord (de standaard en-US variant), dan wordt deze instelling " +"niet goed toegepast en het nieuw systeem blijft in een QWERTY voorinstelling." #: xml/release-notes.xml:109(para) -msgid "As a workaround, use the <command>localectl</command> command-line tool after the installation. For example (to install a German keyboard layout):" +msgid "" +"As a workaround, use the <command>localectl</command> command-line tool after " +"the installation. For example (to install a German keyboard layout):" msgstr "" +"Als workaround gebruikt u de het hulpmiddel voor de opdrachtregel <command>" +"localectl</command> na de installatie. bijvoorbeeld (om een Duitse " +"toetsenbordindeling te installeren):" #: xml/release-notes.xml:115(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "localectl set-x11-keymap de pc105 nodeadkeys" -msgstr "" +msgstr "localectl set-x11-keymap de pc105 nodeadkeys" #: xml/release-notes.xml:116(para) msgid "This issue is not present in the DVD Installer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Dit probleem is niet aanwezig bij het installeren met de DVD." #. bnc#895447 #: xml/release-notes.xml:123(title) msgid "Network After an Update With YaST" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Network na opwaarderen met YaST" #: xml/release-notes.xml:124(para) -msgid "After updating from 13.1 to 13.2 using YaST, there are good chances that the new Wicked network method is running together with the old NetworkManager, if you are using a laptop with a wifi connection." +msgid "" +"After updating from 13.1 to 13.2 using YaST, there are good chances that the " +"new Wicked network method is running together with the old NetworkManager, if " +"you are using a laptop with a wifi connection." msgstr "" +"Na opwaarderen van 13.1 naar 13.2 met YaST, is er een goede kans dat, als u " +"een laptop met een wifi-verbinding gebruikt, de nieuwe Wicked netwerkmethode " +"draait samen met de oude NetworkManager." #: xml/release-notes.xml:130(para) msgid "To solve this, first disable Wicked and enable again NetworkManager:" msgstr "" +"Om dit op te lossen, schakel eerst Wicked uit en schakel opnieuw " +"NetworkManager in:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:134(screen) #, no-wrap msgid "" -"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop network.service\n" -"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop wickedd.service\n" +"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop " +"network.service\n" +"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop " +"wickedd.service\n" "systemctl disable wicked.service\n" "systemctl --force enable NetworkManager.service\n" "systemctl start network.service" msgstr "" +"systemctl is-active network.service && systemctl stop " +"network.service\n" +"systemctl is-active wickedd.service && systemctl stop " +"wickedd.service\n" +"systemctl disable wicked.service\n" +"systemctl --force enable NetworkManager.service\n" +"systemctl start network.service" #: xml/release-notes.xml:140(para) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "To query the currently selected service, use:" -msgid "Then check whether the currently selected service is actually NetworkManager:" -msgstr "Om na te gaan wat de nu geselecteerde service is, gebruikt u:" +msgid "" +"Then check whether the currently selected service is actually NetworkManager:" +msgstr "" +"Controleer dan of de nu geselecteerde service ook echt NetworkManager is:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:145(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -108,45 +151,65 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:147(para) msgid "And update <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "En werk <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> bij:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:151(screen) -#, fuzzy, no-wrap +#, no-wrap #| msgid "Getting updates" msgid "netconfig update" -msgstr "Opwaarderingen ophalen" +msgstr "netconfig update" #: xml/release-notes.xml:153(para) -msgid "Or reboot after the <command>systemctl</command> commands to restart also <command>wpa_suplicant</command>." +msgid "" +"Or reboot after the <command>systemctl</command> commands to restart also <" +"command>wpa_suplicant</command>." msgstr "" +"Of start opnieuw op na het commando <command>systemctl</command> om ook <" +"command>wpa_suplicant</command> opnieuw op te starten." #. bnc#898023 #: xml/release-notes.xml:161(title) msgid "Warning: No Location for Bootloader Stage1 Selected" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Waarschuwing: geen locatie voor Bootloader Stage1 geselecteerd" #: xml/release-notes.xml:162(para) -msgid "During the initial installation, in the summary view of YaST, a warning as follows can appear bellow the bootloader section: <quote>Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please select above location.</quote>" +msgid "" +"During the initial installation, in the summary view of YaST, a warning as " +"follows can appear bellow the bootloader section: <quote>Warning: No location " +"for bootloader stage1 selected. Unless you know what are you doing please " +"select above location.</quote>" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:168(para) -msgid "This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely ignore it." +msgid "" +"This warning is a bug in YaST (now fixed in Factory) and you can safely " +"ignore it." msgstr "" #. bnc#900954 #: xml/release-notes.xml:175(title) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "Start Windows" msgid "BtrFS and Windows 7" -msgstr "Windows starten" +msgstr "BtrFS en Windows 7" #: xml/release-notes.xml:176(para) -msgid "If you have Windows XP and you want to install openSUSE 13.2 with Btrfs, an error message in YaST will inform you about problems during the bootloader installation." +msgid "" +"If you have Windows XP and you want to install openSUSE 13.2 with Btrfs, an " +"error message in YaST will inform you about problems during the bootloader " +"installation." msgstr "" +"Als u Windows XP hebt en u wilt openSUSE 13.2 met Btrfs installeren zal een " +"foutmelding in YaST u informeren over problemen bij de installatie van de " +"bootloader." #: xml/release-notes.xml:181(para) -msgid "The safest option is to install in a partition with Ext4 instead of BtrFS. There is a fix that will reach Factory soon, but will be not present for 13.2." +msgid "" +"The safest option is to install in a partition with Ext4 instead of BtrFS. " +"There is a fix that will reach Factory soon, but will be not present for 13.2." msgstr "" +"De veiligste optie is om te installeren in een partitie met Ext4 in plaats " +"van BtrFS. Er is een reparatie die Factory spoedig zal bereiken, maar niet " +"aanwezig is voor 13.2." #. bnc#897847 #: xml/release-notes.xml:189(title) @@ -154,20 +217,30 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:190(para) -msgid "A bug in YaST prevents the branding in GRUB2 bootloader when installed from the LiveCD medium. Note, the preferred way to install openSUSE 13.2 is using the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader during the installation." +msgid "" +"A bug in YaST prevents the branding in GRUB2 bootloader when installed from " +"the LiveCD medium. Note, the preferred way to install openSUSE 13.2 is using " +"the DVD or the NET install. Both mediums generate a proper branded bootloader " +"during the installation." msgstr "" # dialog title for ftp installation #. bnc#899895 #: xml/release-notes.xml:200(title) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "FTP Installation" msgid "NET Installation Using Wifi" -msgstr "FTP-installatie" +msgstr "Installeren met NET met gebruik van Wi-Fi" #: xml/release-notes.xml:201(para) -msgid "Performing the NET install using Wifi presents some problems in YaST. Fixing this is work in progress and will be soon available. Meanwhile the only option is to use a wire connection to complete the NET installation." +msgid "" +"Performing the NET install using Wifi presents some problems in YaST. Fixing " +"this is work in progress and will be soon available. Meanwhile the only " +"option is to use a wire connection to complete the NET installation." msgstr "" +"Uitvoeren van een installatie met NET met aanwezigheid van Wifi levert " +"problemen in YaST. Repareren hiervan is gaande en zal spoedig beschikbaar " +"zijn. Intussen is de enige optie om een draadverbinding te gebruiken om de " +"installatie met NET te volbrengen." #: xml/release-notes.xml:210(title) msgid "General" @@ -178,12 +251,42 @@ msgstr "UEFI—Unified Extensible Firmware Interface" #: xml/release-notes.xml:280(para) -msgid "Prior to installing openSUSE on a system that boots using UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), you are urgently advised to check for any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends and, if available, to install such an update. A pre-installed Windows 8 is a strong indication that your system boots using UEFI." -msgstr "Alvorens openSUSE te installeren op een systeem dat boot met UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), wordt u dringend aangeraden om te controleren op firmware updates, die de maker van de hardware aanbeveelt en, indien beschikbaar, zo'n update te installeren. Een vooraf geïnstalleerde Windows 8 is een sterke aanwijzing dat uw systeem boot met UEFI." +msgid "" +"Prior to installing openSUSE on a system that boots using UEFI (Unified " +"Extensible Firmware Interface), you are urgently advised to check for any " +"firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends and, if available, to install " +"such an update. A pre-installed Windows 8 is a strong indication that your " +"system boots using UEFI." +msgstr "" +"Alvorens openSUSE te installeren op een systeem dat boot met UEFI (Unified " +"Extensible Firmware Interface), wordt u dringend aangeraden om te controleren " +"op firmware updates, die de maker van de hardware aanbeveelt en, indien " +"beschikbaar, zo'n update te installeren. Een vooraf geïnstalleerde Windows 8 " +"is een sterke aanwijzing dat uw systeem boot met UEFI." #: xml/release-notes.xml:288(para) -msgid "<emphasis>Background:</emphasis> Some UEFI firmware has bugs that cause it to break if too much data gets written to the UEFI storage area. Nobody really knows how much \"too much\" is, though. openSUSE minimizes the risk by not writing more than the bare minimum required to boot the OS. The minimum means telling the UEFI firmware about the location of the openSUSE boot loader. Upstream Linux Kernel features that use the UEFI storage area for storing boot and crash information (<literal>pstore</literal>) have been disabled by default. Nevertheless, it is recommended to install any firmware updates the hardware vendor recommends." -msgstr "<emphasis>Achtergrond:</emphasis> Sommige UEFI firmware bevat bugs die er de oorzaak van is dat het niet werkt als er te veel gegevens naar het UEFI-opslaggebied weggeschreven zijn. Niemand weet echter echt hoeveel \"te veel\" is. openSUSE minimaliseert het risico door niet meer weg te schrijven dan het noodzakelijke minimum nodig om het OS op te starten. Het minimum betekent het aan de UEFI firmware vertellen van de locatie van de openSUSE bootloader. Bovenstroomse functies van de Linux-kernel die het UEFI-opslaggebied gebruikt voor opslag van opstart- and crashinformatie (<literal>pstore</literal>) zijn standaard uitgeschakeld. Niettemin is het aanbevolen, om elke update van firmware, die de maker van de hardware aanbeveelt, uit te voeren." +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Background:</emphasis> Some UEFI firmware has bugs that cause it to " +"break if too much data gets written to the UEFI storage area. Nobody really " +"knows how much \"too much\" is, though. openSUSE minimizes the risk by not " +"writing more than the bare minimum required to boot the OS. The minimum means " +"telling the UEFI firmware about the location of the openSUSE boot loader. " +"Upstream Linux Kernel features that use the UEFI storage area for storing " +"boot and crash information (<literal>pstore</literal>) have been disabled by " +"default. Nevertheless, it is recommended to install any firmware updates the " +"hardware vendor recommends." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Achtergrond:</emphasis> Sommige UEFI firmware bevat bugs die er de " +"oorzaak van is dat het niet werkt als er te veel gegevens naar het " +"UEFI-opslaggebied weggeschreven zijn. Niemand weet echter echt hoeveel \"te " +"veel\" is. openSUSE minimaliseert het risico door niet meer weg te schrijven " +"dan het noodzakelijke minimum nodig om het OS op te starten. Het minimum " +"betekent het aan de UEFI firmware vertellen van de locatie van de openSUSE " +"bootloader. Bovenstroomse functies van de Linux-kernel die het " +"UEFI-opslaggebied gebruikt voor opslag van opstart- and crashinformatie (<" +"literal>pstore</literal>) zijn standaard uitgeschakeld. Niettemin is het " +"aanbevolen, om elke update van firmware, die de maker van de hardware " +"aanbeveelt, uit te voeren." #. bnc#850056 #: xml/release-notes.xml:305(title) @@ -191,20 +294,52 @@ msgstr "UEFI, GPT en MS-DOS partities" #: xml/release-notes.xml:306(para) -msgid "Together with the EFI/UEFI specification, a new style of partitioning arrived: GPT (GUID Partition Table). This new schema uses globally unique identifiers (128-bit values displayed in 32 hexadecimal digits) to identify devices and partition types." -msgstr "Samen met de EFI/UEFI specificaties is er een nieuwe stijl van partities maken gekomen: GPT (GUID Partition Table). Dit nieuwe schema gebruikt globaal unieke identifiers (128-bit waarden getoond in 32 hexadecimale tekens) om apparaten en typen partities te identificeren." +msgid "" +"Together with the EFI/UEFI specification, a new style of partitioning " +"arrived: GPT (GUID Partition Table). This new schema uses globally unique " +"identifiers (128-bit values displayed in 32 hexadecimal digits) to identify " +"devices and partition types." +msgstr "" +"Samen met de EFI/UEFI specificaties is er een nieuwe stijl van partities " +"maken gekomen: GPT (GUID Partition Table). Dit nieuwe schema gebruikt globaal " +"unieke identifiers (128-bit waarden getoond in 32 hexadecimale tekens) om " +"apparaten en typen partities te identificeren." #: xml/release-notes.xml:312(para) -msgid "Additionally, the UEFI specification also allows legacy MBR (MS-DOS) partitions. The Linux boot loaders (ELILO or GRUB2) try to automatically generate a GUID for those legacy partitions, and write them to the firmware. Such a GUID can change frequently, causing a rewrite in the firmware. A rewrite consist of two different operation: removing the old entry and creating a new entry that replaces the first one." -msgstr "Bovendien staat de UEFI specificatie ook MBR (MS-DOS) partities toe. De Linux bootloaders (ELILO of GRUB2) proberen automatisch een GUID voor deze ouderwetse partities te genereren en schrijven ze naar de firmware. Zo'n GUID kan frequent wijzigen, wat opnieuw schrijven in de firmware veroorzaakt. Herschrijven bestaat uit twee verschillende bewerkingen: verwijderen van het oude item en maken van een nieuw item dat de eerste vervangt." +msgid "" +"Additionally, the UEFI specification also allows legacy MBR (MS-DOS) " +"partitions. The Linux boot loaders (ELILO or GRUB2) try to automatically " +"generate a GUID for those legacy partitions, and write them to the firmware. " +"Such a GUID can change frequently, causing a rewrite in the firmware. A " +"rewrite consist of two different operation: removing the old entry and " +"creating a new entry that replaces the first one." +msgstr "" +"Bovendien staat de UEFI specificatie ook MBR (MS-DOS) partities toe. De Linux " +"bootloaders (ELILO of GRUB2) proberen automatisch een GUID voor deze " +"ouderwetse partities te genereren en schrijven ze naar de firmware. Zo'n GUID " +"kan frequent wijzigen, wat opnieuw schrijven in de firmware veroorzaakt. " +"Herschrijven bestaat uit twee verschillende bewerkingen: verwijderen van het " +"oude item en maken van een nieuw item dat de eerste vervangt." #: xml/release-notes.xml:321(para) -msgid "Modern firmware has a garbage collector that collects deleted entries and frees the memory reserved for old entries. A problem arises when faulty firmware does not collect and free those entries; this may end up with a non-bootable system." -msgstr "Moderne firmware heeft een garbage-collector die verwijderde items verzameld en het voor oude items gereserveerde geheugen vrijmaakt. Er ontstaat een probleem wanneer foute firmware dit niet verzameld en deze items niet vrij maakt; dit kan eindigen met een niet te booten systeem." +msgid "" +"Modern firmware has a garbage collector that collects deleted entries and " +"frees the memory reserved for old entries. A problem arises when faulty " +"firmware does not collect and free those entries; this may end up with a " +"non-bootable system." +msgstr "" +"Moderne firmware heeft een garbage-collector die verwijderde items verzameld " +"en het voor oude items gereserveerde geheugen vrijmaakt. Er ontstaat een " +"probleem wanneer foute firmware dit niet verzameld en deze items niet vrij " +"maakt; dit kan eindigen met een niet te booten systeem." #: xml/release-notes.xml:327(para) -msgid "The workaround is simple: convert the legacy MBR partition to the new GPT to avoid this problem completely." -msgstr "Er omheen werken is eenvoudig: converteer de ouderwetse MBR-partitie naar het nieuwe GPT om dit probleem volledig te vermijden." +msgid "" +"The workaround is simple: convert the legacy MBR partition to the new GPT to " +"avoid this problem completely." +msgstr "" +"Er omheen werken is eenvoudig: converteer de ouderwetse MBR-partitie naar het " +"nieuwe GPT om dit probleem volledig te vermijden." #. bnc#850052 #: xml/release-notes.xml:335(title) @@ -213,11 +348,26 @@ #: xml/release-notes.xml:336(para) msgid "This only affects machines in UEFI mode with secure boot enabled." -msgstr "Dit is alleen van belang bij machines in UEFI-modus met veilig opstarten ingeschakeld." +msgstr "" +"Dit is alleen van belang bij machines in UEFI-modus met veilig opstarten " +"ingeschakeld." #: xml/release-notes.xml:339(para) -msgid "The new version of the shim loader allows more machines to boot with Secure Boot enabled than with openSUSE 13.1. Nevertheless, in case of trouble, first update the BIOS of your machine to the latest version. If the BIOS update does not help, report the model of your machine to the wiki (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Then we can track it for the next release." -msgstr "De nieuwe versie van de shim-loader staat toe meer typen machines te booten met ingeschakeld Secure Boot dan met openSUSE 13.1. Niettemin is de aanbeveling, in geval van problemen, eerst de BIOS van uw machine tot de laatste versie bij te werken. Als het bijwerken van de BIOS niet helpt, rapporteer dan het model van uw machine in de wiki (http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) We kunnen het dan volgen voor de volgende uitgave." +msgid "" +"The new version of the shim loader allows more machines to boot with Secure " +"Boot enabled than with openSUSE 13.1. Nevertheless, in case of trouble, first " +"update the BIOS of your machine to the latest version. If the BIOS update " +"does not help, report the model of your machine to the wiki " +"(http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) Then we can track it for the next " +"release." +msgstr "" +"De nieuwe versie van de shim-loader staat toe meer typen machines te booten " +"met ingeschakeld Secure Boot dan met openSUSE 13.1. Niettemin is de " +"aanbeveling, in geval van problemen, eerst de BIOS van uw machine tot de " +"laatste versie bij te werken. Als het bijwerken van de BIOS niet helpt, " +"rapporteer dan het model van uw machine in de wiki " +"(http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:UEFI) We kunnen het dan volgen voor de " +"volgende uitgave." #: xml/release-notes.xml:352(title) msgid "System Upgrade" @@ -230,22 +380,54 @@ #. bnc#850053 #: xml/release-notes.xml:363(title) msgid "Garbage on the Screen During Installation with the Nouveau Driver" -msgstr "Rommel op het scherm bij een installatie met het apparaatstuurprogramma Nouveau" +msgstr "" +"Rommel op het scherm bij een installatie met het apparaatstuurprogramma " +"Nouveau" #: xml/release-notes.xml:364(para) -msgid "On some systems with NVIDIA cards, the installer may show garbage on the top part of the screen due to problems with the default nouveau driver. If you are affected by this problem, you can disable the nouveau kernel module to run the installer and then enable it again once the system is installed or upgraded." -msgstr "Op sommige systemen met een NVIDIA kaart kan het installatieprogramma rommel bovenaan het scherm tonen vanwege problemen met het standaard apparaatstuurprogramma nouveau. Als u door dit probleem bent getroffen kunt u de nouveau kernel-module uitschakelen om het installatieprogramma uit te voeren en het daarna opnieuw in te schakelen als het systeem is geïnstalleerd op opgewaardeerd." +msgid "" +"On some systems with NVIDIA cards, the installer may show garbage on the top " +"part of the screen due to problems with the default nouveau driver. If you " +"are affected by this problem, you can disable the nouveau kernel module to " +"run the installer and then enable it again once the system is installed or " +"upgraded." +msgstr "" +"Op sommige systemen met een NVIDIA kaart kan het installatieprogramma rommel " +"bovenaan het scherm tonen vanwege problemen met het standaard " +"apparaatstuurprogramma nouveau. Als u door dit probleem bent getroffen kunt u " +"de nouveau kernel-module uitschakelen om het installatieprogramma uit te " +"voeren en het daarna opnieuw in te schakelen als het systeem is geïnstalleerd " +"op opgewaardeerd." #: xml/release-notes.xml:371(para) -msgid "To disable the kernel module, once you boot from the installation media, select the 'Installation' entry in grub and press 'e' to edit the parameters. Then go to the line starting with 'linux' (or 'linuxefi') and add <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> at the end. Now press F10 to continue booting with the new parameter. After the system is installed, you can re-enable the nouveau module by editing <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> and removing the entry that blacklists nouveau." -msgstr "Om de kernel-module uit te schakelen, wanneer u boot vanaf het installatiemedium, selecteer het item 'Installatie' in grub en druk op 'e' om de parameters te bewerken. Ga daarna naar de regel beginnend met 'linux' (of 'linuxefi') en voeg aan het eind <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> toe. Druk dan op F10 om door te gaan met booten met de nieuwe parameter. Nadat het systeem is geïnstalleerd kunt u de module nouveau weer inschakelen door het bewerken van <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> en het item dat nouveau op de zwarte lijst zet te verwijderen." +msgid "" +"To disable the kernel module, once you boot from the installation media, " +"select the 'Installation' entry in grub and press 'e' to edit the parameters. " +"Then go to the line starting with 'linux' (or 'linuxefi') and add <literal>" +"brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> at the end. Now press F10 to continue booting " +"with the new parameter. After the system is installed, you can re-enable the " +"nouveau module by editing <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filenam" +"e> and removing the entry that blacklists nouveau." +msgstr "" +"Om de kernel-module uit te schakelen, wanneer u boot vanaf het " +"installatiemedium, selecteer het item 'Installatie' in grub en druk op 'e' om " +"de parameters te bewerken. Ga daarna naar de regel beginnend met 'linux' (of " +"'linuxefi') en voeg aan het eind <literal>brokenmodules=nouveau</literal> " +"toe. Druk dan op F10 om door te gaan met booten met de nieuwe parameter. " +"Nadat het systeem is geïnstalleerd kunt u de module nouveau weer inschakelen " +"door het bewerken van <filename>/etc/modprobe.d/50-blacklist.conf</filename> " +"en het item dat nouveau op de zwarte lijst zet te verwijderen." #: xml/release-notes.xml:384(title) msgid "Information About the FGLRX Driver" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:385(para) -msgid "For more information about the AMD FGLRX drivers in openSUSE 13.2 and its status, see <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning-opensuse-13-2-tumblew…</ulink>." +msgid "" +"For more information about the AMD FGLRX drivers in openSUSE 13.2 and its " +"status, see <ulink url=\"https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-warning" +"-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/\">https://lizards.opensuse.org/2014/11/01/fglrx-war" +"ning-opensuse-13-2-tumbleweed/</ulink>." msgstr "" #. bnc#899610 @@ -254,11 +436,19 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:395(para) -msgid "If you see two mouse pointers and have two graphic boards, where one is an Intel board, try uninstalling <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem> and thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse pointer." +msgid "" +"If you see two mouse pointers and have two graphic boards, where one is an " +"Intel board, try uninstalling <systemitem>xf86-video-intel</systemitem> and " +"thus using the other one only. This will make disappear the static mouse " +"pointer." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:402(para) -msgid "This and other issues with the Intel driver like (see <ulink url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." +msgid "" +"This and other issues with the Intel driver like (see <ulink " +"url=\"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506\">" +"http://bugzilla.opensuse.org/show_bug.cgi?id=901506</ulink>) will be worked " +"on and, if possible, addressed with an online update." msgstr "" #. bnc#901869 @@ -267,27 +457,40 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:412(para) -msgid "If you find a problem executing virt-manager, try installing <systemitem>typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0</systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." +msgid "" +"If you find a problem executing virt-manager, try installing <systemitem>" +"typelib-1_0-Gtk-3_0</systemitem>, <systemitem>typelib-1_0-SpiceClientGtk-3_0<" +"/systemitem> and <systemitem>typelib-1-0-GtkVnc-2_0</systemitem>." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:418(para) -msgid "In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made explicit." +msgid "" +"In the online update there will be a new version with those dependencies made " +"explicit." msgstr "" #. bnc#900813 #: xml/release-notes.xml:425(title) -#, fuzzy #| msgid "No Authorization" msgid "Modem Authorization After Suspend" -msgstr "Geen verificatie" +msgstr "Modem-autorisatie na slaapstand" #: xml/release-notes.xml:426(para) -msgid "openSUSE 13.2 is a more strict in security tha 13.1. If you are connected via a UMTS or 3G modem and you suspend the machine, the system will ask you for the root password before reconnecting." +msgid "" +"openSUSE 13.2 is a more strict in security tha 13.1. If you are connected via " +"a UMTS or 3G modem and you suspend the machine, the system will ask you for " +"the root password before reconnecting." msgstr "" +"openSUSE 13.2 is veel strikter met beveiliging dan 13.1. Als u verbonden bent " +"via een UMTS- of 3G-modem en u brengt de machine in slaapstand, dan zal het " +"systeem u vragen om het wachtwoord van root alvorens opnieuw te verbinden." #: xml/release-notes.xml:432(para) -msgid "You can change this behavior changing a line in /etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" +msgid "" +"You can change this behavior changing a line in " +"/etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" msgstr "" +"U kunt dit gedrag wijzigen in een regel in /etc/polkit-default-privs.standard:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:437(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -296,10 +499,13 @@ "org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin:auth_admin:yes\n" " " msgstr "" +"# ModemManager\n" +"org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin:auth_admin:yes\n" +" " #: xml/release-notes.xml:441(para) msgid "with:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "door:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:445(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -308,14 +514,19 @@ "org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin_keep\n" " " msgstr "" +"# ModemManager\n" +"org.freedesktop.ModemManager.Device.Control auth_admin_keep\n" +" " #. bnc#901511 #: xml/release-notes.xml:452(title) msgid "Package Search Missing in GTK UI of YaST" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Zoeken naar pakketen ontbreekt in GTK UI van YaST" #: xml/release-notes.xml:453(para) -msgid "The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" +msgid "" +"The GTK interface of YaST does not feature a package search box. So if you " +"are in GNOME or XFCE and you need this feature, use QT interface instead:" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:459(screen) @@ -329,36 +540,60 @@ msgstr "Migratie van openSUSE vóór-13.2 cifstab" #: xml/release-notes.xml:466(para) -msgid "Mounting cifs shares at systems start via <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab</filename> has been discontinued and obsoleted. Now the generic <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> handles it." -msgstr "Aankoppelen van cifs-shares bij opstarten van het systeem via <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab</filename> is niet doorgegaan en verouderd. Nu wordt dat gedaan door het algemene <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> bestand." +msgid "" +"Mounting cifs shares at systems start via <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab<" +"/filename> has been discontinued and obsoleted. Now the generic <filename>" +"/etc/fstab</filename> handles it." +msgstr "" +"Aankoppelen van cifs-shares bij opstarten van het systeem via <filename>" +"/etc/samba/cifstab</filename> is niet doorgegaan en verouderd. Nu wordt dat " +"gedaan door het algemene <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> bestand." #: xml/release-notes.xml:472(para) msgid "The migration process requires two steps:" msgstr "Het migratieproces vereist twee stappen:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:477(para) -msgid "Append all your mount points from <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave</filename> to <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." -msgstr "Voeg al uw aankoppelpunten uit <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave</filename> achteraan in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgid "" +"Append all your mount points from <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave<" +"/filename> to <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgstr "" +"Voeg al uw aankoppelpunten uit <filename>/etc/samba/cifstab.rpmsave</filename>" +" achteraan in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." #: xml/release-notes.xml:484(para) -msgid "Add <literal>0 0</literal> to the end of each new cifs mount line in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." -msgstr "Voeg <literal>0 0</literal> toe aan het eind van elke nieuwe aankoppelregel voor cifs in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgid "" +"Add <literal>0 0</literal> to the end of each new cifs mount line in <" +"filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." +msgstr "" +"Voeg <literal>0 0</literal> toe aan het eind van elke nieuwe aankoppelregel " +"voor cifs in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>." #: xml/release-notes.xml:491(para) -msgid "For more information and examples, see <filename>/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in the installed system." -msgstr "Voor meer informatie en voorbeelden, zie <filename>/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in het geïnstalleerde systeem." +msgid "" +"For more information and examples, see <filename>" +"/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in the " +"installed system." +msgstr "" +"Voor meer informatie en voorbeelden, zie <filename>" +"/usr/share/doc/packages/cifs-utils/README.cifstab.migration</filename> in het " +"geïnstalleerde systeem." #: xml/release-notes.xml:499(title) msgid "Removing openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper After Upgrade" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:500(para) -msgid "If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, remove it from the user cache manually:" +msgid "" +"If the openSUSE 13.1 KDE Wallpaper still appears after the system upgrade, " +"remove it from the user cache manually:" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:505(screen) #, no-wrap -msgid "rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/contents/images/*" +msgid "" +"rm ~/.kde4/cache-*/plasma-wallpapers/usr/share/wallpapers/openSUSEdefault/cont" +"ents/images/*" msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:509(title) @@ -366,11 +601,17 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:511(para) -msgid "The MATE desktop is now officially available under openSUSE 13.2 with MATE version 1.8.1, the latest stable release. It provides an intuitive and attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and other Unix-like operating systems." +msgid "" +"The MATE desktop is now officially available under openSUSE 13.2 with MATE " +"version 1.8.1, the latest stable release. It provides an intuitive and " +"attractive desktop environment using traditional metaphors for Linux and " +"other Unix-like operating systems." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:517(para) -msgid "The objective, for openSUSE, is to provide the same experience users had when they used GNOME under openSUSE 11.4, with the main-menu and the Sonar theme." +msgid "" +"The objective, for openSUSE, is to provide the same experience users had when " +"they used GNOME under openSUSE 11.4, with the main-menu and the Sonar theme." msgstr "" #. bnc#901013 @@ -379,7 +620,11 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:526(para) -msgid "GNOME autologin can cause a slow boot process. Probably there is a race between services not correctly marked to depend on each other. Until the fix will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable the GNOME autologin feature." +msgid "" +"GNOME autologin can cause a slow boot process. Probably there is a race " +"between services not correctly marked to depend on each other. Until the fix " +"will be available as an online update, a workaround is to temporarily disable " +"the GNOME autologin feature." msgstr "" #. bnc#850058 @@ -388,8 +633,17 @@ msgstr "AppArmor en instellingen voor toegang" #: xml/release-notes.xml:564(para) -msgid "AppArmor is enabled by default. This means more security, but might prevent services from working if you run them in unexpected ways. If you encounter strange permission problems, try to switch the AppArmor profile for the affected service to complain mode with:" -msgstr "AppArmor is standaard ingeschakeld. Dit betekent meer veiligheid, maar kan het werken van services in de weg zitten, als u ze op minder verwachte wijze uitvoert. Als u vreemde problemen met toegang tegenkomt, probeer dan het AppArmor profiel van de betrokken service om te schakelen naar de modus klagen met:" +msgid "" +"AppArmor is enabled by default. This means more security, but might prevent " +"services from working if you run them in unexpected ways. If you encounter " +"strange permission problems, try to switch the AppArmor profile for the " +"affected service to complain mode with:" +msgstr "" +"AppArmor is standaard ingeschakeld. Dit betekent meer veiligheid, maar kan " +"het werken van services in de weg zitten, als u ze op minder verwachte wijze " +"uitvoert. Als u vreemde problemen met toegang tegenkomt, probeer dan het " +"AppArmor profiel van de betrokken service om te schakelen naar de modus " +"klagen met:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:567(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -397,12 +651,20 @@ msgstr "aa-complain /usr/bin/$uw_service" #: xml/release-notes.xml:568(para) -msgid "Complain mode means: allow everything, and log things that the profile would not allow." -msgstr "Modus klagen betekent: sta alles toe en log zaken die het profiel niet zou toestaan." +msgid "" +"Complain mode means: allow everything, and log things that the profile would " +"not allow." +msgstr "" +"Modus klagen betekent: sta alles toe en log zaken die het profiel niet zou " +"toestaan." #: xml/release-notes.xml:569(para) -msgid "Even if it helps, report it as a bug! We want to fix AppArmor profiles to also cover corner cases." -msgstr "Zelfs als het helpt rapporteer het als een bug! We willen AppArmor-profielen repareren om ook alle randgevallen te dekken." +msgid "" +"Even if it helps, report it as a bug! We want to fix AppArmor profiles to " +"also cover corner cases." +msgstr "" +"Zelfs als het helpt rapporteer het als een bug! We willen AppArmor-profielen " +"repareren om ook alle randgevallen te dekken." #: xml/release-notes.xml:602(title) msgid "Miscellaneous" @@ -414,7 +676,11 @@ msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:608(para) -msgid "In the <guimenu>System</guimenu> section of YaST (Qt GUI) the icon <guimenu>Service Manager</guimenu> appears twice. There is a bug in the Qt version of the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in the desktop files." +msgid "" +"In the <guimenu>System</guimenu> section of YaST (Qt GUI) the icon <guimenu>" +"Service Manager</guimenu> appears twice. There is a bug in the Qt version of " +"the YaST Control Center that does not honor the <quote>hidden</quote> flag in " +"the desktop files." msgstr "" #: xml/release-notes.xml:614(para) @@ -431,8 +697,11 @@ msgstr "Lees de README's op de cd's." #: xml/release-notes.xml:631(para) -msgid "Get detailed changelog information about a particular package from the RPM:" -msgstr "Gedetailleerde log met informatie over wijzigingen over een specifiek pakket uit de RPM:" +msgid "" +"Get detailed changelog information about a particular package from the RPM:" +msgstr "" +"Gedetailleerde log met informatie over wijzigingen over een specifiek pakket " +"uit de RPM:" #: xml/release-notes.xml:632(screen) #, no-wrap @@ -444,20 +713,34 @@ msgstr "<BESTANDSNAAM>. is de naam van de RPM." #: xml/release-notes.xml:636(para) -msgid "Check the <filename>ChangeLog</filename> file in the top level of the DVD for a chronological log of all changes made to the updated packages." -msgstr "Controleer het bestand <filename>ChangeLog</filename> op het topniveau van de dvd voor een chronologische log van alle wijzigingen gemaakt aan de bijgewerkte pakketten." +msgid "" +"Check the <filename>ChangeLog</filename> file in the top level of the DVD for " +"a chronological log of all changes made to the updated packages." +msgstr "" +"Controleer het bestand <filename>ChangeLog</filename> op het topniveau van de " +"dvd voor een chronologische log van alle wijzigingen gemaakt aan de " +"bijgewerkte pakketten." #: xml/release-notes.xml:640(para) -msgid "Find more information in the <filename>docu</filename> directory on the DVD." +msgid "" +"Find more information in the <filename>docu</filename> directory on the DVD." msgstr "Meer informatie in de map <filename>docu</filename> op de dvd." #: xml/release-notes.xml:643(para) -msgid "<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> contains additional or updated documentation." -msgstr "<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> bevat extra of bijgewerkte documentatie." +msgid "" +"<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> contains additional or " +"updated documentation." +msgstr "" +"<ulink url=\"https://activedoc.opensuse.org/\"/> bevat extra of bijgewerkte " +"documentatie." #: xml/release-notes.xml:648(para) -msgid "Visit <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> for the latest product news from openSUSE." -msgstr "Bezoek <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> voor de laatste productnieuws van openSUSE." +msgid "" +"Visit <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> for the latest product news " +"from openSUSE." +msgstr "" +"Bezoek <ulink url=\"http://www.opensuse.org\"/> voor de laatste productnieuws " +"van openSUSE." #: xml/release-notes.xml:653(para) msgid "Copyright © 2014 SUSE LLC" Modified: trunk/lcn/nl/po/software-opensuse-org.nl.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/nl/po/software-opensuse-org.nl.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) +++ trunk/lcn/nl/po/software-opensuse-org.nl.po 2014-11-03 17:26:26 UTC (rev 90701) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: software-opensuse-org.nl\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 14:36+0000\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-29 17:13+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 17:54+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Freek de Kruijf <freek(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language-Team: Dutch <opensuse-nl(a)opensuse.org>\n" "Language: nl\n" @@ -44,11 +44,32 @@ msgid "64 Bit PC" msgstr "64 bit PC" -msgid "<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">openSUSE startup guide</a>" -msgstr "<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-startup/\">openSUSE handleiding voor opstarten (Engels)</a>" +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up\">openSUSE " +"startup guide</a>" +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-startup/\">openSUSE " +"handleiding voor opstarten (Engels)</a>" -msgid "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is an open standard that bundles the various ways (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) to get files into one format for easier downloads. This makes it good for downloading ISOs; particularly for people who can't use P2P because of restrictions from their ISP or University. It can deliver very fast download speeds since most clients support multiple connections, to multiple mirrors, automatically. In addition, it can do automatic error detection, and correction. It needs a special client to handle it though." -msgstr "<a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is een open standaard die de verschillende manieren (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) om bestanden te verkrijgen bundelt in één formaat voor gemakkelijker downloaden. Dit maakt het geschikt voor het downloaden van ISO's; speciaal voor mensen die geen P2P kunnen gebruiken vanwege beperkingen van hun ISP of universiteit. het kan hoge downloadsnelheden leveren omdat de meeste clients automatisch meervoudige verbindingen ondersteunen naar meervoudige mirrors. Bovendien, kan het automatische foutdetectie doen en corrigeren. Er is echter een speciale client voor nodig." +msgid "" +"<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is an open " +"standard that bundles the various ways (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) to get files " +"into one format for easier downloads. This makes it good for downloading " +"ISOs; particularly for people who can't use P2P because of restrictions from " +"their ISP or University. It can deliver very fast download speeds since most " +"clients support multiple connections, to multiple mirrors, automatically. In " +"addition, it can do automatic error detection, and correction. It needs a " +"special client to handle it though." +msgstr "" +"<a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink\">Metalink</a> is een open " +"standaard die de verschillende manieren (FTP/HTTP/BitTorrent) om bestanden te " +"verkrijgen bundelt in één formaat voor gemakkelijker downloaden. Dit maakt " +"het geschikt voor het downloaden van ISO's; speciaal voor mensen die geen P2P " +"kunnen gebruiken vanwege beperkingen van hun ISP of universiteit. het kan " +"hoge downloadsnelheden leveren omdat de meeste clients automatisch " +"meervoudige verbindingen ondersteunen naar meervoudige mirrors. Bovendien, " +"kan het automatische foutdetectie doen en corrigeren. Er is echter een " +"speciale client voor nodig." msgid "<a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/openSUSE:License\">License</a>" msgstr "<a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/openSUSE:License\">Licentie</a>" @@ -62,11 +83,19 @@ msgid "official update" msgstr "officiële uitgave voor bijwerken" -msgid "A GNOME desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as is (no upgrade)." -msgstr "Een GNOME-bureaublad waarop u vanaf %s of van een USB stick kan werken. Kan ook zo geïnstalleerd worden (geen opwaarderen)." +msgid "" +"A GNOME desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed " +"as is (no upgrade)." +msgstr "" +"Een GNOME-bureaublad waarop u vanaf %s of van een USB stick kan werken. " +"Kan ook zo geïnstalleerd worden (geen opwaarderen)." -msgid "A KDE desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as is (no upgrade)." -msgstr "Een KDE-bureaublad waarop u vanaf %s of van een USB stick kan werken. Kan ook zo geïnstalleerd worden (geen opwaarderen)." +msgid "" +"A KDE desktop you can run from %s or from USB stick. Can be installed as " +"is (no upgrade)." +msgstr "" +"Een KDE-bureaublad waarop u vanaf %s of van een USB stick kan werken. Kan " +"ook zo geïnstalleerd worden (geen opwaarderen)." msgid "Add repository and install manually" msgstr "Installatiebron toevoegen en handmatig installeren" @@ -74,22 +103,33 @@ msgid "Add-On Downloads (optional)" msgstr "Downloads van addon (optioneel)" -msgid "After having successfully downloaded the ISO image(s), create a bootable USB stick or burn the image(s) to a DVD (or a CD if the chosen image fits)." -msgstr "Maak, na het met succes downloaden van de ISO-image(s), een te booten USB-stick aan of brand de image(s) op een dvd (of een cd als de gekozen image past)." +msgid "" +"After having successfully downloaded the ISO image(s), create a bootable USB " +"stick or burn the image(s) to a DVD (or a CD if the chosen image fits)." +msgstr "" +"Maak, na het met succes downloaden van de ISO-image(s), een te booten " +"USB-stick aan of brand de image(s) op een dvd (of een cd als de gekozen image " +"past)." msgid "" "All data is used only for sending openSUSE promotional material\n" " and will not be spread to third parties. We store the data to\n" " inform the users if a new version is available. All requests have\n" " to be screened to fulfill the US export embargo. More information\n" -" about the embargo and a list of countries at wikipedia <a href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." +" about the embargo and a list of countries at wikipedia <a " +"href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>" +"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." msgstr "" -"Alle gegevens worden alleen gebruikt voor het verzenden van promotiemateriaal\n" +"Alle gegevens worden alleen gebruikt voor het verzenden van " +"promotiemateriaal\n" " van openSUSE en zal niet verspreidt worden onder derden. Wij slaan de\n" " gegevens op om de gebruikers te informeren als er een nieuwe versie\n" " beschikbaar is. Alle verzoeken moeten gescreend worden om te voldoen\n" -" aan het exportembargo van de VS. Meer informatie over het embargo en een\n" -" lijst met landen is beschikbaar op wikipedia <a href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." +" aan het exportembargo van de VS. Meer informatie over het embargo en " +"een\n" +" lijst met landen is beschikbaar op wikipedia <a " +"href='http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes'>" +"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_embargoes</a>." msgid "An internal error happened :-(" msgstr "Er deed zich een interne fout voor :-(" @@ -103,8 +143,13 @@ msgid "BitTorrent" msgstr "BitTorrent" -msgid "Boot from the DVD, CD or USB stick. In case your computer does not automatically boot from the chosen device, open the BIOS setup to allow booting from it." -msgstr "Start vanaf de dvd, cd of USB-stick. Als uw computer dat niet automatisch doet, open dan de BIOS instellingen om het starten hier vanaf toe te staan." +msgid "" +"Boot from the DVD, CD or USB stick. In case your computer does not " +"automatically boot from the chosen device, open the BIOS setup to allow " +"booting from it." +msgstr "" +"Start vanaf de dvd, cd of USB-stick. Als uw computer dat niet automatisch " +"doet, open dan de BIOS instellingen om het starten hier vanaf toe te staan." msgid "Bronze Sponsor" msgstr "Brons Sponsor" @@ -121,8 +166,14 @@ msgid "Category" msgstr "Categorie" -msgid "Choose an installation medium by clicking it and hit the Download button to start the download. Optionally choose your computer type or an alternative download method." -msgstr "Kies een installatiemedium door er op te klikken en klik op de knop Download om het downloaden te starten. Kies als optie het type computer of een alternatieve manier van downloaden." +msgid "" +"Choose an installation medium by clicking it and hit the Download button to " +"start the download. Optionally choose your computer type or an alternative " +"download method." +msgstr "" +"Kies een installatiemedium door er op te klikken en klik op de knop Download " +"om het downloaden te starten. Kies als optie het type computer of een " +"alternatieve manier van downloaden." msgid "Click here to display these alternative versions." msgstr "Klik hier om deze alternatieve versies te tonen." @@ -133,8 +184,12 @@ msgid "Community" msgstr "Gemeenschap" -msgid "Contains a large collection of software for desktop or server use. Suitable for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Bevat een grote collectie software voor gebruik op het bureaublad en of op een server. Geschikt voor eerste installatie of opwaarderen." +msgid "" +"Contains a large collection of software for desktop or server use. " +"Suitable for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Bevat een grote collectie software voor gebruik op het bureaublad en of op " +"een server. Geschikt voor eerste installatie of opwaarderen." msgid "Countdown" msgstr "Aftellen" @@ -199,8 +254,12 @@ msgid "Downloads" msgstr "Downloads" -msgid "Downloads the installation system and all packages from online repositories. Suitable for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Doet een download van het installatiesysteem en alle pakketten vanaf een online installatiebron. Geschikt voor installatie en opwaarderen." +msgid "" +"Downloads the installation system and all packages from online repositories.<" +"br/>Suitable for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Doet een download van het installatiesysteem en alle pakketten vanaf een " +"online installatiebron. Geschikt voor installatie en opwaarderen." msgid "Expand all sections ('e')" msgstr "Alle secties expanderen ('e')" @@ -215,19 +274,27 @@ msgstr "Extra talen (64 bit)" msgid "For %s run the following as root:" -msgstr "Voor %s voer het volgende als root uit:" +msgstr "" +"Voor %s voer het volgende als root uit:" msgid "For %s run the following:" msgstr "Voor %s voer het volgende uit:" -msgid "For Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf and add the following (note that the order of repositories in pacman.conf is important, since pacman always downloads the first found package):" -msgstr "Voor Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf en voeg het volgende toe (merk op dat de volgorde van installatiebronnen in pacman.conf belangrijk is, omdat pacman altijd het eerst gevonden pakket downloadt):" +msgid "" +"For Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf and add the following " +"(note that the order of repositories in pacman.conf is important, since " +"pacman always downloads the first found package):" +msgstr "" +"Voor Arch Linux, edit /etc/pacman.conf en voeg het volgende " +"toe (merk op dat de volgorde van installatiebronnen in pacman.conf belangrijk " +"is, omdat pacman altijd het eerst gevonden pakket downloadt):" msgid "Games" msgstr "Spellen" msgid "Get one of the specialized distributions built on openSUSE." -msgstr "Verkrijg een van de gespecialiseerde distributies die gebouwd zijn op openSUSE" +msgstr "" +"Verkrijg een van de gespecialiseerde distributies die gebouwd zijn op openSUSE" msgid "Getting Help" msgstr "Hulp verkrijgen" @@ -250,8 +317,14 @@ msgid "How to Proceed" msgstr "Hoe verder te gaan" -msgid "If you want to use a direct link but live in a place in the world where our download redirector has not enough information to redirect to the fastest mirror, you can pick a mirror yourself." -msgstr "Als u een directe link wilt gebruiken, maar op een plaats op de wereld leeft waar onze download verwijzing niet genoeg informatie heeft om naar de snelste mirror te verwijzen, dan kunt u zelf een mirror kiezen." +msgid "" +"If you want to use a direct link but live in a place in the world where our " +"download redirector has not enough information to redirect to the fastest " +"mirror, you can pick a mirror yourself." +msgstr "" +"Als u een directe link wilt gebruiken, maar op een plaats op de wereld leeft " +"waar onze download verwijzing niet genoeg informatie heeft om naar de snelste " +"mirror te verwijzen, dan kunt u zelf een mirror kiezen." msgid "Image:" msgstr "Image:" @@ -273,18 +346,30 @@ msgid "" "Join the fast-growing community, put openSUSE into more hands by\n" -" getting the latest PromoDVD for your group, non-profit organization, school\n" -" university or event like LUG meetings, installfests, and conferences.\n" +" getting the latest PromoDVD for your group, non-profit organization, " +"school\n" +" university or event like LUG meetings, installfests, and " +"conferences.\n" " Promo DVDs help to increase awareness and visibility of openSUSE!" msgstr "" "Doe mee met de snel groeiende gemeenschap, stop openSUSE in meer handen door\n" " de laatste Promo-dvd voor uw groep, non-profit organisatie, school\n" -" universiteit of evenement zoals LUG-meetings, installatie bijeenkomsten\n" +" universiteit of evenement zoals LUG-meetings, installatie " +"bijeenkomsten\n" " en conferenties.\n" -" Promotie-dvd's helpen de bekendheid en zichtbaarheid van openSUSE te verhogen!" +" Promotie-dvd's helpen de bekendheid en zichtbaarheid van openSUSE te " +"verhogen!" -msgid "Konqueror of KDE 3 is unfortunately unmaintained and its javascript implementation contains bugs that make it impossible to use with this page. Please make sure you have javascript disabled before you <a href='%s'>continue</a>." -msgstr "Konqueror uit KDE 3 is helaas niet onderhouden en zijn javascript-implementatie bevat bugs die het onmogelijk maken om het met deze pagina te gebruiken. Verzeker u ervan dat javascript is uitgeschakeld alvorens u <a href='%s'>doorgaat</a>." +msgid "" +"Konqueror of KDE 3 is unfortunately unmaintained and its javascript " +"implementation contains bugs that make it impossible to use with this page. " +"Please make sure you have javascript disabled before you <a href='%s'>" +"continue</a>." +msgstr "" +"Konqueror uit KDE 3 is helaas niet onderhouden en zijn " +"javascript-implementatie bevat bugs die het onmogelijk maken om het met deze " +"pagina te gebruiken. Verzeker u ervan dat javascript is uitgeschakeld " +"alvorens u <a href='%s'>doorgaat</a>." # label for language selection msgid "Language" @@ -305,8 +390,14 @@ msgid "Live KDE" msgstr "Live-KDE" -msgid "Many applications can verify the checksum of a download. To verify your download can be important as it verifies you really have got the ISO file you wanted to download and not some broken version." -msgstr "Veel programma's kunnen de controlesom van een download verifiëren. Dit doen kan belangrijk zijn omdat het echt verifieert of u het ISO-bestand hebt verkregen dat u wilde downloaden en niet een gebroken versie." +msgid "" +"Many applications can verify the checksum of a download. To verify your " +"download can be important as it verifies you really have got the ISO file you " +"wanted to download and not some broken version." +msgstr "" +"Veel programma's kunnen de controlesom van een download verifiëren. Dit doen " +"kan belangrijk zijn omdat het echt verifieert of u het ISO-bestand hebt " +"verkregen dat u wilde downloaden en niet een gebroken versie." msgid "Metalink" msgstr "Metalink" @@ -314,14 +405,38 @@ msgid "More information on burning the ISO file to CD/DVD" msgstr "Meer informatie over het branden van het ISO-bestand naar cd/dvd" -msgid "More information on creating a <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Live_USB_stick'>bootable USB stick</a>" -msgstr "Meer informatie over het aanmaken van een <a href='http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Live_USB_stick'>te booten USB-stick.</a>" +msgid "" +"More information on creating a <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Live_USB_stick'" +">bootable USB stick</a>" +msgstr "" +"Meer informatie over het aanmaken van een <a " +"href='http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Live_USB_stick'>te booten USB-stick.</a>" -msgid "More information on downloading openSUSE is available from the <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Download Help</a> and <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">Network Installation</a> pages in our <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation\">Documentation Wiki</a>." -msgstr "Meer informatie over downloaden van openSUSE is beschikbaar op <a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Hulp bij downloaden.</a> en <a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">Networkinstallatie</a> pagina's in onze <a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation\">Wiki met documentatie</a>." +msgid "" +"More information on downloading openSUSE is available from the <a " +"href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Download Help</a> and <a " +"href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">Network " +"Installation</a> pages in our <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Document" +"ation\">Documentation Wiki</a>." +msgstr "" +"Meer informatie over downloaden van openSUSE is beschikbaar op <a " +"href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Download_help\">Hulp bij downloaden.</a> en " +"<a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Network_installation\">" +"Networkinstallatie</a> pagina's in onze <a " +"href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/Portal:Documentation\">Wiki met documentatie</a>" +"." -msgid "Most new computers support <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (also known as AMD64 and Intel64), but some laptop processors and netbook processors do not support it. So you need to check wikipedia if you want to be sure your computer supports it." -msgstr "De meeste nieuwe computers ondersteunen <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (ook bekend als AMD64 en Intel64), echter sommige laptop-processors en netbook-processors ondersteunen het niet. U zult dus wikipedia moeten raadplegen als u er zeker van wilt zijn dat uw computer het ondersteund." +msgid "" +"Most new computers support <a href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">" +"x86-64</a> (also known as AMD64 and Intel64), but some laptop processors and " +"netbook processors do not support it. So you need to check wikipedia if you " +"want to be sure your computer supports it." +msgstr "" +"De meeste nieuwe computers ondersteunen <a " +"href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X86-64\">x86-64</a> (ook bekend als AMD64 " +"en Intel64), echter sommige laptop-processors en netbook-processors " +"ondersteunen het niet. U zult dus wikipedia moeten raadplegen als u er zeker " +"van wilt zijn dat uw computer het ondersteund." msgid "Multimedia" msgstr "Multimedia" @@ -359,8 +474,12 @@ msgid "Official Manuals" msgstr "Officiële handleidingen" -msgid "Only DVD and Network medias are fully tested. Alternatives, like live or rescue systems, are recomended for only limited use." -msgstr "Alleen de DVD- en Netwerk media zijn volledig getest. Alternatieven, zoals Live of Rescue systemen, zijn alleen aanbevolen voor beperkt gebruik." +msgid "" +"Only DVD and Network medias are fully tested. Alternatives, like live or " +"rescue systems, are recomended for only limited use." +msgstr "" +"Alleen de DVD- en Netwerk media zijn volledig getest. Alternatieven, zoals " +"Live of Rescue systemen, zijn alleen aanbevolen voor beperkt gebruik." msgid "Package %s not found..." msgstr "Pakket %s is niet gevonden..." @@ -381,30 +500,47 @@ msgstr "Platina Sponsor" msgid "" -"Please be aware that the following packages are from unofficial repositories.\n" -" That means they are not reviewed by openSUSE and may contain unstable or experimental software." +"Please be aware that the following packages are from unofficial " +"repositories.\n" +" That means they are not reviewed by openSUSE and may contain unstable or " +"experimental software." msgstr "" -"Wees u ervan bewust dat de volgende pakketten uit niet-officiële installatiebronnen komen.\n" -" Dit betekent dat ze niet door openSUSE zijn bekeken en onstabiele of experimentele software kunnen bevatten." +"Wees u ervan bewust dat de volgende pakketten uit niet-officiële " +"installatiebronnen komen.\n" +" Dit betekent dat ze niet door openSUSE zijn bekeken en onstabiele of " +"experimentele software kunnen bevatten." -msgid "Please enter a brief reason (in English!) why you need the DVDs and provide a link of the event/purpose." -msgstr "Voer een korte reden in (in het Engels!) waarom u de dvd's nodig hebt en lever een koppeling van het evenement/doel." +msgid "" +"Please enter a brief reason (in English!) why you need the DVDs and " +"provide a link of the event/purpose." +msgstr "" +"Voer een korte reden in (in het Engels!) waarom u de dvd's nodig hebt " +"en lever een koppeling van het evenement/doel." msgid "Please enter more than 2 characters" msgstr "Gaarne een meer dan 2 lettertekens invoeren" -msgid "Please note that this is not the latest openSUSE release. You can get the latest version <a href='/'>here</a>. " -msgstr "Merk op dat dit niet de nieuwste uitgave van openSUSE is. De nieuwste versie is <a href='/'>hier</a> te verkrijgen. " +msgid "" +"Please note that this is not the latest openSUSE release. You can get the " +"latest version <a href='/'>here</a>. " +msgstr "" +"Merk op dat dit niet de nieuwste uitgave van openSUSE is. De nieuwste versie " +"is <a href='/'>hier</a> te verkrijgen. " msgid "" "Promo DVDs and all the related artwork -labels and sleeve- can be\n" -" downloaded from the <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">promodvd\n" -" download directory %s</a>. Keep in mind that this is a special version of openSUSE,\n" +" downloaded from the <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\"" +">promodvd\n" +" download directory %s</a>. Keep in mind that this is a special " +"version of openSUSE,\n" " namely designed for promotional distribution." msgstr "" -"Promotie-dvd's en alle gerelateerde illustraties -labels en zakjes- kunnen gedownload\n" -" worden vanaf de <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">promodvd-downloadmap %s</a>.\n" -" Bedenk dat dit een speciale versie van openSUSE is, namelijk ontworpen voor promotiedoelen." +"Promotie-dvd's en alle gerelateerde illustraties -labels en zakjes- kunnen " +"gedownload\n" +" worden vanaf de <a href=\"http://download.opensuse.org/promodvd/\">" +"promodvd-downloadmap %s</a>.\n" +" Bedenk dat dit een speciale versie van openSUSE is, namelijk " +"ontworpen voor promotiedoelen." msgid "Related categories:" msgstr "Gerelateerde categorieën:" @@ -418,8 +554,12 @@ msgid "Rescue" msgstr "Reddingssysteem" -msgid "Rescue system that you can run from CD or from USB stick. Can not be used for installation or upgrade." -msgstr "Een reddingssysteem waarmee u vanaf een cd of een USB stick kan werken. Kan niet gebruikt worden om mee te installeren of op te waarderen." +msgid "" +"Rescue system that you can run from CD or from USB stick. Can not be used " +"for installation or upgrade." +msgstr "" +"Een reddingssysteem waarmee u vanaf een cd of een USB stick kan werken. " +"Kan niet gebruikt worden om mee te installeren of op te waarderen." msgid "Search" msgstr "Zoeken" @@ -457,11 +597,22 @@ msgid "Silver Sponsor" msgstr "Silver Sponsor" -msgid "Some alternative media (eg. live and rescue systems) are also available, although they are less tested and recommended for only limited use." -msgstr "Sommige alternatieve media (bijv. Live- en Rescue-systemen) zijn ook beschikbaar, hoewel ze minder zijn getest en alleen aanbevolen voor beperkt gebruik." +msgid "" +"Some alternative media (eg. live and rescue systems) are also available, " +"although they are less tested and recommended for only limited use." +msgstr "" +"Sommige alternatieve media (bijv. Live- en Rescue-systemen) zijn ook " +"beschikbaar, hoewel ze minder zijn getest en alleen aanbevolen voor beperkt " +"gebruik." -msgid "Some of the live distributions based on openSUSE. Those interested in trying to build their own derivatives can take a look at <a href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." -msgstr "Enkele van de live-distributies gebaseerd op openSUSE. Wie geïnteresseerd is om eigen afgeleiden te bouwen kunnen een kijkje nemen op <a href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." +msgid "" +"Some of the live distributions based on openSUSE. Those interested in trying " +"to build their own derivatives can take a look at <a " +"href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." +msgstr "" +"Enkele van de live-distributies gebaseerd op openSUSE. Wie geïnteresseerd is " +"om eigen afgeleiden te bouwen kunnen een kijkje nemen op <a " +"href=\"http://susestudio.com/\">SUSE Studio</a>." msgid "Source" msgstr "Bron" @@ -491,20 +642,56 @@ msgid "Support" msgstr "Ondersteuning" -msgid "The installation process is available in many languages but, for most of them, the translation of the applications is not included in the image. If you want your openSUSE system to support some additional language, you need to download it from the Internet during the installation or any time after it. If you have easy access to the Internet you do not need this CD, but if you are planning to install openSUSE in some machine with no Internet connection, it will provide you access to all the available translations." -msgstr "Het installatieproces is beschikbaar in vele talen maar, voor de meesten zit de vertaling van de applicaties niet in de image. Als u wilt dat uw openSUSE-systeem enkele additionele talen ondersteunt, dan moet u deze van het internet tijdens de installatie of elk moment later downloaden. Als u gemakkelijk toegang hebt tot het internet dan hebt u deze cd niet nodig, maar als u van plan bent om openSUSE te installeren op een machine zonder internetverbinding, dan biedt het toegang tot alle beschikbare vertalingen." +msgid "" +"The installation process is available in many languages but, for most of " +"them, the translation of the applications is not included in the image. If " +"you want your openSUSE system to support some additional language, you need " +"to download it from the Internet during the installation or any time after " +"it. If you have easy access to the Internet you do not need this CD, but if " +"you are planning to install openSUSE in some machine with no Internet " +"connection, it will provide you access to all the available translations." +msgstr "" +"Het installatieproces is beschikbaar in vele talen maar, voor de meesten zit " +"de vertaling van de applicaties niet in de image. Als u wilt dat uw " +"openSUSE-systeem enkele additionele talen ondersteunt, dan moet u deze van " +"het internet tijdens de installatie of elk moment later downloaden. Als u " +"gemakkelijk toegang hebt tot het internet dan hebt u deze cd niet nodig, maar " +"als u van plan bent om openSUSE te installeren op een machine zonder " +"internetverbinding, dan biedt het toegang tot alle beschikbare vertalingen." msgid "Then run the following as root" msgstr "Voer dan het volgende als root uit" -msgid "There is no openSUSE release in testing phase at the moment. If you want to use bleeding edge software, please use <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." -msgstr "Er is op dit moment geen openSUSE uitgave in een testfase. Als u de allernieuwste software wilt, gebruik dan <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." +msgid "" +"There is no openSUSE release in testing phase at the moment. If you " +"want to use bleeding edge software, please use <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." +msgstr "" +"Er is op dit moment geen openSUSE uitgave in een testfase. Als u de " +"allernieuwste software wilt, gebruik dan <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Tumbleweed'>openSUSE Tumbleweed</a>." -msgid "This CD contains free software distributed under proprietary licence not allowing its inclusion to main installation media together with free open-source software. All software from this CD could be downloaded from NON-OSS repository." -msgstr "Deze cd bevat vrije software gedistribueerd onder propiëtaire licentie die niet toestaat het in te voegen op het hoofdinstallatiemedium samen met vrije opensource software. Alle software op deze cd kan worden gedownload vanaf een NON-OSS-installatiebron." +msgid "" +"This CD contains free software distributed under proprietary licence not " +"allowing its inclusion to main installation media together with free " +"open-source software. All software from this CD could be downloaded from " +"NON-OSS repository." +msgstr "" +"Deze cd bevat vrije software gedistribueerd onder propiëtaire licentie die " +"niet toestaat het in te voegen op het hoofdinstallatiemedium samen met vrije " +"opensource software. Alle software op deze cd kan worden gedownload vanaf een " +"NON-OSS-installatiebron." -msgid "This version runs on all PCs including those that support 64 Bit. If you have more than 3 GB of RAM you should prefer the 64 Bit version though. openSUSE does not support processors before Pentium - the live CDs even support only i686 (Pentium Pro and later)." -msgstr "Deze versie draait op alle PC's inclusief die 64 bit ondersteunen. Als u meer dan 3 GB RAM hebt dan zou u echter de voorkeur moeten geven aan de 64 bit versie. openSUSE ondersteunt geen processors voor de Pentium - de live-cd's ondersteunen zelfs alleen i686 (Pentium Pro en later)." +msgid "" +"This version runs on all PCs including those that support 64 Bit. If you have " +"more than 3 GB of RAM you should prefer the 64 Bit version though. openSUSE " +"does not support processors before Pentium - the live CDs even support only " +"i686 (Pentium Pro and later)." +msgstr "" +"Deze versie draait op alle PC's inclusief die 64 bit ondersteunen. Als u meer " +"dan 3 GB RAM hebt dan zou u echter de voorkeur moeten geven aan de 64 bit " +"versie. openSUSE ondersteunt geen processors voor de Pentium - de live-cd's " +"ondersteunen zelfs alleen i686 (Pentium Pro en later)." msgid "Top 1-click downloads:" msgstr "Top 1-kliksdownloads:" @@ -521,11 +708,34 @@ msgid "Unsupported distributions:" msgstr "Niet ondersteunde distributies:" -msgid "User manuals are available from <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, for example the <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Official Start-Up Guide</a>." -msgstr "Handleidingen voor gebruikers zijn beschikbaar op <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, bijvoorbeeld de <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Officiële handleiding voor opstarten (Engels)</a>." +msgid "" +"User manuals are available from <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">" +"activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, for example the <a " +"href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up/\">Official " +"Start-Up Guide</a>." +msgstr "" +"Handleidingen voor gebruikers zijn beschikbaar op <a " +"href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org\">activedoc.opensuse.org</a>, " +"bijvoorbeeld de <a href=\"http://activedoc.opensuse.org/book/opensuse-start-up" +"/\">Officiële handleiding voor opstarten (Engels)</a>." -msgid "Using <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> is recommended on slow links, especially when downloading the DVD image. BitTorrent downloads have several benefits, the clients protect against data corruption and you help relieving the load on the servers by participating in the upload - if enough people participate it will also be faster than the centralized servers - for everybody. Whatsmore, it allows you to stop the download at any time and resume it later." -msgstr "Het gebruik van <a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> wordt aangeraden op langzame links, speciaal bij het downloaden van de dvd-image. Downloaden met BitTorrent heeft verschillende voordelen, de client beschermt tegen datacorruptie en u helpt de load van de servers te verlichten door deel te nemen in het uploaden - als genoeg mensen deelnemen zal het ook voor iedereen sneller zijn dan met de gecentraliseerde servers. Bovendien staat het toe het downloaden op elk moment te stoppen en het later te hervatten." +msgid "" +"Using <a href=\"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent</a> is " +"recommended on slow links, especially when downloading the DVD image. " +"BitTorrent downloads have several benefits, the clients protect against data " +"corruption and you help relieving the load on the servers by participating in " +"the upload - if enough people participate it will also be faster than the " +"centralized servers - for everybody. Whatsmore, it allows you to stop the " +"download at any time and resume it later." +msgstr "" +"Het gebruik van <a href=\"http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:BitTorrent\">BitTorrent<" +"/a> wordt aangeraden op langzame links, speciaal bij het downloaden van de " +"dvd-image. Downloaden met BitTorrent heeft verschillende voordelen, de client " +"beschermt tegen datacorruptie en u helpt de load van de servers te verlichten " +"door deel te nemen in het uploaden - als genoeg mensen deelnemen zal het ook " +"voor iedereen sneller zijn dan met de gecentraliseerde servers. Bovendien " +"staat het toe het downloaden op elk moment te stoppen en het later te " +"hervatten." msgid "Verify your download before use" msgstr "Verifieer uw download alvorens deze te gebruiken" @@ -539,29 +749,63 @@ msgid "" "We would like you, to keep us informed about your usage of the DVDs, so we\n" " can help you to promote your organization, event or school on our\n" -" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>news page</a>\n" -" or other resources. (Hint! We love photos. Take lots of them!). Please contact us at\n" -" <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" +" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>news " +"page</a>\n" +" or other resources. (Hint! We love photos. Take lots of them!). " +"Please contact us at\n" +" <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>" +"opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" " to discuss promotion and/or other ways we can assist you." msgstr "" -"We willen graag dat u ons geïnformeerd houdt over uw gebruik van de dvd's, zodat we\n" +"We willen graag dat u ons geïnformeerd houdt over uw gebruik van de dvd's, " +"zodat we\n" " u kunnen helpen om uw organisatie, evenement of school op onze\n" -" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>nieuwspagina</a>\n" -" of op andere bronnen te promoten. (Hint! We ontvangen graag foto's. Maak er veel!).\n" -" Neem contact met ons op op <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse.org'>opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" -" om over promotie te praten en/of over andere manieren waarop we u kunnen assisteren." +" <a href='http://news.opensuse.org' title='news.opensuse.org'>" +"nieuwspagina</a>\n" +" of op andere bronnen te promoten. (Hint! We ontvangen graag foto's. " +"Maak er veel!).\n" +" Neem contact met ons op op <a href='mailto:opensuse-marketing@opensuse" +".org'>opensuse-marketing(a)opensuse.org</a>\n" +" om over promotie te praten en/of over andere manieren waarop we u " +"kunnen assisteren." -msgid "When downloading images other than the CD for network installation, it is strongly recommended to use a proper download manager to reduce the risk of corrupted data." -msgstr "Bij het downloaden van images anders dan de CD voor netwerkinstallatie, wordt het gebruik van een goede download-manager sterk aangeraden om het risico van corrupte data te verminderen." +msgid "" +"When downloading images other than the CD for network installation, it is " +"strongly recommended to use a proper download manager to reduce the risk " +"of corrupted data." +msgstr "" +"Bij het downloaden van images anders dan de CD voor netwerkinstallatie, wordt " +"het gebruik van een goede download-manager sterk aangeraden om het " +"risico van corrupte data te verminderen." -msgid "You can add the repository key to apt. Keep in mind that the owner of the key may distribute updates, packages and repositories that your system will trust (<a href=\"%s\">more information</a>). To add the key, run:" -msgstr "U kunt de repository-key aan apt toevoegen. Bedenk dat de eigenaar van de key updates, pakketten en repositories kan distribueren die uw systeem zal vertrouwen (<a href=\"%s\">meer informatie</a>). Om de key toe te voegen, voer uit:" +msgid "" +"You can add the repository key to apt. Keep in mind that the owner of the key " +"may distribute updates, packages and repositories that your system will trust " +"(<a href=\"%s\">more information</a>). To add the key, run:" +msgstr "" +"U kunt de repository-key aan apt toevoegen. Bedenk dat de eigenaar van de key " +"updates, pakketten en repositories kan distribueren die uw systeem zal " +"vertrouwen (<a href=\"%s\">meer informatie</a>). Om de key toe te voegen, " +"voer uit:" -msgid "You could try to extend your search to development packages or search for another base distribution (currently )." -msgstr "U zou uw zoekopdracht naar pakketten in ontwikkeling kunnen uitbreiden of zoeken naar een andere basisdistributie (nu )." +msgid "" +"You could try to extend your search to development packages or search for " +"another base distribution (currently )." +msgstr "" +"U zou uw zoekopdracht naar pakketten in ontwikkeling kunnen uitbreiden of " +"zoeken naar een andere basisdistributie (nu )." -msgid "You could verify the file in the process of downloading. For example a checksum (SHA256) will be used automatically if you choose <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> in the field above and use the add-on DownThemAll! in <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Firefox'>Firefox</a>." -msgstr "U kunt het downloadproces verifiëren. Een controlesom (SHA256) zal automatisch worden gebruikt als u <a href='http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> in de het bovenstaande veld gebruikt en de addon DownThemAll! in <a href='http://nl.opensuse.org/Firefox'>Firefox</a> gebruikt." +msgid "" +"You could verify the file in the process of downloading. For example a " +"checksum (SHA256) will be used automatically if you choose <a " +"href='http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink'>Metalink</a> in the field above " +"and use the add-on DownThemAll! in <a href='http://en.opensuse.org/Firefox'>" +"Firefox</a>." +msgstr "" +"U kunt het downloadproces verifiëren. Een controlesom (SHA256) zal " +"automatisch worden gebruikt als u <a href='http://nl.opensuse.org/SDB:Metalink" +"'>Metalink</a> in de het bovenstaande veld gebruikt en de addon DownThemAll! " +"in <a href='http://nl.opensuse.org/Firefox'>Firefox</a> gebruikt." msgid "gpg signature" msgstr "gpg-ondertekening" @@ -599,16 +843,19 @@ msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" -#, fuzzy #| msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" -msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" +msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" -msgid "is still the most commonly used checksum. Many ISO burners display it right before burning." -msgstr "is nog steeds de meest algemeen gebruikte controlesom. Veel ISO-branders tonen het direct voor het branden." +msgid "" +"is still the most commonly used checksum. Many ISO burners display it right " +"before burning." +msgstr "" +"is nog steeds de meest algemeen gebruikte controlesom. Veel ISO-branders " +"tonen het direct voor het branden." msgid "is the less known but more secure checksum than md5." msgstr "is de minst bekende, maar veiliger dan de controlesom van md5." @@ -616,8 +863,12 @@ msgid "md5 checksum" msgstr "MD5-controlesom" -msgid "offers the most security as you can verify who signed it. It should be <tt>%s</tt>." -msgstr "biedt de meeste veiligheid omdat u kunt verifiëren wie het heeft ondertekend. Het zou moeten zijn <tt>%s</tt>." +msgid "" +"offers the most security as you can verify who signed it. It should be <tt>%" +"s</tt>." +msgstr "" +"biedt de meeste veiligheid omdat u kunt verifiëren wie het heeft ondertekend. " +"Het zou moeten zijn <tt>%s</tt>." msgid "openSUSE Countdown" msgstr "Aftellen voor openSUSE" @@ -625,8 +876,12 @@ msgid "openSUSE Derivatives" msgstr "openSUSE afgeleiden" -msgid "openSUSE is available via http (direct link) or BitTorrent. The CD for network installation is only available via http." -msgstr "openSUSE is beschikbaar via http (met een directe koppeling) of via BitTorrent. De cd voor netwerkinstallatie is alleen beschikbaar via http." +msgid "" +"openSUSE is available via http (direct link) or BitTorrent. The CD for " +"network installation is only available via http." +msgstr "" +"openSUSE is beschikbaar via http (met een directe koppeling) of via " +"BitTorrent. De cd voor netwerkinstallatie is alleen beschikbaar via http." msgid "openSUSE only supports PCs with 32 Bits and 64 Bits." msgstr "openSUSE ondersteunt alleen PC's met 32 en 64 bits." -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90700 - trunk/yast/pt_BR/po
by keichwa＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: keichwa Date: 2014-11-03 17:13:48 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90700 Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/audit-laf.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/auth-server.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/autoinst.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/bootloader.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cio.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cluster.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/control.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/crowbar.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/geo-cluster.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iplb.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iscsi-lio-server.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/isns.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/mail.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/registration.pt_BR.po trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/storage.pt_BR.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/audit-laf.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/audit-laf.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/audit-laf.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -77,8 +77,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for frequency option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:130 msgid "How many records to write before a flush to disk is issued" -msgstr "" -"Quantidade de registros a escrever antes de iniciar a liberação do disco" +msgstr "Quantidade de registros a escrever antes de iniciar a liberação do disco" #. translators: command line help text for max_log_file option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:137 @@ -108,9 +107,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for space_left option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:174 msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system starts to run low" -msgstr "" -"Espaço livre na partição de log (em MBytes) quando o sistema estiver ficando " -"sem espaço" +msgstr "Espaço livre na partição de log (em MBytes) quando o sistema estiver ficando sem espaço" #. translators: command line help text for space_left_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:181 @@ -120,15 +117,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for space_left_script option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:196 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if space_left is reached" -msgstr "" -"Script a ser executado (caminho completo) caso space_left seja alcançado" +msgstr "Script a ser executado (caminho completo) caso space_left seja alcançado" #. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:203 msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system is running low" -msgstr "" -"Espaço livre na partição de log (em MBytes) quando o sistema estiver sem " -"espaço livre" +msgstr "Espaço livre na partição de log (em MBytes) quando o sistema estiver sem espaço livre" #. command line help text for admin_space_left_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:210 @@ -138,15 +132,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left_script option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:225 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if admin_space_left is reached" -msgstr "" -"Script a ser executado (caminho completo) caso admin_space_left seja alcançado" +msgstr "Script a ser executado (caminho completo) caso admin_space_left seja alcançado" #. command line help text for action_mail_acct option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:232 msgid "Mail sent to this account (if space_left_action set to EMAIL)" -msgstr "" -"E-mail enviado para esta conta (se space_left_action estiver configurado como " -"EMAIL)" +msgstr "E-mail enviado para esta conta (se space_left_action estiver configurado como EMAIL)" #. command line help text for disk_full_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:239 @@ -242,8 +233,7 @@ "As regras já estão bloqueadas, não é possível redefini-las.\n" "\n" "Se você quiser desbloqueá-las, defina o indicador de habilitado de acordo\n" -"e conclua a configuração. Após isto, uma reinicialização do sistema é " -"necessária." +"e conclua a configuração. Após isto, uma reinicialização do sistema é necessária." #. Report success #: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:488 @@ -253,9 +243,7 @@ #. Report error - error during reset #: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:492 msgid "Cannot reset rules. Check /etc/audit/audit.rules." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível redefinir as regras. Verifique o arquivo " -"/etc/audit/audit.rules." +msgstr "Não foi possível redefinir as regras. Verifique o arquivo /etc/audit/audit.rules." #. Handle actions of rules dialog #: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:560 @@ -310,8 +298,7 @@ msgstr "" "A configuração do auditor está bloqueada (opção -e 2).\n" "Isto significa que as regras estão bloqueadas até a próxima inicialização!\n" -"Se você realmente deseja isso, tenha certeza de que '-e 2' é a última " -"entrada\n" +"Se você realmente deseja isso, tenha certeza de que '-e 2' é a última entrada\n" "no arquivo de regras. Se não, habilite ou desabilite a auditoria.\n" "Para verificar ou mudar as regras, retorne ao editor de regras.\n" @@ -506,8 +493,7 @@ "<big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big> \n" "\n" msgstr "" -"<big>Inicializando a configuração do Framework de Auditoria Linux</big>" -" \n" +"<big>Inicializando a configuração do Framework de Auditoria Linux</big> \n" "\n" #. Read dialog help 2/2 @@ -517,8 +503,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Cancelando a inicialização:</big> \n" -"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar" -" agora.\n" +"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar agora.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:43 @@ -546,32 +531,21 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big> \n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file " -"/var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" -"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications " -"which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches)." +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" +"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches)." msgstr "" "<big>Configuração do arquivo de log do auditd</big> \n" -"O daemon do auditor é o componente do sistema de auditoria Linux responsável " -"por registrar todos os eventos do auditor no arquivo de log " -"/var/log/audit/audit.log (padrão).\n" -"Eventos podem se originar do módulo do kernel apparmor, de aplicativos " -"que usam libaudit (ex.: PAM) ou incidentes causados por regras." +"O daemon do auditor é o componente do sistema de auditoria Linux responsável por registrar todos os eventos do auditor no arquivo de log /var/log/audit/audit.log (padrão).\n" +"Eventos podem se originar do módulo do kernel apparmor, de aplicativos que usam libaudit (ex.: PAM) ou incidentes causados por regras." #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf')." +"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" -"O diálogo Regras para o auditctl oferece mais informações sobre " -"regras e a possibilidade de adicionar regras.\n" -"Informações detalhadas sobre as configurações do arquivo de log podem ser " -"obtidas na página de manual ('man auditd.conf')." +"O diálogo Regras para o auditctl oferece mais informações sobre regras e a possibilidade de adicionar regras.\n" +"Informações detalhadas sobre as configurações do arquivo de log podem ser obtidas na página de manual ('man auditd.conf')." #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:64 @@ -585,141 +559,105 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of writing " -"it on disk (does not affect\n" +"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher). " msgstr "" -"Formato: configure como RAW para registrar todos os dados " -"(armazena os dados\n" -"no formato utilizado pelo kernel) ou NOLOG para descartar todas as " -"informações de auditoria ao invés de escrevê-las em disco\n" +"Formato: configure como RAW para registrar todos os dados (armazena os dados\n" +"no formato utilizado pelo kernel) ou NOLOG para descartar todas as informações de auditoria ao invés de escrevê-las em disco\n" " (não afeta os dados enviados ao despachante)." #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"INCREMENTAL the\n" -"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: keep " -"data portion synced,\n" +"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to INCREMENTAL the\n" +"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: keep data portion synced,\n" "SYNC: keep data and meta-data fully synced." msgstr "" -"Liberar: descreve como os dados são escritos em disco. Se definido " -"como INCREMENTAL, o parâmetro \n" -"Frequência dirá quantos registros serão escritos antes de emitir uma " -"liberação explícita do disco.\n" -"NONE significa que nenhum esforço especial é feito para a liberação " -"dos dados, DATA mantém a seção dos dados sincronizada,\n" +"Liberar: descreve como os dados são escritos em disco. Se definido como INCREMENTAL, o parâmetro \n" +"Frequência dirá quantos registros serão escritos antes de emitir uma liberação explícita do disco.\n" +"NONE significa que nenhum esforço especial é feito para a liberação dos dados, DATA mantém a seção dos dados sincronizada,\n" "SYNC: mantém os dados e os metadados totalmente sincronizados." #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via Size and Action.\n" msgstr "" -"Configure o tamanho máximo do arquivo de log (em megabytes) e a ação a ser " -"tomada quando\n" +"Configure o tamanho máximo do arquivo de log (em megabytes) e a ação a ser tomada quando\n" "este valor for alcançado em Tamanho e ação.\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. IGNORE means do nothing, KEEP_LOGS is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.\n" msgstr "" -"Se a ação definida for ROTATE, o Número de arquivos de log " -"especifica o número\n" -"de arquivos a serem mantidos. Se a ação for SYSLOG, o daemon auditor " -"escreverá um aviso em /var/log/messages.\n" -"Com SUSPEND o daemon para de escrever os registros em disco. " -"IGNORE não faz nada, KEEP_LOGS é semelhante\n" +"Se a ação definida for ROTATE, o Número de arquivos de log especifica o número\n" +"de arquivos a serem mantidos. Se a ação for SYSLOG, o daemon auditor escreverá um aviso em /var/log/messages.\n" +"Com SUSPEND o daemon para de escrever os registros em disco. IGNORE não faz nada, KEEP_LOGS é semelhante\n" "a ROTATE, mas os arquivos de log não são sobrescritos.\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If USER is set, the User Defined Name is\n" -"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.\n" msgstr "" -"O Formato do nome do computador descreve como escrever o nome do " -"computador no arquivo de log.\n" -"Se estiver configurado como USER, o Nome definido pelo usuário " -"é usado. NONE significa que o nome\n" -"do computador não será inserido, HOSTNAME insere o nome retornado pela " -"chamada de sistema 'gethostname',\n" +"O Formato do nome do computador descreve como escrever o nome do computador no arquivo de log.\n" +"Se estiver configurado como USER, o Nome definido pelo usuário é usado. NONE significa que o nome\n" +"do computador não será inserido, HOSTNAME insere o nome retornado pela chamada de sistema 'gethostname',\n" "FQD: nome de domínio totalmente qualificado.\n" #. dispatcher dialog help 1/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big> \n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" "<big>Configuração do despachante do auditd</big> \n" -"Informações detalhadas sobre a configuração do despachante podem ser obtidas " -"na página de manual\n" +"Informações detalhadas sobre a configuração do despachante podem ser obtidas na página de manual\n" "('man auditd.conf')." #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin." msgstr "" -"Despachante: O aplicativo despachante é iniciado pelo daemon " -"auditor e\n" +"Despachante: O aplicativo despachante é iniciado pelo daemon auditor e\n" "recebe todos os eventos do auditor na entrada padrão." #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want a " -"blocking/lossless\n" +"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication." msgstr "" -"Comunicação: Controla a comunicação entre o daemon e o programa " -"despachante.\n" -"A opção lossy (com perdas, padrão) faz com que os eventos na entrada " -"do despachante sejam descartados\n" -"quando esta fila (buffer de 128k) estiver cheia. Escolha lossless (sem " -"perdas) se você quiser\n" +"Comunicação: Controla a comunicação entre o daemon e o programa despachante.\n" +"A opção lossy (com perdas, padrão) faz com que os eventos na entrada do despachante sejam descartados\n" +"quando esta fila (buffer de 128k) estiver cheia. Escolha lossless (sem perdas) se você quiser\n" "uma comunicação sem perdas ou bloqueante." #. dispatcher dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man " -"audispd.conf')." +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf')." msgstr "" "O despachante 'audispd' é um multiplexador de eventos de auditoria.\n" -"Para mais informações consulte a página do manual ('man audispd' e 'man " -"audispd.conf')." +"Para mais informações consulte a página do manual ('man audispd' e 'man audispd.conf')." #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:122 @@ -727,8 +665,7 @@ "Note: The dispatcher program must be owned by 'root', have '0750'\n" " file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.\n" msgstr "" -"Observação: O aplicativo despachante deve ser de propriedade do " -"root, possuir\n" +"Observação: O aplicativo despachante deve ser de propriedade do root, possuir\n" "permissão '0750' e o caminho completo deve ser fornecido.\n" #. disk space dialog help 1/6 @@ -739,34 +676,26 @@ "For detailed information, refer to the manual page ('man auditd.conf').\n" msgstr "" "<big>Configuração de espaço em disco do Auditd</big> \n" -"As configurações feitas aqui referem-se ao espaço em disco na partição de " -"logs.\n" -"Para informações detalhadas, consulta a página de manuel ('man auditd.conf')<" -"/p>\n" +"As configurações feitas aqui referem-se ao espaço em disco na partição de logs.\n" +"Para informações detalhadas, consulta a página de manuel ('man auditd.conf')\n" #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an " -"Action because\n" +"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an Action because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space." msgstr "" -"Espaço restante (em megabytes) indica ao daemon auditor quando " -"executar uma Ação caso\n" +"Espaço restante (em megabytes) indica ao daemon auditor quando executar uma Ação caso\n" "o sistema esteja ficando sem espaço livre." #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The " -"system is running\n" -"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action " -"will be performed." +"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The system is running\n" +"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action will be performed." msgstr "" -"O valor para Espaço restante do administrador deve ser menor que o " -"valor acima. O sistema está ficando\n" -"sem espaço livre em disco se o valor for atingido e a Ação " -"especificada será realizada." +"O valor para Espaço restante do administrador deve ser menor que o valor acima. O sistema está ficando\n" +"sem espaço livre em disco se o valor for atingido e a Ação especificada será realizada." #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 @@ -779,45 +708,32 @@ "switches the system to single user mode. HALT shuts down the\n" "system.\n" msgstr "" -"Se uma ação estiver definida como EMAIL, um e-mail de aviso será " -"enviado para \n" -"a conta especificada em Ação de envio de e-mail. SYSLOG " -"significa que \n" -"o aviso sobre espaço em disco será escrito em /var/log/messages. IGNORE" -" quer dizer que\n" -"não será feito nada. EXEC executa o script a partir do Caminho para " -"o script. \n" -"SUSPEND suspende a escrita dos registros em disco. SINGLE " -"coloca o sistema \n" +"Se uma ação estiver definida como EMAIL, um e-mail de aviso será enviado para \n" +"a conta especificada em Ação de envio de e-mail. SYSLOG significa que \n" +"o aviso sobre espaço em disco será escrito em /var/log/messages. IGNORE quer dizer que\n" +"não será feito nada. EXEC executa o script a partir do Caminho para o script. \n" +"SUSPEND suspende a escrita dos registros em disco. SINGLE coloca o sistema \n" "no modo monousuário. HALT desliga o sistema.\n" #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for EMAIL)." msgstr "" -"Você também pode especificar uma Ação a ser executada caso o disco " -"esteja cheio (o disco já está cheio) e\n" -"uma Ação em caso de erro em disco (realizada quando um erro é " -"detectado enquanto se escreve em disco).\n" -"As ações disponíveis são as mesmas exibidas acima, exceto por EMAIL.<" -"/p>" +"Você também pode especificar uma Ação a ser executada caso o disco esteja cheio (o disco já está cheio) e\n" +"uma Ação em caso de erro em disco (realizada quando um erro é detectado enquanto se escreve em disco).\n" +"As ações disponíveis são as mesmas exibidas acima, exceto por EMAIL." #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "Note: All scripts specified for EXEC must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.\n" msgstr "" -"Observação: Todos os scripts especificados para EXEC devem " -"ser de propriedade\n" -"do root, possuir permissão '0750' e o caminho completo deve ser fornecido." -"\n" +"Observação: Todos os scripts especificados para EXEC devem ser de propriedade\n" +"do root, possuir permissão '0750' e o caminho completo deve ser fornecido.\n" #. rules dialog help 1/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:160 @@ -830,49 +746,36 @@ "<big>Regras para o auditctl</big> \n" "Este diálogo oferece a possibilidade de habilitar ou desabilitar a auditoria\n" "das chamadas de sistema, bem como bloquear a configuração do auditor.\n" -"O indicador selecionado em Definir indicador de habilitado será " -"adicionado às regras." +"O indicador selecionado em Definir indicador de habilitado será adicionado às regras." #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot." -msgstr "" -"Observação: O bloqueio das regras torna impossível sua " -"modificação até a próxima reinicialização." +msgid "Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot." +msgstr "Observação: O bloqueio das regras torna impossível sua modificação até a próxima reinicialização." #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to " -"/var/log/audit/audit.log (default). " +" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). " msgstr "" "Habilitar a auditoria sem regras adicionais fará com que \n" -"os aplicativos que usam libaudit, por exemplo, PAM, registrem os " -"eventos em /var/log/audit/audit.log (por padrão)." +"os aplicativos que usam libaudit, por exemplo, PAM, registrem os eventos em /var/log/audit/audit.log (por padrão)." #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users. \n" +"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users. \n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.\n" msgstr "" -"Também é possível editar as regras manualmente, o que é recomendado " -"somente para usuários avançados. \n" +"Também é possível editar as regras manualmente, o que é recomendado somente para usuários avançados. \n" "Para mais informações sobre todas as opções, consulte 'man auditctl'.\n" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings from " -"/etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" +msgid "Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" msgstr "" -"Verificar sintaxe envia as regras via auditctl para o " -"subsistema auditor e informa se a sintaxe está correta. \n" +"Verificar sintaxe envia as regras via auditctl para o subsistema auditor e informa se a sintaxe está correta. \n" "Restaurar restaura as configurações de /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" #. rules dialog help 6/6 @@ -884,10 +787,8 @@ "an example rules file.\n" msgstr "" "Clique em Restaurar e redefinir para chamar o auditctl \n" -"e restaurar as regras anteriores e redefinir as mudanças (a partir das " -"verificações de sintaxe anteriores). \n" -"Clique em Carregar para abrir uma janela de seleção de arquivos na " -"qual é possível carregar\n" +"e restaurar as regras anteriores e redefinir as mudanças (a partir das verificações de sintaxe anteriores). \n" +"Clique em Carregar para abrir uma janela de seleção de arquivos na qual é possível carregar\n" "um arquivo exemplo de regras.\n" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -918,12 +819,8 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "" -"To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 " -"must be installed." -msgstr "" -"Para configurar a configuração da Auditoria Linux, o pacote %1 deve " -"estar instalado." +msgid "To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 must be installed." +msgstr "Para configurar a configuração da Auditoria Linux, o pacote %1 deve estar instalado." #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 msgid "Install it now?" @@ -999,7 +896,6 @@ #. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 -#| msgid "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" msgid "" "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" "or only start the daemon for now?" @@ -1013,11 +909,6 @@ #. message about loaded kernel module #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:470 -#| msgid "" -#| " The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" -#| "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" -#| "events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). \n" -#| "Do you want to start the daemon now?" msgid "" "The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" "The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/auth-server.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/auth-server.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/auth-server.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -89,8 +89,7 @@ #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:209 msgid "Database cannot be created when the service is not enabled" -msgstr "" -"Não será possível criar o banco de dados enquanto o serviço não for habilitado" +msgstr "Não será possível criar o banco de dados enquanto o serviço não for habilitado" #. y2milestone("db-options : %1", db); #: src/clients/auth-server.rb:219 @@ -101,12 +100,8 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later " -"in the installed system." -msgstr "" -"O banco de dados LDAP já foi criado. Você pode alterar as configurações mais " -"tarde no sistema instalado." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgstr "O banco de dados LDAP já foi criado. Você pode alterar as configurações mais tarde no sistema instalado." #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:101 @@ -118,12 +113,8 @@ msgstr "[configurado manualmente]" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível recuperar a senha raiz do sistema. Defina uma senha do " -"servidor LDAP para continuar." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgstr "Não foi possível recuperar a senha raiz do sistema. Defina uma senha do servidor LDAP para continuar." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 msgid "Setting up LDAP Master Server:" @@ -216,12 +207,8 @@ "sem instalar os pacotes requeridos." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." -msgstr "" -"Falha na configuração da replicação OpenLDAP. Reconfigure-a após o término da " -"instalação." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." +msgstr "Falha na configuração da replicação OpenLDAP. Reconfigure-a após o término da instalação." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 msgid "" @@ -243,16 +230,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" -"Você já tem uma configuração existente, mas o servidor LDAP não está em " -"execução atualmente.\n" -"Você deseja iniciar o servidor agora e ler novamente os dados de configuração " -"ou você quer criar\n" +"Você já tem uma configuração existente, mas o servidor LDAP não está em execução atualmente.\n" +"Você deseja iniciar o servidor agora e ler novamente os dados de configuração ou você quer criar\n" "uma nova configuração do zero?" #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:112 @@ -279,8 +262,7 @@ "configuration to the configuration database?\n" msgstr "" "Seu sistema está atualmente configurado para usar a configuração em\n" -"/etc/openldap/slapd.conf. O YaST suporta somente o banco de dados de " -"configuração\n" +"/etc/openldap/slapd.conf. O YaST suporta somente o banco de dados de configuração\n" "dinâmica do OpenLDAP (back-config). Você deseja migrar sua configuração\n" "existente para o banco de dados de configuração?\n" @@ -339,12 +321,8 @@ msgstr "O Servidor LDAP não está executando." #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" -msgstr "" -"Você deseja iniciá-lo agora para reler seus dados de configuração ou você " -"deseja criar uma nova configuração?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgstr "Você deseja iniciá-lo agora para reler seus dados de configuração ou você deseja criar uma nova configuração?" #. get helps page #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:227 @@ -374,8 +352,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:355 msgid "All data, including configuration, is replicated from a remote server." -msgstr "" -"Todos os dados, incluindo configurações, são replicados de um servidor remoto." +msgstr "Todos os dados, incluindo configurações, são replicados de um servidor remoto." #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:386 msgid "" @@ -557,20 +534,15 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Falha ao abrir a conexão ao banco de dados \"cn=config\" no servidor " -"provedor.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Falha ao abrir a conexão ao banco de dados \"cn=config\" no servidor provedor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 msgid "" "Verify that the provider server allows remote connections to the \n" "\"cn=config\" database and that you entered the correct password.\n" msgstr "" -"Verifique se o servidor provedor permite conexões remotas ao banco de dados " -"\"cn=config\"\n" +"Verifique se o servidor provedor permite conexões remotas ao banco de dados \"cn=config\"\n" "e se você digitou a senha corretamente.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1287 @@ -583,8 +555,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1314 msgid "Do you want to import a different CA/Server Certificate?" -msgstr "" -"Você deseja importar um certificado CA ou certificado de servidor diferente?" +msgstr "Você deseja importar um certificado CA ou certificado de servidor diferente?" #. Check if the syncrepl config of cn=config makes sense #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1325 @@ -605,20 +576,13 @@ "ele já está se comportando como um consumidor de replicação.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." -msgstr "" -"A configuração de replicação em cascata de cn=config não é suportada " -"atualmente." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgstr "A configuração de replicação em cascata de cn=config não é suportada atualmente." #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" -msgstr "" -"Falha ao verificar as credenciais de autenticação definidas na configuração " -"de replicação do servidor provedor.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgstr "Falha ao verificar as credenciais de autenticação definidas na configuração de replicação do servidor provedor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1998 @@ -640,10 +604,8 @@ "To act as a master server for replication, the configuration database needs\n" "to be remotely accessible. Set a password for the configuration database.\n" msgstr "" -"Para agir como um servidor mestre para replicação, o banco de dados de " -"configuração precisa\n" -"ser acessível remotamente. Defina uma senha para o banco de dados da " -"configuração.\n" +"Para agir como um servidor mestre para replicação, o banco de dados de configuração precisa\n" +"ser acessível remotamente. Defina uma senha para o banco de dados da configuração.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" @@ -682,15 +644,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "Select Yes if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" +"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" "After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" msgstr "" "Selecione Sim se o servidor LDAP deve ser iniciado automaticamente\n" -"durante a inicialização. Selecione Não se o servidor LDAP não deve ser " -"iniciado. Nota:\n" -"Após selecionar Não você não poderá fazer nenhuma modificação nas " -"configurações\n" +"durante a inicialização. Selecione Não se o servidor LDAP não deve ser iniciado. Nota:\n" +"Após selecionar Não você não poderá fazer nenhuma modificação nas configurações\n" "OpenLDAP.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -699,27 +658,20 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:27 msgid "Enable and disable the various protocol listeners of OpenLDAP." -msgstr "" -"Habilite e desabilite vários listeners de protocolo do OpenLDAP." +msgstr "Habilite e desabilite vários listeners de protocolo do OpenLDAP." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured." +"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured." msgstr "" -"LDAP é a interface LDAP padrão na porta 389. É possível uma " -"comunicação segura TLS/SSL\n" -"com a operação StartTLS quando você tem um certificado de servidor " -"configurado." +"LDAP é a interface LDAP padrão na porta 389. É possível uma comunicação segura TLS/SSL\n" +"com a operação StartTLS quando você tem um certificado de servidor configurado." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -728,10 +680,8 @@ "LDAP server via a Unix Domain Socket. Do not disable the LDAPI interface \n" "as YaST uses it to communicate with the server.\n" msgstr "" -"LDAPI habilita a interface \"LDAP sobre IPC\". Com isto você pode " -"acessar\n" -"o Servidor LDAP através de um soquete de domínio Unix. Não desabilite a " -"interface LDAPI,\n" +"LDAPI habilita a interface \"LDAP sobre IPC\". Com isto você pode acessar\n" +"o Servidor LDAP através de um soquete de domínio Unix. Não desabilite a interface LDAPI,\n" "já que o YaST a utiliza para se comunicar com o servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:41 @@ -753,17 +703,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. " -"Hdb is a\n" -"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. Hdb is a\n" +"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to bdb. A\n" "hdb-Database needs a larger idlcachesize than a\n" "bdb-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library " -"to store data.\n" -"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.\n" +"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -776,39 +722,28 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password" -" \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the " -"\n" -"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>" -"dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the \n" +"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>. " msgstr "" "O Administrador DN junto com a Senha do administrador LDAP\n" -"especifica a identidade de um superusuário para o banco de dados, superando " -"todas ACLs e outros \n" -"limites das restrições administrativas. A seleção de Adicionar banco de " -"dados DN adiciona o \n" -"Banco DN digitado acima, por exemplo, o banco DN <tt>" -"dc=exemplo,dc=com</tt>\n" -"e o Administrador DN de <tt>c=Admin</tt> combinam com um Administrador DN " -"efetivo\n" +"especifica a identidade de um superusuário para o banco de dados, superando todas ACLs e outros \n" +"limites das restrições administrativas. A seleção de Adicionar banco de dados DN adiciona o \n" +"Banco DN digitado acima, por exemplo, o banco DN <tt>dc=exemplo,dc=com</tt>\n" +"e o Administrador DN de <tt>c=Admin</tt> combinam com um Administrador DN efetivo\n" "do <tt>c=Admin,dc=exemplo,dc=com</tt>. " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process. " msgstr "" "Se este assistente foi iniciado durante a instalação, a\n" -"Senha do administrador LDAP está definida como a senha do root do " -"sistema\n" +"Senha do administrador LDAP está definida como a senha do root do sistema\n" "fornecida anteriormente no processo de instalação." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:74 @@ -820,16 +755,11 @@ "file <tt>/etc/openldap/ldap.conf</tt>. This checkbox is selected by default\n" "when creating the first database on a server.\n" msgstr "" -"Para usar este banco de dados como padrão para as ferramentas do cliente " -"OpenLDAP\n" -"(ex. ldapsearch) marque Utilizar este banco de dados como padrão para " -"clientes OpenLDAP.Isto\n" -"resultará na escrita do nome de máquina, \"localhost\" e o DN base " -"fornecido acima no arquivo\n" -"de configuração do cliente OpenLDAP <tt>/etc/openldap/ldap.conf</tt>. Esta " -"caixa de seleção\n" -"é selecionada por padrão na criação do primeiro banco de dados num servidor.<" -"/p>\n" +"Para usar este banco de dados como padrão para as ferramentas do cliente OpenLDAP\n" +"(ex. ldapsearch) marque Utilizar este banco de dados como padrão para clientes OpenLDAP.Isto\n" +"resultará na escrita do nome de máquina, \"localhost\" e o DN base fornecido acima no arquivo\n" +"de configuração do cliente OpenLDAP <tt>/etc/openldap/ldap.conf</tt>. Esta caixa de seleção\n" +"é selecionada por padrão na criação do primeiro banco de dados num servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:82 msgid "" @@ -846,12 +776,9 @@ "authentication to the configuration database will only be allowed when \n" "using sufficiently protected (e.g. SSL/TLS encrypted) connections.\n" msgstr "" -"Para habilitar ou desabilitar a autenticação de texto plano (Bind LDAP " -"simples)\n" -"para o banco de dados de configuração, clique na caixa de seleção associada. " -"A autenticação de texto plano\n" -"ao banco de dados de configuração será permitida somente quando forem " -"utilizadas \n" +"Para habilitar ou desabilitar a autenticação de texto plano (Bind LDAP simples)\n" +"para o banco de dados de configuração, clique na caixa de seleção associada. A autenticação de texto plano\n" +"ao banco de dados de configuração será permitida somente quando forem utilizadas \n" "conexões suficientemente protegidas (ex: SSL/TLS criptografada).\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:91 @@ -863,12 +790,9 @@ "The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" -"Para alterar a senha da conta de administrador do banco de dados de " -"configuração, clique em Alterar senha.\n" -"Uma janela instantânea será aberta, onde você pode digitar a nova senha e " -"selecionar a Criptografia de senha.\n" -"Os campos de senha estão inicialmente vazios, mesmo que uma senha já tenha " -"sido definida na configuração.\n" +"Para alterar a senha da conta de administrador do banco de dados de configuração, clique em Alterar senha.\n" +"Uma janela instantânea será aberta, onde você pode digitar a nova senha e selecionar a Criptografia de senha.\n" +"Os campos de senha estão inicialmente vazios, mesmo que uma senha já tenha sido definida na configuração.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "<h3>Edit BDB Database</h3>" @@ -880,58 +804,38 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with Append Base DN." msgstr "" -"Digite o DN completo ou somente a primeira parte e anexe o DN base " -"automaticamente \n" +"Digite o DN completo ou somente a primeira parte e anexe o DN base automaticamente \n" "com Adicionar DN base." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change " -"Password.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password " -"Encryption.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.\n" +"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change Password.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password Encryption.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" -"Para alterar a senha da conta de administrador, clique em Alterar " -"senha.\n" -"Uma janela instantânea será aberta, onde você pode digitar a nova senha e " -"selecionar a Criptografia de senha.\n" -"Os campos de senha estão inicialmente vazios, mesmo se uma senha já foi " -"definida na configuração.\n" +"Para alterar a senha da conta de administrador, clique em Alterar senha.\n" +"Uma janela instantânea será aberta, onde você pode digitar a nova senha e selecionar a Criptografia de senha.\n" +"Os campos de senha estão inicialmente vazios, mesmo se uma senha já foi definida na configuração.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index " -"Cache (IDL cache) \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index Cache (IDL cache) \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs)." msgstr "" -"Através do Cache de entradas e Cache de índice (cache IDL) " -"você pode ajustar\n" -"os tamanhos dos caches internos do OpenLDAP. O Cache de entradas " -"define o número de entradas\n" -"que são armazenadas na memória cache de entradas do OpenLDAP. Se houver " -"memória RAM suficiente, esse número\n" -"deve ser grande o suficiente pra manter todo o banco de dados em memória. O <" -"b>Cache de índice (cache IDL)\n" -"é usado para acelerar as buscas em atributos indexados. Em geral, " -"especialmente os bancos de dados HDB necessitam\n" -"de um cache IDL grande para um bom desempenho da busca (três vezes o tamanho " -"do cache de entradas como\n" +"Através do Cache de entradas e Cache de índice (cache IDL) você pode ajustar\n" +"os tamanhos dos caches internos do OpenLDAP. O Cache de entradas define o número de entradas\n" +"que são armazenadas na memória cache de entradas do OpenLDAP. Se houver memória RAM suficiente, esse número\n" +"deve ser grande o suficiente pra manter todo o banco de dados em memória. O Cache de índice (cache IDL)\n" +"é usado para acelerar as buscas em atributos indexados. Em geral, especialmente os bancos de dados HDB necessitam\n" +"de um cache IDL grande para um bom desempenho da busca (três vezes o tamanho do cache de entradas como\n" "regra)." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:118 @@ -948,22 +852,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before " -"storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords. " msgstr "" -"Marque Senhas não criptografadas com hash para especificar se o " -"servidor OpenLDAP deverá criptografar as senhas não criptografadas \n" -"presentes em solicitações de adição e alteração antes de armazená-las no " -"banco de dados. Observe que isso viola o modelo de informações\n" -" X.500/LDAP, mas pode ser necessário para compensar os clientes LDAP que não " -"usam a operação estendida de alteração de senha \n" +"Marque Senhas não criptografadas com hash para especificar se o servidor OpenLDAP deverá criptografar as senhas não criptografadas \n" +"presentes em solicitações de adição e alteração antes de armazená-las no banco de dados. Observe que isso viola o modelo de informações\n" +" X.500/LDAP, mas pode ser necessário para compensar os clientes LDAP que não usam a operação estendida de alteração de senha \n" " para gerenciar senhas." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:129 @@ -974,32 +871,22 @@ "attacker. Sites sensitive to security issues should not enable this\n" "option. \n" msgstr "" -"Se a opção Informar o status \"Conta bloqueada\" estiver " -"habilitada, os usuários que se autenticarem em uma conta bloqueada\n" -"receberão uma notificação de que a conta foi bloqueada. A notificação pode " -"fornecer informações úteis\n" -" a um invasor. Os sites que exigem segurança não devem habilitar essa opção.<" -"/p>\n" +"Se a opção Informar o status \"Conta bloqueada\" estiver habilitada, os usuários que se autenticarem em uma conta bloqueada\n" +"receberão uma notificação de que a conta foi bloqueada. A notificação pode fornecer informações úteis\n" +" a um invasor. Os sites que exigem segurança não devem habilitar essa opção.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object " -"DN." -msgstr "" -"Digite o nome do objeto de política padrão em DN de objeto de política " -"padrão." +msgid "Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object DN." +msgstr "Digite o nome do objeto de política padrão em DN de objeto de política padrão." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You " -"may\n" +"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.\n" msgstr "" -"Crie ou modifique a política padrão clicando em Editar política. " -"Pode ser necessário\n" -"fornecer a senha do administrador LDAP após isso, para permitir que o objeto " -"de política seja lido\n" +"Crie ou modifique a política padrão clicando em Editar política. Pode ser necessário\n" +"fornecer a senha do administrador LDAP após isso, para permitir que o objeto de política seja lido\n" "do servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:144 @@ -1011,52 +898,38 @@ msgstr "Altere as opções de indexação de um banco de dados hdb ou bdb." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined." -msgstr "" -"A tabela exibe uma lista de atributos que atualmente possuem um índice " -"definido." +msgid "The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined." +msgstr "A tabela exibe uma lista de atributos que atualmente possuem um índice definido." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.\n" msgstr "" -"Índices são usados pelo OpenLDAP para melhorar o desempenho das buscas em " -"tipos específicos\n" -"de buscas. Índices devem ser configurados para corresponder às buscas mais " -"comuns que são realizadas\n" -"num banco de dados. O YaST permite a configuração de três tipos diferentes de " -"índices.\n" +"Índices são usados pelo OpenLDAP para melhorar o desempenho das buscas em tipos específicos\n" +"de buscas. Índices devem ser configurados para corresponder às buscas mais comuns que são realizadas\n" +"num banco de dados. O YaST permite a configuração de três tipos diferentes de índices.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "Presence: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.\n" msgstr "" -"Presença: este índice é usado para buscas que usam o filtro de " -"presença\n" -"(por ex. <tt>(Tipo de atributo = *)</tt>). Índices de presença devem somente " -"ser configurados para atributos\n" +"Presença: este índice é usado para buscas que usam o filtro de presença\n" +"(por ex. <tt>(Tipo de atributo = *)</tt>). Índices de presença devem somente ser configurados para atributos\n" "que ocorrem raramente no banco de dados.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "Equality: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.\n" msgstr "" -"Igualdade: este índice é usado para buscas que utilizam filtros de " -"igualdade (por ex.\n" -"(<tt>Tipo do atributo=<valores exatos>)</tt>). Um índice de " -"igualdade deve ser sempre configurado\n" +"Igualdade: este índice é usado para buscas que utilizam filtros de igualdade (por ex.\n" +"(<tt>Tipo do atributo=<valores exatos>)</tt>). Um índice de igualdade deve ser sempre configurado\n" "a partir do atributo <tt>classe do objeto</tt>.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:165 @@ -1064,8 +937,7 @@ "Substring: This index is used for searches with substring filters\n" "(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=<substring>*)</tt>)\n" msgstr "" -"Substring: este índice é usado para buscas que utilizam o filtro " -"substring\n" +"Substring: este índice é usado para buscas que utilizam o filtro substring\n" "(por ex.: <tt>(Tipo de atributo=<substring>*)</tt>).\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:168 @@ -1074,26 +946,20 @@ "Delete to delete an existing index and Edit to change the\n" "indexing options of an already indexed attribute.\n" msgstr "" -"Use Adicionar para definir opções de indexação para um novo " -"atributo,Remover para\n" -"remover um índice existente e Editar para modificar as opções de " -"indexação de um atributo\n" +"Use Adicionar para definir opções de indexação para um novo atributo,Remover para\n" +"remover um índice existente e Editar para modificar as opções de indexação de um atributo\n" "já indexado.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" "written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.\n" msgstr "" -"Nota: dependendo do tamanho do banco de dados, pode levar um certo tempo " -"até que um\n" -"índice recentemente adicionado fique ativo no banco de dados. Após a escrita " -"da configuração no servidor,\n" -"uma tarefa em background será iniciada para gerar a informação de indexação " -"para o banco de dados.\n" +"Nota: dependendo do tamanho do banco de dados, pode levar um certo tempo até que um\n" +"índice recentemente adicionado fique ativo no banco de dados. Após a escrita da configuração no servidor,\n" +"uma tarefa em background será iniciada para gerar a informação de indexação para o banco de dados.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:179 msgid "<h3>Access Control Configuration</h3>" @@ -1104,8 +970,7 @@ "This table gives you an overview of all Access Control rules that are\n" "currently configured for the selected database\n" msgstr "" -"Esta tabela dá a você um resumo de todas as regras de controle de acesso " -"que estão\n" +"Esta tabela dá a você um resumo de todas as regras de controle de acesso que estão\n" "atualmente configuradas para o banco de dados selecionado.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 @@ -1114,34 +979,27 @@ "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click Edit.\n" msgstr "" -"Para cada regra você pode ver quais objetos de destino combinam com a " -"regra. Para ter uma visão\n" -"mais detalhada de uma regra ou mudar uma regra, selecione uma regra na tabela " -"e clique em Editar\n" +"Para cada regra você pode ver quais objetos de destino combinam com a regra. Para ter uma visão\n" +"mais detalhada de uma regra ou mudar uma regra, selecione uma regra na tabela e clique em Editar\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:190 msgid "" "Use Add to create new access control rules and Delete to\n" "delete an access control rule.\n" msgstr "" -"Use Adicionar para criar novas regras de controle de acesso e " -"Remover para remover\n" +"Use Adicionar para criar novas regras de controle de acesso e Remover para remover\n" "uma regra de controle de acesso\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" "OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" -"A avaliação do controle de acesso do OpenLDAP para na primeira regra de " -"destino cujo destino\n" -"definido (DN, filtro e atributos) correspondente a entrada que será acessada. " -"Você deve ordenar as regras de acordo\n" -"com as suas necessidades. Você pode usar os botões Up eDownpara " -"isso\n" +"A avaliação do controle de acesso do OpenLDAP para na primeira regra de destino cujo destino\n" +"definido (DN, filtro e atributos) correspondente a entrada que será acessada. Você deve ordenar as regras de acordo\n" +"com as suas necessidades. Você pode usar os botões Up eDownpara isso\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:199 msgid "<h3>Replication Provider Settings</h3>" @@ -1149,14 +1007,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, " -"if you want to \n" +"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server." msgstr "" -"Marque a caixa de seleção \"Habilitar o provedor ldapsync para este " -"banco de dados\" se você \n" -"deseja disponibilizar a replicação do banco de dados atualmente selecionado " -"para outro servidor." +"Marque a caixa de seleção \"Habilitar o provedor ldapsync para este banco de dados\" se você \n" +"deseja disponibilizar a replicação do banco de dados atualmente selecionado para outro servidor." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:205 msgid "<h4>Checkpoint Settings</h4>" @@ -1164,32 +1019,21 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.\n" msgstr "" -"Aqui você pode especificar a frequência de escrita do indicador de estado " -"de sincronização (armazenado no \n" -"atributo \"contextCSN\") no banco de dados. Ele é sincronizado com o " -"banco de dados de\n" -"após a quantidade de \"Operações\" de escrita especificada ou após a " -"passagem de\n" -"\"Minutos\" desde a última escrita do indicador. Por padrão, (ambos os " -"valores são '0') o indicador de estado é gravado\n" -"somente após um desligamento sem erros. Gravá-lo por mais de uma vez " -"frequentemente pode resultar em tempos de inicialização\n" -"mais curtos após um desligamento com erros, mas pode resultar em uma melhora " -"de desempenho em ambientes com\n" +"Aqui você pode especificar a frequência de escrita do indicador de estado de sincronização (armazenado no \n" +"atributo \"contextCSN\") no banco de dados. Ele é sincronizado com o banco de dados de\n" +"após a quantidade de \"Operações\" de escrita especificada ou após a passagem de\n" +"\"Minutos\" desde a última escrita do indicador. Por padrão, (ambos os valores são '0') o indicador de estado é gravado\n" +"somente após um desligamento sem erros. Gravá-lo por mais de uma vez frequentemente pode resultar em tempos de inicialização\n" +"mais curtos após um desligamento com erros, mas pode resultar em uma melhora de desempenho em ambientes com\n" "muitas operações de escrita do LDAP.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:216 @@ -1198,21 +1042,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server." +"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server." msgstr "" -"Configura um registro de sessão em memória para gravar informações sobre " -"operações de escrita\n" -"realizadas no banco de dados. Especifique quantas operações de escrita devem " -"ser gravadas no log de sessão. \n" -"A configuração de um log de sessão é útil apenas para replicações \"" -"refreshOnly\". Nesse \n" +"Configura um registro de sessão em memória para gravar informações sobre operações de escrita\n" +"realizadas no banco de dados. Especifique quantas operações de escrita devem ser gravadas no log de sessão. \n" +"A configuração de um log de sessão é útil apenas para replicações \"refreshOnly\". Nesse \n" "caso, ele pode acelerar a replicação e reduzir a carga no servidor mestre." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -1224,8 +1061,7 @@ "Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.\n" msgstr "" -"Selecione \"Este banco de dados é um consumidor de replicação\" se " -"você deseja que o banco de dados \n" +"Selecione \"Este banco de dados é um consumidor de replicação\" se você deseja que o banco de dados \n" "seja uma réplica de um banco de dados em outro servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:229 @@ -1238,18 +1074,13 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (ldap or ldaps) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using " -"non-standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" -"Forneça aqui os detalhes de conexão para a conexão de replicação ao servidor " -"mestre. Selecione o \n" -"protocolo a ser utilizado (ldap ou ldaps) e digite o nome de " -"máquina absoluto do servidor mestre. É importante\n" -"utilizar o nome de máquina absoluto para que seja possível verificar o " -"certificado TLS/SSL do servidor mestre. Ajuste\n" -"o número da porta se o servidor mestre não estiver usando portas ldap " -"padrões.\n" +"Forneça aqui os detalhes de conexão para a conexão de replicação ao servidor mestre. Selecione o \n" +"protocolo a ser utilizado (ldap ou ldaps) e digite o nome de máquina absoluto do servidor mestre. É importante\n" +"utilizar o nome de máquina absoluto para que seja possível verificar o certificado TLS/SSL do servidor mestre. Ajuste\n" +"o número da porta se o servidor mestre não estiver usando portas ldap padrões.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:238 msgid "<h4>Replication Type</h4>" @@ -1266,12 +1097,9 @@ "interval how often this synchronization happens can be configured via the\n" "Replication Interval setting.\n" msgstr "" -"refreshOnly: o servidor escravo, periodicamente, abrirá uma " -"conexão, \n" -"efetuará uma sincronização e fechará a conexão novamente. O intervalo de " -"execução \n" -"dessa sincronização pode ser configurado através da opção Intervalo de " -"Replicação.\n" +"refreshOnly: o servidor escravo, periodicamente, abrirá uma conexão, \n" +"efetuará uma sincronização e fechará a conexão novamente. O intervalo de execução \n" +"dessa sincronização pode ser configurado através da opção Intervalo de Replicação.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:246 msgid "" @@ -1279,10 +1107,8 @@ "connection to the master server for synchronization. Updated entries on the\n" "master server are immediately sent to the slave via this connection.\n" msgstr "" -"refreshAndPersist: o servidor escravo abrirá uma conexão " -"persistente ao servidor mestre para\n" -"sincronização. Registros atualizados no servidor mestre serão imediatamente " -"enviados para o servidor escravo através desta conexão.\n" +"refreshAndPersist: o servidor escravo abrirá uma conexão persistente ao servidor mestre para\n" +"sincronização. Registros atualizados no servidor mestre serão imediatamente enviados para o servidor escravo através desta conexão.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:251 msgid "<h4>Authentication</h4>" @@ -1290,15 +1116,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.\n" +"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.\n" msgstr "" -"Especifique um DN e uma senha que deverão ser utilizados pelo servidor " -"escravo para autenticar-se no servidor mestre.\n" -"O DN especificado precisa ter permissão de leitura a todas as entradas no " -"banco de dados replicado no servidor mestre.\n" +"Especifique um DN e uma senha que deverão ser utilizados pelo servidor escravo para autenticar-se no servidor mestre.\n" +"O DN especificado precisa ter permissão de leitura a todas as entradas no banco de dados replicado no servidor mestre.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 msgid "<h4>Update Referral</h4>" @@ -1308,19 +1130,14 @@ msgid "" "As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. \n" msgstr "" -"Como o banco de dados do no servidor escravo permite somente leitura, o " -"servidor escravo responderá \n" +"Como o banco de dados do no servidor escravo permite somente leitura, o servidor escravo responderá \n" "às operações de escrita com uma referência LDAP.\n" -"Por padrão, esta referência encaminha o cliente ao servidor mestre. Você pode " -"configurar uma referência de atualização diferente aqui.\n" -"Isto é útil, por exemplo, numa configuração de replicação em cascata, na " -"qual\n" +"Por padrão, esta referência encaminha o cliente ao servidor mestre. Você pode configurar uma referência de atualização diferente aqui.\n" +"Isto é útil, por exemplo, numa configuração de replicação em cascata, na qual\n" "o provedor para o servidor escravo também é um servidor escravo.\n" #. Read dialog help @@ -1335,8 +1152,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now." msgstr "" "<big>Cancelando a inicialização:</big> \n" -"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar</" -"b> agora." +"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar agora." #. Write dialog help #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:271 @@ -1365,25 +1181,17 @@ "Server module.\n" msgstr "" "Este diálogo fornece um pequeno resumo sobre a configuração que você\n" -"acaba de criar. Clique em Concluir para escrever a configuração e sair " -"do módulo\n" +"acaba de criar. Clique em Concluir para escrever a configuração e sair do módulo\n" "do servidor LDAP.\n" #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server." -" " -msgstr "" -"Iniciar servidor LDAP sim ou não inicia ou para o servidor LDAP." +msgid "With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server. " +msgstr "Iniciar servidor LDAP sim ou não inicia ou para o servidor LDAP." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration " -"wizard." -msgstr "" -"Se você selecionou Sim, clique em Próximo para iniciar o " -"assistente de configuração." +msgid "If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration wizard." +msgstr "Se você selecionou Sim, clique em Próximo para iniciar o assistente de configuração." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 msgid "" @@ -1395,21 +1203,14 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:" -msgstr "" -"Selecione o tipo de servidor LDAP para configurar. Os seguintes cenários " -"estão disponíveis:" +msgid "Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:" +msgstr "Selecione o tipo de servidor LDAP para configurar. Os seguintes cenários estão disponíveis:" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.\n" -msgstr "" -"Servidor avulso: configure um servidor LDAP avulso sem preparação " -"para replicação\n" +msgstr "Servidor avulso: configure um servidor LDAP avulso sem preparação para replicação\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:305 msgid "" @@ -1417,17 +1218,14 @@ "prepared to act as a master server (provider) in a replication setup.\n" msgstr "" "Servidor mestre de replicação: crie uma configuração LDAP \n" -"preparada para atuar como um servidor mestre (provedor) numa configuração de " -"replicação.\n" +"preparada para atuar como um servidor mestre (provedor) numa configuração de replicação.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server." msgstr "" -"Servidor escravo de replicação: configura um servidor escravo " -"OpenLDAP que replica todos os seus dados,\n" +"Servidor escravo de replicação: configura um servidor escravo OpenLDAP que replica todos os seus dados,\n" "incluindo configuração, a partir de um servidor mestre." #. Configuration Wizard Step 3 @@ -1445,33 +1243,27 @@ "checkbox. Additionally you need to configure a certificate for the Server \n" "to use.\n" msgstr "" -"Para habilitar a criptografia via TLS/SSL, selecione Habilitar TLS. " -"Adicionalmente,\n" +"Para habilitar a criptografia via TLS/SSL, selecione Habilitar TLS. Adicionalmente,\n" "você precisa configurar um certificado para uso do servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" "Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation." -"\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" msgstr "" -"Selecione Habilitar interface LDAP sobre SSL (ldaps) para que o " -"servidor\n" -"aceite conexões LDAP na porta 636. Se a opção não estiver marcada, o OpenLDAP " -"suportará apenas \n" +"Selecione Habilitar interface LDAP sobre SSL (ldaps) para que o servidor\n" +"aceite conexões LDAP na porta 636. Se a opção não estiver marcada, o OpenLDAP suportará apenas \n" "conexões TLS criptografadas através da operação estendida StartTLS.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.\n" msgstr "" "Se você já tem um certificado de servidor comum instalado usando o \n" -"módulo correspondente do YaST selecione Usar certificado de servidor " -"comum \n" +"módulo correspondente do YaST selecione Usar certificado de servidor comum \n" "para que o OpenLDAP utilize esse certificado.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:331 @@ -1481,26 +1273,20 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File" -",\n" -"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File,\n" +"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the corresponding\n" "textfields.\n" msgstr "" -"Se você não possui um certificado de servidor comum ou deseja que o " -"OpenLDAP use\n" -"um certificado diferente, forneça os nomes de arquivos do Arquivo de " -"certificado CA, \n" -"Arquivo de certificado e Arquivo da chave do certificado nos " -"campos correspondentes.\n" +"Se você não possui um certificado de servidor comum ou deseja que o OpenLDAP use\n" +"um certificado diferente, forneça os nomes de arquivos do Arquivo de certificado CA, \n" +"Arquivo de certificado e Arquivo da chave do certificado nos campos correspondentes.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:338 msgid "" "To create a new CA or certificate, launch the CA management module by\n" "clicking Launch CA Management Module.\n" msgstr "" -"Para criar um novo CA ou certificado, inicie o módulo de gerenciamento de " -"CA\n" +"Para criar um novo CA ou certificado, inicie o módulo de gerenciamento de CA\n" "clicando em Iniciar módulo de gerenciamento de CA.\n" #. Tree Item Dialog "global" 1/1 @@ -1511,16 +1297,12 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in " -"which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data" msgstr "" -"Adicione ou remova arquivos de esquema neste diálogo. Clique em " -"Adicionar para abrir um diálogo de arquivo onde escolher\n" -"um novo esquema. Nota: o OpenLDAP (quando usado com back-config) não suporta " -"atualmente a remoção de\n" +"Adicione ou remova arquivos de esquema neste diálogo. Clique em Adicionar para abrir um diálogo de arquivo onde escolher\n" +"um novo esquema. Nota: o OpenLDAP (quando usado com back-config) não suporta atualmente a remoção de\n" "dados de esquema." #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" @@ -1529,18 +1311,13 @@ "Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog." msgstr "" -"Selecione os subsistemas que devem registrar comandos de depuração e " -"estatísticas\n" +"Selecione os subsistemas que devem registrar comandos de depuração e estatísticas\n" "que serão salvas no syslog." #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:" -msgstr "" -"Selecione quais opções especiais o servidor OpenLDAP deve permitir ou " -"proibir: " +msgid "Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:" +msgstr "Selecione quais opções especiais o servidor OpenLDAP deve permitir ou proibir: " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 msgid "<h3>Select Allow Flags</h3>" @@ -1548,46 +1325,36 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.\n" msgstr "" -"Requisições de acesso LDAPv2: para deixar o servidor aceitar as " -"requisições de acesso LDAPv2.\n" +"Requisições de acesso LDAPv2: para deixar o servidor aceitar as requisições de acesso LDAPv2.\n" "Note que o OpenLDAP não implementa completamente o LDAPv2.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) " +"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) " msgstr "" -"Associação anônima quando as credenciais não estão vazias.: Para " -"permitir associação anônima quando \n" -"as credenciais não estão vazias (por ex.: a senha está presente mas a " -"associação DN não está presente) " +"Associação anônima quando as credenciais não estão vazias.: Para permitir associação anônima quando \n" +"as credenciais não estão vazias (por ex.: a senha está presente mas a associação DN não está presente) " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 msgid "" "Unauthenticated Bind when DN not empty: To allow unauthenticated \n" "(anonymous) binds when DN is not empty" msgstr "" -"Sessão não autenticada quando DN não está vazio: Para permitir " -"sessões \n" +"Sessão não autenticada quando DN não está vazio: Para permitir sessões \n" "(anônimas) não autenticada quando DN não está vazio" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.\n" msgstr "" -"Opções de atualização não autenticadas a processar: para permitir " -"operações\n" -"de atualização não autenticadas (anônimas) a serem processadas. Elas ainda " -"estão sujeitas às\n" +"Opções de atualização não autenticadas a processar: para permitir operações\n" +"de atualização não autenticadas (anônimas) a serem processadas. Elas ainda estão sujeitas às\n" "regras de controle de acesso e outras limitações administrativas.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:374 @@ -1600,10 +1367,8 @@ "not accept anonymous bind requests. Note that this does not generally\n" "prohibit anonymous directory access.\n" msgstr "" -"Desabilitar aceitação de pedidos de associação anônimos: o " -"servidor\n" -"não aceitará pedidos de associação anônimos. Observe que isto não proíbe " -"acesso anônimo\n" +"Desabilitar aceitação de pedidos de associação anônimos: o servidor\n" +"não aceitará pedidos de associação anônimos. Observe que isto não proíbe acesso anônimo\n" "a diretórios.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 @@ -1611,19 +1376,16 @@ "Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication\n" msgstr "" -"Desabilitar a autenticação de acesso simples: desabilita " -"completamente a\n" +"Desabilitar a autenticação de acesso simples: desabilita completamente a\n" "autenticação de acesso simples\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.\n" msgstr "" -"Desabilitar a sessão de um usuário anônimo mediante a resposta de uma " -"operação StartTLS :\n" +"Desabilitar a sessão de um usuário anônimo mediante a resposta de uma operação StartTLS :\n" "o servidor não irá mais forçar uma conexão autenticada para o \n" "estado anônimo quando receber a operação StartTLS.\n" @@ -1641,140 +1403,90 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" "database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.\n" msgstr "" -"Esta exibe todos os bancos de dados configurados. Os bancos de dados com o " -"tipo \"frontend\" \n" -"e \"config\" representam bancos de dados internos especiais. O banco de dados " -"\"Frontend\" é usado para configurar\n" -"restrições globais de controle de acesso e overlays que se aplicam a todos os " -"bancos de dados.O \n" +"Esta exibe todos os bancos de dados configurados. Os bancos de dados com o tipo \"frontend\" \n" +"e \"config\" representam bancos de dados internos especiais. O banco de dados \"Frontend\" é usado para configurar\n" +"restrições globais de controle de acesso e overlays que se aplicam a todos os bancos de dados.O \n" "banco de dados \"Config\" contém a configuração do servidor LDAP.\n" #. Tree Item Dialog "databases" 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:402 msgid "To add a new database, press Add Database...." -msgstr "" -"Para adicionar um novo banco de dados, clique em Adicionar banco de " -"dados...." +msgstr "Para adicionar um novo banco de dados, clique em Adicionar banco de dados...." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete " -"Database....\n" +"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete Database....\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.\n" msgstr "" -"Para remover um banco de dados, selecione um banco de dados da lista e " -"pressione Remover banco de dados....\n" +"Para remover um banco de dados, selecione um banco de dados da lista e pressione Remover banco de dados....\n" "Você não pode remover os bancos de dados \"config\" e \"frontend\".\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely." msgstr "" -"Digite uma senha para o banco de dados de configuração (\"cn=config" -"\"). Isto é necessário para \n" +"Digite uma senha para o banco de dados de configuração (\"cn=config\"). Isto é necessário para \n" "tornar o banco de dados de configuração acessível remotamente." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the " -"\"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed " -"for MirrorMode replication.\n" +"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" msgstr "" -"Se o servidor deve participar de uma configuração MirrorMode, selecione " -"\"Prepara para replicação MirrorMode\".\n" -"Isso garantirá que o atributo serverId será gerado quadno necessário para a " -"replicação MirrorMode.\n" +"Se o servidor deve participar de uma configuração MirrorMode, selecione \"Prepara para replicação MirrorMode\".\n" +"Isso garantirá que o atributo serverId será gerado quadno necessário para a replicação MirrorMode.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps<" -"/i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"cn=config\")." msgstr "" -"Para configurar um servidor escravo, são necessários alguns detalhes do " -"servidor mestre. Por favor, digite o nome de máquina\n" -"do servidor mestre, ajuste o protocolo (\"ldap\" ou \"ldaps\") " -"e número de porta conforme a necessidade e digite a senha\n" -"para o banco de dados de configuração do servidor mestre(\"cn=config" -"\")." +"Para configurar um servidor escravo, são necessários alguns detalhes do servidor mestre. Por favor, digite o nome de máquina\n" +"do servidor mestre, ajuste o protocolo (\"ldap\" ou \"ldaps\") e número de porta conforme a necessidade e digite a senha\n" +"para o banco de dados de configuração do servidor mestre(\"cn=config\")." #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server." -msgstr "" -"Especifique o <big>Domínio</big> e a <big>Senha mestre</big> para seu " -"servidor Kerberos." +msgid "Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server." +msgstr "Especifique o <big>Domínio</big> e a <big>Senha mestre</big> para seu servidor Kerberos." #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to " -"use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" -msgstr "" -"Embora o seu domínio Kerberos possa ser qualquer string ASCII, " -"convenciona-se deixá-lo com o mesmo nome do seu nome de domínio, em letras " -"maiúsculas.\n" +msgid "Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" +msgstr "Embora o seu domínio Kerberos possa ser qualquer string ASCII, convenciona-se deixá-lo com o mesmo nome do seu nome de domínio, em letras maiúsculas.\n" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica a localização do banco de dados do Kerberos para " -"este domínio." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm." +msgstr "Esta string especifica a localização do banco de dados do Kerberos para este domínio." #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica a localização do arquivo da lista de controle de " -"acesso (ACL) que o kadmin utiliza para determinar as permissões dos " -"principais no banco de dados." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." +msgstr "Esta string especifica a localização do arquivo da lista de controle de acesso (ACL) que o kadmin utiliza para determinar as permissões dos principais no banco de dados." #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica a localização do arquivo de chaves usado pelo " -"kdamin para autenticar no banco de dados." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database." +msgstr "Esta string especifica a localização do arquivo de chaves usado pelo kdamin para autenticar no banco de dados." #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Este tempo absoluto especifica a data de expiração padrão dos principais " -"criados neste realm." +msgid "This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm." +msgstr "Este tempo absoluto especifica a data de expiração padrão dos principais criados neste realm." #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm." -msgstr "" -"Estes indicadores especificam os atributos padrões dos principais criados " -"neste realm." +msgid "These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm." +msgstr "Estes indicadores especificam os atributos padrões dos principais criados neste realm." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 msgid "Allow postdated" @@ -1783,8 +1495,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 2/13 :Allow postdated #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:448 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain postdateable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite ao principal a obtenção de tickets postdateable." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite ao principal a obtenção de tickets postdateable." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:451 msgid "Allow forwardable" @@ -1793,8 +1504,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 3/13 :Allow forwardable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:453 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain forwardable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite ao principal a obtenção de tickets transferíveis." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite ao principal a obtenção de tickets transferíveis." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:456 msgid "Allow renewable" @@ -1803,8 +1513,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 4/13 :Allow renewable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:458 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain renewable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha tickets renováveis." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha tickets renováveis." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:461 msgid "Allow proxiable" @@ -1821,12 +1530,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha uma chave de sessão para " -"outro usuário, permitindo autenticação usuário-usuário para este principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha uma chave de sessão para outro usuário, permitindo autenticação usuário-usuário para este principal." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 msgid "Requires preauth" @@ -1834,17 +1539,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only " -"be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." -msgstr "" -"Se este indicador estiver habilitado num principal cliente, então aquele " -"principal é requerido para pré-autenticar no KDC antes de receber quaisquer " -"tickets. Se você habilitar este indicador num principal como serviço, os " -"tickets de serviço para este principal somente serão emitidos para clientes " -"com um TGT que possui o conjunto de tickets de pré-autenticação." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." +msgstr "Se este indicador estiver habilitado num principal cliente, então aquele principal é requerido para pré-autenticar no KDC antes de receber quaisquer tickets. Se você habilitar este indicador num principal como serviço, os tickets de serviço para este principal somente serão emitidos para clientes com um TGT que possui o conjunto de tickets de pré-autenticação." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 msgid "Requires hwauth" @@ -1852,13 +1548,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a " -"hardware device before receiving any tickets." -msgstr "" -"Se este indicador for habilitado, então o principal é requerido para " -"pré-autenticar usando um dispositivo de hardware antes de receber quaisquer " -"tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgstr "Se este indicador for habilitado, então o principal é requerido para pré-autenticar usando um dispositivo de hardware antes de receber quaisquer tickets." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "Allow service" @@ -1866,11 +1557,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite que o KDC emita tickets de serviço para este " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite que o KDC emita tickets de serviço para este principal." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 msgid "Allow tgs request" @@ -1878,14 +1566,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a " -"ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that " -"was used to obtain the TGT." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha tickets baseados num " -"ticket-granting-ticket, ao invés de repetir o processo de autenticação que " -"era usado para obter o TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção permite que o principal obtenha tickets baseados num ticket-granting-ticket, ao invés de repetir o processo de autenticação que era usado para obter o TGT." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 msgid "Allow tickets" @@ -1893,13 +1575,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar esta opção fará com que o KDC emita tickets para este principal. " -"Desabilitar esta opção basicamente desativa o principal neste realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." +msgstr "Habilitar esta opção fará com que o KDC emita tickets para este principal. Desabilitar esta opção basicamente desativa o principal neste realm." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 msgid "Need change" @@ -1916,177 +1593,94 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." -msgstr "" -"Se esta opção estiver habilitar, este principal será marcado como um serviço " -"de alteração de senha. Isto deve ser usado somente em casos especiais, por " -"exemplo, se a senha de um usuário expirou, o usuário deve receber tickets " -"para aquele principal para que seja possível alterar a senha sem passar pelo " -"processo normal de autenticação de senha." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." +msgstr "Se esta opção estiver habilitar, este principal será marcado como um serviço de alteração de senha. Isto deve ser usado somente em casos especiais, por exemplo, se a senha de um usuário expirou, o usuário deve receber tickets para aquele principal para que seja possível alterar a senha sem passar pelo processo normal de autenticação de senha." #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not " -"allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done." -msgstr "" -"A localização do arquivo dicionário contendo strings que não são " -"permitidas como senhas. Se esta opção não estiver marcada ou não existir " -"política atribuída ao principal, então nenhuma verificação será feita." +msgid "The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done." +msgstr "A localização do arquivo dicionário contendo strings que não são permitidas como senhas. Se esta opção não estiver marcada ou não existir política atribuída ao principal, então nenhuma verificação será feita." #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm." -msgstr "" -"Este número de porta especifica a porta na qual o daemon do kadmind " -"escutará neste domínio." +msgid "This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm." +msgstr "Este número de porta especifica a porta na qual o daemon do kadmind escutará neste domínio." #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica a localização onde a chave mestra foi armazenada " -"com kdb5_stash." +msgid "This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash." +msgstr "Esta string especifica a localização onde a chave mestra foi armazenada com kdb5_stash." #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica a lista de portas que o KDC deve escutar para este " -"realm." +msgid "This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm." +msgstr "Esta string especifica a lista de portas que o KDC deve escutar para este realm." #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master " -"key. The default value is K/M." -msgstr "" -"Esta string especifica o nome do principal associado com a chave mestra. O " -"valor padrão é K/M." +msgid "This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M." +msgstr "Esta string especifica o nome do principal associado com a chave mestra. O valor padrão é K/M." #. advanced item help : master_key_type #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:527 msgid "This key type string represents the master keys key type." -msgstr "" -"Esta string de tipo de chave representa o tipo de chave da chave mestra.<" -"/p>" +msgstr "Esta string de tipo de chave representa o tipo de chave da chave mestra." #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Este tempo delta especifica o tempo máximo pelo qual um ticket pode ser " -"válido neste realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm." +msgstr "Este tempo delta especifica o tempo máximo pelo qual um ticket pode ser válido neste realm." #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Este tempo delta especifica o tempo máximo pelo qual um ticket pode ser " -"renovado neste realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm." +msgstr "Este tempo delta especifica o tempo máximo pelo qual um ticket pode ser renovado neste realm." #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm." -msgstr "" -"Uma lista de strings chaves/salt que especifica as combinações chaves/salt " -"padrões dos principais neste realm." +msgid "A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." +msgstr "Uma lista de strings chaves/salt que especifica as combinações chaves/salt padrões dos principais neste realm." #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Especifica as combinações chave-salt permitidas dos principais deste " -"realm." +msgid "Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." +msgstr "Especifica as combinações chave-salt permitidas dos principais deste realm." #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" -msgstr "" -"Especifica se a lista de realms transitados para tickets inter-realms deve " -"ser verificada usando o caminho de trânsito computado dos nomes de realm e a " -"seção [capaths] do arquivo krb5.conf" +msgid "Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" +msgstr "Especifica se a lista de realms transitados para tickets inter-realms deve ser verificada usando o caminho de trânsito computado dos nomes de realm e a seção [capaths] do arquivo krb5.conf" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server." -msgstr "" -"Esta opção específica do LDAP indica o número de conexões a serem mantidas " -"pelo servidor LDAP." +msgid "This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server." +msgstr "Esta opção específica do LDAP indica o número de conexões a serem mantidas pelo servidor LDAP." #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords " -"for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." -msgstr "" -"Esta opção específica do LDAP indica o arquivo contendo as senhas stashed " -"para os objetos utilizados para inicializar os servidores Kerberos." +msgid "This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." +msgstr "Esta opção específica do LDAP indica o arquivo contendo as senhas stashed para os objetos utilizados para inicializar os servidores Kerberos." #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).The " -"search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the " -"subtree." -msgstr "" -"Especifica a lista de subárvores contendo os principais de um realm. A " -"lista contém os DNs dos objetos da subárvore separados por dois-pontos (:). <" -"/p> O escopo da busca especifica o escopo para pesquisar os principais na " -"subárvore." +msgid "Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree." +msgstr "Especifica a lista de subárvores contendo os principais de um realm. A lista contém os DNs dos objetos da subárvore separados por dois-pontos (:). O escopo da busca especifica o escopo para pesquisar os principais na subárvore." #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." -msgstr "" -"Especifica o DN do conteiner do objeto no qual os principais de um realm " -"serão criados. Se a referência para o conteiner não estiver configurada para " -"um realm, os principais serão criados no conteiner do realm." +msgid "Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." +msgstr "Especifica o DN do conteiner do objeto no qual os principais de um realm serão criados. Se a referência para o conteiner não estiver configurada para um realm, os principais serão criados no conteiner do realm." #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:567 msgid "Specifies maximum ticket life for principals in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Especifica a vida máxima dos tickets para principais neste realm." +msgstr "Especifica a vida máxima dos tickets para principais neste realm." #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.<" -"/p>" -msgstr "" -"Especifica a vida máxima renovável dos tickets para principais neste " -"realm." +msgid "Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." +msgstr "Especifica a vida máxima renovável dos tickets para principais neste realm." #. ################################################################################# #. ################################################################################# @@ -2412,22 +2006,16 @@ msgstr "URI do servidor" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." -msgstr "" -"Este servidor não está configurado como um nó MirrorMode. Clique em " -"\"Próximo\" para iniciar o assistente de configuração OpenLDAP." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgstr "Este servidor não está configurado como um nó MirrorMode. Clique em \"Próximo\" para iniciar o assistente de configuração OpenLDAP." #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 msgid "OpenLDAP MirrorMode Overview" msgstr "Resumo de MirrorMode do OpenLDAP" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" -msgstr "" -"Não é possível remover a máquina na qual este módulo do YaST foi iniciado.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgstr "Não é possível remover a máquina na qual este módulo do YaST foi iniciado.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 msgid "Start yast2 openldap-mirrormode on a different MirrorMode server." @@ -2745,23 +2333,16 @@ msgstr "Selecionar indicadores de &permissão: " #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" -msgstr "" -"Desabilitar aceitação de pedidos de associação anônimos (não proíbe acesso " -"anônimo a diretórios) " +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" +msgstr "Desabilitar aceitação de pedidos de associação anônimos (não proíbe acesso anônimo a diretórios) " #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 msgid "Disable Simple Bind authentication" msgstr "Desabilitar autenticação por associação simples " #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" -msgstr "" -"Desabilitar a sessão de um usuário anônimo com status mediante a resposta de " -"uma operação StartTLS " +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgstr "Desabilitar a sessão de um usuário anônimo com status mediante a resposta de uma operação StartTLS " #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 msgid "Disallow the StartTLS operation if authenticated" @@ -2858,8 +2439,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:359 msgid "Allow Plaintext Authentication (Simple Bind) for this Database. " -msgstr "" -"Permitir autenticação em texto plano (bind simples) para este banco de dados." +msgstr "Permitir autenticação em texto plano (bind simples) para este banco de dados." #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:362 msgid "(Remote Connection needs to be encrypted)" @@ -3226,8 +2806,7 @@ "not supported by YaST. The Access Control Dialog will be disabled.\n" msgstr "" "O banco de dados selecionado contém regras de controle de acesso que não\n" -"são atualmente suportadas pelo YaST. O diálogo de controle de acesso será " -"desabilitado.\n" +"são atualmente suportadas pelo YaST. O diálogo de controle de acesso será desabilitado.\n" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1594 msgid "This database is a Replication Consumer." @@ -3297,11 +2876,8 @@ msgstr "Falha na verificação dos recursos LDAPsync do provedor." #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" -msgstr "" -"Por favor, verifique se o servidor destino está configurado para ser um " -"provedor LDAPsync" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgstr "Por favor, verifique se o servidor destino está configurado para ser um provedor LDAPsync" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 msgid "Enable ldapsync provider for this database" @@ -3527,12 +3103,8 @@ msgstr "Atualizando objetos da política de senha padrão" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" -msgstr "" -"Esperando pelas tarefas de fundo de indexação do OpenLDAP serem completadas " -"(isto pode levar alguns minutos)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" +msgstr "Esperando pelas tarefas de fundo de indexação do OpenLDAP serem completadas (isto pode levar alguns minutos)" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 msgid "Restarting OpenLDAP Server if required" @@ -3551,11 +3123,8 @@ msgstr "A criação da política de senha falhou." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ocorreu erro ao esperar a finalização do indexador do banco de dados " -"OpenLDAP.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" +msgstr "Ocorreu erro ao esperar a finalização do indexador do banco de dados OpenLDAP.\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 msgid "Restart OpenLDAP manually." @@ -3600,8 +3169,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2489 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2523 msgid "Can not set a filesystem ACL on the private key." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível definir uma ACL do sistema de arquivos na chave privada." +msgstr "Não foi possível definir uma ACL do sistema de arquivos na chave privada." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2491 msgid "Do you have filesystem acl support disabled?" @@ -3617,8 +3185,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2547 msgid "Switching startup configuration to use config database" -msgstr "" -"Alterando a configuração inicial para usar o banco de dados de configuração. " +msgstr "Alterando a configuração inicial para usar o banco de dados de configuração. " #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2548 msgid "Restarting LDAP Server" @@ -3642,8 +3209,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2709 msgid "Common server certificate not available. StartTLS is disabled." -msgstr "" -"Certificado de servidor comum não disponível. O startTLS está desabilitado." +msgstr "Certificado de servidor comum não disponível. O startTLS está desabilitado." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2803 msgid "Could not create database directory." @@ -3652,22 +3218,15 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2810 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4107 #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:498 msgid "Could not adjust ownership of database directory." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível ajustar as propriedades do diretório do banco de dados." +msgstr "Não foi possível ajustar as propriedades do diretório do banco de dados." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2859 msgid "Could not determine own fully qualified hostname." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível determinar o próprio nome de máquina completamente " -"qualificado." +msgstr "Não foi possível determinar o próprio nome de máquina completamente qualificado." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own " -"fully qualified hostname." -msgstr "" -"Um servidor mestre para replicação não pode funcionar corretamente sem " -"conhecer seu próprio nome de máquina completamente qualificado." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." +msgstr "Um servidor mestre para replicação não pode funcionar corretamente sem conhecer seu próprio nome de máquina completamente qualificado." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3402 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3415 @@ -3697,12 +3256,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country " -"2-letter code." -msgstr "" -"O valor do atributo \"c\" deve conter um código de país de 2 letras no " -"ISO-3166." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgstr "O valor do atributo \"c\" deve conter um código de país de 2 letras no ISO-3166." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4040 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:373 @@ -3743,10 +3298,8 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Erro ao tentar verificar o certificado de servidor do servidor provedor.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Erro ao tentar verificar o certificado de servidor do servidor provedor.\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 #, perl-format @@ -3777,9 +3330,7 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:301 #, perl-format msgid "Database type '%s' is not supported. Allowed are 'bdb' and 'hdb'." -msgstr "" -"O tipo de banco de dados '%s' não é suportado. Os tipos permitidos são 'bdb' " -"e 'hdb'." +msgstr "O tipo de banco de dados '%s' não é suportado. Os tipos permitidos são 'bdb' e 'hdb'." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:347 @@ -3920,4 +3471,3 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2046 msgid "Cannot write CA certificate file." msgstr "Não foi possível salvar o arquivo de certificado CA." - Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/autoinst.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/autoinst.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/autoinst.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -33,8 +33,7 @@ #: src/clients/autoinst_scripts1_finish.rb:47 #: src/clients/autoinst_scripts2_finish.rb:45 msgid "Executing autoinstall scripts in the installation environment..." -msgstr "" -"Executando scripts de instalação automática no ambiente de instalação..." +msgstr "Executando scripts de instalação automática no ambiente de instalação..." #. encoding: utf-8 #: src/clients/autoinst_test_clone.rb:15 @@ -133,10 +132,8 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:46 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" -msgstr "" -"Cliente para a criação de perfil do AutoYaST baseado no sistema em execução" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgstr "Cliente para a criação de perfil do AutoYaST baseado no sistema em execução" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:56 msgid "known modules: %1" @@ -148,7 +145,6 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Warning that an already existing autoyast configuration file will be overwritten. #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:94 -#| msgid "%1 exists! Really overwrite?" msgid "File %s exists! Really overwrite?" msgstr "O arquivo %1 já existe! Realmente sobrescrever?" @@ -165,30 +161,22 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location." +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location." msgstr "" -"Usando este diálogo, copie os conteúdos do arquivo e especifique o " -"caminho\n" -"final no sistema instalado. O YaST irá copiar este arquivo para o local " -"especificado." +"Usando este diálogo, copie os conteúdos do arquivo e especifique o caminho\n" +"final no sistema instalado. O YaST irá copiar este arquivo para o local especificado." #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions." msgstr "" -"Para proteger arquivos copiados, defina o proprietário e as permissões dos " -"arquivos.\n" -"Defina o proprietário usando a sintaxe userid.groupid. Permissões " -"podem ser uma representação simbólica \n" -"de alterações a realizar ou um número octal representando o padrão de bits " -"para as novas \n" +"Para proteger arquivos copiados, defina o proprietário e as permissões dos arquivos.\n" +"Defina o proprietário usando a sintaxe userid.groupid. Permissões podem ser uma representação simbólica \n" +"de alterações a realizar ou um número octal representando o padrão de bits para as novas \n" "permissões." #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:185 @@ -262,16 +250,13 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared." msgstr "" "Para muitos aplicativos e serviços, você pode ter preparado um \n" "arquivo de configuração que poderia ser copiado de uma forma completa para \n" -"um local no sistema instalado. Por exemplo, este é o caso se você está " -"instalando um \n" +"um local no sistema instalado. Por exemplo, este é o caso se você está instalando um \n" "servidor web e possui um arquivo de configuração httpd.conf preparado." #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:332 @@ -405,8 +390,7 @@ "Please wait while the system is prepared for autoinstallation.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Por favor, aguarde enquanto o sistema é preparado para a instalação " -"automática.\n" +"Por favor, aguarde enquanto o sistema é preparado para a instalação automática.\n" #: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:41 msgid "Probe hardware" @@ -506,9 +490,7 @@ #. $Id: inst_autosetup.ycp 61521 2010-03-29 09:10:07Z ug $ #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:49 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:47 msgid "Please wait while the system is prepared for autoinstallation." -msgstr "" -"Por favor, aguarde enquanto o sistema é preparado para a instalação " -"automática." +msgstr "Por favor, aguarde enquanto o sistema é preparado para a instalação automática." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:53 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:52 msgid "Execute pre-install user scripts" @@ -563,7 +545,6 @@ msgstr "Configurando o carregador de inicialização..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:69 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:63 -#| msgid "Repairing file system..." msgid "Registering the system..." msgstr "Registrando o sistema..." @@ -673,8 +654,7 @@ "Warnings can be skipped in some places, but should not be ignored.\n" msgstr "" "É recomendado exibir todas as mensagens com tempo de espera.\n" -"Os avisos podem ser pulados em alguns lugares, mas não devem ser ignorados.<" -"/p>\n" +"Os avisos podem ser pulados em alguns lugares, mas não devem ser ignorados.\n" #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:230 msgid "Messages and Logging" @@ -689,14 +669,12 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "\n" -"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed to add\n" "more add-on selections and packages.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Selecione uma das seguintes seleções base e clique em Detalhado " -"para\n" +"Selecione uma das seguintes seleções base e clique em Detalhado para\n" "adicionar mais seleções e pacotes complementares.\n" "\n" @@ -708,11 +686,8 @@ msgstr "Localização da fonte de instalação (como http://meuhost/11.3/DVD1/)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" -msgstr "" -"A fonte de instalação deste sistema (você não pode criar imagens se escolher " -"esta opção)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgstr "A fonte de instalação deste sistema (você não pode criar imagens se escolher esta opção)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 msgid "using that installation source failed" @@ -727,38 +702,29 @@ msgid "" "Mount in /etc/fstab By:\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "Montar em /etc/fstab pelo:\n" -"Normalmente, um sistema de arquivos a ser montado é identificado em " -"/etc/fstab\n" -"\tpelo nome do dispositivo. Essa identificação pode ser alterada para que o " -"sistema de arquivos a ser montado\n" -"\tseja encontrado quando você procurar por UUID ou um rótulo de volume. Nem " -"todos os sistemas de arquivos podem ser\n" -"\tmontados por UUID ou um rótulo de volume. Se uma opção estiver " -"desabilitada, isso não será possível.\n" +"Normalmente, um sistema de arquivos a ser montado é identificado em /etc/fstab\n" +"\tpelo nome do dispositivo. Essa identificação pode ser alterada para que o sistema de arquivos a ser montado\n" +"\tseja encontrado quando você procurar por UUID ou um rótulo de volume. Nem todos os sistemas de arquivos podem ser\n" +"\tmontados por UUID ou um rótulo de volume. Se uma opção estiver desabilitada, isso não será possível.\n" "\t" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " msgstr "" "Rótulo de volume:\n" -"\t O nome digitado neste campo é usado como rótulo de volume. Isso " -"normalmente faz sentido\n" +"\t O nome digitado neste campo é usado como rótulo de volume. Isso normalmente faz sentido\n" "\t apenas quando você ativa a opção de montagem pelo rótulo de volume.\n" "\t Um rótulo de volume não pode conter o caractere / ou espaços.\n" "\t" @@ -859,8 +825,7 @@ "You selected to create the partition, but you did not select a valid file\n" "system. Select a valid filesystem to continue.\n" msgstr "" -"Você escolheu criar a partição, mas você não selecionou um sistema de " -"arquivos válido.\n" +"Você escolheu criar a partição, mas você não selecionou um sistema de arquivos válido.\n" "Selecione um sistema de arquivos válido para continuar.\n" #. We don't use the return value of the check, because we @@ -929,11 +894,8 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." -msgstr "" -"O tamanho \"auto\" é válido somente se o ponto de montagem \"/boot\" ou " -"\"swap\" estiver selecionado." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgstr "O tamanho \"auto\" é válido somente se o ponto de montagem \"/boot\" ou \"swap\" estiver selecionado." #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 msgid "Size \"auto\" is invalid for physical volumes." @@ -1001,10 +963,8 @@ "Verifique se informou o local correto\n" "na linha de comando e tente novamente. Devido a este erro, você\n" "pode informar um URL somente em um perfil, e não em um diretório. Se você\n" -"está usando arquivos de controle baseados em regras ou nomes de máquinas, " -"reinicie\n" -"o processo de instalação e certifique-se de que os arquivos de controle estão " -"acessíveis.\n" +"está usando arquivos de controle baseados em regras ou nomes de máquinas, reinicie\n" +"o processo de instalação e certifique-se de que os arquivos de controle estão acessíveis.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:30 msgid "System Profile Location" @@ -1113,8 +1073,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:200 msgid "Use this interface to define classes of control files. \n" -msgstr "" -"Use esta interface para definir classes de arquivos de controle. \n" +msgstr "Use esta interface para definir classes de arquivos de controle. \n" #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:206 msgid "" @@ -1407,12 +1366,8 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" -msgstr "" -"Você realmente deseja aplicar as configurações do módulo '%1' ao seu sistema " -"atual?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" +msgstr "Você realmente deseja aplicar as configurações do módulo '%1' ao seu sistema atual?" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:635 @@ -1426,11 +1381,8 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" -msgstr "" -"Você realmente deseja aplicar as configurações do perfil ao seu sistema atual?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" +msgstr "Você realmente deseja aplicar as configurações do perfil ao seu sistema atual?" #. EXIT #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:781 @@ -1569,13 +1521,11 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" "O arquivo Kickstart foi importado.\n" -"Verifique a sintaxe importada e certifique-se de que a seleção de pacotes e " -"o\n" +"Verifique a sintaxe importada e certifique-se de que a seleção de pacotes e o\n" "particionamento foram importados corretamente." #. Validate Dialog @@ -1705,14 +1655,12 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "A opção de confirmação da instalação é selecionada por padrão para\n" -"evitar uma instalação indesejada. O sistema é parado durante a instalação e " -"é\n" +"evitar uma instalação indesejada. O sistema é parado durante a instalação e é\n" "exibido um resumo das operações requeridas na tela usual de propostas.\n" "Desmarque a opção para instalar automaticamente sem interrupção.\n" "\n" @@ -1720,14 +1668,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Se você desativar a segunda etapa do AutoYaST, a instalação prosseguirá em " -"modo manual\n" +"Se você desativar a segunda etapa do AutoYaST, a instalação prosseguirá em modo manual\n" "após a primeira reinicialização (após a instalação de pacotes).\n" "\n" @@ -1764,8 +1710,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:333 msgid "Pathlist for answers (multiple paths are separated by space)" -msgstr "" -"Lista de caminhos para respostas (múltiplos caminhos são separados por espaço)" +msgstr "Lista de caminhos para respostas (múltiplos caminhos são separados por espaço)" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:341 msgid "Store answer in this file" @@ -1872,15 +1817,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.\n" msgstr "" -"Esta ferramenta usa o xmllint para validar o perfil de acordo com " -"o DTD e\n" -"verifica dados omitidos. Algumas omissões de dados podem ser intencionais e " -"qualquer\n" +"Esta ferramenta usa o xmllint para validar o perfil de acordo com o DTD e\n" +"verifica dados omitidos. Algumas omissões de dados podem ser intencionais e qualquer\n" "erro reportado pode ser ignorado, por exemplo, na criação de classes.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:22 @@ -1903,15 +1845,13 @@ msgstr "" "Para importar um arquivo Kickstart, informe o caminho do arquivo\n" "de configuração. Os dados serão carregados no sistema de gerência de \n" -"configuração para adicionar mais opções de configuração disponíveis com o " -"openSUSE.\n" +"configuração para adicionar mais opções de configuração disponíveis com o openSUSE.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:31 msgid "" "This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.\n" msgstr "" "Esta ferramenta cria um perfil de referência através da leitura\n" "da informação do sistema. Selecione os recursos para ler deste sistema,\n" @@ -1923,12 +1863,10 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "\n" msgstr "" -"A tabela à direita exibe as partições atuais a serem criadas no sistema " -"destino.\n" +"A tabela à direita exibe as partições atuais a serem criadas no sistema destino.\n" "\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:40 @@ -1966,8 +1904,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" "Se nenhuma partição for definida e a unidade especificada for\n" @@ -1987,18 +1924,8 @@ msgstr "Opções avançadas" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." -msgstr "" -"Por padrão, o AutoYaST2 criará uma partição estendida e adicionará todas as " -"partições novas como dispositivos lógicos. É possível, no entanto, instruir o " -"AutoYaST2 a criar uma certa partição como primária ou como estendida. " -"Adicionalmente, é possível especificar o tamanho da partição usando setores " -"ao invés de tamanho em MBytes." +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "Por padrão, o AutoYaST2 criará uma partição estendida e adicionará todas as partições novas como dispositivos lógicos. É possível, no entanto, instruir o AutoYaST2 a criar uma certa partição como primária ou como estendida. Adicionalmente, é possível especificar o tamanho da partição usando setores ao invés de tamanho em MBytes." #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 msgid "" @@ -2012,8 +1939,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -2026,16 +1952,12 @@ #. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:122 msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol HTTP(S). Server returned code %2." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível localizar o URL '%1' pelo protocolo HTTP(S). O servidor " -"retornou o código %2." +msgstr "Não foi possível localizar o URL '%1' pelo protocolo HTTP(S). O servidor retornou o código %2." #. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:142 msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol FTP. Server returned code %2." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível localizar o URL '%1' pelo protocolo FTP. O servidor retornou " -"o código %2." +msgstr "Não foi possível localizar o URL '%1' pelo protocolo FTP. O servidor retornou o código %2." #. FIXME: I have doubts this will ever work. Too early. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:158 @@ -2115,8 +2037,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "<h3>Scripts de pré-instalação</h3>\n" -"Adicione comandos para executar no sistema antes do início da instalação. " -"\n" +"Adicione comandos para executar no sistema antes do início da instalação. \n" #. help 2/6 #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:72 @@ -2141,8 +2062,7 @@ "For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the chroot scripts options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed " -"\n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -2150,11 +2070,9 @@ "<H3>Scripts chroot</H3>\n" "Para que seu script de pós-instalação seja executado em ambiente chroot\n" "escolha as opções scripts chroot. Estes scripts são executados\n" -"antes do sistema inicializar pela primeira vez. Por padrão, os scripts " -"chroot\n" +"antes do sistema inicializar pela primeira vez. Por padrão, os scripts chroot\n" "são executados no sistema de instalação. Para acessar arquivos no sistema\n" -"de instalação você sempre deve usar o ponto de montagem \"/mnt\" nos " -"scripts.\n" +"de instalação você sempre deve usar o ponto de montagem \"/mnt\" nos scripts.\n" "\n" #. help 4/6 @@ -2162,15 +2080,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" "It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag " -"\"chrooted\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "É possível executar scripts chroot em uma etapa posterior depois de\n" -"configurar o carregador de inicialização usando a marcação booleana " -"\"chrooted\"\n" +"configurar o carregador de inicialização usando a marcação booleana \"chrooted\"\n" "que fará os scripts serem executados no sistema instalado.\n" "\n" @@ -2188,8 +2104,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Scripts init</H3>\n" -"Estes scripts são executados durante o processo de inicialização inicial e " -"após\n" +"Estes scripts são executados durante o processo de inicialização inicial e após\n" "o YaST ter concluído a configuração do sistema. Os scripts finais são \n" "executados com um script rc especial, que é executado apenas uma vez.\n" "Os scripts finais são executados até o final do processo de inicialização e\n" @@ -2201,15 +2116,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl " -"or \n" +"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl or \n" "Python for preinstallation scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Interpretador:</H3>\n" -"Scripts de pré-instalação podem ser somente scripts shell. Não use " -"Perl ou \n" +"Scripts de pré-instalação podem ser somente scripts shell. Não use Perl ou \n" "Python para scripts de pré-instalação.\n" "\n" @@ -2219,42 +2132,32 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, too.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Acesso à rede:</H3>\n" "Durante a execução dos scripts de pós-instalação, a rede é desabilitada e\n" "necessita da inicialização nos scripts para voltar a ser acessível. Uma\n" -"alternativa aos scripts de pós-instalação com rede é o uso de scripts de " -"inicialização, o que\n" -"garante um sistema totalmente configurado durante a execução dos scripts. " -"Caso tenha feito uma instalação\n" -"através da rede, você pode usar a opção Rede também para o script de " -"pós-instalação.\n" +"alternativa aos scripts de pós-instalação com rede é o uso de scripts de inicialização, o que\n" +"garante um sistema totalmente configurado durante a execução dos scripts. Caso tenha feito uma instalação\n" +"através da rede, você pode usar a opção Rede também para o script de pós-instalação.\n" "\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:146 msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box " -"as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Retorno e depuração:</H3>\n" -" Todos os scripts, exceto os scripts de inicialização, podem exibir " -"STDOUT+STDERR em uma caixa de alerta como retorno.\n" -"Ao ativar a depuração, você obtém maior saída na caixa de diálogo de " -"retorno,\n" +" Todos os scripts, exceto os scripts de inicialização, podem exibir STDOUT+STDERR em uma caixa de alerta como retorno.\n" +"Ao ativar a depuração, você obtém maior saída na caixa de diálogo de retorno,\n" "o que pode ajudá-lo a depurar o script.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:155 @@ -2342,15 +2245,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation " -"for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Ao adicionar scripts ao processo de instalação automática, personalize a " -"instalação\n" -"de acordo com suas necessidades e controle as diferentes etapas da " -"instalação.\n" +"Ao adicionar scripts ao processo de instalação automática, personalize a instalação\n" +"de acordo com suas necessidades e controle as diferentes etapas da instalação.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "User Script Management" @@ -2377,12 +2277,8 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:914 src/modules/Profile.rb:725 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" -msgstr "" -"O analisador de XML informou um erro durante a análise do perfil do AutoYaST. " -"Mensagem de erro:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" +msgstr "O analisador de XML informou um erro durante a análise do perfil do AutoYaST. Mensagem de erro:\n" #. backdoor for merging problems. #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:1059 @@ -2396,8 +2292,7 @@ "\n" "As classes definidas pelo usuário não foram recuperadas. Certifique-se\n" "de que todas as classes estão definidas corretamente e disponíveis para este\n" -"sistema na rede ou localmente. O sistema não pode ser instalado com o " -"arquivo\n" +"sistema na rede ou localmente. O sistema não pode ser instalado com o arquivo\n" "de controle original sem usar classes.\n" #. The line above needs to be fixed when we have more attributes @@ -2458,21 +2353,17 @@ msgstr "" "<h3>Sistema de gerenciamento de configuração AutoYaST</h3>\n" "Com algumas exceções, quase todos recursos do arquivo de controle\n" -"podem ser configurados usando o sistema de gerenciamento de configuração." -"\n" +"podem ser configurados usando o sistema de gerenciamento de configuração.\n" #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 msgid "" -"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "\n" msgstr "" -"A maioria dos módulos usados para criar a configuração são idênticos " -"àqueles\n" +"A maioria dos módulos usados para criar a configuração são idênticos àqueles\n" "disponíveis no centro de controle YaST. Ao invés de configurar o sistema,\n" "os dados informados serão exportados para o arquivo de controle que pode \n" "ser usado para instalar outro sistema usando o AutoYaST.\n" @@ -2481,8 +2372,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:459 msgid "" "In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.\n" msgstr "" "Além dos módulos familiares existentes,\n" @@ -2587,16 +2477,13 @@ #. look for VGs to reuse #: src/modules/AutoinstLVM.rb:111 msgid "Cannot reuse volume group %1. The volume group does not exist." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível reutilizar o grupo do volume %1. O grupo de volume não " -"existe." +msgstr "Não foi possível reutilizar o grupo do volume %1. O grupo de volume não existe." #. if no feeder (PV) was found for current volume group #. the next instructions taints result #: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:282 msgid "Volume group '%1' must have at least one physical volume. Provide one." -msgstr "" -"O grupo de volume '%1' deve ter pelo menos um volume físico. Forneça um." +msgstr "O grupo de volume '%1' deve ter pelo menos um volume físico. Forneça um." #. PUBLIC INTERFACE #. INTER FACE TO CONF TREE @@ -2678,24 +2565,16 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:363 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check " -"/tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "" -"Falha na criação da imagem durante a instalação de padrões. Por favor, " -"verifique o arquivo /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "Falha na criação da imagem durante a instalação de padrões. Por favor, verifique o arquivo /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:371 msgid "Creating Image - installing packages" msgstr "Criando imagem - instalando pacotes" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check " -"/tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "" -"Falha na criação da imagem durante a instalação de pacotes. Por favor, " -"verifique o arquivo /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "Falha na criação da imagem durante a instalação de pacotes. Por favor, verifique o arquivo /tmp/ay_image.log" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:392 @@ -2707,18 +2586,14 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:421 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed " -"anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" "Agora você pode alterar a imagem em %1/\n" -"Se você pressionar o botão Ok, a imagem será comprimida e não poderá mais ser " -"alterada." +"Se você pressionar o botão Ok, a imagem será comprimida e não poderá mais ser alterada." #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:435 msgid "Image compressing failed in '%1'. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "" -"Falha na compressão da imagem em '%1'. Por favor, verifique o arquivo " -"/tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "Falha na compressão da imagem em '%1'. Por favor, verifique o arquivo /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:442 msgid "Image created successfully" @@ -2759,12 +2634,10 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:616 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" -"Agora você pode alterar a imagem ISO em %1, adicionando um arquivo XML do " -"AutoYaST completamente diferente.\n" +"Agora você pode alterar a imagem ISO em %1, adicionando um arquivo XML do AutoYaST completamente diferente.\n" "Se você pressionar o botão OK, a imagem ISO será criada." #. create the actual ISO file @@ -2806,21 +2679,13 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:907 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." -msgstr "" -"Falha na execução do resolvedor de pacotes. Verifique sua seção de software " -"no perfil do AutoYaST." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." +msgstr "Falha na execução do resolvedor de pacotes. Verifique sua seção de software no perfil do AutoYaST." #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" -msgstr "" -"O plano de particionamento configurado em seu perfil XML não cabe no disco " -"rígido. %1MB faltando" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" +msgstr "O plano de particionamento configurado em seu perfil XML não cabe no disco rígido. %1MB faltando" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 msgid "No specific device configured" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/bootloader.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/bootloader.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/bootloader.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -39,7 +39,6 @@ #. command line help text for delete action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:58 -#| msgid "Set a global option" msgid "Delete a global option" msgstr "Remover a opção global" @@ -75,7 +74,6 @@ #. command line, %1 is the value of bootloader option #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:182 -#| msgid "Value: %1" msgid "Value: %s" msgstr "Valor: %s" @@ -113,20 +111,13 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:115 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." -msgstr "" -"Nenhum carregador de inicialização selecionado para instalação. Seu sistema " -"pode não inicializar." +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." +msgstr "Nenhum carregador de inicialização selecionado para instalação. Seu sistema pode não inicializar." #. error in the proposal #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:125 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" -msgstr "" -"Devido ao particionamento, o carregador de inicialização não pode ser " -"instalado corretamente" +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgstr "Devido ao particionamento, o carregador de inicialização não pode ser instalado corretamente" #. proposal part - bootloader label #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:224 @@ -159,16 +150,12 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition \n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR." msgstr "" -"Definir indicador ativo na tabela de partição para a partição de " -"inicialização \n" -"Para ativar a partição que contém o carregador de inicialização. Em seguida, " -"o código genérico da MBR inicializará\n" +"Definir indicador ativo na tabela de partição para a partição de inicialização \n" +"Para ativar a partição que contém o carregador de inicialização. Em seguida, o código genérico da MBR inicializará\n" "a partição ativa. As BIOS mais antigas requerem uma partição ativa, mesmo\n" "que o carregador de inicialização esteja instalado na MBR." @@ -190,12 +177,10 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "Timeout in Seconds \n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.\n" msgstr "" "Tempo de espera em segundos \n" -"Especifica quanto tempo o carregador de inicialização deverá aguardar até que " -"o kernel padrão seja carregado.\n" +"Especifica quanto tempo o carregador de inicialização deverá aguardar até que o kernel padrão seja carregado.\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 msgid "" @@ -207,152 +192,109 @@ "using the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" " Ao pressionar Definir como padrão, você marca a seção \n" -"selecionada como padrão. Durante a inicialização, o carregador de " -"inicialização fornecerá \n" -"um menu de inicialização e aguardará até que o usuário selecione o kernel ou " -"um outro \n" -"SO para inicialização. Se nenhuma tecla for pressionada antes do fim do tempo " -"de espera, o \n" -"kernel ou o SO padrão será inicializado. A ordem das seções no menu do " -"carregador de inicialização\n" -"pode ser alterada com o uso dos botões Para cima e Para baixo.<" -"/p>\n" +"selecionada como padrão. Durante a inicialização, o carregador de inicialização fornecerá \n" +"um menu de inicialização e aguardará até que o usuário selecione o kernel ou um outro \n" +"SO para inicialização. Se nenhuma tecla for pressionada antes do fim do tempo de espera, o \n" +"kernel ou o SO padrão será inicializado. A ordem das seções no menu do carregador de inicialização\n" +"pode ser alterada com o uso dos botões Para cima e Para baixo.\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition)." msgstr "" -"Gravar código de inicialização genérico na MBR substitui a MBR " -"(Master Boot Record) do seu disco por um código genérico\n" +"Gravar código de inicialização genérico na MBR substitui a MBR (Master Boot Record) do seu disco por um código genérico\n" "(código independente do SO que inicializa a partição ativa)." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "Boot from Root Partition." msgstr "" -"Inicializar da partição de inicialização é uma das opções " -"recomendadas, a outra é\n" +"Inicializar da partição de inicialização é uma das opções recomendadas, a outra é\n" "Inicializar da partição raiz." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have another " -"operating system\n" +"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer" msgstr "" -"Inicializar da MBR (Master Boot Record) não é recomendado se você " -"possui outro sistema operacional\n" +"Inicializar da MBR (Master Boot Record) não é recomendado se você possui outro sistema operacional\n" "instalado no computador" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" -"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" +"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section." msgstr "" -"Inicializar da partição de inicialização é a opção recomendada " -"sempre que houver uma partição\n" -"adequada. Selecione Definir indicador ativo na tabela de partição para a " -"partição de inicialização e Gravar código de inicialização genérico na " -"MBR\n" -"nas Opções do carregador de inicialização para atualizar a MBR, caso " -"seja necessário ou configurar o outro\n" +"Inicializar da partição de inicialização é a opção recomendada sempre que houver uma partição\n" +"adequada. Selecione Definir indicador ativo na tabela de partição para a partição de inicialização e Gravar código de inicialização genérico na MBR\n" +"nas Opções do carregador de inicialização para atualizar a MBR, caso seja necessário ou configurar o outro\n" "carregador de inicialização para iniciar esta seção." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root " -"partition is on \n" +"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing" msgstr "" -"Inicializar da partição estendida deve ser selecionado se sua " -"partição raiz está\n" +"Inicializar da partição estendida deve ser selecionado se sua partição raiz está\n" "em uma partição lógica e a partição /boot está faltando" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." -msgstr "" -"Partição de inicialização personalizada permite que você escolha " -"uma partição da qual será feita a inicialização" +msgid "Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." +msgstr "Partição de inicialização personalizada permite que você escolha uma partição da qual será feita a inicialização" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "MD array is build from 2 disks. Enable Redundancy for MD Array\n" "enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks." msgstr "" -"A lista MD é construída a partir de 2 discos. Habilitar redundância " -"para\n" +"A lista MD é construída a partir de 2 discos. Habilitar redundância para\n" "lista de MD habilita a escrita do GRUB para a MBR em ambos os discos." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 -#| msgid "" -#| "Use Serial Console lets you define the parameters to use\n" -#| "for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</code>) for details." msgid "" "Use Serial Console lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2<" -"/code>) for details." +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details." msgstr "" -"Usar console serial permite que você defina os parâmetros a serem " -"usados\n" -"para um console serial. Consulte a documentação do grub (<code>info grub2<" -"/code>) para detalhes." +"Usar console serial permite que você defina os parâmetros a serem usados\n" +"para um console serial. Consulte a documentação do grub (<code>info grub2</code>) para detalhes." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "Terminal Definition \n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console<" -"/code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal." msgstr "" -"Definição de terminal Define o tipo de terminal a ser " -"usado. Para um terminal serial (por exemplo, um console serial),\n" -"especifique <code>serial</code>. Você também pode passar <code>console</code> " -"para o\n" +"Definição de terminal Define o tipo de terminal a ser usado. Para um terminal serial (por exemplo, um console serial),\n" +"especifique <code>serial</code>. Você também pode passar <code>console</code> para o\n" "comando, como <code>serial console</code>. Nesse caso, um terminal \n" -"no qual você pressionar qualquer tecla será selecionado como um terminal " -"GRUB." +"no qual você pressionar qualquer tecla será selecionado como um terminal GRUB." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable." msgstr "" -"Seções alternativas se o padrão falhar contém uma lista de números " -"de\n" -"seção que serão usados para a inicialização se não for possível inicializar a " -"seção padrão." +"Seções alternativas se o padrão falhar contém uma lista de números de\n" +"seção que serão usados para a inicialização se não for possível inicializar a seção padrão." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 msgid "Selecting Hide Menu on Boot will hide the boot menu." -msgstr "" -"A seleção de Ocultar menu durante inicialização ocultará o menu de " -"inicialização." +msgstr "A seleção de Ocultar menu durante inicialização ocultará o menu de inicialização." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "Protect Boot Loader with Password \n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in Retype Password." msgstr "" "Proteger o carregador de inicialização com senha \n" -"Defina a senha que será obrigatória para acessar o menu de inicialização. O " -"YaST somente aceitará a senha se você a repetir\n" +"Defina a senha que será obrigatória para acessar o menu de inicialização. O YaST somente aceitará a senha se você a repetir\n" "em Redigitar senha." #. help text 1/5 @@ -376,9 +318,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:100 msgid "Set &active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition" -msgstr "" -"Definir indicador &ativo na tabela de partição para a partição de " -"inicialização" +msgstr "Definir indicador &ativo na tabela de partição para a partição de inicialização" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:103 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:29 @@ -539,55 +479,28 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "" -"Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." -msgstr "" -"Parâmetro opcional de linha de comando do kernel permite definir " -"parâmetros globais adicionais a serem passados para o kernel." +msgid "Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgstr "Parâmetro opcional de linha de comando do kernel permite definir parâmetros globais adicionais a serem passados para o kernel." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the console<" -"/i> to when booting." -msgstr "" -"Modo VGA define o modo VGA para o console a ser definido " -"pelo kernel na inicialização." +msgid "Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the console to when booting." +msgstr "Modo VGA define o modo VGA para o console a ser definido pelo kernel na inicialização." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." -msgstr "" -"Parâmetro da linha de comando do kernel para o modo de segurança " -"permite definir parâmetros do modo de segurança a serem passados para o " -"kernel." +msgid "Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgstr "Parâmetro da linha de comando do kernel para o modo de segurança permite definir parâmetros do modo de segurança a serem passados para o kernel." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution " -msgstr "" -"Testar SO estrangeiro na forma do os-prober para " -"multi-inicialização com outras distribuições estrangeiras" +msgid "Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution " +msgstr "Testar SO estrangeiro na forma do os-prober para multi-inicialização com outras distribuições estrangeiras" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only on " -"exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if " -"you are not sure." -msgstr "" -"Indicador de proteção MBR é uma configuração avançada que é " -"necessária apenas em hardwares exóticos. Para detalhes veja proteção MBR em " -"discos GPT. Não toque se você não tem certeza." +msgid "Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure." +msgstr "Indicador de proteção MBR é uma configuração avançada que é necessária apenas em hardwares exóticos. Para detalhes veja proteção MBR em discos GPT. Não toque se você não tem certeza." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " -"boot entry name. " -msgstr "" -"Distribuidor especifica o nome do distribuidor do kernel usado para " -"criar a nome da entrada de inicialização. " +msgid "Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. " +msgstr "Distribuidor especifica o nome do distribuidor do kernel usado para criar a nome da entrada de inicialização. " #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 msgid "O&ptional Kernel Command Line Parameter" @@ -685,9 +598,7 @@ #. FIXME this should be better handled by exception and show it properly, but it require too big change now #: src/include/bootloader/routines/autoinstall.rb:132 msgid "Unsupported bootloader '%s'. Adapt your AutoYaST profile accordingly." -msgstr "" -"Carregador de inicialização não suportado '%s'. Ajuste seu perfil do AutoYaST " -"de acordo." +msgstr "Carregador de inicialização não suportado '%s'. Ajuste seu perfil do AutoYaST de acordo." #. file open popup caption #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_options.rb:102 @@ -700,9 +611,7 @@ #. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed #: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:85 src/modules/Bootloader.rb:256 msgid "The boot partition is of type NFS. Bootloader cannot be installed." -msgstr "" -"A partição de inicialização é do tipo NFS. O carregador de inicialização não " -"pode ser instalado." +msgstr "A partição de inicialização é do tipo NFS. O carregador de inicialização não pode ser instalado." #. dialog caption #: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:115 @@ -712,8 +621,7 @@ #. message #: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:143 msgid "There are no options to set for the current boot loader." -msgstr "" -"Não há opções a serem definidas para o carregador de inicialização atual." +msgstr "Não há opções a serem definidas para o carregador de inicialização atual." #. combo box #: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:114 @@ -763,8 +671,7 @@ #. menubutton item, keep as short as possible #: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:228 msgid "Write bootloader boot code to disk" -msgstr "" -"Salvar no disco o código de inicialização do carregador de inicialização" +msgstr "Salvar no disco o código de inicialização do carregador de inicialização" #. menu button #: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:236 @@ -802,8 +709,7 @@ "<BIG>Boot Loader Configuration Tool</BIG> \n" "Change the settings of your boot loader." msgstr "" -"<BIG>Ferramenta de configuração do carregador de inicialização</BIG>" -" \n" +"<BIG>Ferramenta de configuração do carregador de inicialização</BIG> \n" "Alterar as configurações do carregador de inicialização." #. help text @@ -812,23 +718,20 @@ "<BIG>Saving Boot Loader Configuration</BIG> \n" "Please wait... " msgstr "" -"<BIG>Salvando a configuração do carregador de inicialização</BIG><" -"BR>\n" +"<BIG>Salvando a configuração do carregador de inicialização</BIG> \n" "Por favor, aguarde... " #. help text 1/2 (%1 may be following sentence, optionally empty) #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "From Other,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current " -"\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" "configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1" msgstr "" "Em Outros,\n" "você pode editar manualmente os arquivos de configuração do carregador de\n" -"inicialização, limpar a configuração atual e propor uma nova, iniciar do zero " -"ou reler\n" +"inicialização, limpar a configuração atual e propor uma nova, iniciar do zero ou reler\n" "a configuração salva no seu disco. %1" #. help text 1/1 @@ -869,15 +772,11 @@ "menu can be changed using the Up and Down buttons." msgstr "" " Ao pressionar Definir como padrão, marque a seção \n" -"selecionada como padrão. Ao inicializar, o carregador de inicialização " -"fornecerá \n" -"um menu de inicialização e aguardará o usuário selecionar o kernel ou a " -"inicialização de outro \n" +"selecionada como padrão. Ao inicializar, o carregador de inicialização fornecerá \n" +"um menu de inicialização e aguardará o usuário selecionar o kernel ou a inicialização de outro \n" "OS. Se nenhuma tecla for pressionada antes do fim do tempo de espera, o \n" -"kernel ou o OS padrão será inicializado. A ordem das seções no menu do " -"carregador de inicialização\n" -"pode ser alterada com o uso dos botões Para cima e Para baixo.<" -"/P>" +"kernel ou o OS padrão será inicializado. A ordem das seções no menu do carregador de inicialização\n" +"pode ser alterada com o uso dos botões Para cima e Para baixo." #. help 4/4 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:94 @@ -885,8 +784,7 @@ "Press Add to create a new boot loader section\n" "or Delete to delete the selected section." msgstr "" -"Pressione Adicionar para criar uma nova seção do carregador de " -"inicialização\n" +"Pressione Adicionar para criar uma nova seção do carregador de inicialização\n" "ou Remover para remover a seção selecionada." #. help text for the custom boot manager installation, 1 of 7 @@ -898,8 +796,7 @@ "The boot manager (%1) can be installed in the following ways:" msgstr "" "<big>Localização do carregador de inicialização</big> \n" -"O carregador de inicialização (%1) pode ser instalado nas seguintes formas:<" -"/p>" +"O carregador de inicialização (%1) pode ser instalado nas seguintes formas:" #. custom bootloader help text, 2 of 7 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:118 @@ -919,22 +816,18 @@ "- In the Boot Sector of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set Activate Boot Loader Partition and\n" -"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details<" -"/b>\n" +"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;." msgstr "" "\n" -"- No Setor de inicialização da partição <tt>/boot</tt> ou <tt>/</tt> " -"(raiz)\n" +"- No Setor de inicialização da partição <tt>/boot</tt> ou <tt>/</tt> (raiz)\n" "Esta é a opção recomendada sempre que houver uma partição\n" "adequada. Defina Ativar partição do carregador de inicialização e\n" -"Substituir a MBR por código genérico em Detalhes da instalação do " -"carregador de inicialização\n" +"Substituir a MBR por código genérico em Detalhes da instalação do carregador de inicialização\n" "para atualizar o registro mestre de inicialização (MBR),\n" -"caso seja necessário ou para configurar o seu outro carregador de " -"inicialização\n" +"caso seja necessário ou para configurar o seu outro carregador de inicialização\n" "para iniciar o &product;." #. custom bootloader help text, 5 of 7 @@ -945,8 +838,7 @@ "when selecting this option." msgstr "" "\n" -"- Em alguma Outra partição. Leve em consideração as restrições do " -"sistema\n" +"- Em alguma Outra partição. Leve em consideração as restrições do sistema\n" "ao selecionar essa opção." #. optional part, only inserted on x86 architectures. 6 of 7 @@ -959,8 +851,7 @@ msgstr "" "Por exemplo, a maioria dos PCs tem um limite de BIOS\n" "que restringe a inicialização em \n" -"cilindros do disco rígido inferiores a 1024. Dependendo do gerenciador de " -"inicialização usado,\n" +"cilindros do disco rígido inferiores a 1024. Dependendo do gerenciador de inicialização usado,\n" "talvez você consiga ou não iniciar a partir de uma partição lógica." #. custom bootloader help text, 7 of 7 @@ -982,10 +873,8 @@ "mapping), click Boot Loader Installation Details." msgstr "" "Detalhes da instalação do carregador de inicialização \n" -"Para ajustar as opções avançadas de instalação do carregador de inicialização " -"(por exemplo, o mapeamento do\n" -"dispositivo), clique em Detalhes da instalação do carregador de " -"inicialização." +"Para ajustar as opções avançadas de instalação do carregador de inicialização (por exemplo, o mapeamento do\n" +"dispositivo), clique em Detalhes da instalação do carregador de inicialização." #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:189 @@ -1006,8 +895,7 @@ "Boot Loader Options." msgstr "" "Opções do carregador de inicialização \n" -"Para ajustar as opções do carregador de inicialização, como o tempo de " -"espera, clique em\n" +"Para ajustar as opções do carregador de inicialização, como o tempo de espera, clique em\n" "Opções do carregador de inicialização." #. help text 1/1 @@ -1018,8 +906,7 @@ "Note: The final configuration file may have different indenting." msgstr "" "Configuração manual avançada \n" -"Aqui você pode editar manualmente a configuração do carregador de " -"inicialização.\n" +"Aqui você pode editar manualmente a configuração do carregador de inicialização.\n" "Observação: o arquivo de configuração final poderá ter recuo diferente." #. help text 1/1 @@ -1050,8 +937,7 @@ "selected section." msgstr "" "Selecione Clonar seção selecionada para clonar a seção atualmente\n" -"selecionada. Em seguida, altere as opções que devem ser diferentes daquelas " -"da\n" +"selecionada. Em seguida, altere as opções que devem ser diferentes daquelas da\n" "seção selecionada." #. help text 3/5 @@ -1060,8 +946,7 @@ "Select Image Section to add a new Linux kernel or other image\n" "to load and start." msgstr "" -"Selecione Seção de imagem para adicionar um novo kernel do Linux " -"ou\n" +"Selecione Seção de imagem para adicionar um novo kernel do Linux ou\n" "outra imagem a ser carregada e iniciada." #. help text 4/5 @@ -1070,8 +955,7 @@ "Select Xen Section to add a new Linux kernel or other image,\n" "but to start it in a Xen environment." msgstr "" -"Selecione Seção do XEN para adicionar um novo kernel do Linux ou " -"outra imagem,\n" +"Selecione Seção do XEN para adicionar um novo kernel do Linux ou outra imagem,\n" "mas iniciá-lo em um ambiente do XEN." #. help text 5/5 @@ -1081,22 +965,18 @@ "loads and starts a boot sector of a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems." msgstr "" -"Selecione Outro sistema (chainloader) para adicionar uma seção que " -"\n" -"carrega e inicia um setor de inicialização de uma partição do disco. Essa " -"opção é usada para\n" +"Selecione Outro sistema (chainloader) para adicionar uma seção que \n" +"carrega e inicia um setor de inicialização de uma partição do disco. Essa opção é usada para\n" "inicializar outros sistemas operacionais." #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:257 msgid "" "Select Menu Section to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems." msgstr "" "Selecione Seção do menu para adicionar uma seção que\n" -"carregue um arquivo de configuração (a lista de seções de inicializaçõ) de " -"uma partição do disco. Isto é usado para\n" +"carregue um arquivo de configuração (a lista de seções de inicializaçõ) de uma partição do disco. Isto é usado para\n" "inicializar outros sistemas operacionais." #. part of summary, %1 is a list of hard disks device names @@ -1222,70 +1102,40 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." -msgstr "" -"Devido ao particionamento, o carregador de inicialização não pode ser " -"instalado corretamente." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgstr "Devido ao particionamento, o carregador de inicialização não pode ser instalado corretamente." #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instalar o código de inicialização na MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">não " -"instalar</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instalar o código de inicialização na MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">não instalar</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Não instalar o código de inicialização na MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">" -"instalar</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" +msgstr "Não instalar o código de inicialização na MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">instalar</a>)" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not " -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instalar o código de inicialização na partição /boot (<a " -"href=\"disable_boot_boot\">não instalar</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instalar o código de inicialização na partição /boot (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">não instalar</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:214 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">" -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Não instalar o código de inicialização na partição /boot (<a " -"href=\"enable_boot_boot\">instalar</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" +msgstr "Não instalar o código de inicialização na partição /boot (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">instalar</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not " -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instalar o código de inicialização na partição \"/\" (<a " -"href=\"disable_boot_root\">não instalar</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instalar o código de inicialização na partição \"/\" (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">não instalar</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:224 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">" -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Não instalar o código de inicialização na partição \"/\" (<a " -"href=\"enable_boot_root\">instalar</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">install</a>)" +msgstr "Não instalar o código de inicialização na partição \"/\" (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">instalar</a>)" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:234 -msgid "" -"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " -"are doing please select above location." -msgstr "" -"Aviso: Nenhuma localização para o estágio 1 do carregador de inicialização " -"selecionado. A menos que você saiba o que está fazendo, selecione a " -"localização acima." +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgstr "Aviso: Nenhuma localização para o estágio 1 do carregador de inicialização selecionado. A menos que você saiba o que está fazendo, selecione a localização acima." #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:242 @@ -1327,44 +1177,27 @@ #. grub2 is sooo cool... #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:101 msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" -msgstr "" -"A combinação da plataforma de hardware %1 e do carregador de inicialização %2 " -"não é suportada" +msgstr "A combinação da plataforma de hardware %1 e do carregador de inicialização %2 não é suportada" #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:140 -msgid "" -"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label " -"without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or " -"use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." -msgstr "" -"Inicializar a partir da MBR não funciona bem com o sistema de arquivos btrfs " -"e rótulos de disco GPT sem a partição bios_grub. Para corrigir isto, crie a " -"partição bios_grub ou use qualquer sistema de arquivos ext para a partição de " -"inicialização ou não instale o estágio 1 na MBR." +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "Inicializar a partir da MBR não funciona bem com o sistema de arquivos btrfs e rótulos de disco GPT sem a partição bios_grub. Para corrigir isto, crie a partição bios_grub ou use qualquer sistema de arquivos ext para a partição de inicialização ou não instale o estágio 1 na MBR." #. check if boot device is on raid0 #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:168 msgid "The boot device is on raid type: %1. System will not boot." -msgstr "" -"O dispositivo de inicialização está no raid tipo: %1. O sistema não irá " -"inicializar." +msgstr "O dispositivo de inicialização está no raid tipo: %1. O sistema não irá inicializar." #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:188 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" -msgstr "" -"O dispositivo de inicialização é um software RAID1. Selecione outra " -"localização do carregador de inicialização, por exemplo, a MBR" +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" +msgstr "O dispositivo de inicialização é um software RAID1. Selecione outra localização do carregador de inicialização, por exemplo, a MBR" #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:244 msgid "Missing ext partition for booting. Cannot install boot code." -msgstr "" -"Partição ext faltante para a inicialização. Não foi possível instalar o " -"código de inicialização." +msgstr "Partição ext faltante para a inicialização. Não foi possível instalar o código de inicialização." #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) #: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:159 Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cio.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cio.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cio.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -58,7 +58,6 @@ #. filter can be empty if dialog is not yet created #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:160 -#| msgid "Fiber channel" msgid "Filter channels" msgstr "Canais de fibra" @@ -67,7 +66,6 @@ msgstr "&Selecionar tudo" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:163 -#| msgid "&Detailed selection..." msgid "&Clear selection" msgstr "&Limpar seleção" @@ -84,7 +82,6 @@ msgstr "&Pesquisar os Canais" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:170 -#| msgid "Exit" msgid "&Exit" msgstr "&Sair" @@ -100,12 +97,10 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 msgid "" "List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" -"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range " -"specified with dash.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" "Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" msgstr "" #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:110 msgid "Ranges to Unban." msgstr "" - Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cluster.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cluster.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/cluster.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -101,7 +101,6 @@ msgstr "Endereço IP redundante" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:115 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:499 -#| msgid "Node IP" msgid "Node ID" msgstr "ID do nó" @@ -111,7 +110,6 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:170 -#| msgid "The hardware address must be unique." msgid "Node ID must be unique" msgstr "O ID do nó deve ser único." @@ -149,9 +147,7 @@ msgstr "O valor para pos deve ser um número inteiro positivo." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:270 -msgid "" -"Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to " -"passive." +msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." msgstr "" #. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr @@ -235,20 +231,12 @@ msgstr "Threads:" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:740 -msgid "" -"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate " -"/etc/corosync/authkey." -msgstr "" -"Para um cluster recém criado, clique no botão abaixo para gerar " -"etc/corosync/authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." +msgstr "Para um cluster recém criado, clique no botão abaixo para gerar etc/corosync/authkey." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:745 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." -msgstr "" -"Para ingressar num cluster existente, copie /etc/corosync/authkey de outros " -"nodos manualmente." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." +msgstr "Para ingressar num cluster existente, copie /etc/corosync/authkey de outros nodos manualmente." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:773 msgid "Failed to create /etc/corosync/authkey" @@ -378,8 +366,7 @@ "Clicking \"Add Suggested Files\" button adds it to sync list." msgstr "" "Arquivo de chave %1 gerado.\n" -"Clique em \"Adicionar arquivos sugeridos\" para adicioná-lo à lista de " -"sincronização." +"Clique em \"Adicionar arquivos sugeridos\" para adicioná-lo à lista de sincronização." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1321 msgid "Key generation failed." @@ -388,13 +375,11 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1383 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" -"O Conntrackd é um daemon que auxilia a duplicar o status de firewall entre os " -"nós de um cluster.\n" +"O Conntrackd é um daemon que auxilia a duplicar o status de firewall entre os nós de um cluster.\n" "O YaST pode auxiliar na configuração básica do conntrackd.\n" "É necessário iniciá-lo com ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." @@ -431,88 +416,21 @@ #| "<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used. \n" #| "<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen. \n" msgid "" -"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid " -"field must be specified. \n" -"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the " -"network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to " -"use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address. This " -" may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will " -"be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified." -"\n" -"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports. \n" -"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using " -"udpu(Unicast). \n" -"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the " -" 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used. \n" -"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<" -"br>\n" -"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting quorum. " -"Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in " -"corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. \n" -"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using " -"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" +"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified. \n" +"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address. This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.\n" +"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports. \n" +"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). \n" +"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used. \n" +"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen. \n" +"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. \n" +"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Associar endereço de rede</big>Isto especifica o endereço " -"ao qual o openais deve se associar. Este endereço deve sempre terminar em " -"zero. Se o tráfego deve ser roteado para 192.168.5.92, configure o " -"bindnetaddr para 192.168.5.0. Isto também pode ser um endereço IPv6, nesse " -"caso, a rede IPv6 será utilizada. Além disso, o endereço completo deve ser " -"especificado e não existe seleção automática da interface de rede sentro de " -"uma subrede específica, como no IPv4. Se a rede IPv6 for utilizada, o campo " -"nodeid deve ser especificado. \n" -"<big>Endereço multicast</big>Este é o endereço multicast usado " -"pelo openais. O padrão deve funcionar para a maioria das redes, mas o " -"administrador de rede deve ser consultado sobre qual endereço multicast deve " -"ser utilizado. Evite 224.x.x.x porque é um endereço multicast para " -"\"configuração\". Também pode ser um endereço multicast IPv6, nesse caso, " -"a rede IPv6 será utilizada. Se a rede IPv6 for utilizada, o campo nodeid deve " -"ser especificado.\n" -"<big>Porta</big> Isto especifica o número da porta UDP. É " -"possível utilizar o mesmo endereço multicast em uma rede com os serviços " -"openais configurados para portas UDP diferentes. \n" -"<big>Endereço do membro</big> Esta lista especifica todos os nós " -"no cluster por endereço IP. Isto pode ser configurável ao utilizar udpu <" -"/p>\n" -"<big>ID do nodo</big> Esta opção de configuração é opcional ao " -"utilizar IPv4 e obrigatória ao utilizar IPv6. Isto é um valor 32 bits " -"especificando o identificador do nodo entregue ao serviço de membros do " -"cluster. Se não for especificado no IPv4, o id do novo será determinado a " -"partir do endereço IP de 32 bits para qual o sistema estiver associado com o " -"identificador ring igual a 0. O identificador de nodo com valor igual a zero " -"é reservado e não deve ser utilizado. \n" -"<big>rrp_mode</big> Isto especifica o modo de anel redundante, " -"que pode ser nenhum, ativo ou passivo. A replicação ativa oferece uma " -"latência um pouco menor da transmissão para entrega em ambientes de rede " -"falhos, mas com menor desempenho. Replicação passiva pode dobrar a velocidade " -"do protocolo se o mesmo não for associado a cpu. A opção final é nenhum, caso " -"em que somente uma interface de rede será utilizada para operar o protocolo. " -"Se somente uma diretiva de interface for especificada, esta opção é " -"configurada automaticamente. Se várias diretivas de interface forem " -"especificadas, somente as opções ativo ou passivo podem ser configuradas. " -"\n" +"<big>Associar endereço de rede</big>Isto especifica o endereço ao qual o openais deve se associar. Este endereço deve sempre terminar em zero. Se o tráfego deve ser roteado para 192.168.5.92, configure o bindnetaddr para 192.168.5.0. Isto também pode ser um endereço IPv6, nesse caso, a rede IPv6 será utilizada. Além disso, o endereço completo deve ser especificado e não existe seleção automática da interface de rede sentro de uma subrede específica, como no IPv4. Se a rede IPv6 for utilizada, o campo nodeid deve ser especificado. \n" +"<big>Endereço multicast</big>Este é o endereço multicast usado pelo openais. O padrão deve funcionar para a maioria das redes, mas o administrador de rede deve ser consultado sobre qual endereço multicast deve ser utilizado. Evite 224.x.x.x porque é um endereço multicast para \"configuração\". Também pode ser um endereço multicast IPv6, nesse caso, a rede IPv6 será utilizada. Se a rede IPv6 for utilizada, o campo nodeid deve ser especificado.\n" +"<big>Porta</big> Isto especifica o número da porta UDP. É possível utilizar o mesmo endereço multicast em uma rede com os serviços openais configurados para portas UDP diferentes. \n" +"<big>Endereço do membro</big> Esta lista especifica todos os nós no cluster por endereço IP. Isto pode ser configurável ao utilizar udpu \n" +"<big>ID do nodo</big> Esta opção de configuração é opcional ao utilizar IPv4 e obrigatória ao utilizar IPv6. Isto é um valor 32 bits especificando o identificador do nodo entregue ao serviço de membros do cluster. Se não for especificado no IPv4, o id do novo será determinado a partir do endereço IP de 32 bits para qual o sistema estiver associado com o identificador ring igual a 0. O identificador de nodo com valor igual a zero é reservado e não deve ser utilizado. \n" +"<big>rrp_mode</big> Isto especifica o modo de anel redundante, que pode ser nenhum, ativo ou passivo. A replicação ativa oferece uma latência um pouco menor da transmissão para entrega em ambientes de rede falhos, mas com menor desempenho. Replicação passiva pode dobrar a velocidade do protocolo se o mesmo não for associado a cpu. A opção final é nenhum, caso em que somente uma interface de rede será utilizada para operar o protocolo. Se somente uma diretiva de interface for especificada, esta opção é configurada automaticamente. Se várias diretivas de interface forem especificadas, somente as opções ativo ou passivo podem ser configuradas. \n" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 #, fuzzy @@ -522,120 +440,53 @@ #| "<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The defaul t is on. \n" msgid "" "\n" -"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" -"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption " -"algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 " -"byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. " -"Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as " -"measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU " -"frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu " -"utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of " -"10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on " -"3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput " -"of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A " -"throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. " -"The default is on. \n" +"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" +"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. \n" msgstr "" "\n" -"<big>Threads</big> Esta diretiva controla quantas threads são " -"utilizadas para criptografar e enviar mensagens multicast. Se secauth estiver " -"desabilitado, o protocolo nunca irá utilizar envio por threads. Se secauth " -"estiver habilitado, esta diretiva permite que sistemas sejam configurados " -"para utilizar várias threads para criptografar e enviar mensagens multicast. " -"Uma diretiva de thread igual a 0 (zero) indica que nenhum envio com thread " -"deve ser utilizado. Este modo oferece o melhor desempenho para sistemas " -"não-SMP. O valor padrão é 0. \n" -"<big>Habilitar autenticação de segurança</big> Isto especifica " -"que a autenticação HMAC/SHA1 deve ser utilizada para autenticar todas as " -"mensagens. Além disso, especifica que todos os dados devem ser criptografados " -"com o algoritmo sober128 para proteger os dados contra interceptação. " -"Habilitar esta opção adiciona um cabeçalho de 36 bytes a cada mensagem " -"enviada, que reduz a vazão total. A criptografia e a autenticação consomem 75%" -" dos ciclos da CPU em aisexec como medido pelo gprof quando habilitado. Para " -"redes de 100mbits com transmissões de frames de 1500 MTU: é possível ter uma " -"vazão de 9mb/s com utilização de 100% de cpu ao habilitar esta opção em cpus " -"com 3GHz. É possível ter uma vazão de 10mb/s com 20% de utilização de cpu ao " -"desabilitar esta opção em cpus com 3GHz. Para redes gig-e com transmissões de " -"frames grandes: é possível ter uma vazaão de 20mb/s ao habilitar esta opção " -"em cpus com 3GHz. É possível ter uma vazão de 60mb/s ao desabilitar esta " -"opção em cpus com 3GHz. O padrão é \"habilitado\". \n" +"<big>Threads</big> Esta diretiva controla quantas threads são utilizadas para criptografar e enviar mensagens multicast. Se secauth estiver desabilitado, o protocolo nunca irá utilizar envio por threads. Se secauth estiver habilitado, esta diretiva permite que sistemas sejam configurados para utilizar várias threads para criptografar e enviar mensagens multicast. Uma diretiva de thread igual a 0 (zero) indica que nenhum envio com thread deve ser utilizado. Este modo oferece o melhor desempenho para sistemas não-SMP. O valor padrão é 0. \n" +"<big>Habilitar autenticação de segurança</big> Isto especifica que a autenticação HMAC/SHA1 deve ser utilizada para autenticar todas as mensagens. Além disso, especifica que todos os dados devem ser criptografados com o algoritmo sober128 para proteger os dados contra interceptação. Habilitar esta opção adiciona um cabeçalho de 36 bytes a cada mensagem enviada, que reduz a vazão total. A criptografia e a autenticação consomem 75% dos ciclos da CPU em aisexec como medido pelo gprof quando habilitado. Para redes de 100mbits com transmissões de frames de 1500 MTU: é possível ter uma vazão de 9mb/s com utilização de 100% de cpu ao habilitar esta opção em cpus com 3GHz. É possível ter uma vazão de 10mb/s com 20% de utilização de cpu ao desabilitar esta opção em cpus com 3GHz. Para redes gig-e com transmissões de frames grandes: é possível ter uma vazaão de 20mb/s ao habilitar esta opção em cpus com 3GHz. É possível ter uma vazão de 60mb /s ao desabilitar esta opção em cpus com 3GHz. O padrão é \"habilitado\". \n" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot " -"or not\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when Firewall " -"is enabled\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot or not\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when Firewall is enabled\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Inicializando</big> Inicie o serviço corosync durante " -"a inicialização ou não\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Configurações do firewall</big> Habilite a porta " -"quando o firewall estiver habilitado\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Inicializando</big> Inicie o serviço corosync durante a inicialização ou não\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Configurações do firewall</big> Habilite a porta quando o firewall estiver habilitado\n" "\t\t\t" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.\n" -"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed using " -"the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated " -"with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied " -"to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be synced.\n" +"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Sincronizar máquina</big> Os nomes de máquina " -"utilizados aqui devem ser os nomes de máquina locais dos nodos do cluster. " -"Isso significa que você deve utilizar exatamente a mesma string que é " -"impressa pelo comando hostname.\n" -"\t\t<big>Sincronizar arquivo</big> O caminho completo do arquivo " -"a ser sincronizado.\n" -"\t\t<big>Chaves pré-geradas</big> A autenticação é realizada " -"utilizando os endereços IP e chaves pré-geradas no Csync2. O arquivo de " -"chaves é gerado com csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. O arquivo key_hagroup " -"deve ser copiado manualmente para todos os membros do cluster após sua " -"criação.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sincronizar máquina</big> Os nomes de máquina utilizados aqui devem ser os nomes de máquina locais dos nodos do cluster. Isso significa que você deve utilizar exatamente a mesma string que é impressa pelo comando hostname.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sincronizar arquivo</big> O caminho completo do arquivo a ser sincronizado.\n" +"\t\t<big>Chaves pré-geradas</big> A autenticação é realizada utilizando os endereços IP e chaves pré-geradas no Csync2. O arquivo de chaves é gerado com csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. O arquivo key_hagroup deve ser copiado manualmente para todos os membros do cluster após sua criação.\n" "\t" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network interface " -"for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You " -"may have to have it pre-configured. \n" -"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" -"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.\n" -"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. \n" +"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" +"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be used for syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Interface dedicada</big> Uma interface de rede dedicada " -"para sincronização. A interface deve suportar multicast e estar habilitada " -"para uso. Você ainda deve tê-la pré-configurado. \n" -"\t\t<big>IP</big> O endereço IPv4 atribuído à interface de rede " -"dedicada. Ele é detectado automaticamente.\n" -"\t\t<big>Endereço multicast</big> O endereço multicast a ser " -"utilizado na sincronização.\n" -"\t\t<big>Número do grupo</big> Um identificador numérico indica " -"o grupo a ser sincronizado.\n" +"\t\t<big>Interface dedicada</big> Uma interface de rede dedicada para sincronização. A interface deve suportar multicast e estar habilitada para uso. Você ainda deve tê-la pré-configurado. \n" +"\t\t<big>IP</big> O endereço IPv4 atribuído à interface de rede dedicada. Ele é detectado automaticamente.\n" +"\t\t<big>Endereço multicast</big> O endereço multicast a ser utilizado na sincronização.\n" +"\t\t<big>Número do grupo</big> Um identificador numérico indica o grupo a ser sincronizado.\n" "\t" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -654,8 +505,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Cancelando a inicialização:</big> \n" -"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar" -" agora.\n" +"Cancele com segurança o utilitário de configuração clicando em Cancelar agora.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:80 Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/control.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/control.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/control.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -28,14 +28,6 @@ "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:3 -#| msgid "" -#| "\n" -#| "Congratulations!\n" -#| "The installation of openSUSE on your machine is complete.\n" -#| "After clicking Finish, you can log in to the system.\n" -#| "Visit us at %1.\n" -#| "Have a lot of fun! Your openSUSE Development Team\n" -#| "\t " msgid "" "\n" "Congratulations!\n" @@ -67,15 +59,12 @@ "environment has a distinct style, so personal taste determines which\n" "is the most appropriate desktop for you." msgstr "" -"O ambiente de área de trabalho em seu computador fornece uma interface " -"gráfica\n" +"O ambiente de área de trabalho em seu computador fornece uma interface gráfica\n" "para o usuário, bem como um conjunto de aplicações para\n" -"email, navegação na Internet, produtividade no escritório, jogos e " -"utilitários para\n" +"email, navegação na Internet, produtividade no escritório, jogos e utilitários para\n" "gerenciar seu computador.\n" "\n" -"O openSUSE oferece diversas opções de ambientes de área de trabalho. Os " -"ambientes\n" +"O openSUSE oferece diversas opções de ambientes de área de trabalho. Os ambientes\n" "mais usados são o GNOME o KDE, e eles são igualmente suportados\n" "no openSUSE. Ambos são fáceis de usar, altamente integrados\n" "e possuem um visual atrativo. Cada ambiente de área de trabalho\n" @@ -143,7 +132,6 @@ #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:36 #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:63 -#| msgid "Load Linuxrc Network Configuration" msgid "Load linuxrc Network Configuration" msgstr "Carregar a configuração de rede do linuxrc" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/crowbar.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/crowbar.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/crowbar.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -52,10 +52,8 @@ "Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ " -"for SMT server\n" -"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sle" -"s11-sp3-x86_64/ for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ for SMT server\n" +"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-… for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "" @@ -91,17 +89,14 @@ #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:201 -#| msgid "&Model" msgid "&Mode" msgstr "&Modo" #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:203 msgid "" -"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy." -"\n" -"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " -"space-separated list." +"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy.\n" +"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -341,8 +336,7 @@ #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1385 -msgid "" -"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." msgstr "" #. tab header @@ -385,8 +379,7 @@ "\n" "You can visit the Crowbar web UI on http://%1:3000/" msgstr "" -"O servidor de administração de nuvem SUSE foi implantado. A alteração da " -"rede\n" +"O servidor de administração de nuvem SUSE foi implantado. A alteração da rede\n" "não é suportada atualmente.\n" "\n" "Você pode visitar a interface web do Crowbar em http://%1:3000/" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/geo-cluster.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/geo-cluster.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/geo-cluster.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ #. Command line help text for the Xgeo-cluster module #: src/clients/geo-cluster.rb:54 -#| msgid "Configuration of printer" msgid "Configuration of geo-cluster" msgstr "Configuração do geo-cluster" @@ -70,7 +69,6 @@ #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:689 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:46 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:140 -#| msgid "GeoCluster Configuration" msgid "Geo Cluster Configuration" msgstr "Configuração do Geo Cluster" @@ -178,7 +176,6 @@ msgstr "tentativas" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:194 -#| msgid "Height" msgid "weights" msgstr "pesos" @@ -367,7 +364,6 @@ msgstr "Inicializando a configuração de segurança" #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:286 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:289 -#| msgid "Read Firewall Settings." msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" msgstr "Ler as configurações do SuSEFirewall" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iplb.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iplb.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iplb.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ #. Command line help text for the Xiplb module #: src/clients/iplb.rb:54 -#| msgid "Configuration of IPsec" msgid "Configuration of IPLB" msgstr "Configuração do IPLB" @@ -69,7 +68,6 @@ msgstr "Configuração global" #: src/include/iplb/common.rb:45 -#| msgid "Mail Server Configuration" msgid "Virtual Servers Configuration" msgstr "Configuração dos servidores virtuais" @@ -84,19 +82,16 @@ #. Iplb overview dialog caption #: src/include/iplb/complex.rb:142 -#| msgid "Overview" msgid "IPLB Overview" msgstr "Resumo do IPLB" #. Iplb configure1 dialog contents #: src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:49 -#| msgid "First part of configuration of CASA" msgid "First part of configuration of IPLB" msgstr "Primeira parte da configuração do IPLB" #. Iplb configure2 dialog contents #: src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:88 -#| msgid "Second part of configuration of CASA" msgid "Second part of configuration of IPLB" msgstr "Segunda parte da configuração do IPLB" @@ -214,151 +209,88 @@ "Default: 10 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>check timeout</big> = n\n" -"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a " -"per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>failure count</big> = n\n" -"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 1\n" "\n" "<big>negotiate timeout</big> = n\n" "Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" -"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvic" -"ename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" -"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" +"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" -"<big>log file</big> = \"/path/to/logfile\"" -"|syslog_facility\n" -"An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the " -"logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <a " -"href=\"/man/3/syslog\">syslog</a>(3) facility name.\n" +"<big>log file</big> = \"/path/to/logfile\"|syslog_facility\n" +"An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <a href=\"/man/3/syslog\">syslog</a>(3) facility name.\n" "Default: log directly to the file /var/log/ldirectord.log.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert</big> = \"emailaddress\"\n" -"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any " -"of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert freq</big> = n\n" -"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds " -"will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 0\n" "\n" -"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting" -"|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" -"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. all is a short-hand for\n" -"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If " -"none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options " -"are ORed\n" +"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" +"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. all is a short-hand for\n" +"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: all\n" "\n" "<big>callback</big> = \"/path/to/callback\"\n" -"If this directive is defined, ldirectord automatically calls " -"the executable /path/to/callback after the configuration file has " -"changed on\n" -"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through scp on " -"the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of " -"the\n" +"If this directive is defined, ldirectord automatically calls the executable /path/to/callback after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through scp on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" "configuration.\n" -"This directive might also be used to restart ldirectord " -"automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if " -"autoreload is\n" +"This directive might also be used to restart ldirectord automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if autoreload is\n" "set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" "\n" "<big>execute</big> = \"configuration\"\n" -"Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named " -"configuration.\n" +"Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named configuration.\n" "\n" "<big>auto reload</big> = yes|no\n" -"Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the " -"configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the " -"configuration file changed\n" -"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, " -"the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" "<big>quiescent</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be " -"down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS<" -"/small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: yes\n" "\n" "<big>fork</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every " -"virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will " -"increase\n" -"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many " -"virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate " -"instances\n" +"If yes, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" "of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" "<big>supervised</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All " -"log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to " -"run\n" -"ldirectord supervised from daemontools. See <a " -"href=\"http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">" -"http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or <a " -"href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a>" -" for details.\n" +"If yes, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"ldirectord supervised from daemontools. See <a href=\"http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or <a href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -366,87 +298,42 @@ #: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "\n" -"<big>virtual server</big> = " -"(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark\n" -"Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than " -"zero. The\n" -"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> " -"option to ipchains(8). All real services and flags for a virtual " -"service\n" +"<big>virtual server</big> = (ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark\n" +"Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to ipchains(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" "must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>real servers</big> = " -"ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename]\n" -"gate|masq|ipip [weight] [\"request<" -"b>\", \"receive\"]\n" -"Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended " -"primarily for\n" -"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a " -"range of IP addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in " -"which case\n" -"each IP address in the range will be treated as a real server " -"using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must " -"be\n" -"gate, ipip or masq. The thrid argument is optional and " -"defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will " -"be\n" -"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive " -"pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the " -"request-receive\n" -"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the " -"request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" -"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is " -"used.\n" -"For TCP and UDP (non fwmark) virtual " -"services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the IP " -"address of a\n" -"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running " -"ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its " -"virtual\n" -"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is " -"another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way " -"that the\n" +"<big>real servers</big> = ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename]\n" +"gate|masq|ipip [weight] [\"request\", \"receive\"]\n" +"Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of IP addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each IP address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"gate, ipip or masq. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"For TCP and UDP (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the IP address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" "underlying LVS code in the kernel functions.\n" -"More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The " -"checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, " -"emailalertfreq and\n" -"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in " -"which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>check type</big> = connect|external|negotiate" -"|off|on|ping|checktimeoutN\n" -"Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a " -"receive string. Connect only attemts to make a TCP/IP " -"connection, thus the\n" -"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then " -"negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one " -"negotiate\n" -"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and " -"in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" -"ICMP ping will be used to test the availability of real " -"servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for UDP " -"services. Off\n" -"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be " -"activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always " -"be\n" +"<big>check type</big> = connect|external|negotiate|off|on|ping|checktimeoutN\n" +"Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a TCP/IP connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"ICMP ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for UDP services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" "activated. Default is negotiate.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>service</big> = dns|ftp|http|https|" -"imap|imaps|ldap|mysql|nntp|none|" -"oracle|pgsql|pop|pops|radius|simpletcp" -"|sip|smtp\n" -"The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None " -"denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" -"simpletcp sends the request string to the server and tests it " -"against the receive regexp. The other types of checks connect to the " -"server\n" -"using the specified protocol. Please see the request and receive" -" sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"<big>service</big> = dns|ftp|http|https|imap|imaps|ldap|mysql|nntp|none|oracle|pgsql|pop|pops|radius|simpletcp|sip|smtp\n" +"The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"simpletcp sends the request string to the server and tests it against the receive regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the request and receive sections for protocol specific information.\n" "Default:\n" "<dl compact=\"compact\">\n" "<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" @@ -469,9 +356,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>check command</big> = \"path to script\"\n" -"This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run " -"to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if " -"everything\n" +"This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" "is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" "Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" "</dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" @@ -482,103 +367,68 @@ "\n" "\n" "<big>check port</big> = n\n" -"Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service " -"port.\n" +"Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" "Default: port specified for each real server\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>request</big> = \"uri to requested object\"\n" -"This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real " -"server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be " -"overridden by\n" +"This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" "an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" -"For a DNS check this should the name of an A record, or " -"the address of a PTR record to look up.\n" -"For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an SQL<" -"/small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one " -"or more\n" +"For a DNS check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a PTR record to look up.\n" +"For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an SQL query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" "rows. This is a required setting.\n" -"For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any " -"occurances of \n" +"For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" " are replaced with a new line character.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>receive</big> = \"regexp to compare\"\n" -"If the requested result contains this regexp to compare, the " -"real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind " -"that\n" -"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special " -"characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be " -"overridden by an\n" +"If the requested result contains this regexp to compare, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" "optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" -"For a DNS check this should be any one the A record's " -"addresses or any one of the PTR record's names.\n" +"For a DNS check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the PTR record's names.\n" "For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>http method</big> = GET | HEAD<" -"/small>\n" -"Sets the HTTP method which should be used to fetch the " -"URI specified in the request-string. GET is " -"the\n" -"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If HEAD is " -"used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"<big>http method</big> = GET | HEAD\n" +"Sets the HTTP method which should be used to fetch the URI specified in the request-string. GET is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If HEAD is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" "Default: GET\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>virtual host</big> = \"hostname\"\n" -"Used when using a negotiate check with HTTP or " -"HTTPS . Sets the host header used in the HTTP request. " -"In the\n" -"case of HTTPS this generally needs to match the common name of " -"the SSL certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" -"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort " -"the IP address of the real server will be used.\n" +"Used when using a negotiate check with HTTP or HTTPS . Sets the host header used in the HTTP request. In the\n" +"case of HTTPS this generally needs to match the common name of the SSL certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the IP address of the real server will be used.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>login</big> = \"username\"\n" -"For FTP , IMAP , LDAP , " -"MySQL, Oracle, POP and PostgreSQL, the username used to log " -"in.\n" +"For FTP , IMAP , LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" "For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" -"For SIP , the username is used as both the to and from " -"address for an OPTIONS query.\n" +"For SIP , the username is used as both the to and from address for an OPTIONS query.\n" "Default:\n" "</dt><dt>* FTP: Anonymous\n" -"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the " -"configuration\n" -"</dt><dt>* SIP: ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is " -"derived as per the passwd option below.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication " -"will not be attempted.\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* SIP: ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>password</big> = \"password\"\n" -"Password to use to login to FTP , IMAP , <" -"small>LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP , PostgreSQL and\n" +"Password to use to login to FTP , IMAP , LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP , PostgreSQL and\n" "SIP servers.\n" "For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" "Default:\n" -"</dt><dt>* FTP: ldirectord@<hostname>, where " -"hostname is the environment variable HOSTNAME evaluated at run " -"time, or sourced\n" +"</dt><dt>* FTP: ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable HOSTNAME evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" "from uname if unset.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of LDAP , " -"MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be " -"performed.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>database name</big> = \"databasename\"\n" -"Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the " -"database that the query (set by receive above) will be performed " -"against. This\n" +"Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by receive above) will be performed against. This\n" "is a required setting.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>radius secret</big> = \"radiussecret\"\n" -"Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform " -"an Access-Request with the username (set by login above) and passwd " -"(set by\n" +"Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by login above) and passwd (set by\n" "passwd above).\n" "Default: empty string\n" "\n" @@ -592,119 +442,73 @@ "\n" "\n" "<big>scheduler</big> = scheduler_name\n" -"Scheduler to be used by LVS for loadbalancing. For an " -"information on the available sehedulers please see the <a href=\"ipvsadm\">" -"ipvsadm</a>(8) man page.\n" +"Scheduler to be used by LVS for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <a href=\"ipvsadm\">ipvsadm</a>(8) man page.\n" "Default: \"wrr\"\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>protocol</big> = tcp|udp|fwm\n" -"Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an IP<" -"/small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall " -"mark then the\n" +"Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an IP address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" "protocol must be fwm.\n" "Default:\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port " -"is not 53: tcp\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is " -"53: udp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" "</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" "</dt></dl>\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>check timeout</big> = n\n" -"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a " -"per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>negotiate timeout</big> = n\n" "Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>failure count</big> = n\n" -"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 1\n" "\n" "<big>email alert</big> = \"emailaddress\"\n" -"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any " -"of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert freq</big> = n\n" -"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds " -"will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 0\n" "\n" -"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting" -"|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" -"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. all is a short-hand for\n" -"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If " -"none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options " -"are ORed\n" +"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" +"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. all is a short-hand for\n" +"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: all\n" "\n" -"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvic" -"ename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" -"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" +"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>quiescent</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be " -"down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS<" -"/small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: yes\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -763,7 +567,6 @@ msgstr "Senha" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:180 -#| msgid "Database Name:" msgid "Database Name" msgstr "Nome do banco de dados" @@ -861,7 +664,6 @@ msgstr "Editor de zona de encaminhamento" #: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:422 -#| msgid "Height" msgid "weight" msgstr "peso" @@ -966,4 +768,3 @@ #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:441 msgid "Configuration summary..." msgstr "Resumo da configuração..." - Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iscsi-lio-server.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iscsi-lio-server.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/iscsi-lio-server.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -80,7 +80,6 @@ msgstr "Número da porta" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:143 -#| msgid "Bad list of IP addresses." msgid "Bind all IP addresses" msgstr "Vincular todos os endereços IP" @@ -258,8 +257,7 @@ "<big>Initializing iSCSI LIO Target Configuration</big> \n" "Please wait... \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Inicializando a configuração do LIO de destino do iSCSI</big><" -"br>\n" +"<big>Inicializando a configuração do LIO de destino do iSCSI</big> \n" "Por favor, aguarde... \n" #. Read dialog help 2/2 @@ -269,8 +267,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Cancelando a inicialização</big> \n" -"Cancele o utilitário de configuração com segurança pressionando Cancelar<" -"/b> agora.\n" +"Cancele o utilitário de configuração com segurança pressionando Cancelar agora.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:47 @@ -403,65 +400,30 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of " -"Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert User<" -"/b> and Password." -msgstr "" -"Selecione o tipo de autenticação. Use Sem Autenticação, Recebido" -" ou Enviado (ou as duas últimas opções ao mesmo tempo). Depois informe " -"o Usuário e a Senha." +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert User and Password." +msgstr "Selecione o tipo de autenticação. Use Sem Autenticação, Recebido ou Enviado (ou as duas últimas opções ao mesmo tempo). Depois informe o Usuário e a Senha." #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " -"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is " -"InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). " -"Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." -msgstr "" -"Utilize Adicionar para conceder acesso a um cliente vindo de um LUN " -"importado de um grupo de portal de destino. Especifique quais clientes podem " -"acessá-lo (o nome do cliente é InitiatorName em " -"'/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' no inicializador iscsi). Remover " -"removerá o acesso do cliente ao LUN." +msgid "Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." +msgstr "Utilize Adicionar para conceder acesso a um cliente vindo de um LUN importado de um grupo de portal de destino. Especifique quais clientes podem acessá-lo (o nome do cliente é InitiatorName em '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' no inicializador iscsi). Remover removerá o acesso do cliente ao LUN." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 -msgid "" -"With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " -"target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the " -"type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both " -"together. Then insert User and Password. If Use " -"Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is " -"disabled here." -msgstr "" -"É possível alterar os LUNs acessíveis ao cliente com Editar LUN. " -"Por favor, observe que o número do LUN de destino deve ser único. Após " -"pressionar Editar autenticação, selecione o tipo da autenticação. " -"Utilize Recebido, Enviado ou ambos. Depois informe o " -"Usuário e a Senha. Se Utilizar autenticação estiver " -"desabilitado no diálogo anterior, Editar autenticação estará " -"desabilitado aqui." +msgid "With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both together. Then insert User and Password. If Use Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is disabled here." +msgstr "É possível alterar os LUNs acessíveis ao cliente com Editar LUN. Por favor, observe que o número do LUN de destino deve ser único. Após pressionar Editar autenticação, selecione o tipo da autenticação. Utilize Recebido, Enviado ou ambos. Depois informe o Usuário e a Senha. Se Utilizar autenticação estiver desabilitado no diálogo anterior, Editar autenticação estará desabilitado aqui." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " -"the LUN." -msgstr "" -"Copiar oferece a possibilidade de dar a um cliente adicional acesso " -"ao LUN." +msgid "Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN." +msgstr "Copiar oferece a possibilidade de dar a um cliente adicional acesso ao LUN." #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " -"clicking Add.\n" +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking Add.\n" "To delete or modify an item, select it and press Edit or Delete." msgstr "" -"Lista de destinos oferecidos e grupos de portal de destino. Para criar um " -"novo destino, clique em Adicionar.\n" -"Para remover ou alterar um item, selecione-o e pressione Alterar ou " -"Remover." +"Lista de destinos oferecidos e grupos de portal de destino. Para criar um novo destino, clique em Adicionar.\n" +"Para remover ou alterar um item, selecione-o e pressione Alterar ou Remover." #. edit target #. add target @@ -472,79 +434,58 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"LUN.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a LUN.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. " -"\n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" -"É possível disponibilizar dispositivos de bloco ou arquivos arbitrários em um " -"LUN.\n" -"É necessário fornecer o caminho para os dispositivos de bloco ou " -"arquivo. \n" -"O Nome do LUN é um nome arbitrário utilizado para identificar " -"unicamente o LUN. \n" +"É possível disponibilizar dispositivos de bloco ou arquivos arbitrários em um LUN.\n" +"É necessário fornecer o caminho para os dispositivos de bloco ou arquivo. \n" +"O Nome do LUN é um nome arbitrário utilizado para identificar unicamente o LUN. \n" "O nome deve ser único dentro do grupo de portal de destino. Se o usuário \n" "não fornecer um nome para o LUN, ele será gerado automaticamente." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which " -"address\n" +"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" -"Em Endereço IP e Número da porta você especificará em qual " -"endereço\n" +"Em Endereço IP e Número da porta você especificará em qual endereço\n" "e porta o serviço estará disponível. O valor padrão para a porta é 3260.\n" "É possível utilizar somente endereços atribuídos a uma das placas de rede." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:162 msgid "Create a new target. Replace template values with the correct values." -msgstr "" -"Criar novo destino. Substitua os valores do gabarito pelos valores corretos." +msgstr "Criar novo destino. Substitua os valores do gabarito pelos valores corretos." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. " -"\n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" -"É possível disponibilizar dispositivos de bloco ou arquivos arbitrários em um " -"lun.\n" -"É necessário fornecer o caminho para os dispositivos de bloco ou " -"arquivo. \n" -"O Nome do LUN é um nome arbitrário utilizado para identificar " -"unicamente o LUN. \n" +"É possível disponibilizar dispositivos de bloco ou arquivos arbitrários em um lun.\n" +"É necessário fornecer o caminho para os dispositivos de bloco ou arquivo. \n" +"O Nome do LUN é um nome arbitrário utilizado para identificar unicamente o LUN. \n" "O nome deve ser único dentro do grupo de portal de destino. Se o usuário \n" "não fornecer um nome para o LUN, ele será gerado automaticamente." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional " -"configuration options." -msgstr "" -"É possível adicionar, editar ou remover todas as opções " -"de configuração adicionais." +msgid "It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional configuration options." +msgstr "É possível adicionar, editar ou remover todas as opções de configuração adicionais." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 msgid "" -"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing " -"purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and " -"Sectors are optional." +"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and Sectors are optional." msgstr "" -"Edite o número de LUN se necessário, defina Tipo (nullio é " -"usado para testes).\n" -"Se Tipo=fileio, defina Caminho como o arquivo ou o dispositivo de " -"disco.ID de SCSI e Setores são opcionais." +"Edite o número de LUN se necessário, defina Tipo (nullio é usado para testes).\n" +"Se Tipo=fileio, defina Caminho como o arquivo ou o dispositivo de disco.ID de SCSI e Setores são opcionais." #. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:145 @@ -572,9 +513,7 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:269 msgid "Selected Path must be either block device or normal file!" -msgstr "" -"O caminho selecionado deve ser de um dispositivo em bloco ou de um arquivo " -"normal!" +msgstr "O caminho selecionado deve ser de um dispositivo em bloco ou de um arquivo normal!" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:275 msgid "Selected Path is already in use!" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/isns.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/isns.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/isns.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -143,8 +143,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Cancelando a inicialização</big> \n" -"Cancele o utilitário de configuração com segurança pressionando Cancelar<" -"/b> agora.\n" +"Cancele o utilitário de configuração com segurança pressionando Cancelar agora.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:25 @@ -178,76 +177,26 @@ "Configure um servidor iSNS. \n" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are " -"displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " -"targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node " -"removes it from the iSNS database." -msgstr "" -"A lista de todos os nós iSCSI disponíveis registrados no serviço iSNS é " -"exibida.Os nós são registrados pelos iniciadores e destinatários " -"iSCSI.É possível somente Remover os nós. Remover um nó remove-o " -"do banco de dados do iSNS." +msgid "The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database." +msgstr "A lista de todos os nós iSCSI disponíveis registrados no serviço iSNS é exibida.Os nós são registrados pelos iniciadores e destinatários iSCSI.É possível somente Remover os nós. Remover um nó remove-o do banco de dados do iSNS." #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 -msgid "" -"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create " -"a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the " -"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." -msgstr "" -"Uma lista de todos os domínios de descoberta é exibida. É possível Criar<" -"/b> ou Remover um domínio de descoberta. Remover um domínio remove " -"os membros do domínio mas não exclui os membros do nó iSCSI." +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." +msgstr "Uma lista de todos os domínios de descoberta é exibida. É possível Criar ou Remover um domínio de descoberta. Remover um domínio remove os membros do domínio mas não exclui os membros do nó iSCSI." #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " -"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " -"domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " -"Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " -"does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet " -"registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the " -"initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain<" -"/p> When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service " -"returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery " -"Domains. " -msgstr "" -"Uma lista de todos os nós iSCSI é exibida pelo domínio de descoberta. " -"Selecionar outro domínio de descoberta atualiza a lista de membros deste " -"domínio de descoberta. É possível Adicionar um nó iSCSI a um domínio " -"de descoberta ou Remover o nó. Remover um nó remove-o do domínio " -"mas não exclui o nó iSCSI Criar um nó iSCSI permite que um nó ainda " -"não registrado seja adicionado como membro no domínio de descoberta. Quando o " -"iniciador ou o destinatário registra este nó, ele passa a fazer parte deste " -"domínio Quando um iniciador iSCSI faz a requisição de descoberta, o " -"serviço iSNS retorna todos os nós iSCSI destinatários que são membros dos " -"mesmos domínios de descoberta." +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains. " +msgstr "Uma lista de todos os nós iSCSI é exibida pelo domínio de descoberta. Selecionar outro domínio de descoberta atualiza a lista de membros deste domínio de descoberta. É possível Adicionar um nó iSCSI a um domínio de descoberta ou Remover o nó. Remover um nó remove-o do domínio mas não exclui o nó iSCSI Criar um nó iSCSI permite que um nó ainda não registrado seja adicionado como membro no domínio de descoberta. Quando o iniciador ou o destinatário registra este nó, ele passa a fazer parte deste domínio Quando um iniciador iSCSI faz a requisição de descoberta, o serviço iSNS retorna todos os nós iSCSI destinatários que são membros dos mesmos domínios de descoberta." #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " -"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a " -"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS " -"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " -"Domains contain iSCSI Node members." -msgstr "" -"Uma lista de todos os conjuntos de domínios de descoberta é exibida acima. " -"Domínios de descoberta pertencem a conjuntos de domínios de descoberta. Um " -"domínio de descoberta deve ser membro de um conjunto de domínios de " -"descoberta para que esteja ativo. Em um banco de dados iSNS, um " -"conjunto de domínios de descoberta contém domínios de descoberta e os " -"domínios de descoberta contêm os membros do Nó iSCSI. " +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members." +msgstr "Uma lista de todos os conjuntos de domínios de descoberta é exibida acima. Domínios de descoberta pertencem a conjuntos de domínios de descoberta. Um domínio de descoberta deve ser membro de um conjunto de domínios de descoberta para que esteja ativo. Em um banco de dados iSNS, um conjunto de domínios de descoberta contém domínios de descoberta e os domínios de descoberta contêm os membros do Nó iSCSI. " #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "" -"The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " -"discovery domain set is selected." -msgstr "" -"A lista de membros do conjunto de domínios de descoberta é atualizada " -"sempre que um conjunto de domínios de descoberta diferente for selecionado.<" -"/p>" +msgid "The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected." +msgstr "A lista de membros do conjunto de domínios de descoberta é atualizada sempre que um conjunto de domínios de descoberta diferente for selecionado." #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** #: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:25 @@ -289,11 +238,8 @@ #. boolean display = true; #. Report::DisplayErrors(display,10); #: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:351 -#| msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check iSNS server address." msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check if iSNS server is running." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível conectar ao servidor iSNS. Verifique se o servidor iSNS está " -"em execução." +msgstr "Não foi possível conectar ao servidor iSNS. Verifique se o servidor iSNS está em execução." #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/isns/wizards.rb:70 @@ -307,11 +253,8 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 -msgid "" -"To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed." -msgstr "" -"Para configurar o serviço iSNS, o pacote %1 deve estar instalado.<" -"/p>" +msgid "To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed." +msgstr "Para configurar o serviço iSNS, o pacote %1 deve estar instalado." #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 msgid "Install it now?" Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/mail.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/mail.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/mail.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -114,12 +114,10 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "If choosing No Connection, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " -"localhost.\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.\n" msgstr "" "Escolhendo Sem conexão o servidor de e-mail será iniciado \n" -"mas somente o transporte de e-mails locais será possível. O MTA escutará o " -"localhost.\n" +"mas somente o transporte de e-mails locais será possível. O MTA escutará o localhost.\n" #. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:88 @@ -128,8 +126,7 @@ "Specify the rewriting of the sender's address here for each user.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Especifique a reescrita do endereço do remetente aqui para cada usuário.<" -"/p>\n" +"Especifique a reescrita do endereço do remetente aqui para cada usuário.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:96 @@ -149,24 +146,20 @@ msgid "" "\n" "The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as " -"smtp.provider.com.\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as smtp.provider.com.\n" msgstr "" "\n" "O servidor de saída de e-mails é normalmente usado por \n" -"conexões discadas. Informe o servidor SMTP,tal como, smtp.provedor.com.br<" -"/b>.\n" +"conexões discadas. Informe o servidor SMTP,tal como, smtp.provedor.com.br.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your " -"provider.\n" +"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"No campo Nome de usuário, informe o nome de usuário que recebeu do " -"provedor.\n" +"No campo Nome de usuário, informe o nome de usuário que recebeu do provedor.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:113 @@ -207,8 +200,7 @@ "\n" "This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.<" -"/p>\n" +"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.\n" msgstr "" "\n" "Esta tabela redireciona os e-mails entregues localmente. \n" @@ -371,12 +363,10 @@ msgstr "Iniciar o &fetchmail" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#| msgid "[manually set]" msgid "manual" msgstr "manual" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#| msgid "FTP daemon" msgid "daemon" msgstr "daemon" @@ -709,8 +699,7 @@ "with AMaViS.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Habilitar pesquisa de vírus (AMaVUS) verifica os e-mails de entrada " -"e saída \n" +"Habilitar pesquisa de vírus (AMaVUS) verifica os e-mails de entrada e saída \n" "com o AMaViS.\n" #. help text @@ -757,22 +746,17 @@ "\n" "Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" "will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " -"send\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" "authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"São necessárias ações adicionais para habilitar DKIM para e-mails " -"enviados. Uma chave SSL\n" +"São necessárias ações adicionais para habilitar DKIM para e-mails enviados. Uma chave SSL\n" "será gerada para o valor 'meudomínio' definido no Postfix. Um novo serviço\n" -"'envio' será configurado no Postfix. Depois que isso for configurado, você " -"poderá\n" -"enviar e-mails com este serviço 'envio' de 'minhasredes' com autenticação " -"SASL\n" -"habilitada. Somente e-mails enviados por esse novo serviço serão assinados " -"com\n" +"'envio' será configurado no Postfix. Depois que isso for configurado, você poderá\n" +"enviar e-mails com este serviço 'envio' de 'minhasredes' com autenticação SASL\n" +"habilitada. Somente e-mails enviados por esse novo serviço serão assinados com\n" "a chave de domínio.\n" #. help text @@ -783,29 +767,23 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in /var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " -"the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"A chave pública da chave de domínio precisa ser emitida por um Serviço de " -"Nomes\n" +"A chave pública da chave de domínio precisa ser emitida por um Serviço de Nomes\n" "de Domínio. A chave pública será salva como um registro TXT de DNS\n" "em /var/db/dkim/[meudomínio].public.txt e precisa ser implantada em\n" "um Serviço de Nome de Domínio adequado. Se existe um serviço de nomes\n" -"em execução neste servidor, que é o servidor autoridade para aquele domínio, " -"a\n" +"em execução neste servidor, que é o servidor autoridade para aquele domínio, a\n" "chave pública será adicionada como um registro TXT naquela zona de domínio\n" "automaticamente.\n" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "" -"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." -msgstr "" -"Se você habilitar o suporte a DKIM, o antivírus (AMaViS) também será " -"habilitado." +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgstr "Se você habilitar o suporte a DKIM, o antivírus (AMaViS) também será habilitado." #. Translators: text entry label #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:224 @@ -839,8 +817,7 @@ "for the system administrator and redirect root's mail to this account." msgstr "" "É recomendado ter uma conta de usuário regular\n" -"para o administrador de sistema e direcionar e-mail do root para esta conta.<" -"/p>" +"para o administrador de sistema e direcionar e-mail do root para esta conta." #. Translators: combo box label #. /etc/sysconfig/postfix: POSTFIX_MDA @@ -850,12 +827,8 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "" -"The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not " -"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." -msgstr "" -"O modo de entrega é geralmente Diretamentel, a não ser que " -"você não encaminhe o e-mail do root ou queira acessar o e-mail via IMAP." +msgid "The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." +msgstr "O modo de entrega é geralmente Diretamentel, a não ser que você não encaminhe o e-mail do root ou queira acessar o e-mail via IMAP." #. LogView label. take a string from users? #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:345 @@ -895,8 +868,7 @@ #. Validation #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:839 msgid "Cannot use procmail when root's mail is not forwarded." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível usar o procmail se o e-mail do root não é encaminhado." +msgstr "Não foi possível usar o procmail se o e-mail do root não é encaminhado." #. combo box choice: #. deliver mail normally Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/registration.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/registration.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/registration.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -133,9 +133,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and extensions." +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. not set yet? @@ -205,15 +203,11 @@ msgstr "O sistema já está registrado." #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:471 -msgid "" -"You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " -"modules to enhance the functionality of the system." +msgid "You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system." msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:473 -msgid "" -"If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove the system manually there." +msgid "If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there." msgstr "" #. error message @@ -605,9 +599,7 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 msgid "" "Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.\n" -"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot " -"provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " -"extension or module." +"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module." msgstr "" #. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) @@ -630,22 +622,17 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." +msgid "Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." msgstr "" #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "" -"Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " -"registration code." +msgid "Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code." msgstr "" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:53 -msgid "" -"If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove them manually there." +msgid "If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there." msgstr "" #. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow @@ -674,9 +661,7 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 -msgid "" -"Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together " -"with the base product." +msgid "Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product." msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 @@ -732,28 +717,22 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 msgid "" -"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" +"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product " -"Registration." +"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product Registration." msgstr "" -"O registro do produto inclui seu produto no banco de dados da Central do " -"Cliente SUSE,\n" +"O registro do produto inclui seu produto no banco de dados da Central do Cliente SUSE,\n" " habilitando-o a receber atualizações onlines e suporte técnico.\n" -"Para registrar durante a instalação automática, selecione Realizar o " -"registro do produto." +"Para registrar durante a instalação automática, selecione Realizar o registro do produto." #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 msgid "" -"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" +"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" "and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance." msgstr "" "Se sua rede possui um servidor de registro personalizado, informe o URL\n" -"correto do servidor e a localização do certificado SMT em Configurações do " -"servidor SMT.\n" +"correto do servidor e a localização do certificado SMT em Configurações do servidor SMT.\n" "Consulte o seu manual do SMT para detalhes." #. FIXME the dialog should be created by external code before calling this @@ -824,50 +803,28 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." -msgstr "" -"Uma conexão segura (HTTPS) utiliza certificados SSL para verificar a " -"autenticidade do servidor e para criptografar os dados transferidos." +msgid "Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." +msgstr "Uma conexão segura (HTTPS) utiliza certificados SSL para verificar a autenticidade do servidor e para criptografar os dados transferidos." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:123 -msgid "" -"You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate." -msgstr "" -"Você pode escolher importar o certificado na lista de autoridades " -"certificadores (CA) conhecidas. Isso significa que você confia no elemento e " -"o emissor do certificado desconhecido." +msgid "You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate." +msgstr "Você pode escolher importar o certificado na lista de autoridades certificadores (CA) conhecidas. Isso significa que você confia no elemento e o emissor do certificado desconhecido." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate." -msgstr "" -"A importação de um certificação lhe permitirá utilizar, por exemplo, um " -"certificado auto-assinado." +msgid "Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate." +msgstr "A importação de um certificação lhe permitirá utilizar, por exemplo, um certificado auto-assinado." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." -msgstr "" -"Importante: você deve verificar a impressão digital do certificado " -"para garantir que o certificado genuíno seja importado do servidor." +msgid "Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." +msgstr "Importante: você deve verificar a impressão digital do certificado para garantir que o certificado genuíno seja importado do servidor." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security " -"risk." -msgstr "" -"A importação de um certificado desconhecido sem realizar a verificação " -"é um risco de segurança." +msgid "Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk." +msgstr "A importação de um certificado desconhecido sem realizar a verificação é um risco de segurança." #. error message, the entered URL is not valid #: src/lib/registration/ui/local_server_dialog.rb:60 Modified: trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/storage.pt_BR.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/storage.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) +++ trunk/yast/pt_BR/po/storage.pt_BR.po 2014-11-03 16:13:48 UTC (rev 90700) @@ -38,8 +38,7 @@ "\n" "To continue despite this warning, click Yes.\n" msgstr "" -"Use este programa somente se estiver familiarizado com o particionamento de " -"discos rígidos.\n" +"Use este programa somente se estiver familiarizado com o particionamento de discos rígidos.\n" "\n" "Nunca particione discos que possam, de alguma forma, estar sendo usados\n" "(montados, realizando troca, etc.) a menos que saiba exatamente o que está\n" @@ -144,8 +143,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Se desejar fazer apenas pequenos ajustes na configuração\n" -"proposta (como, por exemplo, alterar os tipos de sistemas de arquivos), " -"escolha \n" +"proposta (como, por exemplo, alterar os tipos de sistemas de arquivos), escolha \n" "%1 e faça essas alterações no diálogo avançado\n" "do particionador.\n" @@ -281,8 +279,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "O redimensionamento real não será executado até após a confirmação\n" -"de todas as suas configurações no último diálogo. Até lá, sua partição " -"Windows\n" +"de todas as suas configurações no último diálogo. Até lá, sua partição Windows\n" "permanecerá inalterada.\n" "\n" @@ -532,9 +529,7 @@ #. popup text #: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:96 msgid "Your system can only be configured with the custom partitioning option." -msgstr "" -"O sistema só pode ser configurado com a opção de particionamento " -"personalizado." +msgstr "O sistema só pode ser configurado com a opção de particionamento personalizado." #. Win NT / 2000 #. The Windows version is Windows NT or Windows 2000. Tell the user that this is currently @@ -671,11 +666,8 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." -msgstr "" -"Nenhum disco encontrado. Tente usar o CD de atualização, se estiver " -"disponível, para a instalação." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgstr "Nenhum disco encontrado. Tente usar o CD de atualização, se estiver disponível, para a instalação." #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on #. one hard disk - this selection is done here @@ -802,8 +794,7 @@ "ensure that ownerships of home directories are set properly." msgstr "" "A partição /home não será formatada. Após a instalação,\n" -"tenha certeza de que as permissões dos diretórios do usuário estão definidas " -"corretamente." +"tenha certeza de que as permissões dos diretórios do usuário estão definidas corretamente." #. label text #: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:218 @@ -917,8 +908,7 @@ "" msgstr "" "\n" -"Observação: se você selecionar uma região que não é exibida como livre" -",\n" +"Observação: se você selecionar uma região que não é exibida como livre,\n" "você pode perder dados existentes no disco. Isso também pode afetar\n" "outros sistemas operacionais.\n" "" @@ -971,8 +961,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Se você remover o Windows, tudo nesta partição será irreversivelmente\n" -"perdido na instalação. Ao diminuir a partição do Windows, é " -"extremamente\n" +"perdido na instalação. Ao diminuir a partição do Windows, é extremamente\n" "recomendado salvar os dados, pois estes serão reorganizados.\n" "Isso pode falhar em situações raras.\n" "\n" @@ -1105,8 +1094,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Aviso: não há uma partição do tipo bios_grub presente.\n" -"Para iniciar a partir de um disco GPT utilizando o grub2, é necesário uma " -"partição desse tipo.\n" +"Para iniciar a partir de um disco GPT utilizando o grub2, é necesário uma partição desse tipo.\n" "\n" "Deseja realmente utilizar esta configuração?\n" @@ -1160,8 +1148,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Aviso: alguns subvolumes do sistema de arquivos raiz estão ocultos\n" -"por pontos de montagem de outros sistemas de arquivos. Isto pode gerar " -"problemas.\n" +"por pontos de montagem de outros sistemas de arquivos. Isto pode gerar problemas.\n" "\n" "Deseja realmente utilizar esta configuração?\n" @@ -1178,8 +1165,7 @@ "Aviso: com sua configuração atual, sua instalação %1\n" "pode não ser diretamente inicializável, porque seus arquivos\n" "em \"boot\" estão em um dispositivo de RAID de software.\n" -"A configuração do carregador de inicialização às vezes falha com esta " -"configuração.\n" +"A configuração do carregador de inicialização às vezes falha com esta configuração.\n" "\n" "Realmente usar esta configuração?\n" @@ -1245,15 +1231,13 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point " -"\"swap\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Você não atribuiu uma partição de troca. Na maioria dos casos, nós " -"recomentados\n" +"Você não atribuiu uma partição de troca. Na maioria dos casos, nós recomentados\n" "fortemente a criação e atribuição de uma partição de troca.\n" "Partições de troca no sistema são listadas na janela principal com o\n" "tipo \"Linux Swap\". Uma partição de troca ativada tem o ponto de montagem\n" @@ -1371,18 +1355,14 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" -"A partição estendida selecionada contém partições que estão montadas " -"atualmente:\n" +"A partição estendida selecionada contém partições que estão montadas atualmente:\n" "%1\n" -"Nós recomentamos *fortemente* desmontar essas partições antes de remover a " -"partição estendida.\n" +"Nós recomentamos *fortemente* desmontar essas partições antes de remover a partição estendida.\n" "Escolha Cancelar, a menos que você saiba exatamente o que está fazendo.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. @@ -1561,15 +1541,13 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" "Rótulo de Volume:\n" "O nome digitado neste campo é usado como rótulo de volume. Isso normalmente\n" -"faz sentido apenas quando você ativa a opção de montagem pelo rótulo de " -"volume.\n" +"faz sentido apenas quando você ativa a opção de montagem pelo rótulo de volume.\n" "Um rótulo de volume não pode conter o caractere / ou espaços.\n" #. label text @@ -1591,7 +1569,6 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:516 -#| msgid "UUID" msgid "&UUID" msgstr "&UUID" @@ -1710,8 +1687,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "O sistema de arquivos na partição não pode ser diminuído pelo YaST2.\n" -"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 e reiser permitem a diminuição do sistema de " -"arquivos." +"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 e reiser permitem a diminuição do sistema de arquivos." #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1308 @@ -1722,8 +1698,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "O sistema de arquivos no volume lógico não pode ser diminuído pelo YaST2.\n" -"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 e reiser permitem a diminuição do sistema de " -"arquivos." +"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 e reiser permitem a diminuição do sistema de arquivos." #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1320 @@ -1747,10 +1722,8 @@ "Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, and reiser allow extending a file system." msgstr "" "\n" -"O sistema de arquivos na partição selecionada não pode ser estendido pelo " -"YaST2.\n" -"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs e reiser permitem extensão do sistema de " -"arquivos." +"O sistema de arquivos na partição selecionada não pode ser estendido pelo YaST2.\n" +"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs e reiser permitem extensão do sistema de arquivos." #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1353 @@ -1760,10 +1733,8 @@ "Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, and reiser allow extending a file system." msgstr "" "\n" -"O sistema de arquivos no volume lógico selecionado não pode ser estendido " -"pelo YaST2.\n" -"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs e reiser permitem extensão do sistema de " -"arquivos." +"O sistema de arquivos no volume lógico selecionado não pode ser estendido pelo YaST2.\n" +"Somente fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs e reiser permitem extensão do sistema de arquivos." #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1361 msgid "Continue resizing?" @@ -1772,15 +1743,11 @@ #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1378 msgid "You decreased a partition with a reiser file system on it." -msgstr "" -"Você diminuiu o tamanho de uma partição com um sistema de arquivos reiser " -"nela." +msgstr "Você diminuiu o tamanho de uma partição com um sistema de arquivos reiser nela." #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1380 msgid "You decreased a logical volume with a reiser file system on it." -msgstr "" -"Você diminuiu o tamanho de um volume lógico com um sistema de arquivos reiser " -"nele." +msgstr "Você diminuiu o tamanho de um volume lógico com um sistema de arquivos reiser nele." #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1387 msgid "" @@ -1791,8 +1758,7 @@ "Shrink the file system now?" msgstr "" "\n" -"É possível diminuir o tamanho de um sistema de arquivos reiser, mas isso não " -"foi \n" +"É possível diminuir o tamanho de um sistema de arquivos reiser, mas isso não foi \n" "completamente testado. É recomendado fazer um backup dos dados.\n" "\n" "Diminuir o tamanho do sistema de arquivos agora?" @@ -1802,14 +1768,12 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "O dispositivo selecionado contém partições que estão atualmente montadas:\n" "%1\n" -"Nós recomendados *fortemente* desmontar estas partições antes de remover a " -"tabela de partições.\n" +"Nós recomendados *fortemente* desmontar estas partições antes de remover a tabela de partições.\n" "Escolha Cancelar, a menos que você saiba exatamente o que está fazendo.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. @@ -1862,9 +1826,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1552 msgid "Enable automatic snapshots for a Btrfs filesystem with snapper." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar snapshots automáticos para um sistema de arquivos Btrfs com o " -"snapper." +msgstr "Habilitar snapshots automáticos para um sistema de arquivos Btrfs com o snapper." #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1566 @@ -1954,8 +1916,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Lembre-se de que esse sistema de arquivos só estará protegido quando não " -"estiver \n" +"Lembre-se de que esse sistema de arquivos só estará protegido quando não estiver \n" "montado. Uma vez montado, ele será tão seguro quanto qualquer outro\n" " sistema de arquivos do Linux.\n" "\n" @@ -1965,20 +1926,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or " -"/var/tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Este ponto de montagem corresponde a um sistema de arquivos temporário como " -"/tmp\n" -"ou /var/tmp. Se você deixar a senha de criptografia em branco, o sistema " -"criará uma senha\n" -"aleatória durante a inicialização do sistema para você. Isso significa que " -"você perderá todos\n" +"Este ponto de montagem corresponde a um sistema de arquivos temporário como /tmp\n" +"ou /var/tmp. Se você deixar a senha de criptografia em branco, o sistema criará uma senha\n" +"aleatória durante a inicialização do sistema para você. Isso significa que você perderá todos\n" "os dados nesses sistemas de arquivos quando o sistema for desligado.\n" " \n" @@ -1988,18 +1945,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Se você esquecer sua senha, você vai perder acesso aos dados no seu sistema " -"de arquivos.\n" -"Escolha sua senha com cuidado. É recomendado usar uma combinação de letras e " -"números.\n" +"Se você esquecer sua senha, você vai perder acesso aos dados no seu sistema de arquivos.\n" +"Escolha sua senha com cuidado. É recomendado usar uma combinação de letras e números.\n" "Para garantir que sua senha foi informada corretamente,\n" "informe-a duas vezes.\n" "\n" @@ -2010,8 +1964,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "\n" @@ -2065,17 +2018,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select Skip. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Se o sistema de arquivos criptografados não contiver nenhum arquivo de " -"sistema e, portanto, não for\n" -"necessário para a atualização, você poderá selecionar Ignorar. Neste " -"caso, o\n" +"Se o sistema de arquivos criptografados não contiver nenhum arquivo de sistema e, portanto, não for\n" +"necessário para a atualização, você poderá selecionar Ignorar. Neste caso, o\n" "sistema de arquivos não é acessado durante a atualização.\n" "\n" @@ -2133,8 +2083,7 @@ "\n" "Really do this?\n" msgstr "" -"Você optou por não montar automaticamente na inicialização um sistema de " -"arquivos\n" +"Você optou por não montar automaticamente na inicialização um sistema de arquivos\n" "que possa conter arquivos necessários ao funcionamento adequado do sistema.\n" "\n" "Isso pode causar problemas.\n" @@ -2193,9 +2142,7 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:240 msgid "This mount point is already in use. Select a different one." -msgstr "" -"Este ponto de montagem já está em uso. Selecione um ponto de montagem " -"diferente." +msgstr "Este ponto de montagem já está em uso. Selecione um ponto de montagem diferente." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:250 @@ -2203,14 +2150,12 @@ "FAT filesystem used for system mount point (/, /usr, /opt, /var, /home).\n" "This is not possible." msgstr "" -"Sistema de arquivos FAT usado para ponto de montagem do sistema (/, /usr, " -"/opt, /var, /home).\n" +"Sistema de arquivos FAT usado para ponto de montagem do sistema (/, /usr, /opt, /var, /home).\n" "Isso não é possível." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "Caractere inválido no ponto de montagem. Não use \"`'!\"%#\"." #. error popup text @@ -2312,19 +2257,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1026 msgid "It is not possible to shrink the file system while it is mounted." -msgstr "" -"Não é possível diminuir o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver montado." +msgstr "Não é possível diminuir o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver montado." #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1039 msgid "It is not possible to extend the file system while it is mounted." -msgstr "" -"Não é possível estender o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver montado." +msgstr "Não é possível estender o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver montado." #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1050 msgid "It is not possible to resize the file system while it is mounted." -msgstr "" -"Não é possível redimensionar o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver " -"montado." +msgstr "Não é possível redimensionar o sistema de arquivos enquanto ele estiver montado." #. push button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:80 @@ -2787,8 +2728,7 @@ "volume will delete all data on it.\n" msgstr "" "Se você deseja criptografar todos os dados no\n" -"volume, selecione Criptografar dispositivo. A alteração da " -"criptografia em\n" +"volume, selecione Criptografar dispositivo. A alteração da criptografia em\n" "um volume existente excluirá todos os dados nele contidos.\n" #. helptext @@ -2873,8 +2813,7 @@ "" msgstr "" "\n" -"Lembre-se de que esse sistema de arquivos só estará protegido quando não " -"estiver \n" +"Lembre-se de que esse sistema de arquivos só estará protegido quando não estiver \n" "montado. Uma vez montado, ele será tão seguro quanto qualquer outro\n" " sistema de arquivos do Linux.\n" "" @@ -2889,10 +2828,8 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"O sistema de arquivos usado para este volume é 'swap'. Você deve deixar a " -"senha de\n" -"criptografia vazia, mas o dispositivo de troca não pode ser usado para " -"hibernação\n" +"O sistema de arquivos usado para este volume é 'swap'. Você deve deixar a senha de\n" +"criptografia vazia, mas o dispositivo de troca não pode ser usado para hibernação\n" "(suspender para o disco).\n" "\n" @@ -2907,8 +2844,7 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:886 msgid "Resize not supported by underlying device." -msgstr "" -"Redimensionamento não é uma operação suportada pelo dispositivo subjacente." +msgstr "Redimensionamento não é uma operação suportada pelo dispositivo subjacente." #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:891 @@ -2918,8 +2854,7 @@ "on this partition does not support resizing.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Você não pode redimensionar a partição selecionada porque o sistema de " -"arquivos\n" +"Você não pode redimensionar a partição selecionada porque o sistema de arquivos\n" "nessa partição não suporta redimensionamento.\n" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:915 @@ -3019,10 +2954,8 @@ "resize task a lot." msgstr "" "Você está estendendo um sistema de arquivos montando em %1 gigabytes. \n" -"Isto pode ser bastante devagar e pode levar horas. Você pode possivelmente " -"querer\n" -"considerar desmontar o sistema de arquivos, o que irá aumentar e muito a " -"velocidade\n" +"Isto pode ser bastante devagar e pode levar horas. Você pode possivelmente querer\n" +"considerar desmontar o sistema de arquivos, o que irá aumentar e muito a velocidade\n" "da tarefa de redimensionar." #. label for log view @@ -3067,8 +3000,7 @@ "BIOS RAIDs and LVM logical volumes are not shown here.\n" msgstr "" "Esta visão exibe todos os dispositivos do mapeador de dispositivos,\n" -"exceto aqueles já incusos em alguma outra visão. Logo, discos de caminhos " -"múltiplos,\n" +"exceto aqueles já incusos em alguma outra visão. Logo, discos de caminhos múltiplos,\n" "RAIDs de BIOS e volumes lógicos LVM não são exibidos aqui.\n" #. helptext @@ -3379,8 +3311,7 @@ "resized. To resize %1, make sure it is not used." msgstr "" "A partição %1 está em uso e não pode ser\n" -"redimensionada. Para redimensionar %1, tenha certeza de que ela não está " -"sendo usada." +"redimensionada. Para redimensionar %1, tenha certeza de que ela não está sendo usada." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:454 @@ -3554,8 +3485,7 @@ "iSCSI disks, BIOS RAIDs and multipath disks and their partitions.\n" msgstr "" "Esta visão exibe todos os discos rígidos, incluindo \n" -"discos iSCSI, RAIDs de BIOS e discos de múltiplos caminhos e suas partições.<" -"/p>\n" +"discos iSCSI, RAIDs de BIOS e discos de múltiplos caminhos e suas partições.\n" #. push button text (do not translate 'SMART', it is the name of the tool) #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:320 @@ -3621,8 +3551,7 @@ "partitions are shown here.\n" msgstr "" "Esta visão exibe todas as partições do disco rígido\n" -"selecionado. Se o disco rígido for usado por RAID de BIOS ou caminhos " -"múltiplos,\n" +"selecionado. Se o disco rígido for usado por RAID de BIOS ou caminhos múltiplos,\n" "nenhuma partição será exibida aqui.\n" #. helptext @@ -3633,8 +3562,7 @@ "software RAIDs and multipath disks.\n" msgstr "" "Esta visualização exibe todos os dispositivos usados pelo\n" -"disco rígido selecionado. A visualização está disponível somente para BIOS " -"com RAID, RAIDS \n" +"disco rígido selecionado. A visualização está disponível somente para BIOS com RAID, RAIDS \n" "de software particionados e discos de caminhos múltiplos.\n" #. tab heading @@ -3669,8 +3597,7 @@ "the table.\n" msgstr "" "O YaST2 pesquisou seus discos rígidos e encontrou\n" -"um ou mais sistemas Linux existentes sem pontos de montagem. Os pontos de " -"montagem antigos são exibidos na tabela.\n" +"um ou mais sistemas Linux existentes sem pontos de montagem. Os pontos de montagem antigos são exibidos na tabela.\n" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:305 @@ -3836,15 +3763,12 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Caminho do arquivo de loop: Isto deve ser um caminho absoluto " -"para o arquivo\n" -"contendo os dados para o dispositivo de loop criptografado a ser " -"configurado.\n" +"Caminho do arquivo de loop: Isto deve ser um caminho absoluto para o arquivo\n" +"contendo os dados para o dispositivo de loop criptografado a ser configurado.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:45 @@ -3868,8 +3792,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Tamanho: Este é o tamanho do arquivo de loop.\n" -"O sistema de arquivos a ser criado no dispositivo de loop criptografado terá " -"\n" +"O sistema de arquivos a ser criado no dispositivo de loop criptografado terá \n" "este tamanho.\n" #. helptext @@ -3973,8 +3896,7 @@ "edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." msgstr "" "O arquivo crypt %1 está sendo usado e não\n" -"pode ser editado. Para editar %1, tenha certeza de que ele não está sendo " -"usado." +"pode ser editado. Para editar %1, tenha certeza de que ele não está sendo usado." #. heading #. tree node label @@ -4058,16 +3980,13 @@ "and deleted:" msgstr "" "O grupo de volume \"%1\" contém, no mínimo, um volume lógico.\n" -"Se você prosseguir, os seguintes volumes serão desmontados (se estiverem " -"montados)\n" +"Se você prosseguir, os seguintes volumes serão desmontados (se estiverem montados)\n" "e removidos:" #. pop-up dialog message part 2: %1 is vol.group name #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:118 msgid "Really delete volume group \"%1\" and all related logical volumes?" -msgstr "" -"Realmente remover o grupo de volume \"%1\" e todos os volumes lógicos " -"relacionados?" +msgstr "Realmente remover o grupo de volume \"%1\" e todos os volumes lógicos relacionados?" #. error popup, %1, %2 and %3 are replaced by sizes #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:132 @@ -4075,8 +3994,7 @@ "The data entered is invalid. Insert a physical extent size larger than %1\n" "in powers of 2, for example, \"%2\" or \"%3\"" msgstr "" -"Os dados informados são inválidos. Insira uma tamanho físico de extensão " -"maior do que %1\n" +"Os dados informados são inválidos. Insira uma tamanho físico de extensão maior do que %1\n" "em potências de 2, por exemplo, \"%2\" ou \"%3\"" #. error popup text @@ -4115,8 +4033,7 @@ #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:245 msgid "Select the physical volumes the volume group should contain." -msgstr "" -"Selecionar os volumes físicos que o grupo de volume deve conter." +msgstr "Selecionar os volumes físicos que o grupo de volume deve conter." #. label for input field #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:283 @@ -4149,8 +4066,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group." msgstr "" "Digite o tamanho bem como o número e tamanho \n" @@ -4169,11 +4085,9 @@ msgstr "" "Os conhecidos Thin volumes pode ter um tamanho\n" "de volume arbitrário. O espaço necessário é obtido sob demanda a partir\n" -"do Thin pool associado. Logo, é possível criar um thin volume com " -"tamanho\n" +"do Thin pool associado. Logo, é possível criar um thin volume com tamanho\n" "maior que o thin pool. Obviamente, quando há dados sendo escritos um um\n" -"thin volume, o thin pool associado deve ser capaz de garantir o espaço " -"necessário.\n" +"thin volume, o thin pool associado deve ser capaz de garantir o espaço necessário.\n" "Os thin volumes não podem possuir um stripe count." #. heading for frame @@ -4207,36 +4121,30 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Normal Volume.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice" msgstr "" "Você pode declarar o volume lógico como um Volume normal.\n" -"Este é o padrão e é o mesmo que volumes LVM, como era antes da existência do " -"recurso de Thin provisioning.\n" +"Este é o padrão e é o mesmo que volumes LVM, como era antes da existência do recurso de Thin provisioning.\n" "Caso fique em dúvida, esta é, provavelmente, a escolha correta." #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Pool.\n" -"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool." +"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool." msgstr "" "Você pode declarar um volume lógico como um Thin pool.\n" -"Isto significa que Thin volumes alocam o espaço necessário sob demanda " -"a partir desse pool." +"Isto significa que Thin volumes alocam o espaço necessário sob demanda a partir desse pool." #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Volume.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool" -"." +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool." msgstr "" "Você pode declarar o volume lógico como um Thin volume.\n" -"Isto significa que o volume aloca o espaço necessário sob demanda a partir de " -"um Thin pool." +"Isto significa que o volume aloca o espaço necessário sob demanda a partir de um Thin pool." #. heading for frame #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:827 @@ -4290,15 +4198,12 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" -"Não existem dispositivos não utilizados apropriados para ciar um grupo de " -"volume.\n" +"Não existem dispositivos não utilizados apropriados para ciar um grupo de volume.\n" "\n" -"Para usar LVM, pelo menos uma partição não usada do tipo 0x8e(ou 0x83) ou um " -"dispositivo\n" +"Para usar LVM, pelo menos uma partição não usada do tipo 0x8e(ou 0x83) ou um dispositivo\n" "RAID não usado é necessário. Modifique sua tabela de partições de acordo." #. error popup @@ -4530,12 +4435,8 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." -msgstr "" -"A configuração do NFS não está disponível. Verifique a instalação do pacote " -"yast2-nfs-client." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." +msgstr "A configuração do NFS não está disponível. Verifique a instalação do pacote yast2-nfs-client." #. heading #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:127 @@ -4566,44 +4467,34 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "RAID 0: This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.\n" +"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.\n" msgstr "" "RAID 0: Este nível aumenta o desempenho do disco.\n" -"NÃO há redundância neste modo. Se uma das unidades falhar, não será " -"possível recuperar os dados.\n" +"NÃO há redundância neste modo. Se uma das unidades falhar, não será possível recuperar os dados.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "RAID 1: This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on " -"all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.\n" msgstr "" "RAID 1: Este modo tem a melhor redundância. Ele pode ser\n" "usado com dois ou mais discos. Uma cópia exata de todos os dados de todos os\n" -"discos é mantida. Enquanto pelo menos um disco ainda estiver funcionando, " -"nenhum dado será perdido.\n" -"As partições usadas neste caso devem ter aproximadamente o mesmo tamanho." -"\n" +"discos é mantida. Enquanto pelo menos um disco ainda estiver funcionando, nenhum dado será perdido.\n" +"As partições usadas neste caso devem ter aproximadamente o mesmo tamanho.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "RAID 5: This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost\n" msgstr "" "RAID 5: Este modo combina gerenciamento de muitos\n" -"discos e ainda mantém alguma redundância. Pode ser usado com três discos ou " -"mais.\n" -"Se um disco falha, todo dado ainda está intacto. Se dois discos falham " -"simultaneamente, todos os dados são perdidos\n" +"discos e ainda mantém alguma redundância. Pode ser usado com três discos ou mais.\n" +"Se um disco falha, todo dado ainda está intacto. Se dois discos falham simultaneamente, todos os dados são perdidos\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:116 @@ -4620,14 +4511,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5)." -"\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).\n" msgstr "" "Adicionar partições para seu RAID. De acordo com\n" -"o tipo de RAID, o tamanho útil do disco é a soma destas partições (RAID0), o " -"tamanho\n" +"o tipo de RAID, o tamanho útil do disco é a soma destas partições (RAID0), o tamanho\n" "da menor partição (RAID 1) ou (N-1)*menor partição (RAID 5).\n" #. helptext @@ -4691,14 +4579,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "Chunk Size: It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.\n" msgstr "" "Tamanho do Bloco: É a menor massa de dados \"atômica\" \n" -"que pode ser escrita nos dispositivos. Um tamanho razoável para RAID 5 é 128 " -"kB. Para RAID 0,\n" +"que pode ser escrita nos dispositivos. Um tamanho razoável para RAID 5 é 128 kB. Para RAID 0,\n" "32 kB é um bom começo. Para RAID 1, o tamanho não afeta muito o array.\n" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 @@ -4709,13 +4594,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" -"Algoritmo de paridade: O algoritmo de paridade a ser utilizado " -"no RAID5/6.\n" -"Simétrico à Esquerda é o que oferece desempenho máximo nos discos típicos com " -"superfícies rotativas.\n" +"Algoritmo de paridade: O algoritmo de paridade a ser utilizado no RAID5/6.\n" +"Simétrico à Esquerda é o que oferece desempenho máximo nos discos típicos com superfícies rotativas.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:361 @@ -4794,8 +4676,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "O raid %1 não pode ser alterado porque está inativo.\n" -"Isto normalmente significa que o subconjunto de dispositivos raid é muito " -"pequeno\n" +"Isto normalmente significa que o subconjunto de dispositivos raid é muito pequeno\n" "para que o raid seja utilizável.\n" #. error popup @@ -4996,20 +4877,15 @@ msgid "" "Default Mount by gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. Device Name uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path" -"\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID and\n" "Volume Label use the file systems UUID and label.\n" msgstr "" "Montagem padrão fornece o método de montagem\n" -"para sistemas de arquivo recém-criados. Nome do dispositivo usa o nome " -"de dispositivo\n" -"do kernel, que não é persistente. Identificador do dispositivo e " -"Caminho do dispositivo\n" -"usam nomes gerados pelo udev a partir das informações de hardware. Estes " -"deveriam ser persistentes,\n" +"para sistemas de arquivo recém-criados. Nome do dispositivo usa o nome de dispositivo\n" +"do kernel, que não é persistente. Identificador do dispositivo e Caminho do dispositivo\n" +"usam nomes gerados pelo udev a partir das informações de hardware. Estes deveriam ser persistentes,\n" "mas infelizmente isso nem sempre é verdade. Enfim, UUID e\n" "Rótulo do volume usam o UUID e o rótulo do sistema de arquivo.\n" @@ -5026,18 +4902,13 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "Alignment of Newly Created Partitions\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.\n" msgstr "" "Alinhamento das partições recém-criadas\n" -"determina como as partições recém-criadas são alinhadas. Cilindro é o " -"alinhamento tradicional nas fronteiras do cilindro do disco. ótimo " -"alinha as\n" -"partições para obter o melhor desempenho de acordo com as dicas fornecidas " -"pelo kernel linux \n" +"determina como as partições recém-criadas são alinhadas. Cilindro é o alinhamento tradicional nas fronteiras do cilindro do disco. ótimo alinha as\n" +"partições para obter o melhor desempenho de acordo com as dicas fornecidas pelo kernel linux \n" "ou tenta ser compatível com o Windows Vista e o Windows 7.\n" #. helptext @@ -5128,10 +4999,8 @@ "Rescanning unused devices cancels\n" "all current changes. Really rescan unused devices?" msgstr "" -"A realização de uma nova leitura dos dispositivos que não estão em uso " -"cancela \n" -"todas as modificações feitas. Deseja ler novamente os dispositivos que não " -"estão em uso?" +"A realização de uma nova leitura dos dispositivos que não estão em uso cancela \n" +"todas as modificações feitas. Deseja ler novamente os dispositivos que não estão em uso?" #. encoding: utf-8 #. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. @@ -5309,34 +5178,26 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). " msgstr "" "Este diálogo é para definir as classes para os dispositivos RAID\n" -"contidos no RAID. As classes disponíveis são A, B, C, D e E mas para muitos " -"casos\n" +"contidos no RAID. As classes disponíveis são A, B, C, D e E mas para muitos casos\n" "menos classes são necessárias (por ex.: apenas A e B). " #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the " -"\n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class." msgstr "" "Você pode colocar um dispositivo em uma classe clicando com o botão\n" -"direito no dispositivo e escolhendo a classe apropriada no menu de contexto. " -"Pressionando a \n" -"tecla Ctrl ou Shift você pode selecionar múltiplos dispositivos e colocá-los " -"em uma classe em\n" -"um passo. Também pode-se usar os botões rotulados \"%1\" a \"%2\" para " -"colocar os dispositivos \n" +"direito no dispositivo e escolhendo a classe apropriada no menu de contexto. Pressionando a \n" +"tecla Ctrl ou Shift você pode selecionar múltiplos dispositivos e colocá-los em uma classe em\n" +"um passo. Também pode-se usar os botões rotulados \"%1\" a \"%2\" para colocar os dispositivos \n" "atualmente selecionados nesta classe." #. dialog help text @@ -5365,10 +5226,8 @@ "second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" "Alternado usa o primeiro dispositivo da classe A, depois o primeiro\n" -"dispositivo da classe B, depois todas as seguintes classes com dispositivos " -"atribuídos.\n" -"Então vem o segundo dispositivo da classe A, o segundo dispositivo da classe " -"B e assim por diante." +"dispositivo da classe B, depois todas as seguintes classes com dispositivos atribuídos.\n" +"Então vem o segundo dispositivo da classe A, o segundo dispositivo da classe B e assim por diante." #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:369 @@ -5377,39 +5236,29 @@ "When you leave the pop-up the current order of the devices is used as the \n" "order in the RAID to be created." msgstr "" -"Todos os dispositivos sem uma classe estão ordenados no final da lista de " -"dispositivos.\n" -"Quando você sair da janela, a ordem atual dos dispositivos é usada como ordem " -"dos\n" +"Todos os dispositivos sem uma classe estão ordenados no final da lista de dispositivos.\n" +"Quando você sair da janela, a ordem atual dos dispositivos é usada como ordem dos\n" "no RAID a ser criado." #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"%1\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1" -") and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression." msgstr "" "Pressionando o botão \"%1\" você pode selecionar um arquivo que\n" -"contém linhas com uma expressão regular e um nome de classe (por ex.:. " -"\"sda.* A\"). Todos os dispositivos que correspondem\n" -"à expressão regular serão colocados na classe dessa linha. A expressão " -"regular é verificada \n" +"contém linhas com uma expressão regular e um nome de classe (por ex.:. \"sda.* A\"). Todos os dispositivos que correspondem\n" +"à expressão regular serão colocados na classe dessa linha. A expressão regular é verificada \n" "contra o nome do kernel (por ex.:. /dev/sda1), \n" -"o nome de caminho udev (por ex.: /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0" -":0-part1) e contra o\n" +"o nome de caminho udev (por ex.: /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) e contra o\n" "ID udev (por ex.: /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"A primeira correspondência determina a classe se um nome de dispositivo " -"corresponda a mais de uma\n" +"A primeira correspondência determina a classe se um nome de dispositivo corresponda a mais de uma\n" "expressão regular." #. headline text @@ -5447,15 +5296,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "Tmpfs Size:\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory." msgstr "" "Tamanho do Tmpfs:\n" -"O tamanho pode ser informado como um número seguido por K,M,G para Quilo-, " -"Mega- ou Gigabyte ou\n" -"como um número seguido de um sinal de porcentagem significando a porcentagem " -"de memória." +"O tamanho pode ser informado como um número seguido por K,M,G para Quilo-, Mega- ou Gigabyte ou\n" +"como um número seguido de um sinal de porcentagem significando a porcentagem de memória." #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:311 @@ -5475,8 +5321,7 @@ "Enter the swap priority. Higher numbers mean higher priority.\n" msgstr "" "Prioridade de Troca:\n" -"Informe a prioridade de troca. Números altos significam maior prioridade." -"\n" +"Informe a prioridade de troca. Números altos significam maior prioridade.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:481 @@ -5487,13 +5332,11 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 msgid "" "Mount Read-Only:\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write." msgstr "" "Montar somente leitura:\n" -"Não é possível escrever no sistema de arquivos. O padrão é falso. Durante a " -"instalação\n" +"Não é possível escrever no sistema de arquivos. O padrão é falso. Durante a instalação\n" "o sistema de arquivos sempre estará montado como somente leitura." #. button text @@ -5508,12 +5351,10 @@ "Access times are not updated when a file is read. Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "Sem tempo de acesso:\n" -"Os tempos de acesso não são atualizados quando arquivo for lido. O padrão é " -"falso.\n" +"Os tempos de acesso não são atualizados quando arquivo for lido. O padrão é falso.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:511 -#| msgid "Mountable by &User" msgid "Mountable by User" msgstr "Pode ser montado pelo usuário" @@ -5524,8 +5365,7 @@ "The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "Pode ser montado pelo usuário:\n" -"O sistema de arquivos pode ser montado por um usuário comum. O padrão é " -"falso.\n" +"O sistema de arquivos pode ser montado por um usuário comum. O padrão é falso.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:528 @@ -5538,17 +5378,14 @@ "Do Not Mount at System Start-up:\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point><" -"/tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "Não montar na inicialização do sistema:\n" "O sistema de arquivos não é montado automaticamente na inicialização.\n" "Uma entrada na /etc/fstab é criada e o sistema de arquivos é montado com\n" "as opções apropriadas quando o comando <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" -"for executado (<mount point> é o diretório onde o sistema de arquivos " -"for montado.\n" +"for executado (<mount point> é o diretório onde o sistema de arquivos for montado.\n" "O padrão é falso.\n" #. button text @@ -5580,22 +5417,16 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact. \n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact. \n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.<" -"/p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact. \n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.\n" msgstr "" "Modo de Dados Journalling:\n" "Especifica o modo journalling para dados de arquivo.\n" -" <tt>journal</tt> -- Todos os dados são submetidos ao diário (journal) antes " -"de serem\n" +" <tt>journal</tt> -- Todos os dados são submetidos ao diário (journal) antes de serem\n" " salvos no sistema de arquivos principal. Impacto máximo no desempenho.\n" -" <tt>ordered</tt> -- Todos os dados são forçados diretamente no sistema de " -"arquivos principal\n" -" antes que seus metadados sejam submetidos ao diário (journal). Impacto médio " -"no desempenho.\n" -" <tt>writeback</tt> -- A ordenação dos dados não é preservada. Sem impacto no " -"desempenho.\n" +" <tt>ordered</tt> -- Todos os dados são forçados diretamente no sistema de arquivos principal\n" +" antes que seus metadados sejam submetidos ao diário (journal). Impacto médio no desempenho.\n" +" <tt>writeback</tt> -- A ordenação dos dados não é preservada. Sem impacto no desempenho.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:606 @@ -5631,24 +5462,18 @@ msgstr "&Valor da opção arbitrária" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." -msgstr "" -"Caractere inválido no valor da opção. Não use espaços ou tabulações. Tente " -"novamente." +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." +msgstr "Caractere inválido no valor da opção. Não use espaços ou tabulações. Tente novamente." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "Arbitrary Option Value:\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of " -"/etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.\n" msgstr "" "Valor da Opção Arbitrária:\n" -"Neste campo, digite uma opção de montagem válida permitida no quarto campo de " -"/etc/fstab.\n" +"Neste campo, digite uma opção de montagem válida permitida no quarto campo de /etc/fstab.\n" "Várias opções são separadas por vírgulas.\n" #. label text @@ -5674,8 +5499,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "Codepage for Short FAT Names:\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.\n" msgstr "" "Codepage para nomes FAT pequenos:\n" "Este código de página é usado para converter para nomes pequenos\n" @@ -5690,12 +5514,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "Number of FATs:\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2." +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2." msgstr "" "Número de FATs:\n" -"Especifique o número de tabelas de alocação de arquivo no sistema de " -"arquivos. O padrão é 2." +"Especifique o número de tabelas de alocação de arquivo no sistema de arquivos. O padrão é 2." #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:735 @@ -5706,14 +5528,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "FAT Size:\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for " -"the file system size.\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.\n" msgstr "" "Tamanho do FAT:\n" -"Especifica o tipo de tabela de alocação de arquivo usada (12, 16, ou 32-bit). " -"Se 'auto' for especificado, o YaST selecionará automaticamente o valor mais " -"adequado para o tamanho do sistema de arquivos.\n" +"Especifica o tipo de tabela de alocação de arquivo usada (12, 16, ou 32-bit). Se 'auto' for especificado, o YaST selecionará automaticamente o valor mais adequado para o tamanho do sistema de arquivos.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:755 @@ -5723,8 +5541,7 @@ #. popup text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:763 msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." -msgstr "" -"O tamanho mínimo para \"Entradas do diretório raiz\" é 112. Tente novamente." +msgstr "O tamanho mínimo para \"Entradas do diretório raiz\" é 112. Tente novamente." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:767 @@ -5744,12 +5561,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "Hash Function:\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in " -"directories.\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.\n" msgstr "" "Função hash:\n" -"Isto especifica o nome da função hash que será usada para ordenar os nomes de " -"arquivos em diretórios.\n" +"Isto especifica o nome da função hash que será usada para ordenar os nomes de arquivos em diretórios.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:796 @@ -5760,15 +5575,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "FS Revision:\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.\n" msgstr "" "Revisão FS:\n" -"Esta opção define o formato da revisão do reiserfs a ser usada. '3.5' é para " -"compatibilidade com kernels das séries 2.2.x. '3.6' é mais recente, mas pode " -"ser usado somente com versões do kernel superiores ou iguais a 2.4.\n" +"Esta opção define o formato da revisão do reiserfs a ser usada. '3.5' é para compatibilidade com kernels das séries 2.2.x. '3.6' é mais recente, mas pode ser usado somente com versões do kernel superiores ou iguais a 2.4.\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5780,14 +5590,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.\n" msgstr "" "Tamanho de bloco:\n" -"Especifique o tamanho dos blocos em bytes. Valores válidos são 512, 1024, " -"2048 e 4096 bytes por bloco. Se 'auto' for selecionado, o tamanho de bloco " -"padrão 4096 será usado.\n" +"Especifique o tamanho dos blocos em bytes. Valores válidos são 512, 1024, 2048 e 4096 bytes por bloco. Se 'auto' for selecionado, o tamanho de bloco padrão 4096 será usado.\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5814,12 +5620,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "Percentage of Inode Space:\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" msgstr "" "Porcentagem de espaço de inode:\n" -"A opção \"Porcentagem de espaço de inode\" especifica a maior porcentagem de " -"espaço no sistema de arquivos que pode ser alocada para inodes.\n" +"A opção \"Porcentagem de espaço de inode\" especifica a maior porcentagem de espaço no sistema de arquivos que pode ser alocada para inodes.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:884 @@ -5830,14 +5634,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 msgid "" "Inode Aligned:\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.\n" msgstr "" "Inode alinhado:\n" -"A opção \"Inode alinhado\" é usada para especificar se a alocação de inode é " -"ou \n" +"A opção \"Inode alinhado\" é usada para especificar se a alocação de inode é ou \n" "não alinhada. Por padrão os inodes são alinhados, o que é\n" "normalmente mais eficiente que acesso a inodes não alinhados.\n" @@ -5860,12 +5662,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "Log Size\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate " -"size.\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.\n" msgstr "" "Tamanho do log\n" -"Configure o tamanho de log (em megabytes). Se 'auto', o padrão é 40% do " -"tamanho agregado.\n" +"Configure o tamanho de log (em megabytes). Se 'auto', o padrão é 40% do tamanho agregado.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:942 @@ -5903,14 +5703,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" msgstr "" "Tamanho do bloco:\n" -"Especifique o tamanho dos blocos em bytes. Valores válidos são 1024, 2048 e " -"4096 bytes por bloco. Se 'auto' for selecionado, o tamanho de bloco será " -"determinado pelo tamanho e uso esperado do sistema de arquivos.\n" +"Especifique o tamanho dos blocos em bytes. Valores válidos são 1024, 2048 e 4096 bytes por bloco. Se 'auto' for selecionado, o tamanho de bloco será determinado pelo tamanho e uso esperado do sistema de arquivos.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:996 @@ -5930,14 +5726,9 @@ "value for this parameter.\n" msgstr "" "Bytes por inode:\n" -"Especifique a razão de bytes por inode. O YaST2 cria um inode para cada " -"<bytes-por-inode> bytes de espaço no disco. Quanto maior a razão de " -"bytes-por-inode, menos inodes serão criados.\n" -"Geralmente, este valor não deve ser menor que o tamanho de bloco do sistema " -"de arquivos, já que muitos inodes serão criados neste caso. Não é possível " -"expandir o \n" -"número de inodes de um sistema de arquivos depois da criação, assim, " -"certifique-se de usar um valor adequado.\n" +"Especifique a razão de bytes por inode. O YaST2 cria um inode para cada <bytes-por-inode> bytes de espaço no disco. Quanto maior a razão de bytes-por-inode, menos inodes serão criados.\n" +"Geralmente, este valor não deve ser menor que o tamanho de bloco do sistema de arquivos, já que muitos inodes serão criados neste caso. Não é possível expandir o \n" +"número de inodes de um sistema de arquivos depois da criação, assim, certifique-se de usar um valor adequado.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1018 @@ -5956,16 +5747,8 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 -msgid "" -"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1." -msgstr "" -"Porcentagem de blocos reservados para o root: especifique a " -"porcentagem de blocos reservados para o superusuário. O valor padrão é " -"calculado de tal forma que, normalmente, 1 Giga é reservado. O limite " -"superior para o reservado padrão é 5.0 e o limite inferior padrão é 0.1." +msgid "Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1." +msgstr "Porcentagem de blocos reservados para o root: especifique a porcentagem de blocos reservados para o superusuário. O valor padrão é calculado de tal forma que, normalmente, 1 Giga é reservado. O limite superior para o reservado padrão é 5.0 e o limite inferior padrão é 0.1." #. checkbox text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1042 @@ -5979,8 +5762,7 @@ "Disable regular file system check at booting.\n" msgstr "" "Desabilitar verificações regulares:\n" -"Desabilite verificações regulares do sistema de arquivos na inicialização." -"\n" +"Desabilite verificações regulares do sistema de arquivos na inicialização.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1077 @@ -5994,8 +5776,7 @@ "Enables use of hashed b-trees to speed up lookups in large directories.\n" msgstr "" "Índice de Diretório:\n" -"Permite o uso de árvores B com hash para acelerar as pesquisas em diretórios " -"grandes.\n" +"Permite o uso de árvores B com hash para acelerar as pesquisas em diretórios grandes.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1096 @@ -6006,8 +5787,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "No Journal:\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "Sem journal:\n" @@ -6237,10 +6017,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5177 -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." -msgstr "" -"Não é possível criar partições, pois outras partições do disco estão em uso." +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgstr "Não é possível criar partições, pois outras partições do disco estão em uso." #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5203 msgid "" @@ -6555,14 +6333,12 @@ #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:323 msgid "FS ID shows the file system id." -msgstr "" -"ID do sistema de arquivos exibe o identificador do sistema de arquivos." +msgstr "ID do sistema de arquivos exibe o identificador do sistema de arquivos." #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:326 msgid "FS Type shows the file system type." -msgstr "" -"Tipo do Sistema de Arquivos exibe o tipo do sistema de arquivos." +msgstr "Tipo do Sistema de Arquivos exibe o tipo do sistema de arquivos." #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:331 @@ -6595,10 +6371,8 @@ "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" "Montar por indica o modo de montagem do sistema de arquivos:\n" -"(Kernel) pelo nome do kernel, (Rótulo) pelo rótulo do sistema de arquivos, " -"(UUID) pelo\n" -"UUID do sistema de arquivos, (ID) pelo ID do dispositivo e (Caminho) pelo " -"caminho do dispositivo.\n" +"(Kernel) pelo nome do kernel, (Rótulo) pelo rótulo do sistema de arquivos, (UUID) pelo\n" +"UUID do sistema de arquivos, (ID) pelo ID do dispositivo e (Caminho) pelo caminho do dispositivo.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:356 @@ -6609,10 +6383,8 @@ "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" "Um sinal de interrogação (?) indica que o\n" -"sistema de arquivos não está listado no <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. Ou ele está " -"montado\n" -"manualmente ou por alguma sistema de montagem automática. Ao alterar as " -"configurações\n" +"sistema de arquivos não está listado no <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. Ou ele está montado\n" +"manualmente ou por alguma sistema de montagem automática. Ao alterar as configurações\n" "deste volume, o YaST não irá atualizar o <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry @@ -6628,8 +6400,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" "Um asterisco (*) após o ponto de montagem \n" @@ -6994,12 +6765,8 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." -msgstr "" -"Não foi possível redimensionar devido a inconsistências no sistema de " -"arquivos. Tente verificar o sistema de arquivos no Windows." +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." +msgstr "Não foi possível redimensionar devido a inconsistências no sistema de arquivos. Tente verificar o sistema de arquivos no Windows." #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6164 @@ -7035,9 +6802,7 @@ msgid "" "To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button. The\n" "LVM-based proposal can be encrypted.\n" -msgstr "" -"Para criar uma proposta baseada em LVM, escolha o botão correspondente.A " -"proposta baseada em LVM pode ser criptografada.\n" +msgstr "Para criar uma proposta baseada em LVM, escolha o botão correspondente.A proposta baseada em LVM pode ser criptografada.\n" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6294 @@ -7058,8 +6823,7 @@ "The proposal can create a separate home partition. The filesystem for\n" "the home partition can be selected with the corresponding combo box." msgstr "" -"A proposta pode criar uma partição home separada. O sistema de arquivos " -"para\n" +"A proposta pode criar uma partição home separada. O sistema de arquivos para\n" "a partição home pode ser selecionado na caixa de seleção correspondente." #. TRANSLATORS: help text -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90699 - trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po
by ramax＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: ramax Date: 2014-11-03 17:12:46 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90699 Modified: trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/software-opensuse-org.zh_TW.po Log: software.o.o zh_TW minor update Modified: trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/software-opensuse-org.zh_TW.po =================================================================== --- trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/software-opensuse-org.zh_TW.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) +++ trunk/lcn/zh_TW/po/software-opensuse-org.zh_TW.po 2014-11-03 16:12:46 UTC (rev 90699) @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ "Project-Id-Version: software-opensuse-org\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-11-03 14:36+0000\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 01:13+0800\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-04 00:09+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Ramax Lo <ramaxlo(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Chinese Traditional <kde-i18n-doc(a)kde.org>\n" "Language: zh_TW\n" @@ -584,10 +584,8 @@ msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.1" -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" -msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" +msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2" msgid "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" msgstr "https://doc.opensuse.org/release-notes/x86_64/openSUSE/13.2/" -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90698 - trunk/yast/eo/po
by keichwa＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: keichwa Date: 2014-11-03 17:10:21 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90698 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -257,9 +257,7 @@ #. command line message, do not translate 'create', 'clone' #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:864 -msgid "" -"There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the " -"'create' or 'clone' commands." +msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the 'create' or 'clone' commands." msgstr "" #. error message @@ -299,14 +297,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:156 -msgid "" -"Start creating a new add-on product configuration with Add." +msgid "Start creating a new add-on product configuration with Add." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:160 -msgid "" -"Use Edit to modify the selected add-on product configuration." +msgid "Use Edit to modify the selected add-on product configuration." msgstr "" #. help text @@ -316,9 +312,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:166 -msgid "" -"Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with " -"Build." +msgid "Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with Build." msgstr "" #. table header item @@ -1040,23 +1034,17 @@ #. help text for start menu #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:44 -msgid "" -"This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product." +msgid "This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product." msgstr "" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:48 -msgid "" -"Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the " -"beginning or base it on an existing product." +msgid "Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the beginning or base it on an existing product." msgstr "" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:52 -msgid "" -"When basing the new product on an existing product, check Generate " -"Package Descriptions to generate new descriptions of packages in the " -"existing product." +msgid "When basing the new product on an existing product, check Generate Package Descriptions to generate new descriptions of packages in the existing product." msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title) @@ -1076,9 +1064,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This " -"selection forms the REQUIRES value of the <tt>content</tt> file." +msgid "Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This selection forms the REQUIRES value of the <tt>content</tt> file." msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. @@ -1088,9 +1074,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should " -"form your add-on product." +msgid "Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should form your add-on product." msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. @@ -1100,11 +1084,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages " -"from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will " -"not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the " -"patterns later in the workflow." +msgid "Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the patterns later in the workflow." msgstr "" #. help text for content file editor (<tt>content</tt> is a name of file) @@ -1114,10 +1094,7 @@ #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:84 -msgid "" -"Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect " -"Show Only Required Keywords to see all attributes of the <tt>content</" -"tt> file." +msgid "Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect Show Only Required Keywords to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> file." msgstr "" #. help text for content file editor, cont. @@ -1127,32 +1104,22 @@ #. help text for package description files #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</" -"tt> files) here." +msgid "Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt> files) here." msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:96 -msgid "" -"Use Add Language to add a description file for a new language. The " -"list of available languages is read from the LINGUAS value of the " -"<tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions " -"with Import. Delete the description file with Delete." +msgid "Use Add Language to add a description file for a new language. The list of available languages is read from the LINGUAS value of the <tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with Import. Delete the description file with Delete." msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:100 -msgid "" -"Use Add and Edit in the second table to modify description " -"entries for the selected package." +msgid "Use Add and Edit in the second table to modify description entries for the selected package." msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:104 -msgid "" -"Optionally, choose the path for the file providing Additional Package " -"Dependencies (EXTRA_PROV)." +msgid "Optionally, choose the path for the file providing Additional Package Dependencies (EXTRA_PROV)." msgstr "" #. help text for patterns @@ -1162,103 +1129,69 @@ #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:112 -msgid "" -"Use New to create a new pattern or Import to import an " -"existing one." +msgid "Use New to create a new pattern or Import to import an existing one." msgstr "" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:116 -msgid "" -"Use Add and Edit in the second table to modify pattern " -"attributes." +msgid "Use Add and Edit in the second table to modify pattern attributes." msgstr "" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"Check Required pattern to mark the selected pattern as required " -"for\n" -"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when " -"the installation of the add-on product is started." +"Check Required pattern to mark the selected pattern as required for\n" +"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the installation of the add-on product is started." msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be " -"created. Select Create ISO Image to create the ISO image of the " -"product in the output directory." +msgid "Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be created. Select Create ISO Image to create the ISO image of the product in the output directory." msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:128 -msgid "" -"Use Generate Changelog to generate a changelog file containing all " -"changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years." +msgid "Use Generate Changelog to generate a changelog file containing all changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years." msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with Configure Workflow. " -"Use Optional Files to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, " -"licenses, and other optional values." +msgid "Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with Configure Workflow. Use Optional Files to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, licenses, and other optional values." msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on " -"product workflow." +msgid "Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on product workflow." msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:140 -msgid "" -"Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file " -"is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation." -"xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory." +msgid "Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory." msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, " -"enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are " -"stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the " -"YaST RPM packages in Import the Packages." +msgid "To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the YaST RPM packages in Import the Packages." msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 1 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:148 -msgid "" -"The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on " -"that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an OK button." +msgid "The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an OK button." msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 1, cont #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:152 -msgid "" -"The text of the license is displayed in a window with Agree and " -"Disagree buttons before the installation starts. The files with the " -"license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</" -"tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory." +msgid "The text of the license is displayed in a window with Agree and Disagree buttons before the installation starts. The files with the license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory." msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 2 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:156 -msgid "" -"The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various " -"language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on " -"product." +msgid "The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on product." msgstr "" #. help text for signing dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key " -"from the list of keys available or create a new one with Create." +msgid "Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key from the list of keys available or create a new one with Create." msgstr "" #. help text for signing dialog, cont. @@ -1268,51 +1201,37 @@ #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:166 -msgid "" -"Decide if you want to Sign All Packages of the add-on product with " -"the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed." +msgid "Decide if you want to Sign All Packages of the add-on product with the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed." msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:170 -msgid "" -"Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair." +msgid "Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair." msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:174 -msgid "" -"The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 " -"and 4096 bits long." +msgid "The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 and 4096 bits long." msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"As Expiration Date, enter the number of days after which the key " -"expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, " -"it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty " -"for a key that never expires." +msgid "As Expiration Date, enter the number of days after which the key expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for a key that never expires." msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Use Name, Comment, and E-Mail Address to provide the " -"user identification with which the new key should be associated." +msgid "Use Name, Comment, and E-Mail Address to provide the user identification with which the new key should be associated." msgstr "" #. help text for overview dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:186 -msgid "" -"Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product." +msgid "Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product." msgstr "" #. help text for overview dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:190 -msgid "" -"Press Finish to create the add-on product in the output directory." -"" +msgid "Press Finish to create the add-on product in the output directory." msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -1425,9 +1344,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'BASEARCHS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:164 -msgid "" -"Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-" -"release packages architectures. " +msgid "Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-release packages architectures. " msgstr "" #. label of content file 'VERSION' key @@ -1453,10 +1370,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'DISTRIBUTION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used " -"in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, " -"version and architecture." +msgid "Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, version and architecture." msgstr "" #. label of content file key @@ -1486,9 +1400,7 @@ #. help text for content file '' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:227 -msgid "" -"UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if LINGUAS is omitted or no " -"default language can be determined." +msgid "UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if LINGUAS is omitted or no default language can be determined." msgstr "" #. label of content file 'LINGUAS' key @@ -1558,10 +1470,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'LABEL.lang' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:304 -msgid "" -"UTF-8-encoded LABEL. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the " -"LINGUAS values. For each language in LINGUAS, a matching " -"LABEL.lang is expected." +msgid "UTF-8-encoded LABEL. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the LINGUAS values. For each language in LINGUAS, a matching LABEL.lang is expected." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:328 @@ -1600,9 +1509,7 @@ #. help text for 'Cat' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:366 -msgid "" -"One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories " -"are intended for the user and can be specified freely." +msgid "One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories are intended for the user and can be specified freely." msgstr "" #. help text for 'Cat.lang' pattern key @@ -1637,8 +1544,7 @@ #. help text for 'Prc' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:400 -msgid "" -"These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." +msgid "These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." msgstr "" #. label for 'Prs' pattern key @@ -1651,9 +1557,7 @@ #. help text for 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:410 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:503 #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:712 -msgid "" -"These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency " -"resolution." +msgid "These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency resolution." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ico' pattern key @@ -1665,12 +1569,7 @@ #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:420 msgid "" "If unspecified, the pattern name is used \n" -" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename " -"does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is " -"specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/" -"YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/" -"icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/" -"share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." +" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ord' pattern key @@ -1680,9 +1579,7 @@ #. help text for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing " -"multiple patterns in the user interface." +msgid "This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing multiple patterns in the user interface." msgstr "" #. label for 'Req' pattern key @@ -1702,11 +1599,7 @@ #. help text for 'Prv' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:453 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match REQUIRES</" -"b> from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and " -"edition. For example, package bar-1.42-1 provides the capability " -"<tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgid "Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match REQUIRES from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and edition. For example, package bar-1.42-1 provides the capability <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." msgstr "" #. label for 'Con' pattern key @@ -1716,9 +1609,7 @@ #. help text for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:463 -msgid "" -"This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Obs' pattern key @@ -1740,9 +1631,7 @@ #. help text for 'Rec' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:483 -msgid "" -"A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no " -"error is shown." +msgid "A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no error is shown." msgstr "" #. label for 'Sup' pattern key @@ -1752,10 +1641,7 @@ #. help text for 'Sup' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:493 -msgid "" -"A reverse Rec. This pattern is installed if the specified capability " -"is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. " -"Uninstalling it is silently accepted." +msgid "A reverse Rec. This pattern is installed if the specified capability is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. Uninstalling it is silently accepted." msgstr "" #. label for 'Sug' pattern key @@ -1770,9 +1656,7 @@ #. help text for 'Fre' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:513 -msgid "" -"The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern " -"specified here is installed." +msgid "The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern specified here is installed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ext' pattern key @@ -1832,9 +1716,7 @@ #. help text for 'Ins' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:601 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a " -"test version warning or a commercial license." +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a test version warning or a commercial license." msgstr "" #. label for 'Del' key @@ -1844,9 +1726,7 @@ #. help text for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:610 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for " -"deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." msgstr "" #. label for 'Eul' key @@ -1856,9 +1736,7 @@ #. help text for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:619 -msgid "" -"Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If " -"the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." +msgid "Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." msgstr "" #. label of key @@ -1868,9 +1746,7 @@ #. help text for 'REQUIRES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:662 -msgid "" -"Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product " -"requirements." +msgid "Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product requirements." msgstr "" #. label of PROVIDES key @@ -1880,9 +1756,7 @@ #. help text for 'PROVIDES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:672 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match requires</" -"b> from others." +msgid "Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match requires from others." msgstr "" #. label of 'CONFLICTS' key @@ -1892,9 +1766,7 @@ #. help text for 'CONFLICTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:682 -msgid "" -"This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "" #. label of 'OBSOLETES' key @@ -1904,9 +1776,7 @@ #. help text for 'OBSOLETES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:692 -msgid "" -"When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a " -"name matching this keyword." +msgid "When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a name matching this keyword." msgstr "" #. label of 'RECOMMENDS' key @@ -1916,9 +1786,7 @@ #. help text for 'RECOMMENDS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:702 -msgid "" -"A weak version of requires. An attempt is made to fulfill " -"RECOMMENDS, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." +msgid "A weak version of requires. An attempt is made to fulfill RECOMMENDS, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." msgstr "" #. label of 'SUGGESTS' key @@ -1948,9 +1816,7 @@ #. help text for 'productline' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:747 -msgid "" -"A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs " -"and versions." +msgid "A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and versions." msgstr "" #. table item label @@ -1965,9 +1831,7 @@ #. help text for media type #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:761 -msgid "" -"Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, " -"ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgid "Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." msgstr "" #. table item label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,9 +37,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/add-on.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." msgstr "" #. dialog caption @@ -124,8 +122,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Select the language extensions to be installed then click OK." +msgid "Select the language extensions to be installed then click OK." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup question @@ -363,9 +360,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/2 #: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1288 -msgid "" -"Click Add to add a new add-on product, or Delete to remove " -"an add-on which is in use." +msgid "Click Add to add a new add-on product, or Delete to remove an add-on which is in use." msgstr "" #. no items Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -460,8 +460,7 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big> \n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -492,21 +491,15 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big> \n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file /var/" -"log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" -"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications " -"which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches)." +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" +"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches)." msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf')." +"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 @@ -519,42 +512,33 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of " -"writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher). " msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"INCREMENTAL the\n" -"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: " -"keep data portion synced,\n" +"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to INCREMENTAL the\n" +"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: keep data portion synced,\n" "SYNC: keep data and meta-data fully synced." msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via Size and Action.\n" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. IGNORE means do nothing, KEEP_LOGS is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.\n" msgstr "" @@ -562,13 +546,10 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If USER is set, the User Defined Name is\n" -"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.\n" msgstr "" @@ -576,28 +557,23 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big> \n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin." msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want " -"a blocking/lossless\n" +"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication." msgstr "" @@ -605,8 +581,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd." -"conf')." +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf')." msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 @@ -627,28 +602,23 @@ #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform " -"an Action because\n" +"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an Action because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space." msgstr "" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The " -"system is running\n" -"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action</" -"b> will be performed." +"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The system is running\n" +"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action will be performed." msgstr "" #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 msgid "" "If an action is set to EMAIL, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" -"account specified in Action Mail Account. SYSLOG means " -"the\n" -"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. IGNORE " -"means\n" +"account specified in Action Mail Account. SYSLOG means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. IGNORE means\n" "do nothing. EXEC runs the script specified in Path to\n" "Script. SUSPEND stops writing records to disk. SINGLE\n" "switches the system to single user mode. HALT shuts down the\n" @@ -658,10 +628,8 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for EMAIL)." msgstr "" @@ -669,8 +637,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "Note: All scripts specified for EXEC must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 1/6 @@ -679,39 +646,31 @@ "<big>Rules for auditctl</big> \n" "This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" "auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" -"The selected flag from Set Enabled Flag will be added to the rules.</" -"p>" +"The selected flag from Set Enabled Flag will be added to the rules." msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot." +msgid "Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot." msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/" -"audit.log (default). " +" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). " msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users. \n" +"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users. \n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings " -"from /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" +msgid "Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 6/6 @@ -751,9 +710,7 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "" -"To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 " -"must be installed." +msgid "To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 must be installed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -197,25 +197,7 @@ #. initialize GUI #: src/include/dialogs.rb:553 -msgid "" -"SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and " -"authentication mechanisms. You have to confiugre at least one " -"authentication domain. The first you have to set for a authentication " -"domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain. In " -"the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected " -"providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected " -"identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:" -" proxy: Support a legacy NSS provider. local: SSSD " -"internal provider for local users. ldap: LDAP provider. See sssd-" -"ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP. ipa: FreeIPA and " -"Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad: Active " -"Directory provider. Supported auth providers are: ldap for " -"native LDAP authentication. krb5 for Kerberos authentication." -" ipa FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider." -" ad Active Directory provider. proxy for relaying " -"authentication to some other PAM target. none disables " -"authentication explicitly. The default auth provider is the id_provider." -" " +msgid "SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and authentication mechanisms. You have to confiugre at least one authentication domain. The first you have to set for a authentication domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain. In the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider: proxy: Support a legacy NSS provider. local: SSSD internal provider for local users. ldap: LDAP provider. See sssd-ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP. ipa: FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad: Active Directory provider. Supported auth providers are: ldap for native LDAP authentication. krb5 for Kerberos authentication. ipa FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad Active Directory provider. proxy for relaying authentication to some other PAM target. none disables authentication explicitly. The default auth provider is the id_provider. " msgstr "" #. Define Global Parameters @@ -224,70 +206,48 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:21 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:26 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:79 -msgid "" -"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " -"Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:30 -msgid "" -"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " -"configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "" -"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " -"queried." +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " -"user name and domain into these components" +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " -"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:43 -msgid "" -"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " -"its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "" -"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " -"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:48 -msgid "" -"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " -"files." +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " -"domain name component." +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." msgstr "" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " -"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most " -"verbose mode." +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:64 @@ -303,42 +263,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:84 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " -"opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:89 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " -"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:94 -msgid "" -"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " -"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "" #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:102 -msgid "" -"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " -"all users)?" +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:107 -msgid "" -"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " -"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " -"for the domain." +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:112 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits " -"(that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) " -"before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:117 @@ -350,20 +296,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:127 -msgid "" -"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:131 -msgid "" -"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " -"or a template." +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:135 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1101 -msgid "" -"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " -"explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:139 @@ -379,50 +320,36 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:152 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:156 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:161 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be " -"considered valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:166 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " -"valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." msgstr "" #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:174 -msgid "" -"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " -"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:179 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:184 -msgid "" -"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts " -"has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:189 -msgid "" -"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:194 -msgid "" -"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " -"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " -"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -433,37 +360,27 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes " -"that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " -"hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " -"file." +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:233 -msgid "" -"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " -"host keys were requested." +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." msgstr "" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:242 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:247 -msgid "" -"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " -"outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:252 @@ -471,51 +388,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:257 -msgid "" -"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " -"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:262 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " -"backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:267 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:272 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:277 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before " -"asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:282 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:287 -msgid "" -"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " -"again." +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:292 -msgid "" -"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " -"before asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:297 @@ -523,9 +424,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:302 -msgid "" -"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " -"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:307 @@ -533,9 +432,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:312 -msgid "" -"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " -"as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:318 @@ -547,8 +444,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:330 -msgid "" -"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:336 @@ -572,27 +468,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:365 -msgid "" -"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " -"containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:370 -msgid "" -"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " -"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:376 -msgid "" -"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " -"performing DNS lookups." +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " -"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:385 @@ -600,9 +488,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 -msgid "" -"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " -"the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:390 @@ -614,15 +500,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:400 -msgid "" -"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " -"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " -"name was an alias." +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:405 -msgid "" -"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -631,9 +513,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:416 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " -"to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:421 @@ -641,9 +521,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:426 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " -"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:432 @@ -653,32 +531,23 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:441 -msgid "" -"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " -"directory." +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:446 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:451 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:456 -msgid "" -"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " -"home directory." +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:461 -msgid "" -"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " -"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " -"sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:466 @@ -691,15 +560,11 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:479 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:484 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:490 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:496 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:501 @@ -743,8 +608,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:551 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:556 @@ -760,106 +624,67 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:571 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:776 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:576 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " -"password change)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:581 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:586 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:591 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " -"period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:596 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " -"inactivity period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:601 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " -"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " -"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:606 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " -"kerberos." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:611 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:616 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:621 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:626 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " -"determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:631 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " -"access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:636 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " -"which date access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:641 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " -"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:646 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " -"(UPN)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:650 @@ -867,10 +692,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:655 -msgid "" -"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the " -"realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to " -"fail." +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:656 @@ -878,16 +700,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:661 -msgid "" -"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " -"enumerated records." +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:666 -msgid "" -"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " -"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " -"space." +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:671 @@ -899,17 +716,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:681 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " -"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " -"to determine access privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:686 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " -"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " -"privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:696 @@ -937,30 +748,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:726 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:732 -msgid "" -"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " -"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " -"follow." +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:738 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " -"complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:744 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when " -"dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:750 @@ -976,13 +776,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:766 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:771 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:781 @@ -990,9 +788,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:786 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " -"aliases." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:791 @@ -1000,52 +796,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:796 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:802 -msgid "" -"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " -"for this attribute type." +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:807 -msgid "" -" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " -"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " -"is entered)." +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:812 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " -"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " -"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:817 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " -"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:822 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " -"will abort if no response is received." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:827 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " -"maintained." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:832 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. " -"Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:837 @@ -1053,33 +832,23 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:842 -msgid "" -"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " -"security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:847 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " -"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:853 -msgid "" -"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " -"any." +msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:858 -msgid "" -"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " -"Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:863 -msgid "" -"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " -"certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:867 @@ -1095,16 +864,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:881 -msgid "" -"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " -"channel." +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:886 -msgid "" -"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " -"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying " -"on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:890 @@ -1120,9 +884,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:905 -msgid "" -"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " -"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:910 @@ -1138,8 +900,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:925 -msgid "" -"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:930 @@ -1151,28 +912,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:939 -msgid "" -"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " -"password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " -"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:949 -msgid "" -"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " -"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " -"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:954 -msgid "" -" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " -"be enabled." +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:960 @@ -1184,15 +936,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:970 -msgid "" -"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that " -"use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:993 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:997 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " -"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1002 @@ -1200,9 +948,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1007 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1012 -msgid "" -"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative " -"servers can be defined here." +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1017 @@ -1214,39 +960,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1027 -msgid "" -" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change " -"password request is aborted." +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " -"spoofed." +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1037 -msgid "" -"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " -"KDCs." +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1042 -msgid "" -"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " -"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1046 -msgid "" -"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " -"immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1050 -msgid "" -"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " -"followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1054 @@ -1254,9 +988,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1059 -msgid "" -"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-" -"authentication." +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1063 @@ -1273,16 +1005,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1085 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1089 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1093 -msgid "" -"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " -"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " -"host." +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1097 @@ -1290,15 +1017,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1110 -msgid "" -" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1115 -msgid "" -"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1120 @@ -1314,9 +1037,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1133 -msgid "" -"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " -"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1325,21 +1046,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1149 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1153 -msgid "" -"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " -"qualified name." +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1158 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " -"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1163 @@ -1347,8 +1062,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1167 -msgid "" -"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "" #. end Export Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -99,9 +99,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -114,9 +112,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -205,9 +201,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -228,10 +222,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -312,9 +304,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -522,9 +512,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 @@ -562,15 +550,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -597,8 +582,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -629,10 +613,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "Select Yes if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</" -"p>\n" +"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -645,18 +627,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured." +"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -683,17 +661,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. " -"Hdb is a\n" -"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. Hdb is a\n" +"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to bdb. A\n" "hdb-Database needs a larger idlcachesize than a\n" "bdb-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) " -"library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.\n" +"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -704,24 +678,18 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password</" -"b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends " -"the \n" -"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the \n" +"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process. " msgstr "" @@ -755,8 +723,7 @@ "click Change Password. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "Password Encryption. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" @@ -770,35 +737,25 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with Append Base DN." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change " -"Password.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password " -"Encryption.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.\n" +"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change Password.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password Encryption.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index " -"Cache (IDL cache) \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index Cache (IDL cache) \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs)." msgstr "" @@ -814,14 +771,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords. " msgstr "" @@ -835,15 +788,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object " -"DN." +msgid "Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object DN." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You " -"may\n" +"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -857,33 +807,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined." +msgid "The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "Presence: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "Equality: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.\n" msgstr "" @@ -902,11 +847,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.\n" msgstr "" @@ -922,8 +865,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click Edit.\n" msgstr "" @@ -936,11 +878,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" @@ -950,8 +890,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server." msgstr "" @@ -961,16 +900,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.\n" @@ -982,14 +916,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server." +"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -998,8 +928,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 msgid "" -"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want " -"the\n" +"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1013,8 +942,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (ldap or ldaps) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1047,10 +975,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.\n" +"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 @@ -1061,10 +987,8 @@ msgid "" "As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. \n" msgstr "" @@ -1105,15 +1029,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server.</" -"p> " +msgid "With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server. " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration " -"wizard." +msgid "If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 @@ -1124,15 +1044,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:" +msgid "Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1144,8 +1061,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server." msgstr "" @@ -1167,18 +1083,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" -"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the " -"server\n" +"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</" -"p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1189,10 +1102,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File</" -"b>,\n" -"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File,\n" +"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the corresponding\n" "textfields.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1210,26 +1121,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 msgid "" -"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog." msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:" +msgid "Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 @@ -1238,17 +1144,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) " +"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 @@ -1259,8 +1162,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1278,16 +1180,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 msgid "" -"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1302,12 +1202,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1318,84 +1215,63 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete " -"Database....\n" +"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete Database....\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" +"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or " -"\"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"cn=config\")." msgstr "" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server." +msgid "Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server." msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" +msgid "Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</" -"p>" +msgid "This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm." +msgid "This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm." +msgid "These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 @@ -1440,9 +1316,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 @@ -1451,12 +1325,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 @@ -1465,9 +1334,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 @@ -1476,9 +1343,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 @@ -1487,10 +1352,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 @@ -1499,10 +1361,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 @@ -1520,49 +1379,33 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done." +msgid "The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm." +msgid "This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash." +msgid "This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm." +msgid "This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M." +msgid "This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -1572,69 +1415,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm." +msgid "A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm." +msgid "Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" +msgid "Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server." +msgid "This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." +msgid "This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</" -"p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree." +msgid "Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." +msgid "Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -1644,9 +1465,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"" +msgid "Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." msgstr "" #. ################################################################################# @@ -1971,9 +1790,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1981,8 +1798,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -2294,9 +2110,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 @@ -2304,8 +2118,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 @@ -2820,8 +2633,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -3046,9 +2858,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 @@ -3068,9 +2878,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 @@ -3172,9 +2980,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 @@ -3205,9 +3011,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed @@ -3249,8 +3053,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -117,8 +117,7 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:46 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" msgstr "" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:56 @@ -147,18 +146,15 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location." +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location." msgstr "" #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions." msgstr "" @@ -231,10 +227,8 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared." msgstr "" @@ -606,8 +600,7 @@ #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:217 msgid "" -"Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-" -"out)\n" +"Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages. \n" msgstr "" @@ -630,8 +623,7 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "\n" -"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed to add\n" "more add-on selections and packages.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -644,8 +636,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -661,12 +652,9 @@ msgid "" "Mount in /etc/fstab By:\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -674,8 +662,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " @@ -844,8 +831,7 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 @@ -1284,9 +1270,7 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" msgstr "" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1301,9 +1285,7 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" msgstr "" #. EXIT @@ -1431,8 +1413,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" @@ -1559,16 +1540,14 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1709,8 +1688,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1736,8 +1714,7 @@ msgid "" "This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 @@ -1746,8 +1723,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1780,8 +1756,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" @@ -1796,12 +1771,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 @@ -1814,8 +1784,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1912,8 +1881,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" -"You can also add commands to execute on the system after the " -"installation\n" +"You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" "is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1926,8 +1894,7 @@ "For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the chroot scripts options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the " -"installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1937,8 +1904,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted" -"\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1961,8 +1927,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl " -"or \n" +"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl or \n" "Python for preinstallation scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1973,12 +1938,9 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, too.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1986,10 +1948,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up " -"box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2076,8 +2036,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the " -"installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2106,9 +2065,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:914 src/modules/Profile.rb:725 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" msgstr "" #. backdoor for merging problems. @@ -2180,10 +2137,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 msgid "" -"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "\n" @@ -2192,8 +2147,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:459 msgid "" "In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2381,9 +2335,7 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:363 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:371 @@ -2391,9 +2343,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); @@ -2406,8 +2356,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:421 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be " -"changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:435 @@ -2451,8 +2400,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:616 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" @@ -2495,16 +2443,12 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:907 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." msgstr "" #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -228,16 +228,12 @@ #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." msgstr "" #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:956 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> " -"command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." msgstr "" #. translators: fallback name for a module at command line @@ -378,8 +374,7 @@ "See %3 for more information about YaST logs." msgstr "" "Indas raporti ĉi tio eraro ĉe %1.\n" -"Bonvole, kunmetu ankaŭ ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo " -"'%2'.\n" +"Bonvole, kunmetu ankaŭ ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo '%2'.\n" "Vizitu %3 por pliaj informoj pri YaST-protokoloj." #. link to the Yast Bug Reporting HOWTO @@ -765,8 +760,7 @@ "containing the key and click Add.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Aldoni Ekzistantan TSIG-Ŝlosilon</big> \n" -"Por aldoni jam kreitan TSIG-ŝlosilon, elektu iun Dosiernomon el la " -"dosiero\n" +"Por aldoni jam kreitan TSIG-ŝlosilon, elektu iun Dosiernomon el la dosiero\n" "kiu enhavas la ŝlosilon kaj alklaku Aldoni.\n" #. tsig keys management dialog help 3/4 @@ -961,11 +955,7 @@ #. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:334 -msgid "" -"Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use " -"[SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of " -"configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog " -"on the right." +msgid "Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right." msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 @@ -1004,8 +994,7 @@ #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:363 msgid "" "3) Function Keys \n" -"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings " -"for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line." +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line." msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 8/10 @@ -1793,8 +1782,7 @@ #: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:286 msgid "" "<big>Create a new GPG key</big> \n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more " -"information.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" "Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1855,8 +1843,7 @@ "and select the action to process." msgstr "" "\n" -"Por trakti altnivelajn agojn aŭ konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku " -"%1\n" +"Por trakti altnivelajn agojn aŭ konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku %1\n" "kaj elektu la agon por trakti." #. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 2, %1 is a menu button label @@ -1878,8 +1865,7 @@ "to which to save the log.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Por konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku Konservi Protokolon " -"kaj elektu la dosieron\n" +"Por konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku Konservi Protokolon kaj elektu la dosieron\n" "kies konservos la protokolon.\n" #. menu button @@ -2719,82 +2705,57 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:582 -msgid "" -"Firewall is enabled (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">disable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Aktiva barilo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">malaktivigi</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is enabled (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal\">disable</a>)" +msgstr "Aktiva barilo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal\">malaktivigi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:587 -msgid "" -"Firewall is disabled (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">enable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Malaktiva barilo (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">aktivigi</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is disabled (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal\">enable</a>)" +msgstr "Malaktiva barilo (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal\">aktivigi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:621 -msgid "" -"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Malfermita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">fermi</" -"a>)" +msgid "SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>)" +msgstr "Malfermita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">fermi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:626 -msgid "" -"SSH port is blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Blokita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">malfermi</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">open</a>)" +msgstr "Blokita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">malfermi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:646 msgid "" -"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>), " -"but\n" +"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>), but\n" "there are no network interfaces configured" msgstr "" -"Malfermita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">fermi</" -"a>), sed\n" +"Malfermita SSH-pordo (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">fermi</a>), sed\n" "ne estas agorditaj retinterfacoj" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:661 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port " -"on the firewall." -msgstr "" -"Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la " -"fajromuro." +msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgstr "Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la fajromuro." #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:703 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (<a href=\"firewall--" -"disable_vnc_in_proposal\">close</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_vnc_in_proposal\">close</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:708 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (<a href=\"firewall--" -"enable_vnc_in_proposal\">open</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_vnc_in_proposal\">open</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:718 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have " -"not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text @@ -2810,15 +2771,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:746 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH " -#| "port on the firewall." -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the " -"needed ports on the firewall." -msgstr "" -"Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la " -"fajromuro." +#| msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." +msgstr "Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la fajromuro." #. Returns service definition. #. See @services for the format. @@ -2991,18 +2946,15 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:669 msgid "" "Ignoring a package failure may result in a broken system.\n" -"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management " -"module." +"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." msgstr "" #. error report #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:792 msgid "" "The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" -"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has " -"changed. To \n" -"continue using this repository, start Installation Repositories " -"from \n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"continue using this repository, start Installation Repositories from \n" "the YaST control center and refresh the repository.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3475,8 +3427,7 @@ "<big>License Confirmation</big> \n" "The package in the headline of the dialog requires an explicit confirmation\n" "of acceptance of its license.\n" -"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be " -"installed.\n" +"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be installed.\n" " \n" "To accept the license of the package, click I Agree.\n" "To reject the license of the package, click I Disagree." @@ -3486,10 +3437,8 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:331 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software " -"to install.\n" -"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in " -"the left\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" "\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" "\t\t " msgstr "" @@ -3514,8 +3463,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:351 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining " -"disk space\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" "\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" "\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" "\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" @@ -3622,9 +3570,7 @@ msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:669 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Installation Report</BIG> Here is a summary of installed " -"or removed packages." +msgid "<BIG>Installation Report</BIG> Here is a summary of installed or removed packages." msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:677 @@ -3712,8 +3658,7 @@ msgid "" "No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" "This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" -"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. " -"Using the file\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" "may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?" @@ -3891,8 +3836,7 @@ msgid "" "A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" "is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" -"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be " -"used." +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used." msgstr "" #. popup message - label, part 1, %1 stands for repository name, %2 for its URL @@ -3958,8 +3902,7 @@ "but the expected checksum is not known.\n" "\n" "This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" -"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at " -"risk.\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?\n" msgstr "" @@ -3968,8 +3911,7 @@ "sed la atendita kontrolsumo estas nekonata.\n" "\n" "Tio ĉi signifas ke la deveno kaj integreco de la dosiero\n" -"ne povas esti kontrolitaj. Uzi la dosieron endanĝerigas la integrecon de via " -"sistemo.\n" +"ne povas esti kontrolitaj. Uzi la dosieron endanĝerigas la integrecon de via sistemo.\n" "\n" "Ĉu tamen uzi ĝin?\n" @@ -4020,11 +3962,7 @@ msgstr "Pakaĵoj instaliĝas." #: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:648 -msgid "" -"Aborting Installation Package installation can be aborted using " -"the Abort button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent " -"or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not " -"installed." +msgid "Aborting Installation Package installation can be aborted using the Abort button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES @@ -5585,8 +5523,7 @@ "\n" "A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" "separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" -"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address " -"'192.168.32.1'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, user can't use hostname %1 because it doesn't make Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -96,15 +96,12 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:115 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." msgstr "" #. error in the proposal #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:125 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "" #. proposal part - bootloader label @@ -138,10 +135,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition \n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR." msgstr "" @@ -163,8 +158,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "Timeout in Seconds \n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 @@ -179,46 +173,38 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition)." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "Boot from Root Partition." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have " -"another operating system\n" +"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" -"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" +"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root " -"partition is on \n" +"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." +msgid "Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 @@ -230,26 +216,21 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "Use Serial Console lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</" -"code>) for details." +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "Terminal Definition \n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</" -"code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable." msgstr "" @@ -260,8 +241,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "Protect Boot Loader with Password \n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in Retype Password." msgstr "" @@ -442,40 +422,27 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "" -"Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgid "Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the " -"console to when booting." +msgid "Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the console to when booting." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgid "Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution " +msgid "Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution " msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only " -"on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not " -"touch if you are not sure." +msgid "Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure." msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " -"boot entry name. " +msgid "Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. " msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 @@ -692,10 +659,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "From Other,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the " -"current \n" -"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or " -"reread\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1" msgstr "" @@ -762,8 +727,7 @@ "- In the Boot Sector of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set Activate Boot Loader Partition and\n" -"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details</" -"b>\n" +"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;." @@ -830,8 +794,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "Section Name \n" -"Use Section Name to specify the boot loader section name. The " -"section\n" +"Use Section Name to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" "name must be unique." msgstr "" @@ -875,8 +838,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:257 msgid "" "Select Menu Section to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems." msgstr "" @@ -984,52 +946,39 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" msgstr "" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:214 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot" -"\">install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:224 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root" -"\">install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">install</a>)" msgstr "" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:234 -msgid "" -"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " -"are doing please select above location." +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals @@ -1076,11 +1025,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:140 -msgid "" -"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk " -"label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub " -"partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install " -"stage 1 to MBR." +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." msgstr "" #. check if boot device is on raid0 @@ -1090,9 +1035,7 @@ #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:188 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" msgstr "" #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -94,8 +94,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 -msgid "" -"P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 @@ -112,11 +111,9 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 msgid "" "\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and " -"certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" -"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and " -"certificate from a file.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -361,9 +358,7 @@ #. #. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server " -"Name and E-Mail." +msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." msgstr "" #. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) @@ -385,15 +380,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 msgid "" "The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" -"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:351 @@ -448,10 +441,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 msgid "" -"The root password is too short for use as the password for the " -"certificates.\n" -" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:413 @@ -463,9 +454,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 -msgid "" -"Is the default hostname linux really unique? The certificate is " -"only valid if the hostname is correct." +msgid "Is the default hostname linux really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct." msgstr "" #. menu title @@ -503,8 +492,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 msgid "" "\n" -"In this frame, select the desired installation method for CAs and " -"certificates\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for CAs and certificates\n" "while completing the installation.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +500,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 msgid "" "\n" -"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in " -"the installed system \n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" "if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -609,8 +596,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 msgid "" "\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA " -"and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" "Here, change these default settings.\n" "\n" @@ -636,51 +622,37 @@ #. help text 1/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 -msgid "" -"A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted " -"network connections." +msgid "A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections." msgstr "" #. help text 2/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 -msgid "" -"The purpose of the Common Server Certificate is, to provide a " -"certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgid "The purpose of the Common Server Certificate is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " msgstr "" #. help text 3/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during " -"configuration of such a service." +msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service." msgstr "" #. help text 4/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 -msgid "" -"With the Import/Replace button you can add a new server " -"certificate or replace the current one." +msgid "With the Import/Replace button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one." msgstr "" #. help text 5/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 -msgid "" -"You can remove the Certificates by clicking the Remove button. But " -"make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services." +msgid "You can remove the Certificates by clicking the Remove button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services." msgstr "" #. help text 6/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 -msgid "" -"Certificates can be written to a file using Export to File in " -"section Certificate in the CA Management module." +msgid "Certificates can be written to a file using Export to File in section Certificate in the CA Management module." msgstr "" #. help text 7/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 -msgid "" -"Certificates to import from disk must have been written in PKCS12 " -"format with CA chain." +msgid "Certificates to import from disk must have been written in PKCS12 format with CA chain." msgstr "" #. help text 8/8 @@ -740,9 +712,7 @@ #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Special information about the current CA is provided by Certificates</" -"b>, CRL, and Advanced." +msgid "Special information about the current CA is provided by Certificates, CRL, and Advanced." msgstr "" #. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA @@ -860,9 +830,7 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 -msgid "" -"When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some " -"default values." +msgid "When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values." msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 @@ -874,16 +842,12 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 -msgid "" -"However, the modified settings will be used for new entries only.</" -"p>" +msgid "However, the modified settings will be used for new entries only." msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 -msgid "" -"You can edit the default settings for subCAs, client " -"certificates, and server certificates." +msgid "You can edit the default settings for subCAs, client certificates, and server certificates." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 @@ -904,9 +868,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 -msgid "" -"This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are " -"saved." +msgid "This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1020,10 +982,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 -msgid "" -"First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the " -"state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked)." +msgid "First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked)." msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1033,16 +992,12 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 -msgid "" -"View opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"certificate." +msgid "View opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate." msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Furthermore, you can Revoke, Delete, or Export a " -"certificate." +msgid "Furthermore, you can Revoke, Delete, or Export a certificate." msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 @@ -1052,9 +1007,7 @@ #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 -msgid "" -"In the area below, see the most important values of the selected " -"certificate." +msgid "In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -1363,8 +1316,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 -msgid "" -"When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values." +msgid "When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values." msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 @@ -1401,11 +1353,7 @@ #. Translators: long help text - security information #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 -msgid "" -"Warning! Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write " -"the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored " -"there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be " -"readable for the root user." +msgid "Warning! Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." msgstr "" #. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA @@ -1421,19 +1369,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 -msgid "" -"To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select Repeated recreation " -"and export. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in " -"Periodic interval. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can " -"additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and " -"understand the Security Information." +msgid "To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select Repeated recreation and export. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in Periodic interval. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the Security Information." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 -msgid "" -"You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP " -"server or both. Set up the respective parameters in Export to local file</" -"b> and Export to LDAP." +msgid "You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in Export to local file and Export to LDAP." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 @@ -1608,9 +1548,7 @@ #. help text 5/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 -msgid "" -"CA Name is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, " -"\"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\"." +msgid "CA Name is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\"." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 @@ -1618,28 +1556,21 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 -msgid "" -"Common Name is the name of the user for whom to create the " -"certificate." +msgid "Common Name is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Common Name is the fully qualified domain name of the server." +msgid "Common Name is the fully qualified domain name of the server." msgstr "" #. help text 6/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 -msgid "" -"E-Mail Addresses are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server " -"administrator." +msgid "E-Mail Addresses are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator." msgstr "" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 -msgid "" -"Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality, and " -"State are often optional." +msgid "Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality, and State are often optional." msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -1671,24 +1602,17 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 -msgid "" -"The private key of the CA needs a Password with a minimum length " -"of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</" -"p>" +msgid "The private key of the CA needs a Password with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field." msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 -msgid "" -"Each CA has its own Key Length. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths." +msgid "Each CA has its own Key Length. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths." msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 -msgid "" -"The CA is valid for only specific period (Valid Period). Enter the " -"time frame in days." +msgid "The CA is valid for only specific period (Valid Period). Enter the time frame in days." msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 @@ -1697,47 +1621,32 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 -msgid "" -"Advanced Options are very special options. If you change these " -"options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work " -"correctly." +msgid "Advanced Options are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly." msgstr "" #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 -msgid "" -"The private key of the certificate needs a Password with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field." +msgid "The private key of the certificate needs a Password with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field." msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 -msgid "" -"Each certificate has its own Key Length. Some applications that " -"use certificates need special key lengths." +msgid "Each certificate has its own Key Length. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths." msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 -msgid "" -"The certificate is valid for only specific period (Valid Period). " -"Enter the time frame in days." +msgid "The certificate is valid for only specific period (Valid Period). Enter the time frame in days." msgstr "" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 -msgid "" -"The private key of the request needs a Password with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field." +msgid "The private key of the request needs a Password with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field." msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 -msgid "" -"Each request has its own Key Length. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths." +msgid "Each request has its own Key Length. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 @@ -1772,9 +1681,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 -msgid "" -"This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be " -"created." +msgid "This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1784,9 +1691,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 -msgid "" -"This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that " -"will be created." +msgid "This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1796,9 +1701,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 -msgid "" -"This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"created." +msgid "This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1911,11 +1814,7 @@ #. #. Creating a new CA/Certificate #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 -msgid "" -"This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that " -"can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the " -"file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</" -"P>" +msgid "This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc)." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 @@ -1979,9 +1878,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 -msgid "" -"First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address." +msgid "First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address." msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1991,29 +1888,22 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 -msgid "" -"View opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"request." +msgid "View opens a window with a text representation of the complete request." msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 -msgid "" -"You can also Sign, Delete, or Export a request." +msgid "You can also Sign, Delete, or Export a request." msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 -msgid "" -"With Import, read a new request. With Add, generate a new " -"request." +msgid "With Import, read a new request. With Add, generate a new request." msgstr "" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 -msgid "" -"In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request." -"" +msgid "In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 @@ -2103,14 +1993,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 -msgid "" -"The request has special request extensions, which you can accept." +msgid "The request has special request extensions, which you can accept." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 -msgid "" -"If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead." +msgid "If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead." msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 @@ -2123,9 +2011,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 -msgid "" -"This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"signed." +msgid "This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2179,14 +2065,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 -msgid "" -"Create Root CA generates a new root certificate authority." +msgid "Create Root CA generates a new root certificate authority." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 -msgid "" -"For more information about CA Management, please read the manual." +msgid "For more information about CA Management, please read the manual." msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -2396,15 +2280,12 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 msgid "" "<big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" -" from Disk:</big> Select one file name and press Next to continue." -"\n" +" from Disk:</big> Select one file name and press Next to continue.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 -msgid "" -"Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place " -"where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 @@ -2442,8 +2323,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 msgid "" "The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" -"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in " -"subject alternative names." +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -2512,8 +2392,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 msgid "" "Key Password is required. \n" -"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not " -"encrypted key." +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." msgstr "" #. Error popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -86,8 +86,7 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 msgid "" "List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" -"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range " -"specified with dash.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" "Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -135,9 +135,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:270 -msgid "" -"Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to " -"passive." +msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." msgstr "" #. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr @@ -219,15 +217,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:740 -msgid "" -"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/" -"authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:745 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:773 @@ -359,8 +353,7 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1383 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" @@ -388,116 +381,47 @@ #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the " -"nodeid field must be specified. \n" -"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but " -"the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address " -"to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address." -" This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 " -"networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must " -"be specified.\n" -"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports. \n" -"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using " -"udpu(Unicast). \n" -"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from " -"the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used. \n" -"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen." -" \n" -"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting " -"quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is " -"present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. </" -"p>\n" -"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using " -"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" +"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified. \n" +"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address. This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.\n" +"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports. \n" +"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). \n" +"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used. \n" +"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen. \n" +"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. \n" +"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 msgid "" "\n" -"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" -"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 " -"encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this " -"option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces " -"total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles " -"in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks " -"with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible " -"with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A " -"throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option " -"is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame " -"transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is " -"enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this " -"option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. \n" +"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" +"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot " -"or not\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when " -"Firewall is enabled\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot or not\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when Firewall is enabled\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.\n" -"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed " -"using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is " -"generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup " -"should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</" -"p>\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be synced.\n" +"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" "\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network " -"interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for " -"using. You may have to have it pre-configured. \n" -"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" -"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.\n" -"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. \n" +"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" +"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be used for syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.\n" "\t" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -49,8 +49,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." +msgid "Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." msgstr "" #. summary item @@ -79,9 +78,7 @@ #. help text for keyboard expert screen cont. #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the " -"keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.\n" +msgid "Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.\n" msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -161,8 +158,7 @@ "Choose the Keyboard Layout to use for\n" "installation and in the installed system. \n" "Test the layout in Test.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select Expert " -"Settings.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select Expert Settings.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -179,10 +175,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Choose the Keyboard Layout to use in the system.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select Expert " -"Settings.\n" -"Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of " -"your desktop environment.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select Expert Settings.\n" +"Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of your desktop environment.\n" msgstr "" #. Screen title for keyboard screen @@ -313,8 +307,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: language/src/clients/language.rb:303 -msgid "" -"%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." +msgid "%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." msgstr "" #. label text @@ -361,8 +354,7 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:231 msgid "" "\n" -"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary " -"languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" +"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -422,11 +414,8 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:300 msgid "" "\n" -"Check Adapt Keyboard Layout to change the keyboard layout to the " -"primary language.\n" -"Check Adapt Time Zone to change the current time zone according to " -"the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted " -"to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" +"Check Adapt Keyboard Layout to change the keyboard layout to the primary language.\n" +"Check Adapt Time Zone to change the current time zone according to the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -472,8 +461,7 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:592 msgid "" -"ctype Only: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other " -"values\n" +"ctype Only: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other values\n" "are unset. \n" "Yes: root has the same locale settings as normal user. \n" "No: root has all locale variables unset.\n" @@ -482,10 +470,7 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:601 -msgid "" -"Use Detailed Locale Setting to set a locale for the primary " -"language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may " -"not be available for the selected locale." +msgid "Use Detailed Locale Setting to set a locale for the primary language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may not be available for the selected locale." msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -552,8 +537,7 @@ #: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1287 msgid "" "Only minimal support for the selected language is included on this media.\n" -"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the " -"appropriate support\n" +"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the appropriate support\n" "for this language.\n" msgstr "" @@ -645,15 +629,12 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:105 msgid "" "\n" -"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in Hardware " -"Clock Set To.\n" -"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as " -"Microsoft\n" +"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in Hardware Clock Set To.\n" +"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as Microsoft\n" "Windows) use local time.\n" "Machines that have only Linux installed are usually\n" "set to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).\n" -"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard " -"time\n" +"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard time\n" "to daylight saving time and back automatically.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -673,14 +654,11 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:131 msgid "" "\n" -"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your " -"system.\n" +"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your system.\n" "In such case, it is strongly recommended to use UTC, and to click Cancel.\n" "\n" -"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the " -"year\n" -"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, " -"backups may fail,\n" +"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the year\n" +"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, backups may fail,\n" "your mail system may drop mail messages, etc.\n" "\n" "If you use UTC, Linux will adjust the time automatically.\n" @@ -690,9 +668,7 @@ #. help text for set time dialog #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:187 -msgid "" -"The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them " -"to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP)." +msgid "The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP)." msgstr "" #. help text, cont. @@ -812,8 +788,7 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:814 msgid "" "\n" -"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the Region</" -"b>.\n" +"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the Region.\n" "In Time Zone, then select the appropriate time zone, country, or \n" "region from those available.\n" "\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -42,10 +42,8 @@ "Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ " -"for SMT server\n" -"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/" -"sles11-sp3-x86_64/ for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ for SMT server\n" +"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-… for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "" @@ -79,10 +77,8 @@ #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:203 msgid "" -"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy.</" -"p>\n" -"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " -"space-separated list." +"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy.\n" +"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -283,8 +279,7 @@ #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1385 -msgid "" -"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." msgstr "" #. tab header Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -544,8 +544,7 @@ #. at least minimal configuration #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:616 msgid "" -"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP " -"address \n" +"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" "and netmask)." msgstr "" @@ -746,8 +745,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1594 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1617 msgid "" -"The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP " -"server.\n" +"The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP server.\n" "IP %1 does not match the network %2/%3." msgstr "" @@ -897,8 +895,7 @@ msgid "" "You have specified an alternate configuration file for the DHCP server.\n" "\n" -"YaST does not supported this. The DHCP server module can only read and " -"write\n" +"YaST does not supported this. The DHCP server module can only read and write\n" "/etc/dhcpd.conf. The new configuration from %1 will not be imported. All\n" "changes will be saved to the default configuration file.\n" " \n" @@ -919,8 +916,7 @@ "<big>Adding a New Range of DNS Records</big> \n" "First IP Address defines\n" "the starting address of the range and Last IP Address defines\n" -"the last one. Hostname Base is a string that determines how " -"hostnames\n" +"the last one. Hostname Base is a string that determines how hostnames\n" "are created (such as <tt>dhcp-%i</tt> or <tt>e25-%i-a</tt>).\n" "<tt>%i</tt> is replaced with the number of the host in the range.\n" "If no <tt>%i</tt> is defined, the number is added at the end of the\n" @@ -944,8 +940,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:42 msgid "" "New Zone Name or Reverse Zone Name\n" -"are taken from your current DHCP server and network settings and cannot be " -"changed.\n" +"are taken from your current DHCP server and network settings and cannot be changed.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 1 (part 3) @@ -980,8 +975,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:67 msgid "" "To add a New Name Server, click Add, complete the form,\n" -"then click Ok. If the new name server name is included in the " -"current\n" +"then click Ok. If the new name server name is included in the current\n" "DNS zone, also enter its IP address. This is mandatory because it is used\n" "during the zone creation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1001,8 +995,7 @@ "<big>DNS Records</big> \n" "Define DNS hostnames for all DHCP clients. You do not need to define\n" "all hostnames one by one. Set simple rules for how\n" -"the hostnames are created. These rules define the ranges of IP addresses to " -"use\n" +"the hostnames are created. These rules define the ranges of IP addresses to use\n" "and the string from which hostnames are generated for a range.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1070,13 +1063,10 @@ "\n" " To create or remove a single DNS record,\n" "click Add or Delete.\n" -"To synchronize the DNS entries with their reverse forms in the " -"corresponding\n" +"To synchronize the DNS entries with their reverse forms in the corresponding\n" "reverse zone, select Synchronize with Reverse Zone.\n" "Use Remove DNS Records Matching Range \n" -"from Special Tasks to delete any information relating to this range " -"of IP addresses from the DNS server. To create a new range of DNS records, " -"select\n" +"from Special Tasks to delete any information relating to this range of IP addresses from the DNS server. To create a new range of DNS records, select\n" "Add New Range of DNS Records from Special Tasks.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1339,8 +1329,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:234 msgid "" "No IP address has been provided for a name server in the current DNS zone.\n" -"This may not work because each zone needs the name and IP of its name server " -"defined. \n" +"This may not work because each zone needs the name and IP of its name server defined. \n" "Really use the current settings?\n" msgstr "" @@ -1746,8 +1735,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Zones to Update</big> \n" "Specify forward and reverse zones to update. For both, also specify \n" -"their primary name server. If the name server runs on the same host as the " -"DHCP\n" +"their primary name server. If the name server runs on the same host as the DHCP\n" "server, you can leave the fields empty." msgstr "" @@ -1755,10 +1743,8 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<big>DHCP Server Start-Up Arguments</big> \n" -"Here you can specify parameters that you want DHCP Server to be started " -"with \n" -"(e.g. \"-p 1234\") for a non-standard port to listen on). For all possible " -"options,\n" +"Here you can specify parameters that you want DHCP Server to be started with \n" +"(e.g. \"-p 1234\") for a non-standard port to listen on). For all possible options,\n" "consult dhcpd manual page. If left blank, default values will be used." msgstr "" @@ -1766,8 +1752,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<big>Network Card Selection</big> \n" -"Select one or more of the listed network cards to use for the DHCP server.</" -"p>\n" +"Select one or more of the listed network cards to use for the DHCP server.\n" msgstr "" #. Optional field - used with LDAP support @@ -1816,8 +1801,7 @@ #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 7/9 #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:189 -msgid "" -"Print Server offers this server as the default print server." +msgid "Print Server offers this server as the default print server." msgstr "" #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 8/9 @@ -1830,8 +1814,7 @@ #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 9/9 #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:197 msgid "" -"Default Lease Time sets the time after which the leased IP " -"expires\n" +"Default Lease Time sets the time after which the leased IP expires\n" "and the client must ask for an IP again." msgstr "" @@ -1849,8 +1832,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>IP Address Range</big> \n" "Set the First IP Address and the Last IP Address\n" -"of the address range to be leased to clients. These addresses must have the " -"same netmask.\n" +"of the address range to be leased to clients. These addresses must have the same netmask.\n" "For instance, <tt>192.168.1.1</tt> and <tt>192.168.1.64</tt>. Check the \n" "Allow Dynamic BOOTP flag if the specified range may be dynamically\n" "assigned to BOOTP clients as well as DHCP clients.\n" @@ -2306,7 +2288,7 @@ "Aborting now." msgstr "" -#. error report +#. error report #: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1474 msgid "" "Cannot determine hostname. LDAP-based configuration of \n" @@ -2414,7 +2396,7 @@ msgid "Error occurred while creating %1." msgstr "" -#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key #: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2738 msgid "Error occurred while updating %1." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -556,15 +556,13 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1180 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:294 -msgid "" -"Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1187 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -624,8 +622,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1257 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:371 -msgid "" -"DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" +msgid "DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -1490,8 +1487,7 @@ #. %{type} replaced with record type (TXT or SPF) #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1916 msgid "" -"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII " -"characters excluding '='\n" +"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII characters excluding '='\n" "and must be at least one character long." msgstr "" @@ -1582,8 +1578,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2612 msgid "" "Current zone records are automatically generated from %1 zone.\n" -"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From " -"feature." +"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From feature." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry @@ -1768,10 +1763,8 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<big>Master Servers</big> \n" -"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use Add</" -"b>\n" -"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click " -"Delete\n" +"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use Add\n" +"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click Delete\n" "to remove an existing one." msgstr "" @@ -1780,8 +1773,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Zone Type</big> \n" "To make this name server the primary source of the data of the zone,\n" -"select Master. To make it the secondary name server, select Slave</" -"b>\n" +"select Master. To make it the secondary name server, select Slave\n" "or Stub, so the data of the zone will be mirrored from the master\n" "server." msgstr "" @@ -1790,8 +1782,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:114 msgid "" "<big>Zone Direction</big> \n" -"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and " -"back.\n" +"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and back.\n" "Select if this zone will be used to translate from domain names to IP\n" "addresses (Forward) or from IP addresses to domain names\n" "(Reverse).\n" @@ -1849,8 +1840,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "Serial number is used for determining if the zone has changed on\n" -"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).\n" msgstr "" @@ -1893,10 +1883,8 @@ "<big>TSIG Key Management</big> \n" "Define TSIG keys used for dynamic zone updates.\n" "To add a new TSIG key, use the \n" -"File Name text field or the Browse button then click Add</" -"b>.\n" -"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click Delete</" -"b>.\n" +"File Name text field or the Browse button then click Add.\n" +"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click Delete.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1978,14 +1966,11 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:242 msgid "" "\n" -"Select Log to System Log to save DNS server log messages to the " -"system log. \n" +"Select Log to System Log to save DNS server log messages to the system log. \n" "To save the DNS server log messages to a separate file, select \n" -"Log to File and set the Filename to which to save the log " -"and \n" +"Log to File and set the Filename to which to save the log and \n" "the Maximum Size of the log file.\n" -"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use Maximum Versions</" -"b>\n" +"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use Maximum Versions\n" "to specify how many log files should be saved.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2032,8 +2017,7 @@ "To add an already created key, set the Filename\n" "(or use the Browse button to select it) and click Add.\n" "To generate a new key, enter the Filename and the Key ID\n" -"then click Generate. The new key will be generated and also added.</" -"p>\n" +"then click Generate. The new key will be generated and also added.\n" msgstr "" #. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 3/3 @@ -2053,19 +2037,16 @@ #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #2 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:298 msgid "" -"To add a new zone, enter its Zone Name, select the Zone Type</" -"b>,\n" +"To add a new zone, enter its Zone Name, select the Zone Type,\n" "and click Add.\n" msgstr "" #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #3 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address " -"followed by\n" +"To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address followed by\n" "<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> as its Zone Name (for example, zone name\n" -"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), " -"select\n" +"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), select\n" "the Zone Type, and click Add.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2073,10 +2054,8 @@ #. %1, %2, %3, and %4 are replaced with examples #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:311 msgid "" -"To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address " -"followed by\n" -"<tt>%1</tt> as its Zone Name. Several formats for entering the zone " -"name are\n" +"To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address followed by\n" +"<tt>%1</tt> as its Zone Name. Several formats for entering the zone name are\n" "supported: Standard form: <tt>%2</tt>;\n" "Forward form: <tt>%3</tt>;\n" "Forward form without netmask bits: <tt>%4</tt>\n" @@ -2095,8 +2074,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:334 msgid "" "<big>DDNS and Zone Transport</big> \n" -"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control " -"access\n" +"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control access\n" "to the zone.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2140,8 +2118,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:371 msgid "" "<big>NS Records</big> \n" -"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click Add</" -"b>.\n" +"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click Add.\n" "To remove one of the listed name servers, select it and click\n" "Delete.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2161,8 +2138,7 @@ msgid "" "Serial is the number used for determining if the zone has \n" "changed on\n" -"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).\n" msgstr "" @@ -2230,8 +2206,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:452 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "" "NS: Name Server:\n" -"Record Key is a zone name relative to the current zone or an " -"absolute\n" +"Record Key is a zone name relative to the current zone or an absolute\n" "domain name followed by a dot.\n" "Value is a hostname relative to the current zone or fully qualified\n" "hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by an A record.\n" @@ -2253,8 +2228,7 @@ "PTR: Reverse Translation:\n" "Record Key is a full reverse zone name (derived from the IP address)\n" "followed by a dot\n" -"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</" -"tt>)\n" +"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt>)\n" " or a part of reverse zone name relative to the current zone\n" "(such as <tt>1</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> in zone\n" "<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>).\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -208,33 +208,19 @@ #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " -"resource\n" +"Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) " -"of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.\n" -"\t\t\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which " -"is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach " -"the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to " -"the node's partner device.\n" -"\t\t\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being " -"described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and " -"you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk " -"parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and " -"the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be " -"used.\n" -"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/" -"drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'\n" -"\t\t\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " -"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</" -"p>\n" -"\t\t\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " -"backing device is used to store the meta-data.\n" +"\t\t\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.\n" +"\t\t\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.\n" +"\t\t\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be used.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'\n" +"\t\t\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.\n" +"\t\t\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -242,47 +228,25 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\tProtocol\n" -"\t\tProtocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and local TCP send buffer.\n" -"\t\tProtocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and remote buffer cache.\n" -"\t\tProtocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " -"local and remote disk.\n" +"\t\tProtocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.\n" +"\t\tProtocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.\n" +"\t\tProtocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\twfc-timeout: Wait for connection timeout\n" -"\t\tdegr-wfc-timeout: Wait for connection timeout, if this node " -"was a degraded cluster\n" +"\t\tdegr-wfc-timeout: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster\n" "\n" -"\t\ton-io-error: What to do when the lower level device reports io-" -"error to the upper layers\n" +"\t\ton-io-error: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers\n" "\t\tsndbuf-size: The size of the TCP socket send buffer\n" -"\t\tmax-buffers: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " -"DRBD\n" +"\t\tmax-buffers: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD\n" "\n" -"\t\ttimeout: If the partner node fails to send an expected " -"response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is " -"considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must " -"be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, " -"the unit 0.1 seconds.\n" -"\t\tconnect-int: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-" -"alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " -"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " -"unit is 100ms\n" -"\t\tping-int: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " -"packet\n" +"\t\ttimeout: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.\n" +"\t\tconnect-int: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms\n" +"\t\tping-int: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet\n" "\n" -"\t\tmax-epoch-size: The highest number of data blocks between two " -"write barriers\n" -"\t\tko-count: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " -"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " -"default value is 0, which disables this feature.\n" -"\t\trate: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " -"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " -"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " -"KB/sec.\n" -"\t\tal-extents: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " -"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " -"Maximum: 3843)\n" +"\t\tmax-epoch-size: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers\n" +"\t\tko-count: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.\n" +"\t\trate: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.\n" +"\t\tal-extents: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -291,20 +255,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"Check \"Disable IP Verification\" to disable one of drbdadm's " -"sanity check" +msgid "Check \"Disable IP Verification\" to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:118 msgid "" -"Dialog Refresh: The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " -"waited so\n" +"Dialog Refresh: The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " -"seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. " msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -365,25 +365,17 @@ #. Services dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"<big>Starting of services</big> Enable or disable the start " -"of the services fcoe and lldpad at boot time." +msgid "<big>Starting of services</big> Enable or disable the start of the services fcoe and lldpad at boot time." msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"Starting the service fcoe means starting the Fibre Channel over " -"Ethernet service daemon fcoemon which controls the FCoE " -"interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon lldpad." +msgid "Starting the service fcoe means starting the Fibre Channel over Ethernet service daemon fcoemon which controls the FCoE interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon lldpad." msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"The lldpad service provides the Link Layer Discovery Protocol</" -"i> agent daemon lldpad, which informs fcoemon about DCB (Data " -"Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces." +msgid "The lldpad service provides the Link Layer Discovery Protocol agent daemon lldpad, which informs fcoemon about DCB (Data Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces." msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 1/5 @@ -393,37 +385,22 @@ #. Interfaces dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of " -"VLAN and FCoE configuration. FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is " -"configured for FCoE on the switch. For every netcard (network interface), " -"this is shown in column FCoE VLAN Interface." +msgid "The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of VLAN and FCoE configuration. FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is configured for FCoE on the switch. For every netcard (network interface), this is shown in column FCoE VLAN Interface." msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:99 -msgid "" -"It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using Retry " -"Detection(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up)." -"" +msgid "It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using Retry Detection(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up)." msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:103 -msgid "" -"The values for FCoE VLAN Interface in detail: not available</" -"b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the " -"switch first). not configured: FCoE is possible but not yet " -"activated. Press Create FCoE VLAN Interface to activate. If the " -"FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the " -"column, e.g. eth3.200." +msgid "The values for FCoE VLAN Interface in detail: not available: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the switch first). not configured: FCoE is possible but not yet activated. Press Create FCoE VLAN Interface to activate. If the FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the column, e.g. eth3.200." msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:113 -msgid "" -"To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on Change " -"Settings." +msgid "To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on Change Settings." msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 1/3 @@ -433,19 +410,14 @@ #. Configuration dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings " -"are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'." +msgid "Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'." msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:125 msgid "" "The values are: \n" -"Debug: yes or no This is used to enable or disable " -"debugging messages from the fcoe service script and fcoemon." -" Use syslog: yes or no Messages are sent to the " -"system log if set to yes (data are logged to /var/log/messages)." +"Debug: yes or no This is used to enable or disable debugging messages from the fcoe service script and fcoemon. Use syslog: yes or no Messages are sent to the system log if set to yes (data are logged to /var/log/messages)." msgstr "" #. edit dialog help 1/3 @@ -455,20 +427,12 @@ #. Edit dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:137 -msgid "" -"The daemon fcoemon reads these configuration files on " -"initialization. There is a file for every interface and the values " -"indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required." +msgid "The daemon fcoemon reads these configuration files on initialization. There is a file for every interface and the values indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required." msgstr "" #. Edit dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"The values are: FCoE Enable: yes or no Enable " -"or disable the creation of FCoE instances. DCB Required: yes</" -"i> or no The default is yes, DCB is usually required." -" AUTO VLAN: yes or no If set to yes " -"'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically." +msgid "The values are: FCoE Enable: yes or no Enable or disable the creation of FCoE instances. DCB Required: yes or no The default is yes, DCB is usually required. AUTO VLAN: yes or no If set to yes 'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically." msgstr "" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -513,9 +477,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) -> comment from iscsi-client #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:413 -msgid "" -"To continue the FCoE configuration, the %1 package must be " -"installed." +msgid "To continue the FCoE configuration, the %1 package must be installed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:416 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -23,8 +23,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: avahi, RPM: avahi), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:40 -msgid "" -"Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS (mDNS) ports for Service Discovery (DNS-SD)" +msgid "Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS (mDNS) ports for Service Discovery (DNS-SD)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: cyrus-imapd, RPM: cyrus-imapd), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... @@ -118,9 +117,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-client, RPM: nfs-client), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Firewall configuration for NFS client. Open ports for NFS client to allow " -"connection to an NFS server." +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS client. Open ports for NFS client to allow connection to an NFS server." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... @@ -130,9 +127,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:114 -msgid "" -"Firewall configuration for NFS kernel server. Open ports for NFS to allow " -"other hosts to connect." +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS kernel server. Open ports for NFS to allow other hosts to connect." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: ntp, RPM: ntp), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -238,12 +238,10 @@ "\n" "To allow a service, select the Zone and the\n" "Service to Allow then press Add.\n" -"To remove an allowed service, select the Zone and the Allowed " -"Service then press Delete.\n" +"To remove an allowed service, select the Zone and the Allowed Service then press Delete.\n" "\n" "By deselecting Protect Firewall from Internal Zone, you remove\n" -"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network " -"will\n" +"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network will\n" "be unprotected.\n" msgstr "" @@ -251,13 +249,11 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:89 msgid "" "Additional settings can be configured using Advanced.\n" -"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC " -"ports and\n" +"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC ports and\n" "IP protocols.\n" "TCP and UDP ports can be entered as port names (<tt>ftp-data</tt>),\n" "port numbers (<tt>3128</tt>), and port ranges (<tt>8000:8520</tt>).\n" -"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or " -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" +"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or <tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" "Enter IP protocols as the protocol name (<tt>esp</tt>).\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -266,10 +262,8 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:100 msgid "" "<big>Masquerading</big>\n" -" Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your " -"firewall and allows\n" -"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, " -"transparently. Requests\n" +" Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your firewall and allows\n" +"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, transparently. Requests\n" "from the external network to the internal one are blocked.\n" "Select Masquerade Networks to masquerade your networks\n" "to the external network.\n" @@ -279,52 +273,38 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal " -"network, it is possible to\n" -"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal " -"IP. \n" -"To add a new redirect rule, press Add and complete the redirect form." -"\n" +"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal network, it is possible to\n" +"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal IP. \n" +"To add a new redirect rule, press Add and complete the redirect form.\n" "\n" -"To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press Delete</" -"b>.\n" +"To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press Delete.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Simple broadcast configuration dialog help #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<big>Broadcast Configuration</big>\n" -" Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to " -"find \n" +" Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to find \n" "neighboring computers or send information to each computer in the network.\n" -"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues " -"using broadcast packets.\n" +"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues using broadcast packets.\n" "\n" -"SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add " -"needed broadcast\n" -"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated " -"ports for\n" +"SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add needed broadcast\n" +"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated ports for\n" "particular zones.\n" "\n" -"Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of " -"packets in wider networks.\n" -"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect Log Not Accepted Broadcast " -"Packets\n" +"Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of packets in wider networks.\n" +"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets\n" "for the desired zones.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:132 msgid "" "<big>Broadcast Reply</big> \n" -"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their " -"reply\n" -"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP " -"browsing.\n" +"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their reply\n" +"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP browsing.\n" "\n" -"Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the " -"firewall. Use Add\n" -"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also " -"choose from\n" +"Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the firewall. Use Add\n" +"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also choose from\n" "some already defined services or set your rule completely manually.\n" msgstr "" @@ -332,31 +312,24 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:142 msgid "" "<big>IPsec Support</big>\n" -" IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks " -"through untrusted networks, such as\n" +" IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks through untrusted networks, such as\n" "the Internet. This dialog opens IPsec for an external zone using\n" "Enabled.\n" "\n" "Details configures how to handle successfully decrypted\n" -"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the " -"internal zone.\n" +"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the internal zone.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Base Logging configuration dialog help #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<big>Logging Level</big>\n" -" This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. " -"Here,\n" -"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not " -"logged at all.\n" +" This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. Here,\n" +"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not logged at all.\n" "\n" -"There are two groups of logged IP packets: Accepted Packets and " -"Not Accepted Packets.\n" -"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: Log All " -"for logging every\n" -"packet, Log Only Critical for logging only interesting ones, or Do " -"Not Log Any\n" +"There are two groups of logged IP packets: Accepted Packets and Not Accepted Packets.\n" +"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: Log All for logging every\n" +"packet, Log Only Critical for logging only interesting ones, or Do Not Log Any\n" "for no logging. You should log at least critical accepted packets.\n" msgstr "" @@ -365,23 +338,18 @@ msgid "" "<big>Summary</big>\n" " Here, find a summary of your configuration settings.\n" -"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each " -"firewall zone.\n" +"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each firewall zone.\n" "Every existing zone is summarized here.\n" "\n" "Firewall Starting shows whether the firewall is started in the\n" "boot process or only manually.\n" "\n" -"Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the " -"following items in the summary:\n" +"Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the following items in the summary:\n" "\n" -"Interfaces: All interfaces are listed using their configuration " -"name and device name.\n" +"Interfaces: All interfaces are listed using their configuration name and device name.\n" "\n" -"Open Services, Ports, and Protocols: This lists all allowed " -"network services, additional\n" -"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC " -"(Remote Procedure Call)\n" +"Open Services, Ports, and Protocols: This lists all allowed network services, additional\n" +"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC (Remote Procedure Call)\n" "ports, and IP (Internet Protocol) protocols.\n" msgstr "" @@ -406,8 +374,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:193 msgid "" "RPC Ports is a list of RPC services, such as\n" -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces." -"" +"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 4/6 @@ -424,8 +391,7 @@ #. please, do not modify examples #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"The Port Range consists of two colon-separated numbers that " -"represent\n" +"The Port Range consists of two colon-separated numbers that represent\n" "all numbers inside the range including the numbers themselves.\n" "The first port number must be lower than the second one,\n" "for example, <tt>200:215</tt>." @@ -443,8 +409,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:219 msgid "" "<big>Firewall</big> \n" -"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.\n" +"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 1/5 @@ -1018,9 +983,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Network: %1, Protocol: %2, Destination port: %3, Source " -"port: %4, Options: %5" +msgid "Network: %1, Protocol: %2, Destination port: %3, Source port: %4, Options: %5" msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:489 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:492 @@ -1060,8 +1023,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:622 -msgid "" -"Firewall will be stopped after the configuration has been written" +msgid "Firewall will be stopped after the configuration has been written" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item @@ -1177,8 +1139,7 @@ #. (!IsThisExpertConfiguration() ? #. TRANSLATORS: informative label #: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1035 -msgid "" -"Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." +msgid "Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,10 +37,8 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:89 msgid "" -"Check Enable Firstboot Sequence to start YaST firstboot utility on " -"the first boot after configuration.\n" -"Check the documentation of yast2-firstboot module for further information." -"\n" +"Check Enable Firstboot Sequence to start YaST firstboot utility on the first boot after configuration.\n" +"Check the documentation of yast2-firstboot module for further information.\n" msgstr "" #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -201,10 +199,8 @@ #: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:128 msgid "" "If desired, experts can use the full range of SuSE's configuration\n" -"modules at this time. Check Start YaST Control Center and it will " -"start\n" -"after Finish. Note: The Control Center does not have a back button " -"to\n" +"modules at this time. Check Start YaST Control Center and it will start\n" +"after Finish. Note: The Control Center does not have a back button to\n" "return to this installation sequence.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -79,8 +79,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:142 -msgid "" -"The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users (KB/s)" +msgid "The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users (KB/s)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -100,9 +99,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:181 -msgid "" -"Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server " -"(vsftpd only)." +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -112,16 +109,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:199 -msgid "" -"If enabled, this option will permit SSL v2 protocol connections (vsftpd " -"only)." +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v2 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:208 -msgid "" -"If enabled, this option will permit SSL v3 protocol connections (vsftpd " -"only)." +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v3 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -131,9 +124,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded but not validated by a " -"local admin (pure-ftpd only)." +msgid "Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded but not validated by a local admin (pure-ftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -230,8 +221,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:362 -msgid "" -"Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server." +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -1310,8 +1300,7 @@ #: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "Selected Service \n" -" The frame shows which daemon is currently configured: vsftpd, pure-" -"ftpd, \n" +" The frame shows which daemon is currently configured: vsftpd, pure-ftpd, \n" " . If you have installed both daemons you can switch between them.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1370,8 +1359,7 @@ #: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "Umask for Authenticated Users: \n" -"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for authenticated " -"users. \n" +"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for authenticated users. \n" "If you want to specify octal values, remember the \"0\" prefix, otherwise \n" "the value will be treated as a base 10 integer.\n" "\n" @@ -1446,10 +1434,8 @@ msgid "" "Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local Users \n" "Anonymous Only: If enabled, only anonymous logins are permitted.\n" -"Authenticated Users Only: If enabled, only authenticated users are " -"permitted.\n" -"Both If enabled, authenticated users and anonymous users are " -"permitted.\n" +"Authenticated Users Only: If enabled, only authenticated users are permitted.\n" +"Both If enabled, authenticated users and anonymous users are permitted.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1468,8 +1454,7 @@ "Anonymous Can Upload \n" "If enabled anonymous users will be permitted to upload.\n" "vsftpd only: If you want to allow anonymous users to upload, you \n" -"need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after " -"login.\n" +"need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1478,10 +1463,8 @@ msgid "" "Anonymous Can Create Dirs \n" "If enabled, anonymous users can create directories.\n" -"vsftpd only: If you want to allow anonymous users to create " -"directories,\n" -"you need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory " -"after login.\n" +"vsftpd only: If you want to allow anonymous users to create directories,\n" +"you need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.\n" msgstr "" #. -----------================= EXPERT SETTINGS SCREEN =============---------- @@ -1568,8 +1551,7 @@ "Security Settings \n" "Disable SSL/TLS Disable SSL/TLS encryption layer.\n" "Accept SSL and TLS Accept both, traditional and encrypted sessions.\n" -"Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS Refuse connections that do not use " -"SSL/TLS security mechanisms, including anonymous sessions.\n" +"Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS Refuse connections that do not use SSL/TLS security mechanisms, including anonymous sessions.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1734,15 +1716,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1227 -msgid "" -"For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should " -"have no write access.\n" +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1314 -msgid "" -"For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should " -"have no write access." +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access." msgstr "" #. Valid function of "Max Port for Pas. Mode" @@ -1766,9 +1744,7 @@ #. Valid function of "Security Settings" #. check of existing certificate #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1722 -msgid "" -"The <tt>/etc/ssl/private/pure-ftpd.pem</tt> certificate for the SSL " -"connection is missing." +msgid "The <tt>/etc/ssl/private/pure-ftpd.pem</tt> certificate for the SSL connection is missing." msgstr "" #. 0 => anonymous only, 1 => authenticated only, 2=> both @@ -1795,9 +1771,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:839 -msgid "" -"You have installed both daemons. Therefore you have to run the configuration " -"in interactive mode." +msgid "You have installed both daemons. Therefore you have to run the configuration in interactive mode." msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/2 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -18,8 +18,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the Heartbeat module #: src/clients/heartbeat.rb:76 -msgid "" -"Configuration of high availability (HA) cluster using Heartbeat service." +msgid "Configuration of high availability (HA) cluster using Heartbeat service." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for add action @@ -64,8 +63,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for the 'play' option #: src/clients/heartbeat.rb:142 -msgid "" -"Set the communication mode to 'bcast' for broadcast or 'mcast' for multicast." +msgid "Set the communication mode to 'bcast' for broadcast or 'mcast' for multicast." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for the 'play' option @@ -324,8 +322,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "This cluster installation program does not copy the Heartbeat\n" -"software package to cluster nodes. Prior to running this installation " -"program, the\n" +"software package to cluster nodes. Prior to running this installation program, the\n" "Heartbeat software package must be installed on all nodes that will be\n" "part of your cluster." msgstr "" @@ -340,8 +337,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"If you need to specify a different node name after adding a node to the " -"cluster,\n" +"If you need to specify a different node name after adding a node to the cluster,\n" "double-click the node to edit, change its name, then click Edit.\n" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +508,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"Keep Alive specifies the interval at which a node announces itself " -"on\n" +"Keep Alive specifies the interval at which a node announces itself on\n" "the network.\n" msgstr "" @@ -525,16 +520,14 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:223 msgid "" -"Warn Time is the time after which Heartbeat warns in the log " -"files\n" +"Warn Time is the time after which Heartbeat warns in the log files\n" "that a node has been slow in sending its heartbeats. This should\n" "probably default to three times the Keep Alive interval.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:228 msgid "" -"Init Dead Time is the time a node waits after start-up for the " -"other\n" +"Init Dead Time is the time a node waits after start-up for the other\n" "nodes, given that sometimes network interfaces, routing, etc., take a\n" "while to stabilize. It should default to at least twice the Dead Time.\n" msgstr "" @@ -556,16 +549,12 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:244 msgid "" -"If enabled, Heartbeat needs a Ping List of external nodes to " -"ping.\n" -"The minimum if IP fail is enabled is one. A maximum of four to eight nodes " -"seems sensible.\n" +"If enabled, Heartbeat needs a Ping List of external nodes to ping.\n" +"The minimum if IP fail is enabled is one. A maximum of four to eight nodes seems sensible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:247 -msgid "" -"For more complex configurations, Heartbeat also supports Ping Groups</" -"i>." +msgid "For more complex configurations, Heartbeat also supports Ping Groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:250 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -343,38 +343,29 @@ #. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"The Port value defines the port on which Apache2 listens. The " -"default is 80." +msgid "The Port value defines the port on which Apache2 listens. The default is 80." msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:42 -msgid "" -"Listen on Interfaces contains the list of all IP addresses " -"configured for this host. Checked IP addresses are those on which Apache2 " -"listens. If you are unsure, check all." +msgid "Listen on Interfaces contains the list of all IP addresses configured for this host. Checked IP addresses are those on which Apache2 listens. If you are unsure, check all." msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 2/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"Here, enable the script languages the Apache2 server should support." +msgid "Here, enable the script languages the Apache2 server should support." msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"The summary displays the settings that will be written to the Apache2 " -"configuration when you press Finish." +msgid "The summary displays the settings that will be written to the Apache2 configuration when you press Finish." msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "Press HTTP Server Expert Configuration \n" -"\t\tto create a more detailed configuration before writing the configuration." -"" +"\t\tto create a more detailed configuration before writing the configuration." msgstr "" #. module dialog help 1/3 @@ -384,8 +375,7 @@ "The table contains a list of all available Apache2 modules.\n" "The first column contains the name of the module. \n" "The second column shows whether the module should be\n" -"loaded by the server. Enabled modules will be loaded. The last column " -"displays a short description\n" +"loaded by the server. Enabled modules will be loaded. The last column displays a short description\n" "of the module." msgstr "" @@ -393,8 +383,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "To change the status of a module, \n" -"choose the appropriate entry of the table and click Toggle Status.</" -"p>\n" +"choose the appropriate entry of the table and click Toggle Status.\n" msgstr "" #. module dialog help 3/3 @@ -408,8 +397,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "<big>HTTP Server Settings</big> \n" -"Activate the HTTP server by choosing Enabled. To deactivate it, " -"choose\n" +"Activate the HTTP server by choosing Enabled. To deactivate it, choose\n" "Disabled.\n" msgstr "" @@ -440,9 +428,7 @@ #. server configuration overview help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:102 -msgid "" -"Choose an appropriate entry from the table and click Edit to " -"change settings." +msgid "Choose an appropriate entry from the table and click Edit to change settings." msgstr "" #. help of menu button for server configuration 1/1 @@ -455,8 +441,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Configured Hosts</big> \n" "This is a list of already configured hosts. One of the hosts is \n" -"marked as default (the asterisk next to the server name). A default host is " -"used if no other host\n" +"marked as default (the asterisk next to the server name). A default host is used if no other host\n" "matches for an incoming request. To set a host as default,\n" "press Set as Default.\n" msgstr "" @@ -464,49 +449,40 @@ #. hosts list help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:116 msgid "" -"Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click Edit to change " -"the host.\n" -"To add a host, click Add. To remove a host, select it and click " -"Delete." +"Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click Edit to change the host.\n" +"To add a host, click Add. To remove a host, select it and click Delete." msgstr "" #. host editing help 1/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" "<big>Host Configuration</big> \n" -"To edit the host settings, choose the appropriate entry of the table then " -"click Edit.\n" -"To add a new option, click Add. To remove an option, select it and " -"click Delete." +"To edit the host settings, choose the appropriate entry of the table then click Edit.\n" +"To add a new option, click Add. To remove an option, select it and click Delete." msgstr "" #. host editing help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "The Server Resolution options set the resolution when using\n" -"\tvirtual hosts. However, when you choose Resolution via HTTP Headers</" -"b>,\n" +"\tvirtual hosts. However, when you choose Resolution via HTTP Headers,\n" "\tthe default server will never be served requests to the IP address of\n" -"\ta name-based virtual host. If you plan to configure a SSL based vhost, use " -"Resolution via IP address" +"\ta name-based virtual host. If you plan to configure a SSL based vhost, use Resolution via IP address" msgstr "" #. listen dialog editor help 1/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:133 msgid "" "<big>Listen Settings for a Host</big> \n" -"The Listen directive allows selection of ports and network " -"interfaces\n" +"The Listen directive allows selection of ports and network interfaces\n" "where the HTTP server should listen for incoming requests.\n" msgstr "" #. listen dialog editor help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click Edit to change " -"the entry.\n" -"To add a new entry, click Add. To remove an entry, select it and " -"click Delete." +"Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click Edit to change the entry.\n" +"To add a new entry, click Add. To remove an entry, select it and click Delete." msgstr "" #. ssl options dialog help 1/4 @@ -522,8 +498,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:150 msgid "" "General behavior is determined by the SSL option. The host can\n" -"not support SSL at all (<tt>No SSL</tt>), allow both non-SSL and SSL access " -"(<tt>Allowed</tt>),\n" +"not support SSL at all (<tt>No SSL</tt>), allow both non-SSL and SSL access (<tt>Allowed</tt>),\n" "or accept only connections encrypted via SSL (<tt>Required</tt>).\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -531,10 +506,8 @@ #. ssl options dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"Choose an appropriate option of the table and click Edit to change " -"the option.\n" -"To add a new option, click Add. To remove an option, select it and " -"click Delete." +"Choose an appropriate option of the table and click Edit to change the option.\n" +"To add a new option, click Add. To remove an option, select it and click Delete." msgstr "" #. ssl options dialog help 3/4 (empty in simple mode) @@ -558,16 +531,14 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:175 msgid "" "<big>New Host</big> \n" -"This dialog allows you to enter a basic information about a new virtual host." -"" +"This dialog allows you to enter a basic information about a new virtual host." msgstr "" #. new host dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:179 msgid "" "Server Identification specifies the content and\n" -"the presentation of the the new virtual host. Server Name is the DNS " -"name returned as a part\n" +"the presentation of the the new virtual host. Server Name is the DNS name returned as a part\n" "of the HTTP headers of the server response. Server Contents Root\n" "is an absolute path to a directory containing all documents provided by\n" "this virtual host. Administrator E-Mail allows setup of an e-mail\n" @@ -582,11 +553,9 @@ "settings it should use to create a response for an HTTP request. \n" "There are two basic approaches. If using HTTP headers\n" "from the incoming request, the server looks up the host name specified by\n" -"the HTTP request headers. The other possibility is to determine the virtual " -"host\n" +"the HTTP request headers. The other possibility is to determine the virtual host\n" "by the IP address used by the client when connecting to the server.\n" -"If you plan to configure SSL-based vhost, use Resolution via IP address</" -"b>\n" +"If you plan to configure SSL-based vhost, use Resolution via IP address\n" "Consult the Apache2 manual for further details.\n" msgstr "" @@ -594,16 +563,14 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<big>Details for New Host</big> \n" -"This dialog allows you to specify additional information about a new virtual " -"host." +"This dialog allows you to specify additional information about a new virtual host." msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 2/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" "Select Enable CGI Support\n" -"to run CGI scripts in the path in CGI Directory Path using the alias " -"<tt>/cgi-bin/</tt>." +"to run CGI scripts in the path in CGI Directory Path using the alias <tt>/cgi-bin/</tt>." msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 3/5 @@ -617,10 +584,7 @@ #. advanced new host dialog 4/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:215 -msgid "" -"In Directory Index, enter a space-separated list of files that " -"Apache should look for and provide when a URL for a directory (one that ends " -"in <tt>/</tt>) is requested. The first matching file found is provided." +msgid "In Directory Index, enter a space-separated list of files that Apache should look for and provide when a URL for a directory (one that ends in <tt>/</tt>) is requested. The first matching file found is provided." msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 5/5 @@ -745,9 +709,7 @@ #. notification about package needed 1/2 #: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:170 -msgid "" -"To configure the HTTP server, the %1 packages must be installed.</" -"p>" +msgid "To configure the HTTP server, the %1 packages must be installed." msgstr "" #. notification about package needed 2/2 @@ -1415,9 +1377,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:32 -msgid "" -"Mapping different parts of the host file system in the document tree and for " -"URL redirection" +msgid "Mapping different parts of the host file system in the document tree and for URL redirection" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:47 @@ -1441,8 +1401,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:96 -msgid "" -"Generates directory indices, automatically, similar to the Unix ls command" +msgid "Generates directory indices, automatically, similar to the Unix ls command" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:117 @@ -1470,9 +1429,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:187 -msgid "" -"Associates the requested file name's extensions with the file's behavior and " -"content" +msgid "Associates the requested file name's extensions with the file's behavior and content" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:212 @@ -1480,9 +1437,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:222 -msgid "" -"Allows the setting of environment variables based on characteristics of the " -"request" +msgid "Allows the setting of environment variables based on characteristics of the request" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:233 @@ -1510,9 +1465,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:302 -msgid "" -"Allows an LDAP directory to be used to store the database for HTTP Basic " -"authentication" +msgid "Allows an LDAP directory to be used to store the database for HTTP Basic authentication" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:320 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:495 @@ -1544,9 +1497,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:413 -msgid "" -"Pass the response body through an external program before delivery to the " -"client" +msgid "Pass the response body through an external program before delivery to the client" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:426 @@ -1566,9 +1517,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:469 -msgid "" -"LDAP connection pooling and result caching services for use by other LDAP " -"modules" +msgid "LDAP connection pooling and result caching services for use by other LDAP modules" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:489 @@ -1576,8 +1525,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:509 -msgid "" -"Determines the MIME type of a file by looking at a few bytes of its contents" +msgid "Determines the MIME type of a file by looking at a few bytes of its contents" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:518 @@ -1601,8 +1549,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:592 -msgid "" -"Provides a rule-based rewriting engine to rewrite requested URLs on the fly" +msgid "Provides a rule-based rewriting engine to rewrite requested URLs on the fly" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:619 @@ -1610,14 +1557,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:628 -msgid "" -"Strong cryptography using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer " -"Security (TLS) protocols" +msgid "Strong cryptography using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:668 -msgid "" -"Provides an environment variable with a unique identifier for each request" +msgid "Provides an environment variable with a unique identifier for each request" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:674 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -433,15 +433,13 @@ "<big>Services Status:</big> \n" "All services marked with --- are inactive (locked).\n" "All services marked with On are active (unlocked).\n" -"All services marked with NI are not installed and cannot be " -"configured." +"All services marked with NI are not installed and cannot be configured." msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "<big>Changing Service Status:</big> \n" -"Select the service to enable or disable and press Toggle Status (On or " -"Off).\n" +"Select the service to enable or disable and press Toggle Status (On or Off).\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:84 @@ -466,8 +464,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Canceling Configuration:</big>\n" "Leave the configuration untouched by pressing the Cancel button.\n" -"If you do so, all your changes will be lost and the original configuration " -"will remain.\n" +"If you do so, all your changes will be lost and the original configuration will remain.\n" msgstr "" #. Help for the EditOrCreateServiceDlg () dialog. @@ -495,9 +492,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"This is a short description. For details, see info xinetd.conf.</" -"p>\n" +msgid "This is a short description. For details, see info xinetd.conf.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:125 @@ -516,8 +511,7 @@ #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:134 msgid "" -"The protocol must be a valid protocol as specified in /etc/" -"protocols.\n" +"The protocol must be a valid protocol as specified in /etc/protocols.\n" "Examples include tcp,udp,rpc/tcp, and rpc/udp.\n" "\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -34,45 +34,31 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:39 msgid "" -"Use Clone System Settings if you want to create an AutoYaST " -"profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>." +"Use Clone System Settings if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>." msgstr "" -"Uzu la elekteblon Agordoj de la klonsistemo se vi volas krei " -"AutoYaST-profilon.\n" -"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno " -"de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" -"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu " -"elekteblo estas\n" -"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/" -"autoinst.xml</tt>." +"Uzu la elekteblon Agordoj de la klonsistemo se vi volas krei AutoYaST-profilon.\n" +"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" +"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu elekteblo estas\n" +"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>." #. this is a heading #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:68 -#| msgid "Writing the system configuration..." msgid "Clone System Configuration" msgstr "Agordo de la klonsistemo" #. this is a menu entry #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:70 -#| msgid "&Skip Configuration" msgid "&Clone System Configuration" msgstr "&Agordoj de la klonsistemo" #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=" -"\"%1\">do not write it</a>)." -msgstr "" -"La AutoYaST-profilo konserviĝos en /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=\"%1\">ne " -"konversi ĝin</a>)." +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=\"%1\">do not write it</a>)." +msgstr "La AutoYaST-profilo konserviĝos en /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=\"%1\">ne konversi ĝin</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text @@ -117,12 +103,8 @@ msgstr "Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM " -"installation." -msgstr "" -"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti uzi antaŭdifinitajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj el " -"Novell por rapidigi RPM-instaladon." +msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." +msgstr "Ĉi tie vi povas elekti uzi antaŭdifinitajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj el Novell por rapidigi RPM-instaladon." #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:133 msgid "&Install from Images" @@ -133,12 +115,8 @@ msgstr "&Ne Instali el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:153 -msgid "" -"Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation " -"source" -msgstr "" -"Propra disponigo el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj - ĉi tio bezonas agorditan " -"retejan adreson kiel instala fonto." +msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" +msgstr "Propra disponigo el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj - ĉi tio bezonas agorditan retejan adreson kiel instala fonto." #. Image name, Image location #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:162 @@ -146,20 +124,12 @@ msgstr "Ĉi tie vi povas krei proprajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj.\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:163 -msgid "" -"You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an " -"image here" -msgstr "" -"Vi devas unue agordi la program-elektadon antaŭ vi povi krei ekzaktajn " -"kopiojn de diskoj ĉi tie" +msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" +msgstr "Vi devas unue agordi la program-elektadon antaŭ vi povi krei ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj ĉi tie" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during " -"installation)" -msgstr "" -"Krei ekzaktan dosierkopion de disko (AutoYaST venigos ĝin el la elekta loko " -"dum instalado)" +msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" +msgstr "Krei ekzaktan dosierkopion de disko (AutoYaST venigos ĝin el la elekta loko dum instalado)" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:181 msgid "Create Image" @@ -175,8 +145,7 @@ #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:211 msgid "Create ISO (image and autoinst.xml will be on the media)" -msgstr "" -"Krei ISO (ekzakta kopio de disko kaj autoinst.xml estos en la datumportilo)" +msgstr "Krei ISO (ekzakta kopio de disko kaj autoinst.xml estos en la datumportilo)" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #. TRANSLATORS: help text @@ -184,51 +153,37 @@ msgid "" "Installation from Images is used to speed the installation up.\n" "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" -"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in " -"the\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" "images will be installed from packages the standard way.\n" msgstr "" -"Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj estas uzata por rapidigi la " -"instaladon.\n" -"Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj enhavas densigitajn kopiojn el instalita sistemo " -"laŭ via\n" -"selekto de modeloj. La restaj pakaĵoj kiuj ne estas en la diskokopioj " -"instaliĝos el pakaĵoj per ĝenerala maniero.\n" +"Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj estas uzata por rapidigi la instaladon.\n" +"Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj enhavas densigitajn kopiojn el instalita sistemo laŭ via\n" +"selekto de modeloj. La restaj pakaĵoj kiuj ne estas en la diskokopioj instaliĝos el pakaĵoj per ĝenerala maniero.\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:233 msgid "" "Creating own Images is used if you\n" -"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will " -"dump an\n" -"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured " -"already.\n" -"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-" -"installation." +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation." msgstr "" "Krei Proprajn Ekzaktajn Kopiojn de Diskoj estas uzata se vi\n" -"volas preterpasi la kompletan paŝon de RPM-instalado. Anstataŭ AutoYaST " -"ŝutos\n" -"ekzaktan kopion de disko al via fiksita disko, kiu estas multe pli rapida " -"kaj povas esti jam antaŭ-agordita.\n" +"volas preterpasi la kompletan paŝon de RPM-instalado. Anstataŭ AutoYaST ŝutos\n" +"ekzaktan kopion de disko al via fiksita disko, kiu estas multe pli rapida kaj povas esti jam antaŭ-agordita.\n" "Ĉio alia ol RPM-instalado fariĝos dum ordinara aŭtoinstalado." #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:336 src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:347 msgid "you need to do the software selection before creating an image" -msgstr "" -"vi devas fari la programar-elektadon antaŭ krei ekzaktan kopion de disko" +msgstr "vi devas fari la programar-elektadon antaŭ krei ekzaktan kopion de disko" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 msgid "" -"Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages " -"originating from the images will\n" -"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</" -"p>" +"Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created." msgstr "" -"Rimarku kiam instalas el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj, la tempindikoj de " -"ĉiuj pakaĵoj kiuj devenas el diskokopioj\n" -"ne kongruos kun la instala dato sed kun la dato de kiam la diskokopio estis " -"kreita." +"Rimarku kiam instalas el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj, la tempindikoj de ĉiuj pakaĵoj kiuj devenas el diskokopioj\n" +"ne kongruos kun la instala dato sed kun la dato de kiam la diskokopio estis kreita." #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:80 @@ -270,17 +225,13 @@ #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:166 msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)." -msgstr "" -"Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas aktiva (<a href=" -"\"%1\">malaktivigi</a>)." +msgstr "Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas aktiva (<a href=\"%1\">malaktivigi</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:181 msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)." -msgstr "" -"Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas malaktiva (<a href=" -"\"%1\">aktivigi</a>)." +msgstr "Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas malaktiva (<a href=\"%1\">aktivigi</a>)." #. progress step title #: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:70 @@ -405,15 +356,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" "The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" -"Use License Translations... to show the license in all available " -"translations.\n" +"Use License Translations... to show the license in all available translations.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por la daŭrigo de la " -"instalado.\n" -"Uzu la elekteblon Tradukoj de la permesilo... por vidi la permesilon " -"en ĉiuj disponeblaj tradukoj.\n" +"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por la daŭrigo de la instalado.\n" +"Uzu la elekteblon Tradukoj de la permesilo... por vidi la permesilon en ĉiuj disponeblaj tradukoj.\n" "\n" #. help text, continued @@ -462,14 +410,12 @@ #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:230 #: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:139 #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:299 -#| msgid "Release Notes" msgid "Re&lease Notes..." msgstr "E&ldonnotoj..." #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:342 msgid "You must accept the license to install this product" -msgstr "" -"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por instali ĉi tiun produkton" +msgstr "Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por instali ĉi tiun produkton" #. TRANSLATORS: check box, see #ZMD #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:107 @@ -549,20 +495,14 @@ #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:214 msgid "" "Use Clone if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>." +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>." msgstr "" "Uzu la elekteblon Kloni se vi volas krei AutoYaST-profilon.\n" -"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno " -"de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" -"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu " -"elekteblo estas\n" -"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/" -"autoinst.xml</tt>." +"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" +"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu elekteblo estas\n" +"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>." #. Dialog busy message #. TRANSLATORS: busy message @@ -574,10 +514,8 @@ #. #187558 #. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:308 -msgid "" -"To clone the current system, the %1 package must be installed." -msgstr "" -"Por kloni la aktualan sistemon, la %1 pakaĵo vi devas instali." +msgid "To clone the current system, the %1 package must be installed." +msgstr "Por kloni la aktualan sistemon, la %1 pakaĵo vi devas instali." #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:311 msgid "Install it now?" @@ -617,12 +555,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:199 msgid "" "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of " -"packages." +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." msgstr "" "Sencimigo estas ŝaltita.\n" -"YaST malfermos programarmastrumilon por ke vi kontrolu la aktualan staton de " -"la pakaĵoj." +"YaST malfermos programarmastrumilon por ke vi kontrolu la aktualan staton de la pakaĵoj." #. unknown image #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:375 @@ -656,12 +592,8 @@ msgstr "&Disko uzota" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 -msgid "" -"Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk " -"will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." -msgstr "" -"Elektu la diskon kiun oni disponigos por la bildo. Ĉiuj datumoj en la disko " -"perdiĝos kaj la disko estos dispartigita kiel difinite en la bildo." +msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgstr "Elektu la diskon kiun oni disponigos por la bildo. Ĉiuj datumoj en la disko perdiĝos kaj la disko estos dispartigita kiel difinite en la bildo." #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 msgid "Hard Disk for Image Deployment" @@ -694,7 +626,6 @@ msgstr "Agordi &iSCSI-diskoj" #: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 -#| msgid "Saving network configuration..." msgid "Change Net&work Configuration" msgstr "Ŝanĝi agordon de la ret&karto" @@ -739,8 +670,7 @@ #. yes/no popup question #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:168 msgid "Start the software manager to check and install the updates?" -msgstr "" -"Ĉu startigi la programarmastrumilon por kontroli kaj instali ĝisdatigojn?" +msgstr "Ĉu startigi la programarmastrumilon por kontroli kaj instali ĝisdatigojn?" #. check box #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:512 @@ -840,7 +770,6 @@ #. dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:83 -#| msgid "Installation Mode" msgid "Installation Options" msgstr "Instalopcioj" @@ -863,9 +792,6 @@ #. help text for installation method #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:201 -#| msgid "" -#| "<big>Installation Mode</big> \n" -#| "Select what to do:" msgid "<big>Installation Options</big>" msgstr "<big>Instalopcioj</big>" @@ -884,23 +810,17 @@ #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:208 msgid "" "\n" -"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -"select\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" "Include Add-on Products from Separate Media.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Por instali kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj kune kun &product;, " -"elektut\n" +"Por instali kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj kune kun &product;, elektut\n" "Inkluzivi kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj.\n" #. help text: additional help for installation #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:211 -msgid "" -"If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see http://" -"drivers.suse.com site." -msgstr "" -"Se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo, vizitu la " -"retejon http://drivers.suse.com site." +msgid "If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see http://drivers.suse.com site." +msgstr "Se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo, vizitu la retejon http://drivers.suse.com site." #. Error message #: src/clients/inst_license.rb:128 @@ -956,12 +876,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:145 msgid "" "A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" -"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the " -"configuration.\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.\n" msgstr "" "Agordita reto estas neceso por uzi forajn deponejojn\n" -"aŭ kromajn produktojn. Se vi ne uzas forajn deponejojn, preterpasu tiun ĉi " -"agordadon.\n" +"aŭ kromajn produktojn. Se vi ne uzas forajn deponejojn, preterpasu tiun ĉi agordadon.\n" #. error popup #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:187 @@ -975,36 +893,26 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 msgid "" -"At Linux choice is a top priority. openSUSE offers a " -"number \n" -"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major " -"ones \n" +"At Linux choice is a top priority. openSUSE offers a number \n" +"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" "GNOME and KDE." msgstr "" -"Ĉe Linukso elektado estas unuaranga prioritato. openSUSE " -"proponas plurajn \n" +"Ĉe Linukso elektado estas unuaranga prioritato. openSUSE proponas plurajn \n" "malsamajn labortablajn mediojn. Malsupre vi vidas liston de la du ĉefaj \n" "GNOME kaj KDE." #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 msgid "" -"You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal " -"installation patterns)\n" -"that could fit your needs better using the Other option . Later in " -"the software \n" -"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add " -"additional desktop \n" +"You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the Other option . Later in the software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" "environments. This screen allows you to set the default." msgstr "" -"Vi povas elekti instalon kun pluraj alternativoj de labortabla medio (aŭ " -"minimuman ŝabloninstalon)\n" -"kiu plej bone adaptiĝu al viaj bezonoj per la elekteblo Alia. Poste " -"en la selektado \n" -"de programaro aŭ post la instalo, vi povas ŝanĝi vian elekton aŭ aldoni " -"kroman labortablan \n" -"medio. Ĉi tiu ekrano permesas al vi agordi la aprioran labortablan medion.</" -"p>" +"Vi povas elekti instalon kun pluraj alternativoj de labortabla medio (aŭ minimuman ŝabloninstalon)\n" +"kiu plej bone adaptiĝu al viaj bezonoj per la elekteblo Alia. Poste en la selektado \n" +"de programaro aŭ post la instalo, vi povas ŝanĝi vian elekton aŭ aldoni kroman labortablan \n" +"medio. Ĉi tiu ekrano permesas al vi agordi la aprioran labortablan medion." #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:121 @@ -1052,7 +960,6 @@ #. force_reset #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:220 -#| msgid "Automatic Configuration" msgid "Location of Stored Configuration" msgstr "Loko de la enmemorigita agordo" @@ -1140,7 +1047,6 @@ #. menu button #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:998 src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1171 -#| msgid "&Skip Configuration" msgid "&Export Configuration" msgstr "&Elporti agordojn" @@ -1148,8 +1054,7 @@ #. May contain newlines, but don't make it very much longer than the original. #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1069 msgid "Click a headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." -msgstr "" -"Alklaku titolon por fari ŝanĝojn aŭ uzu la menueron \"Ŝanĝi...\" malsupre." +msgstr "Alklaku titolon por fari ŝanĝojn aŭ uzu la menueron \"Ŝanĝi...\" malsupre." #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1073 msgid "Click a headline to make changes." @@ -1178,13 +1083,11 @@ #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1217 msgid "" "\n" -"Select Install to perform a new installation with the values " -"displayed.\n" +"Select Install to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Elektu Instali por efektivigi novan instaladon kun la videblaj " -"valoroj.\n" +"Elektu Instali por efektivigi novan instaladon kun la videblaj valoroj.\n" "\n" #. kicking out, bug #203811 @@ -1215,8 +1118,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Via fiksita disko ankoraŭ ne estas modifita. Vi povas ankoraŭ sendanĝere " -"halti.\n" +"Via fiksita disko ankoraŭ ne estas modifita. Vi povas ankoraŭ sendanĝere halti.\n" "\n" #. Help text for update proposal @@ -1303,8 +1205,7 @@ msgstr "" "Eble kelkaj proponoj estas\n" "blokitaj de la administranto de la sistemo kaj ne eblas ŝanĝi ilin. Se vi \n" -"bezonas ŝanĝi unu el la blokitaj proponoj, kontaktu la sistemadministranton." -"\n" +"bezonas ŝanĝi unu el la blokitaj proponoj, kontaktu la sistemadministranton.\n" #. FATE #120373 #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1369 @@ -1461,12 +1362,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:241 msgid "" "\n" -"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " -"installation." +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." msgstr "" "\n" -"Kontrolu 'drivers.suse.com' se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la " -"instalo." +"Kontrolu 'drivers.suse.com' se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo." #. pop-up error report #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:255 @@ -1567,12 +1466,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:245 msgid "" "Here you see all software repositories found\n" -"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the " -"upgrade process." +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process." msgstr "" "Ĉi tie vi povas vidi ĉiujn programardeponejojn trovitajn\n" -"en la sistemo kiun vi promocias. Ŝaltu tiujn kiujn vi volas inkluzivigi en " -"la promocian procezon." +"en la sistemo kiun vi promocias. Ŝaltu tiujn kiujn vi volas inkluzivigi en la promocian procezon." #. TRANSLATORS: help text 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:249 @@ -1581,8 +1478,7 @@ "Toggle Status button or double-click on the respective table item." msgstr "" "Por ŝalti, forigi aŭ malŝalti URL, klaku sur\n" -"la butono Ŝanĝi staton aŭ duoble alklaku la kocernan elementon de la " -"tabelo." +"la butono Ŝanĝi staton aŭ duoble alklaku la kocernan elementon de la tabelo." #. TRANSLATORS: help text 3/3 #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:253 @@ -2059,8 +1955,7 @@ #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 1/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:246 msgid "Information required to perform an update is now complete." -msgstr "" -"La postulata informo por efektivigi ĝisdatigon estas nun kompleta." +msgstr "La postulata informo por efektivigi ĝisdatigon estas nun kompleta." #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 2/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:248 @@ -2091,29 +1986,22 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:63 -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)." msgid "Blacklist devices enabled (<a href=\"%s\">disable</a>)." msgstr "Nigra listo de disponaĵoj ŝaltita (<a href=\"%s\">malŝalti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:69 -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)." msgid "Blacklist devices disabled (<a href=\"%s\">enable</a>)." msgstr "Nigra listo de disponaĵoj malŝaltita (<a href=\"%s\">ŝalti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:78 -msgid "" -"Use Blacklist devices if you want to create blacklist channels to " -"such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint." -msgstr "" -"Uzu elekteblon Nigra listo de disponaĵoj se vi volas krei liston " -"de disponaĵoj blokotaj por malpligrandigi la memoron uzotan de la kerno." +msgid "Use Blacklist devices if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint." +msgstr "Uzu elekteblon Nigra listo de disponaĵoj se vi volas krei liston de disponaĵoj blokotaj por malpligrandigi la memoron uzotan de la kerno." #. progress step title #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:135 -#| msgid "Starting service %1..." msgid "Blacklisting Devices..." msgstr "Listigado je nigra listo de disponaĵoj..." @@ -2126,7 +2014,6 @@ #. #. @return String #: src/lib/installation/remote_finish_client.rb:68 -#| msgid "Finishing the installation..." msgid "Enabling remote administration..." msgstr "Ŝaltado de fora administrado..." @@ -2154,7 +2041,6 @@ #. #. @return [Boolean] if successful #: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1348 -#| msgid "Storing user preferences..." msgid "Restoring user preferences..." msgstr "Restaŭrado de la uzantpreferoj..." @@ -2215,8 +2101,7 @@ #~ msgid "Hardware Information of the Selected Network Card" #~ msgstr "Aparatinformoj de la Elektita Retkarto" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately." +#~ msgid "Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately." #~ msgstr "Ĉi tie vi povas agordi viajn retkartojn kaj tuj uzi ilin." #~ msgid "IP address cannot be empty." @@ -2369,8 +2254,7 @@ #~ "Please, attach all YaST logs stored in the '%2' directory.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Indas raporti ĉi tio eraro ĉe %1.\n" -#~ "Bonvole, kunmetu ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo " -#~ "'%2'.\n" +#~ "Bonvole, kunmetu ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo '%2'.\n" #~ msgid "Checking free space" #~ msgstr "Kontrolante liberan lokon" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -333,16 +333,14 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:39 msgid "" "If you need to restrict access to the exported directories to certain \n" -"hosts, add a more restrictive wild card mask. For example, use " -"192.168.1.0/24\n" +"hosts, add a more restrictive wild card mask. For example, use 192.168.1.0/24\n" "to restrict access to the 192.168.1.0 subnet.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:45 msgid "" -"Additionally, set the export options. For more details about the " -"available\n" +"Additionally, set the export options. For more details about the available\n" "options, see the manual page for exports (man exports(5))\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -376,8 +374,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:66 msgid "" -"The installation server will be available to clients using the following " -"URL:\n" +"The installation server will be available to clients using the following URL:\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -403,8 +400,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "Select a short and easy to remember alias. For example, if you select\n" -"SUSE as the alias, the repositories will be available as shown " -"below:\n" +"SUSE as the alias, the repositories will be available as shown below:\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:81 @@ -421,8 +417,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"The repository name is used to create a directory under which all " -"product\n" +"The repository name is used to create a directory under which all product\n" "CDs are copied and managed. The repository is accessed using the\n" "configured protocol (NFS, FTP, or HTTP). \n" msgstr "" @@ -433,24 +428,20 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"SLP (Service Location Protocol) facilitates finding an installation " -"server. \n" +"SLP (Service Location Protocol) facilitates finding an installation server. \n" "If checked, the repository will be announced on the network using SLP.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:95 msgid "" -"Select a source drive from the list, insert the first medium of a base " -"product, and press\n" +"Select a source drive from the list, insert the first medium of a base product, and press\n" "Next to copy the content into the local repository.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:98 msgid "" -"When the base media are copied to the local repository, you can add " -"additional\n" -"CDs to the repository (for example, Service Pack CDs or any add-on CDs).</" -"p>\n" +"When the base media are copied to the local repository, you can add additional\n" +"CDs to the repository (for example, Service Pack CDs or any add-on CDs).\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:101 @@ -459,8 +450,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"ISO images can be used instead of CD or DVD media. If you press Next</" -"b>, you can\n" +"ISO images can be used instead of CD or DVD media. If you press Next, you can\n" "select ISO image files.\n" msgstr "" @@ -505,11 +495,9 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:129 msgid "" "Adding a Repository: \n" -"Unconfigured directories are detected in the repository directory and then " -"made \n" +"Unconfigured directories are detected in the repository directory and then made \n" "available for configuration.\n" -"To add a repository, select it from the list of unconfigured repositories " -"and press Configure.\n" +"To add a repository, select it from the list of unconfigured repositories and press Configure.\n" msgstr "" #. Summary dialog help 3/3 @@ -546,8 +534,7 @@ #. Read service data using _auto #: src/modules/Instserver.rb:306 msgid "" -"The FTP installation server requires an FTP server package. The vsftpd " -"package\n" +"The FTP installation server requires an FTP server package. The vsftpd package\n" "will now be installed.\n" msgstr "" @@ -560,8 +547,7 @@ #: src/modules/Instserver.rb:458 msgid "" -"The HTTP installation server requires an HTTP server package. The apache2 " -"package\n" +"The HTTP installation server requires an HTTP server package. The apache2 package\n" "will now be installed." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,151 +178,88 @@ "Default: 10 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>check timeout</big> = n\n" -"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>failure count</big> = n\n" -"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 1\n" "\n" "<big>negotiate timeout</big> = n\n" "Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" -"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" -"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" +"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" -"<big>log file</big> = \"/path/to/logfile\"|" -"syslog_facility\n" -"An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the " -"logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <a href=\"/" -"man/3/syslog\">syslog</a>(3) facility name.\n" +"<big>log file</big> = \"/path/to/logfile\"|syslog_facility\n" +"An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <a href=\"/man/3/syslog\">syslog</a>(3) facility name.\n" "Default: log directly to the file /var/log/ldirectord.log.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert</big> = \"emailaddress\"\n" -"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert freq</big> = n\n" -"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 0\n" "\n" -"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting</" -"b>|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" -"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. all is a short-hand for\n" -"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If " -"none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" +"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. all is a short-hand for\n" +"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: all\n" "\n" "<big>callback</big> = \"/path/to/callback\"\n" -"If this directive is defined, ldirectord automatically calls " -"the executable /path/to/callback after the configuration file has " -"changed on\n" -"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through scp on " -"the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name " -"of the\n" +"If this directive is defined, ldirectord automatically calls the executable /path/to/callback after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through scp on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" "configuration.\n" -"This directive might also be used to restart ldirectord " -"automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if " -"autoreload is\n" +"This directive might also be used to restart ldirectord automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if autoreload is\n" "set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" "\n" "<big>execute</big> = \"configuration\"\n" -"Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named " -"configuration.\n" +"Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named configuration.\n" "\n" "<big>auto reload</big> = yes|no\n" -"Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the " -"configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the " -"configuration file changed\n" -"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous " -"version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" "<big>quiescent</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS</" -"small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: yes\n" "\n" "<big>fork</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every " -"virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will " -"increase\n" -"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many " -"virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate " -"instances\n" +"If yes, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" "of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" "<big>supervised</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All " -"log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful " -"to run\n" -"ldirectord supervised from daemontools. See <a href=\"http://" -"untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</" -"a> or <a href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/" -"daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" +"If yes, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"ldirectord supervised from daemontools. See <a href=\"http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or <a href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" "Default: no\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -330,87 +267,42 @@ #: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "\n" -"<big>virtual server</big> = (ip_address|hostname:portnumber|" -"servicename)|firewall-mark\n" -"Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than " -"zero. The\n" -"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> " -"option to ipchains(8). All real services and flags for a virtual " -"service\n" +"<big>virtual server</big> = (ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark\n" +"Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to ipchains(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" "must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>real servers</big> = ip_address|hostname[->" -"ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename]\n" -"gate|masq|ipip [weight] [\"request</" -"i>\", \"receive\"]\n" -"Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended " -"primarily for\n" -"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a " -"range of IP addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in " -"which case\n" -"each IP address in the range will be treated as a real server " -"using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, " -"must be\n" -"gate, ipip or masq. The thrid argument is optional and " -"defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will " -"be\n" -"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-" -"receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the " -"request-receive\n" -"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the " -"request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" -"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server " -"is used.\n" -"For TCP and UDP (non fwmark) virtual " -"services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the IP " -"address of a\n" -"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running " -"ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its " -"virtual\n" -"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is " -"another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way " -"that the\n" +"<big>real servers</big> = ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename]\n" +"gate|masq|ipip [weight] [\"request\", \"receive\"]\n" +"Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of IP addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each IP address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"gate, ipip or masq. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"For TCP and UDP (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the IP address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" "underlying LVS code in the kernel functions.\n" -"More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The " -"checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, " -"emailalertfreq and\n" -"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in " -"which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>check type</big> = connect|external|negotiate</" -"b>|off|on|ping|checktimeoutN\n" -"Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a " -"receive string. Connect only attemts to make a TCP/IP " -"connection, thus the\n" -"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then " -"negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one " -"negotiate\n" -"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and " -"in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" -"ICMP ping will be used to test the availability of real " -"servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for UDP " -"services. Off\n" -"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be " -"activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always " -"be\n" +"<big>check type</big> = connect|external|negotiate|off|on|ping|checktimeoutN\n" +"Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a TCP/IP connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"ICMP ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for UDP services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" "activated. Default is negotiate.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>service</big> = dns|ftp|http|https|" -"imap|imaps|ldap|mysql|nntp|none|" -"oracle|pgsql|pop|pops|radius|" -"simpletcp|sip|smtp\n" -"The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None " -"denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" -"simpletcp sends the request string to the server and tests it " -"against the receive regexp. The other types of checks connect to the " -"server\n" -"using the specified protocol. Please see the request and receive</" -"b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"<big>service</big> = dns|ftp|http|https|imap|imaps|ldap|mysql|nntp|none|oracle|pgsql|pop|pops|radius|simpletcp|sip|smtp\n" +"The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"simpletcp sends the request string to the server and tests it against the receive regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the request and receive sections for protocol specific information.\n" "Default:\n" "<dl compact=\"compact\">\n" "<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" @@ -433,9 +325,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>check command</big> = \"path to script\"\n" -"This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be " -"run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if " -"everything\n" +"This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" "is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" "Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" "</dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" @@ -446,105 +336,68 @@ "\n" "\n" "<big>check port</big> = n\n" -"Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service " -"port.\n" +"Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" "Default: port specified for each real server\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>request</big> = \"uri to requested object\"</" -"b>\n" -"This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real " -"server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be " -"overridden by\n" +"<big>request</big> = \"uri to requested object\"\n" +"This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" "an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" -"For a DNS check this should the name of an A record, " -"or the address of a PTR record to look up.\n" -"For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an SQL</" -"small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one " -"or more\n" +"For a DNS check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a PTR record to look up.\n" +"For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an SQL query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" "rows. This is a required setting.\n" -"For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any " -"occurances of \n" +"For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" " are replaced with a new line character.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>receive</big> = \"regexp to compare\"\n" -"If the requested result contains this regexp to compare, the " -"real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in " -"mind that\n" -"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special " -"characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be " -"overridden by an\n" +"If the requested result contains this regexp to compare, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" "optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" -"For a DNS check this should be any one the A record's " -"addresses or any one of the PTR record's names.\n" +"For a DNS check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the PTR record's names.\n" "For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" "\n" "\n" -"<big>http method</big> = GET | HEAD</" -"small>\n" -"Sets the HTTP method which should be used to fetch the " -"URI specified in the request-string. GET is " -"the\n" -"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If HEAD " -"is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"<big>http method</big> = GET | HEAD\n" +"Sets the HTTP method which should be used to fetch the URI specified in the request-string. GET is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If HEAD is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" "Default: GET\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>virtual host</big> = \"hostname\"\n" -"Used when using a negotiate check with HTTP or " -"HTTPS . Sets the host header used in the HTTP " -"request. In the\n" -"case of HTTPS this generally needs to match the common name " -"of the SSL certificate. If not set then the host header will " -"be\n" -"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last " -"resort the IP address of the real server will be used.\n" +"Used when using a negotiate check with HTTP or HTTPS . Sets the host header used in the HTTP request. In the\n" +"case of HTTPS this generally needs to match the common name of the SSL certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the IP address of the real server will be used.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>login</big> = \"username\"\n" -"For FTP , IMAP , LDAP , " -"MySQL, Oracle, POP and PostgreSQL, the username used to log " -"in.\n" +"For FTP , IMAP , LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" "For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" -"For SIP , the username is used as both the to and from " -"address for an OPTIONS query.\n" +"For SIP , the username is used as both the to and from address for an OPTIONS query.\n" "Default:\n" "</dt><dt>* FTP: Anonymous\n" -"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the " -"configuration\n" -"</dt><dt>* SIP: ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is " -"derived as per the passwd option below.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication " -"will not be attempted.\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* SIP: ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>password</big> = \"password\"\n" -"Password to use to login to FTP , IMAP , " -"LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP , PostgreSQL and\n" +"Password to use to login to FTP , IMAP , LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, POP , PostgreSQL and\n" "SIP servers.\n" "For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" "Default:\n" -"</dt><dt>* FTP: ldirectord@<hostname>, where " -"hostname is the environment variable HOSTNAME evaluated at " -"run time, or sourced\n" +"</dt><dt>* FTP: ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable HOSTNAME evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" "from uname if unset.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of LDAP , " -"MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be " -"performed.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of LDAP , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><big>database name</big> = \"databasename\"\n" -"Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the " -"database that the query (set by receive above) will be performed " -"against. This\n" +"Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by receive above) will be performed against. This\n" "is a required setting.\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>radius secret</big> = \"radiussecret\"\n" -"Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform " -"an Access-Request with the username (set by login above) and passwd " -"(set by\n" +"Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by login above) and passwd (set by\n" "passwd above).\n" "Default: empty string\n" "\n" @@ -558,120 +411,73 @@ "\n" "\n" "<big>scheduler</big> = scheduler_name\n" -"Scheduler to be used by LVS for loadbalancing. For an " -"information on the available sehedulers please see the <a href=\"ipvsadm" -"\">ipvsadm</a>(8) man page.\n" +"Scheduler to be used by LVS for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <a href=\"ipvsadm\">ipvsadm</a>(8) man page.\n" "Default: \"wrr\"\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>protocol</big> = tcp|udp|fwm\n" -"Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an IP</" -"small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall " -"mark then the\n" +"Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an IP address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" "protocol must be fwm.\n" "Default:\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the " -"port is not 53: tcp\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is " -"53: udp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an IP address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" "</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" "</dt></dl>\n" "\n" "\n" "<big>check timeout</big> = n\n" -"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>negotiate timeout</big> = n\n" "Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" "<big>failure count</big> = n\n" -"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 1\n" "\n" "<big>email alert</big> = \"emailaddress\"\n" -"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>email alert freq</big> = n\n" -"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: 0\n" "\n" -"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting</" -"b>|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" -"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. all is a short-hand for\n" -"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If " -"none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"<big>email alert status</big> = all|none|starting|running|stopping|reloading,...\n" +"Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. all is a short-hand for\n" +"\"starting,running,stopping,reloading\". If none is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: all\n" "\n" -"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" -"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"<big>fallback</big> = ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename] [gate|masq|ipip]\n" +"the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "<big>quiescent</big> = yes|no\n" -"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"If yes, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's LVS table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS</" -"small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" -"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, LVS support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"If no, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's LVS table. The default is yes.\n" +"If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "Default: yes\n" "\n" "\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -302,8 +302,7 @@ #. table of connected targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:90 msgid "" -"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press Add</" -"b>.\n" +"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press Add.\n" "To remove it, press Log Out.\n" "To change the start-up status, press Toggle.\n" msgstr "" @@ -315,46 +314,34 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:97 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"When accessing an iSCSI device READ/WRITE, make sure that " -"this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data " -"corruption.\n" +msgid "When accessing an iSCSI device READ/WRITE, make sure that this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data corruption.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:100 msgid "" -"InitiatorName is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</" -"tt>. \n" -"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only " -"able to change it in the BIOS setup." +"InitiatorName is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>. \n" +"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only able to change it in the BIOS setup." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:103 msgid "" -"If you want to use iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) for " -"discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" -"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should " -"be 3205.\n" +"If you want to use iSNS (Internet Storage Name Service) for discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" +"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should be 3205.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "Enter the IP Address of the discovered server.\n" -"Only change Port if needed. For authentication, use Username " -"and Password. If you do not need authentication,\n" +"Only change Port if needed. For authentication, use Username and Password. If you do not need authentication,\n" "select No Authentication.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click " -"Connect. " +msgid "List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click Connect. " msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:129 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication and enter the Username and " -"Password." +msgid "Select the type of authentication and enter the Username and Password." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:132 @@ -365,19 +352,15 @@ msgid "" "manual is for iSCSI targets which are not to be connected by\n" "default, the user needs to connect them manually\n" -"onboot is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. " -"when\n" +"onboot is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. when\n" "root is on iSCSI. As such it will be evaluated by the initrd.\n" -"automatic is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI " -"service\n" +"automatic is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI service\n" "starts up.\n" msgstr "" #. list of discovered targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:142 -msgid "" -"List of discovered targets. Start a new Discovery or Connect " -"to any target." +msgid "List of discovered targets. Start a new Discovery or Connect to any target." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:145 @@ -471,9 +454,7 @@ #. check if not already connected #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:771 #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:891 -msgid "" -"The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that " -"multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." +msgid "The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:774 @@ -504,9 +485,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) #. skip it during second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:96 -msgid "" -"To configure the iSCSI initiator, the %1 package must be installed." -"" +msgid "To configure the iSCSI initiator, the %1 package must be installed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:99 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -357,44 +357,27 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of " -"Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert " -"User and Password." +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert User and Password." msgstr "" #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " -"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is " -"InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi " -"initiator). Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." +msgid "Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 -msgid "" -"With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " -"target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the " -"type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both " -"together. Then insert User and Password. If Use " -"Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is " -"disabled here." +msgid "With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both together. Then insert User and Password. If Use Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is disabled here." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " -"the LUN." +msgid "Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN." msgstr "" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " -"clicking Add.\n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Edit or Delete</" -"b>." +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking Add.\n" +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Edit or Delete." msgstr "" #. edit target @@ -406,11 +389,9 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"LUN.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a LUN.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN</" -"b>. \n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" @@ -418,8 +399,7 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which " -"address\n" +"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" @@ -430,27 +410,21 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN</" -"b>. \n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional " -"configuration options." +msgid "It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional configuration options." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 msgid "" -"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing " -"purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and " -"Sectors are optional." +"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and Sectors are optional." msgstr "" #. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -297,25 +297,19 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:117 msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of " -"Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert " -"User and Password.\n" -"For incoming authentication, it is possible to Add more pairs or " -"Edit or Delete them." +"Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert User and Password.\n" +"For incoming authentication, it is possible to Add more pairs or Edit or Delete them." msgstr "" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:121 msgid "" "List of offered targets. Create a new target by clicking Add. \n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Modify or Delete</" -"b>." +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Modify or Delete." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"It is possible to change the Path to block devices, regular files, " -"LVM, or RAID.\n" +msgid "It is possible to change the Path to block devices, regular files, LVM, or RAID.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:131 @@ -332,17 +326,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:141 -msgid "" -"It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional " -"configuration options." +msgid "It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional configuration options." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing " -"purposes). \n" -"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and " -"Sectors are optional." +"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing purposes). \n" +"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and Sectors are optional." msgstr "" #. extract ScsiId Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -155,49 +155,25 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service " -"are displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " -"targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node " -"removes it from the iSNS database." +msgid "The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database." msgstr "" #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 -msgid "" -"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create</" -"b> a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the " -"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " -"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " -"domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " -"Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " -"does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not " -"yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When " -"the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this " -"domain When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS " -"service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same " -"Discovery Domains. " +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains. " msgstr "" #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " -"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a " -"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS " -"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " -"Domains contain iSCSI Node members." +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members." msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "" -"The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " -"discovery domain set is selected." +msgid "The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected." msgstr "" #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** @@ -255,9 +231,7 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 -msgid "" -"To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed.</" -"p>" +msgid "To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -48,23 +48,17 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:116 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] Please enter only " -"\"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:127 -msgid "" -"The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the " -"kdump kernel." +msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:138 -msgid "" -"Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command " -"line string." +msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -94,9 +88,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:189 -msgid "" -"SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes " -"password (plain text file)." +msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -141,9 +133,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:254 -msgid "" -"Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, " -"nfs, cifs" +msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, nfs, cifs" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -183,9 +173,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:302 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] kernel means " -"only \"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -195,9 +183,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:316 -msgid "" -"Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 " -"or s are allowed" +msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -422,8 +408,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:809 -msgid "" -"Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message @@ -735,8 +720,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 msgid "" "Enable/Disable Kdump \n" -" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/" -"removed. \n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" " To apply changes, a reboot is necessary. \n" msgstr "" @@ -752,12 +736,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 msgid "" "Firmware-Assisted Dump \n" -" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take " -"place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-" -"assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which " -"allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the " -"previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has " -"more than 1.5 GB of memory." +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory." msgstr "" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 @@ -775,10 +754,8 @@ "Dump Format \n" " No Dump - Only save the kernel log. \n" " ELF Format - Create dump file in the ELF format. \n" -" Compressed Format - Compress dump data by each page with gzip." -" \n" -" LZO Compressed Format - Slightly bigger files but much faster." -" \n" +" Compressed Format - Compress dump data by each page with gzip. \n" +" LZO Compressed Format - Slightly bigger files but much faster. \n" "" msgstr "" @@ -786,8 +763,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "Saving Target for Kdump Image \n" -" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving " -"dumps. " +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps. " msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/6 @@ -795,8 +771,7 @@ msgid "" "Local Filestem - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" " Directory for Saving Dumps - The path for saving kdump images.\n" -" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing " -"Browse\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing Browse\n" " " msgstr "" @@ -808,8 +783,7 @@ " Port - The port number for connection.\n" " Directory on Server - The path for saving kdump images.\n" " Enable Anonymous FTP enables anonymous connection to server.\n" -" User Name for ftp connection. Password for ftp connection." -" " +" User Name for ftp connection. Password for ftp connection. " msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/6 @@ -878,8 +852,7 @@ msgid "" "Enable Delete Old Dump Images - \n" " Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" -" Number of Old Dumps exceeds this number, older dumps are removed." -" " +" Number of Old Dumps exceeds this number, older dumps are removed. " msgstr "" #. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 @@ -894,48 +867,39 @@ #. SMTP Server #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"SMTP Server used for sending a notification email after a dump." +msgid "SMTP Server used for sending a notification email after a dump." msgstr "" #. SMTP User Name #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "User Name for SMTP authetication when SMTP Server is\n" -" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, " -"plain SMTP will be used.\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.\n" msgstr "" #. SMTP Password #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:159 msgid "" -"Password for SMTP authetication when SMTP Server is set. " -"This\n" -" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP " -"will be used.\n" +"Password for SMTP authetication when SMTP Server is set. This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.\n" msgstr "" #. Notification To (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:163 -msgid "" -"Notification To Specify the email address to which a notification " -"email will be sent when a dump has been saved.\n" +msgid "Notification To Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.\n" msgstr "" #. Notification CC (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:167 msgid "" -"Notification CC Specify a list of space-separated email addresses " -"to\n" -" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</" -"p>\n" +"Notification CC Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.\n" msgstr "" #. Number of Old Dumps (number) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"Number of Old Dumps specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the " -"number of dump files \n" +"Number of Old Dumps specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" "exceeds this number, older dumps are removed." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -520,16 +520,13 @@ #. Help text: ask for database backend 2/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the " -"credentials." +msgid "<big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the credentials." msgstr "" #. Help text: ask for database backend 3/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:63 msgid "" -"<big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new " -"LDAP server\n" +"<big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new LDAP server\n" "on this machine and use it as database back-end.\n" msgstr "" @@ -542,16 +539,12 @@ #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server." +msgid "Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server." msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" +msgid "Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 1/6 @@ -570,32 +563,27 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 2/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:87 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP " -"server." +msgid "With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP server." msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 4/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default." msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:95 msgid "" -"<big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the " -"LDAP server.\n" +"<big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "Only read access is required for this account.\n" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"<big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to " -"the LDAP server.\n" +"<big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "This account also needs write access.\n" msgstr "" @@ -607,8 +595,7 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 3/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default.\n" msgstr "" @@ -620,22 +607,18 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:117 msgid "" -"If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, " -"the password you entered\n" +"If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, the password you entered\n" "as the KDC Master password is also used for the LDAP administrator. \n" msgstr "" #. Help text: New LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the " -"LDAP administrator." +msgid "When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the LDAP administrator." msgstr "" #. Help text: Summary 1/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:125 -msgid "" -"This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration." +msgid "This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration." msgstr "" #. Help text: Summary 2/3 @@ -645,46 +628,33 @@ #. Help text: Summary 3/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:133 -msgid "" -"You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the Edit</" -"b> button." +msgid "You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the Edit button." msgstr "" #. ============================================================================== #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:139 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</" -"p>" +msgid "This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:147 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database." msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm." +msgid "This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:155 -msgid "" -"These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm." +msgid "These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:158 @@ -729,9 +699,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:181 @@ -740,12 +708,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:183 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:186 @@ -754,9 +717,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:188 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:191 @@ -765,9 +726,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:196 @@ -776,10 +735,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:201 @@ -788,10 +744,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:203 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:206 @@ -809,50 +762,34 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:215 -msgid "" -"The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done." +msgid "The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:219 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:223 -msgid "" -"This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm." +msgid "This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:227 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash." +msgid "This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:231 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm." +msgid "This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:235 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M." +msgid "This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -862,69 +799,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:243 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:247 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:251 -msgid "" -"A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm." +msgid "A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:255 -msgid "" -"Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm." +msgid "Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" +msgid "Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:263 -msgid "" -"This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server." +msgid "This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:267 -msgid "" -"This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." +msgid "This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:271 -msgid "" -"Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</" -"p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree." +msgid "Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:275 -msgid "" -"Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." +msgid "Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -934,9 +849,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"" +msgid "Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog contents @@ -1123,52 +1036,52 @@ msgid "Configuration of the Kerberos Server" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2514 msgid "Database Backend: " msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2518 msgid "Database Name:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2522 msgid "Realm: " msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2527 msgid "KDC Ports:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2532 msgid "kadmind Port:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2537 msgid "kpasswd Port:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2543 msgid "LDAP Server URI:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2546 msgid "Kerberos Container DN:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2549 msgid "KDC bind DN:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2552 msgid "Kadmin bind DN:" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -184,12 +184,7 @@ #. help text (do not transl. values "m","h", "d") #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:61 -msgid "" -"By default, the time unit of Default Lifetime, Default " -"Renewable Lifetime, and Clock Skew is set to seconds. " -"Alternatively, specify the time unit (<tt>m</tt> for minutes, <tt>h</tt> for " -"hours, or <tt>d</tt> for days) and use it as a value suffix, as in <tt>1d</" -"tt> or <tt>24h</tt> for one day." +msgid "By default, the time unit of Default Lifetime, Default Renewable Lifetime, and Clock Skew is set to seconds. Alternatively, specify the time unit (<tt>m</tt> for minutes, <tt>h</tt> for hours, or <tt>d</tt> for days) and use it as a value suffix, as in <tt>1d</tt> or <tt>24h</tt> for one day." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -204,11 +199,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:115 -msgid "" -"Forwardable lets you transfer your complete identity (TGT) to " -"another machine. Proxiable only lets you transfer particular tickets. " -"Select wheter the options should be applied to all PAM services, none of " -"them or enter a list of services separated by spaces." +msgid "Forwardable lets you transfer your complete identity (TGT) to another machine. Proxiable only lets you transfer particular tickets. Select wheter the options should be applied to all PAM services, none of them or enter a list of services separated by spaces." msgstr "" #. checkbox label @@ -223,24 +214,17 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:144 -msgid "" -"If Retained is enabled, a PAM module keeps the tickets after " -"closing the session." +msgid "If Retained is enabled, a PAM module keeps the tickets after closing the session." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:159 -msgid "" -"To enable Kerberos support for your OpenSSH client, select Kerberos " -"Support for OpenSSH Client. In this case, Kerberos tickets are used for " -"user authentication on the SSH server." +msgid "To enable Kerberos support for your OpenSSH client, select Kerberos Support for OpenSSH Client. In this case, Kerberos tickets are used for user authentication on the SSH server." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Check Ignore Unknown Users to have Kerberos ignore authentication " -"attempts by users it does not know." +msgid "Check Ignore Unknown Users to have Kerberos ignore authentication attempts by users it does not know." msgstr "" #. intfield label @@ -250,10 +234,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:190 -msgid "" -"When the Minimum UID is greater than 0, authentication attempts by " -"users with UIDs below the specified number are ignored. This is useful for " -"disabling Kerberos authentication for the system administrator root." +msgid "When the Minimum UID is greater than 0, authentication attempts by users with UIDs below the specified number are ignored. This is useful for disabling Kerberos authentication for the system administrator root." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -263,9 +244,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:205 -msgid "" -"The Clock Skew is the tolerance for time stamps not exactly " -"matching the host's system clock. The value is in seconds." +msgid "The Clock Skew is the tolerance for time stamps not exactly matching the host's system clock. The value is in seconds." msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -288,9 +267,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:247 -msgid "" -"To configure the source of user accounts, select the appropriate " -"configuration module in Configure User Data." +msgid "To configure the source of user accounts, select the appropriate configuration module in Configure User Data." msgstr "" #. menu item @@ -310,9 +287,7 @@ #. help text for "Credential Cac&he Directory" #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:267 -msgid "" -"Specify the directory where to place credential cache files as " -"Credential Cache Directory." +msgid "Specify the directory where to place credential cache files as Credential Cache Directory." msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -327,9 +302,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:292 -msgid "" -"Credential Cache Template specifies the location in which to place " -"the user's session-specific credential cache." +msgid "Credential Cache Template specifies the location in which to place the user's session-specific credential cache." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -339,9 +312,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:308 -msgid "" -"Specify the location of the file with the keys of principals in Keytab " -"File Location." +msgid "Specify the location of the file with the keys of principals in Keytab File Location." msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -356,9 +327,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:333 -msgid "" -"With Mappings, specify how the PAM module should derive the " -"principal's name from the system user name." +msgid "With Mappings, specify how the PAM module should derive the principal's name from the system user name." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -368,16 +337,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:348 -msgid "" -"The value of Banner is a text that should be shown before a " -"password questions." +msgid "The value of Banner is a text that should be shown before a password questions." msgstr "" #. generic help for Services tab #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:362 -msgid "" -"All settings in this dialog can be applied for all PAM services, no " -"service or a specific list of services separated by commas." +msgid "All settings in this dialog can be applied for all PAM services, no service or a specific list of services separated by commas." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -387,9 +352,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:372 -msgid "" -"When Addressless Initial Tickets is set, initial tickets (TGT) " -"with no address information are requested." +msgid "When Addressless Initial Tickets is set, initial tickets (TGT) with no address information are requested." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -399,9 +362,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:388 -msgid "" -"Check Debug to turn on debugging for selected services via syslog." -"" +msgid "Check Debug to turn on debugging for selected services via syslog." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -411,9 +372,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:404 -msgid "" -"Sensitive Debug turns on debugging of sensitive information.</" -"p>" +msgid "Sensitive Debug turns on debugging of sensitive information." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -423,10 +382,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:420 -msgid "" -"Check Accept Existing Ticket to tell PAM module to accept the " -"presence of pre-existing Kerberos credentials as sufficient to authenticate " -"the user." +msgid "Check Accept Existing Ticket to tell PAM module to accept the presence of pre-existing Kerberos credentials as sufficient to authenticate the user." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -436,9 +392,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:437 -msgid "" -"List the services allowed to provide credentials in External " -"Credentials." +msgid "List the services allowed to provide credentials in External Credentials." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -448,9 +402,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:454 -msgid "" -"Use Shared Memory describes the services for which the shared " -"memory is used during authentication." +msgid "Use Shared Memory describes the services for which the shared memory is used during authentication." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -460,9 +412,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:471 -msgid "" -"Select the services for which TGT should be validated by changing the " -"value of Validate Initial Ticket." +msgid "Select the services for which TGT should be validated by changing the value of Validate Initial Ticket." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -472,9 +422,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:488 -msgid "" -"With Initial Prompt checked, the PAM module asks for a password " -"before the authentication attempt." +msgid "With Initial Prompt checked, the PAM module asks for a password before the authentication attempt." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -484,10 +432,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:504 -msgid "" -"If Subsequent Prompt is enabled, the PAM module may ask the user " -"for a password, in case the previously-entered password was somehow " -"insufficient for authentication." +msgid "If Subsequent Prompt is enabled, the PAM module may ask the user for a password, in case the previously-entered password was somehow insufficient for authentication." msgstr "" #. directory location popup label @@ -526,9 +471,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Authentication with Kerberos</big> \n" -"The Kerberos client configuration updates your PAM settings to enable " -"Kerberos authentication. Your system needs access to a Kerberos server in " -"the network for this to work.\n" +"The Kerberos client configuration updates your PAM settings to enable Kerberos authentication. Your system needs access to a Kerberos server in the network for this to work.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -537,27 +480,19 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Basic Client Settings:\n" -"Enter your Default Domain, Default Realm, and the hostname or " -"address of your Key Distribution Center (KDC Server Address). To " -"specify more values for KDC, separate them by spaces." +"Enter your Default Domain, Default Realm, and the hostname or address of your Key Distribution Center (KDC Server Address). To specify more values for KDC, separate them by spaces." msgstr "" #. help text 3/5 #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:719 msgid "" "\n" -"It is common practice to use the domain name in uppercase as your default " -"realm name, but you can select freely. If the realm is not available on the " -"server, you cannot log in. Ask your server administrator if you need more " -"information.\n" +"It is common practice to use the domain name in uppercase as your default realm name, but you can select freely. If the realm is not available on the server, you cannot log in. Ask your server administrator if you need more information.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Use DNS to acquire the configuration data at runtime #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:723 -msgid "" -"Check Use DNS to Acquire the Configuration Data at Runtime to let " -"your client use the Kerberos authentication data provided by DNS. This " -"option cannot be selected if the DNS server does not provide such data." +msgid "Check Use DNS to Acquire the Configuration Data at Runtime to let your client use the Kerberos authentication data provided by DNS. This option cannot be selected if the DNS server does not provide such data." msgstr "" #. help text 5/5 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -226,91 +226,66 @@ #. help text 2/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:535 -msgid "" -"To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select Use LDAP</" -"b>. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly." +msgid "To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select Use LDAP. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly." msgstr "" #. help text 3/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:539 msgid "" "To deactivate LDAP services, click Do Not Use LDAP.\n" -"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch." -"conf\n" +"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch.conf\n" "will be removed. The PAM configuration will be modified and the LDAP entry\n" "removed." msgstr "" #. help text 3.5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:546 -msgid "" -"To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select " -"Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins." +msgid "To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:550 -msgid "" -"Check Use System Security Services Daemon if you want the system " -"to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap." +msgid "Check Use System Security Services Daemon if you want the system to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap." msgstr "" #. help text 4/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:554 msgid "" -"Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) " -"in Addresses and the distinguished name of the search base (Base " -"DN, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" -"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve " -"the\n" -"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the " -"server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap." -"example.com:379</tt>.\n" +"Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) in Addresses and the distinguished name of the search base (Base DN, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" +"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve the\n" +"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap.example.com:379</tt>.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #. help text 5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:561 -msgid "" -"With Find, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the " -"service location protocol (SLP). Using Fetch DN, read the base DN " -"from server." +msgid "With Find, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the service location protocol (SLP). Using Fetch DN, read the base DN from server." msgstr "" #. help text 6/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:565 msgid "" "Some LDAP servers support StartTLS (RFC2830).\n" -"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate LDAP TLS/SSL</" -"b>\n" +"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate LDAP TLS/SSL\n" "to encrypt your communication with the LDAP server. You may download a CA\n" "certificate file in PEM format from a given URL.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:571 msgid "" -"A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the " -"config\n" -" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on " -"server certificates.\n" -" The value is the level that can be specified with keywords " -"never, allow,\n" -" try and demand. In the SSL/TLS Configuration " -"dialog there is\n" -" the option Request server certificate which will set the " -"TLS_REQCERT\n" -" configuration option to demand if it's enabled or to " -"allow if it's disabled.\n" +"A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the config\n" +" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on server certificates.\n" +" The value is the level that can be specified with keywords never, allow,\n" +" try and demand. In the SSL/TLS Configuration dialog there is\n" +" the option Request server certificate which will set the TLS_REQCERT\n" +" configuration option to demand if it's enabled or to allow if it's disabled.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:579 msgid "" -"In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS " -"URLs.\n" -" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They " -"have a syntax\n" -" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the " -"default port for LDAPS URLs\n" +"In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS URLs.\n" +" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They have a syntax\n" +" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the default port for LDAPS URLs\n" " is 636 instead of 389.\n" msgstr "" @@ -326,8 +301,7 @@ #. help text 9/9 (additional) #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:591 msgid "" -"Automounter is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, " -"such\n" +"Automounter is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, such\n" "as users' home directories. Its configuration files (auto.*) should already\n" "exist locally or over LDAP. If the automounter is not installed yet but you\n" "want to use it, it will be installed automatically.\n" @@ -461,8 +435,7 @@ #. yes/no question #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:970 msgid "" -"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is " -"disabled.\n" +"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is disabled.\n" "Enable certificate checks now?" msgstr "" @@ -474,21 +447,16 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1017 msgid "" -"If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the realm and " -"KDC Address.\n" -"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking SSSD " -"Offline Authentication.\n" -"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>." -"\n" +"If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the realm and KDC Address.\n" +"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking SSSD Offline Authentication.\n" +"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1023 msgid "" -"Password Change Protocol refers to the pam_password attribute of " -"the\n" -"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation " -"of its values." +"Password Change Protocol refers to the pam_password attribute of the\n" +"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation of its values." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3, %1 is attribute name @@ -501,8 +469,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1034 msgid "" "If secure connection requires certificate checking, specify where your\n" -"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing " -"certificates\n" +"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing certificates\n" "or the explicit path to one certificate file." msgstr "" @@ -524,36 +491,30 @@ msgid "" "To access the data stored on the server, enter the\n" "Administrator DN.\n" -"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) " -"or \n" -"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is " -"appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.\n" +"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) or \n" +"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1057 msgid "" "To create the default configuration objects for LDAP users and groups,\n" -"check Create Default Configuration Objects. The objects are only " -"created when they do not already exist.\n" +"check Create Default Configuration Objects. The objects are only created when they do not already exist.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1061 msgid "" "Press Configure to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1068 msgid "" -"Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if " -"they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" -"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and " -"ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.\n" +"Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" +"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.\n" msgstr "" #. tab label @@ -781,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1897 msgid "" "Edit the values of attributes in the table with Edit.\n" -"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the cn value " -"renames the\n" +"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the cn value renames the\n" "current module.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -97,9 +97,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -112,9 +110,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -204,9 +200,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -227,10 +221,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/complex.rb:105 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -307,9 +299,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -468,9 +458,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:975 @@ -508,15 +496,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1108 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -543,8 +528,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1220 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -575,10 +559,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "Select Yes if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</" -"p>\n" +"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -591,18 +573,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured." +"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -629,10 +607,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"Choose the Database from hdb and bdb. Hdb is " -"a\n" -"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"Choose the Database from hdb and bdb. Hdb is a\n" +"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to bdb. A\n" "hdb-Database needs a larger idlcachesize than a\n" "bdb-Database for a good search performance.\n" @@ -646,24 +622,18 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password</" -"b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends " -"the \n" -"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the \n" +"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process. " msgstr "" @@ -697,8 +667,7 @@ "click Change Password. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "Password Encryption. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" @@ -712,35 +681,25 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with Append Base DN." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change " -"Password.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password " -"Encryption.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.\n" +"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change Password.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password Encryption.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index " -"Cache (IDL cache) \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index Cache (IDL cache) \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs)." msgstr "" @@ -756,14 +715,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords. " msgstr "" @@ -777,15 +732,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:134 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object " -"DN." +msgid "Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object DN." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:137 msgid "" -"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You " -"may\n" +"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -799,33 +751,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined." +msgid "The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:147 msgid "" "Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "Presence: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:158 msgid "" "Equality: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.\n" msgstr "" @@ -844,11 +791,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.\n" msgstr "" @@ -864,8 +809,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:183 msgid "" -"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click Edit.\n" msgstr "" @@ -878,11 +822,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:191 msgid "" -"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" @@ -892,8 +834,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" -"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server." msgstr "" @@ -903,16 +844,11 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" -"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.\n" @@ -924,14 +860,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server." +"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:221 @@ -940,8 +872,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:224 msgid "" -"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want " -"the\n" +"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -955,8 +886,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (ldap or ldaps) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -989,10 +919,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:250 msgid "" -"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.\n" +"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:253 @@ -1003,10 +931,8 @@ msgid "" "As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. \n" msgstr "" @@ -1047,15 +973,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server.</" -"p> " +msgid "With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server. " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration " -"wizard." +msgid "If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:293 @@ -1066,15 +988,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:297 -msgid "" -"Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:" +msgid "Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:300 msgid "" -"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1086,8 +1005,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server." msgstr "" @@ -1109,18 +1027,15 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:319 msgid "" -"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the " -"server\n" +"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</" -"p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:324 msgid "" "If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1131,10 +1046,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:330 msgid "" "If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File</" -"b>,\n" -"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File,\n" +"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the corresponding\n" "textfields.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1152,26 +1065,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:344 msgid "" -"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" -"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog." msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:354 -msgid "" -"Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:" +msgid "Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:357 @@ -1180,17 +1088,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:358 msgid "" -"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:361 msgid "" -"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) " +"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:364 @@ -1201,8 +1106,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:367 msgid "" -"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1220,16 +1124,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:378 msgid "" -"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:381 msgid "" "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1244,12 +1146,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:392 msgid "" "This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1260,32 +1159,26 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:401 msgid "" -"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete " -"Database....\n" +"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete Database....\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:404 msgid "" -"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:407 msgid "" -"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" +"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:410 msgid "" -"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or " -"\"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"cn=config\")." msgstr "" @@ -1310,9 +1203,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1320,8 +1211,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -1630,9 +1520,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:175 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:179 @@ -1640,8 +1528,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:188 @@ -2152,8 +2039,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -2299,9 +2185,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:883 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:884 @@ -2321,9 +2205,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1006 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1007 @@ -2429,9 +2311,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1874 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2510 src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2520 @@ -2448,9 +2328,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2565 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed @@ -2492,8 +2370,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3414 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3415 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -27,8 +27,7 @@ #: src/Ldap.rb:256 msgid "" "Failed to establish TLS encryption.\n" -"Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server " -"Certificate is valid." +"Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server Certificate is valid." msgstr "" #. hint to error message @@ -282,8 +281,7 @@ #: src/LdapPopup.rb:555 msgid "" "Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" -"to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults " -"when\n" +"to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" "the new object is created.\n" msgstr "" @@ -296,8 +294,7 @@ #: src/LdapPopup.rb:567 msgid "" "You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" -"values from existing ones. The expression %attr_name will be " -"replaced\n" +"values from existing ones. The expression %attr_name will be replaced\n" "with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid\"\n" "as a value of \"homeDirectory\").\n" msgstr "" @@ -319,10 +316,7 @@ #. help text for LDAP browser #: src/ldap_browser.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object " -"data. Use Edit to change the value of the selected attribute. Use " -"Save to save your changes to LDAP." +msgid "Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object data. Use Edit to change the value of the selected attribute. Use Save to save your changes to LDAP." msgstr "" #. popup question (Continue/Cancel follows) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -26,9 +26,7 @@ #: src/EdirUtilsLUM.ycp:477 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid fully distinguished name. The name must be typeful (e.g. " -"cn=admin,o=acme or o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid fully distinguished name. The name must be typeful (e.g. cn=admin,o=acme or o=acme)" msgstr "" #. LinuxUserMgmt read dialog caption @@ -275,9 +273,7 @@ #: src/NovellLDAPLUM.ycp:477 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"cn=admin,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. cn=admin,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/NovellLDAPLUM.ycp:521 @@ -285,8 +281,7 @@ "The attempt to perform a secure LDAP bind did not respond in 2 minutes\n" "This may indicate a problem with LDAP on the target server.\n" "If you are confident that your credentials are correct you may continue,\n" -"otherwise please determine if LDAP is running correctly on the target " -"system\n" +"otherwise please determine if LDAP is running correctly on the target system\n" "Do you want to continue?" msgstr "" @@ -335,8 +330,7 @@ #. TODO - fix this message #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:847 -msgid "" -"Unable to add the tree self-signed certificate to the root certificate store" +msgid "Unable to add the tree self-signed certificate to the root certificate store" msgstr "" #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:873 @@ -344,9 +338,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:879 -msgid "" -"Unable to change the group permissions on the root certificate store for " -"write access by www" +msgid "Unable to change the group permissions on the root certificate store for write access by www" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:39 @@ -363,9 +355,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:55 -msgid "" -"Tree names may only contain the following characters [A-Z], [a-z], [0-9] and " -"\"-\" or \"_\"" +msgid "Tree names may only contain the following characters [A-Z], [a-z], [0-9] and \"-\" or \"_\"" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:107 @@ -384,9 +374,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:141 -msgid "" -"The container 'o=security' is reserved and cannot be used in a fully " -"distinguished name" +msgid "The container 'o=security' is reserved and cannot be used in a fully distinguished name" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:171 @@ -477,16 +465,12 @@ #: src/dialogs.ycp:129 src/dialogs.ycp:148 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"ou=xyz,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. ou=xyz,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/dialogs.ycp:168 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"cn=proxyuser,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. cn=proxyuser,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/dialogs.ycp:300 @@ -615,8 +599,7 @@ #: src/helps.ycp:57 msgid "" "<big>Proxy user name with context (Optional)</big> \n" -"A user (existing or created here) with rights to search the LDAP tree for " -"LUM\n" +"A user (existing or created here) with rights to search the LDAP tree for LUM\n" "objects.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -632,38 +615,31 @@ #: src/helps.ycp:68 msgid "" "<big>Local or Remote Directory Server</big> \n" -"Select either Local system or Remote system, depending on the server you are " -"configuring.\n" +"Select either Local system or Remote system, depending on the server you are configuring.\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:72 msgid "" "<big>Directory server address</big> \n" -"This field is only active if you select Remote system. Enter the IP address " -"of the remote server you want to configure.\n" +"This field is only active if you select Remote system. Enter the IP address of the remote server you want to configure.\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:76 msgid "" "<big>Admin name with context</big> \n" -"Enter the LDAP Admin name and context. This is the fully distinguished name " -"of a User object with administrative rights to LDAP. For example: cn=admin," -"o=acme\n" +"Enter the LDAP Admin name and context. This is the fully distinguished name of a User object with administrative rights to LDAP. For example: cn=admin,o=acme\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:80 msgid "" "<big>Admin password</big> \n" -"Enter the LDAP Admin password. This is the password of the user specified as " -"the LDAP Admin.\n" +"Enter the LDAP Admin password. This is the password of the user specified as the LDAP Admin.\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:84 msgid "" "<big>Port Details</big> \n" -"Click Port Details to view or modify the LDAP port or the secure LDAP port " -"number this server uses to communicate with other servers. The default LDAP " -"port is 389. The default secure LDAP port is 636.\n" +"Click Port Details to view or modify the LDAP port or the secure LDAP port number this server uses to communicate with other servers. The default LDAP port is 389. The default secure LDAP port is 636.\n" msgstr "" #. Command line help text for the Xlinux-user-mgmt module Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -134,8 +134,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:192 msgid "" "\n" -"Use Accept to perform a new installation with the values displayed.</" -"p>" +"Use Accept to perform a new installation with the values displayed." msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -241,20 +241,15 @@ #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<big>LXC Overview</big> \n" -"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current " -"status.\n" -"Use Create to create new container. Delete existing one with " -"Destroy.\n" +"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current status.\n" +"Use Create to create new container. Delete existing one with Destroy.\n" "" msgstr "" #. Overview dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"You can start selected container with Start. The container is " -"started in background. You can connect to it using Connect button or " -"manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close " -"it from within or using the Disconnect button.\n" +"You can start selected container with Start. The container is started in background. You can connect to it using Connect button or manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close it from within or using the Disconnect button.\n" "Note that Connect option is not available in text mode." msgstr "" @@ -265,25 +260,17 @@ #. Create dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:55 -msgid "" -"Choose a Name for your container, select a base Template, " -"and enter desired network settings." +msgid "Choose a Name for your container, select a base Template, and enter desired network settings." msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 3 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as IP Address to have dynamic " -"address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use " -"the Configure Network button and create one." +msgid "Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as IP Address to have dynamic address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use the Configure Network button and create one." msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 4 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:63 -msgid "" -"Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the " -"container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will " -"be used." +msgid "Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will be used." msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 5 @@ -293,9 +280,7 @@ #. info label (try to keep the text short) #: src/modules/Lxc.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for " -"details." +msgid "Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for details." msgstr "" #. output follows in widget below Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -82,8 +82,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "If choosing No Connection, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " -"localhost.\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 @@ -98,8 +97,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Some servers require authentication for sending mails. Here you can\n" -"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use " -"authentication,\n" +"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use authentication,\n" "simply leave these fields empty.\n" msgstr "" @@ -108,16 +106,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" "The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as smtp.provider." -"com.\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as smtp.provider.com.\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your " -"provider.\n" +"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 @@ -150,8 +146,7 @@ "\n" "This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses." -"\n" +"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: aliases dialog help, part 2 of 2 @@ -603,8 +598,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" "\n" -"Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS) checks incoming and outgoing " -"mail\n" +"Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS) checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" "with AMaViS.\n" msgstr "" @@ -642,13 +636,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" -"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new " -"service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " -"send\n" +"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" -"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed " -"with\n" +"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.\n" msgstr "" @@ -660,16 +651,14 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in /var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " -"the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.\n" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "" -"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." msgstr "" #. Translators: text entry label @@ -712,9 +701,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "" -"The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not " -"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." +msgid "The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." msgstr "" #. LogView label. take a string from users? Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -221,42 +221,29 @@ "\t\t\tStart or stop multipathd, check the multipath information. \n" "\n" "\t\t\t<big>Stop/Start Multipathd</big> \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Use Multipath\" to start multipathd. Click \"Do not " -"use Multipath\" to stop multipathd. \n" -"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd " -"stopped. \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Use Multipath\" to start multipathd. Click \"Do not use Multipath\" to stop multipathd. \n" +"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd stopped. \n" "\n" "\t\t\t<big>Configure Multipath</big> \n" -"\t\t\tClick Configure Tab to make the multipath configurations. </" -"p>\n" +"\t\t\tClick Configure Tab to make the multipath configurations. \n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for Configure tab #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<big>Configuration</big> \n" -"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There " -"are four sections in the configuration file:\n" -"\t\t\tmultipaths, defaults, blacklist, " -"blacklist_exception, devices. \n" +"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There are four sections in the configuration file:\n" +"\t\t\tmultipaths, defaults, blacklist, blacklist_exception, devices. \n" "\t\t\tMultipaths: list of multipaths finest-grained settings. \n" "\t\t\tDefaults: multipath-tools default settings. \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Defaults\" button to configure defaults " -"settings. \n" -"\t\t\tBlacklist: list of device names to be discard as not multipath " -"candidates. \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Blacklist\" button to configure blacklist " -"settings. \n" -"\t\t\tBlacklist Exceptions: list of device names to be excluded from " -"blacklist. \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\" button to configure " -"blacklist_exceptions settings. \n" -"\t\t\tDevices: list of per storage controller settings. Overrides " -"default settings, overridden by per multipath settings. \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Configure devices\" button to configure devices " -"settings. \n" -"\t\t\tClick \"Finish\" button to save and update the configurations." -" \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Defaults\" button to configure defaults settings. \n" +"\t\t\tBlacklist: list of device names to be discard as not multipath candidates. \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Blacklist\" button to configure blacklist settings. \n" +"\t\t\tBlacklist Exceptions: list of device names to be excluded from blacklist. \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\" button to configure blacklist_exceptions settings. \n" +"\t\t\tDevices: list of per storage controller settings. Overrides default settings, overridden by per multipath settings. \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Configure devices\" button to configure devices settings. \n" +"\t\t\tClick \"Finish\" button to save and update the configurations. \n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for defaults section configure tab 1/3 @@ -264,27 +251,19 @@ msgid "" "<big>Defaults Configuration</big> \n" "\t\t\tGlobal default settings can be configured and cleared here. \n" -"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath " -"configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it. \n" -"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own " -"value as default setting. \n" +"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it. \n" +"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own value as default setting. \n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for blacklist section configure tab 1/3 #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<big>Blacklist Configuration</big> \n" -"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates." -" \n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: wwid, " -"devnode, device. \n" -"\t\t\twwid: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist." -" \n" -"\t\t\tdevnode: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop. \n" -"\t\t\tdevice: Used to identify a specific storage controller in " -"blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name. \n" +"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates. \n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: wwid, devnode, device. \n" +"\t\t\twwid: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist. \n" +"\t\t\tdevnode: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop. \n" +"\t\t\tdevice: Used to identify a specific storage controller in blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name. \n" "" msgstr "" @@ -293,15 +272,10 @@ msgid "" "<big>Blacklist Exceptions Configuration</big> \n" "\t\t\tDevice names listed here are excluded from blacklist. \n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: wwid, " -"devnode, device. \n" -"\t\t\twwid: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from " -"blacklist. \n" -"\t\t\tdevnode: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop. \n" -"\t\t\tdevice: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted " -"from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name. \n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: wwid, devnode, device. \n" +"\t\t\twwid: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from blacklist. \n" +"\t\t\tdevnode: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop. \n" +"\t\t\tdevice: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name. \n" "" msgstr "" @@ -309,10 +283,8 @@ #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<big>Devices Configuration</big> \n" -"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the " -"default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings. \n" -"\t\t\tEach device is identified by vendor and product name." -" \n" +"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings. \n" +"\t\t\tEach device is identified by vendor and product name. \n" msgstr "" #. add quotes to configuration value, no matter how many words. Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -50,8 +50,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1297 -msgid "" -"You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." +msgid "You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." msgstr "" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1298 @@ -115,29 +114,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:203 -msgid "" -"This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if " -"recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by " -"already installed packages the option Install Recommended Packages for " -"Already Installed Packages from Dependencies menu has to be set." +msgid "This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by already installed packages the option Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages from Dependencies menu has to be set." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:207 -msgid "" -"It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already " -"installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." +msgid "It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:211 -msgid "" -"The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. " -"updates aren't possible." +msgid "The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. updates aren't possible." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:215 -msgid "" -"These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any " -"longer." +msgid "These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any longer." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:65 @@ -171,9 +160,7 @@ #. Translators: %s is a locale code, e.g. en_GB #: src/NCPkgFilterLocale.cc:178 #, c-format -msgid "" -"Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for %s " -"locale" +msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for %s locale" msgstr "" #. the label of the selections @@ -655,62 +642,32 @@ #. part1 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:121 -msgid "" -"Welcome to the package selectorThis tool will help you to " -"manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single " -"packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or " -"languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when " -"installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package " -"selector consists of three main parts: filters, package table " -"and menu." +msgid "Welcome to the package selectorThis tool will help you to manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package selector consists of three main parts: filters, package table and menu." msgstr "" #. part of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:129 -msgid "" -"Filter on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large " -"amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain " -"repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ " -"Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on " -"filters can be found in How to use filters." +msgid "Filter on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be found in How to use filters." msgstr "" #. additional help text for post installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:136 -msgid "" -"Package table is the main component of the package selector. You " -"will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the " -"selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has " -"several columns:" +msgid "Package table is the main component of the package selector. You will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has several columns:" msgstr "" #. part2 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:143 -msgid "" -"<ol><li>Package status (for more information see Package Status and " -"Symbols)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available " -"version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed " -"version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" +msgid "<ol><li>Package status (for more information see Package Status and Symbols)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" msgstr "" #. part3 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:151 -msgid "" -"The Actions menu below the table allows you to change the status " -"of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete " -"a package or select an additional package for installation. The status " -"change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu " -"item (for detailed information about the package status, see Package " -"Status and Symbols)." +msgid "The Actions menu below the table allows you to change the status of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a package or select an additional package for installation. The status change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for detailed information about the package status, see Package Status and Symbols)." msgstr "" #. part4 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:158 -msgid "" -"Menu provides functions related to the handling of package " -"dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions " -"like opening the repository editor. For more information, see Useful " -"Functions in Menu." +msgid "Menu provides functions related to the handling of package dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions like opening the repository editor. For more information, see Useful Functions in Menu." msgstr "" #. the headline of the help window @@ -720,20 +677,12 @@ #. part 1 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:172 -msgid "" -"The package status can be changed using the Actions menu or the " -"keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an " -"additional package.The \"Taboo\" status means the package should " -"never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the " -"installed version of a package should always be kept." +msgid "The package status can be changed using the Actions menu or the keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an additional package.The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed version of a package should always be kept." msgstr "" #. part 2 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:179 -msgid "" -"You can also use RET or SPACE to toggle the package status. " -"The Actions menu also allows you to change the status for all " -"packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages')." +msgid "You can also use RET or SPACE to toggle the package status. The Actions menu also allows you to change the status for all packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages')." msgstr "" #. part 3 of help text package status @@ -743,20 +692,12 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:192 -msgid "" -" + : package will be installeda+ : package will be " -"installed automatically > : package will be updated</" -"p>a> : package will be automatically updated i : " -"package is installed - : package will be deleted---" -": never install this package (taboo)" +msgid " + : package will be installeda+ : package will be installed automatically > : package will be updateda> : package will be automatically updated i : package is installed - : package will be deleted---: never install this package (taboo)" msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:199 -msgid "" -"-i-: keep the installed version and never update or delete it " -"( package locked )Status information for pattern and languages:</" -"p> i : All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied" +msgid "-i-: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( package locked )Status information for pattern and languages: i : All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied" msgstr "" #. label for an error popup @@ -766,55 +707,27 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:213 -msgid "" -"Filter allow you to filter all available packages according to the " -"selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties " -"(repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), " -"package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the " -"drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below." +msgid "Filter allow you to filter all available packages according to the selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties (repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below." msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:220 -msgid "" -"Patterns describe the features and functions a system should have " -"(for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of " -"packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may " -"have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the " -"solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</" -"p>" +msgid "Patterns describe the features and functions a system should have (for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly." msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:227 -msgid "" -"Languages are package containers very much like patterns. They " -"contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific " -"files for a selected language. RPM Groups are not package containers " -"that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a " -"property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. " -"The Repositories filter displays packages available from a specific " -"repository. " +msgid "Languages are package containers very much like patterns. They contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific files for a selected language. RPM Groups are not package containers that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. The Repositories filter displays packages available from a specific repository. " msgstr "" #. help text package search #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:234 -msgid "" -"To use the Search filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for " -"the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the " -"expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides " -"or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button." -"" +msgid "To use the Search filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button." msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:241 -msgid "" -"The Installation summary presents an overview of packages whose " -"status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or " -"removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter " -"Package Classification provides information about Recommended, " -"Suggested, Orphaned and Unneeded packages." +msgid "The Installation summary presents an overview of packages whose status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter Package Classification provides information about Recommended, Suggested, Orphaned and Unneeded packages." msgstr "" #. label for an error popup @@ -823,79 +736,31 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:254 -msgid "" -"Dependencies: This menu offers various actions related to the " -"handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are " -"checked with every status change. You will be informed about package " -"conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve " -"the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try " -"Again'." +msgid "Dependencies: This menu offers various actions related to the handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change. You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:260 -msgid "" -"To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle " -"Automatic Dependency Check OFF. You can check dependencies manually " -"by selecting Check Dependencies Now. The Verify system entry " -"will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve " -"conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic " -"installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use Generate " -"Dependency Solver Testcase. It will dump package dependencies data into " -"the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what " -"you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla." +msgid "To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle Automatic Dependency Check OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting Check Dependencies Now. The Verify system entry will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use Generate Dependency Solver Testcase. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:266 -msgid "" -"Available options for dependency checking are: Automatic Dependency " -"Check (see above), Install Recommended for Already Installed " -"Packages: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package " -"will be installed, System Verification Mode: repair dependencies of " -"installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the " -"system with Verify System Now the option System Verification Mode</" -"i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the " -"YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>." +msgid "Available options for dependency checking are: Automatic Dependency Check (see above), Install Recommended for Already Installed Packages: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package will be installed, System Verification Mode: repair dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the system with Verify System Now the option System Verification Mode is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:272 -msgid "" -"Advanced options: Cleanup when deleting packages: remove " -"dependent unused packages. Allow vendor change: package vendor may " -"differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, " -"they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/" -"etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>." +msgid "Advanced options: Cleanup when deleting packages: remove dependent unused packages. Allow vendor change: package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:278 -msgid "" -"View: Choose which information about the selected package will " -"be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: " -"package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package " -"versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and " -"dependencies (provides, requires etc.)." +msgid "View: Choose which information about the selected package will be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and dependencies (provides, requires etc.)." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:284 -msgid "" -"Configuration: This menu integrates package selector with the " -"rest of package management utils. From here, you can Launch Repository " -"Manager and edit configured repositories or register to update " -"repository and configure periodic download of available updates (Launch " -"Online Update Configuration). Also, you can pick one of the three " -"possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in Action after Package " -"Installation menu." +msgid "Configuration: This menu integrates package selector with the rest of package management utils. From here, you can Launch Repository Manager and edit configured repositories or register to update repository and configure periodic download of available updates (Launch Online Update Configuration). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in Action after Package Installation menu." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:289 -msgid "" -"Extras: Miscellaneous functions reside here. Export Package " -"List to File will dump data on installed packages, patterns and " -"languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by Import " -"Package List from File option e.g. on different computer. It will bring " -"the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described " -"in provided XML file. Show Available Disk Space will show a popup " -"table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted " -"partition." +msgid "Extras: Miscellaneous functions reside here. Export Package List to File will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by Import Package List from File option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in provided XML file. Show Available Disk Space will show a popup table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition." msgstr "" #. label of a frame with search settings @@ -1093,57 +958,27 @@ #. help text online udpate #. Do NOT translate 'recommended' and 'security'! because the patch kind is always shown as english text. #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:611 -msgid "" -"General information about patches:The patches of kind security</" -"b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You " -"should also install recommended patches, they usually contain " -"important bug-fixes. Install feature patches if you are interested in " -"the feature." +msgid "General information about patches:The patches of kind security are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You should also install recommended patches, they usually contain important bug-fixes. Install feature patches if you are interested in the feature." msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:618 -msgid "" -"Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) " -"will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second " -"run." +msgid "Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second run." msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:625 -msgid "" -"Meaning of the status flags:a+ : Patches concerning your " -"installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your " -"system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'. " -"i : All requirements of this patch are satisfied. + : You " -"have selected this patch for installation." +msgid "Meaning of the status flags:a+ : Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'. i : All requirements of this patch are satisfied. + : You have selected this patch for installation." msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:632 -msgid "" -"More details about the status: If there are several patches for a " -"package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all " -"got preselected and have status a+. If one of these patches is " -"deselected with '-' it might show the status i afterwards. This is " -"because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still " -"selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with " -"it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the " -"patches are not wanted." +msgid "More details about the status: If there are several patches for a package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got preselected and have status a+. If one of these patches is deselected with '-' it might show the status i afterwards. This is because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not wanted." msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:639 -msgid "" -"The menus:The Filter menu allows to filter the patches, e." -"g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to " -"search for patches. Use the Actions menu to change the status of a " -"patch. The View menu offers the possibility to see which packages " -"are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the " -"package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are " -"concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system." -" The Dependencies menu contains dependencies checks and the " -"'Generate Solver Testcase' entry." +msgid "The menus:The Filter menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to search for patches. Use the Actions menu to change the status of a patch. The View menu offers the possibility to see which packages are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system. The Dependencies menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate Solver Testcase' entry." msgstr "" #. label for a warning popup @@ -1184,9 +1019,7 @@ #. text for a Notify popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:714 -msgid "" -"All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost." -" Really exit?" +msgid "All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost. Really exit?" msgstr "" #. the label of language table @@ -1235,13 +1068,7 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:783 -msgid "" -"Update Problem List The packages in the list cannot be updated " -"automatically.Possible reasons:They are obsoleted by other " -"packages.There is no newer version to which to update on any " -"installation media.They are third-party packagesManually " -"select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</" -"p>" +msgid "Update Problem List The packages in the list cannot be updated automatically.Possible reasons:They are obsoleted by other packages.There is no newer version to which to update on any installation media.They are third-party packagesManually select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them." msgstr "" #. column header source RPM installation (keep it short!) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -120,26 +120,21 @@ #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:191 msgid "" "<big>Firewall and SSH</big> \n" -"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.\n" -"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via " -"dedicated\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" "SSH client" msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:197 msgid "" -"Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled " -"after\n" +"Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" "the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled." msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:200 msgid "" -"With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for " -"SSH\n" -"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH " -"service (i.e. it\n" +"With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" "will be started on computer boot)." msgstr "" @@ -335,8 +330,7 @@ #. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist #: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:892 -msgid "" -"No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." msgstr "" #. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes @@ -346,10 +340,8 @@ "Download of latest release notes failed due to server-side error. \n" "This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" "\n" -"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any " -"steps\n" -"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network " -"configuration,\n" +"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" "click 'Cancel'.\n" msgstr "" @@ -708,9 +700,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/routing.rb:354 -msgid "" -"At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) " -"must be specified" +msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" msgstr "" #: src/clients/routing.rb:376 @@ -1322,12 +1312,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1414 msgid "" "<big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big> \n" -" All interfaces configured with On Cable Connection and with " -"IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" -" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is On " -"Cable Connection\n" -" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have " -"to\n" +" All interfaces configured with On Cable Connection and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is On Cable Connection\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" " set the priority of each interface. \n" msgstr "" @@ -1524,9 +1511,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:101 -msgid "" -"Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of " -"\"id\"." +msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." msgstr "" #. Handler for action "add" @@ -1633,9 +1618,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:234 -msgid "" -"For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script " -"needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:248 @@ -1711,17 +1694,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:100 msgid "" "Udev Rules are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" -"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name " -"(for\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" "example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:106 msgid "" -"Show visible port identification allows you to physically identify " -"now configured NIC. \n" -"Set appropriate time, click Blink and LED diodes on you NIC will " -"start blinking for selected time.\n" +"Show visible port identification allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click Blink and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1729,26 +1709,20 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:119 msgid "" "Kernel Module. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" -"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if " -"there is more than one driver available for\n" -"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the " -"list, but usually the default value works.\n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.\n" msgstr "" #. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:126 msgid "" "Additionally, specify Options for the kernel module. Use this\n" -"format: option=value. Each entry should be space-separated, " -"for example: io=0x300 irq=5. Note: If two cards are \n" -"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while " -"saving.\n" +"format: option=value. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: io=0x300 irq=5. Note: If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:132 -msgid "" -"If you specify options via Ethtool options, ifup will call ethtool " -"with these options.\n" +msgid "If you specify options via Ethtool options, ifup will call ethtool with these options.\n" msgstr "" #. Manual dialog help 4/4 @@ -1932,27 +1906,19 @@ #. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Enter any additional Options for this interface (separated by " -"spaces)." +msgid "Enter any additional Options for this interface (separated by spaces)." msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:975 -msgid "" -"Select Enable IPA Takeover if IP address takeover should be " -"enabled for this interface." +msgid "Select Enable IPA Takeover if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface." msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:978 -msgid "" -"Select Enable Layer 2 Support if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support." +msgid "Select Enable Layer 2 Support if this card has been configured with layer 2 support." msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:981 -msgid "" -"Enter the Layer 2 MAC Address if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support." +msgid "Enter the Layer 2 MAC Address if this card has been configured with layer 2 support." msgstr "" #. TextEntry label @@ -2102,8 +2068,7 @@ "Check Enable IPv6 to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" "It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" "To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" -"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the " -"response \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" "time can be faster.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2125,8 +2090,7 @@ msgid "" "For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" "and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" -"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed." -"\"-\" is an alias for any interface.\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.\n" msgstr "" #. Routing dialog help 2/2 @@ -2146,8 +2110,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:112 msgid "" -"Important: if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone " -"is not enough. \n" +"Important: if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" "You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" "firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2155,24 +2118,18 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:117 msgid "" "If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" -"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the " -"DHCP client.\n" -"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical " -"desktop. \n" -"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that " -"assign \n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" "different hostnames. " msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:124 msgid "" "Assign Hostname to Loopback IP associates your hostname with \n" -"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is " -"a \n" -"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, " -"even \n" -"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, " -"especially \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" "if this computer provides some network services.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2195,31 +2152,25 @@ msgid "" "Search domain is the domain name where hostname searching starts.\n" "The primary search domain is usually the same as the domain name of\n" -"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search " -"domains\n" +"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search domains\n" "(such as suse.com) Separate the domains with commas or white space.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:147 msgid "" -"Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. mymachine) and the " -"DNS domain\n" -"(e.g. example.com) that it belongs to. The domain is especially " -"important if this \n" -"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using " -"the hostname \n" +"Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. mymachine) and the DNS domain\n" +"(e.g. example.com) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the hostname \n" "command." msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:153 msgid "" "Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" -"search list, the content of /etc/resolv.conf). Normally, it is " -"handled\n" +"search list, the content of /etc/resolv.conf). Normally, it is handled\n" "by the netconfig script, which merges statically defined data with\n" "dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" -"etc.). This is the default. Use Default Policy is sufficient for " -"most\n" +"etc.). This is the default. Use Default Policy is sufficient for most\n" "configurations.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2240,15 +2191,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:174 msgid "" "<big>Address Setup</big>\n" -"Select No Address Setup if you do not want to assign an IP address " -"to this device.\n" +"Select No Address Setup if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" "This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Check iBFT if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS." -"\n" +msgid "Check iBFT if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 2/8 @@ -2270,17 +2218,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:193 msgid "" "To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" -"Zeroconf. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select DHCP + " -"Zeroconf\n" -". Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned Statically.</" -"p>\n" +"Zeroconf. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select DHCP + Zeroconf\n" +". Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned Statically.\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:199 msgid "" -"Enter the IP Address (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for " -"your computer, and the \n" +"Enter the IP Address (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" " Remote IP Address (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" "for your peer.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2288,12 +2233,9 @@ #. Address dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:205 msgid "" -"For Static Address Setup enter the static IP address for your " -"computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" -"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix " -"<tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" -"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written " -"to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.\n" +"For Static Address Setup enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 8/8 @@ -2321,9 +2263,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Mandatory Interface specifies whether the network service reports " -"failure if the interface fails to start at boot time." +msgid "Mandatory Interface specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time." msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:229 @@ -2332,16 +2272,14 @@ "Maximum transfer unit (MTU) is the maximum size of the packet,\n" "transferred over the network in one frame. Usually, you do not need to\n" "set a MTU, but using lower MTU values may improve the network performance,\n" -"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the " -"recommended\n" +"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the recommended\n" "values or define another one.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:237 msgid "" "Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" -"Only devices with the device activation set to Never and with No " -"Address Setup are available." +"Only devices with the device activation set to Never and with No Address Setup are available." msgstr "" #. DHCP dialog help 1/7 @@ -2353,8 +2291,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:244 msgid "" "The DHCP Client Identifier, if left empty, defaults to\n" -"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for " -"each\n" +"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for each\n" "DHCP client on a single network. Therefore, specify a unique free-form\n" "identifier here if you have several (virtual) machines using the same\n" "network interface and thus the same hardware address." @@ -2364,15 +2301,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:252 msgid "" "The Hostname to Send specifies a string used for the\n" -"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP " -"server. Some \n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).\n" "Some DHCP servers require the Hostname to Send option field to\n" -"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave AUTO</" -"b>\n" -"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/" -"HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave AUTO\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2393,19 +2327,14 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:272 msgid "" -"IPv4 Address Label, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and " -"legacy. The total\n" -" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) " -"is\n" -" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility " -"truncates it after 9 characters." +"IPv4 Address Label, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" +" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters." msgstr "" #. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:278 -msgid "" -"Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter " -"foo instead of eth0:foo." +msgid "Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter foo instead of eth0:foo." msgstr "" #. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup @@ -2450,8 +2379,7 @@ "Set the Network Name (ESSID) used to identify\n" "cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" "wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" -"you choose the operation mode Managed and no WPA " -"authentication mode,\n" +"you choose the operation mode Managed and no WPA authentication mode,\n" "you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" "case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" "signal strength.\n" @@ -2471,8 +2399,7 @@ "NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" "potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" "specific needs for shared key authentication, use the Open\n" -"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, WPA (Wi-Fi Protected " -"Access)\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" "was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" "WPA. If you want to use WPA, select WPA-PSK or WPA-EAP as the\n" "authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" @@ -2512,8 +2439,7 @@ msgid "" "These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" "'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" -"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for " -"all\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" "available options." msgstr "" @@ -2603,8 +2529,7 @@ "For TTLS and PEAP, enter your Identity\n" "and Password as configured on the server.\n" "If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" -"Anonymous Identity, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</" -"p>\n" +"Anonymous Identity, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.\n" msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -2626,8 +2551,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:128 msgid "" "TLS uses a Client Certificate instead of a username and\n" -"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key " -"pair\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" "to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" "a Client Key file that contains your private key and\n" "the appropriate Client Key Password for that file.\n" @@ -2844,8 +2768,7 @@ msgid "" "To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" "set the Channel the card should use here. This is not needed\n" -"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for " -"access\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" "points in that case.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2940,8 +2863,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1001 msgid "" "In this dialog, define your WEP keys used\n" -"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four " -"keys,\n" +"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four keys,\n" "although only one key is used to encrypt the data. This is the default key.\n" "The other keys can be used to decrypt data. Usually you have only\n" "one key." @@ -2996,8 +2918,7 @@ #. validated in ValidateWpaEap #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1281 msgid "" -"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in " -"connections\n" +"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in connections\n" "to insecure, rogue wireless networks. Continue without CA ?" msgstr "" @@ -3080,8 +3001,7 @@ "If this feature is enabled, you can\n" "administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" "client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" -"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</" -"tt>).\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" "This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3315,9 +3235,7 @@ #. @param [Hash] event the event being handled #. @return whether valid #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:502 -msgid "" -"It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use " -"it at your own risk?" +msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" msgstr "" #. Popup::Error text @@ -3491,8 +3409,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:58 msgid "" "When Dial Prefix Regular Expression is set, users can\n" -"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the " -"expression.\n" +"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the expression.\n" "A recommended value is <tt>[09]?</tt>, allowing <tt>0</tt>, <tt>9</tt>,\n" "and the empty prefix. If the expression is empty, users are not allowed\n" "to change the prefix.\n" @@ -3590,18 +3507,15 @@ #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:152 msgid "" -"Using On NFSroot is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" -"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still " -"available.\n" +"Using On NFSroot is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" "Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" -"Using On NFSroot is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" +"Using On NFSroot is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this startmode will never\n" "be shut down via 'rcnetwork stop'. 'ifdown <iface>' still works.\n" "Use this when you have a nfs or iscsi root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3616,8 +3530,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:201 msgid "" "<big>Device Activation</big> \n" -"Choose when to bring up the network interface. At Boot Time " -"activates it during system boot, \n" +"Choose when to bring up the network interface. At Boot Time activates it during system boot, \n" "Never does not start the device.\n" "%1\n" msgstr "" @@ -3743,9 +3656,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply " -"the settings." +msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." msgstr "" #. Opens dialog for editing NIC name @@ -4069,9 +3980,7 @@ #. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported #. @return true on success #: src/modules/Lan.rb:706 -msgid "" -"AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked " -"will be used." +msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." msgstr "" #. Create a textual summary for the general network settings @@ -4199,10 +4108,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1416 -msgid "" -"Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) " -"is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan " -"devices). See dmesg output for details." +msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." msgstr "" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1422 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -153,16 +153,14 @@ msgid "" "Each NFS share is identified by remote NFS server address and\n" "exported directory, local directory where the remote directory is mounted, \n" -"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further " -"information \n" +"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further information \n" "about mounting NFS and mount options, refer to <tt>man nfs.</tt>" msgstr "" #. Help, part 3 of 3 #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:68 msgid "" -"To mount a new NFS share, click Add. To change the configuration " -"of\n" +"To mount a new NFS share, click Add. To change the configuration of\n" "a currently mounted share, click Edit. Remove and unmount a selected\n" "share with Delete.\n" msgstr "" @@ -170,10 +168,8 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:76 msgid "" "If you need to access NFSv4 shares (NFSv4 is a newer version of the NFS\n" -"protocol), check the Enable NFSv4 option. In that case, you might " -"need\n" -"to supply specific a NFSv4 Domain Name required for the correct " -"setting\n" +"protocol), check the Enable NFSv4 option. In that case, you might need\n" +"to supply specific a NFSv4 Domain Name required for the correct setting\n" "of file/directory access rights.\n" msgstr "" @@ -291,8 +287,7 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:455 msgid "" "\t\t\n" -"For Mount Point, enter the path in the local file system where the " -"directory should be mounted. With\n" +"For Mount Point, enter the path in the local file system where the directory should be mounted. With\n" "Browse, select your mount point\n" "interactively." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -60,9 +60,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:113 -msgid "" -"Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc." -"com' etc." +msgid "Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc.com' etc." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:119 @@ -104,14 +102,11 @@ #. @param [Hash] options command options #. @return whether successful #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:319 -msgid "" -"Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." +msgid "Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:330 -msgid "" -"Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to " -"get information about available options." +msgid "Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to get information about available options." msgstr "" #. Then no need to check for conflict. @@ -218,9 +213,7 @@ #. Opening NFS server dialog #. @return `back, `abort, `next `or finish #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:272 -msgid "" -"Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for " -"the domain to 'localdomain'." +msgid "Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for the domain to 'localdomain'." msgstr "" #. Help, part 1 of 2 @@ -240,18 +233,15 @@ #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:311 msgid "" "If the server needs to handle NFSv4 clients, check Enable NFSv4\n" -"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. " -"Leave\n" -"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you " -"are not sure.\n" +"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. Leave\n" +"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you are not sure.\n" msgstr "" #. FIXME: use %1 as nfs-utils.src.rpm produces nfs-kernel-server.rpm #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:321 msgid "" "If the server and client must authenticate using GSS library, check the\n" -"Enable GSS Security box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have " -"Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.\n" +"Enable GSS Security box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.\n" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -302,16 +292,14 @@ #. Help, part 2 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:495 msgid "" -"Host Wild Card sets which hosts can access the selected " -"directory.\n" +"Host Wild Card sets which hosts can access the selected directory.\n" "It can be a single host, groups, wild cards, or\n" "IP networks.\n" msgstr "" #. Help, part 3 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:503 -msgid "" -"Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts." +msgid "Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts." msgstr "" #. Help, part 4 of 4 @@ -421,9 +409,7 @@ #. FIXME svcgssd is gone! (only nfsserver is left) #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:266 -msgid "" -"Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup " -"is correct." +msgid "Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup is correct." msgstr "" #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:275 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -132,8 +132,7 @@ "Firewall Settings \n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the 'ypbind' service\n" "from remote computers, set Open Port in Firewall.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click Firewall Details</" -"b>.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click Firewall Details.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.\n" msgstr "" @@ -147,19 +146,15 @@ #. help text for netconfig part #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:244 msgid "" -"Select the way how the NIS configuration will be modified. Normally, it " -"is\n" -"handled by the netconfig script, which merges the data statically defined " -"here\n" +"Select the way how the NIS configuration will be modified. Normally, it is\n" +"handled by the netconfig script, which merges the data statically defined here\n" "with dynamically obtained data (e.g. from DHCP client, NetworkManager\n" "etc.). This is the Default Policy and sufficient for most configurations. \n" -"By choosing Only Manual Changes, netconfig will no longer be allowed to " -"modify\n" +"By choosing Only Manual Changes, netconfig will no longer be allowed to modify\n" "the configuration. You can, however, edit the file manually. By choosing\n" "Custom Policy, you can specify a custom policy string, which consists of a\n" "space-separated list of interface names, including wildcards, with\n" -"STATIC/STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special values. For more information, " -"see\n" +"STATIC/STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special values. For more information, see\n" "the netconfig manual page.\n" msgstr "" @@ -181,10 +176,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:279 -msgid "" -"NFS Settings which affects how the automounter operates could be set in " -"NFS Client, which can be configured using NFS Configuration button.</" -"p>" +msgid "NFS Settings which affects how the automounter operates could be set in NFS Client, which can be configured using NFS Configuration button." msgstr "" #. radio button label @@ -309,19 +301,13 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:674 -msgid "" -"Normally, it is possible for any host to query which server a client is " -"using. Disabling Answer Remote Hosts restricts this only to the local " -"host." +msgid "Normally, it is possible for any host to query which server a client is using. Disabling Answer Remote Hosts restricts this only to the local host." msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #. Check, ie. turn on a check box #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:682 -msgid "" -"Check Broken server if answers from servers running on an " -"unprivileged port should be accepted. It is a security risk and it is better " -"to replace such a server." +msgid "Check Broken server if answers from servers running on an unprivileged port should be accepted. It is a security risk and it is better to replace such a server." msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 @@ -401,9 +387,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:985 -msgid "" -"The Service Location Protocol (SLP) can be used to find NIS server." -"" +msgid "The Service Location Protocol (SLP) can be used to find NIS server." msgstr "" #. dialog label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -156,8 +156,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:73 msgid "" -"Select if your passwd file should be merged with the shadow</" -"i>\n" +"Select if your passwd file should be merged with the shadow\n" "file (only possible if the shadow file exists).\n" msgstr "" @@ -212,8 +211,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:71 msgid "" -"Enter a NIS domain. If this host is also a NIS client using this " -"machine as a server, check\n" +"Enter a NIS domain. If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check\n" "the corresponding option.\n" msgstr "" @@ -300,8 +298,7 @@ "Firewall Settings \n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the NIS server\n" "from remote computers, set Open Port in Firewall.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click Firewall Details</" -"b>.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click Firewall Details.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.\n" msgstr "" @@ -373,16 +370,12 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:62 -msgid "" -"Enter the NIS domain and the IP address or host name of the " -"master NIS server." +msgid "Enter the NIS domain and the IP address or host name of the master NIS server." msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:69 -msgid "" -"If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check " -"the corresponding option." +msgid "If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check the corresponding option." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -422,10 +415,7 @@ #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:175 -msgid "" -"Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use " -"Add to add a new one, Edit to change an existing entry, and " -"Delete to remove an entry." +msgid "Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use Add to add a new one, Edit to change an existing entry, and Delete to remove an entry." msgstr "" #. To translators: selection box label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -23,32 +23,21 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Press Synchronize Now, to get your system time set correctly using " -"the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable " -"the Save NTP Configuration option" +msgid "Press Synchronize Now, to get your system time set correctly using the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable the Save NTP Configuration option" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"Enabling Run NTP as daemon option, the NTP service will be started " -"as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The " -"default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the " -"yast2 ntp-client module." +msgid "Enabling Run NTP as daemon option, the NTP service will be started as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the yast2 ntp-client module." msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"Using the Configure button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</" -"p>" +msgid "Using the Configure button, open the advanced NTP configuration." msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:116 -msgid "" -"Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is " -"configured." +msgid "Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is configured." msgstr "" #. translators: error popup @@ -607,10 +596,8 @@ "Select whether to start the NTP daemon now and on every system boot. \n" "The NTP daemon resolves host names when initializing. Your\n" "network connection must be started before the NTP daemon starts.\n" -"Selecting Synchronize without Daemon the ntp daemon will not be " -"activated. \n" -"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It " -"is 15 minutes by default.\n" +"Selecting Synchronize without Daemon the ntp daemon will not be activated. \n" +"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It is 15 minutes by default.\n" " You can change this when the system was set up." msgstr "" @@ -626,12 +613,9 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:51 msgid "" "<big>Secure NTP Configuration</big> \n" -"By selecting Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only, remote " -"hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" -"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</" -"tt> file and to localhost. \n" -"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This " -"option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.\n" +"By selecting Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only, remote hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" +"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> file and to localhost. \n" +"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 3/5 @@ -649,8 +633,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Configured Servers</big> \n" "To adjust NTP servers, peers, local clocks, and NTP broadcasting,\n" -"select the appropriate line and click Edit. To add a new " -"synchronization\n" +"select the appropriate line and click Edit. To add a new synchronization\n" "peer, click Add. To delete an existing synchronization peer,\n" "select it and click Delete." msgstr "" @@ -666,8 +649,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<big>Advanced configuration</big> \n" -"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or " -"against\n" +"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or against\n" "a locally connected clock, use Advanced Configuration." msgstr "" @@ -690,8 +672,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:94 msgid "" "<big>Device</big> \n" -"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic " -"link to \n" +"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic link to \n" "the device to which the clock is connected. To do this, check\n" "Create Symlink and set the Device. To browse for the device,\n" "click Browse.\n" @@ -761,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:148 msgid "" "<big>Options</big> \n" -"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in " -"the\n" +"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in the\n" "Options text field. For details, see\n" "/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/confopt.htm.\n" msgstr "" @@ -771,8 +751,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Access Control Options</big> \n" "Define the access control flags (<tt>restrict</tt> directive in\n" -"/etc/ntp.conf) for this server, indicating which types of actions the " -"remote\n" +"/etc/ntp.conf) for this server, indicating which types of actions the remote\n" "host can perform on your NTP daemon. By default, it is set to notrap\n" "nomodify noquery. This option is only available if you have checked the\n" "Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only option in\n" @@ -843,8 +822,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:202 msgid "" "<big>Selecting a Public NTP Server</big> \n" -"Select the NTP server to use from the Public NTP Servers list. To " -"display\n" +"Select the NTP server to use from the Public NTP Servers list. To display\n" "NTP servers only for a particular country, select it in Country." msgstr "" @@ -874,10 +852,8 @@ msgid "" "<big>Use Random Servers</big> \n" "This service is offered by pool.ntp.org. If you select this option,\n" -"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names " -"are\n" -"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means " -"that\n" +"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names are\n" +"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means that\n" "your NTP client is synchronized with different servers every hour.\n" msgstr "" @@ -885,10 +861,8 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:238 msgid "" "<big>Clock Driver Calibration</big> \n" -"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various " -"calibration\n" -"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the " -"particular\n" +"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various calibration\n" +"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the particular\n" "driver. Some drivers do not use all the options." msgstr "" @@ -896,8 +870,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "To learn more about available options, install the package\n" -"ntp-doc and see /usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</" -"i>.\n" +"ntp-doc and see /usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm.\n" msgstr "" #. yes-no popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -35,9 +35,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:44 -msgid "" -"File containing internal representation of One Click Install " -"instructions" +msgid "File containing internal representation of One Click Install instructions" msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:65 @@ -120,8 +118,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:47 -msgid "" -"See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." +msgid "See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." msgstr "" #. <region name="Define the UI components"> * @@ -195,38 +192,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:56 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required " -"repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. Remove any removals #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:96 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. if that was successful now try and install the patterns #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:113 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. if that was successful now try and install the packages #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:129 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. If we don't want to remain subscribed, remove the repositories that were added for installation. #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:148 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that " -"were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST " -"> Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST > Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:159 @@ -263,8 +249,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:71 -msgid "" -"The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." +msgid "The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:81 @@ -292,9 +277,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:348 -msgid "" -"These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not " -"remain subscribed." +msgid "These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not remain subscribed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:352 @@ -343,9 +326,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:507 -msgid "" -"The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/" -"var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " +msgid "The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:515 @@ -413,7 +394,5 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerResponse.rb:13 -msgid "" -"Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown " -"error occurred." +msgid "Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown error occurred." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -146,22 +146,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:97 -msgid "" -"Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be " -"ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with." +msgid "Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with." msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:102 -msgid "" -"All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed " -"when %1 is enabled." +msgid "All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed when %1 is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:108 -msgid "" -"Category filter for patches can be configured in the section %1. " -"Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be " -"skipped." +msgid "Category filter for patches can be configured in the section %1. Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be skipped." msgstr "" #. cache the base product details Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -60,10 +60,7 @@ #. help text for online-update initialization #: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 -msgid "" -"The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. " -"Software repositories can be altered in the Installation Source " -"module." +msgid "The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the Installation Source module." msgstr "" #. progress stage label @@ -150,9 +147,7 @@ #. help text for online update #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 -msgid "" -"If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be " -"shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.\n" +msgid "If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.\n" msgstr "" #. using SetContents (define in online_update.ycp) @@ -252,8 +247,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup text #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 msgid "" -"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of " -"YaST.\n" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" "They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" "\n" "You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -339,16 +339,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for installation) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1266 -msgid "" -"Select the online repositories you want to use then click Next.</" -"p>\n" +msgid "Select the online repositories you want to use then click Next.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for running system) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1270 -msgid "" -"Select the online repositories you want to use then click Finish.</" -"p>\n" +msgid "Select the online repositories you want to use then click Finish.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 3/3 @@ -450,9 +446,7 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:368 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST " -"profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST profile." msgstr "" #. error message - displayed in a scrollable text area @@ -511,9 +505,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:72 -msgid "" -"Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. pad to 3 characters @@ -678,21 +670,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:880 -msgid "" -"A service or Repository Index Service (RIS) is a protocol " -"for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software " -"repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator.</" -"P>" +msgid "A service or Repository Index Service (RIS) is a protocol for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator." msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:887 msgid "" "\n" "Adding a new Repository or a Service \n" -"To add a new repository, use Add and specify the software repository " -"or service.\n" -"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is " -"available at the entered location.\n" +"To add a new repository, use Add and specify the software repository or service.\n" +"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is available at the entered location.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -723,11 +709,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Modifying Status of a Repository or a Service \n" -"To change a repository location, use Edit. To remove a repository, " -"use\n" -"Delete. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh " -"status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use " -"the check boxes below.\n" +"To change a repository location, use Edit. To remove a repository, use\n" +"Delete. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use the check boxes below.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -735,17 +718,12 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:938 msgid "" "Priority of a Repository \n" -"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest " -"priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is " -"available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is " -"used.\n" +"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is used.\n" msgstr "" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:946 -msgid "" -"Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in " -"repositories and services." +msgid "Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in repositories and services." msgstr "" #. help text, continued @@ -753,14 +731,11 @@ msgid "" "Keep Downloaded Packages Check this option to keep downloaded\n" "packages in a local cache so they can be reused later when the packages are\n" -"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after " -"installation." +"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after installation." msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:960 -msgid "" -"The default local cache is located in directory /var/cache/zypp/" -"packages. Change the location in /etc/zypp/zypp.conf file." +msgid "The default local cache is located in directory /var/cache/zypp/packages. Change the location in /etc/zypp/zypp.conf file." msgstr "" #. popup message part 1 @@ -876,8 +851,7 @@ #. warning text #: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:103 #: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:58 -msgid "" -"Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." +msgid "Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." msgstr "" #. this is a heading @@ -892,9 +866,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the software management module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/sw_single.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Software Installation - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Software Installation - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. error message (%1 is a package file name) @@ -1020,8 +992,7 @@ #. wrong MD5 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:126 -msgid "" -"Error -- MD5 sum does not match This medium should not be used." +msgid "Error -- MD5 sum does not match This medium should not be used." msgstr "" #. the correct MD5 is unknown @@ -1048,16 +1019,14 @@ #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:304 msgid "" "When you have a problem with\n" -"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you " -"should check\n" +"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you should check\n" "whether the medium is broken.\n" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 3/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:310 msgid "" -"Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press Start Check</" -"B>\n" +"Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press Start Check\n" "or use Check ISO File and select an ISO file.\n" "The check can take several minutes depending on speed of the\n" "drive and size of the medium. The check verifies the MD5 checksum. " @@ -1066,10 +1035,8 @@ #. help text - media check 4/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:317 msgid "" -"If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the " -"installation.\n" -"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.</" -"P>\n" +"If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the installation.\n" +"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.\n" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 5/8 @@ -1081,25 +1048,19 @@ #. help text - media check 6/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:325 -msgid "" -"Note: You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system." -"" +msgid "Note: You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system." msgstr "" #. help text - media check 7/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:329 -msgid "" -"To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the " -"boot menu." +msgid "To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the boot menu." msgstr "" #. help text - media check 8/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:333 msgid "" -"If you burn the media yourself, use the pad option in your " -"recording\n" -"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.</" -"P>\n" +"If you burn the media yourself, use the pad option in your recording\n" +"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.\n" msgstr "" #. advice check of the media @@ -1406,8 +1367,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information #: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1356 msgid "" -"The installation repository also contains the listed additional " -"repositories.\n" +"The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" "Select the ones you want to use.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1568,35 +1528,25 @@ #. warning text #: src/modules/Packages.rb:309 -msgid "" -"Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-" -"bit distribution." +msgid "Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-bit distribution." msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:325 -msgid "" -"The pattern list states which functionality will be available after " -"installing the system." +msgid "The pattern list states which functionality will be available after installing the system." msgstr "" #. (see bnc#178357 why these numbers) #. translators: help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:337 -msgid "" -"The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to " -"the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and " -"working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed " -"value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) " -"free space before starting the installation." +msgid "The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) free space before starting the installation." msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:342 msgid "" "The total 'size to download' is the size of the packages which will be\n" -"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if " -"the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.\n" +"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal - header @@ -1636,23 +1586,17 @@ #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:502 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation " -"media." +msgid "Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation media." msgstr "" #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:506 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation " -"media." +msgid "Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation media." msgstr "" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/usr", %2: "/dev/sda2" #: src/modules/Packages.rb:547 -msgid "" -"Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot " -"start installation." +msgid "Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot start installation." msgstr "" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/local", %2: "/dev/sda2" @@ -1710,10 +1654,8 @@ msgid "" "<ul><li>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</li>\n" "<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" -"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or " -"module\n" -"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to " -"the\n" +"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" "software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" "</li></ul></li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -1726,8 +1668,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes #: src/modules/Packages.rb:1612 msgid "" -"The release notes for the initial release are part of the " -"installation\n" +"The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" "media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" "download updated release notes from the SUSE Linux Web server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1790,9 +1731,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:151 -msgid "" -"To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the " -"root of the live media when building the image." +msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." msgstr "" #. combo box @@ -2125,9 +2064,7 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:468 msgid "" "<big>Repository Name</big> \n" -"Use Repository Name to specify the name of the repository. If it is " -"empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name." -"\n" +"Use Repository Name to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.\n" msgstr "" #. text entry @@ -2139,8 +2076,7 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:490 msgid "" "<big>Service Name</big> \n" -"Use Service Name to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, " -"YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.\n" +"Use Service Name to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.\n" msgstr "" #. popup message @@ -2184,8 +2120,7 @@ msgid "" "<big>Mount Options</big> \n" "You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" -"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See " -"man 5 nfs\n" +"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See man 5 nfs\n" "for details and the list of supported options." msgstr "" @@ -2388,8 +2323,7 @@ "To enable authentication, uncheck Anonymous and specify the\n" "User Name and the Password.\n" "\n" -"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify Share name and Path to " -"Directory\n" +"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify Share name and Path to Directory\n" "or ISO Image. \n" "If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set ISO Image.\n" @@ -2398,8 +2332,7 @@ #. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1896 msgid "" -"It is possible to set the Port number for a HTTP/HTTPS " -"repository.\n" +"It is possible to set the Port number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" "Leave it empty to use the default port.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2468,8 +2401,7 @@ msgid "" "Download Files \n" "Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" -"repository. Check Download repository description files to download " -"the\n" +"repository. Check Download repository description files to download the\n" "files when closing this YaST module. If the option is unchecked, YaST will\n" "automatically download the files when it needs them later. \n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -22,37 +22,25 @@ #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:36 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Loading Available Packages</BIG>Loading available " -"objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a " -"while..." +msgid "<BIG>Loading Available Packages</BIG>Loading available objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a while..." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:42 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Loading Installed Packages</BIG>The package manager is " -"reading installed packages..." +msgid "<BIG>Loading Installed Packages</BIG>The package manager is reading installed packages..." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:47 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Registering a New Repository</BIG>A new repository is " -"being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available " -"packages in the repository..." +msgid "<BIG>Registering a New Repository</BIG>A new repository is being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available packages in the repository..." msgstr "" #: src/HelpTexts.h:52 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Saving Repositories</BIG>The package manager is " -"updating configured repositories..." +msgid "<BIG>Saving Repositories</BIG>The package manager is updating configured repositories..." msgstr "" #: src/HelpTexts.h:55 -msgid "" -"<BIG>Refreshing the Repository</BIG>The package manager is " -"updating the repository content..." +msgid "<BIG>Refreshing the Repository</BIG>The package manager is updating the repository content..." msgstr "" #. error message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -65,19 +65,16 @@ #. If cups is missing, there can be no local running cupsd which is #. mandatory to set up local print queues. #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." msgstr "" #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:102 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." msgstr "" #. Skip automated queue setup when it is a client-only config: #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:117 -msgid "" -"No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." +msgid "No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." msgstr "" #. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd: @@ -177,17 +174,14 @@ #. Header for a dialog section where the user can #. specify if USB printers are configured automatically: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:61 -msgid "" -"Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" +msgid "Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" msgstr "" #. CheckBox for automatic configuration of USB printers #. by installing or removing the RPM package udev-configure-printer. #. Do not change or translate "udev-configure-printer", it is a RPM package name. #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:75 -msgid "" -"&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer " -"configuration" +msgid "&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer configuration" msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: @@ -205,9 +199,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:101 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of " -"printers for the local system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of printers for the local system." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system @@ -494,9 +486,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a wrong queue name was entered: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:379 -msgid "" -"Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are " -"allowed for the queue name." +msgid "Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed for the queue name." msgstr "" #. when a queue name is changed to be valid: @@ -519,9 +509,7 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:430 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:821 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, " -"wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because before the RunHpsetup function was called @@ -568,9 +556,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term when no driver is used. #. Do not change or translate "System V style interface script", it is a technical term. #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:315 -msgid "" -"No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface " -"script' is used)" +msgid "No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' is used)" msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:323 @@ -622,9 +608,7 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:823 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time " -"and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." msgstr "" #. Exit this dialog in any case: @@ -650,8 +634,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term #. when no driver is used for a print queue. #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:432 -msgid "" -"Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" +msgid "Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" msgstr "" #. Header for a ComboBox to select the printer manufacturer: @@ -768,8 +751,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1076 -msgid "" -"To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." +msgid "To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." msgstr "" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -847,9 +829,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1402 -msgid "" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed." +msgid "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." msgstr "" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -1161,8 +1141,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2481 -msgid "" -"The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." +msgid "The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2523 @@ -1321,9 +1300,7 @@ #. Without a link name /usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/smb (which is provided by samba-client) #. the rest makes no sense (in particular the ln commands would create nonsense links in $PWD): #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3245 -msgid "" -"To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be " -"installed." +msgid "To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed." msgstr "" #. Show a user notification before it gets disabled: @@ -1514,8 +1491,7 @@ #. Simply exit this dialog because it does not make sense to proceed here #. and there is nothing else to be done after this: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:679 -msgid "" -"The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." +msgid "The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." msgstr "" #. when a PPD file is not in compliance: @@ -1526,8 +1502,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline #. when PPD file is not in compliance: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:699 -msgid "" -"A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." +msgid "A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:716 @@ -1570,14 +1545,12 @@ "<big>Print Queue Overview</big> \n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue. \n" "When various applications submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the " -"printer\n" +"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the printer\n" "device. \n" "It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer\n" "device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver for a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer.\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1662,19 +1635,14 @@ "<big>Set Up a New Queue for a Printer Device</big> \n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue. \n" "When various application programs submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device." -" \n" -"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer " -"device.\n" -"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer " -"drivers\n" +"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device. \n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer device.\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" "should be used for the same printer device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver\n" "to enforce black-only printout on a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer\n" -"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less " -"quality).\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer\n" +"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less quality).\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1693,8 +1661,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "\n" -"The connection determines which way data is sent to the printer " -"device. \n" +"The connection determines which way data is sent to the printer device. \n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout. \n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1702,10 +1669,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1717,8 +1682,7 @@ "The driver determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model. \n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -" \n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all. \n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" "with the autodetected model name of the currently selected connection\n" "and those drivers where the driver description matches to the model name\n" @@ -1743,8 +1707,7 @@ "and feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" "to what you know what works best for your printer. \n" "If no driver description matches to the autodetected model name,\n" -"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the " -"model.\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" "Often only the model name in the driver descriptions\n" "is different from the autodetected model name.\n" "Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" @@ -1825,8 +1788,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:268 msgid "" "\n" -"The connection determines how data is sent to the printer device." -" \n" +"The connection determines how data is sent to the printer device. \n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout. \n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1834,10 +1796,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used. \n" "When you exchange the currently used connection with another one,\n" "the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" @@ -1874,12 +1834,9 @@ "The driver determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model. \n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -" \n" -"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings " -"later\n" -"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now." -" \n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all. \n" +"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings later\n" +"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now. \n" "Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" "For example the default paper size setting of the driver\n" "must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer. \n" @@ -1888,8 +1845,7 @@ "should work for the particular driver.\n" "Nevertheless it may happen that your particular printer fails to print\n" "with high resolution. For example when you have a laser printer\n" -"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages." -" \n" +"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages. \n" "When you exchange the currently used driver by another one,\n" "you must first apply this change to the print queue\n" "so that the new driver is used for the queue\n" @@ -1897,8 +1853,7 @@ "and then in a second step you can adjust all driver options\n" "by using this dialog again. \n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" -"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was " -"not changed.\n" +"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not changed.\n" "This results usually only one single driver which matches\n" "so that you would have to enter a less specific driver search string\n" "to get also other drivers or you use the 'Find More' button.\n" @@ -1913,10 +1868,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "In contrast to connection and driver where you must select the right one,\n" -"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for description and " -"location.\n" -"Application programs often show description and location in the print " -"dialog.\n" +"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for description and location.\n" +"Application programs often show description and location in the print dialog.\n" "To make sure that those strings look correct in any language\n" "which a particular user of a particular application program may use,\n" "it is safe when you use only plain ASCII text without\n" @@ -2022,8 +1975,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Specify the Connection</big> \n" -"The connection determines how data is sent to the printer device." -" \n" +"The connection determines how data is sent to the printer device. \n" "If a wrong connection is used, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.\n" "\n" @@ -2035,24 +1987,19 @@ "\n" "<big>Printer Device URI</big> \n" "A connection is specified as so called device URI. \n" -"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-" -"transfer,\n" +"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" "for example 'parallel', 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'. \n" "After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" "which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer. \n" "Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" "Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" -"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character)." -" \n" +"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character). \n" "The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" -"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign " -"'='. \n" -"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark " -"'?')\n" +"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='. \n" +"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" "of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" "a full device URI could be for example: \n" -"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&" -"waitprinter=false \n" +"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false \n" "Some examples: \n" "A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" "with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like: \n" @@ -2170,10 +2117,8 @@ "Example device URIs: \n" "serial:/dev/ttyS9?baud=9600+bits=8+parity=none+flow=soft+stop=1 \n" "bluetooth://1A2B3C4D5E6F \n" -"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be " -"installed.\n" -"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the " -"data\n" +"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the data\n" "to a bluetooth printer.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -2182,8 +2127,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:586 msgid "" "\n" -"<big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big> \n" "A printserver box is a small device with a network connection\n" "and a USB or parallel port connection to connect the actual printer.\n" "A network printer has such a device built-in.\n" @@ -2231,8 +2175,7 @@ "Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" "provides in your particular network: \n" "Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS) \n" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed.\n" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" "The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" "the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" "to a SMB printer share. \n" @@ -2275,8 +2218,7 @@ "the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share: \n" "smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B \n" "For more information have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and \n" -"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:" -"Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share \n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share \n" "'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" "of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. \n" "Traditional UNIX Server (LPR) \n" @@ -2344,12 +2286,10 @@ "The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before. \n" "Example: \n" "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number \n" -"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second " -"delay\n" +"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" "between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" "and the print job is lost. \n" -"For more information have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/" -"beh</tt> and \n" +"For more information have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and \n" "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler…" "" msgstr "" @@ -2359,8 +2299,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Printing Via Network</big> \n" -"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network." -" \n" +"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network. \n" "By default CUPS uses its so called 'Browsing' mode\n" "to make printers available via network. \n" "In this case remote CUPS servers must publish their printers via network\n" @@ -2416,10 +2355,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" -"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your " -"host.\n" -"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly." -" \n" +"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" +"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly. \n" "A possible drawback is that application programs may be delayed\n" "for some time (until a timeout happens) when they try\n" "to access the CUPS server but it is actually not available\n" @@ -2452,8 +2389,7 @@ "Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) should be set up to use\n" "its so called 'Browsing' mode to make printers available via network. \n" "In this case CUPS servers publish their local print queues via network\n" -"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must " -"run\n" +"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" "which is listening for incoming information about published printers. \n" "CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.\n" "" @@ -2464,17 +2400,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" "First of all CUPS client systems must be allowed to access the CUPS server.\n" -"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients." -" \n" +"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients. \n" "In a local network the usual way to set up CUPS Browsing is\n" "to allow remote access for all hosts in the local network\n" "and to publish printers to all those hosts. \n" "It is not required to publish printers in any case. \n" -"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS " -"Browsing.\n" +"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS Browsing.\n" "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server on the client systems\n" -"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server " -"directly.\n" +"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server directly.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -2567,8 +2500,7 @@ " \n" "The following error policies exist: \n" "Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing. \n" -"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by " -"default). \n" +"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default). \n" "Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -2700,8 +2632,7 @@ #. to have him informed what goes on here and what he can do on his own. #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:128 msgid "" -"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not " -"accessible.\n" +"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not accessible.\n" "Check with 'lpstat -h localhost -r' whether a local cupsd is accessible.\n" "A non-accessible cupsd leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2748,8 +2679,7 @@ #. so that it is now no longer a real client-only config and #. therefore the Printerlib::client_* values must be determined anew: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:226 src/include/printer/overview.rb:237 -msgid "" -"A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." +msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the CUPS server name. @@ -2777,8 +2707,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:610 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:617 @@ -2787,9 +2716,7 @@ #. Body of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:619 -msgid "" -"The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be " -"restored." +msgid "The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be restored." msgstr "" #. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: @@ -2845,9 +2772,7 @@ #. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback #. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:731 -msgid "" -"There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is " -"printed." +msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is printed." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. @@ -2980,8 +2905,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1051 -msgid "" -"CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" +msgid "CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" msgstr "" #. but the test_print_cups_error_log was effectively empty, @@ -2992,9 +2916,7 @@ #. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote " -"system." +msgid "When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote system." msgstr "" #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: @@ -3008,8 +2930,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be modified: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1164 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." msgstr "" #. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy @@ -3065,9 +2986,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:139 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local " -"system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local system." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the print queue name. @@ -3305,8 +3224,7 @@ #. they are at least informend why there may be still remote queues: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:727 msgid "" -"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept " -"announcements'\n" +"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept announcements'\n" "or after 'request printer information from CUPS servers' was disabled\n" "it takes usually 5 minutes until already received information faded away..." msgstr "" @@ -3386,16 +3304,13 @@ #. TextEntry to allow remote access to local print queues #. for hosts and/or networks: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:180 -msgid "" -"Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" +msgid "Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" msgstr "" #. TextEntry to publish local print queues #. to IP addresses and/or network broadcast addresses: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:192 -msgid "" -"Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by " -"space)" +msgid "Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by space)" msgstr "" #. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default @@ -3451,9 +3366,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:643 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer " -"configurations." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer configurations." msgstr "" #. Only "Printing via Network" configuration of printer. @@ -3850,8 +3763,7 @@ #: src/modules/Printer.rb:2691 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. from the BasicAdd dialog but the RPM package hplip is not installed: @@ -3867,15 +3779,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because: Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -510,16 +510,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:787 -msgid "" -"Use Edit to change selected image configuration or create the " -"image." +msgid "Use Edit to change selected image configuration or create the image." msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:791 -msgid "" -"Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting " -"Delete." +msgid "Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting Delete." msgstr "" #. help text, %1 is directory @@ -807,8 +803,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1512 msgid "" "\n" -"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed to add\n" "more add-on selections and packages.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -838,8 +833,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1830 msgid "" "<big>Sign</big> \n" -"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG " -"key. \n" +"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. \n" "This key is checked when the product is added as a repository." msgstr "" @@ -847,11 +841,8 @@ #. (if the page exists in that language, you have to check that!) #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1837 msgid "" -"If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option " -"'Insecure:\n" -"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading " -"an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc " -"for more information." +"If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option 'Insecure:\n" +"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for more information." msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1846 @@ -912,8 +903,7 @@ msgid "" "For example, \n" "configure the CD for automatic installations and specify the installation\n" -"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the " -"original is used.\n" +"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the original is used.\n" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -975,10 +965,8 @@ #. overview dialog help part 5 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"Press Create Image with KIWI for additional configuration of " -"various\n" -"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image " -"system." +"Press Create Image with KIWI for additional configuration of various\n" +"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image system." msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/4 @@ -1019,14 +1007,11 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:114 msgid "" "<big>Target Architecture</big> \n" -"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that " -"of\n" +"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that of\n" "the machine you are currently working on.\n" "All selected repositories must support the target architecture. \n" -"Note: KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not " -"change\n" -"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current " -"configuration.\n" +"Note: KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not change\n" +"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 @@ -1063,25 +1048,20 @@ #. help text - the base selection dialog 2/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:147 msgid "" -"One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The " -"base\n" -"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is " -"also\n" +"One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The base\n" +"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is also\n" "bootable.\n" msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 3/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:153 -msgid "" -"The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</" -"p>" +msgid "The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository." msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 4/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and " -"proposes\n" +"The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and proposes\n" "the base product. If the proposed value is wrong, select the right base\n" "repository from the list.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1254,16 +1234,12 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1513 msgid "" -"Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:</" -"p>\n" +"Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:\n" "%2.\n" "\n" -"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package " -"selection or ignore the situation.\n" +"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package selection or ignore the situation.\n" "\n" -"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any " -"further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the " -"section.\n" +"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1378,9 +1354,7 @@ #. informative label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2277 -msgid "" -"Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from " -"Studio." +msgid "Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from Studio." msgstr "" #. tab header @@ -1397,8 +1371,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2367 msgid "" "Select the value for image Compression. This will modify the\n" -"flags value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an " -"explanation of available values." +"flags value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an explanation of available values." msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1417,9 +1390,7 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2424 -msgid "" -"For ignored software, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a " -"new line." +msgid "For ignored software, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a new line." msgstr "" #. label @@ -1429,9 +1400,7 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2436 -msgid "" -"Each entry of Packages to Delete is one package name to be " -"uninstalled from the target image." +msgid "Each entry of Packages to Delete is one package name to be uninstalled from the target image." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1452,8 +1421,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2461 msgid "" "Set the image Size in the specified Unit.\n" -"If Additive is checked, the meaning of Size is different: it " -"is the minimal free space available on the image." +"If Additive is checked, the meaning of Size is different: it is the minimal free space available on the image." msgstr "" #. combo box label (MB/GB values) @@ -1473,9 +1441,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2489 -msgid "" -"To create an encrypted file system, check Encrypt Image with LUKS " -"and enter the password." +msgid "To create an encrypted file system, check Encrypt Image with LUKS and enter the password." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1500,10 +1466,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2531 -msgid "" -"Define the path to the Directory with System Configuration (the " -"<tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of " -"the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>." +msgid "Define the path to the Directory with System Configuration (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>." msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1518,10 +1481,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2561 -msgid "" -"Configure the Directory with System Configuration (the <tt>root</" -"tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image " -"tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>." +msgid "Configure the Directory with System Configuration (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>." msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1536,10 +1496,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2598 -msgid "" -"Configure the Directory with Scripts (the <tt>config</tt> " -"directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all " -"the image packages." +msgid "Configure the Directory with Scripts (the <tt>config</tt> directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1560,10 +1517,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2646 -msgid "" -"Edit your Image Configuration Script, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. " -"This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package " -"scripts have run." +msgid "Edit your Image Configuration Script, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package scripts have run." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1572,10 +1526,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2667 -msgid "" -"The optional Directory with Scripts (<tt>config</tt> directory) " -"contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image " -"packages." +msgid "The optional Directory with Scripts (<tt>config</tt> directory) contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages." msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -1589,9 +1540,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2688 -msgid "" -"Edit your Cleanup Script (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run " -"at the beginning of the image creation process." +msgid "Edit your Cleanup Script (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run at the beginning of the image creation process." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1606,9 +1555,7 @@ #. help text for Author, Contact and Specification widgets #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2711 -msgid "" -"Set the values for Author of the image, Contact Information</" -"b>, and the image Specification." +msgid "Set the values for Author of the image, Contact Information, and the image Specification." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1633,9 +1580,7 @@ #. help text for locale #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2762 -msgid "" -"The value of Locale (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of " -"the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>." +msgid "The value of Locale (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1645,9 +1590,7 @@ #. help text for keytable #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2778 -msgid "" -"Keyboard Layout specifies the name of the console keymap to use. " -"The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>." +msgid "Keyboard Layout specifies the name of the console keymap to use. The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1657,9 +1600,7 @@ #. help text for timezone #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2795 -msgid "" -"It is possible to set a specific Time zone. Available time zones " -"are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory." +msgid "It is possible to set a specific Time zone. Available time zones are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory." msgstr "" #. general help for users tab @@ -1700,8 +1641,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2828 msgid "" -"For each user, specify the Name, Password, Home " -"Directory and group\n" +"For each user, specify the Name, Password, Home Directory and group\n" "to which the users belongs.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1732,16 +1672,12 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2973 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on " -"template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.</" -"p>" +msgid "Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration." msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2980 -msgid "" -"Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory." +msgid "Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory." msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1756,10 +1692,7 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2994 -msgid "" -"Modify the list of Package Repositories that will be used for " -"creating the image. Use Add From System to add one of the current " -"system repositories." +msgid "Modify the list of Package Repositories that will be used for creating the image. Use Add From System to add one of the current system repositories." msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1779,9 +1712,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3123 -msgid "" -"Selected directory does not contain valid description of system " -"configuration." +msgid "Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." msgstr "" #. busy popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,10 +178,8 @@ #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:405 msgid "" "Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.\n" -"Note: It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to " -"take effect, \n" -"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. " -"Please check \n" +"Note: It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" +"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" "what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. " msgstr "" @@ -195,8 +193,7 @@ #. Proxy dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:416 msgid "" -"HTTPS Proxy URL is the name of the proxy server for your secured " -"access\n" +"HTTPS Proxy URL is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" "to the World Wide Web (WWW).\n" msgstr "" @@ -233,8 +230,7 @@ msgid "" "If you are using a proxy server with authorization, enter\n" "the Proxy User Name and Proxy Password. A valid username\n" -"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</" -"p>\n" +"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).\n" msgstr "" #. Proxy dialog help 8/8 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -301,15 +301,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1455 -msgid "" -"<a href=\"repoupgraderemove:///%1\">Cancel switching</a> system " -"packages to versions in repository %2" +msgid "<a href=\"repoupgraderemove:///%1\">Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1474 -msgid "" -"<a href=\"repoupgradeadd:///%1\">Switch system packages</a> to the " -"versions in this repository (%2)" +msgid "<a href=\"repoupgradeadd:///%1\">Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1697 @@ -340,11 +336,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:186 -msgid "" -"You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you " -"risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not " -"absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press Cancel now and " -"deselect some packages." +msgid "You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press Cancel now and deselect some packages." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 @@ -369,9 +361,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:301 -msgid "" -"In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been " -"changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 @@ -385,9 +375,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:322 -msgid "" -"Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or " -"requires an additional customer contract for support." +msgid "Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or requires an additional customer contract for support." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:421 @@ -401,9 +389,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:65 -msgid "" -"Note: This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for " -"details." +msgid "Note: This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for details." msgstr "" #. Help specific to online update mode @@ -412,143 +398,91 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:73 -msgid "" -"The list on the left side contains available patches along with the " -"respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the " -"(estimated) download size." +msgid "The list on the left side contains available patches along with the respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the (estimated) download size." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:76 -msgid "" -"This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on " -"your system yet. You can change that with the Include Installed Patches</" -"b> check box below the list." +msgid "This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your system yet. You can change that with the Include Installed Patches check box below the list." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:78 -msgid "" -"The Patch Description field contains a longer explanation of the " -"currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description " -"here." +msgid "The Patch Description field contains a longer explanation of the currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description here." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:80 -msgid "" -"The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently " -"selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete " -"individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is " -"intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." +msgid "The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." msgstr "" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" ( below the package list ) #. that show details about the ( one ) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:88 -msgid "" -"In addition to Patches, you can also select one of the other filter " -"views from Filter at the upper left:" +msgid "In addition to Patches, you can also select one of the other filter views from Filter at the upper left:" msgstr "" #. Help specific to normal (non-online-update) mode #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:96 -msgid "" -"In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can " -"select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." +msgid "In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:98 -msgid "" -"Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or " -"right-click it to open a context menu." +msgid "Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or right-click it to open a context menu." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:100 -msgid "" -"Use the Check Dependencies button to resolve package dependencies. " -"Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only " -"be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check " -"will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn " -"you if there are dependency conflicts." +msgid "Use the Check Dependencies button to resolve package dependencies. Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn you if there are dependency conflicts." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:105 -msgid "" -"When you leave this dialog with Accept, this check will automatically " -"be performed." +msgid "When you leave this dialog with Accept, this check will automatically be performed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" (below the package list) #. that show details about the (one) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:111 -msgid "" -"Select one of the available filter views with the Filter combo-box at " -"the upper left:" +msgid "Select one of the available filter views with the Filter combo-box at the upper left:" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:115 -msgid "" -"Selections shows some predefined sets of packages that logically " -"belong together." +msgid "Selections shows some predefined sets of packages that logically belong together." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:116 -msgid "" -"Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can " -"also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." +msgid "Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." msgstr "" #. Help common to all modes: Description of the various filter views #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:124 -msgid "" -"Package Groups shows packages by category. You can expand and " -"collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category " -"to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right " -"side." +msgid "Package Groups shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:127 -msgid "" -" Hint: There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that " -"will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." +msgid " Hint: There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:130 -msgid "" -"Search allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. " -"This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." +msgid "Search allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:132 -msgid "" -"Hint: You can also use this to find out what package contains a " -"certain library. Search in the Provides RPM field." +msgid "Hint: You can also use this to find out what package contains a certain library. Search in the Provides RPM field." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:135 -msgid "" -"Installation Summary by default shows the changes to your system -- " -"what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." +msgid "Installation Summary by default shows the changes to your system -- what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:137 -msgid "" -"It is generally a good idea to use Check Dependencies then switch to " -"Installation Summary before clicking Accept. This way you can " -"see all changes that will be made to your system." +msgid "It is generally a good idea to use Check Dependencies then switch to Installation Summary before clicking Accept. This way you can see all changes that will be made to your system." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:140 -msgid "" -"You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; " -"use the check boxes at the left side." +msgid "You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; use the check boxes at the left side." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:142 -msgid "" -"Hint: You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see " -"what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check Keep and " -"uncheck everything else." +msgid "Hint: You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check Keep and uncheck everything else." msgstr "" #. Make sure all images used here are specified in @@ -599,9 +533,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:186 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the " -"versions are the same)." +msgid "This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions are the same)." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -624,16 +556,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:199 -msgid "" -"This package is not installed and should not be installed under any " -"circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other " -"packages might have or get." +msgid "This package is not installed and should not be installed under any circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:203 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:316 -msgid "" -"Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any " -"installation media." +msgid "Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any installation media." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -643,15 +570,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:209 -msgid "" -"This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not " -"because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgid "This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:213 -msgid "" -"Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by " -"newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -662,14 +585,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:220 -msgid "" -"This package will be installed automatically because some other package " -"needs it." +msgid "This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs it." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:222 -msgid "" -"Hint: You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." +msgid "Hint: You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -680,9 +600,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:228 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer " -"version, so it will automatically be updated." +msgid "This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer version, so it will automatically be updated." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -693,9 +611,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:235 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it " -"is deleted." +msgid "This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it is deleted." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:236 @@ -720,9 +636,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:278 -msgid "" -"Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the " -"latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." +msgid "Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -732,16 +646,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:287 -msgid "" -"Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not " -"installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." +msgid "Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:295 -msgid "" -"Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore " -"packages that are not installed." +msgid "Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore packages that are not installed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -751,17 +661,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:304 -msgid "" -"Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently " -"set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." +msgid "Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." msgstr "" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:312 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package " -"does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies " -"that other packages might have or get. " +msgid "Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -771,16 +676,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:324 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package " -"will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that " -"other packages might have or get. " +msgid "Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:328 -msgid "" -"Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer " -"versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "" #: src/YQPatternSelector.cc:180 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:248 @@ -841,9 +741,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:391 -msgid "" -"Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the " -"dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <tt>%1</tt>" +msgid "Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <tt>%1</tt>" msgstr "" #. parent @@ -852,9 +750,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:410 -msgid "" -"Dependency resolver test case written to <tt>%1</tt>Prepare " -"<tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?" +msgid "Dependency resolver test case written to <tt>%1</tt>Prepare <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?" msgstr "" #. parent @@ -864,9 +760,7 @@ #. caption #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:426 -msgid "" -"Error creating dependency resolver test casePlease check " -"disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt>" +msgid "Error creating dependency resolver test casePlease check disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt>" msgstr "" #. startsWith Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -40,9 +40,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you " -"ignore this warning." +msgid "Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you ignore this warning." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:104 @@ -117,56 +115,35 @@ #. help text for Rear #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:419 -msgid "" -"Configure Rear Relax and Recover (ReaR) backup for your computer.</" -"p>" +msgid "Configure Rear Relax and Recover (ReaR) backup for your computer." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:422 -msgid "" -"Decide how to start your Recovery System. Choose USB if you want " -"to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively." +msgid "Decide how to start your Recovery System. Choose USB if you want to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:425 -msgid "" -"Choose where the Backup should be stored. Select NFS if you have " -"to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location " -"as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to " -"store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk." +msgid "Choose where the Backup should be stored. Select NFS if you have to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:428 -msgid "" -"If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click " -"Rescan USB Devices." +msgid "If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click Rescan USB Devices." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:431 -msgid "" -"Select Keep old backup if you don't want the previous backup copy " -"to be overwritten." +msgid "Select Keep old backup if you don't want the previous backup copy to be overwritten." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:434 -msgid "" -"The Advanced menu offers to add additional directories to the " -"backup and additional kernel modules to the rescue system. That's " -"only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the " -"rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules." +msgid "The Advanced menu offers to add additional directories to the backup and additional kernel modules to the rescue system. That's only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:437 -msgid "" -"The Save and run rear now button runs rear and shows rear's " -"output. Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on " -"your system!" +msgid "The Save and run rear now button runs rear and shows rear's output. Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your system!" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:440 -msgid "" -"OK saves the configuration and quits while Cancel closes " -"the configuration dialog without saving." +msgid "OK saves the configuration and quits while Cancel closes the configuration dialog without saving." msgstr "" #. prepare advanced menu @@ -233,9 +210,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:590 -msgid "" -"Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot " -"configure.\n" +msgid "Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot configure.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:595 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -121,9 +121,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and extensions." +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. not set yet? @@ -181,15 +179,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:471 -msgid "" -"You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " -"modules to enhance the functionality of the system." +msgid "You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system." msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:473 -msgid "" -"If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove the system manually there." +msgid "If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there." msgstr "" #. error message @@ -572,9 +566,7 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 msgid "" "Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.\n" -"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you " -"cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " -"extension or module." +"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module." msgstr "" #. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) @@ -597,22 +589,17 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." +msgid "Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." msgstr "" #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "" -"Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " -"registration code." +msgid "Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code." msgstr "" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:53 -msgid "" -"If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the " -"SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there." +msgid "If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there." msgstr "" #. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow @@ -641,9 +628,7 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 -msgid "" -"Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered " -"together with the base product." +msgid "Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product." msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 @@ -699,19 +684,15 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 msgid "" -"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" +"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product " -"Registration." +"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product Registration." msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 msgid "" -"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" -"and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. " -"Refer\n" +"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance." msgstr "" @@ -783,38 +764,27 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." +msgid "Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:123 -msgid "" -"You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate." +msgid "You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate." msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate." +msgid "Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate." msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." +msgid "Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big " -"security risk." +msgid "Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk." msgstr "" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -172,10 +172,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 2 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio " -"buttons\n" -"listed inside reipl methods. Depending on what your machine " -"supports,\n" +"Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio buttons\n" +"listed inside reipl methods. Depending on what your machine supports,\n" "choose between CCW (channel command word) devices and SCSI devices,\n" "which are attached through zFCP (fibre channel protocol). Then fill out the\n" "necessary parameter entry fields for the respective method.\n" @@ -185,10 +183,8 @@ #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "The device must be a valid device bus ID with lower case letters\n" -"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<subchannel set ID>.<" -"device ID>,\n" -"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a " -"DASD or to\n" +"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<subchannel set ID>.<device ID>,\n" +"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a DASD or to\n" "an FCP adapter." msgstr "" @@ -210,10 +206,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 6 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:84 msgid "" -"The logical unit number (LUN) must be entered with lowercase " -"letters\n" -"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000." -"" +"The logical unit number (LUN) must be entered with lowercase letters\n" +"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000." msgstr "" #. Configure dialog help 7 @@ -234,8 +228,7 @@ #. Configure dialog help 9 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:98 msgid "" -"After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by " -"shutdown,\n" +"After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by shutdown,\n" "and the system will automatically restart from your specified device." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -215,11 +215,7 @@ "Relocation Address \n" "Address xend should listen on for relocation-socket connections\n" "Allowed Hosts \n" -"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all " -"connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated " -"sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name " -"or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be " -"accepted.\n" +"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be accepted.\n" "SSL Key File/SSL Cert File \n" "SSL key and certificate to use for the ssl relocation interface" msgstr "" @@ -227,13 +223,9 @@ #: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<big>Tunneled migration</big> \n" -"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host " -"libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting " -"the data stream.\n" +"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting the data stream.\n" "<big>Plain migration</big> \n" -"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the " -"destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually " -"specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range." +"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range." msgstr "" #. Main workflow of the relocation-server configuration Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -382,8 +382,7 @@ #. Disk selection dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/s390/dasd/helps.rb:76 msgid "" -"To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select " -"all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" +"To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" "Select All or Deselect All.\n" msgstr "" @@ -434,30 +433,24 @@ #. Dump dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:54 -msgid "" -"Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are " -"limited to DASD. " +msgid "Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are limited to DASD. " msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:58 msgid "" "Only whole disks can be used, no partitions. If the device is incompatibly\n" -"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox Force overwrite of disk</" -"b>." +"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox Force overwrite of disk." msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:62 -msgid "" -"To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or " -"ZFCP dialog. " +msgid "To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or ZFCP dialog. " msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:66 -msgid "" -"Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown." +msgid "Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown." msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 6/8 @@ -493,9 +486,7 @@ #. warn only in case of force #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:193 -msgid "" -"The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will " -"be lost! Continue?" +msgid "The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will be lost! Continue?" msgstr "" #. don't quit in case of failures, error messages are reported by FormatDisk() @@ -520,17 +511,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"TS-Shell allows to specify Authorization for every TS-Shell user " -"and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members." +msgid "TS-Shell allows to specify Authorization for every TS-Shell user and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under Selection, " -"defined by a Regex or loaded from a File which contains all " -"allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks." +msgid "Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under Selection, defined by a Regex or loaded from a File which contains all allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 3/5 @@ -543,16 +529,13 @@ #. TS-Shell dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:58 msgid "" -"To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to " -"change\n" +"To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to change\n" "the membership of users, go to Manage Groups." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"With Audited IDs specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts " -"should be gathered." +msgid "With Audited IDs specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts should be gathered." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 1/3 @@ -562,17 +545,13 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"To create new TS-Shell user the Username, Home Directory " -"and Password has to be provided.\n" -"\t It is also possible to specify Additional Groups by selecting " -"them on the right." +"To create new TS-Shell user the Username, Home Directory and Password has to be provided.\n" +"\t It is also possible to specify Additional Groups by selecting them on the right." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:73 -msgid "" -"To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, " -"activate Force Password Change." +msgid "To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, activate Force Password Change." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 3/3 @@ -597,8 +576,7 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "Existing groups can be added to or removed from the TS-Shell\n" -"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on Select or " -"Deselect. The current status is shown in the column TS-Auth." +"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on Select or Deselect. The current status is shown in the column TS-Auth." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 3/5 @@ -611,10 +589,8 @@ #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:96 msgid "" -"New groups could be created by entering the name in the New Group " -"input field and confirming with Create.\n" -"\t To delete previously created groups the YaST users dialog has " -"to be used." +"New groups could be created by entering the name in the New Group input field and confirming with Create.\n" +"\t To delete previously created groups the YaST users dialog has to be used." msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 5/5 @@ -628,17 +604,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users " -"a password and home directory has to be provided." +msgid "IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users a password and home directory has to be provided." msgstr "" #. IUCVConn on Login dialog help 2/2 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:111 -msgid "" -"It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on Sync or " -"just confirming the changes with Ok while IUCVConn on Login is " -"enabled. " +msgid "It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on Sync or just confirming the changes with Ok while IUCVConn on Login is enabled. " msgstr "" #. Text approval @@ -876,13 +847,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1044 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." msgstr "" #. only the last entry is allowed to be empty @@ -915,9 +884,7 @@ #. Check the "Allowed Terminal Server list" field for validity. #. @return true for valid inputs #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:55 -msgid "" -"Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are " -"allowed." +msgid "Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:60 @@ -949,19 +916,12 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 3/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:125 -msgid "" -"Several IUCVtty instances can run to provide multiple terminal " -"devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a " -"combination of the Terminal ID Prefix and the number of the instance." -" " +msgid "Several IUCVtty instances can run to provide multiple terminal devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a combination of the Terminal ID Prefix and the number of the instance. " msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 4/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:129 -msgid "" -"For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "lxterm</" -"i>", the terminal IDs from lxterm0 to lxterm9 are " -"available." +msgid "For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "lxterm", the terminal IDs from lxterm0 to lxterm9 are available." msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 5/11 @@ -971,47 +931,34 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 6/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:135 -msgid "" -"The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes " -"to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and " -"login programs." +msgid "The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and login programs." msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:139 -msgid "" -"With restrict access, allow only connections from certain " -"terminal servers." +msgid "With restrict access, allow only connections from certain terminal servers." msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 8/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately." -"" +msgid "Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately." msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:147 msgid "" -"Activate route kernel messages to hvc0 to route kernel messages " -"to\n" +"Activate route kernel messages to hvc0 to route kernel messages to\n" "the hvc0 device instead of ttyS0. " msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:151 -msgid "" -"Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add " -"console=ttyS0 to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the " -"YaST bootloader module." +msgid "Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add console=ttyS0 to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the YaST bootloader module." msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:155 -msgid "" -"<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through " -"the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" +msgid "<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" msgstr "" #. Dialog content @@ -1079,15 +1026,12 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 1/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:112 -msgid "" -"Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs" +msgid "Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 2/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:116 -msgid "" -"The Dumpconf daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior " -"during kernel panics." +msgid "The Dumpconf daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior during kernel panics." msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 3/11 @@ -1113,8 +1057,7 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:128 msgid "" -"dump_reipl Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only " -"available\n" +"dump_reipl Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only available\n" "on LPAR with z9(r) machines and later and on z/VMversion 5.3 and later. " msgstr "" @@ -1125,26 +1068,17 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:134 -msgid "" -"The time defined in Delay Minutes defers activating the specified " -"panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system " -"crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed.</" -"p>" +msgid "The time defined in Delay Minutes defers activating the specified panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed." msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:138 -msgid "" -"The device for dumping the memory can be set with Dump Device. If " -"no device is shown you have to create one with the YaST Dump Devices " -"dialog." +msgid "The device for dumping the memory can be set with Dump Device. If no device is shown you have to create one with the YaST Dump Devices dialog." msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"With VMCMD specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux " -"system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed." +msgid "With VMCMD specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed." msgstr "" #. radio button label @@ -1304,14 +1238,11 @@ #. Disk add help 2/2, This is HTML, so finally "<devno>" is displayed as "<devno>" #: src/include/s390/zfcp/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"The Channel ID must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs " -"conforming\n" +"The Channel ID must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs conforming\n" "format 0.0.<devno>, such as <tt>0.0.5c51</tt>.\n" -"The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, " -"such as\n" +"The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, such as\n" "<tt>0x5005076300c40e5a</tt>.\n" -"The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value " -"with\n" +"The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value with\n" "all trailing zeros, such as <tt>0x52ca000000000000</tt>." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -156,9 +156,7 @@ #. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Specify the Range for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</" -"tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values)." +msgid "Specify the Range for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values)." msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -383,8 +381,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 msgid "" -"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the " -"following\n" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" "settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" "%1" msgstr "" @@ -465,8 +462,7 @@ #. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active " -"Directory domain.\n" +"A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" "Specify the name of the membership.\n" msgstr "" @@ -474,15 +470,13 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication allows \n" -"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if " -"joining an AD domain.\n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.\n" msgstr "" #. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 msgid "" -"Check Change primary DNS suffix to add your AD server into the " -"list of name servers.\n" +"Check Change primary DNS suffix to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" "This option is only available for static network setups." msgstr "" @@ -490,8 +484,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "When you press OK, the system verifies the membership and,\n" -"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the " -"domain.\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.\n" msgstr "" #. translators: Samba membership dialog help 1/2 (installation) @@ -508,28 +501,17 @@ #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"Check Create Home Directory on Login to have local home " -"directories created on the first login." +msgid "Check Create Home Directory on Login to have local home directories created on the first login." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 -msgid "" -"Offline Authentication enables the user to log in even if there is " -"no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must " -"log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored " -"encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no " -"connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially " -"useful for mobile users." +msgid "Offline Authentication enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 -msgid "" -"Click Expert Settings to enable advanced features such as WINS " -"options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</" -"p>" +msgid "Click Expert Settings to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config @@ -540,18 +522,13 @@ #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"Set the Username and Password that should be used for " -"joining\n" -"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be " -"saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form." +"Set the Username and Password that should be used for joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 -msgid "" -"Specify the Active Directory Server to use for joining an Active " -"Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos " -"configuration." +msgid "Specify the Active Directory Server to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration @@ -670,9 +647,7 @@ #. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:395 -msgid "" -"If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for " -"name resolution, check Use WINS for Hostname Resolution." +msgid "If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check Use WINS for Hostname Resolution." msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -682,9 +657,7 @@ #. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:412 -msgid "" -"Check Retrieve WINS server via DHCP to use a WINS server provided " -"by DHCP." +msgid "Check Retrieve WINS server via DHCP to use a WINS server provided by DHCP." msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -719,55 +692,36 @@ #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:505 -msgid "" -"Allow Users to Share Their Directories enables members of the " -"group in Permitted Group to share directories they own with other " -"users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</" -"tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system " -"permissions allow access." +msgid "Allow Users to Share Their Directories enables members of the group in Permitted Group to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access." msgstr "" #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 -msgid "" -"With Maximum Number of Shares, limit the total amount of shares " -"that may be created." +msgid "With Maximum Number of Shares, limit the total amount of shares that may be created." msgstr "" #. membership dialog help common part #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:516 -msgid "" -"To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable Allow " -"Guest Access." +msgid "To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable Allow Guest Access." msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:525 msgid "" "In the table Mount Server Directories, you can specify server\n" -"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when " -"the\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" "user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify User\n" -"Name for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each " -"user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page." +"Name for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page." msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table: example #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:532 -msgid "" -"For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for " -"Remote Path, <tt>~/</tt> value for Local Mount Point to mount " -"the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a " -"part of Options." +msgid "For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for Remote Path, <tt>~/</tt> value for Local Mount Point to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of Options." msgstr "" #. help text for kerberos method option #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:540 -msgid "" -"The value of Kerberos Method defines how kerberos tickets are " -"verified. When Single Sing-on for SSH is used, the default Kerberos " -"Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page " -"for details." +msgid "The value of Kerberos Method defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When Single Sing-on for SSH is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details." msgstr "" #. translators: initialization dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,15 +178,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for ldap_suffix option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:298 -msgid "" -"The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" +msgid "The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for ldap_admin_dn option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:305 -msgid "" -"The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing " -"passwords)" +msgid "The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing passwords)" msgstr "" #. translators: error message for share command line action @@ -249,8 +246,7 @@ msgid "" "Because users are currently connected to this Samba server,\n" "the server configuration has been reloaded instead of restarted.\n" -"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the " -"users,\n" +"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the users,\n" "run '/etc/init.d/smb restart' and '/etc/init.d/nmb restart'" msgstr "" @@ -830,8 +826,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<big>Workgroup or Domain Selection</big> \n" -"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and " -"click Next.\n" +"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and click Next.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -839,22 +834,17 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<big>Samba Server Type</big>\n" -"A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT " -"style domain.\n" +"A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style domain.\n" "The backup controller uses another domain controller for validation.\n" -"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their " -"passwords.\n" -"The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings " -"in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be " -"phased out in future releases." +"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" +"The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be phased out in future releases." msgstr "" #. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<big>Samba Server Type</big>\n" -"A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain." -"\n" +"A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.\n" "The options available in the configuration dialogs \n" "depend on the settings in this selection." msgstr "" @@ -910,9 +900,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:115 msgid "" "The base settings set up the domain and the\n" -"server role. Backup Domain Controller and Primary Domain " -"Controller allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The " -"backup controller \n" +"server role. Backup Domain Controller and Primary Domain Controller allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The backup controller \n" "uses another domain controller for validation. The primary controller\n" "uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" "If the server should not participate as a domain controller, choose the\n" @@ -950,8 +938,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "Advanced Settings provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global " -"settings.\n" +"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global settings.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:147 @@ -1019,8 +1006,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "Search Base DN (distinguished name) is\n" -"the base at which to start searching the information. Administration DN</" -"b> is used when\n" +"the base at which to start searching the information. Administration DN is used when\n" "creating new users and groups. If the administration DN requires\n" "a password for write access, set the password using\n" "Set LDAP Administration Password.\n" @@ -1028,9 +1014,7 @@ #. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"Note: Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password " -"is set.\n" +msgid "Note: Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is set.\n" msgstr "" #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 1 @@ -1045,8 +1029,7 @@ #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:207 msgid "" -"If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current " -"one first\n" +"If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current one first\n" "by pressing Delete and add a new one with Add.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1133,21 +1116,11 @@ #. add new share dialog help #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:276 -msgid "" -"With Expose Snapshots selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by " -"Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only " -"available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to " -"a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume. Relevant permissions " -"must also be granted, see Samba's vfs_snapper(8) man page for further " -"details." +msgid "With Expose Snapshots selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume. Relevant permissions must also be granted, see Samba's vfs_snapper(8) man page for further details." msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"Utilize Btrfs Features instructs Samba to take advantage of " -"features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if " -"Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See " -"Samba's vfs_btrfs(8) man page for further details." +msgid "Utilize Btrfs Features instructs Samba to take advantage of features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See Samba's vfs_btrfs(8) man page for further details." msgstr "" #. help for LDAP Settings dialog @@ -1157,54 +1130,37 @@ "Here, determine the LDAP server to use for authentication.\n" "\n" "\n" -"Setting LDAP Password Back-End allows storing user information in the " -"LDAP tree specified by the URL. With LDAP Idmap Back-End, store SID/" -"uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" +"Setting LDAP Password Back-End allows storing user information in the LDAP tree specified by the URL. With LDAP Idmap Back-End, store SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" "\n" -"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, " -"including full Administrator DN.\n" +"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, including full Administrator DN.\n" "\n" -"Search Base DN is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP " -"objects.\n" +"Search Base DN is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP objects.\n" "\n" -"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click Test Connection. To " -"set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click Advanced Settings</" -"b>." +"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click Test Connection. To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click Advanced Settings." msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSuffixesWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:303 -msgid "" -"User Suffix specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The " -"value is pre-pended to the value of Search Base DN. Similarly, " -"Group Suffix specifies the place for groups, Machine Suffix " -"for machines and Idmap Suffix for idmap mappings." +msgid "User Suffix specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The value is pre-pended to the value of Search Base DN. Similarly, Group Suffix specifies the place for groups, Machine Suffix for machines and Idmap Suffix for idmap mappings." msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsTimeoutsWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:307 msgid "" -"Replication Sleep is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait " -"after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.\n" -"Time-Out specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds).</" -"p>" +"Replication Sleep is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.\n" +"Time-Out specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds)." msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSecurityWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:311 -msgid "" -"Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with Use SSL or TLS." -"" +msgid "Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with Use SSL or TLS." msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsMiscWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:315 msgid "" -"Delete DN specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete " -"LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.\n" -"With Synchronize Passwords, define possible synchronization of the " -"LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual " -"page for details." +"Delete DN specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.\n" +"With Synchronize Passwords, define possible synchronization of the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual page for details." msgstr "" #. translators: warning text @@ -1249,8 +1205,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" "Advanced Settings provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, " -"and\n" +"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, and\n" "expert global settings.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -26,15 +26,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:78 -msgid "" -"Home Drive, Home Path, Profile Path, and Logon " -"Script " +msgid "Home Drive, Home Path, Profile Path, and Logon Script " msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:81 -msgid "" -"the default values as defined in your local Samba Configuration will be used." -"" +msgid "the default values as defined in your local Samba Configuration will be used." msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:96 @@ -77,16 +73,11 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba_groups.rb:82 msgid "" -"This plugin can be used to enable an LDAP group to be available for " -"Samba.\n" -"The only setting that you can edit here is the Samba Group Name " -"attribute,\n" -"which is the Name of the Group as it should appear to Samba-Clients. All " -"other\n" -"settings are computed automatically. If you leave the Samba Group Name</" -"b>\n" -"empty, the same name as configured in the Global Settings of this Group " -"will\n" +"This plugin can be used to enable an LDAP group to be available for Samba.\n" +"The only setting that you can edit here is the Samba Group Name attribute,\n" +"which is the Name of the Group as it should appear to Samba-Clients. All other\n" +"settings are computed automatically. If you leave the Samba Group Name\n" +"empty, the same name as configured in the Global Settings of this Group will\n" "be used.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -260,9 +260,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "epkowa", it is a driver name. #. Do not change or translate "i386", it is an architecture name. #: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:837 -msgid "" -"The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-" -"bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." +msgid "The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." msgstr "" #. when the epkowa driver was selected on x86_64: @@ -377,8 +375,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Scanner Configuration</big> \n" -"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active " -"scanners.\n" +"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active scanners.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -388,8 +385,7 @@ "\n" "To set up a new scanner, choose the scanner from the list of\n" "detected scanners and press Edit.\n" -"If your scanner has not been detected, use Add for a manual " -"configuration.\n" +"If your scanner has not been detected, use Add for a manual configuration.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -416,8 +412,7 @@ "configure the scanner unit with this tool.\n" "If you have difficulties configuring your scanner,\n" "check whether it appears in the output of <tt>lsusb</tt>.\n" -"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the " -"scanner.\n" +"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -430,8 +425,7 @@ "If difficulties arise proceeding with Add,\n" "check whether your scanner is shown by the command <tt>lsscsi</tt>.\n" "If not, the SCSI system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" -"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been " -"loaded.\n" +"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been loaded.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -445,8 +439,7 @@ "Common parallel port scanners must be configured manually.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected to the parallel port,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via Other and Run hp-setup</" -"b>\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via Other and Run hp-setup\n" "before you can configure the scanner unit with this tool using Add.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -470,10 +463,8 @@ "connected to another host in the network.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected via a built-in network interface,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via Other and Run hp-setup</" -"b>\n" -"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using Add</" -"b>.\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via Other and Run hp-setup\n" +"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using Add.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -491,8 +482,7 @@ "Press Add to select model and driver and enable it.\n" "Press Edit to select and enable a driver.\n" "Press Delete to disable the driver.\n" -"If you press Other, you can restart the detection, test enabled " -"drivers,\n" +"If you press Other, you can restart the detection, test enabled drivers,\n" "set up HP all-in-one devices, or set up scanning via network.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +502,7 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:166 msgid "" "\n" -"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible " -"reasons are:\n" +"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible reasons are:\n" "The scanner is not connected or switched off,\n" "the driver is not the right one for the particular model\n" "(even small differences in model names or internal differences in\n" @@ -530,8 +519,7 @@ "\n" "<big>Scanner Model Selection</big> \n" "All known scanner models, both supported and unsupported, are listed here.\n" -"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing " -"Next.\n" +"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing Next.\n" "The information is based on data of the SANE project at\n" "<tt>http://www.sane-project.org/</tt>.\n" "" @@ -543,19 +531,13 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "\n" -"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver " -"available.\n" -"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-" -"backends package.\n" -"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete." -" \n" -"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver " -"does not work.\n" +"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver available.\n" +"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-backends package.\n" +"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete. \n" +"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver does not work.\n" "Even an unmaintained driver could work perfectly well.\n" -"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver " -"internals\n" -"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained " -"driver.\n" +"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver internals\n" +"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained driver.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -563,10 +545,8 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:204 msgid "" "\n" -"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a " -"driver.\n" -"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an " -"unsupported scanner.\n" +"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a driver.\n" +"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an unsupported scanner.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -588,18 +568,12 @@ "\n" "Use the Search String to find an appropriate entry quickly.\n" "To find some text anywhere in the table, enter it in the field.\n" -"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is " -"also possible.\n" -"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this " -"list,\n" -"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson." -"*</tt>.\n" -"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search " -"string.\n" -"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*perfection</tt>\n" -"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*1200</tt>.\n" +"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is also possible.\n" +"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this list,\n" +"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson.*</tt>.\n" +"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search string.\n" +"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*perfection</tt>\n" +"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*1200</tt>.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -609,8 +583,7 @@ "\n" "<big>Scanner and Driver Setup</big> \n" "The driver is activated and the associated scanners are probed.\n" -"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press Next</" -"b>.\n" +"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press Next.\n" "If you press Back, the driver is deactivated.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -651,14 +624,10 @@ "<big>HP All-in-One Devices</big> \n" "HP all-in-one devices may require a special setup.\n" "In this case, an appropriate dialog is shown.\n" -"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one " -"devices:\n" -"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer " -"available),\n" -"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-" -"one devices,\n" -"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio " -"driver.\n" +"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one devices:\n" +"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer available),\n" +"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-one devices,\n" +"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio driver.\n" "Both software packages can be installed at the same time\n" "but the ptal service and the hpaio driver cannot run together.\n" "Therefore either the patl service or the hpaio driver\n" @@ -687,12 +656,9 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Server Settings</big> \n" -"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via " -"the network,\n" -"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a " -"server.\n" -"In Permitted Clients, enter which client hosts are permitted to " -"access saned on your server.\n" +"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via the network,\n" +"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a server.\n" +"In Permitted Clients, enter which client hosts are permitted to access saned on your server.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of client hosts (hostnames or IP addresses)\n" "or subnets (CIDR notation, such as 192.168.1.0/24).\n" "If no client hosts are permitted, saned is not activated.\n" @@ -748,10 +714,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Client Settings</big> \n" -"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the " -"network,\n" -"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the " -"servers.\n" +"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the network,\n" +"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the servers.\n" "The saned and the firewall on the servers must permit the access.\n" "In Servers Used, enter which servers should be used.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of servers (server names or IP addresses).\n" @@ -810,8 +774,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:399 msgid "" "The third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys is required.\n" -"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly " -"Avasys)\n" +"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly Avasys)\n" "http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LXEpson\n" "(formerly Avasys http://avasys.jp/eng/linux_driver/)\n" "where RPM packages for 32-bit (i386) and 64-bit (x86_64) architecture\n" @@ -829,15 +792,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:442 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:457 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because: @@ -859,8 +819,7 @@ "with the network, the 'scanimage -L' command may not respond. For example,\n" "this may happen if communication with a server used by the net metadriver\n" "gets distorted because a firewall drops some network traffic.\n" -"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is " -"fixed.\n" +"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is fixed.\n" msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system @@ -1071,8 +1030,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1125 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. where autodetected scanners are listed in the second column @@ -1219,23 +1177,18 @@ #. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1892 msgid "" -"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's " -"memory.\n" +"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's memory.\n" "Without firmware, the scanner cannot work.\n" "\n" -"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot " -"distribute it.\n" +"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot distribute it.\n" "Usually the firmware file is stored somewhere on the manufacturer's CD.\n" -"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web " -"site.\n" -"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular " -"scanner.\n" +"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web site.\n" +"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular scanner.\n" "Find additional useful information on the SANE web site at\n" "http://www.sane-project.org/.\n" "\n" "After you get the firmware file, you must configure the driver manually.\n" -"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware " -"upload.\n" +"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware upload.\n" "The following command shows the man page for your driver:\n" msgstr "" @@ -1260,19 +1213,16 @@ "The hpoj driver requires the PTAL system to be set up and running.\n" "In particular, the ptal service must be up and running.\n" "\n" -"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be " -"initialized.\n" +"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be initialized.\n" "Additionally, the ptal service should be activated for start when booting.\n" "The PTAL system and the hplip service exclude each other.\n" "Therefore a running hplip service would be stopped and deactivated\n" "before the the PTAL system is initialized, activated, and started.\n" "An automated initialization of the PTAL system is only safe for USB.\n" -"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB " -"fails,\n" +"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB fails,\n" "set up the PTAL system manually.\n" "If you have an all-in-one device (scanner+printer), note that\n" -"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/" -"lp0),\n" +"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/lp0),\n" "so the printer can no longer be addressed via the USB device file.\n" "\n" "Should the PTAL system for USB be initialized, activated, and started now?\n" @@ -1289,8 +1239,7 @@ "and all print queues that use the hplip service would no longer work.\n" "If the scanner is also supported by the hpaio driver, do not proceed.\n" "Instead use hpaio to set up the scanner.\n" -"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal " -"service.\n" +"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal service.\n" msgstr "" #. %1 will be replaced by the backend name @@ -1405,9 +1354,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. #. Do not change or translate "CUPS", it is a subsystem name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2291 -msgid "" -"The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not " -"deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." +msgid "The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." msgstr "" #. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -240,9 +240,7 @@ #. richtext message: %1 = runlevel ("3" or "5"), %2 = list of services #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:404 -msgid "" -"These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1: %2</" -"P>" +msgid "These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1: %2" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:412 @@ -393,20 +391,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "Hibernate System:\n" -"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, " -"user on active console has such right.\n" -"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring " -"authentication in all cases.\n" +"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, user on active console has such right.\n" +"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication in all cases.\n" msgstr "" #. Main dialog help 1/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<BIG>Configuring Local Security</BIG>\n" -"Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which " -"include\n" -" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The " -"default\n" +"Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which include\n" +" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The default\n" " settings can be modified as needed.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -449,12 +443,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:106 msgid "" "Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt:\n" -"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to " -"prevent\n" -"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait " -"to\n" -"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</" -"tt>)." +"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to prevent\n" +"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait to\n" +"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>)." msgstr "" #. Login dialog help 3/4 @@ -462,8 +453,7 @@ msgid "" "Record Successful Login Attempts: Logging successful login\n" "attempts is useful. It can warn you of unauthorized access to the\n" -"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than " -"usual).\n" +"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than usual).\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -471,8 +461,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:120 msgid "" "Allow Remote Graphical Login: Checking this allows access\n" -"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote " -"access\n" +"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote access\n" "to your machine using a display manager might be a security risk." msgstr "" @@ -487,8 +476,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:130 msgid "" "Check New Passwords: It is wise to choose a password that\n" -"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common " -"word.\n" +"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common word.\n" "By checking the box, enforce password checking in regard to these rules." msgstr "" @@ -497,8 +485,7 @@ msgid "" "Minimum Acceptable Password Length:\n" "The minimum acceptable size for the new password reduced by the number\n" -"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the " -"new\n" +"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the new\n" "password. See man pam_cracklib for a more detailed explanation.\n" "This option can only be modified when Check New Passwords is set." msgstr "" @@ -507,8 +494,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "Passwords to Remember:\n" -"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from " -"reusing.\n" +"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from reusing.\n" "Enter 0 if passwords should not be stored." msgstr "" @@ -521,24 +507,20 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "DES, the Linux default method, works in all network environments,\n" -"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you " -"need\n" +"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you need\n" "compatibility with other systems, use this method." msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 5c/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:158 msgid "" -"MD5 allows longer passwords and is supported by all current " -"Linux \n" +"MD5 allows longer passwords and is supported by all current Linux \n" "distributions, but not by other systems or old software." msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 5d/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:162 -msgid "" -"SHA-512 is the current standard hash method, using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose." +msgid "SHA-512 is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose." msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 7/8 @@ -552,8 +534,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:170 msgid "" "Days before Password Expires Warning: This entry sets the\n" -"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer " -"the\n" +"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer the\n" "time, the less likely it is that someone can guess passwords." msgstr "" @@ -582,28 +563,22 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<big>Other Security Settings</big>\n" -"In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.</" -"p>" +"In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security." msgstr "" #. Misc dialog help 2/14 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "File Permissions: Settings for the permissions\n" -"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions." -"secure\n" +"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions.secure\n" "or /etc/permissions.easy. Which file is used depends on this selection.\n" -"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions." -"*.\n" -"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred " -"accidentally\n" +"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions.*.\n" +"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred accidentally\n" "or by intruders.\n" "With Easy, most of the system files that are only readable by root\n" "in Secure are modified so other users can also read these files.\n" -"Using Secure, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can " -"only\n" -"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or " -"by\n" +"Using Secure, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can only\n" +"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or by\n" "daemons, not by ordinary users.\n" "The most secure setting is Paranoid. With it, you must\n" "decide which users are able to run X applications and setuid programs.\n" @@ -613,11 +588,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:208 msgid "" "User Launching updatedb: The program updatedb runs \n" -"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database " -"(locatedb)\n" +"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database (locatedb)\n" "that stores the location of every file. The database can be searched by the\n" -"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: nobody</" -"b>\n" +"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: nobody\n" " (few files) or root (all files)." msgstr "" @@ -626,8 +599,7 @@ msgid "" "Current Directory in root's Path On a DOS system,\n" "the system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current\n" -"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like " -"system\n" +"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system\n" "searches for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH)." msgstr "" @@ -635,8 +607,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "Current Directory in the Path of Regular Users A DOS\n" -"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current " -"directory\n" +"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current directory\n" "then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system searches\n" "for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH)." msgstr "" @@ -646,11 +617,9 @@ msgid "" "Some systems set up a work-around by adding the dot (\".\") to the\n" "search path, enabling files in the current path to be found and executed.\n" -"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown " -"programs in\n" +"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs in\n" "the current directory instead of the usual systemwide files. As a result,\n" -"executing Trojan Horses, which exploit this weakness and invade your " -"system,\n" +"executing Trojan Horses, which exploit this weakness and invade your system,\n" "is rather easy if you set this option." msgstr "" @@ -672,36 +641,28 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:247 msgid "" "Enable Magic SysRq Keys If you check this option, you\n" -"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, " -"during kernel\n" +"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, during kernel\n" "debugging). For details, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt" msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:253 -msgid "" -"Security Overview This overview shows the most important " -"security settings." +msgid "Security Overview This overview shows the most important security settings." msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:257 -msgid "" -"To change the current value, click the link associated to the option." +msgid "To change the current value, click the link associated to the option." msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:261 -msgid "" -" A check mark in the Security Status column means that the current " -"value of the option is secure." +msgid " A check mark in the Security Status column means that the current value of the option is secure." msgstr "" #. an error message (rich text) #: src/include/security/helps.rb:265 -msgid "" -"The current value could not be read. The service is probably not " -"installed or the option is missing on the system." +msgid "The current value could not be read. The service is probably not installed or the option is missing on the system." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:271 @@ -709,88 +670,53 @@ "A display manager provides a graphical login screen and can be accessed\n" "across the network by an X server running on another system if so\n" "configured.The windows that are being displayed would then transmit\n" -"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then " -"the\n" -"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only " -"to\n" -"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords " -"that\n" -"are being used.If you do not need XDMCP for remote " -"graphical\n" +"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then the\n" +"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only to\n" +"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords that\n" +"are being used.If you do not need XDMCP for remote graphical\n" "logins, then disable this option." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:281 msgid "" -"Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of " -"the\n" -"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down " -"is\n" -"necessary.Consistent system time is essential for the system to " -"create\n" +"Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of the\n" +"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down is\n" +"necessary.Consistent system time is essential for the system to create\n" "correct log messages." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its " -"behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are " -"important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can " -"tell more than the absence of all log records.Therefore, syslog " -"messages of system events are only useful if they are present." +msgid "Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can tell more than the absence of all log records.Therefore, syslog messages of system events are only useful if they are present." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files " -"that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the " -"process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory." +msgid "Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:293 -msgid "" -"The DHCP client daemon should run as the user dhcpd to minimize " -"a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its " -"program code.Note that dhcpd must never run as root or with " -"the CAP_SYS_CHROOT capability for the chroot execution confinement " -"to be effective." +msgid "The DHCP client daemon should run as the user dhcpd to minimize a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its program code.Note that dhcpd must never run as root or with the CAP_SYS_CHROOT capability for the chroot execution confinement to be effective." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:296 -msgid "" -"Administrators should never log on as root into an X Window " -"session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.This option does " -"not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be " -"able to log on as root via the display manager if they guess or " -"otherwise acquire the password." +msgid "Administrators should never log on as root into an X Window session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.This option does not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be able to log on as root via the display manager if they guess or otherwise acquire the password." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:299 msgid "" -"X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, " -"connect\n" -"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on " -"a\n" +"X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, connect\n" +"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on a\n" "different system and display their content on the X server through network\n" -"connections.When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus " -"the\n" -"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and " -"therefore\n" +"connections.When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus the\n" +"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and therefore\n" "subject to network sniffing, and since the port held open by the X server\n" -"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.To display " -"X\n" -"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell " -"(ssh), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server " -"through the encrypted ssh connection." +"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.To display X\n" +"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (ssh), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server through the encrypted ssh connection." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:309 msgid "" -"The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not " -"expose\n" -"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP " -"network port 25.If you do not deliver emails to your system through " -"the SMTP protocol, then disable this option." +"The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not expose\n" +"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP network port 25.If you do not deliver emails to your system through the SMTP protocol, then disable this option." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:312 @@ -799,8 +725,7 @@ "updated, the service is restarted after the files in the package have been\n" "installed.This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until the services are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so." @@ -812,32 +737,18 @@ "uninstalled, the service is stopped before the files of the package are\n" "removed.This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until they are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:332 -msgid "" -"A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the " -"system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) " -"vulnerability.The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such " -"situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate " -"connection attempts from one source, the Enabled setting can cause " -"problems with denied TCP connections under high load.Still, for most " -"environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS " -"attacks, so the secure setting is Enabled." +msgid "A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) vulnerability.The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate connection attempts from one source, the Enabled setting can cause problems with denied TCP connections under high load.Still, for most environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS attacks, so the secure setting is Enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:335 src/include/security/helps.rb:339 -msgid "" -"IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, " -"but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network " -"interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.If a system forwards " -"network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not " -"need that routing functionality, then disable this option." +msgid "IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.If a system forwards network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need that routing functionality, then disable this option." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:338 @@ -849,29 +760,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:343 -msgid "" -"Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes " -"(e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond." +msgid "Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes (e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:346 -msgid "" -"There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The " -"most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</" -"P>" +msgid "There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:349 src/include/security/helps.rb:352 -msgid "" -"Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and " -"to run the security-related services." +msgid "Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security-related services." msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:355 src/include/security/helps.rb:358 -msgid "" -"Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. " -"Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by " -"the system." +msgid "Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by the system." msgstr "" #. level name Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,18 +37,14 @@ #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 msgid "" "<big>Services</big> \n" -"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from " -"the \n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" " list of services.\n" -"It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is " -"enabled\n" +"It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" "and a particular service requires opening them.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched " -"%link" +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -233,29 +233,21 @@ #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"Here, set the mode in which to run the SLP daemon. The simplest mode is " -"Broadcast.\n" -"In it, the SLP daemon answers all requests sent by broadcast. The next mode " -"is Multicast. In it, the daemon answers queries\n" -"sent by multicast in appropriate SCOPES. In the DA Server mode, it " -"informs DA servers on the specified IP addresses\n" -"about statically and dynamically registered services. The last options is " -"Becomes DA Server. This is a cache server for service\n" +"Here, set the mode in which to run the SLP daemon. The simplest mode is Broadcast.\n" +"In it, the SLP daemon answers all requests sent by broadcast. The next mode is Multicast. In it, the daemon answers queries\n" +"sent by multicast in appropriate SCOPES. In the DA Server mode, it informs DA servers on the specified IP addresses\n" +"about statically and dynamically registered services. The last options is Becomes DA Server. This is a cache server for service\n" "answers.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"With Expert Settings, access all options available in /etc/slp." -"conf." +msgid "With Expert Settings, access all options available in /etc/slp.conf." msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" -"Configuration files for static registration to SLP. With Add, create " -"a new empty file. With Modify,\n" -"change the values of any existing file. With Delete, it is possible " -"to delete files not owned by any package." +"Configuration files for static registration to SLP. With Add, create a new empty file. With Modify,\n" +"change the values of any existing file. With Delete, it is possible to delete files not owned by any package." msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:91 @@ -269,8 +261,7 @@ #. check for package openslp-server installed #: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:181 -msgid "" -"To configure the SLP server, the %1 package must be installed." +msgid "To configure the SLP server, the %1 package must be installed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:184 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -311,8 +311,7 @@ "\n" "%2\n" "\n" -"Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.</" -"p>\n" +"Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.\n" "Files that did not exist in the snapshot will be deleted.Are you sure?" msgstr "" @@ -327,16 +326,10 @@ #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<big>Snapshots Configuration</big>\n" -"The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three " -"types\n" -"of snapshots, single, pre and post. Single snapshots " -"are\n" -"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post " -"are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between " -"taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in " -"the table.\n" -"Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click Show Changes to see " -"the\n" +"The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types\n" +"of snapshots, single, pre and post. Single snapshots are\n" +"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in the table.\n" +"Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click Show Changes to see the\n" "new file system changes in the specified snapshot.\n" msgstr "" @@ -345,15 +338,10 @@ msgid "" "<big>Snapshot Overview</big>\n" "\n" -"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first " -"('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the " -"description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of " -"creation for both snapshots.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" "\n" "\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By " -"default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is " -"possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -362,13 +350,10 @@ msgid "" "<big>Snapshot Overview</big>\n" "\n" -"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the " -"current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time " -"of its creation.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" "\n" "\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between " -"snapshot version and current system.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" "\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -64,9 +64,7 @@ #. - for unknown parameter names #. help text for unknownd parameters; do not translate 'show' #: src/clients/sound.rb:121 -msgid "" -"Value of the specific module parameter. Use the 'show' command to see a list " -"of allowed parameters." +msgid "Value of the specific module parameter. Use the 'show' command to see a list of allowed parameters." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for volume action @@ -77,9 +75,7 @@ #. - for unknown parameter names #. help text; do not translate 'channels' as command name #: src/clients/sound.rb:137 -msgid "" -"Value of the specific channel (0-100). Use the 'channels' command to see a " -"list of available channels." +msgid "Value of the specific channel (0-100). Use the 'channels' command to see a list of available channels." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for modules action @@ -528,10 +524,8 @@ #. help text - mixer setting #: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:377 msgid "" -"With this dialog you can set volume for each channel of the selected " -"sound card. \n" -"Press Next to save your volume settings, press Back to restore " -"the original settings." +"With this dialog you can set volume for each channel of the selected sound card. \n" +"Press Next to save your volume settings, press Back to restore the original settings." msgstr "" #. dialog header, %1 = card id (number), %2 = name @@ -1020,16 +1014,14 @@ #: src/include/sound/texts.rb:273 msgid "" -"The sound device with index 0 is the default device used by system and " -"applications.\n" +"The sound device with index 0 is the default device used by system and applications.\n" "Use Other to set the selected sound device as the primary device." msgstr "" #: src/include/sound/texts.rb:276 msgid "" "The applications which use OSS (Open Sound System) can use the software\n" -"mixer by using aoss wrapper. Use command <tt>aoss <application></tt> " -"to\n" +"mixer by using aoss wrapper. Use command <tt>aoss <application></tt> to\n" "start the application." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -555,9 +555,7 @@ #. Cache Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Refresh Patterns define how Squid treats the objects in the cache." -"\n" +msgid "Refresh Patterns define how Squid treats the objects in the cache.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:73 @@ -587,9 +585,7 @@ #. Cache 2 Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:88 -msgid "" -"Cache memory defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for " -"objects." +msgid "Cache memory defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for objects." msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:91 @@ -616,11 +612,9 @@ #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:105 msgid "" -"Cache Replacement Policy determines which objects are to be " -"replaced\n" +"Cache Replacement Policy determines which objects are to be replaced\n" "when disk space is needed.\n" -"Memory Replacement Policy specifies the policy for object replacement " -"in\n" +"Memory Replacement Policy specifies the policy for object replacement in\n" "memory when space for new objects is not available.\n" "Policies could be:\n" "<table>\n" @@ -646,50 +640,40 @@ #. Cache Directory #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Directory Name defines a top-level directory where cache swap " -"files will be stored." +msgid "Directory Name defines a top-level directory where cache swap files will be stored." msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:135 -msgid "" -"Size defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this " -"directory." +msgid "Size defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"Level 1 Directories defines a number of first-level " -"subdirectories, \n" +"Level 1 Directories defines a number of first-level subdirectories, \n" "which will be created under the Directory Name directory.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:141 msgid "" -"Level 2 Directories defines a number of second-level " -"subdirectories,\n" +"Level 2 Directories defines a number of second-level subdirectories,\n" "which will be created under each first-level directory.\n" msgstr "" #. ACL Groups #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Access to the Squid server can be controlled via ACL Groups." +msgid "Access to the Squid server can be controlled via ACL Groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"ACL Group has various types and the description of ACL Group " -"depends\n" +"ACL Group has various types and the description of ACL Group depends\n" "on the particular type.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:151 msgid "" -"In the Access Control table, access can be denied or allowed to " -"ACL Groups.\n" -"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be " -"allowed\n" +"In the Access Control table, access can be denied or allowed to ACL Groups.\n" +"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be allowed\n" "or denied to members who belong to all ACL Groups at the same time.\n" msgstr "" @@ -701,24 +685,19 @@ #. Logging and Timeouts Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"Access Log defines the file in which client activities are logged." -"" +msgid "Access Log defines the file in which client activities are logged." msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:163 msgid "" -"Cache Log defines the file in which general information about " -"your\n" +"Cache Log defines the file in which general information about your\n" "cache's behavior is logged.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:166 msgid "" -"Cache Store Log defines the location of the transaction log of " -"all\n" -"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an " -"object\n" +"Cache Store Log defines the location of the transaction log of all\n" +"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an object\n" "gets deleted. This option can be left empty.\n" msgstr "" @@ -886,8 +865,7 @@ #. test if changed ACL is used in other option (not managed by thid module) #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:467 -msgid "" -"If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgid "If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:474 @@ -1200,9 +1178,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:148 -msgid "" -"This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the " -"origin server is located." +msgid "This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the origin server is located." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:155 @@ -1262,8 +1238,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" +msgid "Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:220 @@ -1315,9 +1290,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:278 -msgid "" -"A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the " -"user agent header." +msgid "A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the user agent header." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:288 @@ -1325,9 +1298,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:300 -msgid "" -"Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of " -"HTTP connections established." +msgid "Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of HTTP connections established." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:307 @@ -1348,8 +1319,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:351 msgid "" -"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. " -"Can\n" +"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. Can\n" "be used to detect file download or some types of HTTP tunnelling requests.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -507,8 +507,7 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "" #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -938,8 +937,7 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap" -"\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" @@ -967,8 +965,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:516 msgid "" "If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" -"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount " -"points\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" "like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1029,11 +1026,9 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1175,8 +1170,7 @@ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" "to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" -"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is " -"disabled, \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" "this is not possible.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1184,8 +1178,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1378,8 +1371,7 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1506,8 +1498,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -"tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" @@ -1520,8 +1511,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" @@ -1534,8 +1524,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "\n" @@ -1573,8 +1562,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select Skip. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "\n" @@ -1675,8 +1663,7 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "" #. error popup text @@ -2193,8 +2180,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" -"volume, select Encrypt Device. Changing the encryption on an " -"existing\n" +"volume, select Encrypt Device. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" "volume will delete all data on it.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3135,8 +3121,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3401,8 +3386,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group." msgstr "" @@ -3448,8 +3432,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Normal Volume.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice" msgstr "" @@ -3457,16 +3440,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Pool.\n" -"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool." +"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool." msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Volume.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool</" -"b>." +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool." msgstr "" #. heading for frame @@ -3521,8 +3502,7 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" @@ -3738,9 +3718,7 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." msgstr "" #. heading @@ -3770,18 +3748,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "RAID 0: This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.\n" +"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "RAID 1: This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data " -"on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3789,10 +3764,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "RAID 5: This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3807,10 +3780,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</" -"p>\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3872,10 +3843,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "Chunk Size: It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 @@ -3886,8 +3855,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -4150,11 +4118,9 @@ msgid "" "Default Mount by gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. Device Name uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path</" -"i>\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID and\n" "Volume Label use the file systems UUID and label.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4169,9 +4135,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "Alignment of Newly Created Partitions\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4420,8 +4384,7 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). " msgstr "" @@ -4429,12 +4392,9 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing " -"the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class." msgstr "" @@ -4457,8 +4417,7 @@ msgid "" "Interleaved uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" "class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" -"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will " -"follow." +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" #. dialog help text @@ -4473,16 +4432,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"%1\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-" -"part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression." msgstr "" @@ -4517,8 +4472,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "Tmpfs Size:\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory." msgstr "" @@ -4548,8 +4502,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 msgid "" "Mount Read-Only:\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write." msgstr "" @@ -4588,10 +4541,8 @@ "Do Not Mount at System Start-up:\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></" -"tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.\n" msgstr "" #. button text @@ -4620,10 +4571,8 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact. \n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact. \n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact." -"\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact. \n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.\n" msgstr "" #. button text @@ -4656,17 +4605,14 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "Arbitrary Option Value:\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /" -"etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4691,8 +4637,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "Codepage for Short FAT Names:\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4704,8 +4649,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "Number of FATs:\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2." +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2." msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4717,9 +4661,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "FAT Size:\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable " -"for the file system size.\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4748,8 +4690,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "Hash Function:\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names " -"in directories.\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4761,10 +4702,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "FS Revision:\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4777,9 +4715,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4805,8 +4741,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "Percentage of Inode Space:\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4818,8 +4753,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 msgid "" "Inode Aligned:\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4841,8 +4775,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "Log Size\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the " -"aggregate size.\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4875,9 +4808,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4894,8 +4825,7 @@ "bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" "value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" "too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" -"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a " -"reasonable\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" "value for this parameter.\n" msgstr "" @@ -4914,11 +4844,7 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 -msgid "" -"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1." +msgid "Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1." msgstr "" #. checkbox text @@ -4954,8 +4880,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "No Journal:\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5140,8 +5065,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5177 -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5203 @@ -5436,8 +5360,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:346 msgid "" "Mount by indicates how the file system\n" -"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) " -"by\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5446,8 +5369,7 @@ msgid "" "A question mark (?) indicates that\n" "the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" -"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this " -"volume\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5462,8 +5384,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" @@ -5799,9 +5720,7 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -321,32 +321,28 @@ #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:486 msgid "" "Host alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:549 msgid "" "User alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:612 msgid "" "RunAs alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:674 msgid "" "Command alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -406,10 +402,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:74 msgid "" "RunAs column is an\n" -"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access " -"privileges\n" -"\twill be used to run commands. NOPASSWD is a tag, determining " -"whether\n" +"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access privileges\n" +"\twill be used to run commands. NOPASSWD is a tag, determining whether\n" "\tusers need to authorize themselves before running commands.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -437,8 +431,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "To edit existing rule, select an entry from the table and click on \n" -"\tEdit button. To delete selected entry, click on Delete " -"button.\n" +"\tEdit button. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button.\n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -446,11 +439,9 @@ #. Single User Specification help 1/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"User Name or Alias may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), " -"group name prefixed\n" +"User Name or Alias may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), group name prefixed\n" "\twith '%' (e.g. %bar), or user alias name. If \n" -"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, " -"groups and aliases \n" +"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, groups and aliases \n" "\tin drop-down menu, or enter your own value. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -458,14 +449,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:112 msgid "" -"Hostname or Alias entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www." -"example.com) single IP \n" -"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host " -"alias. If commands may be\n" -"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched " -"against your own hostname\n" -"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file " -"between multiple machines, \n" +"Hostname or Alias entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www.example.com) single IP \n" +"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host alias. If commands may be\n" +"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched against your own hostname\n" +"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file between multiple machines, \n" "\t'ALL' or 'localhost' entry will be sufficient for almost all purposes. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -474,15 +461,11 @@ #. Single User Specification help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"RunAs Username or Alias is an optional parameter specifying an " -"user, \n" +"RunAs Username or Alias is an optional parameter specifying an user, \n" "\twhose access privileges \n" -"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user root is " -"the default\n" -"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or " -"run_as alias name\n" -"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter " -"your own value.\n" +"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user root is the default\n" +"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or run_as alias name\n" +"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter your own value.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -490,10 +473,8 @@ #. Single User Specification help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"No Password is an optional tag. Normally, users have to " -"authenticate\n" -"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running " -"particular \n" +"No Password is an optional tag. Normally, users have to authenticate\n" +"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running particular \n" "\tcommand. Set No Password tag to 'Yes' if you want to\n" "\tdisable this authentication\n" "\t\n" @@ -504,10 +485,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "Commands to Run table is a list of commands (optionally with\n" -"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be " -"allowed \n" -"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be " -"run. \n" +"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be allowed \n" +"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\tAgain, keyword 'ALL' stands for any command, so use it with care.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -515,10 +494,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:149 msgid "" -"To add a new command, click on Add button, fill in command name with " -"optional\n" -"\tparameters and click OK. To remove command, select appropriate " -"entry from the table\n" +"To add a new command, click on Add button, fill in command name with optional\n" +"\tparameters and click OK. To remove command, select appropriate entry from the table\n" "\tand click on Delete button.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -527,10 +504,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<big>User Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -538,8 +513,7 @@ #. User Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:164 msgid "" -"To add a new user alias, click on Add button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new user alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -548,8 +522,7 @@ #. User Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"Edit\n" +"To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -559,10 +532,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:178 msgid "" "<big>Host Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of " -"hosts that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of hosts that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -570,8 +541,7 @@ #. Host Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:186 msgid "" -"To add a new host alias, click on Add button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new host alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of hosts in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -580,8 +550,7 @@ #. Host Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"Edit\n" +"To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -591,10 +560,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<big>RunAs Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -602,8 +569,7 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:208 msgid "" -"To add a new RunAs alias, click on Add button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new RunAs alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -612,8 +578,7 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"Edit\n" +"To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -623,10 +588,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:222 msgid "" "<big>Command Aliases</big> \n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set " -"of commands \n" -"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is " -"then used to refer\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set of commands \n" +"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is then used to refer\n" "\tto all commands in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -635,8 +598,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:231 msgid "" -"To add a new command alias, click on Add button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"To add a new command alias, click on Add button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of commands in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -645,8 +607,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:238 msgid "" -"To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click " -"on Edit\n" +"To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click on Edit\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on Delete button. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -656,11 +617,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "<big>User Alias</big> \n" -"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with " -"'%') or other\n" -"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, " -"numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in " -"this alias.\n" +"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with '%') or other\n" +"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -669,12 +627,9 @@ #. Single User Alias Help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:253 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add users or " -"groups to the\n" -"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on " -"Add button.\n" -"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add users or groups to the\n" +"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on Add button.\n" +"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -687,8 +642,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:262 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:292 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:315 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"Note: Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one " -"member.\n" +"Note: Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one member.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -696,14 +650,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:266 msgid "" "<big>Host Alias</big> \n" -"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP " -"addresses\n" -"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. " -"192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" -"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. " -"It is \n" -"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore " -"only), which \n" +"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP addresses\n" +"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" +"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. It is \n" +"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which \n" "\tis then used to refer to all hosts in this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -713,8 +663,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:277 msgid "" "Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add hosts to the\n" -"\talias, click on Add button. A pop-up window will appear, where you " -"can enter\n" +"\talias, click on Add button. A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter\n" "\tvalid hostname or IP address and then click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -723,8 +672,7 @@ #. Single Host Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:285 msgid "" -"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and " -"click on\n" +"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -734,12 +682,9 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:296 msgid "" "<big>RunAs Alias</big> \n" -"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more " -"users, system groups \n" -"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must " -"contain \n" -"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to " -"refer to all users \n" +"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more users, system groups \n" +"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must contain \n" +"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to refer to all users \n" "\tin this alias.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -749,15 +694,11 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:319 msgid "" "<big>Command Alias</big> \n" -"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional " -"parameters), directories, or\n" -"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase " -"letters, numbers and\n" +"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional parameters), directories, or\n" +"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and\n" "\tunderscore only), which is \n" -"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally " -"have one or more\n" -"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these " -"parameters only. If a \n" +"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally have one or more\n" +"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these parameters only. If a \n" "\tdirectory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -766,12 +707,9 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:331 msgid "" -"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add a new command " -"to the alias,\n" -"\tclick on Add button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can " -"enter command name\n" -"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on Browse button. " -"Additionally, you can\n" +"Enter unique name into Alias Name text entry. To add a new command to the alias,\n" +"\tclick on Add button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter command name\n" +"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on Browse button. Additionally, you can\n" "\tspecify command parameters in Parameters text entry\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -779,8 +717,7 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:339 msgid "" -"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\tRemove button. To finish the configuration, click OK.\n" "\t\n" "\t" @@ -793,8 +730,7 @@ #. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) false; #. } #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:400 -msgid "" -"This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" +msgid "This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:407 @@ -811,8 +747,7 @@ #. end Commands #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:545 -msgid "" -"All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" +msgid "All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" msgstr "" #. Error message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -326,10 +326,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big> \n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " -"Open SUSE Support Center.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " -"you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use Open SUSE Support Center.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.\n" msgstr "" @@ -352,8 +350,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<big>Supportconfig Options</big> \n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " -"settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" @@ -370,38 +367,31 @@ msgid "" "<big>Options</big> \n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</" -"p>\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.\n" msgstr "" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<big>Default Options</big> \n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<big>Contact Information</big> \n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " -"include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." -"txt file." +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file." msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<big>Upload Information</big> \n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " -"upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " -"filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " -"tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" "See man supportconfig(1) for further details." msgstr "" @@ -409,8 +399,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<big>Upload Target Examples</big> \n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball</" -"i> \n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball \n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming \n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives" msgstr "" @@ -418,10 +407,8 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " -"service request.\n" +"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" msgstr "" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 @@ -435,16 +422,14 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<big>Collected Data Review</big> \n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " -"of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" "use Remove from Data and the selected file will be removed.\n" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" " \n" @@ -455,8 +440,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<big>Upload URL</big> \n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " -"uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "\n" @@ -473,8 +457,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the Package with log files field.\n" " \n" @@ -555,15 +538,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "" -"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." -"txt" +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " -"in /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 @@ -583,9 +562,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " -"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 @@ -641,9 +618,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "" -"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " -"information. pam.txt" +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 @@ -663,9 +638,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "" -"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " -"data files. sar.txt" +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 @@ -678,10 +651,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " -"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " -"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -714,21 +685,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " -"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "" -"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "" -"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " -"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " -"available. -l" +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 @@ -736,21 +701,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " -"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " -"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "" -"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " -"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 @@ -770,47 +729,33 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "" -"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "" -"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " -"always used." +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " -"you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" -"Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "" -"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " -"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " -"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -296,17 +296,13 @@ #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 msgid "" "After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" -"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which " -"changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" -"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig " -"takes effect.\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for popup - part 2/2 #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 -msgid "" -"Important: You still can edit each individual configuration file " -"manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description." +msgid "Important: You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description." msgstr "" #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 @@ -320,17 +316,12 @@ #. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 -msgid "" -"System Configuration EditorWith the system configuration " -"editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to " -"configure your hardware and system settings." +msgid "System Configuration EditorWith the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings." msgstr "" #. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 -msgid "" -"Note: Descriptions are not translated because they are read " -"directly from configuration files." +msgid "Note: Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files." msgstr "" #. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode @@ -360,9 +351,7 @@ #. help text in popup dialog #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 -msgid "" -"The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select " -"it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." msgstr "" #. push button label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -81,9 +81,7 @@ #. dialog help text #: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:83 -msgid "" -"Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). " -"The server will be started using xinetd." +msgid "Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The server will be started using xinetd." msgstr "" #. enlighten newbies, #102946 @@ -98,8 +96,7 @@ "Boot Image Directory:\n" "Specify the directory where served files are located. The usual value is\n" "<tt>/tftpboot</tt>. The directory will be created if it does not exist. \n" -"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</" -"p>\n" +"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).\n" msgstr "" #. Radio button label, disable TFTP server Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -18,9 +18,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 -msgid "" -"Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. translators: popup heading @@ -55,9 +53,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 -msgid "" -"You can save hardware information to a file. Click Save to File " -"and enter the filename." +msgid "You can save hardware information to a file. Click Save to File and enter the filename." msgstr "" #. installation proposal header @@ -83,9 +79,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:95 -msgid "" -"DetailsThe details of the selected hardware component are " -"displayed here." +msgid "DetailsThe details of the selected hardware component are displayed here." msgstr "" #. heading text, %1 is component name (e.g. "USB UHCI Root Hub") @@ -137,16 +131,12 @@ #. help text - part 1/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:180 -msgid "" -"Detected Hardware This table contains all hardware components " -"detected in your system." +msgid "Detected Hardware This table contains all hardware components detected in your system." msgstr "" #. help text - part 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:184 -msgid "" -"Details Select a component and press Details to see a " -"more detailed description of the component." +msgid "Details Select a component and press Details to see a more detailed description of the component." msgstr "" #. help text - part 3/3 @@ -284,38 +274,27 @@ #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:411 -msgid "" -"It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal " -"database of known supported devices." +msgid "It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal database of known supported devices." msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:415 -msgid "" -"PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. SysFS " -"Dir. is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it " -"is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name." +msgid "PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. SysFS Dir. is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name." msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:419 -msgid "" -"If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty " -"and enter the SysFS directory name instead." +msgid "If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and enter the SysFS directory name instead." msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text, %1 stands for a button name (OK or Finish -- depends on the situation) #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:424 -msgid "" -"Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press " -"%1 to activate the settings." +msgid "Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press %1 to activate the settings." msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:431 -msgid "" -"Warning: This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you " -"know what you are doing." +msgid "Warning: This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know what you are doing." msgstr "" #. tree node string @@ -1068,12 +1047,9 @@ msgid "" "<big>Global I/O Scheduler</big> \n" "Select the algorithm which orders and sends commands to disk\n" -"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in " -"the\n" -"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually " -"'cfq')\n" -"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/" -"block\n" +"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in the\n" +"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually 'cfq')\n" +"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" "directory (package kernel-source) for more information.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1086,14 +1062,11 @@ #: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:134 msgid "" "<big>Enable SysRq Keys</big> \n" -"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if " -"it\n" -"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key " -"combination\n" +"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if it\n" +"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key combination\n" "Alt-SysRq-<command_key> will start the respective command (e.g. reboot the\n" "computer, dump kernel information). For further information, see\n" -"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).</" -"p>\n" +"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).\n" msgstr "" #. Short sleep between reads or writes Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -95,8 +95,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:120 msgid "" "Create a Complete Backup of\n" -"/etc/sysconfig: This covers all configuration files that are part of " -"the\n" +"/etc/sysconfig: This covers all configuration files that are part of the\n" "sysconfig mechanism, even those that will not be replaced.\n" msgstr "" @@ -199,8 +198,7 @@ msgid "" "With New Software: This default setting\n" "updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of\n" -"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former " -"predefined\n" +"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former predefined\n" "software selection.\n" msgstr "" @@ -209,8 +207,7 @@ msgid "" "Only Installed Packages: This selection\n" "only updates the packages already installed on your system. Note:\n" -"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, " -"is\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" "not available after the update. You might miss new features.\n" msgstr "" @@ -218,8 +215,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 msgid "" "After the update, some software might not\n" -"function anymore. Activate Delete Unmaintained Packages to delete " -"those\n" +"function anymore. Activate Delete Unmaintained Packages to delete those\n" "packages during the update.\n" msgstr "" @@ -326,9 +322,7 @@ #. error message in proposal #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:101 -msgid "" -"The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation " -"media." +msgid "The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation media." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) @@ -344,8 +338,7 @@ #. %2 is the version being installed #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:143 msgid "" -"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the " -"running system. \n" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system. \n" "Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" "or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" msgstr "" @@ -500,8 +493,7 @@ #. pop-up question #: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 msgid "" -"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected " -"partition.\n" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" "Are sure you want to use it anyway?" msgstr "" @@ -605,8 +597,7 @@ #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1166 msgid "" "Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" -"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not " -"fit.\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" "It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" "or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" "\n" @@ -679,10 +670,8 @@ #. a popup message #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1463 msgid "" -"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the " -"upgrade\n" -"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition " -"manually\n" +"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" "to continue the upgrade process." msgstr "" @@ -714,11 +703,9 @@ #. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1698 msgid "" -"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This " -"is\n" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" "not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" -"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change " -"the\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" "mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -95,9 +95,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for 'user' option #: src/clients/groups.rb:218 -msgid "" -"List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of " -"LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." +msgid "List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for new_groupname option @@ -145,18 +143,12 @@ #. helptext 2/3 #. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 2/2 #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:125 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:162 -msgid "" -"Select Local to authenticate users only by using the local files " -"/etc/passwd and /etc/shadow." +msgid "Select Local to authenticate users only by using the local files /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow." msgstr "" #. optional helptext 2.5/3 (local users continued) #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:133 -msgid "" -"If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to " -"create users based on this source. To do so, select Read User Data from a " -"Previous Installation. This option uses an existing or creates a new " -"home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." +msgid "If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to create users based on this source. To do so, select Read User Data from a Previous Installation. This option uses an existing or creates a new home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." msgstr "" #. radiobutton to select ldap user auth. @@ -196,8 +188,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:185 msgid "" "If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" -"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. " -"Then\n" +"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" "press Next to continue with configuration of your client." msgstr "" @@ -205,8 +196,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:195 msgid "" "If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press Next to continue with configuration of " -"your client." +"appropriate value. Then press Next to continue with configuration of your client." msgstr "" #. helptext 3/3 -- samba &ldap available @@ -221,15 +211,12 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:215 msgid "" "If you are using an LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press Next to continue with configuration of " -"your client." +"appropriate value. Then press Next to continue with configuration of your client." msgstr "" #. helptext: additional kerberos support #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:225 -msgid "" -"Check Set Up Kerberos Authentication to configure Kerberos after " -"configuring the user data source." +msgid "Check Set Up Kerberos Authentication to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source." msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -320,8 +307,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions, the password\n" -"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and " -"numbers\n" +"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" "reenter it in a second field.\n" "\n" @@ -334,8 +320,7 @@ "\n" "All the rules for user passwords apply to the \"root\" password:\n" "Distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" -"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or " -"umlauts.\n" +"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or umlauts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -358,9 +343,7 @@ #. help text for 'test keyboard layout' entry' #: src/clients/inst_root.rb:187 -msgid "" -"To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering " -"text into the Test Keyboard Layout field." +msgid "To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering text into the Test Keyboard Layout field." msgstr "" #. report misspellings of the password @@ -502,9 +485,7 @@ #. Help text for password expert dialog #. Help text for password expert dialog 4/5 #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:168 src/include/users/widgets.rb:491 -msgid "" -"SHA-512 is the current standard hash method. Using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes." +msgid "SHA-512 is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes." msgstr "" #. text entry @@ -582,8 +563,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:448 src/include/users/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "\n" -"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be " -"between\n" +"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be between\n" " %2 and %3 characters.\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -609,21 +589,16 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:467 msgid "" "\n" -"For the Username use only letters (no accented characters), digits, " -"and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"For the Username use only letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:473 -msgid "" -"Check Use this password for system administrator if the same " -"password as entered for the first user should be used for root." +msgid "Check Use this password for system administrator if the same password as entered for the first user should be used for root." msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog @@ -632,9 +607,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:476 src/include/users/helps.rb:259 msgid "" "\n" -"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with " -"your Linux system. With Automatic Login enabled, the login procedure " -"is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.\n" +"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with your Linux system. With Automatic Login enabled, the login procedure is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog @@ -642,8 +615,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:480 src/include/users/helps.rb:264 msgid "" "\n" -"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking Receive System " -"Mail.\n" +"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking Receive System Mail.\n" msgstr "" #. Dialog for expert user settings: authentication method as well @@ -817,8 +789,7 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:105 msgid "" "\n" -"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry " -"that were not set in previous dialogs." +"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that were not set in previous dialogs." msgstr "" #. helptext 1/3 (don't translate objectclass"), @@ -837,8 +808,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Edit each attribute using Edit. Some attributes \n" -"could be required, as defined in the user template in the LDAP Client " -"Module.\n" +"could be required, as defined in the user template in the LDAP Client Module.\n" msgstr "" #. table header 1/2 @@ -858,10 +828,7 @@ #. helptext #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:91 -msgid "" -"Assign a password policy object to this user in DN of Password Policy " -"object. Activate Reset Password to reset the password of modified " -"user." +msgid "Assign a password policy object to this user in DN of Password Policy object. Activate Reset Password to reset the password of modified user." msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -964,27 +931,17 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:101 msgid "" "Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 KB blocks the\n" -"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.</" -"p>\n" +"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:105 -msgid "" -"You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied." +msgid "You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied." msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:109 -msgid "" -"As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately." +msgid "As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately." msgstr "" #. helptext for quota @@ -996,27 +953,17 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:119 msgid "" "Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 kB blocks the\n" -"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.</" -"p>\n" +"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:123 -msgid "" -"You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied." +msgid "You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied." msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:127 -msgid "" -"As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately." +msgid "As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately." msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1323,8 +1270,7 @@ "'%1' and '%2'\n" "were found. Use them for current user?\n" "\n" -"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home " -"directory." +"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home directory." msgstr "" #. popup label, %1 is path to directory @@ -1619,8 +1565,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "When entering a password, distinguish between uppercase and\n" -"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or " -"umlauts. \n" +"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or umlauts. \n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1654,16 +1599,14 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:123 msgid "" "Default Login Shell \n" -"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter " -"your own path to the shell.\n" +"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter your own path to the shell.\n" msgstr "" #. Help text 3/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "Default Home \n" -"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is " -"added\n" +"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is added\n" "to the end of this value to create the default name of the home directory.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1672,8 +1615,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:134 msgid "" "Skeleton Directory \n" -"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a " -"new user is added. \n" +"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a new user is added. \n" msgstr "" #. Help text 4.5/6 @@ -1688,8 +1630,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:143 msgid "" "Expiration Date \n" -"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the " -"format\n" +"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the format\n" "YYYY-MM-DD. Leave it empty if this account never expires.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1753,11 +1694,9 @@ "Create the Username from components of the full name by\n" "clicking Suggestion. It may be modified, but use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -1767,19 +1706,15 @@ "\n" "For the Username, use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #. help text 6/7 (only during installation) #: src/include/users/helps.rb:269 -msgid "" -"Press User Management to add more users or groups to your system.</" -"p>" +msgid "Press User Management to add more users or groups to your system." msgstr "" #. alternative help text 4/7 @@ -1795,8 +1730,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:286 msgid "" "\n" -"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, " -"click Password Settings.\n" +"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, click Password Settings.\n" msgstr "" #. help text 7/7 @@ -1843,8 +1777,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Password:\n" -"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves " -"when\n" +"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves when\n" "switching to this group (see the man page of <tt>newgrp</tt>), assign a\n" "password to this group. For security reasons, this password is not shown\n" "here. This entry is not required.\n" @@ -1919,9 +1852,7 @@ #. help text for user's home directory mode #: src/include/users/helps.rb:430 -msgid "" -"Optionally, set the Home Directory Permission Mode for this user's " -"home directory different from the default." +msgid "Optionally, set the Home Directory Permission Mode for this user's home directory different from the default." msgstr "" #. alternate helptext 4.5/8; %1 is directory (e.g. '/etc/skel') @@ -1934,33 +1865,22 @@ #. help text for Move to new location checkbox #: src/include/users/helps.rb:452 -msgid "" -"If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of " -"the current directory with Move to New Location, activated by " -"default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the " -"existing data." +msgid "If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of the current directory with Move to New Location, activated by default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data." msgstr "" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:464 msgid "" "To encrypt the user's home directory, enable Use Encrypted Home\n" -"Directory and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home " -"directory\n" -"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is " -"shared\n" +"Directory and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home directory\n" +"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is shared\n" "among multiple users, it may be possible for a user to compromise system\n" -"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted " -"data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically " -"shared." +"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically shared." msgstr "" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is " -"used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint " -"configuration first." +msgid "Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration first." msgstr "" #. alternate helptext 5/8 @@ -2027,9 +1947,7 @@ #. helptext for plugin dialog 3/3 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:552 -msgid "" -"Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting " -"Launch." +msgid "Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting Launch." msgstr "" #. help texts 1/1 @@ -2071,16 +1989,14 @@ #. Help text 4/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:595 msgid "" -"Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password Set how many days " -"a user \n" +"Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password Set how many days a user \n" "can use the same password before it expires.\n" msgstr "" #. Help text 5/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:599 msgid "" -"Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password Set the minimum " -"age of \n" +"Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password Set the minimum age of \n" "a password before a user is allowed to change it.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2107,125 +2023,83 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Changing the Values \n" -"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the " -"module with Configure.\n" +"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the module with Configure.\n" "\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Password Policy Dialog #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:62 -msgid "" -"Select the Password Change Policies, Password Aging Policies</" -"b>, and Lockout Policies tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups " -"of attributes to configure." +msgid "Select the Password Change Policies, Password Aging Policies, and Lockout Policies tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdInHistory attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Specify the Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History to set " -"how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not " -"be used." +msgid "Specify the Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMustChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:74 -msgid "" -"Check User Must Change Password after Reset to force users to " -"change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an " -"administrator." +msgid "Check User Must Change Password after Reset to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdAllowUserChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:78 -msgid "" -"Check User Can Change Password to allow users to change their " -"passwords." +msgid "Check User Can Change Password to allow users to change their passwords." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdSafeModify attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:82 -msgid "" -"If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, " -"check Old Password Required for Password Change." +msgid "If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check Old Password Required for Password Change." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdCheckQuality attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:86 -msgid "" -"Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords " -"are modified or added. Select No Checking if passwords should not be " -"checked at all. With Accept Uncheckable Passwords, passwords are " -"accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has " -"provided an encrypted password. With Only Accept Checked Passwords " -"passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be " -"checked." +msgid "Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select No Checking if passwords should not be checked at all. With Accept Uncheckable Passwords, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With Only Accept Checked Passwords passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMinLength attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in " -"Minimum Password Length." +msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in Minimum Password Length." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMinAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:94 -msgid "" -"Minimum Password Age sets how much time must pass between " -"modifications to the password." +msgid "Minimum Password Age sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMaxAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:98 -msgid "" -"Maximum Password Age sets how long after modification a password " -"expires." +msgid "Maximum Password Age sets how long after modification a password expires." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdExpireWarning attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:102 -msgid "" -"In Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning set how long " -"before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages " -"should be given to an authenticating user." +msgid "In Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdGraceAuthNLimit attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate " -"in Allowed Uses of an Expired Password." +msgid "Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in Allowed Uses of an Expired Password." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdLockout attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:110 -msgid "" -"Check Enable Password Locking to forbid use of a password after a " -"specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts." +msgid "Check Enable Password Locking to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMaxFailure attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:114 -msgid "" -"Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the " -"password may not be used to authenticate in Bind Failures to Lock the " -"Password." +msgid "Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in Bind Failures to Lock the Password." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdLockoutDuration attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:118 -msgid "" -"Set how long the password cannot be used in Password Lock Duration." -"" +msgid "Set how long the password cannot be used in Password Lock Duration." msgstr "" #. help text for pwdFailureCountInterval attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:122 -msgid "" -"Bind Failures Cache Duration sets how long before password " -"failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful " -"authentication has occurred." +msgid "Bind Failures Cache Duration sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred." msgstr "" #. tab label @@ -2356,8 +2230,7 @@ #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:675 msgid "" "Press Configure to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2369,8 +2242,7 @@ #. password policy help #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:683 msgid "" -"Configure the selected password policy with Edit. Use Add " -"to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +"Configure the selected password policy with Edit. Use Add to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" " if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server." msgstr "" @@ -2650,8 +2522,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.\n" -"DES, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but " -"it\n" +"DES, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but it\n" "restricts passwords to eight characters or less.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -2685,8 +2556,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:586 msgid "" -"It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network " -"environments,\n" +"It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network environments,\n" "you might be unable to log in to a NIS client when a user password is\n" "encrypted with a method other than DES.\n" "\n" @@ -2714,17 +2584,14 @@ #. helptext 2/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:730 -msgid "" -"Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default " -"search filters." +msgid "Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default search filters." msgstr "" #. helptext 3/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:734 msgid "" "With Default, load the default filter from the user and group\n" -"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' " -"attributes).\n" +"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' attributes).\n" "If you are not connected yet, you are prompted for the password.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2813,8 +2680,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:969 msgid "" "\n" -"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM " -"as the login manager.\n" +"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM as the login manager.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -2822,8 +2688,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:975 msgid "" "Auto Login \n" -"By setting Auto Login, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from " -"the list is logged in automatically.\n" +"By setting Auto Login, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from the list is logged in automatically.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext 3/3 @@ -2831,8 +2696,7 @@ msgid "" "Passwordless Logins \n" "If this option is checked, all users are allowed to log in without entering\n" -"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user " -"to log in automatically.\n" +"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user to log in automatically.\n" msgstr "" #. dialog label @@ -2988,8 +2852,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1518 msgid "" "\n" -"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to " -"the\n" +"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to the\n" "system at the same time. To avoid confusion, each user must have\n" "a unique identity. Additionally, every user belongs to at least one group.\n" "\n" @@ -2999,8 +2862,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1535 msgid "" "\n" -"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently " -"shown in the table with Set Filter.\n" +"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown in the table with Set Filter.\n" "Customize your view with Customize Filter.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3009,8 +2871,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Click Expert Options to edit various expert settings, such as\n" -"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for " -"new\n" +"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for new\n" "users, or login settings. With Write Changes Now, save\n" "all changes made so far without exiting the configuration module.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3065,8 +2926,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\n" -"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify " -"groups.\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify groups.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -4282,7 +4142,7 @@ msgstr "" #. the ']' is or-ed... -#. error popup +#. error popup #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:505 msgid "" "The password may only contain the following characters:\n" @@ -4294,8 +4154,7 @@ #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:540 msgid "" "\n" -"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English " -"keyboard\n" +"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English keyboard\n" "layout. In cases of system error, it may be necessary to log in without a\n" "localized keyboard layout.\n" "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -29,9 +29,7 @@ #. check for kernel-bigsmp #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:158 -msgid "" -"x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your " -"architecture is " +msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " msgstr "" #. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported @@ -59,31 +57,22 @@ #. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:214 -msgid "" -"<big>VM Server Configuration</big>Configuration of the VM " -"Server (domain 0) has two parts." +msgid "<big>VM Server Configuration</big>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts." msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:218 -msgid "" -"The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot " -"loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is " -"added to the boot loader menu if it is missing." +msgid "The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing." msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:222 -msgid "" -"GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to " -"boot Xen and the Linux kernel." +msgid "GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel." msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:226 -msgid "" -"When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM " -"Server from the boot loader menu." +msgid "When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu." msgstr "" #. error popup @@ -197,9 +186,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:506 -msgid "" -"For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network " -"bridge is recommended.Configure a default network bridge?" +msgid "For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.Configure a default network bridge?" msgstr "" #. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV @@ -216,15 +203,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:570 -msgid "" -"KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native " -"kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:573 -msgid "" -"For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in " -"the boot loader menu." +msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:576 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -158,9 +158,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_dup_repositories.rb:106 -msgid "" -"The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the " -"selected migration repositories." +msgid "The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the selected migration repositories." msgstr "" #. The version is the same, release can be different @@ -238,26 +236,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Registration for product %1 has been refunded, the product is not " -"registered." +msgid "Registration for product %1 has been refunded, the product is not registered." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Registration for product %1 has expired, the registration is not " -"valid anymore." +msgid "Registration for product %1 has expired, the registration is not valid anymore." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:244 -msgid "" -"Registration for product %1 is provisional only, no updates available" +msgid "Registration for product %1 is provisional only, no updates available" msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:278 -msgid "" -"The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be " -"correct, run registration to update the status." +msgid "The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be correct, run registration to update the status." msgstr "" #. display a critical warning @@ -266,16 +257,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:306 -msgid "" -"We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before " -"starting migration." +msgid "We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before starting migration." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:312 #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:339 -msgid "" -"Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a " -"broken system." +msgid "Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a broken system." msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -486,9 +473,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:396 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." msgstr "" #. popup heading, with rich text widget and Yes/No buttons @@ -498,19 +483,11 @@ #. du contains maps: $[ "dir" : [ total, used, pkgusage, readonly ], .... ] #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:586 -msgid "" -"There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in " -"advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The " -"needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free " -"space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." +msgid "There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:613 -msgid "" -"There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. " -"The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to " -"increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid " -"installation errors." +msgid "There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid installation errors." msgstr "" #. 'Product Long Name (product-libzypp-name)' @@ -541,16 +518,13 @@ #. Removing another product might be an issue #. (nevertheless selected by user or directly by YaST) #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:772 -msgid "" -"Warning: Product %1 will be removed." +msgid "Warning: Product %1 will be removed." msgstr "" #. Not selected by user #. @see BNC #575117 #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:792 -msgid "" -"Error: Product %1 will be automatically " -"removed." +msgid "Error: Product %1 will be automatically removed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:862 @@ -584,8 +558,7 @@ #. help text #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:945 -msgid "" -"To change the update settings, go to Packages Proposal section." +msgid "To change the update settings, go to Packages Proposal section." msgstr "" #. Product removal MUST be confirmed by user, otherwise migration will not continue. Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -53,11 +53,7 @@ #. help text for XPRAM 2/4 #: src/include/s390/xpram/ui.rb:53 -msgid "" -"This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one " -"partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features " -"and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 " -"stream.In this case disable XPRAM in this module." +msgid "This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 stream.In this case disable XPRAM in this module." msgstr "" #. help text for XPRAM 3/4 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -55,9 +55,7 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " -"profile." +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." msgstr "" #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 @@ -137,9 +135,7 @@ #. #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " -"AppArmor profile settings." +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 @@ -252,8 +248,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 msgid "" -"AppArmor Status This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -"enforcement \n" +"AppArmor Status This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning." msgstr "" @@ -337,9 +332,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 -msgid "" -"These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " -"profile management tools can be used. " +msgid "These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used. " msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 @@ -347,9 +340,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " -"Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgid "Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " msgstr "" #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -774,41 +765,31 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE." -"</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " -"defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " -"file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " -"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " -"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " -"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " -"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -"implemented). </li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of " -"the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -831,9 +812,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</" -"li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 @@ -849,16 +828,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" @@ -881,8 +858,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock " -"and\n" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" "mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -892,8 +868,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</" -"li> \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -944,8 +919,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " -"and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -956,8 +930,7 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -"ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 @@ -970,8 +943,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" @@ -990,10 +962,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " -"UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " -"processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -1003,14 +973,12 @@ "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " -"resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you " -"can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" @@ -1183,8 +1151,7 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" " For example: <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "" msgstr "" @@ -1249,8 +1216,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select Include unknown security events if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</" -"li>" +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" msgstr "" #. ---------------------------- @@ -1260,8 +1226,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control " -"module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" @@ -1289,9 +1254,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " -"modes:" +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 @@ -1426,14 +1389,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<li>* can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgid "<li>* can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "" -"<li>** can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</" -"li>" +msgid "<li>** can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 @@ -1441,19 +1401,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<li>[abc] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li>[abc] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "" -"<li>[a-c] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li>[a-c] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<li>{ab,cd} will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match " -"cd</li>" +msgid "<li>{ab,cd} will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 @@ -1610,17 +1566,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 -msgid "" -"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name " -"or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." msgstr "" #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 -msgid "" -"View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " -"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog." +msgid "View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog." msgstr "" #. help text @@ -1635,9 +1587,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 -msgid "" -"Add Entry: Select the type of resource to add from the drop " -"down list." +msgid "Add Entry: Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list." msgstr "" #. help text - part x1 @@ -1659,16 +1609,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 msgid "" "<li>Include Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " -"time.</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li>Network Entry Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " -"profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" @@ -1676,12 +1624,10 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 msgid "" "<li>Hat Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " -"selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a changehat\n" "aware application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see man changehat on your system " -"or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see man changehat on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x7 @@ -1691,18 +1637,15 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 -msgid "" -"Delete Entry: Removes the selected entry from this profile." +msgid "Delete Entry: Removes the selected entry from this profile." msgstr "" #. help text - part y1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 msgid "" "*Clean Exec The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping " -"the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These " -"variables are:" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" msgstr "" #. help text - part y2 @@ -1766,9 +1709,7 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 -msgid "" -"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " -"entries." +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." msgstr "" #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist @@ -1781,9 +1722,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "" -"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " -"directories: \n" +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

[opensuse-translation-commit] r90697 - trunk/yast/ca/po
by keichwa＠svn2.opensuse.org 03 Nov '14

03 Nov '14

Author: keichwa Date: 2014-11-03 17:06:30 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90697 Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/audit-laf.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-client.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-server.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/autoinst.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/bootloader.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/cluster.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/control.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/crowbar.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/geo-cluster.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/iscsi-lio-server.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/isns.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/ldap-server.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/mail.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/registration.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/squid.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/storage.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po trunk/yast/ca/po/yast2-apparmor.ca.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/audit-laf.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/audit-laf.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/audit-laf.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -100,9 +100,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for space_left option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:174 msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system starts to run low" -msgstr "" -"Espai restant a la partició log (en MB) quan el sistema comenci a tenir-ne " -"poc" +msgstr "Espai restant a la partició log (en MB) quan el sistema comenci a tenir-ne poc" #. translators: command line help text for space_left_action option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:181 @@ -127,8 +125,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left_script option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:225 msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if admin_space_left is reached" -msgstr "" -"Script a executar (nom complet del camí) si s'arriba a admin_space_left " +msgstr "Script a executar (nom complet del camí) si s'arriba a admin_space_left " #. command line help text for action_mail_acct option #: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:232 @@ -486,12 +483,10 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big> \n" "\n" msgstr "" -"<big>Inicialitzant la configuració de Linux Audit Framework</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Inicialitzant la configuració de Linux Audit Framework</big> \n" "\n" #. Read dialog help 2/2 @@ -529,33 +524,21 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big> \n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file /var/" -"log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" -"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications " -"which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches)." +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" +"Events may come from the apparmor kernel module, from applications which use libaudit (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches)." msgstr "" "<big>Configuració del fitxer log Auditd</big> \n" -"El dimoni audit és el component de Linux Auditing System, que és responsable " -"d'escriure tots els esdeveniments rellevants al fitxer d'historial (log) /" -"var/log/audit/audit.log (per defecte).\n" -"Els esdeveniments poden venir del mòdul del nucli d'apparmor, " -"d'aplicacions que usen libaudit (per exemple PAM) o d'incidents " -"causats per les regles (per exemple, mirades de fitxers)." +"El dimoni audit és el component de Linux Auditing System, que és responsable d'escriure tots els esdeveniments rellevants al fitxer d'historial (log) /var/log/audit/audit.log (per defecte).\n" +"Els esdeveniments poden venir del mòdul del nucli d'apparmor, d'aplicacions que usen libaudit (per exemple PAM) o d'incidents causats per les regles (per exemple, mirades de fitxers)." #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf')." +"The Rules for auditctl dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" -"El diàleg deregles per a auditctl ofereix més informació sobre les " -"regles i sobre la possibilitat d'afegir-ne.\n" -"Informació detallada sobre els paràmetres del fitxer log es pot obtenir de " -"la pàgina del manual ('man auditd.conf')." +"El diàleg deregles per a auditctl ofereix més informació sobre les regles i sobre la possibilitat d'afegir-ne.\n" +"Informació detallada sobre els paràmetres del fitxer log es pot obtenir de la pàgina del manual ('man auditd.conf')." #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:64 @@ -563,116 +546,87 @@ "Log File: Enter the full path name to the log file\n" "(or use Select File.)" msgstr "" -"Fitxer d'historial (Log): introduïu el nom complet del cami al " -"fitxer log\n" +"Fitxer d'historial (Log): introduïu el nom complet del cami al fitxer log\n" "(o useu Seleccioneu un fitxer.)" #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of " -"writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"Format: set RAW to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or NOLOG to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher). " msgstr "" -"Format: establert a RAW per desar totes les dades (en un " -"format exacte a com el nucli ho envia)\n" -"o NOLOG per descartar tota la informació d'audit en comptes " -"d'escriure-la al disc (no afecta les dades enviades al\n" +"Format: establert a RAW per desar totes les dades (en un format exacte a com el nucli ho envia)\n" +"o NOLOG per descartar tota la informació d'audit en comptes d'escriure-la al disc (no afecta les dades enviades al\n" "dispatcher, transmissor). " #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"INCREMENTAL the\n" -"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: " -"keep data portion synced,\n" +"Flush: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to INCREMENTAL the\n" +"Frequency parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"NONE means: no special effort is made to flush data, DATA: keep data portion synced,\n" "SYNC: keep data and meta-data fully synced." msgstr "" -"Aboca: descriu com escriure les dades al disc. Si s'estableix a " -"INCREMENTAL el\n" -"paràmetre freqüència diu quants registres escriure abans de fer un " -"bolcatge explícit (flush) al disc.\n" -"NONE significa: no es fa cap esforç especial per abocar les dades, " -"DATA: manté la porció de dades sincronitzada,\n" +"Aboca: descriu com escriure les dades al disc. Si s'estableix a INCREMENTAL el\n" +"paràmetre freqüència diu quants registres escriure abans de fer un bolcatge explícit (flush) al disc.\n" +"NONE significa: no es fa cap esforç especial per abocar les dades, DATA: manté la porció de dades sincronitzada,\n" "SYNC: manté les dades i les metadades completament sincronitzades." #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via Size and Action.\n" msgstr "" -"Configureu la mida màxima del fixer d'historial (en megabytes) i l'acció " -"a fer quan s'arribi al valor\n" +"Configureu la mida màxima del fixer d'historial (en megabytes) i l'acció a fer quan s'arribi al valor\n" "a través de mida i acció.\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"If the action is set to ROTATE the Number of Log Files specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to SYSLOG, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With SUSPEND the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. IGNORE means do nothing, KEEP_LOGS is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.\n" msgstr "" -"Si l'acció està establerta a ROTATE el Nombre de fitxers Log</" -"b> especifica el nombre de\n" -"fitxers a mantenir. Establert a SYSLOG, el dimoni audit escriurà un " -"avís a\n" -" /var/log/messages. Amb SUSPEND el dimoni para d'escriure registres " -"al disc\n" +"Si l'acció està establerta a ROTATE el Nombre de fitxers Log especifica el nombre de\n" +"fitxers a mantenir. Establert a SYSLOG, el dimoni audit escriurà un avís a\n" +" /var/log/messages. Amb SUSPEND el dimoni para d'escriure registres al disc\n" "IGNORE significa no fer res, KEEP_LOGS és semblant a\n" "ROTATE, però els fitxers log no es sobreescriuen.\n" #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"Computer Name Format describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If USER is set, the User Defined Name is\n" -"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. NONE means no computer name is inserted. HOSTNAME uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. FQD uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.\n" msgstr "" -"Format del nom d'ordinador descriu com escriure el nom de " -"l'ordinador al fitxer\n" -"log. Si s'estableix a USER, es fa servir el nom d'usuari definit</" -"b>.\n" -"NONE significa que no s'insereix cap nom d'ordinador. HOSTNAME " -"usa el nom\n" -"tornat pel syscall 'gethostname' . FQD usa el nom de domini " -"plenament\n" +"Format del nom d'ordinador descriu com escriure el nom de l'ordinador al fitxer\n" +"log. Si s'estableix a USER, es fa servir el nom d'usuari definit.\n" +"NONE significa que no s'insereix cap nom d'ordinador. HOSTNAME usa el nom\n" +"tornat pel syscall 'gethostname' . FQD usa el nom de domini plenament\n" "qualificat.\n" #. dispatcher dialog help 1/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big> \n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf')." msgstr "" "<big>Configuració d'Auditd Dispatcher </big> \n" -"La informació detallada sobre els paràmetres del transmissor (dispatcher) es " -"pot obtenir de la pàgina del manual\n" +"La informació detallada sobre els paràmetres del transmissor (dispatcher) es pot obtenir de la pàgina del manual\n" "('man auditd.conf')." #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"Dispatcher: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin." msgstr "" "Dispatcher: El programa és iniciat pel dimoni audit i\n" @@ -681,20 +635,14 @@ #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want " -"a blocking/lossless\n" +"Communication: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A lossy communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose lossless if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication." msgstr "" -"Communicació: controla la comunicació entre el dimoni i el " -"programa transmissor.\n" -"Una comunicació lossy, amb pèrdues, significa que els esdeveniments " -"que van al transmissor\n" -"es descarten quan la cua està plena (un búfer 128kB). Escolliu lossless</" -"i>, sense pèrdues, si voleu una\n" +"Communicació: controla la comunicació entre el dimoni i el programa transmissor.\n" +"Una comunicació lossy, amb pèrdues, significa que els esdeveniments que van al transmissor\n" +"es descarten quan la cua està plena (un búfer 128kB). Escolliu lossless, sense pèrdues, si voleu una\n" "comunicació blocking/lossless.\n" "" @@ -702,12 +650,10 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd." -"conf')." +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf')." msgstr "" "El dispatcher 'audispd' és un esdeveniment audit multiplexor.\n" -"Per a més informació vegeu les pàgines del manual ('man audispd' i 'man " -"audispd.conf')." +"Per a més informació vegeu les pàgines del manual ('man audispd' i 'man audispd.conf')." #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:122 @@ -715,8 +661,7 @@ "Note: The dispatcher program must be owned by 'root', have '0750'\n" " file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.\n" msgstr "" -"Nota: El programa transmissor (dispatcher) ha de pertànyer a " -"'root', tenir permisos\n" +"Nota: El programa transmissor (dispatcher) ha de pertànyer a 'root', tenir permisos\n" "de fitxer '0750' i s'ha d'introduir tot el nom complet del camí.\n" #. disk space dialog help 1/6 @@ -728,54 +673,41 @@ msgstr "" "<big>Configuració d'espai de disc Auditd </big> \n" "Els paràmetres fets aquí es refereixen a l'espai de disc a la partició log.\n" -"Per a informació detallada, referiu-vos a la pàgina del manual ('man auditd." -"conf').\n" +"Per a informació detallada, referiu-vos a la pàgina del manual ('man auditd.conf').\n" #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform " -"an Action because\n" +"Space Left (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an Action because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space." msgstr "" -"Espai restant (en megabytes) diu al dimoni audit quan executar una " -"acció perquè el\n" +"Espai restant (en megabytes) diu al dimoni audit quan executar una acció perquè el\n" "sistema s'està quedant sense espai." #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The " -"system is running\n" -"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action</" -"b> will be performed." +"The value for Admin Space Left should be lower than above. The system is running\n" +"low on disk space if the value is reached and the specified Action will be performed." msgstr "" -"El valor per a Administració de l'espai restant hauria de ser " -"menor que el de dalt. El sistema s'està quedant sense\n" -"espai al disc si s'arriba al valor i l'acció especificada " -"s'executarà." +"El valor per a Administració de l'espai restant hauria de ser menor que el de dalt. El sistema s'està quedant sense\n" +"espai al disc si s'arriba al valor i l'acció especificada s'executarà." #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 msgid "" "If an action is set to EMAIL, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" -"account specified in Action Mail Account. SYSLOG means " -"the\n" -"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. IGNORE " -"means\n" +"account specified in Action Mail Account. SYSLOG means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. IGNORE means\n" "do nothing. EXEC runs the script specified in Path to\n" "Script. SUSPEND stops writing records to disk. SINGLE\n" "switches the system to single user mode. HALT shuts down the\n" "system.\n" msgstr "" -"Si una acció està establerta a EMAIL, un correu d'avís s'enviarà " -"al compte\n" -"especificat a Acció de compte de correu. SYSLOG significa " -"que\n" -"l'avís d'espai de disc s'escriurà a /var/log/messages. IGNORE " -"significa\n" -"no fer res. EXEC executa l'script especificat a Ruta a l'script</" -"b>.\n" +"Si una acció està establerta a EMAIL, un correu d'avís s'enviarà al compte\n" +"especificat a Acció de compte de correu. SYSLOG significa que\n" +"l'avís d'espai de disc s'escriurà a /var/log/messages. IGNORE significa\n" +"no fer res. EXEC executa l'script especificat a Ruta a l'script.\n" "SUSPEND atura l'escriptura de registres al disc. SINGLE\n" "canvia el sistema a usar un mode únic. HALT atura el\n" "sistema.\n" @@ -783,29 +715,22 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"You can also specify a Disk Full Action (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a Disk Error Action (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for EMAIL)." msgstr "" "També podeu especificar l'Acció de disc ple (el disc ja és ple) i\n" -"una Acció d'error de disc (que es fa quan es detecta un error durant " -"l'escriptura al disc).\n" -"Les accions disponibles són les mateixes que les d'abans (excepte per a " -"EMAIL)." +"una Acció d'error de disc (que es fa quan es detecta un error durant l'escriptura al disc).\n" +"Les accions disponibles són les mateixes que les d'abans (excepte per a EMAIL)." #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "Note: All scripts specified for EXEC must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.\n" msgstr "" -"Nota: Tots els scripts especificats per a EXEC han de " -"pertànyer a\n" -"'root', tenir permisos de fitxer '0750' i s'ha d'introduir el nom complet " -"del camí.\n" +"Nota: Tots els scripts especificats per a EXEC han de pertànyer a\n" +"'root', tenir permisos de fitxer '0750' i s'ha d'introduir el nom complet del camí.\n" #. rules dialog help 1/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:160 @@ -813,57 +738,40 @@ "<big>Rules for auditctl</big> \n" "This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" "auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" -"The selected flag from Set Enabled Flag will be added to the rules.</" -"p>" +"The selected flag from Set Enabled Flag will be added to the rules." msgstr "" "<big>Regles per a auditctl</big> \n" -"Aquest diàleg ofereix la possibilitat d'habilitar o deshabilitar l'auditoria " -"syscall\n" +"Aquest diàleg ofereix la possibilitat d'habilitar o deshabilitar l'auditoria syscall\n" "així com bloquejar la configuration d'audit.\n" -"La bandera seleccionada a Estableix la bandera habilitada s'afegirà a " -"les regles." +"La bandera seleccionada a Estableix la bandera habilitada s'afegirà a les regles." #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot." -msgstr "" -"Nota: Bloquejar les regles significa que no es poden canviar " -"fins al pròxim reinici." +msgid "Note: Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot." +msgstr "Nota: Bloquejar les regles significa que no es poden canviar fins al pròxim reinici." #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/" -"audit.log (default). " +" applications which use libaudit, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default). " msgstr "" "Habilitar l'auditoria sense regles addicionals causarà que les\n" -" aplicacions que usen libaudit, per exemple PAM, de fer l'historial " -"(log) a /var/log/audit/audit.log (per defecte). " +" aplicacions que usen libaudit, per exemple PAM, de fer l'historial (log) a /var/log/audit/audit.log (per defecte). " #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users. \n" +"You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users. \n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.\n" msgstr "" -"També podeu editar les regles manualment, la qual cosa només és " -"recomanable per a usuaris avançats. \n" +"També podeu editar les regles manualment, la qual cosa només és recomanable per a usuaris avançats. \n" "Per a més informació sobre totes les opcions, vegeu 'man auditctl'.\n" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings " -"from /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" -msgstr "" -"Comprova la sintaxi envia les regles a través de auditctl " -"al subsistema audit i en comprova la sintaxi. Restaure restaura " -"els paràmetres des de /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" +msgid "Check Syntax sends the rules via auditctl to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax. Restore restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" +msgstr "Comprova la sintaxi envia les regles a través de auditctl al subsistema audit i en comprova la sintaxi. Restaure restaura els paràmetres des de /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" #. rules dialog help 6/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:183 @@ -873,12 +781,9 @@ "Click Load to open a file selection dialog in which you can load\n" "an example rules file.\n" msgstr "" -"Cliqueu a Restaura i reestableix per restaurar les regles i " -"reestablir\n" -"els canvis (de comprovacions anteriors de sintaxi) cridant auditctl." -" \n" -"Cliqueu a Carrega per obrir un diàleg de selecció de fitxer en què " -"podeu carregar\n" +"Cliqueu a Restaura i reestableix per restaurar les regles i reestablir\n" +"els canvis (de comprovacions anteriors de sintaxi) cridant auditctl. \n" +"Cliqueu a Carrega per obrir un diàleg de selecció de fitxer en què podeu carregar\n" "un fixer d'exemple de regles.\n" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -909,12 +814,8 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "" -"To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 " -"must be installed." -msgstr "" -"Per continuar la configuració de Linux Auditing, el paquet %1 ha " -"d'estar instal·lat." +msgid "To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package %1 must be installed." +msgstr "Per continuar la configuració de Linux Auditing, el paquet %1 ha d'estar instal·lat." #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 msgid "Install it now?" @@ -990,7 +891,6 @@ #. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 -#| msgid "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" msgid "" "Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" "or only start the daemon for now?" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-client.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-client.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-client.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -184,7 +184,6 @@ #. Main dialog contents #: src/include/dialogs.rb:512 -#| msgid "Authentication Method" msgid "Authentication Client" msgstr "Client d'autenticació" @@ -212,25 +211,7 @@ #. initialize GUI #: src/include/dialogs.rb:553 -msgid "" -"SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and " -"authentication mechanisms. You have to confiugre at least one " -"authentication domain. The first you have to set for a authentication " -"domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain. In " -"the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected " -"providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected " -"identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:" -" proxy: Support a legacy NSS provider. local: SSSD " -"internal provider for local users. ldap: LDAP provider. See sssd-" -"ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP. ipa: FreeIPA and " -"Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad: Active " -"Directory provider. Supported auth providers are: ldap for " -"native LDAP authentication. krb5 for Kerberos authentication." -" ipa FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider." -" ad Active Directory provider. proxy for relaying " -"authentication to some other PAM target. none disables " -"authentication explicitly. The default auth provider is the id_provider." -" " +msgid "SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and authentication mechanisms. You have to confiugre at least one authentication domain. The first you have to set for a authentication domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain. In the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider: proxy: Support a legacy NSS provider. local: SSSD internal provider for local users. ldap: LDAP provider. See sssd-ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP. ipa: FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad: Active Directory provider. Supported auth providers are: ldap for native LDAP authentication. krb5 for Kerberos authentication. ipa FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider. ad Active Directory provider. proxy for relaying authentication to some other PAM target. none disables authentication explicitly. The default auth provider is the id_provider. " msgstr "" #. Define Global Parameters @@ -239,92 +220,49 @@ msgstr "Indica quina és la sintaxi de fitxer config" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:21 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "Llista separada per comes de serveis que s'inicien quan sssd comença." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:26 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:79 -msgid "" -"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " -"Provider crash or restart before they give up" -msgstr "" -"El nombre de cops que els serveis haurien d'intentar reconnectar en cas que " -"falli el proveïdor de dades o reiniciar abans de deixar-ho estar" +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgstr "El nombre de cops que els serveis haurien d'intentar reconnectar en cas que falli el proveïdor de dades o reiniciar abans de deixar-ho estar" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:30 -msgid "" -"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " -"configured or SSSD won't start." -msgstr "" -"SSSD pot fer servir més dominis alhora, però almenys se n'ha de configurar " -"un o SSSD no s'iniciarà." +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." +msgstr "SSSD pot fer servir més dominis alhora, però almenys se n'ha de configurar un o SSSD no s'iniciarà." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "" -"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " -"queried." -msgstr "" -"Aquest paràmetre conté la llista de dominis en l'ordre en què seran " -"necessaris." +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." +msgstr "Aquest paràmetre conté la llista de dominis en l'ordre en què seran necessaris." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " -"user name and domain into these components" -msgstr "" -"Expressió regular per defecte que descriu com analitzar l'string que conté " -"el nom d'usuari i el domini dins d'aquests components." +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" +msgstr "Expressió regular per defecte que descriu com analitzar l'string que conté el nom d'usuari i el domini dins d'aquests components." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " -"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." -msgstr "" -"El format per defecte de printf(3)-compatible que descriu com traduir un " -"tuple (nom, domini) en un nom plenament qualificat." +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgstr "El format per defecte de printf(3)-compatible que descriu com traduir un tuple (nom, domini) en un nom plenament qualificat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:43 -msgid "" -"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " -"its internal DNS resolver." -msgstr "" -"SSSD monitoritza l'estat de resolv.conf per identificar quan necessita " -"actualitzar el seu resolver DNS intern." +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." +msgstr "SSSD monitoritza l'estat de resolv.conf per identificar quan necessita actualitzar el seu resolver DNS intern." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "" -"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " -"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." -msgstr "" -"Per defecte, intentarem usar inotify per a això, i es tornarà a consultar " -"resolv.conf cada cinc segons si inotify no es pot usar." +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgstr "Per defecte, intentarem usar inotify per a això, i es tornarà a consultar resolv.conf cada cinc segons si inotify no es pot usar." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:48 -msgid "" -"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " -"files." -msgstr "" -"El directori al sistema de fitxers on SSSD hauria de desar els fitxers de " -"memòria cau de Kerberos replay." +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." +msgstr "El directori al sistema de fitxers on SSSD hauria de desar els fitxers de memòria cau de Kerberos replay." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " -"domain name component." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta string s'utilitzarà com a nom de domini per defecte per a tots els " -"noms sense un component de nom de domini." +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." +msgstr "Aquesta string s'utilitzarà com a nom de domini per defecte per a tots els noms sense un component de nom de domini." #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " -"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most " -"verbose mode." -msgstr "" -"Màscara de bits que indica quins nivells de depuració seran visibles. 0x0010 " -"és el valor per defecte així com el valor mès baix permès, 0xFFF0 és el mode " -"més textual." +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." +msgstr "Màscara de bits que indica quins nivells de depuració seran visibles. 0x0010 és el valor per defecte així com el valor mès baix permès, 0xFFF0 és el mode més textual." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:64 msgid "Add a timestamp to the debug messages" @@ -339,58 +277,29 @@ msgstr "Temps en segons entre batecs per a aquest servei." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:84 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " -"opened at one time by this SSSD process." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta opció especifica el nombre màxim de fitxers descriptors que pot " -"obrir alhora aquest procés SSSD." +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgstr "Aquesta opció especifica el nombre màxim de fitxers descriptors que pot obrir alhora aquest procés SSSD." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:89 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " -"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta opció especifica el nombre de segons que un client d'un procés SSSD " -"pot esperar en un fitxer descriptor sense comunicar-se." +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgstr "Aquesta opció especifica el nombre de segons que un client d'un procés SSSD pot esperar en un fitxer descriptor sense comunicar-se." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:94 -msgid "" -"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " -"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." -msgstr "" -"Si un servei no està responent a comprovacions ping (vegeu l'opció " -"“timeout”, temps d'espera), primer és enviat el senyal SIGTERM que " -"l'instrueix a sortir correctament." +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgstr "Si un servei no està responent a comprovacions ping (vegeu l'opció “timeout”, temps d'espera), primer és enviat el senyal SIGTERM que l'instrueix a sortir correctament." #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:102 -msgid "" -"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " -"all users)?" -msgstr "" -"Quants segons hauria de guardar nss_sss les enumeracions (peticions " -"d'informació sobre tots els usuaris)?" +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" +msgstr "Quants segons hauria de guardar nss_sss les enumeracions (peticions d'informació sobre tots els usuaris)?" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:107 -msgid "" -"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " -"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " -"for the domain." -msgstr "" -"L'entrada cache es pot establir a actualitzar automàticament les entrades " -"internament si són demanades més enllà d'un percentatge del valor del domini " -"entry_cache_timeout." +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." +msgstr "L'entrada cache es pot establir a actualitzar automàticament les entrades internament si són demanades més enllà d'un percentatge del valor del domini entry_cache_timeout." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:112 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits " -"(that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) " -"before asking the back end again." -msgstr "" -"Especifica quants segons nss_sss hauria de guardar coincidències negatives " -"de cache (és a dir, cerques d'entrades no vàlides de base de dades, com ara " -"no existents) abans de preguntar-ho al rerefons una altra vegada." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." +msgstr "Especifica quants segons nss_sss hauria de guardar coincidències negatives de cache (és a dir, cerques d'entrades no vàlides de base de dades, com ara no existents) abans de preguntar-ho al rerefons una altra vegada." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:117 msgid "Exclude certain users from being fetched from the sss NSS database." @@ -401,27 +310,16 @@ msgstr "Exclou certs grups de ser cridats des de la base de dades sss NSS." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:127 -msgid "" -"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." -msgstr "" -"Si voleu que l'usuari filtrat encara sigui membre de grup establiu aquesta " -"opció a fals." +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgstr "Si voleu que l'usuari filtrat encara sigui membre de grup establiu aquesta opció a fals." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:131 -msgid "" -"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " -"or a template." -msgstr "" -"Passa per alt el directori home de l'usuari. Podeu proveir un valor absolut " -"o bé una plantilla." +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." +msgstr "Passa per alt el directori home de l'usuari. Podeu proveir un valor absolut o bé una plantilla." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:135 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1101 -msgid "" -"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " -"explicitly by the domain's data provider." -msgstr "" -"Estableix una plantilla per defecte per al directori home de l'usuari si no " -"n'hi ha cap d'especificat explícitament pel proveïdor de dades del domini." +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgstr "Estableix una plantilla per defecte per al directori home de l'usuari si no n'hi ha cap d'especificat explícitament pel proveïdor de dades del domini." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:139 msgid "Override the login shell for all users." @@ -433,74 +331,40 @@ #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:147 msgid "Replace any instance of these shells with the shell_fallback" -msgstr "" -"Reemplaça qualsevol instància d'aquestes interfícies amb el shell_fallback" +msgstr "Reemplaça qualsevol instància d'aquestes interfícies amb el shell_fallback" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:152 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." -msgstr "" -"La interfície per defecte per usar si no n'hi ha cap de permesa instal·lada " -"a la màquina." +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgstr "La interfície per defecte per usar si no n'hi ha cap de permesa instal·lada a la màquina." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:156 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." -msgstr "" -"La interfície per defecte per usar si el proveïdor no en retorna cap durant " -"la cerca." +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgstr "La interfície per defecte per usar si el proveïdor no en retorna cap durant la cerca." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:161 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be " -"considered valid." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps en segons durant el qual la llista de subdominis es " -"considerarà vàlida." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." +msgstr "Especifica el temps en segons durant el qual la llista de subdominis es considerarà vàlida." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:166 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " -"valid." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps en segons durant el qual els registres a la in-memory " -"cache seran vàlids." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." +msgstr "Especifica el temps en segons durant el qual els registres a la in-memory cache seran vàlids." #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:174 -msgid "" -"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " -"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." -msgstr "" -"Si el proveïdor d'autenticació és fora de línia, durant quant de temps " -"s'haurien de permetre les entrades a la memòria cau (en dies des de l'última " -"entrada satisfactòria)." +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgstr "Si el proveïdor d'autenticació és fora de línia, durant quant de temps s'haurien de permetre les entrades a la memòria cau (en dies des de l'última entrada satisfactòria)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:179 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:184 -msgid "" -"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts " -"has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." -msgstr "" -"El temps en minuts que ha de passar després que s'hagi arribat a " -"offline_failed_login_attempts abans que un altre intent d'entrada sigui " -"possible." +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgstr "El temps en minuts que ha de passar després que s'hagi arribat a offline_failed_login_attempts abans que un altre intent d'entrada sigui possible." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:189 -msgid "" -"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." -msgstr "" -"Controla quins tipus de missatges es mostren a l'usuari durant " -"l'autenticació." +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgstr "Controla quins tipus de missatges es mostren a l'usuari durant l'autenticació." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:194 -msgid "" -"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " -"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " -"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." -msgstr "" -"Per a qualsevol petició PAM mentre SSSD estigui en línia, SSSD intentarà " -"actualitzar la informació d'identitat guardada de l'usuari per tal " -"d'assegurar que l'autenticació es fa amb l'última informació." +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgstr "Per a qualsevol petició PAM mentre SSSD estigui en línia, SSSD intentarà actualitzar la informació d'identitat guardada de l'usuari per tal d'assegurar que l'autenticació es fa amb l'última informació." #. The kerberos domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:199 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:691 @@ -510,142 +374,80 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes " -"that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." -msgstr "" -"Evaluar o no els atributs de sudoNotBefore i sudoNotAfter que implementen " -"entrades de sudoers depenents de l'hora." +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgstr "Evaluar o no els atributs de sudoNotBefore i sudoNotAfter que implementen entrades de sudoers depenents de l'hora." #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " -"hits before asking the back end again." -msgstr "" -"Especifica per quants segons el responder autofs hauria de guardar les " -"coincidències negatives abans de preguntar una altra vegada al rerefons." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." +msgstr "Especifica per quants segons el responder autofs hauria de guardar les coincidències negatives abans de preguntar una altra vegada al rerefons." #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " -"file." -msgstr "" -"Si descomentar o no noms de host i adreces al fitxer gestionat known_hosts." +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." +msgstr "Si descomentar o no noms de host i adreces al fitxer gestionat known_hosts." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:233 -msgid "" -"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " -"host keys were requested." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons mantenir un host al fitxer known_hosts gestionats després que " -"les claus del host siguin demanades." +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." +msgstr "Quants segons mantenir un host al fitxer known_hosts gestionats després que les claus del host siguin demanades." #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:242 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:247 -msgid "" -"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " -"outside these limits, it is ignored." -msgstr "" -"Límits UID i GID per al domini. Si un domini conté una entrada que és fora " -"d'aquests límits, s'ignora." +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgstr "Límits UID i GID per al domini. Si un domini conté una entrada que és fora d'aquests límits, s'ignora." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:252 msgid "Determines if a domain can be enumerated." msgstr "Determina si un domini pot ser enumerat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:257 -msgid "" -"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " -"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." -msgstr "" -"Si el servei no s'acaba després dels segons “force_timeout”, el monitor el " -"tancarà a la força enviant un senyal SIGKILL." +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgstr "Si el servei no s'acaba després dels segons “force_timeout”, el monitor el tancarà a la força enviant un senyal SIGKILL." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:262 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " -"backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides abans de " -"preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:267 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de l'usuari " -"abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de l'usuari abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:272 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de grup " -"abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de grup abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:277 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before " -"asking the backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de netgroup " -"abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de netgroup abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:282 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de servei " -"abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons nss_sss hauria de considerar les entrades vàlides de servei abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:287 -msgid "" -"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " -"again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons sudo hauria de considerar les regles vàlides abans de " -"preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons sudo hauria de considerar les regles vàlides abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:292 -msgid "" -"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " -"before asking the backend again." -msgstr "" -"Quants segons el servei d'autofs hauria de considerar els mapes " -"d'automounter vàlids abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "Quants segons el servei d'autofs hauria de considerar els mapes d'automounter vàlids abans de preguntar al rerefons un altre cop." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:297 msgid "Determines if user credentials are also cached in the local LDB cache." -msgstr "" -"Determina si les credencials d'un usuari són també desades a la memòria cau " -"local de LDB." +msgstr "Determina si les credencials d'un usuari són també desades a la memòria cau local de LDB." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:302 -msgid "" -"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " -"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." -msgstr "" -"Les entrades de nombre de dies es deixen a la memòria cau després de " -"l'última entrada satisfactòria abans de ser eliminades en una neteja de " -"cache." +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgstr "Les entrades de nombre de dies es deixen a la memòria cau després de l'última entrada satisfactòria abans de ser eliminades en una neteja de cache." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:307 msgid "The identification provider used for the domain." msgstr "El proveïdor d'dentificació usat pel domini" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:312 -msgid "" -"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " -"as the user's login name reported to NSS." -msgstr "" -"Useu el nom complet i el domini (tal com l'ha formatat el domini " -"full_name_format) com a nom d'entrada de l'usuari reportat a NSS." +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgstr "Useu el nom complet i el domini (tal com l'ha formatat el domini full_name_format) com a nom d'entrada de l'usuari reportat a NSS." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:318 msgid "The authentication provider used for the domain." @@ -656,11 +458,8 @@ msgstr "El proveïdor de control d'accés usat per al domini." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:330 -msgid "" -"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." -msgstr "" -"El proveïdor que hauria de gestionar les operacions de canvi de contrasenya " -"per al domini." +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgstr "El proveïdor que hauria de gestionar les operacions de canvi de contrasenya per al domini." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:336 msgid "The SUDO provider used for the domain." @@ -668,8 +467,7 @@ #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:342 msgid "The provider which should handle loading of selinux settings." -msgstr "" -"El proveïdor que hauria de gestionar la càrrega de paràmetres de selinux." +msgstr "El proveïdor que hauria de gestionar la càrrega de paràmetres de selinux." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:348 msgid "The provider which should handle fetching of subdomains." @@ -684,48 +482,28 @@ msgstr "El proveïdor usat per obtenir la informació d'identitat del host." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:365 -msgid "" -"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " -"containing user name and domain into these components." -msgstr "" -"Expressió regular per a aquest domini que descriu com analitzar l'string que " -"conté el nom d'usuari i el domini en aquests components." +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." +msgstr "Expressió regular per a aquest domini que descriu com analitzar l'string que conté el nom d'usuari i el domini en aquests components." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:370 -msgid "" -"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " -"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." -msgstr "" -"El format per defecte de printf(3)-compatible que descriu com traduir un " -"tuple (nom, domini) en un nom plenament qualificat." +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgstr "El format per defecte de printf(3)-compatible que descriu com traduir un tuple (nom, domini) en un nom plenament qualificat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:376 -msgid "" -"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " -"performing DNS lookups." -msgstr "" -"Proporciona l'habilitat de seleccionar una família d'adreces preferides per " -"usar quan es facin cerques DNS." +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." +msgstr "Proporciona l'habilitat de seleccionar una família d'adreces preferides per usar quan es facin cerques DNS." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " -"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." -msgstr "" -"Defineix el temps (en segons) per esperar una resposta del resolver DNS " -"abans d'assumir que és inabastable." +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgstr "Defineix el temps (en segons) per esperar una resposta del resolver DNS abans d'assumir que és inabastable." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:385 msgid "Use the domain part of machine's hostname." msgstr "Usa la part del domini del nom de la màquina." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 -msgid "" -"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " -"the service discovery DNS query." -msgstr "" -"Si el service discovery s'usa al rerefons, especifica la part del domini de " -"la cerca (query) DNS del servei discovery." +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." +msgstr "Si el service discovery s'usa al rerefons, especifica la part del domini de la cerca (query) DNS del servei discovery." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:390 msgid "Override the primary GID value with the one specified." @@ -736,21 +514,12 @@ msgstr "Tracta l'usuari i els noms de grups com a casos sensibles." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:400 -msgid "" -"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " -"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " -"name was an alias." -msgstr "" -"Quan es cerca un usuari o grup per nom al proveïdor proxy, una segona cerca " -"per ID es fa per 'canonicalitzar' el nom en cas que el nom demanat sigui un " -"àlies." +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." +msgstr "Quan es cerca un usuari o grup per nom al proveïdor proxy, una segona cerca per ID es fa per 'canonicalitzar' el nom en cas que el nom demanat sigui un àlies." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:405 -msgid "" -"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." -msgstr "" -"Usa aquest directori home com a valor per defecte per a tot s els subdominis " -"dins d'aquest domini." +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgstr "Usa aquest directori home com a valor per defecte per a tot s els subdominis dins d'aquest domini." #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:411 @@ -758,26 +527,16 @@ msgstr "Llista separada per comes d'usuaris que tenen permesa l'entrada." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:416 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " -"to groups within this SSSD domain." -msgstr "" -"Llista separada per comes de grups que tenen permesa l'entrada. Això " -"s'aplica només a grups dins del domini SSSD." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgstr "Llista separada per comes de grups que tenen permesa l'entrada. Això s'aplica només a grups dins del domini SSSD." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:421 msgid "Comma separated list of users who are explicitly denied access." -msgstr "" -"Llista separada per comes d'usuaris que tenen explícitament denegada " -"l'entrada." +msgstr "Llista separada per comes d'usuaris que tenen explícitament denegada l'entrada." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:426 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " -"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." -msgstr "" -"Llista separada per comes de grups que tenen explícitament denegada " -"l'entrada. Això s'aplica només a grups dins del domini SSSD." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgstr "Llista separada per comes de grups que tenen explícitament denegada l'entrada. Això s'aplica només a grups dins del domini SSSD." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:432 msgid "The default base DN to use for performing LDAP sudo rules." @@ -786,44 +545,24 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:441 -msgid "" -"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " -"directory." -msgstr "" -"L'eina afegeix un nom d'entrada a base_directory i l'usa com a directori " -"home." +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." +msgstr "L'eina afegeix un nom d'entrada a base_directory i l'usa com a directori home." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:446 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." -msgstr "" -"Indiqueu si un directori home s'hauria de crear per defecte per a nous " -"usuaris." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgstr "Indiqueu si un directori home s'hauria de crear per defecte per a nous usuaris." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:451 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." -msgstr "" -"Indiqueu si un directori home s'hauria d'eliminar per defecte per a usuaris " -"eliminats." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgstr "Indiqueu si un directori home s'hauria d'eliminar per defecte per a usuaris eliminats." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:456 -msgid "" -"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " -"home directory." -msgstr "" -"Usat per sss_useradd(8) per especificar els permisos per defcte en un " -"directori home de nova creació." +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." +msgstr "Usat per sss_useradd(8) per especificar els permisos per defcte en un directori home de nova creació." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:461 -msgid "" -"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " -"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " -"sss_useradd(8)" -msgstr "" -"El directori esquelet, que contŕ fitxers i directoris per ser copiats al " -"directori home de l'usuari, quan el directori home és creat per " -"sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" +msgstr "El directori esquelet, que contŕ fitxers i directoris per ser copiats al directori home de l'usuari, quan el directori home és creat per sss_useradd(8)" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:466 msgid "The mail spool directory." @@ -835,21 +574,12 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:479 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:484 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference." -msgstr "" -"Especifica la llista separada per comes d'URIs dels servidors LDAP a la qual " -"SSSD s'hauria de connectar en ordre de preferència." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgstr "Especifica la llista separada per comes d'URIs dels servidors LDAP a la qual SSSD s'hauria de connectar en ordre de preferència." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:490 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:496 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." -msgstr "" -"Especifica la llista separada per comes d'URIs dels servidors LDAP a la qual " -"SSSD s'hauria de connectar en ordre de preferència per canviar la " -"contrasenya d'un usuari." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgstr "Especifica la llista separada per comes d'URIs dels servidors LDAP a la qual SSSD s'hauria de connectar en ordre de preferència per canviar la contrasenya d'un usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:501 msgid "The default base DN to use for performing LDAP user operations." @@ -892,8 +622,7 @@ msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que correspon al camp gecos de l'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:551 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el nom del directori home de l'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:556 @@ -909,183 +638,88 @@ msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté l'objectSID d'un objecte d'usuari LDAP." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:571 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:776 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." -msgstr "" -"L'atribut LDAP que conté el timestamp de la darrera modificació de l'objecte " -"de parentiu." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el timestamp de la darrera modificació de l'objecte de parentiu." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:576 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " -"password change)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de " -"l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (data de " -"l'últim canvi de contrasenya)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (data de l'últim canvi de contrasenya)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:581 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " -"age)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de " -"l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (l'edat de " -"contrasenya mínima)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (l'edat de contrasenya mínima)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:586 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " -"age)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de " -"l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (edat de " -"contrasenya màxima)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (edat de contrasenya màxima)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:591 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " -"period)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de " -"l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (periode " -"avisant de contrasenya)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (periode avisant de contrasenya)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:596 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " -"inactivity period)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de " -"l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (periode " -"d'inactivitat de contrasenya)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (periode d'inactivitat de contrasenya)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:601 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " -"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " -"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow o ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, " -"aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva " -"shadow(5) counterpart (data de d'expiació del compte)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=shadow o ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, aquest paràmetre conté el nom de l'atribut LDAP corresponent a la seva shadow(5) counterpart (data de d'expiació del compte)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:606 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " -"kerberos." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un " -"atribut LDAP que guarda la data i l'hora de l'últim canvi de contrasenya a " -"kerberos." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un atribut LDAP que guarda la data i l'hora de l'últim canvi de contrasenya a kerberos." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:611 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un " -"atribut LDAP que guarda la data i l'hora de caducitat de la contrasenya " -"vigent." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un atribut LDAP que guarda la data i l'hora de caducitat de la contrasenya vigent." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:616 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un " -"atribut LDAP que guarda l'hora de caducitat del compte." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un atribut LDAP que guarda l'hora de caducitat del compte." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:621 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un " -"atribut LDAP que guarda el camp de bit del control de compte d'usuari." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, aquest paràmetre conté el nom d'un atribut LDAP que guarda el camp de bit del control de compte d'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:626 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " -"determines if access is allowed or not." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds o equivalent, aquest paràmetre " -"determina si l'accés és permès o no." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds o equivalent, aquest paràmetre determina si l'accés és permès o no." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:631 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " -"access is allowed or not." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina si " -"l'accés és permès o no." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina si l'accés és permès o no." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:636 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " -"which date access is granted." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina fins a " -"quina data es permet l'accés." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina fins a quina data es permet l'accés." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:641 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " -"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." -msgstr "" -"Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina les " -"hores del dia en una setmana en què l'accés es permet." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgstr "Quan s'usi ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, aquest paràmetre determina les hores del dia en una setmana en què l'accés es permet." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:646 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " -"(UPN)." -msgstr "" -"L'atribut LDAP que conté l'usuari de Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." +msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté l'usuari de Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:650 msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's SSH public keys." msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté les claus públiques SSH de l'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:655 -msgid "" -"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the " -"realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to " -"fail." -msgstr "" -"Alguns servidors de directori, per exemple, Active Directory, podrien oferir " -"el real part de l'UPN en minúscules, la qual cosa podria fer que fallés " -"l'autenticació." +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." +msgstr "Alguns servidors de directori, per exemple, Active Directory, podrien oferir el real part de l'UPN en minúscules, la qual cosa podria fer que fallés l'autenticació." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:656 msgid "Set this option to true if you want to use an upper-case realm." -msgstr "" -"Establiu aquesta opció a veritat (true) si voleu usar un upper-case realm." +msgstr "Establiu aquesta opció a veritat (true) si voleu usar un upper-case realm." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:661 -msgid "" -"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " -"enumerated records." -msgstr "" -"Especifica quants segons SSSD ha d'esperar abans de refrescar la memòria cau " -"dels registres enumerats." +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." +msgstr "Especifica quants segons SSSD ha d'esperar abans de refrescar la memòria cau dels registres enumerats." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:666 -msgid "" -"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " -"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " -"space." -msgstr "" -"Determina cada quan comprovar la memòria cau per entrades inactives (com ara " -"grups sense membres i usuaris que no han entrat mai) i les elimina per " -"estalviar espai." +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." +msgstr "Determina cada quan comprovar la memòria cau per entrades inactives (com ara grups sense membres i usuaris que no han entrat mai) i les elimina per estalviar espai." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:671 msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's full name." @@ -1096,24 +730,12 @@ msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que llista les afiliacions del grup d'usuaris." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:681 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " -"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " -"to determine access privilege." -msgstr "" -"Si access_provider=ldap i ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSd s'usarà " -"la presència de l'atribut authorizedService a l'entrada d'usuari LDAP per " -"determinar un privilegi d'accés." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgstr "Si access_provider=ldap i ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSd s'usarà la presència de l'atribut authorizedService a l'entrada d'usuari LDAP per determinar un privilegi d'accés." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:686 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " -"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " -"privilege." -msgstr "" -"Si access_provider=ldap i ldap_access_order=host, SSSD s'usarà la presència " -"d'un atribut host a l'entrada d'usuari LDAP per determinar un privilegi " -"d'accés." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgstr "Si access_provider=ldap i ldap_access_order=host, SSSD s'usarà la presència d'un atribut host a l'entrada d'usuari LDAP per determinar un privilegi d'accés." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:696 msgid "The object class of a group entry in LDAP." @@ -1140,42 +762,20 @@ msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté l'objectSID d'un objecte del grup LDAP." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:726 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." -msgstr "" -"L'atribut LDAP que conté el timestamp de la darrera modificació del objecte " -"de parentiu." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el timestamp de la darrera modificació del objecte de parentiu." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:732 -msgid "" -"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " -"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " -"follow." -msgstr "" -"Si ldap_schema s'estableix a un format d'esquema que suporta nested groups " -"(p. e. RFC2307bis), llavors aquesta opció controla quants nivells de nesting " -"SSSD seguiran." +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." +msgstr "Si ldap_schema s'estableix a un format d'esquema que suporta nested groups (p. e. RFC2307bis), llavors aquesta opció controla quants nivells de nesting SSSD seguiran." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:738 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " -"complex or deep nested groups." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'aprofitar-se d'una característica específica " -"d'Active Directory que podria accelerar les operacions de cerca en " -"desplegaments amb grups complexos o deep nested." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." +msgstr "Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'aprofitar-se d'una característica específica d'Active Directory que podria accelerar les operacions de cerca en desplegaments amb grups complexos o deep nested." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:744 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when " -"dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'aprofitar-se d'una característica específica " -"d'Active Directory que podria accelerar les operacions initgroups (sobretot " -"amb grups complexos o deep nested)." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgstr "Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'aprofitar-se d'una característica específica d'Active Directory que podria accelerar les operacions initgroups (sobretot amb grups complexos o deep nested)." # l #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:750 @@ -1191,14 +791,11 @@ msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté els noms dels membres del netgroup." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:766 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." -msgstr "" -"L'atribut LDAP que conté els triples de netgroup (host, usuari i domini)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté els triples de netgroup (host, usuari i domini)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:771 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el UUID/GUID de l'objecte de netgroup LDAP." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:781 @@ -1206,125 +803,68 @@ msgstr "La classe d'objecte d'un servei d'entrada a LDAP." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:786 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " -"aliases." -msgstr "" -"L'atribut LDAP que conté el nom dels atributs de servei i els seus àlies." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." +msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el nom dels atributs de servei i els seus àlies." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:791 msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the port managed by this service." msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté el port gestionat per aquest servei." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:796 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "L'atribut LDAP que conté els protocols entesos per aquest servei." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:802 -msgid "" -"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " -"for this attribute type." -msgstr "" -"Una base DN opcional, marge de cerca i filtre LDAP per restringir cerques " -"LDAP per a aquest tipus d'atribut." +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." +msgstr "Una base DN opcional, marge de cerca i filtre LDAP per restringir cerques LDAP per a aquest tipus d'atribut." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:807 -msgid "" -" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " -"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " -"is entered)." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual les cerques ldap es permeten " -"executar abans que es cancel·lin i els resultats siguin retornats (i s'entra " -"en mode fora de línia)." +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgstr "Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual les cerques ldap es permeten executar abans que es cancel·lin i els resultats siguin retornats (i s'entra en mode fora de línia)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:812 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " -"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " -"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual les cerques ldap " -"d'enumeracions d'usuaris i grups es permeten executar abans que es " -"cancel·lin i els resultats siguin retornats (i s'entra en mode fora de " -"línia)." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgstr "Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual les cerques ldap d'enumeracions d'usuaris i grups es permeten executar abans que es cancel·lin i els resultats siguin retornats (i s'entra en mode fora de línia)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:817 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " -"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps (en segons) després del qual el poll(2)/select(2) " -"seguint un connect(2) retorna en cas de no activitat." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgstr "Especifica el temps (en segons) després del qual el poll(2)/select(2) seguint un connect(2) retorna en cas de no activitat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:822 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " -"will abort if no response is received." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps (en segons) després del qual les crides a synchronous " -"LDAP APIs s'avortaran si no es rep resposta." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." +msgstr "Especifica el temps (en segons) després del qual les crides a synchronous LDAP APIs s'avortaran si no es rep resposta." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:827 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " -"maintained." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual una connexió a un servidor " -"LDAP es mantindrà." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." +msgstr "Especifica el temps (en segons) durant el qual una connexió a un servidor LDAP es mantindrà." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:832 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. " -"Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el nombre de registres a rebre des de LDAP en una sola petició. " -"Alguns servidors LDAP forcen un límit màxim per petició." +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgstr "Especifica el nombre de registres a rebre des de LDAP en una sola petició. Alguns servidors LDAP forcen un límit màxim per petició." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:837 msgid "Disable the LDAP paging control." msgstr "Deshabilita el control de paginació LDAP." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:842 -msgid "" -"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " -"security level necessary to establish the connection." -msgstr "" -"Quan es comunica amb el servidor LDAP usant SASL, especifica el nivell mínim " -"de seguretat necessari per establir la connexió." +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgstr "Quan es comunica amb el servidor LDAP usant SASL, especifica el nivell mínim de seguretat necessari per establir la connexió." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:847 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " -"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el nombre de membres de grup que han de faltar a la memòria cau " -"interna per tal d'iniciar una cerca deferenciada." +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgstr "Especifica el nombre de membres de grup que han de faltar a la memòria cau interna per tal d'iniciar una cerca deferenciada." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:853 -msgid "" -"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " -"any." -msgstr "" -"Especifica quines comprovacions fer als certificats de servidor en una " -"sessió TLS, si cal." +msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." +msgstr "Especifica quines comprovacions fer als certificats de servidor en una sessió TLS, si cal." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:858 -msgid "" -"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " -"Authorities that sssd will recognize." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el fitxer que contè el certificats de tots del certificats " -"autoritzats que l'sssd reconeixerà." +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgstr "Especifica el fitxer que contè el certificats de tots del certificats autoritzats que l'sssd reconeixerà." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:863 -msgid "" -"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " -"certificates in separate individual files." -msgstr "" -"Especifica la ruta d'un directori que conté el certificat d'autoritat " -"certifica en fitxers individuals de separació." +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." +msgstr "Especifica la ruta d'un directori que conté el certificat d'autoritat certifica en fitxers individuals de separació." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:867 msgid "Specifies the file that contains the certificate for the client's key." @@ -1339,22 +879,12 @@ msgstr "Especifica suits cipher acceptables." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:881 -msgid "" -"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " -"channel." -msgstr "" -"Especifica que la connexió de proveïdor id de ha d'usar també tls per " -"protegir el canal." +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." +msgstr "Especifica que la connexió de proveïdor id de ha d'usar també tls per protegir el canal." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:886 -msgid "" -"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " -"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying " -"on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." -msgstr "" -"Especifica que l'SSSD hauria d'intentar fer un mapa d'IDs d'usuari o grups " -"dels atributs ldap_user_objectsid i ldap_group_objectsid en comptes de " -"confiar en ldap_user_uid_number i ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgstr "Especifica que l'SSSD hauria d'intentar fer un mapa d'IDs d'usuari o grups dels atributs ldap_user_objectsid i ldap_group_objectsid en comptes de confiar en ldap_user_uid_number i ldap_group_gid_number." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:890 msgid "Specify the SASL mechanism to use." @@ -1369,12 +899,8 @@ msgstr "Especifica el realm SASL a usar." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:905 -msgid "" -"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " -"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." -msgstr "" -"Si s'estableix a veritat, la biblioteca LDAP farà una cerca inversa per " -"canonicalitzar el nom del host durant un SASL bind." +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgstr "Si s'estableix a veritat, la biblioteca LDAP farà una cerca inversa per canonicalitzar el nom del host durant un SASL bind." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:910 msgid "Specify the keytab to use when using SASL/GSSAPI." @@ -1382,20 +908,15 @@ #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:915 msgid "Specifies that the id_provider should init Kerberos credentials (TGT)." -msgstr "" -"Especifica que el proveïdor id hauria d'init les credencials de Kerberos " -"(TGT)." +msgstr "Especifica que el proveïdor id hauria d'init les credencials de Kerberos (TGT)." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:920 msgid "Specifies the lifetime in seconds of the TGT if GSSAPI is used." msgstr "Especifica la vida en segons del TGT si s'usa GSSAPI." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:925 -msgid "" -"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." -msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu la política per evaluar la caducitat de la contrasenya de la " -"banda del client." +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgstr "Seleccioneu la política per evaluar la caducitat de la contrasenya de la banda del client." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:930 msgid "Specifies whether automatic referral chasing should be enabled." @@ -1403,43 +924,23 @@ #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:935 msgid "Specifies the service name to use when service discovery is enabled." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el nom del servei a usar quan el descobriment de servei està " -"habilitat." +msgstr "Especifica el nom del servei a usar quan el descobriment de servei està habilitat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:939 -msgid "" -"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " -"password changes when service discovery is enabled." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el nom del servei a usar per trobar un servidor LDAP que permeti " -"canvis de contrasenyes quan el service discovery està habilitat." +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgstr "Especifica el nom del servei a usar per trobar un servidor LDAP que permeti canvis de contrasenyes quan el service discovery està habilitat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " -"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." -msgstr "" -"Especifica si actualitzar l'atribut ldap_user_shadow_last_change amb dies " -"des de l'Epoch després d'una operació de canvi de contrasenya." +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgstr "Especifica si actualitzar l'atribut ldap_user_shadow_last_change amb dies des de l'Epoch després d'una operació de canvi de contrasenya." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:949 -msgid "" -"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " -"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " -"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." -msgstr "" -"Si s'usen access_provider = ldap i ldap_access_order = filter (per defecte), " -"aquesta opció és obligatòria. Especifica un criteri de filtre de cerca LDAP " -"que ha de complir-se perquè l'usuari tingui accés en aquest host." +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgstr "Si s'usen access_provider = ldap i ldap_access_order = filter (per defecte), aquesta opció és obligatòria. Especifica un criteri de filtre de cerca LDAP que ha de complir-se perquè l'usuari tingui accés en aquest host." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:954 -msgid "" -" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " -"be enabled." -msgstr "" -"Amb aquesta opció es poden habilitar els atributs de control d'accés " -"d'avaluació del client." +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." +msgstr "Amb aquesta opció es poden habilitar els atributs de control d'accés d'avaluació del client." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:960 msgid "Comma separated list of access control options." @@ -1450,33 +951,20 @@ msgstr "Especifica com es fa la deferència d'àlies quan es fa una cerca." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:970 -msgid "" -"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that " -"use the RFC2307 schema." -msgstr "" -"Permet retenir usuaris locals com a membres d'un grup LDAP per a servidors " -"que usen l'esquema RFC2307." +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." +msgstr "Permet retenir usuaris locals com a membres d'un grup LDAP per a servidors que usen l'esquema RFC2307." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:993 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:997 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " -"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." -msgstr "" -"Especifica una llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o hostnames de " -"servidors Kerberos a la qual SSSD s'hauria de connectar, en ordre de " -"preferència." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgstr "Especifica una llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o hostnames de servidors Kerberos a la qual SSSD s'hauria de connectar, en ordre de preferència." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1002 msgid "The name of the Kerberos realm." msgstr "El nom del realm de Kerberos." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1007 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1012 -msgid "" -"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative " -"servers can be defined here." -msgstr "" -"Si el servei de canvi de contrasenya no s'executa al KDC, es poden definir " -"servidors alternatius aquí." +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." +msgstr "Si el servei de canvi de contrasenya no s'executa al KDC, es poden definir servidors alternatius aquí." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1017 msgid "Directory to store credential caches." @@ -1487,65 +975,36 @@ msgstr "Localització de la memòria cau de les credencials d'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1027 -msgid "" -" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change " -"password request is aborted." -msgstr "" -"Temps d'espera en segons després de l'avortament d'una petitició " -"d'autenticació en línia o petició de canvi de contrasenya." +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." +msgstr "Temps d'espera en segons després de l'avortament d'una petitició d'autenticació en línia o petició de canvi de contrasenya." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " -"spoofed." -msgstr "" -"Verifiqueu amb l'ajuda de krb5_keytab que el TGT obtingut no hagi sigut " -"'spoofed'." +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." +msgstr "Verifiqueu amb l'ajuda de krb5_keytab que el TGT obtingut no hagi sigut 'spoofed'." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1037 -msgid "" -"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " -"KDCs." -msgstr "" -"La localització del keytab a usar quan es validin les credencials obtingues " -"de KDCs." +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." +msgstr "La localització del keytab a usar quan es validin les credencials obtingues de KDCs." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1042 -msgid "" -"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " -"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." -msgstr "" -"Desa la contrasenya de l'usuari si el proveïdor està fora de línia i l'usa " -"per demanar un TGT quan els proveïdor torni a estar en línia." +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgstr "Desa la contrasenya de l'usuari si el proveïdor està fora de línia i l'usa per demanar un TGT quan els proveïdor torni a estar en línia." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1046 -msgid "" -"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " -"immediately followed by a time unit." -msgstr "" -"Demana un tiquet renovable amb una llargada de vida total, donat com un " -"enter immediatament seguit d'una unitat de temps." +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgstr "Demana un tiquet renovable amb una llargada de vida total, donat com un enter immediatament seguit d'una unitat de temps." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1050 -msgid "" -"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " -"followed by a time unit." -msgstr "" -"Demana un tiquet amb un temps de vida, donat com a enter immediatament " -"seguit per una unitat de temps." +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgstr "Demana un tiquet amb un temps de vida, donat com a enter immediatament seguit per una unitat de temps." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1054 msgid "The time in seconds between two checks if the TGT should be renewed." -msgstr "" -"El temps en segons entre dues comprovacions si s'hauria de renovar el TGT." +msgstr "El temps en segons entre dues comprovacions si s'hauria de renovar el TGT." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1059 -msgid "" -"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-" -"authentication." -msgstr "" -"Habilita el flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) per a la " -"preautenticació de Kerberos." +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." +msgstr "Habilita el flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) per a la preautenticació de Kerberos." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1063 msgid "Specifies the server principal to use for FAST." @@ -1553,8 +1012,7 @@ #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1068 msgid "Specifies if the host and user principal should be canonicalized." -msgstr "" -"Especifica si el host o l'usuari principal haurien de ser canonicalitzats." +msgstr "Especifica si el host o l'usuari principal haurien de ser canonicalitzats." #. The Active Directory domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1081 @@ -1562,42 +1020,24 @@ msgstr "Especifica el nom de domini del Directori Actiu." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1085 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1089 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." -msgstr "" -"La llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o de noms de host dels servidors " -"AD als quals SSSD s'hauria de connectar per ordre de preferència." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgstr "La llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o de noms de host dels servidors AD als quals SSSD s'hauria de connectar per ordre de preferència." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1093 -msgid "" -"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " -"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " -"host." -msgstr "" -"Opcional, pot ser que s'estableixi on el hostname(5) no reflecteix el nom " -"qualificat complet usat en el domini de Active Directory per idintificar " -"aquest host." +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." +msgstr "Opcional, pot ser que s'estableixi on el hostname(5) no reflecteix el nom qualificat complet usat en el domini de Active Directory per idintificar aquest host." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1097 msgid "Override the user's home directory." msgstr "Passar per sobre del directori home de l'usuari." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1110 -msgid "" -" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." -msgstr "" -" Especifica el lligam superior del rang de POSIX ID per usar per mapejar " -"l'usuari Active Directory i grup SIDs." +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgstr " Especifica el lligam superior del rang de POSIX ID per usar per mapejar l'usuari Active Directory i grup SIDs." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1115 -msgid "" -"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el lligam superior del rang de POSIX ID per usar per mapejar " -"l'usuari Active Directory i grup SIDs." +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgstr "Especifica el lligam superior del rang de POSIX ID per usar per mapejar l'usuari Active Directory i grup SIDs." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1120 msgid "Specifies the number of IDs available for each slice." @@ -1612,12 +1052,8 @@ msgstr "Especifiqueu el nom del domini predeterminat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1133 -msgid "" -"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " -"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." -msgstr "" -"Canvia el comportament de l'algoritme ID-mapping perquè es comporti de " -"manera més semblant a l'algoritme winbind's “idmap_autorid”." +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgstr "Canvia el comportament de l'algoritme ID-mapping perquè es comporti de manera més semblant a l'algoritme winbind's “idmap_autorid”." #. The Active Directory domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1145 @@ -1625,39 +1061,24 @@ msgstr "Especifica el nom del domini IPA." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1149 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." -msgstr "" -"La llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o de noms de host dels servidors " -"IPA als quals SSSD s'hauria de connectar per ordre de preferència." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgstr "La llista separada per comes d'adreces IP o de noms de host dels servidors IPA als quals SSSD s'hauria de connectar per ordre de preferència." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1153 -msgid "" -"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " -"qualified name." -msgstr "" -"Es pot establir en màquines en què el hostname(5) no reflecteix el nom " -"completament qualificat." +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." +msgstr "Es pot establir en màquines en què el hostname(5) no reflecteix el nom completament qualificat." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1158 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " -"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'actualitzar automàticament la construcció de " -"servidor DNS dins FreeIPA v2 amb l'adreça IP del client." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgstr "Aquesta opció diu a SSSD d'actualitzar automàticament la construcció de servidor DNS dins FreeIPA v2 amb l'adreça IP del client." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1163 msgid "The TTL to apply to the client DNS record when updating it." msgstr "El TTL per aplicar al registre del client DNS quan s'actualitza." #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1167 -msgid "" -"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." -msgstr "" -"Escolliu la interfície adreça IP de la qual s'hauria d'usar per a les " -"actualitzacions dinàmiques de DNS." +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgstr "Escolliu la interfície adreça IP de la qual s'hauria d'usar per a les actualitzacions dinàmiques de DNS." #. end Export #. ################################################################ Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-server.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/auth-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -98,12 +98,8 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." -msgstr "" -"La base de dades LDAP ja està creada. Podeu canviar-ne els paràmetres més " -"tard al sistema instal·lat." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgstr "La base de dades LDAP ja està creada. Podeu canviar-ne els paràmetres més tard al sistema instal·lat." #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:101 @@ -115,12 +111,8 @@ msgstr "[configuració manual]" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." -msgstr "" -"Incapaç de recuperar la contrasenya root del sistema. Configureu una " -"contrasenya de servidor LDAP per continuar. " +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgstr "Incapaç de recuperar la contrasenya root del sistema. Configureu una contrasenya de servidor LDAP per continuar. " #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 msgid "Setting up LDAP Master Server:" @@ -213,12 +205,8 @@ "sense instal·lar els paquets necessaris." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la configuració de replicació OpenLDAP. Reconfigureu-ho després " -"que hagi acabat la instal·lació." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." +msgstr "Ha fallat la configuració de replicació OpenLDAP. Reconfigureu-ho després que hagi acabat la instal·lació." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 msgid "" @@ -240,16 +228,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" -"Teniu una configuració existent, però el servidor LDAP no està funcionant " -"actualment.\n" -"Voleu iniciar el servidor ara o rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o " -"voleu\n" +"Teniu una configuració existent, però el servidor LDAP no està funcionant actualment.\n" +"Voleu iniciar el servidor ara o rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o voleu\n" "crear una configuració nova des de zero?" #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:112 @@ -274,10 +258,8 @@ "database of OpenLDAP (back-config). Do you want to migrate your existing\n" "configuration to the configuration database?\n" msgstr "" -"El vostre sistema està configurat actualment per usar el fitxer de " -"configuració\n" -"/etc/openldap/slapd.conf. El YaST només suporta la base de dades de " -"configuració\n" +"El vostre sistema està configurat actualment per usar el fitxer de configuració\n" +"/etc/openldap/slapd.conf. El YaST només suporta la base de dades de configuració\n" "dinàmica OpenLDAP (back-config). Voleu migrar la configuració existent\n" "a la base de dades de configuració?\n" @@ -335,12 +317,8 @@ msgstr "El servidor LDAP no funciona." #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" -msgstr "" -"Voleu iniciar-ho ara per rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o bé voleu " -"crear una configuració nova des de zero?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgstr "Voleu iniciar-ho ara per rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o bé voleu crear una configuració nova des de zero?" #. get helps page #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:227 @@ -369,17 +347,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:355 msgid "All data, including configuration, is replicated from a remote server." -msgstr "" -"Totes les dades, incloent la configuració, es repliquen des d'un servidor " -"remot." +msgstr "Totes les dades, incloent la configuració, es repliquen des d'un servidor remot." #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:386 msgid "" "YaST was not able to determine the fully qualified hostname of this\n" "computer. \n" msgstr "" -"El YaST no ha pogut derminar el nom d'ordinador central plenament " -"qualificat\n" +"El YaST no ha pogut derminar el nom d'ordinador central plenament qualificat\n" "d'aquest ordinador. \n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:389 @@ -555,12 +530,8 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat l'obertura de la comunicació a la base de dades \"cn=config\" al " -"servidor proveïdor. \n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Ha fallat l'obertura de la comunicació a la base de dades \"cn=config\" al servidor proveïdor. \n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 msgid "" @@ -576,8 +547,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1302 msgid "An error occurred while verifying the TLS/SSL configuration." -msgstr "" -"Hi ha hagut un error durant la verificació de la configuració de TLS/SSL." +msgstr "Hi ha hagut un error durant la verificació de la configuració de TLS/SSL." #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1314 msgid "Do you want to import a different CA/Server Certificate?" @@ -602,19 +572,13 @@ "ja està actuant com a consumidor de replicació.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." -msgstr "" -"Establir una replicació en cascada de cn=config no està actualment suportat." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgstr "Establir una replicació en cascada de cn=config no està actualment suportat." #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la comprovació de les credencials d'autenticació definides a la " -"configuració de replicació al servidor proveïdor.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgstr "Ha fallat la comprovació de les credencials d'autenticació definides a la configuració de replicació al servidor proveïdor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1998 @@ -636,21 +600,17 @@ "To act as a master server for replication, the configuration database needs\n" "to be remotely accessible. Set a password for the configuration database.\n" msgstr "" -"Per actuar com a servidor amo per a replicació, la base de dades de " -"configuració necessita ser\n" -"accessible remotament. Establiu una contrasenya per a la base de dades de " -"configuració.\n" +"Per actuar com a servidor amo per a replicació, la base de dades de configuració necessita ser\n" +"accessible remotament. Establiu una contrasenya per a la base de dades de configuració.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"(L'accés remot a la base de dades de configuració serà restringida a " -"connexions\n" +"(L'accés remot a la base de dades de configuració serà restringida a connexions\n" "LDAP encriptades.)\n" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1532 @@ -680,17 +640,12 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "Select Yes if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</" -"p>\n" +"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" msgstr "" -"Selecccioneu Sí si el servidor LDAP s'ha d'iniciar automàticament " -"com a part\n" -"del procés d'arrencada. Seleccioneu No si el servidor LDAP no s'ha " -"d'inciar. Nota:\n" -"després de seleccionar No, no podeu conviar la configuració " -"d'OpenLDAP.\n" +"Selecccioneu Sí si el servidor LDAP s'ha d'iniciar automàticament com a part\n" +"del procés d'arrencada. Seleccioneu No si el servidor LDAP no s'ha d'inciar. Nota:\n" +"després de seleccionar No, no podeu conviar la configuració d'OpenLDAP.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 msgid "<h4>Protocol Listeners</h4>" @@ -698,32 +653,23 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:27 msgid "Enable and disable the various protocol listeners of OpenLDAP." -msgstr "" -"Habilita i deshabilita els diversos oïdors de protocol d'OpenLDAP." +msgstr "Habilita i deshabilita els diversos oïdors de protocol d'OpenLDAP." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured." +"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured." msgstr "" -"LDAP és la interfície LDAP estàndard al Port 389. La comunicació " -"segura TLS/SSL\n" -"és possible amb l'operació StartTLS quan tingueu un certificat de servidor " -"configurat." +"LDAP és la interfície LDAP estàndard al Port 389. La comunicació segura TLS/SSL\n" +"és possible amb l'operació StartTLS quan tingueu un certificat de servidor configurat." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" -"LDAPS habilita la interfície \"LDAP sobre SSL (ldaps)\" per a " -"connexions protegides SSL\n" -"al port 636. Això només funciona si teniu un certificat de servidor " -"configurat (vegeu \"Paràmetres globals\"/\"Paràmetres TLS\").\n" +"LDAPS habilita la interfície \"LDAP sobre SSL (ldaps)\" per a connexions protegides SSL\n" +"al port 636. Això només funciona si teniu un certificat de servidor configurat (vegeu \"Paràmetres globals\"/\"Paràmetres TLS\").\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 msgid "" @@ -731,10 +677,8 @@ "LDAP server via a Unix Domain Socket. Do not disable the LDAPI interface \n" "as YaST uses it to communicate with the server.\n" msgstr "" -"LDAPI habilita la interfície \"LDAP sobre IPC\" per accedir al " -"servidor\n" -"LDAP a través d'un Unix Domain Socket. No deshabiliteu la interfície LDAPI " -"ja que el \n" +"LDAPI habilita la interfície \"LDAP sobre IPC\" per accedir al servidor\n" +"LDAP a través d'un Unix Domain Socket. No deshabiliteu la interfície LDAPI ja que el \n" "YaST l'usa per comunicar-se amb el servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:41 @@ -746,8 +690,7 @@ "Select whether SuSEFirewall should allow access on the LDAP-related\n" "network ports or not.\n" msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu si SuSEFirewall hauria de permetre l'accés als ports de " -"xarxa\n" +"Seleccioneu si SuSEFirewall hauria de permetre l'accés als ports de xarxa\n" "relacionats amb LDAP o no.\n" #. First part of the Add Database Widget @@ -757,17 +700,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. " -"Hdb is a\n" -"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"Choose the Database from hdb bdb and mdb. Hdb is a\n" +"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to bdb. A\n" "hdb-Database needs a larger idlcachesize than a\n" "bdb-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) " -"library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.\n" +"mdb-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the hdb backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -780,29 +719,22 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password</" -"b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends " -"the \n" -"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the \n" +"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process. " msgstr "" "Si aquest diàleg s'ha iniciat durant la instal·lació, la \n" -"contrasenya d'administrador LDAP s'estableix inicialment igual que la " -"contrasenya root\n" +"contrasenya d'administrador LDAP s'estableix inicialment igual que la contrasenya root\n" "introduïda prèviament durant la instal·lació. " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:74 @@ -837,8 +769,7 @@ "click Change Password. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "Password Encryption. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" @@ -852,38 +783,27 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with Append Base DN." msgstr "" -"Introduïu un DN complet o només la primera part i \"append\" la base DN " -"automàticament\n" +"Introduïu un DN complet o només la primera part i \"append\" la base DN automàticament\n" "amb Append Base DN." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change " -"Password.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password " -"Encryption.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.\n" +"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change Password.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password Encryption.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index " -"Cache (IDL cache) \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index Cache (IDL cache) \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs)." msgstr "" @@ -896,20 +816,15 @@ "To make use of password policies for this database, enable \n" "Enable Password Policies." msgstr "" -"Per fer ús de les polítiques de contrasenya per a aquesta base de dades, " -"habiliteu \n" +"Per fer ús de les polítiques de contrasenya per a aquesta base de dades, habiliteu \n" "Habilita les polítiques de contrasenyes." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords. " msgstr "" @@ -923,17 +838,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object " -"DN." -msgstr "" -"Introduïu el nom de l'objecte de política per defecte a Objecte DN de " -"política per defecte." +msgid "Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object DN." +msgstr "Introduïu el nom de l'objecte de política per defecte a Objecte DN de política per defecte." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You " -"may\n" +"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -944,39 +854,31 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:145 msgid "Change the indexing options of a hdb of bdb-Database." -msgstr "" -"Canvia les opcions d'indexació d'un hdb d'una base de dades bdb." +msgstr "Canvia les opcions d'indexació d'un hdb d'una base de dades bdb." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined." -msgstr "" -"La taula mostra una llista dels atributs que tenen actualment un índex " -"definit." +msgid "The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined." +msgstr "La taula mostra una llista dels atributs que tenen actualment un índex definit." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "Presence: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "Equality: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.\n" msgstr "" @@ -985,8 +887,7 @@ "Substring: This index is used for searches with substring filters\n" "(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=<substring>*)</tt>)\n" msgstr "" -"Subcadena: Aquest índex s'usa per a cerques amb filtres de " -"subcadena\n" +"Subcadena: Aquest índex s'usa per a cerques amb filtres de subcadena\n" "(per exemple <tt>(attributeType=<substring>*)</tt>)\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:168 @@ -998,11 +899,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1015,14 +914,12 @@ "This table gives you an overview of all Access Control rules that are\n" "currently configured for the selected database\n" msgstr "" -"Aquesta taula ofereix un resum de totes les regles de control d'accés " -"que\n" +"Aquesta taula ofereix un resum de totes les regles de control d'accés que\n" "estan actualment configurades per a la base de dades seleccionada\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click Edit.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1032,17 +929,14 @@ "Use Add to create new access control rules and Delete to\n" "delete an access control rule.\n" msgstr "" -"Useu Afegiu per crear noves regles de control d'accés i " -"elimineu per\n" +"Useu Afegiu per crear noves regles de control d'accés i elimineu per\n" "esborrar-ne una.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1052,14 +946,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu la casella \"habilita el proveïdor ldapsync per a aquesta " -"base de dades\", si voleu \n" -"poder replicar la base de dades actualment seleccionada en un altre servidor." -"" +"Seleccioneu la casella \"habilita el proveïdor ldapsync per a aquesta base de dades\", si voleu \n" +"poder replicar la base de dades actualment seleccionada en un altre servidor." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:205 msgid "<h4>Checkpoint Settings</h4>" @@ -1067,16 +958,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.\n" @@ -1088,14 +974,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server." +"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -1104,12 +986,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 msgid "" -"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want " -"the\n" +"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.\n" msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu \"Aquesta base de dades és un consumidor de replicació" -"\" si voleu que la\n" +"Seleccioneu \"Aquesta base de dades és un consumidor de replicació\" si voleu que la\n" "base de dades sigui una rèplica d'una altra en un altre servidor.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:229 @@ -1122,8 +1002,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (ldap or ldaps) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1156,15 +1035,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.\n" +"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.\n" msgstr "" -"Especifiqueu un DN i una contrasenya que el servidor esclau hauria d'usar " -"per autenticar-se a l'amo.\n" -"El DN especificat necessita tenir accés de lectura a totes les entrades a la " -"base de dades replicada a l'amo.\n" +"Especifiqueu un DN i una contrasenya que el servidor esclau hauria d'usar per autenticar-se a l'amo.\n" +"El DN especificat necessita tenir accés de lectura a totes les entrades a la base de dades replicada a l'amo.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 msgid "<h4>Update Referral</h4>" @@ -1174,10 +1049,8 @@ msgid "" "As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. \n" msgstr "" @@ -1192,8 +1065,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now." msgstr "" "<big>Avortar l'inici:</big> \n" -"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració de manera segura prement Avorta " -"ara." +"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració de manera segura prement Avorta ara." #. Write dialog help #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:271 @@ -1219,26 +1091,17 @@ "Server module.\n" msgstr "" "Aquest diàleg proporciona un breu resum de la configuració que heu\n" -"creat. Cliqueu a Acaba per escriure la configuració i sortir del " -"mòdul\n" +"creat. Cliqueu a Acaba per escriure la configuració i sortir del mòdul\n" "del servidor LDAP.\n" #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server.</" -"p> " -msgstr "" -"Amb Inicia el servidor LDAP Sí o No, inicieu o atureu el servidor " -"LDAP. " +msgid "With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server. " +msgstr "Amb Inicia el servidor LDAP Sí o No, inicieu o atureu el servidor LDAP. " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration " -"wizard." -msgstr "" -"Si seleccioneu sí, cliqueu a següent per iniciar-ne la " -"configuració." +msgid "If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration wizard." +msgstr "Si seleccioneu sí, cliqueu a següent per iniciar-ne la configuració." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 msgid "" @@ -1250,17 +1113,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:" -msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu el tipus de servidor LDAP que voleu configurar. Estan " -"disponibles els casos següents:" +msgid "Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:" +msgstr "Seleccioneu el tipus de servidor LDAP que voleu configurar. Estan disponibles els casos següents:" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.\n" msgstr "" "Stand-alone server: estableix un servidor OpenLDAP solitari sense\n" @@ -1271,19 +1129,15 @@ "Master server in a replication setup: Create an OpenLDAP setup\n" "prepared to act as a master server (provider) in a replication setup.\n" msgstr "" -"Servidor amo en una configuració de replicació: creeu una " -"configuració d'OpenLDAP\n" -"preparada per actuar com a servidor amo (proveïdor) en una configuració de " -"replicació.\n" +"Servidor amo en una configuració de replicació: creeu una configuració d'OpenLDAP\n" +"preparada per actuar com a servidor amo (proveïdor) en una configuració de replicació.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server." msgstr "" -"Servidor esclau de rèplica: configureu un servidor esclau OpenLDAP " -"que replica totes les seves dades,\n" +"Servidor esclau de rèplica: configureu un servidor esclau OpenLDAP que replica totes les seves dades,\n" "incloent la configuració, des d'un servidor amo." #. Configuration Wizard Step 3 @@ -1304,18 +1158,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" -"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the " -"server\n" +"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</" -"p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1326,10 +1177,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File</" -"b>,\n" -"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File,\n" +"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the corresponding\n" "textfields.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1349,32 +1198,24 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 msgid "" -"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu els subsistemes que haurien de registrar comunicats de " -"depuració i estadístiques a\n" +"Seleccioneu els subsistemes que haurien de registrar comunicats de depuració i estadístiques a\n" "syslog." #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:" -msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu quines característiques especials el servidor OpenLDAP hauria " -"de permetre o rebutjar:" +msgid "Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:" +msgstr "Seleccioneu quines característiques especials el servidor OpenLDAP hauria de permetre o rebutjar:" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 msgid "<h3>Select Allow Flags</h3>" @@ -1382,39 +1223,31 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.\n" msgstr "" -"Peticions de vincle LDAPv2: per permetre que el servidor accepti " -"peticions de vincle LDAPv2.\n" +"Peticions de vincle LDAPv2: per permetre que el servidor accepti peticions de vincle LDAPv2.\n" "Noteu que OpenLDAP no implementa veritablement LDAPv2.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) " +"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) " msgstr "" -"Vincle anònim quan les credencials no són buides: per permetre un " -"vincle anònim quan \n" -"les credencials no són buides (per exemple, hi ha la contrasenya però no " -"vincle DN) " +"Vincle anònim quan les credencials no són buides: per permetre un vincle anònim quan \n" +"les credencials no són buides (per exemple, hi ha la contrasenya però no vincle DN) " #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 msgid "" "Unauthenticated Bind when DN not empty: To allow unauthenticated \n" "(anonymous) binds when DN is not empty" msgstr "" -"Vincle no autenticat quan el DN no és buit: per permetre vincles " -"(anònims) \n" +"Vincle no autenticat quan el DN no és buit: per permetre vincles (anònims) \n" "quan el DN no és buit" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1432,19 +1265,16 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 msgid "" -"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication\n" msgstr "" -"Deshabilita l'autenticació de vincle simple: deshabilita " -"completament l'autenticació\n" +"Deshabilita l'autenticació de vincle simple: deshabilita completament l'autenticació\n" "de vincle simple\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1459,129 +1289,83 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.\n" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "databases" 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:402 msgid "To add a new database, press Add Database...." -msgstr "" -"Per afegir una nova base de dades, premeu Afegiu una base de dades " -"nova...." +msgstr "Per afegir una nova base de dades, premeu Afegiu una base de dades nova...." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete " -"Database....\n" +"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete Database....\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.\n" msgstr "" -"Per esborrar una base de dades, seleccioneu-ne una de la llista i premeu " -"Esborra la base de dades....\n" +"Per esborrar una base de dades, seleccioneu-ne una de la llista i premeu Esborra la base de dades....\n" "No podeu esborrar les bases de dades \"config\" i \"frontend\".\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely." msgstr "" -"Introduïu una contrasenya per a la base de dades de configuració " -"(\"cn=config\") aquí. Això és necessari\n" +"Introduïu una contrasenya per a la base de dades de configuració (\"cn=config\") aquí. Això és necessari\n" "per poder accedir-hi remotament." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" +"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" msgstr "" -"Si se suposa que el servidor ha de participar en una configuració " -"MirrorMode, seleccioneu la casella \"Prepara per a replicació MirrorMode</" -"b>\"\n" -". Això assegurarà que l'atribut serverId és generat tal com es necessita per " -"a la replicació MirrorMode.\n" +"Si se suposa que el servidor ha de participar en una configuració MirrorMode, seleccioneu la casella \"Prepara per a replicació MirrorMode\"\n" +". Això assegurarà que l'atribut serverId és generat tal com es necessita per a la replicació MirrorMode.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or " -"\"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"cn=config\")." msgstr "" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el <big>Realm</big> i la <big>contrasenya mestra</big> per al " -"vostre servidor Kerberos." +msgid "Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server." +msgstr "Especifica el <big>Realm</big> i la <big>contrasenya mestra</big> per al vostre servidor Kerberos." #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" -msgstr "" -"Tot i que el vostre realm de Kerberos pot ser qualsevol cadena ASCII, la " -"convenció és usar lletres en majúscula com en el nom del vostre domini.\n" +msgid "Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.\n" +msgstr "Tot i que el vostre realm de Kerberos pot ser qualsevol cadena ASCII, la convenció és usar lletres en majúscula com en el nom del vostre domini.\n" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica la localització de la base de dades de Kerberos " -"per a aquest realm." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica la localització de la base de dades de Kerberos per a aquest realm." #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</" -"p>" -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica la localització del fitxer de la llista de " -"control d'accés (ACL) que kadmin usa per determinar els permisos dels " -"principals a la base de dades." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica la localització del fitxer de la llista de control d'accés (ACL) que kadmin usa per determinar els permisos dels principals a la base de dades." #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica la localització del fitxer keytab que usa " -"kadmin per fer l'autenticació a la base de dades." +msgid "This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica la localització del fitxer keytab que usa kadmin per fer l'autenticació a la base de dades." #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquest temps absolut especifica la data de caducitat per defecte dels " -"principals creats en aquest realm." +msgid "This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm." +msgstr "Aquest temps absolut especifica la data de caducitat per defecte dels principals creats en aquest realm." #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquestes banderes especifiquen els atributs per defecte del principal " -"creat en aquest realm." +msgid "These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm." +msgstr "Aquestes banderes especifiquen els atributs per defecte del principal creat en aquest realm." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 msgid "Allow postdated" @@ -1590,8 +1374,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 2/13 :Allow postdated #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:448 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain postdateable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets postdatables." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets postdatables." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:451 msgid "Allow forwardable" @@ -1600,8 +1383,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 3/13 :Allow forwardable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:453 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain forwardable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets reenviables." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets reenviables." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:456 msgid "Allow renewable" @@ -1610,8 +1392,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 4/13 :Allow renewable #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:458 msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain renewable tickets." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets renovables." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets renovables." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:461 msgid "Allow proxiable" @@ -1628,13 +1409,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir una clau de sessió per " -"a un altre usuari, permetent l'autenticació d'usuari a usuari per a aquest " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir una clau de sessió per a un altre usuari, permetent l'autenticació d'usuari a usuari per a aquest principal." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 msgid "Requires preauth" @@ -1642,18 +1418,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." -msgstr "" -"Si aquesta bandera està habilitada en un principal de client, aquest " -"principal s'ha de preautenticar al KDC abans de rebre cap tiquet. Si " -"habiliteu aquesta bandera en un principal de servei, els tiquets de servei " -"per a aquest principal només s'emetran per a clients amb un TGT que tingui " -"establert el tiquet preautenticat." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." +msgstr "Si aquesta bandera està habilitada en un principal de client, aquest principal s'ha de preautenticar al KDC abans de rebre cap tiquet. Si habiliteu aquesta bandera en un principal de servei, els tiquets de servei per a aquest principal només s'emetran per a clients amb un TGT que tingui establert el tiquet preautenticat." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 msgid "Requires hwauth" @@ -1661,12 +1427,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." -msgstr "" -"Si aquesta bandera està habilitada, es requereix que el principal " -"preautentiqui usant un dispositiu de maquinari abans de rebre cap tiquet." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgstr "Si aquesta bandera està habilitada, es requereix que el principal preautentiqui usant un dispositiu de maquinari abans de rebre cap tiquet." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "Allow service" @@ -1674,12 +1436,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al KDC emetre tiquets de servei per a " -"aquest principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al KDC emetre tiquets de servei per a aquest principal." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 msgid "Allow tgs request" @@ -1687,14 +1445,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets basats en un " -"tiquet-atorgació-tiquet, més que no pas repetir el procés d'autenticació que " -"es va usar per obtenir el TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera permet al principal obtenir tiquets basats en un tiquet-atorgació-tiquet, més que no pas repetir el procés d'autenticació que es va usar per obtenir el TGT." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 msgid "Allow tickets" @@ -1702,14 +1454,8 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera significa que el KDC emetrà tiquets per a aquest " -"principal. Deshabilitar-la essencialment desactiva el principal dins " -"d'aquest realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera significa que el KDC emetrà tiquets per a aquest principal. Deshabilitar-la essencialment desactiva el principal dins d'aquest realm." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 msgid "Need change" @@ -1718,9 +1464,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 12/13 :Needchange #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:496 msgid "Enabling this flag forces a password change for this principal." -msgstr "" -"Habilitar aquesta bandera força un canvi de contrasenya per a aquest " -"principal." +msgstr "Habilitar aquesta bandera força un canvi de contrasenya per a aquest principal." #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:497 msgid "Password changing service" @@ -1728,179 +1472,94 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." -msgstr "" -"Si aquesta bandera està habilitada, marca aquest principal com a servei de " -"canvi de contrasenya. Això només s'hauria d'usar en casos especials, per " -"exemple, si ha caducat la contrasenya d'un usuari, l'usuari ha d'obtenir " -"tiquets perquè el principal pugui canviar-la sense haver de passar per " -"l'autenticació normal." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." +msgstr "Si aquesta bandera està habilitada, marca aquest principal com a servei de canvi de contrasenya. Això només s'hauria d'usar en casos especials, per exemple, si ha caducat la contrasenya d'un usuari, l'usuari ha d'obtenir tiquets perquè el principal pugui canviar-la sense haver de passar per l'autenticació normal." #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done." -msgstr "" -"La localització de la cadena del fitxer de diccionari que conté cadenes " -"que no són permeses com a contrasenyes. Si aquesta etiqueta no està " -"establerta o si no hi ha política assignada al principal, no es farà cap " -"comprovació." +msgid "The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done." +msgstr "La localització de la cadena del fitxer de diccionari que conté cadenes que no són permeses com a contrasenyes. Si aquesta etiqueta no està establerta o si no hi ha política assignada al principal, no es farà cap comprovació." #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquest número de port especifica el port en què el dimoni kadmind escolta " -"per a aquest realm." +msgid "This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm." +msgstr "Aquest número de port especifica el port en què el dimoni kadmind escolta per a aquest realm." #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica la localització on la clau mestra ha estat " -"desada amb kdb5_stash." +msgid "This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica la localització on la clau mestra ha estat desada amb kdb5_stash." #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica la llista de ports que escolta el KDC per a " -"aquest realm." +msgid "This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica la llista de ports que escolta el KDC per a aquest realm." #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena especifica el nom del principal associat amb la clau " -"mestra. El valor per defecte és K/M." +msgid "This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M." +msgstr "Aquesta cadena especifica el nom del principal associat amb la clau mestra. El valor per defecte és K/M." #. advanced item help : master_key_type #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:527 msgid "This key type string represents the master keys key type." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta cadena de tipus de clau representa el \"master keys key type\".</" -"p>" +msgstr "Aquesta cadena de tipus de clau representa el \"master keys key type\"." #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquest temps delta especifica el període màxim de temps en què un tiquet " -"pot ser vàlid en aquest realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm." +msgstr "Aquest temps delta especifica el període màxim de temps en què un tiquet pot ser vàlid en aquest realm." #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Aquest temps delta especifica el període màxim de temps en què un tiquet " -"pot ser renovat en aquest realm." +msgid "This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm." +msgstr "Aquest temps delta especifica el període màxim de temps en què un tiquet pot ser renovat en aquest realm." #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm." -msgstr "" -"Una llista de cadenes de key/salt que especifica les combinacions per " -"defecte de key/salt de principals per a aquest realm." +msgid "A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." +msgstr "Una llista de cadenes de key/salt que especifica les combinacions per defecte de key/salt de principals per a aquest realm." #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm." -msgstr "" -"Especifica les combinacions permeses de key/salt de principals per a " -"aquest realm." +msgid "Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm." +msgstr "Especifica les combinacions permeses de key/salt de principals per a aquest realm." #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" -msgstr "" -"Especifica si s'ha de comprovar o no la llista de realms transitats per " -"tiquets cross-realm amb el camí de trànsit calculat a partir del nom de " -"realms i la secció [capaths] del fitxer krb5.conf" +msgid "Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file" +msgstr "Especifica si s'ha de comprovar o no la llista de realms transitats per tiquets cross-realm amb el camí de trànsit calculat a partir del nom de realms i la secció [capaths] del fitxer krb5.conf" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta etiqueta específica de LDAP indica el nombre de connexions que " -"han de mantenir-se a través del servidor LDAP." +msgid "This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server." +msgstr "Aquesta etiqueta específica de LDAP indica el nombre de connexions que han de mantenir-se a través del servidor LDAP." #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta etiqueta específica de LDAP indica el fitxer que conté les " -"contrasenyes per als objectes usades per iniciar els servidors Kerberos." +msgid "This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers." +msgstr "Aquesta etiqueta específica de LDAP indica el fitxer que conté les contrasenyes per als objectes usades per iniciar els servidors Kerberos." #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</" -"p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree." -msgstr "" -"Especifica la llista de subarbres que contenen els principals d'un realm. " -"La llista conté els DN dels objectes del subarbre separats per dos punts (:)." -"L'abast de la cerca especifica l'abast per cercar els principals soba " -"el subarbre." +msgid "Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree." +msgstr "Especifica la llista de subarbres que contenen els principals d'un realm. La llista conté els DN dels objectes del subarbre separats per dos punts (:).L'abast de la cerca especifica l'abast per cercar els principals soba el subarbre." #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." -msgstr "" -"Especifica el DN de l'objecte contenidor en què els principals d'un realm " -"es crearan. Si la referència d'un contenidor no està configurada per a un " -"realm, els principals es crearan al contenidor del realm." +msgid "Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container." +msgstr "Especifica el DN de l'objecte contenidor en què els principals d'un realm es crearan. Si la referència d'un contenidor no està configurada per a un realm, els principals es crearan al contenidor del realm." #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:567 msgid "Specifies maximum ticket life for principals in this realm." -msgstr "" -"Especifica la vida màxima de tiquet per als principals en aquest realm.</" -"p>" +msgstr "Especifica la vida màxima de tiquet per als principals en aquest realm." #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"" -msgstr "" -"Especifica la vida màxima renovable de tiquet per als principals en " -"aquest realm." +msgid "Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." +msgstr "Especifica la vida màxima renovable de tiquet per als principals en aquest realm." #. ################################################################################# #. ################################################################################# @@ -2224,22 +1883,16 @@ msgstr "Servidor URI" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." -msgstr "" -"Aquest servidor no està configurat com a MirrorMode Node. Cliqueu a \"següent" -"\" per llançar el configurador estàndard d'OpenLDAP." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgstr "Aquest servidor no està configurat com a MirrorMode Node. Cliqueu a \"següent\" per llançar el configurador estàndard d'OpenLDAP." #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 msgid "OpenLDAP MirrorMode Overview" msgstr "Resum d'OpenLDAP MirrorMode" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" -msgstr "" -"No és possible esborrar el host en què heu iniciat aquest mòdul del YaST.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgstr "No és possible esborrar el host en què heu iniciat aquest mòdul del YaST.\n" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 msgid "Start yast2 openldap-mirrormode on a different MirrorMode server." @@ -2550,23 +2203,16 @@ msgstr "Selecciona &Rebutja Banderes:" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" -msgstr "" -"Deshabilita l'acceptació de peticions de vincle anònimes (no prohibeix accés " -"anònim al directori)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" +msgstr "Deshabilita l'acceptació de peticions de vincle anònimes (no prohibeix accés anònim al directori)" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 msgid "Disable Simple Bind authentication" msgstr "Deshabilita l'autenticació del vincle simple" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" -msgstr "" -"Deshabilita forçar la sessió a un estat anònim sobre un rebut d'operació " -"StartTLS" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgstr "Deshabilita forçar la sessió a un estat anònim sobre un rebut d'operació StartTLS" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 msgid "Disallow the StartTLS operation if authenticated" @@ -2658,8 +2304,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:359 msgid "Allow Plaintext Authentication (Simple Bind) for this Database. " -msgstr "" -"Permet autenticació de text pla (vincle simple) per a aquesta base de dades." +msgstr "Permet autenticació de text pla (vincle simple) per a aquesta base de dades." #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:362 msgid "(Remote Connection needs to be encrypted)" @@ -2701,7 +2346,6 @@ msgstr "Canvia la contrasenya de l'administrador" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:410 -#| msgid "Use Kerberos" msgid "Update Kerberos Stash" msgstr "Actualitza Kerberos Stash" @@ -2875,8 +2519,7 @@ #. try to read the ppolicy from the server #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:637 msgid "Authentication failed. The password is probably incorrect.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat l'autenticació. Probablement la contrasenya no és correcta.\n" +msgstr "Ha fallat l'autenticació. Probablement la contrasenya no és correcta.\n" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:640 msgid "The error message was: '" @@ -2994,8 +2637,7 @@ #. FIXME: Validate attribute types #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1185 msgid "Enter a list of valid attributes in the Attributes textfield" -msgstr "" -"Introduïu una llista d'atributs vàlids al campt de text Atributs" +msgstr "Introduïu una llista d'atributs vàlids al campt de text Atributs" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1197 msgid "Enter valid a LDAP filter in the textfield" @@ -3018,8 +2660,7 @@ "The selected database contains access control rules that are currently\n" "not supported by YaST. The Access Control Dialog will be disabled.\n" msgstr "" -"La base de dades seleccionada conté regles de control d'accés que " -"actualment\n" +"La base de dades seleccionada conté regles de control d'accés que actualment\n" "estan suportades pel YaST. Es deshabilitarà el diàleg de control d'accés.\n" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1594 @@ -3089,11 +2730,8 @@ msgstr "Ha fallat la comprovació de les capacitats del proveïdor LDAPsync." #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" -msgstr "" -"Si us plau, verifiqueu que el servidor objectiu està habilitat per ser un " -"proveïdor LDAPsync" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgstr "Si us plau, verifiqueu que el servidor objectiu està habilitat per ser un proveïdor LDAPsync" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 msgid "Enable ldapsync provider for this database" @@ -3260,9 +2898,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1686 msgid "Error while populating the configurations database with \"slapadd\"." -msgstr "" -"Error durant la població de la base de dades de configuracions amb \"slapadd" -"\"." +msgstr "Error durant la població de la base de dades de configuracions amb \"slapadd\"." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1706 msgid "Enabling the LDAP Service failed." @@ -3321,12 +2957,8 @@ msgstr "Actualitzant els objectes de política de contrasenyes per defecte" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" -msgstr "" -"Esperant que s'acabin les tasques d'indexació internes d'OpenLDAP (això pot " -"durar uns minuts)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" +msgstr "Esperant que s'acabin les tasques d'indexació internes d'OpenLDAP (això pot durar uns minuts)" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 msgid "Restarting OpenLDAP Server if required" @@ -3345,12 +2977,8 @@ msgstr "Ha fallat la creació d'objectes de política de contrasenyes." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha ocorregut un error mentre s'esperava que acabés l'indexador de la base de " -"dades OpenLDAP.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" +msgstr "Ha ocorregut un error mentre s'esperava que acabés l'indexador de la base de dades OpenLDAP.\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 msgid "Restart OpenLDAP manually." @@ -3448,16 +3076,11 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2859 msgid "Could not determine own fully qualified hostname." -msgstr "" -"No s'ha pogut determinar el propi nom plenament qualificat de servidor." +msgstr "No s'ha pogut determinar el propi nom plenament qualificat de servidor." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." -msgstr "" -"Un servidor principal per a replicació no pot treballar correctament sense " -"saber el seu nom plenament qualificat." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." +msgstr "Un servidor principal per a replicació no pot treballar correctament sense saber el seu nom plenament qualificat." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3402 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3415 @@ -3487,12 +3110,8 @@ msgstr "Invàlid LDAP DN: \"%s\", no es poden extreure els valors RDN" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." -msgstr "" -"El valor de l'atribut \"c\" ha de contenir un codi de país ISO-3166 de dues " -"lletres vàlid." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgstr "El valor de l'atribut \"c\" ha de contenir un codi de país ISO-3166 de dues lletres vàlid." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4040 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:373 @@ -3533,11 +3152,8 @@ msgstr "El fitxer de certificat CA: \"%s\" no existeix." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Error mentre s'intentava verificar el certificat de servidor del servidor " -"proveïdor.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Error mentre s'intentava verificar el certificat de servidor del servidor proveïdor.\n" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 #, perl-format @@ -3570,8 +3186,7 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:301 #, perl-format msgid "Database type '%s' is not supported. Allowed are 'bdb' and 'hdb'." -msgstr "" -"El tipus de base de dades '%s' no té suport. Es permeten 'bdb' i 'hdb'." +msgstr "El tipus de base de dades '%s' no té suport. Es permeten 'bdb' i 'hdb'." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:347 Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/autoinst.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/autoinst.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/autoinst.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -24,8 +24,7 @@ #: src/clients/autoinst_scripts1_finish.rb:47 #: src/clients/autoinst_scripts2_finish.rb:45 msgid "Executing autoinstall scripts in the installation environment..." -msgstr "" -"Executant scripts d'instal·lació automàtica a l'entorn d'instal·lació..." +msgstr "Executant scripts d'instal·lació automàtica a l'entorn d'instal·lació..." #. encoding: utf-8 #: src/clients/autoinst_test_clone.rb:15 @@ -124,11 +123,8 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:46 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" -msgstr "" -"Client per la creació de la configuració d'un perfil d'autoyast al sistema " -"actual" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgstr "Client per la creació de la configuració d'un perfil d'autoyast al sistema actual" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:56 msgid "known modules: %1" @@ -140,7 +136,6 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Warning that an already existing autoyast configuration file will be overwritten. #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:94 -#| msgid "%1 exists! Really overwrite?" msgid "File %s exists! Really overwrite?" msgstr "El fitxer %1 ja existeix! El voleu sobreescriure?" @@ -157,30 +152,22 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location." +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location." msgstr "" -"Aquest diàleg permet copiar el contingut del fitxer i especificar el " -"camí\n" -"final al sistema instal·lat. El YaST2 copiarà aquest fitxer a la ubicació " -"especificada." +"Aquest diàleg permet copiar el contingut del fitxer i especificar el camí\n" +"final al sistema instal·lat. El YaST2 copiarà aquest fitxer a la ubicació especificada." #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax userid:groupid. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions." msgstr "" -"Si voleu protegir els fitxers copiats, definiu el propietari i els " -"permisos dels fitxers.\n" -"El propietari es defineix amb la sintaxi userid:groupid. Els permisos " -"poden ser una\n" -"representació simbòlica dels canvis que es poden fer o un número octal que " -"representa\n" +"Si voleu protegir els fitxers copiats, definiu el propietari i els permisos dels fitxers.\n" +"El propietari es defineix amb la sintaxi userid:groupid. Els permisos poden ser una\n" +"representació simbòlica dels canvis que es poden fer o un número octal que representa\n" "el patró de bits dels nous permisos." #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:185 @@ -254,17 +241,13 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared." msgstr "" -"És possible que prepareu un fitxer de configuració per a diverses " -"aplicacions i serveis\n" +"És possible que prepareu un fitxer de configuració per a diverses aplicacions i serveis\n" "que s'hagi de copiar íntegrament al sistema instal·lat, per exemple, si\n" -"esteu instal·lant un servidor web i heu preparat un fitxer de configuració " -"httpd.conf." +"esteu instal·lant un servidor web i heu preparat un fitxer de configuració httpd.conf." #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:332 msgid "Select a file from the table first." @@ -289,8 +272,7 @@ #. Dialog title for autoyast dialog #: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:62 msgid "Configuring System according to auto-install settings" -msgstr "" -"Configurant el sistema en funció de les opcions de la instal·lació automàtica" +msgstr "Configurant el sistema en funció de les opcions de la instal·lació automàtica" #. determine name of client, if not use default name #. Call::Function(module_auto, ["Import", eval(Profile::current[resource]:$[]) ]); @@ -498,8 +480,7 @@ #. $Id: inst_autosetup.ycp 61521 2010-03-29 09:10:07Z ug $ #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:49 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:47 msgid "Please wait while the system is prepared for autoinstallation." -msgstr "" -"Espereu mentre el sistema es prepara per a la instal·lació automàtica." +msgstr "Espereu mentre el sistema es prepara per a la instal·lació automàtica." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:53 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:52 msgid "Execute pre-install user scripts" @@ -554,7 +535,6 @@ msgstr "Configurant el carregador d'arrencada..." #: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:69 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:63 -#| msgid "Repairing file system..." msgid "Registering the system..." msgstr "Registrant el sistema..." @@ -652,12 +632,10 @@ #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:217 msgid "" -"Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-" -"out)\n" +"Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages. \n" msgstr "" -"En funció de l'experiència que tingueu, podeu passar per alt els " -"missatges d'instal·lació,\n" +"En funció de l'experiència que tingueu, podeu passar per alt els missatges d'instal·lació,\n" "a més de registrar-los o mostrar-los (amb temps d'espera). \n" #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:223 @@ -666,8 +644,7 @@ "Warnings can be skipped in some places, but should not be ignored.\n" msgstr "" "És recomanable mostrar tots els missatges amb el temps d'espera.\n" -"En algunes ocasions es poden ometre les advertències encara que no s'han " -"d'ignorar.\n" +"En algunes ocasions es poden ometre les advertències encara que no s'han d'ignorar.\n" #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:230 msgid "Messages and Logging" @@ -682,14 +659,12 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "\n" -"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following base selections and click Detailed to add\n" "more add-on selections and packages.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Seleccioneu una de les següents seleccions base i feu clic a " -"Detallat per\n" +"Seleccioneu una de les següents seleccions base i feu clic a Detallat per\n" "a afegir més seleccions i paquets complementaris.\n" "\n" @@ -701,11 +676,8 @@ msgstr "Ubicació de la font d'instal·lació (com http://myhost/11.3/DVD1/)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" -msgstr "" -"La font d'instal·lació d'aquest sistema (no podeu crear imatges si trieu " -"aquesta opció)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgstr "La font d'instal·lació d'aquest sistema (no podeu crear imatges si trieu aquesta opció)" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 msgid "using that installation source failed" @@ -720,37 +692,29 @@ msgid "" "Mount in /etc/fstab By:\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" "Tipus de declaració a /etc/fstab:\n" "\tNormalment els sistemes de fitxers a muntar es defineixen a /etc/fstab\n" -"\tmitjançant el seu nom de dispositiu. Aquest nom pot canviar, de manera que " -"és més convenient\n" -"\tfer servir el seu UUID o l'etiqueta de volum. No tots els sistemes de " -"fitxers\n" -"\tes poden muntar per UUID o per etiqueta de volum. Si una opció està " -"inhabilitada, això no serà possible.\n" +"\tmitjançant el seu nom de dispositiu. Aquest nom pot canviar, de manera que és més convenient\n" +"\tfer servir el seu UUID o l'etiqueta de volum. No tots els sistemes de fitxers\n" +"\tes poden muntar per UUID o per etiqueta de volum. Si una opció està inhabilitada, això no serà possible.\n" "\t" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " msgstr "" "Etiqueta del volum:\n" -"\t El nom que introduïu aquest camp s'utilitzarà com l'etiqueta del volum. " -"En general, només\n" +"\t El nom que introduïu aquest camp s'utilitzarà com l'etiqueta del volum. En general, només\n" "\t és recomanable quan activeu l'opció de muntar per etiqueta de volum.\n" "\t L'etiqueta de volum no pot contenir el caràcter / ni cap espai.\n" "\t" @@ -851,8 +815,7 @@ "You selected to create the partition, but you did not select a valid file\n" "system. Select a valid filesystem to continue.\n" msgstr "" -"Heu triat crear la partició,però no heu seleccionat un sistema de fitxers " -"vàlid\n" +"Heu triat crear la partició,però no heu seleccionat un sistema de fitxers vàlid\n" "Seleccioneu-ne un per continuar.\n" #. We don't use the return value of the check, because we @@ -921,11 +884,8 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." -msgstr "" -"La mida \"auto\" només és vàlida si s'ha seleccionat el punt de muntatge \"/" -"boot\" o \"swap\"." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgstr "La mida \"auto\" només és vàlida si s'ha seleccionat el punt de muntatge \"/boot\" o \"swap\"." #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 msgid "Size \"auto\" is invalid for physical volumes." @@ -992,12 +952,9 @@ "No s'ha trobat ni obtingut cap perfil per a aquest ordinador.\n" "Comproveu que heu especificat la ubicació correcta a\n" "la línia d'ordres i torneu-ho a provar. A causa d'aquest error, només\n" -"podeu introduir un URL a un perfil i no pas a un directori. Si esteu " -"utilitzant\n" -"fitxers de control basats en normes o en noms de l'equip, haureu de " -"reiniciar\n" -"el procés d'instal·lació i comprovar que podeu accedir als fitxers de " -"control.\n" +"podeu introduir un URL a un perfil i no pas a un directori. Si esteu utilitzant\n" +"fitxers de control basats en normes o en noms de l'equip, haureu de reiniciar\n" +"el procés d'instal·lació i comprovar que podeu accedir als fitxers de control.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:30 msgid "System Profile Location" @@ -1033,8 +990,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Tots els discos durs detectats automàticament al sistema\n" -"es mostren ací. Seleccioneu el disc dur al qual vulgueu instal·lar-hi " -"\"&product;.\n" +"es mostren ací. Seleccioneu el disc dur al qual vulgueu instal·lar-hi \"&product;.\n" "" #. force help text width @@ -1107,9 +1063,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:200 msgid "Use this interface to define classes of control files. \n" -msgstr "" -"Utilitzeu aquesta interfície per a definir les classes dels fitxers de " -"control. \n" +msgstr "Utilitzeu aquesta interfície per a definir les classes dels fitxers de control. \n" #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:206 msgid "" @@ -1224,8 +1178,7 @@ "Choose one or more of the listed classes to which the current control\n" "file should belong.\n" msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu alguna de les classes llistades, a les quals hauria de " -"pertànyer\n" +"Seleccioneu alguna de les classes llistades, a les quals hauria de pertànyer\n" "el fitxer de control actual.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:614 @@ -1403,12 +1356,8 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" -msgstr "" -"Realment voleu aplicar els paràmetres del mòdul '%1' al vostre sistema " -"actual?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" +msgstr "Realment voleu aplicar els paràmetres del mòdul '%1' al vostre sistema actual?" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:635 @@ -1422,11 +1371,8 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" -msgstr "" -"Realment voleu aplicar els paràmetres del perfil al vostre sistema actual?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" +msgstr "Realment voleu aplicar els paràmetres del perfil al vostre sistema actual?" #. EXIT #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:781 @@ -1565,13 +1511,11 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" "S'ha importat el fitxer Kickstart.\n" -"Comproveu la sintaxi importada i assegureu-vos que la selecció de paquets i " -"les\n" +"Comproveu la sintaxi importada i assegureu-vos que la selecció de paquets i les\n" "particions s'han importat correctament." #. Validate Dialog @@ -1701,32 +1645,25 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"L'opció de confirmació de la instal·lació està seleccionada de forma " -"predeterminada\n" -"per a evitar instal·lacions no desitjades. Aquesta opció atura el sistema " -"durant\n" -"la instal·lació i mostra un resum de les operacions sol·licitades a la " -"pantalla \n" -"habitual de suggeriments. Desmarqueu aquesta opció per a realitzar una " -"instal·lació automàtica sense cap interrupció.\n" +"L'opció de confirmació de la instal·lació està seleccionada de forma predeterminada\n" +"per a evitar instal·lacions no desitjades. Aquesta opció atura el sistema durant\n" +"la instal·lació i mostra un resum de les operacions sol·licitades a la pantalla \n" +"habitual de suggeriments. Desmarqueu aquesta opció per a realitzar una instal·lació automàtica sense cap interrupció.\n" "\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Si desactiveu la segona fase de l'AutoYaST, la instal·lació continua en mode " -"manual\n" +"Si desactiveu la segona fase de l'AutoYaST, la instal·lació continua en mode manual\n" "després de la primera arrencada (després de la instal·lació del paquet).\n" "\n" @@ -1763,8 +1700,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:333 msgid "Pathlist for answers (multiple paths are separated by space)" -msgstr "" -"Llista de camins de les respostes (camins múltiples separats per espai)" +msgstr "Llista de camins de les respostes (camins múltiples separats per espai)" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:341 msgid "Store answer in this file" @@ -1871,15 +1807,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"This tool uses xmllint to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.\n" msgstr "" -"Aquesta eina utilitza xmllint per a validar el perfil d'acord " -"amb el DTD i\n" -"comprova si hi manquen dades. És possible que estigui previst que en " -"manquin; llavors els missatges d'error\n" +"Aquesta eina utilitza xmllint per a validar el perfil d'acord amb el DTD i\n" +"comprova si hi manquen dades. És possible que estigui previst que en manquin; llavors els missatges d'error\n" "es poden ignorar, per exemple, quan es creen classes.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:22 @@ -1900,24 +1833,19 @@ "The imported data is loaded into the configuration management system \n" "to add more configuration options available with SUSE.\n" msgstr "" -"Per a importar un fitxer Kickstart, introduïu el camí del fitxer de " -"configuració.\n" +"Per a importar un fitxer Kickstart, introduïu el camí del fitxer de configuració.\n" "Les dades importades es carregaran al sistema de gestió de la configuració \n" -"per a afegir opcions de configuració addicionals de les que disposa el SUSE." -"\n" +"per a afegir opcions de configuració addicionals de les que disposa el SUSE.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:31 msgid "" "This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.\n" msgstr "" "Per a crear un perfil de referència, aquesta eina llegeix\n" -"informació del sistema. Seleccioneu els recursos del sistema que s'han de " -"llegir\n" -"a més dels recursos estàndard com ara les particions i seleccions de paquets." -"\n" +"informació del sistema. Seleccioneu els recursos del sistema que s'han de llegir\n" +"a més dels recursos estàndard com ara les particions i seleccions de paquets.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 msgid " Partition your hard disks... " @@ -1925,12 +1853,10 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "\n" msgstr "" -"A la taula de la dreta es mostren les particions que es crearan al " -"sistema de destinació.\n" +"A la taula de la dreta es mostren les particions que es crearan al sistema de destinació.\n" "\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:40 @@ -1968,8 +1894,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" "Si no s'ha definit cap partició i el disc indicat també és el \n" @@ -1989,58 +1914,40 @@ msgstr "Opcions avançades" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." -msgstr "" -"Per defecte, l'AutoYaST2 crea una partició ampliada i afegeix les particions " -"noves com a dispositius lògics. No obstant això, és possible que l'AutoYaST2 " -"creï una partició determinada com a partició primària o ampliada. A més, es " -"pot definir la mida d'una partició en sectors en comptes de fer-ho en Mbytes." +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "Per defecte, l'AutoYaST2 crea una partició ampliada i afegeix les particions noves com a dispositius lògics. No obstant això, és possible que l'AutoYaST2 creï una partició determinada com a partició primària o ampliada. A més, es pot definir la mida d'una partició en sectors en comptes de fer-ho en Mbytes." #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "These options and other advanced options cannot be configured using this\n" "interface. Instead, add them manually to the control file.\n" msgstr "" -"Aquestes opcions, igual que altres opcions avançades, no es poden " -"configurar\n" -"des d'aquesta interfície. En comptes d'això, s'han d'afegir al fitxer de " -"control de forma manual.\n" +"Aquestes opcions, igual que altres opcions avançades, no es poden configurar\n" +"des d'aquesta interfície. En comptes d'això, s'han d'afegir al fitxer de control de forma manual.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Per a la configuració d'LVM i RAID, consulteu la documentació i afegiu la " -"configuració\n" -"a un fitxer de control existent. Per a preparar-se, només podeu crear " -"particions LVM i RAID\n" +"Per a la configuració d'LVM i RAID, consulteu la documentació i afegiu la configuració\n" +"a un fitxer de control existent. Per a preparar-se, només podeu crear particions LVM i RAID\n" "sense formatar.\n" "\n" #. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:122 msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol HTTP(S). Server returned code %2." -msgstr "" -"No es pot trobar l'URL '%1' mitjançant el protocol HTTP(S). El servidor ha " -"retornat el codi %2." +msgstr "No es pot trobar l'URL '%1' mitjançant el protocol HTTP(S). El servidor ha retornat el codi %2." #. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:142 msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol FTP. Server returned code %2." -msgstr "" -"No es pot trobar l'URL '%1' mitjançant el protocol FTP. El servidor ha " -"retornat el codi %2." +msgstr "No es pot trobar l'URL '%1' mitjançant el protocol FTP. El servidor ha retornat el codi %2." #. FIXME: I have doubts this will ever work. Too early. #: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:158 @@ -2120,23 +2027,20 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "<h3>Scripts anteriors a la instal·lació</h3>\n" -"Podeu afegir ordres per a executar al sistema abans que comenci la " -"instal·lació. \n" +"Podeu afegir ordres per a executar al sistema abans que comenci la instal·lació. \n" #. help 2/6 #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:72 msgid "" "\n" "<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" -"You can also add commands to execute on the system after the " -"installation\n" +"You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" "is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" "" msgstr "" "\n" "<h3>Scripts posteriors a la instal·lació</h3>\n" -"A més, podeu afegir-hi ordres per a executar al sistema una vegada ha " -"finalitzat\n" +"A més, podeu afegir-hi ordres per a executar al sistema una vegada ha finalitzat\n" "la instal·lació. Aquests scripts s'executen fora de l'entorn chroot.\n" "" @@ -2148,8 +2052,7 @@ "For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the chroot scripts options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the " -"installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" @@ -2157,10 +2060,8 @@ "<H3>Scripts Chroot</H3>\n" "Per a executar els scripts posteriors a la instal·lació a l'entorn\n" "chroot, seleccioneu les opcions de l'script chroot. Aquests scripts\n" -"s'executen abans que el sistema arranqui per primer cop. Per defecte, els " -"scripts \n" -"chroot s'executen al sistema d'instal·lació. Per a accedir als fitxers del " -"sistema \n" +"s'executen abans que el sistema arranqui per primer cop. Per defecte, els scripts \n" +"chroot s'executen al sistema d'instal·lació. Per a accedir als fitxers del sistema \n" "instal·lat, utilitzeu sempre el punt de muntatge \"/mnt\" als scripts.\n" "\n" @@ -2169,15 +2070,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" "It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted" -"\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "Podeu executar els scripts chroot en una fase posterior quan\n" -"el carregador de l'arrencada s'ha configurat mitjançant l'etiqueta booleana " -"especial \"chrooted\".\n" +"el carregador de l'arrencada s'ha configurat mitjançant l'etiqueta booleana especial \"chrooted\".\n" "Aquesta operació permet executar els scripts al sistema instal·lat. \n" "\n" @@ -2207,15 +2106,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl " -"or \n" +"Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use Perl or \n" "Python for preinstallation scripts.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Intèrpret:</H3>\n" -"Els scripts anteriors a la instal·lació només poden ser scripts " -"d'intèrpret d'ordres. No utilitzeu Perl ni \n" +"Els scripts anteriors a la instal·lació només poden ser scripts d'intèrpret d'ordres. No utilitzeu Perl ni \n" " Python per als scripts anteriors a la instal·lació.\n" "\n" @@ -2225,44 +2122,32 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the Network option for the postscript, too.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Accés a la xarxa:</H3>\n" -"Durant l'execució d'scripts posteriors a la instal·lació, la xarxa " -"s'inhabilita i\n" -"requereix la inicialització dels scripts per a fer que la xarxa estigui " -"disponible. Una\n" -"alternativa per als scripts posteriors a la instal·lació amb xarxa és " -"utilitzar scripts d'inici, que\n" -"garanteixen un sistema completament configurat en executar les seqüències. " -"Si heu realitzat una instal·lació\n" -"en una xarxa, podeu utilitzar l'opció Xarxa per a l'script posterior " -"a la instal·lació.\n" +"Durant l'execució d'scripts posteriors a la instal·lació, la xarxa s'inhabilita i\n" +"requereix la inicialització dels scripts per a fer que la xarxa estigui disponible. Una\n" +"alternativa per als scripts posteriors a la instal·lació amb xarxa és utilitzar scripts d'inici, que\n" +"garanteixen un sistema completament configurat en executar les seqüències. Si heu realitzat una instal·lació\n" +"en una xarxa, podeu utilitzar l'opció Xarxa per a l'script posterior a la instal·lació.\n" "\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:146 msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up " -"box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.\n" msgstr "" "\n" "<H3>Retroacció i depuració:</H3>\n" -"Tots els scripts, excepte els d'inici, poden mostrar STDOUT+STDERR en un " -"quadre emergent com a retroacció.\n" -"Si activeu la depuració, obtindreu més sortides al diàleg de retroacció que " -"us poden ajudar\n" +"Tots els scripts, excepte els d'inici, poden mostrar STDOUT+STDERR en un quadre emergent com a retroacció.\n" +"Si activeu la depuració, obtindreu més sortides al diàleg de retroacció que us poden ajudar\n" "a depurar l'script.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:155 @@ -2350,15 +2235,12 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the " -"installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Si afegiu seqüències al procés d'instal·lació automàtic, podeu personalitzar " -"la instal·lació\n" -"en funció de les necessitats i intervenir en diferents etapes de la " -"instal·lació.\n" +"Si afegiu seqüències al procés d'instal·lació automàtic, podeu personalitzar la instal·lació\n" +"en funció de les necessitats i intervenir en diferents etapes de la instal·lació.\n" #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "User Script Management" @@ -2378,21 +2260,15 @@ #. @return [void] #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:453 msgid "Parsing the rules file failed. XML parser reports:\n" -msgstr "" -"S'ha produït un error a l'anàlisi del fitxer de regles. L'analitzador XML " -"notifica:\n" +msgstr "S'ha produït un error a l'anàlisi del fitxer de regles. L'analitzador XML notifica:\n" #. Merge Rule results #. @param [String] result_profile the resulting control file path #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:914 src/modules/Profile.rb:725 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" -msgstr "" -"L'analitzador XML ha informat d'un error en analitzar el perfil de " -"l'autoyast. El missatge d'error és:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" +msgstr "L'analitzador XML ha informat d'un error en analitzar el perfil de l'autoyast. El missatge d'error és:\n" #. backdoor for merging problems. #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:1059 @@ -2405,10 +2281,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "No s'han pogut recuperar les classes definides en funció de l'usuari.\n" -"Comproveu que totes les classes estan definides correctament i són " -"disponibles per a aquest sistema\n" -"a través de la xarxa o localment. No és possible instal·lar el sistema amb " -"el fitxer de control original\n" +"Comproveu que totes les classes estan definides correctament i són disponibles per a aquest sistema\n" +"a través de la xarxa o localment. No és possible instal·lar el sistema amb el fitxer de control original\n" "sense utilitzar les classes.\n" #. The line above needs to be fixed when we have more attributes @@ -2473,18 +2347,14 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 msgid "" -"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "\n" msgstr "" -"La majoria del mòduls utilitzats per a crear la configuració són idèntics " -"als disponibles\n" -"mitjançant el Centre de control del YaST2. En comptes de configurar el " -"sistema, es recullen les dades\n" +"La majoria del mòduls utilitzats per a crear la configuració són idèntics als disponibles\n" +"mitjançant el Centre de control del YaST2. En comptes de configurar el sistema, es recullen les dades\n" "introduïdes i s'exporten al fitxer de control que es pot utilitzar per\n" "a instal·lar un altre sistema mitjançant l'AutoYaST.\n" "\n" @@ -2492,13 +2362,11 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:459 msgid "" "In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.\n" msgstr "" "A més dels mòduls existents i coneguts,\n" -"s'han creat interfícies noves per a les configuracions especials i " -"complexes, incloses\n" +"s'han creat interfícies noves per a les configuracions especials i complexes, incloses\n" "les particions, les opcions generals i el programari.\n" #. Construct node name for display in tree. @@ -2599,17 +2467,13 @@ #. look for VGs to reuse #: src/modules/AutoinstLVM.rb:111 msgid "Cannot reuse volume group %1. The volume group does not exist." -msgstr "" -"No es pot tornar a utilitzar el grup de volums %1. El grup de volums no " -"existeix." +msgstr "No es pot tornar a utilitzar el grup de volums %1. El grup de volums no existeix." #. if no feeder (PV) was found for current volume group #. the next instructions taints result #: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:282 msgid "Volume group '%1' must have at least one physical volume. Provide one." -msgstr "" -"El grup de volums '%1' ha de tenir com a mínim un volum físic. Si us plau, " -"proporcioneu-ne un." +msgstr "El grup de volums '%1' ha de tenir com a mínim un volum físic. Si us plau, proporcioneu-ne un." #. PUBLIC INTERFACE #. INTER FACE TO CONF TREE @@ -2691,24 +2555,16 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:363 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" -msgstr "" -"La creació de la imatge ha fallat mentre s'instal·laven els patrons. " -"Comproveu /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "La creació de la imatge ha fallat mentre s'instal·laven els patrons. Comproveu /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:371 msgid "Creating Image - installing packages" msgstr "Creant la imatge - instal·lant els paquets" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la creació de la imatge mentre s'instal·laven els paquets. Reviseu " -"el fitxer de registre /tmp/ay_image." +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "Ha fallat la creació de la imatge mentre s'instal·laven els paquets. Reviseu el fitxer de registre /tmp/ay_image." #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:392 @@ -2720,18 +2576,14 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:421 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be " -"changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" "Ara podeu fer canvis a la imatge a %1/\n" -"Si premeu el botó d'acord, la imatge serà comprimida i ja no podrá tornar a " -"ser modificada." +"Si premeu el botó d'acord, la imatge serà comprimida i ja no podrá tornar a ser modificada." #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:435 msgid "Image compressing failed in '%1'. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la compressió de la imatge a '%1'. Reviseu el fitxer de registre /" -"tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "Ha fallat la compressió de la imatge a '%1'. Reviseu el fitxer de registre /tmp/ay_image.log" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:442 msgid "Image created successfully" @@ -2744,8 +2596,7 @@ "You can create that file with 'ls -F > directory.yast' if it's missing." msgstr "" "no s'ha pogut obtenir el fitxer directory.yast a `%1`.\n" -"Podeu crear aquest fitxer amb la comanda 'ls -F > directory.yast' si no " -"existeix." +"Podeu crear aquest fitxer amb la comanda 'ls -F > directory.yast' si no existeix." #. don't copy subdirs. They have to be mentioned explicit. Copy only files from that dir. #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:512 @@ -2773,12 +2624,10 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:616 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" -"Podeu fer els canvis a la imatge ISO ara mateix a %1, com afegir-hi un " -"fitxer XML d'autoyast completament diferent.\n" +"Podeu fer els canvis a la imatge ISO ara mateix a %1, com afegir-hi un fitxer XML d'autoyast completament diferent.\n" "Si premeu el botó d'acord, es crearà la imatge ISO." #. create the actual ISO file @@ -2820,21 +2669,13 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:907 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." -msgstr "" -"No s'ha pogut executar el sistema de resolució del paquet. Comproveu la " -"secció del programari al perfil de l'autoyast." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." +msgstr "No s'ha pogut executar el sistema de resolució del paquet. Comproveu la secció del programari al perfil de l'autoyast." #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" -msgstr "" -"El pla de particions configurat en el vostre perfil XML no es pot encabir al " -"disc dur. Falten %1 MB" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" +msgstr "El pla de particions configurat en el vostre perfil XML no es pot encabir al disc dur. Falten %1 MB" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 msgid "No specific device configured" @@ -2859,8 +2700,7 @@ "which root partition should be used. Automatic installation not possible.\n" msgstr "" "S'han trobat diverses particions arrel. No s'ha configurat\n" -"la partició que s'ha d'utilitzar, per la qual cosa no és possible dur a " -"terme una instal·lació automàtica.\n" +"la partició que s'ha d'utilitzar, per la qual cosa no és possible dur a terme una instal·lació automàtica.\n" #. return list of available devices #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:1121 @@ -2878,9 +2718,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #: src/modules/Profile.rb:441 msgid "Encrypted AutoYaST profile. Enter the password twice." -msgstr "" -"Perfil de l'AutoYaST encriptat. Si us plau, escriviu la contrasenya dues " -"vegades." +msgstr "Perfil de l'AutoYaST encriptat. Si us plau, escriviu la contrasenya dues vegades." #. Save sections of current profile to separate files #. @@ -2895,8 +2733,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] #: src/modules/Profile.rb:682 src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:190 msgid "Encrypted AutoYaST profile. Enter the correct password." -msgstr "" -"Perfil encriptat de l'AutoYaST. Si us plau, escriviu la contrasenya correcta." +msgstr "Perfil encriptat de l'AutoYaST. Si us plau, escriviu la contrasenya correcta." #. need to call this to force Storage stuff to initialize just now #: src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:156 @@ -2913,8 +2750,7 @@ msgstr "D'&acord" #~ msgid "The resulting autoyast profile can be found in /root/autoinst.xml." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El perfil de l'autoyast resultant es pot trobar a /root/autoinst.xml." +#~ msgstr "El perfil de l'autoyast resultant es pot trobar a /root/autoinst.xml." #~ msgid "Configure runlevel" #~ msgstr "Configura el nivell d'execució" @@ -2937,28 +2773,18 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" #~ "Enter the partition information according to your\n" -#~ "needs. To reuse an existing partition, enter the partition number of the " -#~ "existing partition to reuse (counting starts with partition number 1) and " -#~ "no size.\n" +#~ "needs. To reuse an existing partition, enter the partition number of the existing partition to reuse (counting starts with partition number 1) and no size.\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "For partitions that are part of a volume group (not the logical " -#~ "partitions inside a volume group), set the partition ID to 0x8e then " -#~ "choose the volume group. The volume group must already be set up with " -#~ "AutoYaST.\n" +#~ "For partitions that are part of a volume group (not the logical partitions inside a volume group), set the partition ID to 0x8e then choose the volume group. The volume group must already be set up with AutoYaST.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "For more information, refer to the online documentation.\n" #~ "\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" #~ "Introduïu la informació de la partició segons les vostres\n" -#~ "necessitats. Si voleu reutilitzar una partició existent, introduïu el " -#~ "número de la partició de la partició existent que voleu reutilitzar (el " -#~ "recompte comença amb la partició número 1) i no introduïu cap mida.\n" +#~ "necessitats. Si voleu reutilitzar una partició existent, introduïu el número de la partició de la partició existent que voleu reutilitzar (el recompte comença amb la partició número 1) i no introduïu cap mida.\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "Pel que fa a les particions que formen part d'un grup de volum (no les " -#~ "particions lògiques dins d'un grup de volum), establiu l'identificador de " -#~ "la partició a 0x8e i, tot seguit, seleccioneu el grup de volum. El grup " -#~ "de volum ha d'haver estat configurat prèviament amb l'AutoYaST.\n" +#~ "Pel que fa a les particions que formen part d'un grup de volum (no les particions lògiques dins d'un grup de volum), establiu l'identificador de la partició a 0x8e i, tot seguit, seleccioneu el grup de volum. El grup de volum ha d'haver estat configurat prèviament amb l'AutoYaST.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Per obtenir-ne més informació, consulteu la documentació en línia.\n" #~ "\n" @@ -3012,23 +2838,17 @@ #~ msgstr "Introduïu la mida de la partició o el número d'una partició." #~ msgid "To reuse a partition, the partition number is required." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Per a reutilitzar una partició es necessita el número de la partició." +#~ msgstr "Per a reutilitzar una partició es necessita el número de la partició." #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "Create and edit your volume groups here. After that, assign physical " -#~ "partitions to this volume group in the partition dialog of a physical " -#~ "hard disk. Set the partition ID to 0x8e for those partitions.\n" +#~ "Create and edit your volume groups here. After that, assign physical partitions to this volume group in the partition dialog of a physical hard disk. Set the partition ID to 0x8e for those partitions.\n" #~ "\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "En aquest apartat podeu crear i editar els grups de volum. A continuació, " -#~ "assigneu particions físiques al grup de volum del diàleg de la partició " -#~ "d'un disc dur físic. Establiu l'identificador de la partició a 0x8e en " -#~ "aquelles particions.\n" +#~ "En aquest apartat podeu crear i editar els grups de volum. A continuació, assigneu particions físiques al grup de volum del diàleg de la partició d'un disc dur físic. Establiu l'identificador de la partició a 0x8e en aquelles particions.\n" #~ "\n" #~ msgid "Configure Volume Groups" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/bootloader.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/bootloader.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/bootloader.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -31,13 +31,11 @@ #. command line help text for delete action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:58 -#| msgid "&Detailed Global Options" msgid "Delete a global option" msgstr "Suprimiu una opció global" #. command line help text for set action #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:65 -#| msgid "&Detailed Global Options" msgid "Set a global option" msgstr "Establiu una opció global" @@ -68,7 +66,6 @@ #. command line, %1 is the value of bootloader option #: src/clients/bootloader.rb:182 -#| msgid "Value: %1" msgid "Value: %s" msgstr "Valor: %s" @@ -106,20 +103,13 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:115 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." -msgstr "" -"No s'ha seleccionat cap carregador d'arrencada per instal·lar. És possible " -"que el sistema no pugui arrencar." +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." +msgstr "No s'ha seleccionat cap carregador d'arrencada per instal·lar. És possible que el sistema no pugui arrencar." #. error in the proposal #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:125 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" -msgstr "" -"No es pot instal·lar correctament el carregador d'arrencada a causa de les " -"particions" +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgstr "No es pot instal·lar correctament el carregador d'arrencada a causa de les particions" #. proposal part - bootloader label #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:224 @@ -152,18 +142,13 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition \n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR." msgstr "" -"Defineix l'indicador actiu a la taula de particions per a la partició " -"de l'arrencada \n" -"Seleccioneu aquesta opció per a activar la partició que conté el carregador " -"d'arrencada. El codi genèric MBR arrencarà\n" -"la partició activa. Les BIOS antigues necessiten una partició activa fins i " -"tot\n" +"Defineix l'indicador actiu a la taula de particions per a la partició de l'arrencada \n" +"Seleccioneu aquesta opció per a activar la partició que conté el carregador d'arrencada. El codi genèric MBR arrencarà\n" +"la partició activa. Les BIOS antigues necessiten una partició activa fins i tot\n" "si el carregador d'arrencada està instal·lat a l'MBR." #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -184,12 +169,10 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "Timeout in Seconds \n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.\n" msgstr "" "Temps d'espera en segons \n" -"Especifica el temps que s'esperarà el carregador d'arrencada abans que es " -"carregui el nucli predeterminat.\n" +"Especifica el temps que s'esperarà el carregador d'arrencada abans que es carregui el nucli predeterminat.\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 msgid "" @@ -201,155 +184,110 @@ "using the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" " Si premeu Defineix com a predeterminat, la secció\n" -"seleccionada esdevindrà l'opció predeterminada. En arrencar, el carregador " -"d'arrencada mostrarà \n" -"un menú d'arrencada i s'esperarà que l'usuari seleccioni el nucli o un " -"altre\n" -"sistema operatiu per arrencar. Si no es prem cap tecla abans que s'acabi el " -"temps d'espera, s'iniciarà\n" -"el nucli o sistema operatiu predeterminat. Podeu canviar l'ordre de les " -"seccions en\n" -"el menú del carregador d'arrencada amb els botons Amunt i Avall</" -"b>.\n" +"seleccionada esdevindrà l'opció predeterminada. En arrencar, el carregador d'arrencada mostrarà \n" +"un menú d'arrencada i s'esperarà que l'usuari seleccioni el nucli o un altre\n" +"sistema operatiu per arrencar. Si no es prem cap tecla abans que s'acabi el temps d'espera, s'iniciarà\n" +"el nucli o sistema operatiu predeterminat. Podeu canviar l'ordre de les seccions en\n" +"el menú del carregador d'arrencada amb els botons Amunt i Avall.\n" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"Write generic Boot Code to MBR replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition)." msgstr "" -"<big>Escriu el codi d'arrencada genèric a l'MBR per reemplaçar el " -"registre d'arrencada mestre del disc pel codi genèric (codi independent del " -"sistema operatiu que\n" +"<big>Escriu el codi d'arrencada genèric a l'MBR per reemplaçar el registre d'arrencada mestre del disc pel codi genèric (codi independent del sistema operatiu que\n" "arrenca la partició activa)." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"Boot from Boot Partition is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "Boot from Root Partition." msgstr "" -"Arrenca des de la partició d'arrencada és una de les opcions " -"recomanades, l'altra és\n" +"Arrenca des de la partició d'arrencada és una de les opcions recomanades, l'altra és\n" "Arrenca des de la partició arrel." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have " -"another operating system\n" +"Boot from Master Boot Record is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer" msgstr "" -"L'opció Arrenca des del registre d'arrencada mestre no es recomana " -"si hi ha instal·lat un altre sistema operatiu\n" +"L'opció Arrenca des del registre d'arrencada mestre no es recomana si hi ha instal·lat un altre sistema operatiu\n" "a l'ordinador." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" -"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"Boot from Root Partition is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition and Write generic Boot Code to MBR\n" +"in Boot Loader Options to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section." msgstr "" -"Arrenca des de la partició arrel és l'opció recomanada sempre que " -"hi hagi una partició\n" -"apropiada. Seleccioneu Defineix l'indicador actiu a la taula de " -"particions per a la partició de l'arrencada i Escriu el codi " -"d'arrencada genèric a l'MBR\n" -" a Opcions del carregador d'arrencada per a actualitzar el registre " -"d'arrencada mestre, si cal, o configureu l'altre gestor d'arrencada\n" +"Arrenca des de la partició arrel és l'opció recomanada sempre que hi hagi una partició\n" +"apropiada. Seleccioneu Defineix l'indicador actiu a la taula de particions per a la partició de l'arrencada i Escriu el codi d'arrencada genèric a l'MBR\n" +" a Opcions del carregador d'arrencada per a actualitzar el registre d'arrencada mestre, si cal, o configureu l'altre gestor d'arrencada\n" "per a iniciar la secció." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root " -"partition is on \n" +"Boot from Extended Partition should be selected if your root partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing" msgstr "" -"Arrenca des de la partició ampliada s'hauria de seleccionar si la " -"partició d'arrel \n" +"Arrenca des de la partició ampliada s'hauria de seleccionar si la partició d'arrel \n" "es troba en una partició lògica i falta la partició /boot" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." -msgstr "" -"L'opció Partició d'arrencada personalitzada us permet seleccionar " -"la partició des d'on arrencar." +msgid "Custom Boot Partition lets you choose a partition to boot from." +msgstr "L'opció Partició d'arrencada personalitzada us permet seleccionar la partició des d'on arrencar." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "MD array is build from 2 disks. Enable Redundancy for MD Array\n" "enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks." msgstr "" -"Taula MD construïda des de 2 discs. Activar la redundància per a la " -"taula MD\n" +"Taula MD construïda des de 2 discs. Activar la redundància per a la taula MD\n" "permet escriure el GRUB a l'MBR dels dos discs." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 -#| msgid "" -#| "Use Serial Console lets you define the parameters to use\n" -#| "for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</" -#| "code>) for details." msgid "" "Use Serial Console lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</" -"code>) for details." +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details." msgstr "" -"Usa la consola de sèrie us permet definir els paràmetres a " -"utilitzar\n" -"per a una consola de sèrie. Consulteu la documentació del grub (<code>info " -"grub2</code>) per a més detalls." +"Usa la consola de sèrie us permet definir els paràmetres a utilitzar\n" +"per a una consola de sèrie. Consulteu la documentació del grub (<code>info grub2</code>) per a més detalls." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "Terminal Definition \n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</" -"code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal." msgstr "" "Definició del terminal \n" -"Defineix el tipus de terminal que voleu utilitzar. Per a un terminal sèrie " -"(p. ex. una consola sèrie),\n" -"heu d'especificar <code>serial</code>. També podeu passar <code>console</" -"code> a\n" -"l'ordre, com <code>serial console</code>. En aquest cas, un terminal en el " -"qual\n" +"Defineix el tipus de terminal que voleu utilitzar. Per a un terminal sèrie (p. ex. una consola sèrie),\n" +"heu d'especificar <code>serial</code>. També podeu passar <code>console</code> a\n" +"l'ordre, com <code>serial console</code>. En aquest cas, un terminal en el qual\n" "premeu qualsevol tecla serà seleccionat com un terminal GRUB." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"Fallback Sections if default Fails contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable." msgstr "" -"L'opció Seccions alternatives per si falla la predeterminada conté " -"una llista de números de secció\n" -"que s'empraran per a arrencar en el cas que la secció predeterminada no " -"arrenqui." +"L'opció Seccions alternatives per si falla la predeterminada conté una llista de números de secció\n" +"que s'empraran per a arrencar en el cas que la secció predeterminada no arrenqui." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 msgid "Selecting Hide Menu on Boot will hide the boot menu." -msgstr "" -"Si se selecciona Oculta el menú a l'arrencada, s'ocultarà el menú " -"d'arrencada." +msgstr "Si se selecciona Oculta el menú a l'arrencada, s'ocultarà el menú d'arrencada." #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "Protect Boot Loader with Password \n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in Retype Password." msgstr "" "Contrasenya per a la interfície del menú del carregador \n" -"Defineix la contrasenya que es necessitarà per accedir al menú d'arrencada. " -"El YaST només accepta la contrasenya si la repetiu\n" +"Defineix la contrasenya que es necessitarà per accedir al menú d'arrencada. El YaST només accepta la contrasenya si la repetiu\n" "a l'opció Repeteix la contrasenya." #. help text 1/5 @@ -373,9 +311,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:100 msgid "Set &active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition" -msgstr "" -"Defineix l'indicador &actiu a la taula de particions per a la partició " -"d'arrencada" +msgstr "Defineix l'indicador &actiu a la taula de particions per a la partició d'arrencada" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:103 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:29 @@ -536,54 +472,28 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "" -"Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." -msgstr "" -"L'opció Paràmetre de línia d'ordre de nucli permet definir els " -"paràmetres addicionals que passaran al nucli." +msgid "Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgstr "L'opció Paràmetre de línia d'ordre de nucli permet definir els paràmetres addicionals que passaran al nucli." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the " -"console to when booting." -msgstr "" -"L'opció Mode Vga defineix el mode VGA per a la consola que " -"ha d'establir el nucli en arrencar." +msgid "Vga Mode defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the console to when booting." +msgstr "L'opció Mode Vga defineix el mode VGA per a la consola que ha d'establir el nucli en arrencar." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel." -msgstr "" -"L'opció Paràmetre a prova de fallades del nucli permet definir els " -"paràmetres a prova de fallades que passaran al nucli." +msgid "Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel." +msgstr "L'opció Paràmetre a prova de fallades del nucli permet definir els paràmetres a prova de fallades que passaran al nucli." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution " -msgstr "" -"Comprova si hi ha altres sistemes operatiusper mitjà de l'os-" -"prober per disposar d'una arrencada múltiple amb altres distribucions " +msgid "Probe Foreign OS by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution " +msgstr "Comprova si hi ha altres sistemes operatiusper mitjà de l'os-prober per disposar d'una arrencada múltiple amb altres distribucions " #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only " -"on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not " -"touch if you are not sure." -msgstr "" -"La Bandera MBR protectora és un paràmetre només per a experts, que " -"només és necessari per a maquinari exòtic. Per a més detalls, vegeu " -"\"Protective MBR\" en discs GPT. No ho toqueu si no n'esteu segurs." +msgid "Protective MBR flag is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure." +msgstr "La Bandera MBR protectora és un paràmetre només per a experts, que només és necessari per a maquinari exòtic. Per a més detalls, vegeu \"Protective MBR\" en discs GPT. No ho toqueu si no n'esteu segurs." #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " -"boot entry name. " -msgstr "" -"El distribuïdor especifica el nom del distribuïdor del nucli usat " -"per crear el nom de l'entrada d'arrencada. " +msgid "Distributor specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. " +msgstr "El distribuïdor especifica el nom del distribuïdor del nucli usat per crear el nom de l'entrada d'arrencada. " #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 msgid "O&ptional Kernel Command Line Parameter" @@ -681,9 +591,7 @@ #. FIXME this should be better handled by exception and show it properly, but it require too big change now #: src/include/bootloader/routines/autoinstall.rb:132 msgid "Unsupported bootloader '%s'. Adapt your AutoYaST profile accordingly." -msgstr "" -"Carregador d'arrencada sense suport '%s'. Adapteu el perfil d'AutoYaST de " -"manera adient." +msgstr "Carregador d'arrencada sense suport '%s'. Adapteu el perfil d'AutoYaST de manera adient." #. file open popup caption #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_options.rb:102 @@ -696,9 +604,7 @@ #. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed #: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:85 src/modules/Bootloader.rb:256 msgid "The boot partition is of type NFS. Bootloader cannot be installed." -msgstr "" -"La partició d'arrencada és de tipus NFS. No es pot instal·lar el carregador " -"d'arrencada." +msgstr "La partició d'arrencada és de tipus NFS. No es pot instal·lar el carregador d'arrencada." #. dialog caption #: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:115 @@ -812,17 +718,13 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "From Other,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the " -"current \n" -"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or " -"reread\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1" msgstr "" "Amb el botó Altres,\n" -"podeu editar manualment els fitxers de configuració del carregador " -"d'arrencada,\n" -"suprimir la configuració actual i proposar-ne una de nova, començar des de " -"zero o\n" +"podeu editar manualment els fitxers de configuració del carregador d'arrencada,\n" +"suprimir la configuració actual i proposar-ne una de nova, començar des de zero o\n" "tornar a llegir la configuració desada al disc. %1" #. help text 1/1 @@ -831,8 +733,7 @@ "To edit boot loader configuration files\n" "manually, click Edit Configuration Files." msgstr "" -"Per editar manualment els fitxers de configuració del carregador " -"d'arrencada,\n" +"Per editar manualment els fitxers de configuració del carregador d'arrencada,\n" "premeu Edita els fitxers de configuració." #. help 1/4 @@ -849,9 +750,7 @@ msgid "" " Press Edit to display the properties of the\n" "selected section." -msgstr "" -"Premeu Edita per a visualitzar les propietats de la secció " -"seleccionada." +msgstr "Premeu Edita per a visualitzar les propietats de la secció seleccionada." #. help 3/4 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:85 @@ -863,17 +762,13 @@ "kernel or OS will be booted. The order of sections in the boot loader\n" "menu can be changed using the Up and Down buttons." msgstr "" -"En prémer Defineix com a opció predeterminada, la secció " -"seleccionada \n" -"es convertirà en l'opció predeterminada. En arrencar, el carregador " -"d'arrencada \n" +"En prémer Defineix com a opció predeterminada, la secció seleccionada \n" +"es convertirà en l'opció predeterminada. En arrencar, el carregador d'arrencada \n" "mostra un menú d'arrencada i espera que l'usuari \n" "seleccioni el nucli o un altre sistema operatiu per arrencar. Si no es\n" "prem cap tecla abans que s'acabi el temps d'espera, s'iniciarà el \n" -"nucli o sistema operatiu predeterminat. Es pot canviar l'ordre de les " -"seccions\n" -"al menú del carregador d'arrencada amb els botons Amunt i Avall</" -"B>." +"nucli o sistema operatiu predeterminat. Es pot canviar l'ordre de les seccions\n" +"al menú del carregador d'arrencada amb els botons Amunt i Avall." #. help 4/4 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:94 @@ -881,8 +776,7 @@ "Press Add to create a new boot loader section\n" "or Delete to delete the selected section." msgstr "" -"Premeu Afegeix per crear una nova secció del carregador " -"d'arrencada,\n" +"Premeu Afegeix per crear una nova secció del carregador d'arrencada,\n" "o bé, Suprimeix per suprimir la secció seleccionada." #. help text for the custom boot manager installation, 1 of 7 @@ -914,19 +808,16 @@ "- In the Boot Sector of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set Activate Boot Loader Partition and\n" -"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details</" -"b>\n" +"Replace MBR with Generic Code in Boot Loader Installation Details\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;." msgstr "" "\n" -"- Al Sector d'arrencada de la partició d'<tt>/arrencada</tt> o <tt>/</" -"tt> (arrel) \n" +"- Al Sector d'arrencada de la partició d'<tt>/arrencada</tt> o <tt>/</tt> (arrel) \n" ". És l'opció recomanada sempre que hi hagi una partició apropiada\n" ". Seleccioneu Activa la partició del carregador d'arrencada i\n" -"Reemplaça l' MBR per codi genèric a Detalls d'instal·lació del " -"carregador d'arrencada\n" +"Reemplaça l' MBR per codi genèric a Detalls d'instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada\n" "per actualitzar el registre d'arrencada mestre,\n" "si cal, o configureu l'altre gestor d'arrencada\n" "per iniciar &product;." @@ -939,8 +830,7 @@ "when selecting this option." msgstr "" "\n" -"- A Altres particions. Tingueu en compte les restriccions del " -"sistema\n" +"- A Altres particions. Tingueu en compte les restriccions del sistema\n" "en seleccionar aquesta opció." #. optional part, only inserted on x86 architectures. 6 of 7 @@ -953,8 +843,7 @@ msgstr "" "Per exemple, la major part dels ordinadors tenen un límit de BIOS\n" "que limita l'arrencada a\n" -"cilindres de disc dur inferiors a 1024. Segons el gestor d'arrencada " -"utilizat,\n" +"cilindres de disc dur inferiors a 1024. Segons el gestor d'arrencada utilizat,\n" "podreu o no arrencar des d'una partició lògica." #. custom bootloader help text, 7 of 7 @@ -965,8 +854,7 @@ "<tt>/dev/sdb</tt>) in the input field." msgstr "" "\n" -"Introduïu el nom del dispositiu de la partició (per exemple, <tt>/dev/hda3</" -"tt> o\n" +"Introduïu el nom del dispositiu de la partició (per exemple, <tt>/dev/hda3</tt> o\n" "<tt>/dev/sdb</tt>) al camp d'entrada." #. help text 1/1 @@ -977,10 +865,8 @@ "mapping), click Boot Loader Installation Details." msgstr "" "Detalls d'instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada \n" -"Per ajustar opcions avançades d'instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada (com " -"ara el mapa\n" -"del dispositiu), feu clic a Detalls d'instal·lació del carregador " -"d'arrencada." +"Per ajustar opcions avançades d'instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada (com ara el mapa\n" +"del dispositiu), feu clic a Detalls d'instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada." #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:189 @@ -990,8 +876,7 @@ "use Boot Loader." msgstr "" "Tipus de carregador de l'arrencada \n" -"Per seleccionar si voleu instal·lar un carregador d'arrencada i quin voleu " -"instal·lar,\n" +"Per seleccionar si voleu instal·lar un carregador d'arrencada i quin voleu instal·lar,\n" "feu servir Carregador d'arrencada." #. help text 1/1 @@ -1002,8 +887,7 @@ "Boot Loader Options." msgstr "" "Opcions del carregador d'arrencada \n" -"Per ajustar opcions del carregador d'arrencada, com ara el temps d'espera, " -"feu clic a\n" +"Per ajustar opcions del carregador d'arrencada, com ara el temps d'espera, feu clic a\n" "Opcions del carregador d'arrencada." #. help text 1/1 @@ -1014,21 +898,18 @@ "Note: The final configuration file may have different indenting." msgstr "" "Configuració manual avançada \n" -"En aquest apartat podeu editar manualment la configuració del carregador " -"d'arrencada.\n" +"En aquest apartat podeu editar manualment la configuració del carregador d'arrencada.\n" "Nota: El fitxer de configuració final pot tenir un sagnat diferent." #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "Section Name \n" -"Use Section Name to specify the boot loader section name. The " -"section\n" +"Use Section Name to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" "name must be unique." msgstr "" "Nom de la secció \n" -"Utilitzeu Nom de la secció per especificar el nom de la secció del " -"carregador d'arrencada. El nom\n" +"Utilitzeu Nom de la secció per especificar el nom de la secció del carregador d'arrencada. El nom\n" "de secció ha de ser únic." #. help text 1/5 @@ -1057,8 +938,7 @@ "Select Image Section to add a new Linux kernel or other image\n" "to load and start." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu Sector d'imatge per afegir un nou nucli Linux o altres " -"imatges\n" +"Seleccioneu Sector d'imatge per afegir un nou nucli Linux o altres imatges\n" "per carregar i iniciar." #. help text 4/5 @@ -1067,8 +947,7 @@ "Select Xen Section to add a new Linux kernel or other image,\n" "but to start it in a Xen environment." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu Secció del Xen per a afegir un nou nucli Linux o una " -"altra imatge,\n" +"Seleccioneu Secció del Xen per a afegir un nou nucli Linux o una altra imatge,\n" "però que s'iniciï en un entorn XEN." #. help text 5/5 @@ -1078,21 +957,18 @@ "loads and starts a boot sector of a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu Un altre sistema (carregador de cadenes) per afegir " -"una secció que \n" +"Seleccioneu Un altre sistema (carregador de cadenes) per afegir una secció que \n" "carrega i inicia un sector d'arrencada d'una partició del disc. Serveix per\n" "a arrencar altres sistemes operatius." #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:257 msgid "" "Select Menu Section to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems." msgstr "" "Seleccioneu Altres sistemes per afegir una secció que\n" -"carregui i iniciï un sector d'arrencada d'una partició del disc. Serveix " -"per\n" +"carregui i iniciï un sector d'arrencada d'una partició del disc. Serveix per\n" "arrencar altres sistemes operatius." #. part of summary, %1 is a list of hard disks device names @@ -1145,8 +1021,7 @@ "Really leave the boot loader configuration without saving?\n" "All changes will be lost.\n" msgstr "" -"Esteu segur que voleu sortir de la configuració del carregador d'arrencada " -"sense desar-la?\n" +"Esteu segur que voleu sortir de la configuració del carregador d'arrencada sense desar-la?\n" "Es perdran tots els canvis.\n" #. error popup @@ -1168,8 +1043,7 @@ #. sentence. #: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:82 msgid "%1Set default boot loader location?\n" -msgstr "" -"%1Voleu establir la ubicació predeterminada del carregador d'arrencada?\n" +msgstr "%1Voleu establir la ubicació predeterminada del carregador d'arrencada?\n" #. error popup #: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:90 @@ -1220,69 +1094,40 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." -msgstr "" -"El carregador d'arrencada no es pot instal·lar correctament a causa de les " -"particions." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgstr "El carregador d'arrencada no es pot instal·lar correctament a causa de les particions." #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a l'MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a l'MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a l'MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr" -"\">install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" +msgstr "No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a l'MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not " -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a la partició /boot (<a href=" -"\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a la partició /boot (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:214 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot" -"\">install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a la partició /boot (<a href=" -"\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" +msgstr "No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a la partició /boot (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not " -"install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a la partició \"/\" (<a href=" -"\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" +msgstr "Instal·la el codi d'arrencada a la partició \"/\" (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:224 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root" -"\">install</a>)" -msgstr "" -"No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada en una partició \"/\" <a href=\"habilita " -"arrencar des de root\">instal·la</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">install</a>)" +msgstr "No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada en una partició \"/\" <a href=\"habilita arrencar des de root\">instal·la</a>)" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:234 -msgid "" -"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " -"are doing please select above location." -msgstr "" -"Avís: No s'ha seleccionat una localització per al carregador stage1. Si no " -"sabeu què feu, seleccioneu la localització anterior." +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgstr "Avís: No s'ha seleccionat una localització per al carregador stage1. Si no sabeu què feu, seleccioneu la localització anterior." #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:242 @@ -1324,43 +1169,27 @@ #. grub2 is sooo cool... #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:101 msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" -msgstr "" -"Combinació de maquinari no suportada entre la plataforma %1 i el carregador " -"%2" +msgstr "Combinació de maquinari no suportada entre la plataforma %1 i el carregador %2" #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:140 -msgid "" -"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk " -"label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub " -"partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install " -"stage 1 to MBR." -msgstr "" -"Arrencar des de l'MBR no funciona conjuntament amb un sistema de fitxers " -"btrfs i una etiqueta de disc GPT sense una partició bios_grub. Per arreglar-" -"ho, creeu una partició bios_grub o useu qualsevol sistema de fitxers ext com " -"a partició d'arrencada o no instal·leu stage 1 a l'MBR." +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "Arrencar des de l'MBR no funciona conjuntament amb un sistema de fitxers btrfs i una etiqueta de disc GPT sense una partició bios_grub. Per arreglar-ho, creeu una partició bios_grub o useu qualsevol sistema de fitxers ext com a partició d'arrencada o no instal·leu stage 1 a l'MBR." #. check if boot device is on raid0 #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:168 msgid "The boot device is on raid type: %1. System will not boot." -msgstr "" -"El dispositiu d'arrencada és en tipus raid: %1. El sistema no arrencarà." +msgstr "El dispositiu d'arrencada és en tipus raid: %1. El sistema no arrencarà." #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:188 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" -msgstr "" -"El dispositiu d'arrencada és en programari RAID1. Seleccioneu una altra " -"ubicació per al carregador, per exemple, l'MBR." +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" +msgstr "El dispositiu d'arrencada és en programari RAID1. Seleccioneu una altra ubicació per al carregador, per exemple, l'MBR." #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:244 msgid "Missing ext partition for booting. Cannot install boot code." -msgstr "" -"Falta la partició ext per arrencar. No es pot instal·lar el codi d'arrencada." +msgstr "Falta la partició ext per arrencar. No es pot instal·lar el codi d'arrencada." #. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) #: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:159 @@ -1448,9 +1277,7 @@ #~ msgstr "No s'ha trobat la secció %1" #~ msgid "Add option is available only in commandline interactive mode" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Afegir opcions només està disponible en el mode interactiu de la línia " -#~ "d'ordres" +#~ msgstr "Afegir opcions només està disponible en el mode interactiu de la línia d'ordres" #~ msgid "Section name must be specified." #~ msgstr "Cal especificar el nom de la sessió." @@ -1465,25 +1292,17 @@ #~ msgstr "Menú d'arrencada" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Use Trusted Grub means install trusted grub and use it. Option " -#~ "Graphical Menu File will be ignored.\n" +#~ "Use Trusted Grub means install trusted grub and use it. Option Graphical Menu File will be ignored.\n" #~ "It is recommended to install grub to MBR" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Usa el Grub de confiança significa instal·lar el 'trusted grub' " -#~ "i usar-lo. L'opció Fitxer de Menú Gràfic s'ignorarà.\n" +#~ "Usa el Grub de confiança significa instal·lar el 'trusted grub' i usar-lo. L'opció Fitxer de Menú Gràfic s'ignorarà.\n" #~ "És recomanable instal·lar el Grub a l'MBR" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Graphical Menu File defines the file to use for the graphical " -#~ "boot menu." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Fitxer del menú gràfic defineix el fitxer que " -#~ "s'utilitzarà per al menú gràfic d'arrencada." +#~ msgid "Graphical Menu File defines the file to use for the graphical boot menu." +#~ msgstr "L'opció Fitxer del menú gràfic defineix el fitxer que s'utilitzarà per al menú gràfic d'arrencada." #~ msgid "Enable Acoustic Signals turn on/off acoustic signals." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Habilita senyals acústics Activa o desactiva els senyals " -#~ "acústics" +#~ msgstr "Habilita senyals acústics Activa o desactiva els senyals acústics" #~ msgid "Use &Trusted Grub" #~ msgstr "Usa Grub &fiable" @@ -1607,8 +1426,7 @@ #~ msgstr "Rei&nicia la configuració desada abans de la conversió" #~ msgid "Select the boot loader before editing sections." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu el carregador de l'arrencada abans d'editar les seccions" +#~ msgstr "Seleccioneu el carregador de l'arrencada abans d'editar les seccions" #~ msgid "&Section Management" #~ msgstr "&Gestió de la secció" @@ -1632,9 +1450,7 @@ #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" #~ "- A un disquet.\n" -#~ "Utilitzeu aquesta opció per evitar el risc d'interferència amb un " -#~ "mecanisme d'arrencada ja existent. Habiliteu l'arrencada des del disquet " -#~ "al\n" +#~ "Utilitzeu aquesta opció per evitar el risc d'interferència amb un mecanisme d'arrencada ja existent. Habiliteu l'arrencada des del disquet al\n" #~ "BIOS de la màquina per poder-la fer servir." #~ msgid "The %1 boot sector has been written to the floppy disk." @@ -1658,8 +1474,7 @@ #~ "configuration files manually. Check the boot loader settings.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "S'han canviat els paràmetres del disc i heu editat els fitxers\n" -#~ "de configuració del carregador de forma manual. Comproveu els paràmetres " -#~ "del carregador de l'arrencada.\n" +#~ "de configuració del carregador de forma manual. Comproveu els paràmetres del carregador de l'arrencada.\n" #~ msgid "Do Not Create a File System" #~ msgstr "No creïs un sistema de fitxers" @@ -1697,91 +1512,50 @@ #~ msgid "Image Section" #~ msgstr "Secció d'imatge" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Kernel Image defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name " -#~ "directly or choose via Browse." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Imatge del nucli defineix el nucli que s'arrencarà. " -#~ "Escriviu-ne el nom directament o seleccioneu-lo mitjançant l'opció " -#~ "Navega." +#~ msgid "Kernel Image defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name directly or choose via Browse." +#~ msgstr "L'opció Imatge del nucli defineix el nucli que s'arrencarà. Escriviu-ne el nom directament o seleccioneu-lo mitjançant l'opció Navega." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Root Device sets the device to pass to the kernel as root " -#~ "device." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Dispositiu arrel estableix el dispositiu que passarà al " -#~ "nucli com a dispositiu arrel." +#~ msgid "Root Device sets the device to pass to the kernel as root device." +#~ msgstr "L'opció Dispositiu arrel estableix el dispositiu que passarà al nucli com a dispositiu arrel." #~ msgid "" -#~ "Initial RAM Disk, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to " -#~ "use. Either enter the path and file name\n" +#~ "Initial RAM Disk, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name\n" #~ "directly or choose by using Browse.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Disc RAM d'inici, si no és buida, permet definir el " -#~ "disc RAM inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom " -#~ "de fitxer\n" +#~ "L'opció Disc RAM d'inici, si no és buida, permet definir el disc RAM inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer\n" #~ "directament o bé escollir-los amb Navega.\n" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Select Chainloader Section if you want to define a section for " -#~ "booting an OS other than Linux." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Secció Chainloader si voleu definir una secció per " -#~ "a arrencar un sistema operatiu diferent del Linux." +#~ msgid "Select Chainloader Section if you want to define a section for booting an OS other than Linux." +#~ msgstr "Seleccioneu Secció Chainloader si voleu definir una secció per a arrencar un sistema operatiu diferent del Linux." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Setting Use Password Protection will require a password to " -#~ "select this section." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Si s'estableix Utilitza la protecció per contrasenya es " -#~ "necessitarà una contrasenya per a seleccionar aquesta secció" +#~ msgid "Setting Use Password Protection will require a password to select this section." +#~ msgstr "Si s'estableix Utilitza la protecció per contrasenya es necessitarà una contrasenya per a seleccionar aquesta secció" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Other System lets you choose among the non-Linux operating " -#~ "systems found on your computer." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Altres sistemes permet seleccionar entre els sistemes " -#~ "operatius diferents al Linux que s'hagin trobat a l'equip." +#~ msgid "Other System lets you choose among the non-Linux operating systems found on your computer." +#~ msgstr "L'opció Altres sistemes permet seleccionar entre els sistemes operatius diferents al Linux que s'hagin trobat a l'equip." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Select Activate this Partition when selected for Boot if your " -#~ "BIOS needs this flag set in order to boot it" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Activa aquesta partició quan se seleccioni per a " -#~ "l'arrencada si el BIOS necessita tenir aquest indicador establert per " -#~ "a arrencar-la" +#~ msgid "Select Activate this Partition when selected for Boot if your BIOS needs this flag set in order to boot it" +#~ msgstr "Seleccioneu Activa aquesta partició quan se seleccioni per a l'arrencada si el BIOS necessita tenir aquest indicador establert per a arrencar-la" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Block Offset for Chainloading lets you specify the list of " -#~ "blocks to boot. In most cases you want\n" -#~ "to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see " -#~ "the grub documentation.\n" +#~ "Block Offset for Chainloading lets you specify the list of blocks to boot. In most cases you want\n" +#~ "to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see the grub documentation.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Bloca el desplaçament per a la càrrega de cadenes " -#~ "permet especificar la llista de blocats que s'arrencaran. En la majoria " -#~ "dels casos, voleu\n" -#~ "especificar <code>+1</code> aquí. Per a obtenir informació específica de " -#~ "la llista de blocats, consulteu la documentació del grub.\n" +#~ "L'opció Bloca el desplaçament per a la càrrega de cadenes permet especificar la llista de blocats que s'arrencaran. En la majoria dels casos, voleu\n" +#~ "especificar <code>+1</code> aquí. Per a obtenir informació específica de la llista de blocats, consulteu la documentació del grub.\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Select Xen Section if you want to add a new Linux kernel or " -#~ "other image \n" +#~ "Select Xen Section if you want to add a new Linux kernel or other image \n" #~ "and start it in a Xen environment.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Secció del Xen si voleu afegir un nucli de Linux o " -#~ "una altra imatge\n" +#~ "Seleccioneu Secció del Xen si voleu afegir un nucli de Linux o una altra imatge\n" #~ "i iniciar-los en un entorn XEN.\n" #~ msgid "Hypervisor specifies the Hypervisor to use." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Hipervisor especifica l'hipervisor que s'utilitzarà." +#~ msgstr "L'opció Hipervisor especifica l'hipervisor que s'utilitzarà." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters lets you define additional " -#~ "parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Els paràmetres addicionals de l'hipervisor Xen permeten definir " -#~ "els paràmetres addicionals que hi passaran." +#~ msgid "Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters lets you define additional parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor." +#~ msgstr "Els paràmetres addicionals de l'hipervisor Xen permeten definir els paràmetres addicionals que hi passaran." #~ msgid "Menu Section" #~ msgstr "Secció del menú" @@ -1789,27 +1563,17 @@ #~ msgid "Partition of Menu File" #~ msgstr "Partició del fitxer de menú" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Menu Description File specifies path on root device from which " -#~ "is loaded menu file." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Menu Description File specifies path on root device from which " -#~ "is loaded menu file." +#~ msgid "Menu Description File specifies path on root device from which is loaded menu file." +#~ msgstr "Menu Description File specifies path on root device from which is loaded menu file." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map Windows usually " -#~ "need to be on the first disk." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Secció del mapa al primer disc del mapa de dispositius el " -#~ "Windows normalment necessita ser al primer disc." +#~ msgid "Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map Windows usually need to be on the first disk." +#~ msgstr "Secció del mapa al primer disc del mapa de dispositius el Windows normalment necessita ser al primer disc." #~ msgid "" -#~ "Measures includes measured files with PCR. Change table is " -#~ "possible via buttons: Add , \n" +#~ "Measures includes measured files with PCR. Change table is possible via buttons: Add , \n" #~ "Edit and Delete" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Mesures inclou fitxers mesurats amb PCR. Canviar la taula és " -#~ "possible amb els botons: Afegir , \n" +#~ "Mesures inclou fitxers mesurats amb PCR. Canviar la taula és possible amb els botons: Afegir , \n" #~ "Editar and Esborrar" #~ msgid "" @@ -1823,37 +1587,30 @@ #~ "Force root filesystem to be mounted read-only \n" #~ "Usually specified in global section" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Imposa el muntatge del sistema de fitxers arrel de només lectura</" -#~ "b> \n" +#~ "Imposa el muntatge del sistema de fitxers arrel de només lectura \n" #~ "Normalment s'especifica a la secció global" #~ msgid "" #~ "Select Dump Section to add a section that specifies how to\n" -#~ "create a system dump either on a DASD disk partition or tape device or to " -#~ "a\n" +#~ "create a system dump either on a DASD disk partition or tape device or to a\n" #~ "file on a SCSI disk partition." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Secció d'abocament per afegir una secció que " -#~ "especifica com\n" -#~ "crear un abocament del sistema a una partició de disc DASD o dispositiu " -#~ "de cinta, o a un\n" +#~ "Seleccioneu Secció d'abocament per afegir una secció que especifica com\n" +#~ "crear un abocament del sistema a una partició de disc DASD o dispositiu de cinta, o a un\n" #~ "fitxer d'una partició de disc SCSI." #~ msgid "" #~ "Select Menu Section to add a new menu to the configuration.\n" #~ "Menu sections represent a list of tasks which are grouped together.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Secció del menú per afegir un nou menú a la " -#~ "configuració.\n" +#~ "Seleccioneu Secció del menú per afegir un nou menú a la configuració.\n" #~ "Les seccions de menú representen una llista de tasques agrupades.\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Select Enable SELinux to add the needed kernel boot parameters " -#~ "to enable the SELinux security framework. \n" +#~ "Select Enable SELinux to add the needed kernel boot parameters to enable the SELinux security framework. \n" #~ "Please note that this will also disable AppArmor." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Seleccioneu Activar SELinuxper afegir els paràmetres necessaris " -#~ "de l'arrencada del nucli per activar el marc de seguretat de SELinux. \n" +#~ "Seleccioneu Activar SELinuxper afegir els paràmetres necessaris de l'arrencada del nucli per activar el marc de seguretat de SELinux. \n" #~ "Si us plau, tingueu en compte que això també desactivarà l'AppArmor." #~ msgid "Image Section" @@ -1993,37 +1750,20 @@ #~ msgid "Propose and &Merge with Existing GRUB Menus" #~ msgstr "Proposa i &fusiona amb els menús existents del GRUB " -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Partition number > 3 is being used for booting with GPT partition table" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El número de la partició > 3 es fa servir per arrencar amb una taula de " -#~ "particions GPT" +#~ msgid "Partition number > 3 is being used for booting with GPT partition table" +#~ msgstr "El número de la partició > 3 es fa servir per arrencar amb una taula de particions GPT" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the " -#~ "device map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot " -#~ "Loader Installation Details\"" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El Yast no ha pogut determinar l'ordre exacte d'arrencada dels discs " -#~ "necessari per al mapa de dispositius. Reviseu i ajusteu, si escau, " -#~ "l'ordre d'arrencada dels discs a \"Detalls de la instal·lació del " -#~ "carregador\"." +#~ msgid "YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the device map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" +#~ msgstr "El Yast no ha pogut determinar l'ordre exacte d'arrencada dels discs necessari per al mapa de dispositius. Reviseu i ajusteu, si escau, l'ordre d'arrencada dels discs a \"Detalls de la instal·lació del carregador\"." #~ msgid "Added Kernel Parameters: %1" #~ msgstr "Paràmetres afegits del nucli: %1" #~ msgid "The boot device is on iSCSI disk: %1. System may not boot." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El dispositiu d'arrencada és en un disc iSCSI: %1. El sistema podria no " -#~ "arrencar." +#~ msgstr "El dispositiu d'arrencada és en un disc iSCSI: %1. El sistema podria no arrencar." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "It was not possible to determine the exact order of disks for device map. " -#~ "The order of disks can be changed in \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No ha estat possible determinar l'ordre exacte dels discs per al mapa de " -#~ "dispositius. L'ordre dels discs es pot canviar a \"Boot Loader " -#~ "Installation Details\"" +#~ msgid "It was not possible to determine the exact order of disks for device map. The order of disks can be changed in \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" +#~ msgstr "No ha estat possible determinar l'ordre exacte dels discs per al mapa de dispositius. L'ordre dels discs es pot canviar a \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" #~ msgid "Linux" #~ msgstr "Linux" @@ -2070,61 +1810,37 @@ #~ msgid "_Vendor Diagnostics" #~ msgstr "_Diagnòstic de proveïdor" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The bootloader is installed on a partition that does not lie entirely " -#~ "below %1 GB. The system might not boot if BIOS support only lba24 (result " -#~ "is error 18 during install grub MBR)." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El carregador d'arrencada està instal·lat en una partició que no està " -#~ "completament per sota de %1 GB. Els sistema podria no arrencar si la BIOS " -#~ "només suporta lba24 (el resultat és l'error 18 durant la instal·lació del " -#~ "grub a l'MBR)." +#~ msgid "The bootloader is installed on a partition that does not lie entirely below %1 GB. The system might not boot if BIOS support only lba24 (result is error 18 during install grub MBR)." +#~ msgstr "El carregador d'arrencada està instal·lat en una partició que no està completament per sota de %1 GB. Els sistema podria no arrencar si la BIOS només suporta lba24 (el resultat és l'error 18 durant la instal·lació del grub a l'MBR)." #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing. \n" -#~ "The device map includes more than 8 devices and the boot device is out of " -#~ "range.\n" -#~ "The range is limited by BIOS to the first 8 devices. Adjust BIOS boot " -#~ "order ( or if it already set, then correct order in bootloader " -#~ "configuration)" +#~ "The device map includes more than 8 devices and the boot device is out of range.\n" +#~ "The range is limited by BIOS to the first 8 devices. Adjust BIOS boot order ( or if it already set, then correct order in bootloader configuration)" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador d'arrencada abans de " -#~ "continuar. \n" -#~ "El mapa de dispositiu inclou més de 8 dispositius i el d'arrencada és " -#~ "fora de l'abast.\n" -#~ "L'abast està limitat per la BIOS als primers 8 dispositius. Ajusteu " -#~ "l'ordre d'arrencada de la BIOS (o si ja està establert, corregiu l'ordre " -#~ "a la configuració del carregador)." +#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador d'arrencada abans de continuar. \n" +#~ "El mapa de dispositiu inclou més de 8 dispositius i el d'arrencada és fora de l'abast.\n" +#~ "L'abast està limitat per la BIOS als primers 8 dispositius. Ajusteu l'ordre d'arrencada de la BIOS (o si ja està establert, corregiu l'ordre a la configuració del carregador)." #~ msgid "The LILO is not supported now." #~ msgstr "LILO ja no té suport." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The selected boot path will not be activated for your installation. Your " -#~ "system may not be bootable." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El camí d'arrencada seleccionat no s'activarà per a la instal·lació. És " -#~ "possible que el sistema no pugui arrencar." +#~ msgid "The selected boot path will not be activated for your installation. Your system may not be bootable." +#~ msgstr "El camí d'arrencada seleccionat no s'activarà per a la instal·lació. És possible que el sistema no pugui arrencar." #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing. \n" -#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a " -#~ "small primary Apple HFS partition." +#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a small primary Apple HFS partition." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador d'arrencada abans de " -#~ "continuar. \n" -#~ "En cas que no es pugui fer cap selecció, pot caldre crear una petita " -#~ "partició primària Apple HFS." +#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador d'arrencada abans de continuar. \n" +#~ "En cas que no es pugui fer cap selecció, pot caldre crear una petita partició primària Apple HFS." #~ msgid "" #~ "Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing. \n" -#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a " -#~ "PReP Boot partition." +#~ "In case that no selection can be made it may be necessary to create a PReP Boot partition." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador de l'arrencada abans de " -#~ "continuar. \n" -#~ "En el cas que no feu cap selecció, pot caldre crear una partició PReP " -#~ "Boot." +#~ "Configureu una ubicació vàlida per al carregador de l'arrencada abans de continuar. \n" +#~ "En el cas que no feu cap selecció, pot caldre crear una partició PReP Boot." #~ msgid "Stay &LILO" #~ msgstr "Stay &LILO" @@ -2132,11 +1848,8 @@ #~ msgid "Convert Settings and Install &GRUB" #~ msgstr "Converteix els paràmetres i instal·la el GRUB" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "LILO is not supported. The recommended option is select convert LILO to " -#~ "GRUB" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "LILO no té suport. L'opció recomanada és seleccionar passar de LILO a GRUB" +#~ msgid "LILO is not supported. The recommended option is select convert LILO to GRUB" +#~ msgstr "LILO no té suport. L'opció recomanada és seleccionar passar de LILO a GRUB" #~ msgid "&ELILO Global Options" #~ msgstr "Opcions globals &ELILO" @@ -2166,72 +1879,54 @@ #~ "Set level of verbosity [0-5] Increase verbosity of ELILO\n" #~ "in case of boot problems." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Estableix el nivell d'informació [0-5] Augmenta la " -#~ "informació de l'ELILO\n" +#~ "Estableix el nivell d'informació [0-5] Augmenta la informació de l'ELILO\n" #~ "en cas de tenir problemes en l'arrencada." #~ msgid "" -#~ "Append string for.global options to pass to kernel command line</" -#~ "b> \n" -#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These " -#~ "are\n" +#~ "Append string for.global options to pass to kernel command line \n" +#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These are\n" #~ "used if no 'append' appears in a given section.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Afegir una cadena global d'opcions per a la línia d'ordres del " -#~ "nucli \n" -#~ "Permet definir paràmetres addicionals globals per a passar al nucli. " -#~ "S'utilitzen\n" +#~ "Afegir una cadena global d'opcions per a la línia d'ordres del nucli \n" +#~ "Permet definir paràmetres addicionals globals per a passar al nucli. S'utilitzen\n" #~ "si no apareix cap 'append' en una secció determinada.\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Name of the default initrd file, if not empty, defines the " -#~ "initial\n" -#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "Name of the default initrd file, if not empty, defines the initial\n" +#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "Browse\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer initrd predeterminat, si no és buit, " -#~ "defineix la ramdisk\n" -#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer " -#~ "directament o escollir-los a través de\n" +#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer initrd predeterminat, si no és buit, defineix la ramdisk\n" +#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer directament o escollir-los a través de\n" #~ "Navega\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "Name of default image file, if not empty, defines the image\n" -#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "Browse" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer d'imatge predeterminat, si no és buit, " -#~ "defineix la ramdisk\n" -#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer " -#~ "directament o escollir-los a través de\n" +#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer d'imatge predeterminat, si no és buit, defineix la ramdisk\n" +#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer directament o escollir-los a través de\n" #~ "Navega" #~ msgid "" #~ "Specify user interface for ELILO ('simple' or 'textmenu') \n" #~ "Beware: 'textmenu' has occasionally caused problems on some machines." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú " -#~ "de text') \n" -#~ "Compte: l'opció 'menú de text' ha causat problemes ocasionals en algunes " -#~ "màquines." +#~ "Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú de text') \n" +#~ "Compte: l'opció 'menú de text' ha causat problemes ocasionals en algunes màquines." #~ msgid "" #~ "Prevent EDD30 mode \n" -#~ "By default, if EDD30 is off, ELILO will try and set the variable to " -#~ "TRUE.\n" +#~ "By default, if EDD30 is off, ELILO will try and set the variable to TRUE.\n" #~ "However, some controllers do not support EDD30 and forcing the variable\n" #~ "may cause problems. Therefore, as of elilo-3.2, there is an option to \n" #~ "avoid forcing the variable.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Evita el mode EDD30 \n" -#~ "Per defecte, si l'EDD30 està desactivat, l'ELILO intentarà establir la " -#~ "variable a TRUE.\n" -#~ "No obstant això, alguns controladors no admeten l'EDD30 i, si es força la " -#~ "variable,\n" -#~ " es poden ocasionar problemes. Per tant, a partir de l'elilo-3.2, hi ha " -#~ "una opció per no haver\n" +#~ "Per defecte, si l'EDD30 està desactivat, l'ELILO intentarà establir la variable a TRUE.\n" +#~ "No obstant això, alguns controladors no admeten l'EDD30 i, si es força la variable,\n" +#~ " es poden ocasionar problemes. Per tant, a partir de l'elilo-3.2, hi ha una opció per no haver\n" #~ "de forçar la variable.\n" #~ msgid "" @@ -2241,10 +1936,8 @@ #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Permet l'intent de donar-li una nova ubicació \n" -#~ "En cas que es produeixi un error d'ubicació de la memòria en el punt " -#~ "inicial de càrrega del\n" -#~ "nucli, permet l'intent de donar-li una nova ubicació (assumeix que el " -#~ "nucli es pot canviar d'ubicació).\n" +#~ "En cas que es produeixi un error d'ubicació de la memòria en el punt inicial de càrrega del\n" +#~ "nucli, permet l'intent de donar-li una nova ubicació (assumeix que el nucli es pot canviar d'ubicació).\n" #~ "" #~ msgid "" @@ -2266,8 +1959,7 @@ #~ "Specify kernel chooser to use: \"simple\" or \"textmenu\"" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Estableix la interfície d'usuari per a ELILO\n" -#~ "Especifica el triador del nucli per usar: \"simple\" o \"menú de text\"</" -#~ "p>" +#~ "Especifica el triador del nucli per usar: \"simple\" o \"menú de text\"" #~ msgid "" #~ "Display the Content of a File by Function Keys\n" @@ -2296,10 +1988,8 @@ #~ "A message that is printed on the main screen if supported by\n" #~ "the chooser." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Mostra els missatges a la pantalla principal (Si n'hi ha suport)</" -#~ "b>\n" -#~ "Un missatge que es mostra a la pantalla principal si el triador " -#~ "(chooser)\n" +#~ "Mostra els missatges a la pantalla principal (Si n'hi ha suport)\n" +#~ "Un missatge que es mostra a la pantalla principal si el triador (chooser)\n" #~ "ho permet." #~ msgid "" @@ -2316,12 +2006,8 @@ #~ msgid "Boot Image Location" #~ msgstr "Ubicació de la imatge d'arrencada" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Delay to wait before auto booting in seconds (used if not in interactive " -#~ "mode)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Retard abans de l'arrencada automàtica en segons (s'utilitza si no es " -#~ "troba en mode interactiu)" +#~ msgid "Delay to wait before auto booting in seconds (used if not in interactive mode)" +#~ msgstr "Retard abans de l'arrencada automàtica en segons (s'utilitza si no es troba en mode interactiu)" #~ msgid "Force interactive mode" #~ msgstr "Força el mode interactiu" @@ -2345,9 +2031,7 @@ #~ msgstr "Nom del fitxer d'imatge predeterminat" #~ msgid "Specify user interface for ELILO ('simple' or 'textmenu')" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú de " -#~ "text')" +#~ msgstr "Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú de text')" #~ msgid "Message printed on main screen (if supported)" #~ msgstr "Missatge imprès a la pantalla principal (si s'admet)" @@ -2359,8 +2043,7 @@ #~ msgstr "Evita el mode EDD30" #~ msgid "Specify the filename for a specific FPSWA to load" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Especifiqueu el nom de fitxer si voleu que es carregui un FPSWA concret" +#~ msgstr "Especifiqueu el nom de fitxer si voleu que es carregui un FPSWA concret" #~ msgid "Allow attempt to relocate" #~ msgstr "Permet l'intent de donar-li una nova ubicació" @@ -2387,23 +2070,16 @@ #~ msgstr "Imposeu el muntatge de rootfs de només lectura" #~ msgid "&Set the User Interface for ELILO (\"simple\" or \"textmenu\")" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "&Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú de " -#~ "text')" +#~ msgstr "&Especifica la interfície d'usuari per a l'ELILO ('senzilla' o 'menú de text')" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "&Delay to Wait before Auto Booting in Seconds (Used if not in Interactive " -#~ "Mode)" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "&Retard abans de l'arrencada automàtica en segons (s'utilitza si no es " -#~ "troba en mode interactiu)" +#~ msgid "&Delay to Wait before Auto Booting in Seconds (Used if not in Interactive Mode)" +#~ msgstr "&Retard abans de l'arrencada automàtica en segons (s'utilitza si no es troba en mode interactiu)" #~ msgid "Display the Content of a File by Function &Keys" #~ msgstr "Mostra el contingut d'un fitxer mitjançant les &tecles de funció" #~ msgid "&Specify the Filename for a Specific FPSWA to Load" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "&Especifiqueu el nom de fitxer si voleu que es carregui un FPSWA concret" +#~ msgstr "&Especifiqueu el nom de fitxer si voleu que es carregui un FPSWA concret" #~ msgid "Set Level of &Verbosity [0-5]" #~ msgstr "Establiu el nivell d'informació en &text [0-5] " @@ -2452,41 +2128,30 @@ #~ "caperta tindrà la sort de marcar-ho com a arrencable." #~ msgid "" -#~ "Append String for Global Options to Pass to Kernel Command Line</" -#~ "b> \n" -#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These " -#~ "are\n" +#~ "Append String for Global Options to Pass to Kernel Command Line \n" +#~ "Lets you define additional global parameters to pass to the kernel. These are\n" #~ "used if no 'append' appears in a given section.\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "Afegir una cadena global d'opcions per a la línia d'ordres del " -#~ "nucli \n" -#~ "Permet definir paràmetres addicionals globals per a passar al nucli. " -#~ "S'utilitzen\n" +#~ "Afegir una cadena global d'opcions per a la línia d'ordres del nucli \n" +#~ "Permet definir paràmetres addicionals globals per a passar al nucli. S'utilitzen\n" #~ "si no apareix cap 'append' en una secció determinada.\n" #~ msgid "" -#~ "Name of the Default Initrd File, if not empty, defines the " -#~ "initial\n" -#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "Name of the Default Initrd File, if not empty, defines the initial\n" +#~ "ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "Browse\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer initrd predeterminat, si no és buit, " -#~ "defineix la ramdisk\n" -#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer " -#~ "directament o escollir-los a través de\n" +#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer initrd predeterminat, si no és buit, defineix la ramdisk\n" +#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer directament o escollir-los a través de\n" #~ "Navega\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "Name of Default Image File, if not empty, defines the image\n" -#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by " -#~ "using\n" +#~ "file to use. Either enter the path and file name directly or choose by using\n" #~ "Browse" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer d'imatge predeterminat, si no és buit, " -#~ "defineix la ramdisk\n" -#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer " -#~ "directament o escollir-los a través de\n" +#~ "L'opció Nom del fitxer d'imatge predeterminat, si no és buit, defineix la ramdisk\n" +#~ "inicial que s'ha d'utilitzar. Podeu introduir el camí i el nom de fitxer directament o escollir-los a través de\n" #~ "Navega" #~ msgid "" @@ -2500,61 +2165,48 @@ #~ "Partition for Boot Loader Duplication\n" #~ "specifies other Linux device nodes where the bootinfo should be stored.\n" #~ "If this option is given, the boot partition will be converted to FAT. \n" -#~ "The intend of this option is to write the boot files to all members of a " -#~ "RAID1 or RAID5 system." +#~ "The intend of this option is to write the boot files to all members of a RAID1 or RAID5 system." #~ msgstr "" #~ "Partició per a la duplicació del carregador\n" -#~ "Especifica uns altres nodes de dispositiu Linux on desar la informació " -#~ "d'arrencada.\n" +#~ "Especifica uns altres nodes de dispositiu Linux on desar la informació d'arrencada.\n" #~ "Si es dóna aquesta opció, la partició d'arrencada es convertirà a FAT. \n" -#~ "La intenció d'aquesta opció és escriure els fitxers d'arrencada a tots " -#~ "els membres d'un sistema amb RAID1 o RAID5." +#~ "La intenció d'aquesta opció és escriure els fitxers d'arrencada a tots els membres d'un sistema amb RAID1 o RAID5." #~ msgid "" #~ "Change Boot Device in NV-RAM\n" #~ "this option will tell lilo to update the OpenFirmware \"boot-device\" \n" -#~ "variable with the full OpenFirmware path pointing to the device specified " -#~ "in\n" +#~ "variable with the full OpenFirmware path pointing to the device specified in\n" #~ "\"boot=\". If this option is missing, the system may not boot." #~ msgstr "" #~ "Canviar el dispositiu d'arrencada NV-RAM\n" -#~ "Aquesta opció dirà a Lilo d'actualitzar la variable d'OpenFirmware \"boot-" -#~ "device\" \n" +#~ "Aquesta opció dirà a Lilo d'actualitzar la variable d'OpenFirmware \"boot-device\" \n" #~ "amb el camí total OpenFirmware apuntant al dispositiu especificat a\n" #~ "\"boot=\". Si falta aquesta opció, el sistema podria no arrencar." #~ msgid "" #~ "Do not Use OS-chooser\n" -#~ " will tell lilo to use yaboot as boot file instead of a Forth script " -#~ "named \"os-chooser\". \n" -#~ "The OpenFirmware driver in the nVidia graphics card as shipped with Apple " -#~ "G5 systems \n" +#~ " will tell lilo to use yaboot as boot file instead of a Forth script named \"os-chooser\". \n" +#~ "The OpenFirmware driver in the nVidia graphics card as shipped with Apple G5 systems \n" #~ "will crash if there is no monitor attached." #~ msgstr "" #~ "No fer servir OS-chooser\n" -#~ "dirà a Lilo de fer servir yaboot com a fitxer d'arrencada en lloc del " -#~ "Forth script anomenat \"os-chooser\". \n" -#~ "El controlador OpenFirmware de la targeta gràfica nVidia que conté el " -#~ "sistema Apple G5 \n" +#~ "dirà a Lilo de fer servir yaboot com a fitxer d'arrencada en lloc del Forth script anomenat \"os-chooser\". \n" +#~ "El controlador OpenFirmware de la targeta gràfica nVidia que conté el sistema Apple G5 \n" #~ "s'estavellarà si no té un monitor connectat." #~ msgid "" #~ "Timeout in Seconds for MacOS/Linux\n" -#~ "It contains the timeout between MacOS/Linux in seconds until Linux boots " -#~ "automatically \n" +#~ "It contains the timeout between MacOS/Linux in seconds until Linux boots automatically \n" #~ "if no key is pressed to boot MacOS" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Temps d'espera en segons per a MacOS/Linux\n" -#~ "Conté el temps d'espera en segons entre MacOS i Linux, fins que no " -#~ "s'arrenca automàticament Linux \n" +#~ "Conté el temps d'espera en segons entre MacOS i Linux, fins que no s'arrenca automàticament Linux \n" #~ "si no es prem cap tecla per arrencar MacOS" #~ msgid "" #~ "Always Boot from FAT Partition\n" -#~ "Normally the lilo script would automatically select the boot partition " -#~ "format\n" -#~ "to either be a PReP boot partition or a FAT formatted file system for " -#~ "more\n" +#~ "Normally the lilo script would automatically select the boot partition format\n" +#~ "to either be a PReP boot partition or a FAT formatted file system for more\n" #~ "complex setups. This option forces the lilo script to use\n" #~ "the FAT formatted file system" #~ msgstr "" @@ -2567,14 +2219,11 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "Install Boot Loader Even on Errors\n" #~ "Install the bootloader even if it is unsure whether your firmware is\n" -#~ "buggy so that next boot will fail. This results in an unsupported setup.</" -#~ "p>" +#~ "buggy so that next boot will fail. This results in an unsupported setup." #~ msgstr "" #~ "Instal·la el carregador d'arrencada fins i tot amb errors\n" -#~ "Instal·la el carregador encara que no estigui clar si el microprogramari " -#~ "és\n" -#~ "net d'errors i així la pròxima arrencada podria fallar. Això comporta una " -#~ "configuració no suportada." +#~ "Instal·la el carregador encara que no estigui clar si el microprogramari és\n" +#~ "net d'errors i així la pròxima arrencada podria fallar. Això comporta una configuració no suportada." #~ msgid "PPC Boot Loader Location" #~ msgstr "Ubicació del carregador de l'arrencada PPC" @@ -2607,9 +2256,7 @@ #~ msgstr "No feu servir el selector de SO" #~ msgid "Install Boot Loader Even on Errors" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Instal·la el carregador de l'arrencada fins i tot quan es produeixin " -#~ "errors" +#~ msgstr "Instal·la el carregador de l'arrencada fins i tot quan es produeixin errors" #~ msgid "PReP or FAT Partition" #~ msgstr "Partició PReP o FAT" @@ -2657,9 +2304,7 @@ #~ msgstr "&Arrenca sempre des de la partició FAT" #~ msgid "&Install Boot Loader Even on Errors" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "&Instal·la el carregador de l'arrencada fins i tot quan es produeixin " -#~ "errors" +#~ msgstr "&Instal·la el carregador de l'arrencada fins i tot quan es produeixin errors" #~ msgid "Boot &Folder Path" #~ msgstr "&Camí de la carpeta d'arrencada" @@ -2774,24 +2419,17 @@ #~ "System was not booted via EFI firmware. To boot your\n" #~ "computer, you need to load ELILO via the EFI shell." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "El sistema no s'ha arrencat a través del microprogramari EFI. Per " -#~ "carregar\n" +#~ "El sistema no s'ha arrencat a través del microprogramari EFI. Per carregar\n" #~ "el sistema, heu de carregar ELILO per mitjà de la consola EFI." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root" -#~ "\">do not install</a>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a la partició \"/\" (<a href=" -#~ "\"enable_boot_root\">do not install</a>" +#~ msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">do not install</a>" +#~ msgstr "No instal·lis el codi d'arrencada a la partició \"/\" (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">do not install</a>" #~ msgid "LILO bootloader is not supported" #~ msgstr "El carregador LILO està suportat" #~ msgid "The /boot directory is on an XFS filesystem. System may not boot." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El directori /boot és en un sistema de fitxers XFS. El sistema podria no " -#~ "carregar-se." +#~ msgstr "El directori /boot és en un sistema de fitxers XFS. El sistema podria no carregar-se." #~ msgid "Copying hardware configuration template failed." #~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut copiar la plantilla de configuració del maquinari." @@ -2852,9 +2490,7 @@ #~ "<big>Àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada</big> \n" #~ "Fer servir l'àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada evita\n" #~ "que els fitxers del carregador es desplacin durant\n" -#~ "la defragmentació automàtica del disc. El moviment pot impedir que es " -#~ "carregui\n" +#~ "la defragmentació automàtica del disc. El moviment pot impedir que es carregui\n" #~ "el carregador de l'arrencada.\n" -#~ "Per fer servir l'àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada, definiu " -#~ "Utilitza l'àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada\n" +#~ "Per fer servir l'àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada, definiu Utilitza l'àrea dedicada del carregador de l'arrencada\n" #~ "." Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/cluster.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/cluster.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/cluster.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 11:57+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Catalan\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -97,7 +98,6 @@ msgstr "Adreça IP redundant" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:115 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:499 -#| msgid "Nodes" msgid "Node ID" msgstr "ID del node" @@ -112,7 +112,6 @@ #. BNC#871970, change member address struct #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:191 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:245 -#| msgid "Bind Network Address:" msgid "The Bind Network Address has to be fulfilled" msgstr "S'ha satisfer l'adreça de xarxa de vinculació" @@ -126,7 +125,6 @@ #. BNC#880242, expected_votes must have value when "udp" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:220 -#| msgid "Play the test sound when the card is configured" msgid "The Expected Votes has to be fulfilled when udp is configured" msgstr "S'han de satisfer els vots esperats quan es configura udp" @@ -136,17 +134,12 @@ msgstr "S'ha de satisfer l'adreça de multidifusió" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:236 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:264 -#| msgid "The value for clock skew must be a positive integer." msgid "The Multicast port must be a positive integer" msgstr "El port de multidifusió ha de ser un número enter positiu." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:270 -msgid "" -"Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to " -"passive." -msgstr "" -"Només es pot triar passiu o actiu si s'usa una interfície múltiple. " -"Establert a passiu." +msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." +msgstr "Només es pot triar passiu o actiu si s'usa una interfície múltiple. Establert a passiu." #. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:439 @@ -199,7 +192,6 @@ msgstr "IP" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:499 -#| msgid "Redundant IP Address" msgid "Redundant IP" msgstr "IP redundant" @@ -210,8 +202,7 @@ " Please reconfigure the member list and confirm all other settings." msgstr "" " NOTA: s'ha detectat una configuració antiga de corosync.\n" -"Si us plau, reconfigureu la llista de membres i confirmeu tots els altres " -"paràmetres." +"Si us plau, reconfigureu la llista de membres i confirmeu tots els altres paràmetres." #. Notice, current could be "nil" if the list is empty. #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:690 @@ -231,20 +222,12 @@ msgstr "Fils:" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:740 -msgid "" -"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/" -"authkey." -msgstr "" -"Per a un clúster de nova creació, premeu el botó de sota per generar /etc/" -"corosync/authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." +msgstr "Per a un clúster de nova creació, premeu el botó de sota per generar /etc/corosync/authkey." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:745 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." -msgstr "" -"Per afegir-vos a un clúster existent, si us plau, copieu /etc/corosync/" -"authkey des d'altres nodes manualment." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." +msgstr "Per afegir-vos a un clúster existent, si us plau, copieu /etc/corosync/authkey des d'altres nodes manualment." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:773 msgid "Failed to create /etc/corosync/authkey" @@ -268,12 +251,10 @@ msgstr "S'està arrencant" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:898 -#| msgid "On -- Start pacemaker at booting" msgid "On -- Start pacemaker during boot" msgstr "On -- Inicia el pacemaker durant l'arrencada" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:905 -#| msgid "Off -- Start pacemaker manually only" msgid "Off -- Start pacemaker manually" msgstr "Off -- Inicia el pacemaker manualment" @@ -372,8 +353,7 @@ "Clicking \"Add Suggested Files\" button adds it to sync list." msgstr "" "S'ha generat el fitxer de clau %1.\n" -"Clicant al botó \"Afegeix fitxers suggerits\" l'afegeix a la llista de " -"sincronització." +"Clicant al botó \"Afegeix fitxers suggerits\" l'afegeix a la llista de sincronització." #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1321 msgid "Key generation failed." @@ -382,13 +362,11 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1383 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" -"Conntrackd és un dimoni que ajuda a duplicar estats del tallafoc entre nodes " -"clúster.\n" +"Conntrackd és un dimoni que ajuda a duplicar estats del tallafoc entre nodes clúster.\n" "El YaST pot ajudar a configurar alguns aspectes bàsics de conntrackd.\n" "Heu d'iniciar-lo amb ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." @@ -409,129 +387,57 @@ msgstr "Genera /etc/conntrackd/conntrackd.conf" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1471 -#| msgid "The value for clock skew must be a positive integer." msgid "The Group Number must be a positive integer" msgstr "El número de grup ha de ser un número enter positiu." #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the " -"nodeid field must be specified. \n" -"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but " -"the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address " -"to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address." -" This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 " -"networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must " -"be specified.\n" -"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports. \n" -"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using " -"udpu(Unicast). \n" -"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from " -"the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used. \n" -"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen." -" \n" -"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting " -"quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is " -"present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. </" -"p>\n" -"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using " -"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" +"<big>Bind Network Address</big> This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0. This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified. \n" +"<big>Multicast Address</big> This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address. This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.\n" +"<big>Port</big> This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports. \n" +"<big>Member Address</big> This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). \n" +"<big>Node ID</big> This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used. \n" +"<big>rrp_mode</big> This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen. \n" +"<big>Expected votes</big> Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section. \n" +"<big>Auto Generate Node ID</big> Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically. \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 msgid "" "\n" -"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" -"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 " -"encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this " -"option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces " -"total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles " -"in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks " -"with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible " -"with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A " -"throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option " -"is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame " -"transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is " -"enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this " -"option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. \n" +"<big>Threads</big> This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. \n" +"<big>Enable Security Auth</big> This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot " -"or not\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when " -"Firewall is enabled\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Booting</big> Starting corosync service during boot or not\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Firewall Settings</big> Enable the port when Firewall is enabled\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Arrencada</big> Iniciar el servei corosync durant " -"l'arrencada o no\n" -"\t\t\t<big>Paràmetres del tallafoc</big> Habilita el port quan " -"el tallafoc està habilitat\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Arrencada</big> Iniciar el servei corosync durant l'arrencada o no\n" +"\t\t\t<big>Paràmetres del tallafoc</big> Habilita el port quan el tallafoc està habilitat\n" "\t\t\t" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" -"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.\n" -"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed " -"using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is " -"generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup " -"should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</" -"p>\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync Host</big> The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.\n" +"\t\t<big>Sync File</big> The full absolute filename to be synced.\n" +"\t\t<big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big> Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" "\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network " -"interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for " -"using. You may have to have it pre-configured. \n" -"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" -"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.\n" -"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Dedicated Interface</big> A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. \n" +"\t\t<big>IP</big> The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.\n" +"\t\t<big>Multicast Address</big> The multicast address to be used for syncing.\n" +"\t\t<big>Group Number</big> A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.\n" "\t" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/control.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/control.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/control.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -20,14 +20,6 @@ "X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.4\n" #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:3 -#| msgid "" -#| "\n" -#| "Congratulations!\n" -#| "The installation of openSUSE on your machine is complete.\n" -#| "After clicking Finish, you can log in to the system.\n" -#| "Visit us at %1.\n" -#| "Have a lot of fun! Your openSUSE Development Team\n" -#| "\t " msgid "" "\n" "Congratulations!\n" @@ -130,7 +122,6 @@ #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:36 #: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:63 -#| msgid "Load Linuxrc Network Configuration" msgid "Load linuxrc Network Configuration" msgstr "Carrega la configuració de xarxa de linuxrc" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/crowbar.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/crowbar.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/crowbar.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:96 -#| msgid "&Repository Name" msgid "Repository Name" msgstr "Nom del repositori" @@ -46,31 +45,25 @@ "Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ " -"for SMT server\n" -"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/" -"sles11-sp3-x86_64/ for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ for SMT server\n" +"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-… for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "" msgstr "" -"Aquí podeu editar la ubicació dels vostres Repositoris " -"d'actualització.\n" +"Aquí podeu editar la ubicació dels vostres Repositoris d'actualització.\n" "\n" "Alguns exemples d'URL:\n" "\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ " -"per al servidor SMT\n" -"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/" -"sles11-sp3-x86_64/ per al servidor SUSE Manager.\n" +"<li>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/ per al servidor SMT\n" +"<li>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-… per al servidor SUSE Manager.\n" "\n" "Per a una descripció detallada, consulteu la Guia de desplegament.\n" "" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:122 -#| msgid "Repository URL" msgid "Repository &URL" msgstr "&URL del repositori" @@ -81,40 +74,30 @@ #. table header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:155 -#| msgid "Administrator DN" msgid "Administrator Name" msgstr "Nom de l'administrador" #. help text #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:165 -#| msgid "Enter the password for Crowbar administrator." msgid "Manage user names and passwords for Crowbar administrators." -msgstr "" -"Gestioneu noms d'usuari i contrasenyes per a administradors de Crowbar.</" -"p>" +msgstr "Gestioneu noms d'usuari i contrasenyes per a administradors de Crowbar." #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:201 -#| msgid "&Model" msgid "&Mode" msgstr "&Mode" #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:203 msgid "" -"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy.</" -"p>\n" -"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " -"space-separated list." +"Here, define a Network Mode with relevant Bonding Policy.\n" +"You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list." msgstr "" -"Aquí, definiu un mode de xarxa amb una política de vinculació</" -"b> rellevant.\n" -"També podeu especificar noms d'interfície per a conductes de la xarxa " -"bastió com a llista separada per espais." +"Aquí, definiu un mode de xarxa amb una política de vinculació rellevant.\n" +"També podeu especificar noms d'interfície per a conductes de la xarxa bastió com a llista separada per espais." #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:213 -#| msgid "Bonding Policy" msgid "Bonding &Policy" msgstr "&Política de vinculació" @@ -153,13 +136,11 @@ #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:286 -#| msgid "Use VLAN" msgid "Use &VLAN" msgstr "Usa &VLAN" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:296 -#| msgid "VLAN ID" msgid "VLAN &ID" msgstr "VLAN &ID" @@ -170,13 +151,11 @@ #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:328 -#| msgid "Restoring user preferences..." msgid "Router pre&ference" msgstr "Pre&ferència de l'encaminador" #. textentry label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:338 -#| msgid "Subnet" msgid "&Subnet" msgstr "&Subxarxa" @@ -186,25 +165,21 @@ msgstr "&Màscara de subxarxa" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:383 -#| msgid "Broadcast" msgid "Broa&dcast" msgstr "&Difusió" #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:393 -#| msgid "Add Bridge" msgid "&Add Bridge" msgstr "&Afegeix pont" #. push button label& #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:402 -#| msgid "&Edit Ranges..." msgid "Edit Ran&ges..." msgstr "&Edita les ga&mmes..." #. checkbox label #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:413 -#| msgid "Bond Network" msgid "Add &Bastion Network" msgstr "Afegeix una xarxa de &bastió" @@ -239,9 +214,6 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:636 -#| msgid "" -#| "Configuration name %1 already exists.\n" -#| "Choose a different one." msgid "" "User '%1' already exists.\n" "Choose a different name." @@ -251,9 +223,6 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:781 -#| msgid "" -#| "The netmask '%1' is invalid.\n" -#| "%2" msgid "The interface format '%1' is not valid" msgstr "El format de la interfície '%1' no és vàlid." @@ -297,7 +266,6 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1047 -#| msgid "The address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." msgid "The IP address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." msgstr "L'adreça IP '%1' no forma part de la xarxa '%2'." @@ -336,38 +304,30 @@ #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1373 -#| msgid "User Settings" msgid "&User Settings" msgstr "Paràmetres de l'&usuari" #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1385 -msgid "" -"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." -msgstr "" -"Si no hi ha cap usuari, s'usarà l'usuari 'crowbar' amb la contrasenya per " -"defecte." +msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgstr "Si no hi ha cap usuari, s'usarà l'usuari 'crowbar' amb la contrasenya per defecte." #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1403 -#| msgid "Network Mode" msgid "N&etwork Mode" msgstr "Mod&e de xarxa" #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1411 -#| msgid "Bond Network" msgid "Bastion Network" msgstr "Xarxa de bastió" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1454 -#| msgid "Networks" msgid "Net&works" msgstr "Xar&xes" #. tab header #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1490 -#| msgid "Repositories" msgid "Re&positories" msgstr "Re&positoris" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/geo-cluster.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/geo-cluster.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/geo-cluster.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -65,13 +65,11 @@ #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:689 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:46 #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:140 -#| msgid "GeoCluster Configuration" msgid "Geo Cluster Configuration" msgstr "Configuració de Geo Clúster" #. GeoCluster overview dialog caption #: src/include/geo-cluster/complex.rb:143 -#| msgid "GeoCluster Overview" msgid "Geo Cluster Overview" msgstr "Resum de Geo Clúster" @@ -113,7 +111,6 @@ msgstr "port" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:71 -#| msgid "arbitrator ip" msgid "arbitrator" msgstr "àrbitre" @@ -155,7 +152,6 @@ msgstr "Cancel·la" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:143 -#| msgid "Please enter valid ip address" msgid "Please enter a valid ip address" msgstr "Si us plau, introduïu una adreça IP vàlida" @@ -188,22 +184,18 @@ msgstr "before-acquire-handler" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:237 -#| msgid "timeout is no valid" msgid "timeout is invalid" msgstr "el temps d'espera no és vàlid" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:239 -#| msgid "expire is no valid" msgid "expire is invalid" msgstr "la caducitat no és vàlida" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:241 -#| msgid "acquireafter is no valid" msgid "acquireafter is invalid" msgstr "l'acquireafter no és vàlid" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:243 -#| msgid "retries is no valid" msgid "retries is invalid" msgstr "els reintents no són vàlids" @@ -212,12 +204,10 @@ msgstr "els valors de reintents inferiors a 3 són il·legals!" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:247 -#| msgid "weights is no valid" msgid "weights is invalid" msgstr "els pesos no són vàlids" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:249 -#| msgid "ticket can not be null" msgid "ticket can not be empty" msgstr "el tiquet no pot estar buit" @@ -230,12 +220,10 @@ #. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", #. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:494 -#| msgid "Enter an IP address of your site" msgid "Enter an IP address of your arbitrator" msgstr "Introduïu una adreça IP del vostre àrbitre" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:505 -#| msgid "Edit IP address of your site" msgid "Edit IP address of your arbitrator" msgstr "Editeu l'adreça IP del vostre àrbitre" @@ -253,7 +241,6 @@ #. abort? #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:600 -#| msgid "Configuration name cannot be empty." msgid "Configuration name can not be empty." msgstr "El nom de configuració no pot estar buit." @@ -270,7 +257,6 @@ msgstr "el transport s'ha d'emplenar!" #: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:621 -#| msgid "transport have to be filled!" msgid "arbitrator have to be filled!" msgstr "l'àrbitre s'ha d'emplenar!" @@ -316,7 +302,6 @@ #. GeoCluster read dialog caption #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:273 -#| msgid "Initializing geo-cluster Configuration" msgid "Initializing Geo Cluster Configuration" msgstr "Iniciant la configuració de Geo Clúster" @@ -347,7 +332,6 @@ #. GeoCluster write dialog caption #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:332 -#| msgid "Saving geo-cluster Configuration" msgid "Saving Geo Cluster Configuration" msgstr "Desant la configuració de Geo Clúster" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/iscsi-lio-server.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/iscsi-lio-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/iscsi-lio-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -78,7 +78,6 @@ msgstr "Número de port" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:143 -#| msgid "No valid IP address." msgid "Bind all IP addresses" msgstr "Vincula totes les adreces IP" @@ -257,8 +256,7 @@ "<big>Initializing iSCSI LIO Target Configuration</big> \n" "Please wait... \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Iniciant la configuració de la destinació de l'iSCSI LIO</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Iniciant la configuració de la destinació de l'iSCSI LIO</big> \n" "Espereu, si us plau... \n" #. Read dialog help 2/2 @@ -268,8 +266,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Interrupció de la inicialització</big> \n" -"Per interrompre de forma segura la utilitat de configuració, premeu " -"Interromp ara.\n" +"Per interrompre de forma segura la utilitat de configuració, premeu Interromp ara.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:47 @@ -319,8 +316,7 @@ "Then press Configure.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Addició d'una destinació d'iSCSI</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu una destinació iSCSI de la llista de destinacions iSCSI " -"detectades.\n" +"Seleccioneu una destinació iSCSI de la llista de destinacions iSCSI detectades.\n" "Si no s'ha detectat la vostra, feu servir Altres (no detectades)\n" "i després premeu Configura.\n" @@ -332,8 +328,7 @@ "the configuration opens.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Edició o supressió</big> \n" -"Si premeu Edita, s'obrirà un quadre de diàleg addicional on podeu " -"canviar\n" +"Si premeu Edita, s'obrirà un quadre de diàleg addicional on podeu canviar\n" "la configuració.\n" #. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 @@ -343,10 +338,8 @@ "Obtain an overview of installed iSCSI targets. Additionally\n" "edit their configurations. \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Resum de la configuració de les destinacions de l' iSCSI</big></" -"b> \n" -"Obteniu un resum de les destinacions de l'iSCSI instal·lades i, a més a " -"més,\n" +"<big>Resum de la configuració de les destinacions de l' iSCSI</big> \n" +"Obteniu un resum de les destinacions de l'iSCSI instal·lades i, a més a més,\n" "editeu-ne les configuracions. \n" #. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 @@ -390,8 +383,7 @@ "" msgstr "" "<big>Selecció d'un element</big> \n" -"Aquesta operació no es pot dur a terme; primer cal realitzar la " -"codificació. :-)\n" +"Aquesta operació no es pot dur a terme; primer cal realitzar la codificació. :-)\n" "" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 @@ -407,65 +399,30 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of " -"Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert " -"User and Password." -msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu el tipus d'autenticació. Useu Sense autenticació o " -"Entrant i Sortint (poden ser les dues alhora). Després " -"introduïu l'Usuari i la Contrasenya." +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use No Authentication or one of Incoming and Outgoing (can be both together). Then insert User and Password." +msgstr "Seleccioneu el tipus d'autenticació. Useu Sense autenticació o Entrant i Sortint (poden ser les dues alhora). Després introduïu l'Usuari i la Contrasenya." #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " -"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is " -"InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi " -"initiator). Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." -msgstr "" -"Useu Afegeix per donar accés a un client per a un LUN importat des " -"d'un grup de portal de destinació. Especifiqueu quin client té permís per " -"accedir-hi (el nom del client és l'InitiatorName a '/etc/iscsi/" -"initiatorname.iscsi' a l'iniciador iscsi). Suprimeix eliminarà " -"l'accés del client al LUN." +msgid "Use Add to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is InitiatorName in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). Delete will remove the client access to the LUN." +msgstr "Useu Afegeix per donar accés a un client per a un LUN importat des d'un grup de portal de destinació. Especifiqueu quin client té permís per accedir-hi (el nom del client és l'InitiatorName a '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' a l'iniciador iscsi). Suprimeix eliminarà l'accés del client al LUN." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 -msgid "" -"With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " -"target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the " -"type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both " -"together. Then insert User and Password. If Use " -"Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is " -"disabled here." -msgstr "" -"Amb Edita LUN es pot modificar el mapatge LUN. Tigueu present que " -"el número de destinació LUN ha de ser únic. Després de prémer Edita " -"Auth, seleccioneu el tipus d'autenticació. Useu Entrant, " -"Sortint o ambdós junts. Després introduïu l'Usuari i la " -"Contrasenya. Si Usa autenticació està inhabilitat al diàleg " -"anterior, Edita Auth està inhabilitat aquí." +msgid "With Edit LUN one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique. After pressing Edit Auth, select the type of authentication. Use Incoming, Outgoing or both together. Then insert User and Password. If Use Authentication is disabled in previous dialog, Edit Auth is disabled here." +msgstr "Amb Edita LUN es pot modificar el mapatge LUN. Tigueu present que el número de destinació LUN ha de ser únic. Després de prémer Edita Auth, seleccioneu el tipus d'autenticació. Useu Entrant, Sortint o ambdós junts. Després introduïu l'Usuari i la Contrasenya. Si Usa autenticació està inhabilitat al diàleg anterior, Edita Auth està inhabilitat aquí." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " -"the LUN." -msgstr "" -"Copia ofereix la possibilitat de donar accés al LUN a un client " -"addicional." +msgid "Copy offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN." +msgstr "Copia ofereix la possibilitat de donar accés al LUN a un client addicional." #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " -"clicking Add.\n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Edit or Delete</" -"b>." +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking Add.\n" +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press Edit or Delete." msgstr "" -"Llista de destinacions i grups de portal de destinació oferts. Premeu " -"Afegeix per crear una destinació nova.\n" -"Per suprimir un ítem o modificar-lo, seleccioneu-lo i premeu Edita o " -"Suprimeix." +"Llista de destinacions i grups de portal de destinació oferts. Premeu Afegeix per crear una destinació nova.\n" +"Per suprimir un ítem o modificar-lo, seleccioneu-lo i premeu Edita o Suprimeix." #. edit target #. add target @@ -476,80 +433,58 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"LUN.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a LUN.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN</" -"b>. \n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" -"És possible fer disponibles blocs de dispositius arbitraris o fitxers sota " -"un LUN.\n" +"És possible fer disponibles blocs de dispositius arbitraris o fitxers sota un LUN.\n" "Heu de proporcionar un camí als dispositius de bloc o fitxers. \n" -"El nom LUN és un nom arbitrari per identificar únicament el LUN</" -"b>. \n" -"Cal que el nom sigui únic dins el grup de portarl de destinació. Si " -"l'usuari\n" +"El nom LUN és un nom arbitrari per identificar únicament el LUN. \n" +"Cal que el nom sigui únic dins el grup de portarl de destinació. Si l'usuari\n" "no proporciona el nom per al LUN, es genera automàticament." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which " -"address\n" +"Under Ip Address and Port Number you specify under which address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" -"Sota l'Adreça IP i Número de Port especifiqueu sota quina " -"adreça i port\n" +"Sota l'Adreça IP i Número de Port especifiqueu sota quina adreça i port\n" "el servei estarà disponible. Per defecte, el número de port és 3260.\n" "Només són possibles les adreces IP assignades a una de les targetes de xarxa." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:162 msgid "Create a new target. Replace template values with the correct values." -msgstr "" -"Creeu una destinació nova. Reemplaceu els valors de plantilla pels valors " -"correctes." +msgstr "Creeu una destinació nova. Reemplaceu els valors de plantilla pels valors correctes." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" "You have to provide path to either block devices or file. \n" -"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN</" -"b>. \n" +"The LUN name is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the LUN. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" -"És possible fer disponibles blocs de dispositius arbitraris o fitxers sota " -"un lun. \n" +"És possible fer disponibles blocs de dispositius arbitraris o fitxers sota un lun. \n" "Heu de proporcionar un camí als dispositius de bloc o fitxers. \n" -"El nom LUN és un nom arbitrari per identificar únicament el LUN</" -"b>. \n" -"Cal que el nom sigui únic dins el grup de portarl de destinació. Si " -"l'usuari\n" +"El nom LUN és un nom arbitrari per identificar únicament el LUN. \n" +"Cal que el nom sigui únic dins el grup de portarl de destinació. Si l'usuari\n" "no proporciona el nom per al LUN, es genera automàticament." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional " -"configuration options." -msgstr "" -"És possible afegir, editar o suprimir totes les opcions " -"de configuració addicionals." +msgid "It is possible to add, edit or delete all additional configuration options." +msgstr "És possible afegir, editar o suprimir totes les opcions de configuració addicionals." #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 msgid "" -"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing " -"purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and " -"Sectors are optional." +"Edit LUN number if needed, set Type (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set Path to disk device or file.SCSI ID and Sectors are optional." msgstr "" -"Editeu el nombre LUN si cal, establiu el Tipus (nullio és per " -"a fer-ne proves).\n" -"Si Type=fileio establiu el Camí al dispositiu de disc o fitxer." -"SCSI IDi Sectors són opcionals." +"Editeu el nombre LUN si cal, establiu el Tipus (nullio és per a fer-ne proves).\n" +"Si Type=fileio establiu el Camí al dispositiu de disc o fitxer.SCSI IDi Sectors són opcionals." #. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:145 @@ -577,8 +512,7 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:269 msgid "Selected Path must be either block device or normal file!" -msgstr "" -"El camí seleccionat ha de ser o bé un dispositiu de bloc o un fitxer normal!" +msgstr "El camí seleccionat ha de ser o bé un dispositiu de bloc o un fitxer normal!" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:275 msgid "Selected Path is already in use!" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/isns.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/isns.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/isns.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 11:35+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Catalan\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -135,8 +136,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Interrupció de la inicialització</big> \n" -"Per interrompre de forma segura la utilitat de configuració, premeu " -"Interromp ara.\n" +"Per interrompre de forma segura la utilitat de configuració, premeu Interromp ara.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:25 @@ -170,75 +170,26 @@ "Aquí podeu configurar un servidor iSNS. \n" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service " -"are displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " -"targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node " -"removes it from the iSNS database." -msgstr "" -"Es mostra la llista de tots els nodes iSCSI disponibles registrats al " -"servei de iSNS. Els nodes son registrats pels iniciadors i " -"destinataris iSCSI. És possible esborrar-los. Si s'esborra " -"un node aquest és esborrat de la base de dades iSNS." +msgid "The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed. Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets. It is only possible to delete them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database." +msgstr "Es mostra la llista de tots els nodes iSCSI disponibles registrats al servei de iSNS. Els nodes son registrats pels iniciadors i destinataris iSCSI. És possible esborrar-los. Si s'esborra un node aquest és esborrat de la base de dades iSNS." #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 -msgid "" -"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create</" -"b> a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the " -"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." -msgstr "" -"Es mostra una llista de tots els dominis de descobriment. És possible " -"Crear i Esborrar els dominis de descobriment. Esborrar " -"un domini n'elimina els membres però no n'esborra els nodes dels membres." +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to Create a discovery domain or Delete one. Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members." +msgstr "Es mostra una llista de tots els dominis de descobriment. És possible Crear i Esborrar els dominis de descobriment. Esborrar un domini n'elimina els membres però no n'esborra els nodes dels membres." #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " -"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " -"domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " -"Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " -"does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not " -"yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When " -"the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this " -"domain When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS " -"service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same " -"Discovery Domains. " -msgstr "" -"Es mostra una llista de tots els nodes iSCSI segons el domini de " -"descobriment. Seleccionant un altre domini de descobriment es refrescarà la " -"llista amb els membres d'aquest altre domini de descobriment. És possible " -"Afegir un node iSCSI a un domini de descobriment o Esborrar el " -"node. Esborrant el node l'elimina del domini però no esborra el node " -"iSCSI Crear un node iSCSI permet que un node encara no registrat " -"s'afegeixi al domini de descobriment. Quan l'iniciador o destinatari iSCSI " -"registri aquest node, llavors passarà a formar part d'aquest domini. " -"Quan un iniciador iSCSI faci una petició de descobriment, el servei iSNS " -"retornarà tots els nodes destinataris que son membres del mateix domini de " -"descobriment." +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to Add an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or Delete the node. Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains. " +msgstr "Es mostra una llista de tots els nodes iSCSI segons el domini de descobriment. Seleccionant un altre domini de descobriment es refrescarà la llista amb els membres d'aquest altre domini de descobriment. És possible Afegir un node iSCSI a un domini de descobriment o Esborrar el node. Esborrant el node l'elimina del domini però no esborra el node iSCSI Crear un node iSCSI permet que un node encara no registrat s'afegeixi al domini de descobriment. Quan l'iniciador o destinatari iSCSI registri aquest node, llavors passarà a formar part d'aquest domini. Quan un iniciador iSCSI faci una petició de descobriment, el servei iSNS retornarà tots els nodes destinataris que son membres del mateix domini de descobriment." #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " -"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a " -"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS " -"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " -"Domains contain iSCSI Node members." -msgstr "" -"A la part superior es mostra una llista de tots els conjunts de domini de " -"descobriment. Un domini de descobriment ha de ser membre d'un conjunt de " -"dominis de descobriment perque sigui actiu. En una base de dades " -"iSNS, un conjunt de dominis de descobriment conté dominis de descobriment i " -"els dominis de descobriment contenen els nodes iSCSI que en son membres" +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members." +msgstr "A la part superior es mostra una llista de tots els conjunts de domini de descobriment. Un domini de descobriment ha de ser membre d'un conjunt de dominis de descobriment perque sigui actiu. En una base de dades iSNS, un conjunt de dominis de descobriment conté dominis de descobriment i els dominis de descobriment contenen els nodes iSCSI que en son membres" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "" -"The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " -"discovery domain set is selected." -msgstr "" -"Es refrescarà la llista del conjunt de membres del domini de descobriment " -"sempre que se seleccioni un conjunt de domini de descobriment diferent." +msgid "The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected." +msgstr "Es refrescarà la llista del conjunt de membres del domini de descobriment sempre que se seleccioni un conjunt de domini de descobriment diferent." #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** #: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:25 @@ -280,11 +231,8 @@ #. boolean display = true; #. Report::DisplayErrors(display,10); #: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:351 -#| msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check iSNS server address." msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check if iSNS server is running." -msgstr "" -"No es pot connectar amb el servidor iSNS. Comproveu si s'executa el servidor " -"iSNS." +msgstr "No es pot connectar amb el servidor iSNS. Comproveu si s'executa el servidor iSNS." #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/isns/wizards.rb:70 @@ -298,12 +246,8 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 -msgid "" -"To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed.</" -"p>" -msgstr "" -"Per a configurar el servei de l'isns, cal instal·lar el paquet %1 ." -"" +msgid "To configure the isns service, the %1 package must be installed." +msgstr "Per a configurar el servei de l'isns, cal instal·lar el paquet %1 ." #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 msgid "Install it now?" @@ -337,17 +281,11 @@ #~ msgid "Add Discovery Domain" #~ msgstr "Afegeix un domini de descobriment" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<big>iSNS Server location</big> The DNS name or the IP address " -#~ "of the iSNS service can be entered as the iSNS address.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<big>Localització del servidor d'iSNS</big> El nom de DNS o " -#~ "l'adreça IP del servei iSNS pot introduïr-se com a adreça de l'iSNS.\n" +#~ msgid "<big>iSNS Server location</big> The DNS name or the IP address of the iSNS service can be entered as the iSNS address.\n" +#~ msgstr "<big>Localització del servidor d'iSNS</big> El nom de DNS o l'adreça IP del servei iSNS pot introduïr-se com a adreça de l'iSNS.\n" #~ msgid "Select discovery domain set to which discovery domain will be added." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Selecciona a quin conjunt de dominis de descobriment serà afegit el " -#~ "domini de descobriment." +#~ msgstr "Selecciona a quin conjunt de dominis de descobriment serà afegit el domini de descobriment." #~ msgid "Discovery Domain Name Set" #~ msgstr "Nom del conjunt de dominis de descobriment" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/ldap-server.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/ldap-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/ldap-server.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -100,12 +100,8 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." -msgstr "" -"La base de dades LDAP ja s'ha creat. Podeu canviar-ne els paràmetres més " -"tard al sistema instal·lat." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgstr "La base de dades LDAP ja s'ha creat. Podeu canviar-ne els paràmetres més tard al sistema instal·lat." #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:101 @@ -117,12 +113,8 @@ msgstr "[establert manualment]" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." -msgstr "" -"No s'ha pogut obtenir la constrasenya root del sistema. Establiu la " -"contrasenya del servidor LDAP per continuar." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgstr "No s'ha pogut obtenir la constrasenya root del sistema. Establiu la contrasenya del servidor LDAP per continuar." #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:112 msgid "Setting up LDAP Master Server:" @@ -216,12 +208,8 @@ "sense instal·lar els paquets necessaris." #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la configuració de la replicació d'OpenLDAP. Reconfigureu-ho " -"després d'acabar la instal·lació." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." +msgstr "Ha fallat la configuració de la replicació d'OpenLDAP. Reconfigureu-ho després d'acabar la instal·lació." #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:344 msgid "" @@ -243,10 +231,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/complex.rb:105 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -323,12 +309,8 @@ msgstr "El servidor LDAP no s'està executant." #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" -msgstr "" -"Voleu iniciar-lo ara per rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o voleu crear " -"una configuració nova des de zero?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgstr "Voleu iniciar-lo ara per rellegir-ne les dades de configuració o voleu crear una configuració nova des de zero?" #. get helps page #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:226 @@ -357,8 +339,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:353 msgid "All data, including configuration, is replicated from a remote server." -msgstr "" -"Totes les dades, inclosa la configuració, es replica des d'un servidor remot." +msgstr "Totes les dades, inclosa la configuració, es replica des d'un servidor remot." #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:384 msgid "" @@ -489,12 +470,8 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat obrir la connexió a la base de dades \"cn=config\" al servidor " -"proveïdor.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Ha fallat obrir la connexió a la base de dades \"cn=config\" al servidor proveïdor.\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:975 msgid "" @@ -531,19 +508,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." -msgstr "" -"Establir una replicació en cascada de cn=config actualment no té suport." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgstr "Establir una replicació en cascada de cn=config actualment no té suport." #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" -msgstr "" -"Ha fallat la comprovació de les credencials d'autenticació definides a la " -"configuració de replicació al servidor proveïdor.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgstr "Ha fallat la comprovació de les credencials d'autenticació definides a la configuració de replicació al servidor proveïdor.\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1108 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1998 @@ -569,8 +540,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1220 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -601,10 +571,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "Select Yes if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</" -"p>\n" +"part of the boot process. Select No if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting No, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -617,18 +585,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured." +"LDAP is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"LDAPS enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -655,10 +619,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"Choose the Database from hdb and bdb. Hdb is " -"a\n" -"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"Choose the Database from hdb and bdb. Hdb is a\n" +"variant of the bdb backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to bdb. A\n" "hdb-Database needs a larger idlcachesize than a\n" "bdb-Database for a good search performance.\n" @@ -674,24 +636,18 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password</" -"b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends " -"the \n" -"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"The Administrator DN along with a LDAP Administrator Password \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking Append Base DN appends the \n" +"Base DN entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"LDAP Administrator Password is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process. " msgstr "" @@ -725,8 +681,7 @@ "click Change Password. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "Password Encryption. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" @@ -740,35 +695,25 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with Append Base DN." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change " -"Password.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password " -"Encryption.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.\n" +"To change the password for the administrator account, click Change Password.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the Password Encryption.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index " -"Cache (IDL cache) \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"With the Entry Cache and Index Cache (IDL cache) you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The Entry Cache defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The Index Cache (IDL cache) \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs)." msgstr "" @@ -784,14 +729,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"Check Hash Clear Text Passwords to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords. " msgstr "" @@ -805,17 +746,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:134 -msgid "" -"Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object " -"DN." -msgstr "" -"Introduïu el nom de l'objecte de política per defecte a Objecte de " -"política DN per defecte." +msgid "Enter the name of the default policy object in Default Policy Object DN." +msgstr "Introduïu el nom de l'objecte de política per defecte a Objecte de política DN per defecte." #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:137 msgid "" -"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You " -"may\n" +"Create or change the default policy by clicking Edit Policy. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -829,33 +765,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined." +msgid "The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:147 msgid "" "Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "Presence: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:158 msgid "" "Equality: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An Equality index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.\n" msgstr "" @@ -871,18 +802,15 @@ "Delete to delete an existing index and Edit to change the\n" "indexing options of an already indexed attribute.\n" msgstr "" -"Useu Afegeix per definir les opcions d'indexació per al nou " -"atribut,\n" +"Useu Afegeix per definir les opcions d'indexació per al nou atribut,\n" "Suprimeix per eliminar un índex existent i Edita per canviar\n" "les opcions d'indexació d'un atribut ja indexat.\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.\n" msgstr "" @@ -898,8 +826,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:183 msgid "" -"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click Edit.\n" msgstr "" @@ -909,17 +836,14 @@ "Use Add to create new access control rules and Delete to\n" "delete an access control rule.\n" msgstr "" -"Feu servir Afegeix per crear noves regles cle control d'accés i " -"Suprimeix per\n" +"Feu servir Afegeix per crear noves regles cle control d'accés i Suprimeix per\n" "suprimir-ne una.\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:191 msgid "" -"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the Up and Down buttons.\n" msgstr "" @@ -929,8 +853,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" -"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"Select the \"Enable ldapsync provider for this database\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server." msgstr "" @@ -940,16 +863,11 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" -"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"contextCSN\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"Operations\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"Minutes\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.\n" @@ -961,14 +879,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server." +"Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"refreshOnly\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:221 @@ -977,8 +891,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:224 msgid "" -"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want " -"the\n" +"Select \"This database is a Replication Consumer\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.\n" msgstr "" @@ -992,8 +905,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (ldap or ldaps) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1026,10 +938,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:250 msgid "" -"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.\n" +"Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:253 @@ -1040,10 +950,8 @@ msgid "" "As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. \n" msgstr "" @@ -1058,8 +966,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now." msgstr "" "<big>Avortament de la inicialització</big> \n" -"Per a avortar la utilitat de configuració de forma segura, premeu Avorta</" -"b>." +"Per a avortar la utilitat de configuració de forma segura, premeu Avorta." #. Write dialog help #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:269 @@ -1067,11 +974,6 @@ msgstr "<big>Desant la configuració del servidor LDAP</big> \n" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:272 -#| msgid "" -#| "<big>Aborting Saving</big> \n" -#| "Abort the save procedure by pressing Abort.\n" -#| "An additional dialog informs you whether it is safe to do so.\n" -#| "\n" msgid "" "<big>Aborting Saving:</big> \n" "Abort the save procedure by pressing Abort. An additional dialog\n" @@ -1095,18 +997,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server.</" -"p> " +msgid "With Start LDAP Server Yes or No, start or stop the LDAP server. " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration " -"wizard." -msgstr "" -"Si seleccioneu Sí, cliqueu a Següent per iniciar l'auxiliar " -"de configuració." +msgid "If you select Yes, click Next to start the configuration wizard." +msgstr "Si seleccioneu Sí, cliqueu a Següent per iniciar l'auxiliar de configuració." #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:293 msgid "" @@ -1116,15 +1012,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:297 -msgid "" -"Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:" +msgid "Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:300 msgid "" -"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"Stand-alone server: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1136,8 +1029,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"Replica slave server: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server." msgstr "" @@ -1159,18 +1051,15 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:319 msgid "" -"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the " -"server\n" +"Check Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</" -"p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:324 msgid "" "If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check Use common Server Certificate so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1181,10 +1070,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:330 msgid "" "If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File</" -"b>,\n" -"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the CA Certificate File,\n" +"Certificate File and Certificate Key File into the corresponding\n" "textfields.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1202,26 +1089,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:344 msgid "" -"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"Add schema files in this dialog. Press Add to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" -"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog." msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:354 -msgid "" -"Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:" +msgid "Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:357 @@ -1230,17 +1112,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:358 msgid "" -"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"LDAPv2 Bind Requests: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:361 msgid "" -"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) " +"Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:364 @@ -1251,8 +1130,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:367 msgid "" -"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"Unauthenticated Update Operations to process: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1270,16 +1148,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:378 msgid "" -"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"Disable Simple Bind authentication: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:381 msgid "" "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1294,50 +1170,39 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:392 msgid "" "This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.\n" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "databases" 2/2 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:400 msgid "To add a new database, press Add Database...." -msgstr "" -"Per afegir una nova base de dades, premeu Afegeix base de dades...." -"" +msgstr "Per afegir una nova base de dades, premeu Afegeix base de dades...." #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:401 msgid "" -"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete " -"Database....\n" +"To delete a database, select a database from the list and press Delete Database....\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:404 msgid "" -"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"Enter a password for the configuration database (\"cn=config\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:407 msgid "" -"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" +"If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"Prepare for MirrorMode replication\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:410 msgid "" -"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or " -"\"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"ldap\" or \"ldaps\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"cn=config\")." msgstr "" @@ -1362,23 +1227,16 @@ msgstr "URI del servidor" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." -msgstr "" -"Aquest servidor no està configurat com a node de MirrorMode. Cliqueu a " -"\"Següent\" per iniciar l'auxiliar de configuració estàndard d'OpenLDAP." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgstr "Aquest servidor no està configurat com a node de MirrorMode. Cliqueu a \"Següent\" per iniciar l'auxiliar de configuració estàndard d'OpenLDAP." #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 msgid "OpenLDAP MirrorMode Overview" msgstr "Resum d'OpenLDAP MirrorMode" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" -msgstr "" -"No és possible suprimir l'amfitrió en què heu iniciat aquest mòdul del " -"YaST.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgstr "No és possible suprimir l'amfitrió en què heu iniciat aquest mòdul del YaST.\n" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 msgid "Start yast2 openldap-mirrormode on a different MirrorMode server." @@ -1404,6 +1262,7 @@ msgid "Initializing..." msgstr "S'està inicialitzant..." +#. #-#-#-#-# ldap-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# #. **************************************** #. * tree structure definition ** #. *************************************** @@ -1685,9 +1544,7 @@ msgstr "Selecciona &Rebutja banderes:" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:175 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:179 @@ -1695,8 +1552,7 @@ msgstr "Inhabilita l'autenticació de vincle simple" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:188 @@ -1789,8 +1645,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:337 msgid "Allow Plaintext Authentication (Simple Bind) for this Database. " -msgstr "" -"Permet autenticació de text pla (vincle simple) per a aquesta base de dades." +msgstr "Permet autenticació de text pla (vincle simple) per a aquesta base de dades." #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:340 msgid "(Remote Connection needs to be encrypted)" @@ -2120,12 +1975,8 @@ #. FIXME: Validate attribute types #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1185 -#| msgid "" -#| "Enter a valid service name into the service field.\n" -#| "\n" msgid "Enter a list of valid attributes in the Attributes textfield" -msgstr "" -"Introduïu una llista d'atributs vàlids al campt de text Atributs" +msgstr "Introduïu una llista d'atributs vàlids al campt de text Atributs" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1197 msgid "Enter valid a LDAP filter in the textfield" @@ -2216,11 +2067,8 @@ msgstr "Ha fallat la comprovació de les capacitats LDAPsync del proveïdor." #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" -msgstr "" -"Si us plau, verifiqueu que el servidor de destinació estigui habilitat per " -"ser un proveïdor LDAPsync." +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgstr "Si us plau, verifiqueu que el servidor de destinació estigui habilitat per ser un proveïdor LDAPsync." #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 msgid "Enable ldapsync provider for this database" @@ -2367,12 +2215,8 @@ msgstr "Actualitzant els objectes de política de contrasenyes per defecte" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:883 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" -msgstr "" -"Esperant que s'acabin les tasques d'indexació internes d'OpenLDAP (això pot " -"trigar uns minuts)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" +msgstr "Esperant que s'acabin les tasques d'indexació internes d'OpenLDAP (això pot trigar uns minuts)" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:884 msgid "Restarting OpenLDAP Server if required" @@ -2391,13 +2235,8 @@ msgstr "Ha fallat la creació d'objectes de política de contrasenyes." #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1006 -#| msgid "An error occurred while creating the printer database." -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" -msgstr "" -"S'ha produït un error mentre s'esperava que acabés l'indexador de la base de " -"dades d'OpenLDAP.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" +msgstr "S'ha produït un error mentre s'esperava que acabés l'indexador de la base de dades d'OpenLDAP.\n" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1007 msgid "Restart OpenLDAP manually." @@ -2502,12 +2341,8 @@ msgstr "No s'ha pogut determinar el propi nom d'amfitrió plenament qualificat." #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1874 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." -msgstr "" -"Un servidor mestre per a replicació no pot treballar correctament sense " -"saber el seu nom d'amfitrió plenament qualificat." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." +msgstr "Un servidor mestre per a replicació no pot treballar correctament sense saber el seu nom d'amfitrió plenament qualificat." #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2510 src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2520 msgid "is not a valid LDAP DN." @@ -2523,12 +2358,8 @@ msgstr "LDAP DN no vàlid: \"%s\", no es poden extreure els valors RDN" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2565 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." -msgstr "" -"El valor de l'atribut \"c\" ha de contenir un codi de país vàlid de 2 " -"lletres, ISO-3166." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgstr "El valor de l'atribut \"c\" ha de contenir un codi de país vàlid de 2 lletres, ISO-3166." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2572 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:373 @@ -2569,11 +2400,8 @@ msgstr "Fitxer de certificat CA: \"%s\" no existeix." #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3414 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" -msgstr "" -"Error en intentar verificar el certificat de servidor del servidor del " -"proveïdor.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgstr "Error en intentar verificar el certificat de servidor del servidor del proveïdor.\n" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3415 #, perl-format @@ -2598,8 +2426,7 @@ #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:301 #, perl-format msgid "Database type '%s' is not supported. Allowed are 'bdb' and 'hdb'." -msgstr "" -"El tipus de base de dades '%s' no té suport. Les permeses són 'bdb' i 'hdb'." +msgstr "El tipus de base de dades '%s' no té suport. Les permeses són 'bdb' i 'hdb'." #. parameter check failed #: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:347 @@ -2809,8 +2636,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<big>Aborting Saving:</big> \n" -#~ "Abort the save procedure by pressing Abort. An additional dialog " -#~ "informs whether it\n" +#~ "Abort the save procedure by pressing Abort. An additional dialog informs whether it\n" #~ "is safe to do so. " #~ msgstr "" #~ "<big>Interrupció del desament:</big> \n" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/mail.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/mail.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/mail.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-30 10:43+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Catalan\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -49,8 +50,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "<BIG>Avortament de la inicialització</BIG> \n" -"Per a avortar la utilitat de configuració de forma segura, premeu Avorta</" -"B>.\n" +"Per a avortar la utilitat de configuració de forma segura, premeu Avorta.\n" "\n" #. TODO FIXME: Modify it to your needs! @@ -85,8 +85,7 @@ "Select the mail system (Mail Transfer Agent, MTA)\n" "to install." msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu el sistema de correu (agent de transferència de missatges, " -"MTA)\n" +"Seleccioneu el sistema de correu (agent de transferència de missatges, MTA)\n" "que voleu instal·lar." #. Translators: connection type dialog help, part 1 of 2 @@ -105,12 +104,10 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "If choosing No Connection, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " -"localhost.\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.\n" msgstr "" "Si escolliu sense connexió, el servidor de correu s'iniciarà.\n" -"Ara bé, només serà possible el correu local. El MTA escolta l'ordinador " -"principal.\n" +"Ara bé, només serà possible el correu local. El MTA escolta l'ordinador principal.\n" #. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:88 @@ -119,23 +116,19 @@ "Specify the rewriting of the sender's address here for each user.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Indiqueu aquí si s'ha de tornar a escriure l'adreça del remitent per a " -"cada usuari.\n" +"Indiqueu aquí si s'ha de tornar a escriure l'adreça del remitent per a cada usuari.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:96 msgid "" "\n" "Some servers require authentication for sending mails. Here you can\n" -"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use " -"authentication,\n" +"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use authentication,\n" "simply leave these fields empty.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Alguns servidors necessiten un procés d'autenticació per a enviar " -"missatges.\n" -"Aquí podeu introduir informació referent a aquesta opció. Si no voleu " -"utilitzar\n" +"Alguns servidors necessiten un procés d'autenticació per a enviar missatges.\n" +"Aquí podeu introduir informació referent a aquesta opció. Si no voleu utilitzar\n" "l'autenticació, deixeu els camps en blanc.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 2/4 @@ -143,26 +136,21 @@ msgid "" "\n" "The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as smtp.provider." -"com.\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as smtp.provider.com.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"El servidor de correu de sortida generalment serveix per a les connexions " -"telefòniques.\n" -"Introduïu el servidor SMTP del proveïdor d'Internet més proper, per " -"exemple,\n" +"El servidor de correu de sortida generalment serveix per a les connexions telefòniques.\n" +"Introduïu el servidor SMTP del proveïdor d'Internet més proper, per exemple,\n" "smtp.proveïdor.com.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your " -"provider.\n" +"In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Al camp Nom d'usuari introduïu el nom d'usuari que us hagi " -"facilitat el proveïdor.\n" +"Al camp Nom d'usuari introduïu el nom d'usuari que us hagi facilitat el proveïdor.\n" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:113 @@ -203,14 +191,12 @@ "\n" "This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses." -"\n" +"especially for root), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.\n" msgstr "" "\n" "Aquesta taula redirigeix el correu lliurat localment.\n" "El podeu redirigir a un altre usuari local (aquesta opció és molt\n" -"útil per als comptes del sistema, especialment per a l'usuari primari</" -"b>),\n" +"útil per als comptes del sistema, especialment per a l'usuari primari),\n" "a una adreça remota o a una llista d'adreces.\n" "\n" @@ -234,8 +220,7 @@ "part of the address.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Aquesta taula redirigeix el correu d'entrada. A diferència de la taula " -"d'àlies,\n" +"Aquesta taula redirigeix el correu d'entrada. A diferència de la taula d'àlies,\n" "també té en compte el domini com a part de l'adreça.\n" #. Translators: virtual domains dialog help, part 2 of 2 @@ -370,12 +355,10 @@ msgstr "Inicia la &cerca de correu" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#| msgid "Manual" msgid "manual" msgstr "manual" #: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 -#| msgid "Daemon" msgid "daemon" msgstr "dimoni" @@ -637,10 +620,8 @@ "smtp.provider.com.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"El servidor de correu de sortida generalment serveix per a les connexions " -"telefòniques.\n" -"Introduïu el servidor SMTP del proveïdor d'Internet més proper, per " -"exemple,\n" +"El servidor de correu de sortida generalment serveix per a les connexions telefòniques.\n" +"Introduïu el servidor SMTP del proveïdor d'Internet més proper, per exemple,\n" "smtp.proveïdor.com.\n" #. Translators: text entry label @@ -705,13 +686,11 @@ #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" "\n" -"Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS) checks incoming and outgoing " -"mail\n" +"Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS) checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" "with AMaViS.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Habilitar l'escaneig de virus (AMaViS) comprova el correu entrant " -"i sortint\n" +"Habilitar l'escaneig de virus (AMaViS) comprova el correu entrant i sortint\n" "per mitjà d'AMaViS.\n" #. help text @@ -724,8 +703,7 @@ msgstr "" "Habilitar AMaViS també habilitarà els següents mòduls: \n" "Spamassassinescanejador de SPAM\n" -"DKIM comprova la clau del domini signada en els missatges " -"entrants\n" +"DKIM comprova la clau del domini signada en els missatges entrants\n" "Clamav motor d'escaneig de virus de codi lliure" #. help text @@ -751,33 +729,25 @@ "Enabling DKIM signig for outgoing mails.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Habilitar la signatura DKIM per als missatges de correu de sortida.</" -"b>\n" +"Habilitar la signatura DKIM per als missatges de correu de sortida.\n" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:194 msgid "" "\n" "Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" -"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new " -"service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " -"send\n" +"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" -"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed " -"with\n" +"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Habilitar DKIM per als missatges de sortida requereix accions " -"addicionals. Es generarà\n" +"Habilitar DKIM per als missatges de sortida requereix accions addicionals. Es generarà\n" "una clau SSl per al valor 'mydomain' definit al Postfix. Un nou servei\n" -"'submission' es configurarà al Postfix. Quan això s'hagi configurat podreu " -"enviar\n" -"missatges amb aquest servei 'submission' des de 'mynetworks' amb " -"l'autenticació SASL\n" -"activada. Només els missatges enviats amb aquest servei es signaran amb la " -"clau\n" +"'submission' es configurarà al Postfix. Quan això s'hagi configurat podreu enviar\n" +"missatges amb aquest servei 'submission' des de 'mynetworks' amb l'autenticació SASL\n" +"activada. Només els missatges enviats amb aquest servei es signaran amb la clau\n" "del domini.\n" #. help text @@ -788,17 +758,14 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in /var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " -"the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"La clau pública de la clau del domini ha de ser oferida per un servei de " -"nom de domini.\n" +"La clau pública de la clau del domini ha de ser oferida per un servei de nom de domini.\n" "La clau pública es desarà com a registre DNS TXT\n" -"a /var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt i ha de ser desplegada en un " -"servei de nom\n" +"a /var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt i ha de ser desplegada en un servei de nom\n" "de domini adient. Si hi ha un sevei de nom actiu en aquest servidor,\n" " i que aquest sigui el servidor d'autorització per al domini, la clau\n" "pública s'afegirà com a registre TXT per a la zona del domini\n" @@ -806,11 +773,8 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "" -"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." -msgstr "" -"Si habiliteu el suport de DKIM, també s'habilitarà l'escaneig de virus " -"(AMaViS)." +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgstr "Si habiliteu el suport de DKIM, també s'habilitarà l'escaneig de virus (AMaViS)." #. Translators: text entry label #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:224 @@ -854,13 +818,8 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "" -"The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not " -"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." -msgstr "" -"El mode de lliurament sol ser directe, a menys que no " -"reenvieu el correu de l'usuari primari o accediu al correu mitjançant l'IMAP." -"" +msgid "The delivery mode is usually Directly, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." +msgstr "El mode de lliurament sol ser directe, a menys que no reenvieu el correu de l'usuari primari o accediu al correu mitjançant l'IMAP." #. LogView label. take a string from users? #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:345 @@ -900,8 +859,7 @@ #. Validation #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:839 msgid "Cannot use procmail when root's mail is not forwarded." -msgstr "" -"No es pot usar procmail quan no es reenvia el correu de l'usuari primari." +msgstr "No es pot usar procmail quan no es reenvia el correu de l'usuari primari." #. combo box choice: #. deliver mail normally @@ -1610,8 +1568,7 @@ #~ "<big>Set Up Mail Server Configuration</big> \n" #~ "\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<big>S'està desant la configuració del servidor Samba</" -#~ "big> \n" +#~ "<big>S'està desant la configuració del servidor Samba</big> \n" #~ "Espereu... \n" #, fuzzy @@ -1619,8 +1576,7 @@ #~ "<big>Initializing Mail Server Configuration</big> \n" #~ "Please wait... \n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<big>S'està iniciant la configuració del servidor Samba</big></" -#~ "b> \n" +#~ "<big>S'està iniciant la configuració del servidor Samba</big> \n" #~ "Espereu... \n" #~ msgid "" @@ -1628,16 +1584,14 @@ #~ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<big>Interrupció de la inicialització:</big> \n" -#~ "per a cancel·lar la utilitat de configuració, premeu Interromp.</" -#~ "p>\n" +#~ "per a cancel·lar la utilitat de configuració, premeu Interromp.\n" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<big>Saving Mail Server Configuration</big> \n" #~ "Please wait... \n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<big>S'està desant la configuració del servidor Samba</" -#~ "big> \n" +#~ "<big>S'està desant la configuració del servidor Samba</big> \n" #~ "Espereu... \n" #~ msgid "" @@ -1907,12 +1861,10 @@ #~ msgstr "S'ha trobat una drecera no vàlida per a" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "In this dialog You can configure the mail settings of an user ." +#~ msgid "In this dialog You can configure the mail settings of an user ." #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "En aquest quadre de diàleg podeu gestionar els dipòsits i serveis de " -#~ "programari configurats." +#~ "En aquest quadre de diàleg podeu gestionar els dipòsits i serveis de programari configurats." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Enable IMAP Quota" @@ -2003,10 +1955,5 @@ #~ "El YaST2 només pot configurar el Postfix i el Sendmail,\n" #~ "però cap dels dos està instal·lat." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "The delivery mode is usually procmail, unless you do not " -#~ "forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El mode de lliurament sol ser procmail, a menys que no " -#~ "reenvieu el correu de l'usuari primari o accediu al correu mitjançant " -#~ "l'IMAP." +#~ msgid "The delivery mode is usually procmail, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP." +#~ msgstr "El mode de lliurament sol ser procmail, a menys que no reenvieu el correu de l'usuari primari o accediu al correu mitjançant l'IMAP." Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/registration.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/registration.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/registration.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -86,12 +86,9 @@ "Access to security and general software updates is only possible on\n" "a registered system." msgstr "" -"Si us plau, introduïu un codi de registre o d'avaluació per a aquest " -"producte i el\n" -"nom d'usuari i l'adreça electrònica del SUSE Customer Center als camps de " -"sota.\n" -"L'accés a actualitzacions de seguretat i generals només és possible en un " -"sistema\n" +"Si us plau, introduïu un codi de registre o d'avaluació per a aquest producte i el\n" +"nom d'usuari i l'adreça electrònica del SUSE Customer Center als camps de sota.\n" +"L'accés a actualitzacions de seguretat i generals només és possible en un sistema\n" "registrat." #. label text describing the registration (2/2), @@ -137,12 +134,8 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and extensions." -msgstr "" -"Introduïu les credencials del SUSE Customer Center aquí per registrar el " -"sistema i obtenir actualitzacions i extensions." +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." +msgstr "Introduïu les credencials del SUSE Customer Center aquí per registrar el sistema i obtenir actualitzacions i extensions." #. not set yet? #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:334 @@ -210,20 +203,12 @@ msgstr "El sistema ja està registrat." #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:471 -msgid "" -"You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " -"modules to enhance the functionality of the system." -msgstr "" -"Podeu tornar-lo a registrar o podeu registrar extensions o mòduls " -"addicionals per millorar la funcionalitat del sistema." +msgid "You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system." +msgstr "Podeu tornar-lo a registrar o podeu registrar extensions o mòduls addicionals per millorar la funcionalitat del sistema." #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:473 -msgid "" -"If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove the system manually there." -msgstr "" -"Si voleu desfer el registre del sistema heu d'entrar al SUSE Customer " -"Center i eliminar-ne el sistema manualment." +msgid "If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there." +msgstr "Si voleu desfer el registre del sistema heu d'entrar al SUSE Customer Center i eliminar-ne el sistema manualment." #. error message #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:497 @@ -248,8 +233,7 @@ "Make sure a product is installed and /etc/products.d/baseproduct\n" "is a symlink pointing to the base product .prod file." msgstr "" -"Assegureu-vos que un producte està instal·lat i que /etc/products.d/" -"baseproduct\n" +"Assegureu-vos que un producte està instal·lat i que /etc/products.d/baseproduct\n" "sigui un symlink que apunti al fitxer del producte de base .prod." #. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" @@ -631,24 +615,17 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 msgid "" "Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.\n" -"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you " -"cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " -"extension or module." +"Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module." msgstr "" -"Introduïu els codis de registre per a les extensions o mòduls requerits.</" -"p>\n" -"Els codis de registre són necessaris per a un registre correcte. Si no " -"podeu proporcionar un codi de registre, torneu enrere i desmarqueu les " -"extensions o mòduls respectius." +"Introduïu els codis de registre per a les extensions o mòduls requerits.\n" +"Els codis de registre són necessaris per a un registre correcte. Si no podeu proporcionar un codi de registre, torneu enrere i desmarqueu les extensions o mòduls respectius." #. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:87 msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." -msgstr[0] "" -"L'extensió que heu seleccionat necessita un codi de registre a part." -msgstr[1] "" -"Les extensions que heu seleccionat necessiten un codi de registre a part." +msgstr[0] "L'extensió que heu seleccionat necessita un codi de registre a part." +msgstr[1] "Les extensions que heu seleccionat necessiten un codi de registre a part." #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:92 msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." @@ -663,29 +640,18 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." -msgstr "" -"Aquí podeu seleccionar extensions i mòduls disponibles per al vostre " -"sistema." +msgid "Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem." +msgstr "Aquí podeu seleccionar extensions i mòduls disponibles per al vostre sistema." #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "" -"Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " -"registration code." -msgstr "" -"Si us plau, tingueu present que algunes extensions o mòduls poden " -"necessitar un codi de registre específic." +msgid "Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code." +msgstr "Si us plau, tingueu present que algunes extensions o mòduls poden necessitar un codi de registre específic." #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:53 -msgid "" -"If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the " -"SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there." -msgstr "" -"Si voleu suprimir alguna extensió o mòdul heu d'entrar al SUSE Customer " -"Center i suprimir-los-en manualment." +msgid "If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there." +msgstr "Si voleu suprimir alguna extensió o mòdul heu d'entrar al SUSE Customer Center i suprimir-los-en manualment." #. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:72 @@ -713,12 +679,8 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 -msgid "" -"Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered " -"together with the base product." -msgstr "" -"Aquí podeu seleccionar quines extensions o mòduls es registraran " -"conjuntament amb el producte de base." +msgid "Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product." +msgstr "Aquí podeu seleccionar quines extensions o mòduls es registraran conjuntament amb el producte de base." #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 msgid "Register Optional Extensions or Modules" @@ -773,30 +735,22 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 msgid "" -"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" +"Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product " -"Registration." +"To register while installing automatically, select Run Product Registration." msgstr "" -"El registre del producte inclou el vostre producte a la base de dades del " -"SUSE Customer Center,\n" +"El registre del producte inclou el vostre producte a la base de dades del SUSE Customer Center,\n" "i així us permet obtenir actualitzacions en línia i suport tècnic.\n" -"Per registrar-vos mentre s'instal·la automàticament, seleccioneu Executa " -"el registre del producte." +"Per registrar-vos mentre s'instal·la automàticament, seleccioneu Executa el registre del producte." #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 msgid "" -"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" -"and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. " -"Refer\n" +"If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance." msgstr "" -"Si la vostra xarxa desplega un servidor de registre personalitzat, " -"establiu l'URL correcte del servidor\n" -"i la localització del certificat SMT a Paràmetres del servidor SMT. " -"Referiu-vos\n" +"Si la vostra xarxa desplega un servidor de registre personalitzat, establiu l'URL correcte del servidor\n" +"i la localització del certificat SMT a Paràmetres del servidor SMT. Referiu-vos\n" "al manual de l'SMT per a més assistència." #. FIXME the dialog should be created by external code before calling this @@ -806,9 +760,7 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:100 msgid "Install Available Updates from Update Repositories" -msgstr "" -"Instal·la les actualitzacions disponibles des dels repositoris " -"d'actualització" +msgstr "Instal·la les actualitzacions disponibles des dels repositoris d'actualització" #. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:114 @@ -869,50 +821,28 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." -msgstr "" -"La connexió segura (HTTPS) usa certificats SSL per verificar " -"l'autenticitat del servidor i per encriptar les dades transmeses." +msgid "Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data." +msgstr "La connexió segura (HTTPS) usa certificats SSL per verificar l'autenticitat del servidor i per encriptar les dades transmeses." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:123 -msgid "" -"You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate." -msgstr "" -"Podeu escollir importar el certificat a la llista d'autoritats de " -"certificat conegudes (CA), cosa que significa que confieu en el tema i " -"l'emissor del certificat desconegut." +msgid "You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate." +msgstr "Podeu escollir importar el certificat a la llista d'autoritats de certificat conegudes (CA), cosa que significa que confieu en el tema i l'emissor del certificat desconegut." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate." -msgstr "" -"Importar un certificat permetrà usar, per exemple, un ertificat " -"autosignat." +msgid "Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate." +msgstr "Importar un certificat permetrà usar, per exemple, un ertificat autosignat." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." -msgstr "" -"Important: hauríeu de verificar l'empremta del certificat per " -"assegurar-vos que importeu el certificat genuí del servidor sol·licitat." +msgid "Important: You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server." +msgstr "Important: hauríeu de verificar l'empremta del certificat per assegurar-vos que importeu el certificat genuí del servidor sol·licitat." #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big " -"security risk." -msgstr "" -"Importar un certificat desconegut sense verificació és un risc de " -"seguretat important." +msgid "Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk." +msgstr "Importar un certificat desconegut sense verificació és un risc de seguretat important." #. error message, the entered URL is not valid #: src/lib/registration/ui/local_server_dialog.rb:60 @@ -1034,8 +964,7 @@ #~ msgstr "S'ha afegit un servidor d'actualització a la vostra configuració." #~ msgid "No update server could be added to your configuration." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha pogut afegir cap servidor d'actualització a la configuració." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut afegir cap servidor d'actualització a la configuració." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "No software repository needed to be changed." @@ -1078,8 +1007,7 @@ #~ "The server requires additional system information. Activating \n" #~ "submission of the hardware profile automatically." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "El servidor necessita informació addicional del sistema. S'està activant " -#~ "automàticament \n" +#~ "El servidor necessita informació addicional del sistema. S'està activant automàticament \n" #~ " la tramesa del perfil del maquinari." #~ msgid "Update Source Issues" @@ -1094,15 +1022,11 @@ #~ "so the sources are available to all tools." #~ msgstr "" #~ "El registre com a usuari normal no inclou la font\n" -#~ "d'actualització al mòdul d'actualització en línia del YaST. Si continueu " -#~ "i més\n" -#~ "endavant voleu actualitzar-lo mitjançant l'actualització en línia, " -#~ "haureu\n" +#~ "d'actualització al mòdul d'actualització en línia del YaST. Si continueu i més\n" +#~ "endavant voleu actualitzar-lo mitjançant l'actualització en línia, haureu\n" #~ "d'afegir la font manualment. Altres\n" -#~ "eines, com ara l'Actualitzador de programari del tauler, es poden " -#~ "utilitzar igualment\n" -#~ ". També podeu cancel·lar l'operació i registrar-vos com a usuari primari " -#~ "al YaST \n" +#~ "eines, com ara l'Actualitzador de programari del tauler, es poden utilitzar igualment\n" +#~ ". També podeu cancel·lar l'operació i registrar-vos com a usuari primari al YaST \n" #~ "perquè les fonts estiguin disponibles per a totes les eines." #~ msgid "Error: Data received is invalid." @@ -1138,199 +1062,146 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with " -#~ "Novell.\n" +#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with Novell.\n" #~ "To do this now, select Configure Now. Delay the registration with\n" #~ "Configure Later.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Registreu el sistema amb Novell i configureu-lo per habilitar les " -#~ "actualitzacions en línia.\n" -#~ "Per fer-ho ara, seleccioneu Configura ara. Retardeu el registre " -#~ "amb\n" +#~ "Registreu el sistema amb Novell i configureu-lo per habilitar les actualitzacions en línia.\n" +#~ "Per fer-ho ara, seleccioneu Configura ara. Retardeu el registre amb\n" #~ "Configura més tard.\n" #~ "" #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your " -#~ "system\n" +#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your system\n" #~ "with Optional Information and Hardware Profile. \n" -#~ "Details shows the maximum amount of information that can be " -#~ "involved\n" -#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the " -#~ "Novell\n" -#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the " -#~ "identity\n" +#~ "Details shows the maximum amount of information that can be involved\n" +#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Novell\n" +#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the identity\n" #~ "of the installed product is sent in this initial exchange.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Per simplificar el procés de registre, incloeu la informació del vostre " -#~ "sistema\n" +#~ "Per simplificar el procés de registre, incloeu la informació del vostre sistema\n" #~ "amb Informació opcional i Perfil de maquinari. \n" -#~ "A Detalls es mostra la quantitat màxima d'informació que es pot " -#~ "incloure\n" -#~ " en el registre. Per obtenir aquesta informació, es posa en contacte amb " -#~ "el\n" -#~ " servidor de Novell i consulta quina informació es requereix pel " -#~ "producte.\n" -#~ " En aquest intercanvi inicial només s'envia la identitat del producte " -#~ "instal·lat.\n" +#~ "A Detalls es mostra la quantitat màxima d'informació que es pot incloure\n" +#~ " en el registre. Per obtenir aquesta informació, es posa en contacte amb el\n" +#~ " servidor de Novell i consulta quina informació es requereix pel producte.\n" +#~ " En aquest intercanvi inicial només s'envia la identitat del producte instal·lat.\n" #~ "" #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "If you purchased your copy of this product, enable Registration Code</" -#~ "b>\n" +#~ "If you purchased your copy of this product, enable Registration Code\n" #~ "so you are prompted for your product code. \n" -#~ "This registers you for the installation support included with your " -#~ "product.\n" +#~ "This registers you for the installation support included with your product.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Si heu adquirit una còpia d'aquest producte, habiliteu Codi de " -#~ "registre\n" +#~ "Si heu adquirit una còpia d'aquest producte, habiliteu Codi de registre\n" #~ "i se us demanarà el codi del producte. \n" -#~ "D'aquesta manera, podreu accedir al servei de suport d'instal·lació que " -#~ "inclou el producte.\n" +#~ "D'aquesta manera, podreu accedir al servei de suport d'instal·lació que inclou el producte.\n" #~ "" #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" #~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Novell. The data is used for\n" -#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver " -#~ "support\n" -#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in Details. " -#~ "View\n" -#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</" -#~ "tt>.\n" +#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver support\n" +#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in Details. View\n" +#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "No es facilitarà cap informació a persones externes a Novell. Les dades " -#~ "s'utilitzen amb\n" -#~ "finalitats estadístiques i per millorar facilitar l'ús del suport del " -#~ "controlador\n" -#~ "i el vostre compte web. Trobareu una política de privacitat detallada a " -#~ "Detalls.\n" -#~ " Vegeu la informació transmesa al fitxer de registre <tt>~/.suse_register." -#~ "log</tt>.\n" +#~ "No es facilitarà cap informació a persones externes a Novell. Les dades s'utilitzen amb\n" +#~ "finalitats estadístiques i per millorar facilitar l'ús del suport del controlador\n" +#~ "i el vostre compte web. Trobareu una política de privacitat detallada a Detalls.\n" +#~ " Vegeu la informació transmesa al fitxer de registre <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "" #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center checks that your " -#~ "update \n" +#~ "Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center checks that your update \n" #~ "sources are still valid and adds any new ones that may be available.\n" -#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Novell, " -#~ "such \n" +#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Novell, such \n" #~ "as hardware information if Hardware Information is activated.\n" #~ "This option does not remove any sources added manually.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Sincronització regular amb el centre de servei al client comprova " -#~ "que les fonts d'actualització \n" +#~ "Sincronització regular amb el centre de servei al client comprova que les fonts d'actualització \n" #~ "segueixen sent vàlides i afegeix les noves que hi ha disponibles.\n" -#~ "A més a més, envia qualsevol modificació de les vostres dades incloses a " -#~ "Novell, com ara \n" -#~ "informació de maquinari, en el cas que Informació de maquinari " -#~ "estigui activada.\n" +#~ "A més a més, envia qualsevol modificació de les vostres dades incloses a Novell, com ara \n" +#~ "informació de maquinari, en el cas que Informació de maquinari estigui activada.\n" #~ "Aquesta opció no suprimeix les fonts afegides manualment.\n" #~ "" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with " -#~ "Open-SLX.\n" +#~ "Configure your system to enable online updates by registering it with Open-SLX.\n" #~ "To do this now, select Configure Now. Delay the registration with\n" #~ "Configure Later.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Registreu el sistema amb Novell i configureu-lo per habilitar les " -#~ "actualitzacions en línia.\n" -#~ "Per fer-ho ara, seleccioneu Configura ara. Retardeu el registre " -#~ "amb\n" +#~ "Registreu el sistema amb Novell i configureu-lo per habilitar les actualitzacions en línia.\n" +#~ "Per fer-ho ara, seleccioneu Configura ara. Retardeu el registre amb\n" #~ "Configura més tard.\n" #~ "" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your " -#~ "system\n" +#~ "To simplify the registration process, include information from your system\n" #~ "with Optional Information and Hardware Profile. \n" -#~ "Details shows the maximum amount of information that can be " -#~ "involved\n" -#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Open-" -#~ "SLX\n" -#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the " -#~ "identity\n" +#~ "Details shows the maximum amount of information that can be involved\n" +#~ " in your registration. To obtain this information, it contacts the Open-SLX\n" +#~ "server to query what information is needed for your product. Only the identity\n" #~ "of the installed product is sent in this initial exchange.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Per simplificar el procés de registre, incloeu la informació del vostre " -#~ "sistema\n" +#~ "Per simplificar el procés de registre, incloeu la informació del vostre sistema\n" #~ "amb Informació opcional i Perfil de maquinari. \n" -#~ "A Detalls es mostra la quantitat màxima d'informació que es pot " -#~ "incloure\n" -#~ " en el registre. Per obtenir aquesta informació, es posa en contacte amb " -#~ "el\n" -#~ " servidor de Novell i consulta quina informació es requereix pel " -#~ "producte.\n" -#~ " En aquest intercanvi inicial només s'envia la identitat del producte " -#~ "instal·lat.\n" +#~ "A Detalls es mostra la quantitat màxima d'informació que es pot incloure\n" +#~ " en el registre. Per obtenir aquesta informació, es posa en contacte amb el\n" +#~ " servidor de Novell i consulta quina informació es requereix pel producte.\n" +#~ " En aquest intercanvi inicial només s'envia la identitat del producte instal·lat.\n" #~ "" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Open-SLX. The data is used " -#~ "for\n" -#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver " -#~ "support\n" -#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in Details. " -#~ "View\n" -#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</" -#~ "tt>.\n" +#~ "No information is passed to anyone outside Open-SLX. The data is used for\n" +#~ "statistical purposes and to enhance your convenience regarding driver support\n" +#~ "and your Web account. Find a detailed privacy policy in Details. View\n" +#~ "the transmitted information in the log file <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "No es facilitarà cap informació a persones externes a Novell. Les dades " -#~ "s'utilitzen amb\n" -#~ "finalitats estadístiques i per millorar facilitar l'ús del suport del " -#~ "controlador\n" -#~ "i el vostre compte web. Trobareu una política de privacitat detallada a " -#~ "Detalls.\n" -#~ " Vegeu la informació transmesa al fitxer de registre <tt>~/.suse_register." -#~ "log</tt>.\n" +#~ "No es facilitarà cap informació a persones externes a Novell. Les dades s'utilitzen amb\n" +#~ "finalitats estadístiques i per millorar facilitar l'ús del suport del controlador\n" +#~ "i el vostre compte web. Trobareu una política de privacitat detallada a Detalls.\n" +#~ " Vegeu la informació transmesa al fitxer de registre <tt>~/.suse_register.log</tt>.\n" #~ "" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center checks that your " -#~ "update \n" +#~ "Regularly Synchronize with the Customer Center checks that your update \n" #~ "sources are still valid and adds any new ones that may be available.\n" -#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Open-" -#~ "SLX, such \n" +#~ "It additionally sends any modifications to your included data to Open-SLX, such \n" #~ "as hardware information if Hardware Information is activated.\n" #~ "This option does not remove any sources added manually.\n" #~ "" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Sincronització regular amb el centre de servei al client comprova " -#~ "que les fonts d'actualització \n" +#~ "Sincronització regular amb el centre de servei al client comprova que les fonts d'actualització \n" #~ "segueixen sent vàlides i afegeix les noves que hi ha disponibles.\n" -#~ "A més a més, envia qualsevol modificació de les vostres dades incloses a " -#~ "Novell, com ara \n" -#~ "informació de maquinari, en el cas que Informació de maquinari " -#~ "estigui activada.\n" +#~ "A més a més, envia qualsevol modificació de les vostres dades incloses a Novell, com ara \n" +#~ "informació de maquinari, en el cas que Informació de maquinari estigui activada.\n" #~ "Aquesta opció no suprimeix les fonts afegides manualment.\n" #~ "" @@ -1421,11 +1292,8 @@ #~ msgstr "No s'han pogut instal·lar els paquets següents" #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "To count this installation correctly the package %1 needs to be installed." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Per a configurar l'iniciador de l'iSCSI, cal instal·lar el paquet " -#~ "%1." +#~ msgid "To count this installation correctly the package %1 needs to be installed." +#~ msgstr "Per a configurar l'iniciador de l'iSCSI, cal instal·lar el paquet %1." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Therefore the following package needs to be removed first." @@ -1493,70 +1361,29 @@ #~ msgid "Key is invalid." #~ msgstr "La clau no és vàlida." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Product registration includes your product in Novell's database, " -#~ "enabling you to get online updates and technical support. To register " -#~ "while installing automatically, select Run Product Registration. " -#~ "To simplify the procedure, include information from your system with " -#~ "Hardware Profile and Optional Information." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El registre del producte inclou el producte a la base de dades de " -#~ "Novell i us permet obtenir suport tècnic actualitzacions en línia. Si us " -#~ "voleu registrar mentre realitzeu la instal·lació automàtica, seleccioneu " -#~ "Registre del producte. Per simplificar aquest procediment, incloeu " -#~ "la informació del sistema amb Perfil de maquinari i Informació " -#~ "opcional." +#~ msgid "Product registration includes your product in Novell's database, enabling you to get online updates and technical support. To register while installing automatically, select Run Product Registration. To simplify the procedure, include information from your system with Hardware Profile and Optional Information." +#~ msgstr "El registre del producte inclou el producte a la base de dades de Novell i us permet obtenir suport tècnic actualitzacions en línia. Si us voleu registrar mentre realitzeu la instal·lació automàtica, seleccioneu Registre del producte. Per simplificar aquest procediment, incloeu la informació del sistema amb Perfil de maquinari i Informació opcional." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Get more information about the registration process with " -#~ "<tt>suse_register -h</tt>." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Podeu obtenir més informació sobre el procés de registre amb " -#~ "<tt>suse_register -h</tt>." +#~ msgid "Get more information about the registration process with <tt>suse_register -h</tt>." +#~ msgstr "Podeu obtenir més informació sobre el procés de registre amb <tt>suse_register -h</tt>." #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "Other information used for registration is shown in Registration " -#~| "Data. Add a new key and value pair by pressing Add and " -#~| "then entering the appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that " -#~| "can be passed with <tt>suse_register -a</tt>. Get more information " -#~| "about them with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a pair with Delete</" -#~| "b> or modify an existing pair with Edit." +#~| msgid "Other information used for registration is shown in Registration Data. Add a new key and value pair by pressing Add and then entering the appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with <tt>suse_register -a</tt>. Get more information about them with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a pair with Delete or modify an existing pair with Edit." #~ msgid "" #~ "Other information used for registration is shown in Registration\n" -#~ "Data. To add a new key and value pair, press Add then enter " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with " -#~ "<tt>suse_register\n" -#~ "-a</tt>. Get more information with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove " -#~ "a\n" -#~ "key-value pair with Delete or modify an existing pair with " -#~ "Edit." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Les altres dades que s'utilitzen per a registrar-se es mostren a " -#~ "Dades de registre. Afegiu una clau i un valor parell nou " -#~ "mitjançant l'opció Afegeix, i després introduïu els valors " -#~ "corresponents. Aquests paràmetres es poden passar amb <tt>suse_register -" -#~ "a</tt>. Vegeu <tt>suse_register -p</tt> per obtenir-ne més informació. " -#~ "Suprimiu una parella mitjançant l'opció Suprimeix o modifiqueu una " -#~ "parella existent mitjançant l'opció Edita." +#~ "Data. To add a new key and value pair, press Add then enter the\n" +#~ "appropriate values. These parameters are the ones that can be passed with <tt>suse_register\n" +#~ "-a</tt>. Get more information with <tt>suse_register -p</tt>. Remove a\n" +#~ "key-value pair with Delete or modify an existing pair with Edit." +#~ msgstr "Les altres dades que s'utilitzen per a registrar-se es mostren a Dades de registre. Afegiu una clau i un valor parell nou mitjançant l'opció Afegeix, i després introduïu els valors corresponents. Aquests paràmetres es poden passar amb <tt>suse_register -a</tt>. Vegeu <tt>suse_register -p</tt> per obtenir-ne més informació. Suprimiu una parella mitjançant l'opció Suprimeix o modifiqueu una parella existent mitjançant l'opció Edita." #, fuzzy -#~| msgid "" -#~| "If your network deploys a custom SMT server, please set the URL of " -#~| "the SMT Server and the location of the SMT Certificate in SMT Server " -#~| "Settings. Please see your SMT manual for further assistance." +#~| msgid "If your network deploys a custom SMT server, please set the URL of the SMT Server and the location of the SMT Certificate in SMT Server Settings. Please see your SMT manual for further assistance." #~ msgid "" -#~ "If your network deploys a custom SMT server, set the URL of the SMT " -#~ "Server\n" -#~ "and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. " -#~ "Refer\n" +#~ "If your network deploys a custom SMT server, set the URL of the SMT Server\n" +#~ "and the location of the SMT certificate in SMT Server Settings. Refer\n" #~ "to your SMT manual for further assistance." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Si teniu un servidor SMT personalitzat a la xarxa, establiu l'URL del " -#~ "servidor SMT i la ubicació del Certificat SMT a Configuració del " -#~ "servidor SMT. Per a obtenir-ne més informació, consulteu el manual de " -#~ "l'SMT." +#~ msgstr "Si teniu un servidor SMT personalitzat a la xarxa, establiu l'URL del servidor SMT i la ubicació del Certificat SMT a Configuració del servidor SMT. Per a obtenir-ne més informació, consulteu el manual de l'SMT." #~ msgid "SMT Server" #~ msgstr "Servidor SMT" @@ -1649,8 +1476,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "You can register for installation support." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "S'està escanejant la xarxa per a trobar els serveis d'instal·lació..." +#~ msgstr "S'està escanejant la xarxa per a trobar els serveis d'instal·lació..." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Server CA certificate location:" @@ -1692,30 +1518,22 @@ #~ "and then specify its path by choosing %2.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Si seleccioneu%1, és probable que el procés de registre falli.\n" -#~ "En cas contrari, podeu copiar manualment el fitxer del certificat al " -#~ "sistema\n" +#~ "En cas contrari, podeu copiar manualment el fitxer del certificat al sistema\n" #~ "i especificar el camí si trieu %2." #~ msgid "Could not load the SMT certificate file from floppy disk." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha pogut carregar el fitxer del certificat SMT des del disquet." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut carregar el fitxer del certificat SMT des del disquet." #~ msgid "Could not download the SMT certificate file from specified URL." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha pogut baixar el fitxer del certificat SMT des de l'URL que heu " -#~ "especificat." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut baixar el fitxer del certificat SMT des de l'URL que heu especificat." #~ msgid "Could not find the SMT certificate file in specified path." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha pogut trobar el fitxer del certificat SMT al camí que heu " -#~ "especificat." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut trobar el fitxer del certificat SMT al camí que heu especificat." #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Unknown error occurred while retrieving SMT certificate file" #~ msgid "Unknown error occurred while retrieving SMT certificate file." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "S'ha produït un error desconegut mentre s'obtenia el fitxer del " -#~ "certificat SMT" +#~ msgstr "S'ha produït un error desconegut mentre s'obtenia el fitxer del certificat SMT" #~ msgid "Skip" #~ msgstr "Omet" @@ -1751,8 +1569,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Do you really want to cancel and thereby skip the Registration?" #~ msgid "Do you really want to cancel and thereby skip registration?" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Esteu segur que voleu cancel·lar el registre (i, per tant, ometre'l)?" +#~ msgstr "Esteu segur que voleu cancel·lar el registre (i, per tant, ometre'l)?" #~ msgid "Could not copy certificate file" #~ msgstr "No s'ha pogut copiar el fitxer del certificat" @@ -1766,8 +1583,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" #~| "This certificate will be used to connect to the SMT server.\n" -#~| "You have to trust this certificate in order to continue with the " -#~| "Registration." +#~| "You have to trust this certificate in order to continue with the Registration." #~ msgid "" #~ "This certificate will be used to connect to the SMT server.\n" #~ "You have to trust this certificate to continue with the registration.\n" @@ -1852,9 +1668,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Press %1 to use the default update repository." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Premeu Acaba per a crear el producte complementari al directori " -#~ "de sortida." +#~ msgstr "Premeu Acaba per a crear el producte complementari al directori de sortida." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Edit Software Repositories" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/squid.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/squid.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/squid.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-11-03 09:55+0100\n" "Last-Translator: David Medina <opensusecatala(a)gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Catalan\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -576,12 +577,8 @@ #. Cache Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Refresh Patterns define how Squid treats the objects in the cache." -"\n" -msgstr "" -"Els patrons de refresc defineixen com l'Squid tracta els objectes " -"a la cau.\n" +msgid "Refresh Patterns define how Squid treats the objects in the cache.\n" +msgstr "Els patrons de refresc defineixen com l'Squid tracta els objectes a la cau.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:73 msgid "" @@ -596,8 +593,7 @@ "Min determines how long (in minutes) an object should be\n" "considered fresh if no explicit expiry time is given.\n" msgstr "" -"Min determina durant quan de temps (en minuts) un objecte " -"s'hauria\n" +"Min determina durant quan de temps (en minuts) un objecte s'hauria\n" "de considerar fresc si no té una caducitat explícita establerta.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:79 @@ -607,8 +603,7 @@ "considered fresh.\n" msgstr "" "Percent és el percentatge de l'edat dels objectes (el temps des\n" -"de l'última modificació). Un objecte sense una caducitat explícita es " -"considerarà\n" +"de l'última modificació). Un objecte sense una caducitat explícita es considerarà\n" "fresc.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:84 @@ -621,20 +616,15 @@ #. Cache 2 Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:88 -msgid "" -"Cache memory defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for " -"objects." -msgstr "" -"La memòria cau defineix la quantitat de memòria ideal a ser usada " -"per als objectes." +msgid "Cache memory defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for objects." +msgstr "La memòria cau defineix la quantitat de memòria ideal a ser usada per als objectes." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:91 msgid "" "Max Object Size defines the maximum size for objects to be stored\n" "on the disk. Objects larger than this size will not be saved on disk.\n" msgstr "" -"Mida màxima d'objecte defineix la mida màxima dels objectes a " -"desar\n" +"Mida màxima d'objecte defineix la mida màxima dels objectes a desar\n" "al disc. Els objectes més grans que aquesta mida no es desaran al disc.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:94 @@ -642,8 +632,7 @@ "Min Object Size specifies the minimum size for objects. Smaller \n" "objects will not be saved to the disk.\n" msgstr "" -"Mida mínima d'objecte especifica la mída mínima per als " -"objectes. \n" +"Mida mínima d'objecte especifica la mída mínima per als objectes. \n" "Els objectes més petits no es desaran al disc.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:97 @@ -655,24 +644,18 @@ "If utilization is close to the Swap Low-Water Mark, less replacement\n" "is done each time.\n" msgstr "" -"El reemplaçament comença quan l'ús de la swap (del disc) és per sobre de " -"la\n" -"Marca Swap Marea baixa i intenta mantenir la utilització a prop de " -"la\n" +"El reemplaçament comença quan l'ús de la swap (del disc) és per sobre de la\n" +"Marca Swap Marea baixa i intenta mantenir la utilització a prop de la\n" "Marca Swap Marea baixa. A mesura que l'ús de la swap s'apropa a la\n" -"Marca Swap Marea alta, el desallotjament d'objectes es torna més " -"agressiu.\n" -"Si l'ús és proper a la Marca Swap Low-Water, es fa menys " -"reemplaçament\n" +"Marca Swap Marea alta, el desallotjament d'objectes es torna més agressiu.\n" +"Si l'ús és proper a la Marca Swap Low-Water, es fa menys reemplaçament\n" "cada vedada.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:105 msgid "" -"Cache Replacement Policy determines which objects are to be " -"replaced\n" +"Cache Replacement Policy determines which objects are to be replaced\n" "when disk space is needed.\n" -"Memory Replacement Policy specifies the policy for object replacement " -"in\n" +"Memory Replacement Policy specifies the policy for object replacement in\n" "memory when space for new objects is not available.\n" "Policies could be:\n" "<table>\n" @@ -695,11 +678,9 @@ "</table>\n" "" msgstr "" -"La política de reemplaçament de cau determina quins objectes es " -"reemplacen\n" +"La política de reemplaçament de cau determina quins objectes es reemplacen\n" "quan es necessita espai de disc.\n" -"La política de reemplaçament de memòria especifica la política de " -"reemplaçament d'objectes\n" +"La política de reemplaçament de memòria especifica la política de reemplaçament d'objectes\n" "a la memòria quan no hi ha espai per a objectes nous.\n" "Les polítiques poden ser així:\n" "<table>\n" @@ -724,53 +705,37 @@ #. Cache Directory #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Directory Name defines a top-level directory where cache swap " -"files will be stored." -msgstr "" -"El nom del directori defineix un directori de nivell alt on els " -"fitxers cau d'intercanvi (swap) es desaran." +msgid "Directory Name defines a top-level directory where cache swap files will be stored." +msgstr "El nom del directori defineix un directori de nivell alt on els fitxers cau d'intercanvi (swap) es desaran." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:135 -msgid "" -"Size defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this " -"directory." -msgstr "" -"La mida defineix la quantitat d'espai de disc (en MB) a usar sota " -"aquest directori." +msgid "Size defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this directory." +msgstr "La mida defineix la quantitat d'espai de disc (en MB) a usar sota aquest directori." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"Level 1 Directories defines a number of first-level " -"subdirectories, \n" +"Level 1 Directories defines a number of first-level subdirectories, \n" "which will be created under the Directory Name directory.\n" msgstr "" -"Directoris de nivell 1 defineix un nombre subdirectoris de primer " -"nivell, \n" +"Directoris de nivell 1 defineix un nombre subdirectoris de primer nivell, \n" "que es crearà sota el directori Nom de directori.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:141 msgid "" -"Level 2 Directories defines a number of second-level " -"subdirectories,\n" +"Level 2 Directories defines a number of second-level subdirectories,\n" "which will be created under each first-level directory.\n" msgstr "" -"Directoris de nivell 2 defineix un nombre de subdirectoris de " -"segon nivell,\n" +"Directoris de nivell 2 defineix un nombre de subdirectoris de segon nivell,\n" "que es crearan sota cada directori de primer nivell.\n" #. ACL Groups #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Access to the Squid server can be controlled via ACL Groups." -msgstr "" -"L'accés al servidor Squid es pot controlar a través dels grups ACL." -"" +msgid "Access to the Squid server can be controlled via ACL Groups." +msgstr "L'accés al servidor Squid es pot controlar a través dels grups ACL." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"ACL Group has various types and the description of ACL Group " -"depends\n" +"ACL Group has various types and the description of ACL Group depends\n" "on the particular type.\n" msgstr "" "Un Grup ACL té diversos tipus i la descripció d'un grup ACL depèn\n" @@ -778,16 +743,12 @@ #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:151 msgid "" -"In the Access Control table, access can be denied or allowed to " -"ACL Groups.\n" -"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be " -"allowed\n" +"In the Access Control table, access can be denied or allowed to ACL Groups.\n" +"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be allowed\n" "or denied to members who belong to all ACL Groups at the same time.\n" msgstr "" -"A la taula de control d'accés, es pot denegar o permetre l'accés a " -"grups ACL.\n" -"Si hi ha més grups ACL en una línia, significa que l'accés es permetrà o es " -"denegarà\n" +"A la taula de control d'accés, es pot denegar o permetre l'accés a grups ACL.\n" +"Si hi ha més grups ACL en una línia, significa que l'accés es permetrà o es denegarà\n" "a membres que pertanyin a tots els grups ACL al mateix temps.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:156 @@ -800,35 +761,25 @@ #. Logging and Timeouts Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"Access Log defines the file in which client activities are logged." -"" -msgstr "" -"El registre d'accés defineix el fitxer en què es registren les " -"activitats del client." +msgid "Access Log defines the file in which client activities are logged." +msgstr "El registre d'accés defineix el fitxer en què es registren les activitats del client." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:163 msgid "" -"Cache Log defines the file in which general information about " -"your\n" +"Cache Log defines the file in which general information about your\n" "cache's behavior is logged.\n" msgstr "" -"El registre cau defineix el fitxer en què es registra informació " -"general sobre\n" +"El registre cau defineix el fitxer en què es registra informació general sobre\n" "el comportament de la cau.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:166 msgid "" -"Cache Store Log defines the location of the transaction log of " -"all\n" -"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an " -"object\n" +"Cache Store Log defines the location of the transaction log of all\n" +"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an object\n" "gets deleted. This option can be left empty.\n" msgstr "" -"Cache Store Log defineix la localització del registre de " -"transacció de tots\n" -"els objectes que es desen al magatzem d'objectes així com l'hora en què un " -"objecte\n" +"Cache Store Log defineix la localització del registre de transacció de tots\n" +"els objectes que es desen al magatzem d'objectes així com l'hora en què un objecte\n" "s'elimina. Aquesta opció pot deixar-se buida.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:171 @@ -837,16 +788,14 @@ "Access Log in HTTPD common log file format.\n" msgstr "" "Amb Emula el registre httpd s'especifica que l'Squid escrigui\n" -"el seu Registre d'entrada en un format de fitxer de registre comú " -"HTTPD.\n" +"el seu Registre d'entrada en un format de fitxer de registre comú HTTPD.\n" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:174 msgid "" "Connection Timeout is an option to force Squid to close\n" "connections after a specified time." msgstr "" -"El temps d'espera de la connexió és una opció que força l'Squid a " -"tancar\n" +"El temps d'espera de la connexió és una opció que força l'Squid a tancar\n" "connexions després d'un temps especificat." #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:177 @@ -863,8 +812,7 @@ "Administrator's email is the address which will be added to any\n" "error pages that are displayed to clients. Defaults to webmaster.\n" msgstr "" -"L'adreça electrònica de l'administrador és l'adreça que s'afegirà " -"a qualsevol\n" +"L'adreça electrònica de l'administrador és l'adreça que s'afegirà a qualsevol\n" "pàgina d'error que es mostri als clients. Predeterminats a webmaster.\n" #. table cell @@ -1014,11 +962,8 @@ #. test if changed ACL is used in other option (not managed by thid module) #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:467 -msgid "" -"If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" -msgstr "" -"Si canvieu el nom d'aquest grup ACL, aquestes opcions en podrien ser " -"afectades: \n" +msgid "If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgstr "Si canvieu el nom d'aquest grup ACL, aquestes opcions en podrien ser afectades: \n" #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:474 msgid "Change name anyway" @@ -1044,8 +989,7 @@ #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:524 msgid "If you delete this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" -msgstr "" -"Si elimineu aquest grup ACL, se'n veuran afectades aquestes opcions: \n" +msgstr "Si elimineu aquest grup ACL, se'n veuran afectades aquestes opcions: \n" #. + #. _("Are you sure you want to delete this ACL Group?"); @@ -1083,8 +1027,7 @@ #. ******* LOGGING AND TIMEOUTS DIALOG END ****** #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:691 msgid "Administrator's email must not contain any white spaces." -msgstr "" -"L'adreça electrònica de l'administrador no ha de contenir espais en blanc." +msgstr "L'adreça electrònica de l'administrador no ha de contenir espais en blanc." #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/squid/wizards.rb:85 @@ -1334,12 +1277,8 @@ msgstr "Domini de destinació" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:148 -msgid "" -"This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the " -"origin server is located." -msgstr "" -"Això fa referència al domini de destinació, p. e. el domini font on és el " -"servidor original." +msgid "This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the origin server is located." +msgstr "Això fa referència al domini de destinació, p. e. el domini font on és el servidor original." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:155 msgid "Matches the client domain name." @@ -1398,11 +1337,8 @@ msgstr "Coincideix amb l'ús d'una expressió regular a l'URL complet." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" -msgstr "" -"Coincideix amb el camí URL menys cap protocol, port i informació de nom " -"d'amfitrió" +msgid "Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" +msgstr "Coincideix amb el camí URL menys cap protocol, port i informació de nom d'amfitrió" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:220 msgid "port" @@ -1451,28 +1387,19 @@ #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:271 msgid "This type matches the HTTP method in the request headers." -msgstr "" -"Aquest tipus coincideix amb el mètode HTTP a les capçaleres de petició." +msgstr "Aquest tipus coincideix amb el mètode HTTP a les capçaleres de petició." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:278 -msgid "" -"A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the " -"user agent header." -msgstr "" -"Una expressió regular que coincideix amb el tipus de navegador del client " -"basat en la capçalera d'agent d'usuari." +msgid "A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the user agent header." +msgstr "Una expressió regular que coincideix amb el tipus de navegador del client basat en la capçalera d'agent d'usuari." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:288 msgid "Maximum Number of HTTP Connections" msgstr "Nombre màxim de connexions HTTP" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:300 -msgid "" -"Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of " -"HTTP connections established." -msgstr "" -"Coincideix quan l'adreça IP del client té més connexions HTTP establertes " -"del nombre especificat." +msgid "Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of HTTP connections established." +msgstr "Coincideix quan l'adreça IP del client té més connexions HTTP establertes del nombre especificat." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:307 msgid "Matches Referer header." @@ -1488,19 +1415,15 @@ #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:328 msgid "Regular expression matching any of the known request headers." -msgstr "" -"Expressió regular coincident amb qualsevol capçalera de petició coneguda." +msgstr "Expressió regular coincident amb qualsevol capçalera de petició coneguda." #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:351 msgid "" -"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. " -"Can\n" +"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. Can\n" "be used to detect file download or some types of HTTP tunnelling requests.\n" msgstr "" -"Expressió regular que coincideix amb el tipus mime de la resposta rebuda per " -"l'Squid.\n" -"Es pot usar per detectar la baixada de fitxers o alguns tipus de peticions " -"d'HTTP tunnelling.\n" +"Expressió regular que coincideix amb el tipus mime de la resposta rebuda per l'Squid.\n" +"Es pot usar per detectar la baixada de fitxers o alguns tipus de peticions d'HTTP tunnelling.\n" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:358 msgid "Match the mime type of the request generated by the client." Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/storage.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/storage.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/storage.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -31,12 +31,10 @@ "\n" "To continue despite this warning, click Yes.\n" msgstr "" -"Utilitzeu aquest programa només si esteu familiaritzat amb el mètode de " -"partició de discos durs.\n" +"Utilitzeu aquest programa només si esteu familiaritzat amb el mètode de partició de discos durs.\n" "\n" "Mai no feu la partició de discos que puguin estar en ús d'alguna manera\n" -"(muntats, com a intercanvi, etc.), tret que sapigueu exactament el que esteu " -"fent.\n" +"(muntats, com a intercanvi, etc.), tret que sapigueu exactament el que esteu fent.\n" "En cas contrari, la taula de particions no es transmetrà al\n" "nucli, la qual cosa podria ocasionar la pèrdua de dades.\n" "\n" @@ -167,8 +165,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: popup error message #: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:238 msgid "Not enough space available to propose snapshots for root volume." -msgstr "" -"No hi ha prou espai disponible per proposar instantànies del volum d'arrel." +msgstr "No hi ha prou espai disponible per proposar instantànies del volum d'arrel." #. TRANSLATORS: popup error message #: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:244 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 @@ -272,8 +269,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "El canvi de mida real només es durà a terme un cop s'hagin confirmat totes\n" -"les seleccions fetes a l'última finestra de la instal·lació. Fins aleshores, " -"la \n" +"les seleccions fetes a l'última finestra de la instal·lació. Fins aleshores, la \n" "partició del Windows no es modificarà.\n" "\n" @@ -321,8 +317,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "A la barra gràfica superior es mostra la situació actual.\n" -"A la barra gràfica inferior es mostra la situació després de la instal·lació " -"(un \n" +"A la barra gràfica inferior es mostra la situació després de la instal·lació (un \n" "cop dut a terme el redimensionament).\n" "\n" @@ -389,8 +384,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Introduïu un valor per a determinar la mida de la instal·lació de " -"Linux.\n" +"Introduïu un valor per a determinar la mida de la instal·lació de Linux.\n" "Les particions del sistema &product; es crearan de forma automàtica\n" "en funció d'aquest valor.\n" "\n" @@ -406,8 +400,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "\n" -"Windows usat és la mida de la part emprada en la partició de " -"Windows.\n" +"Windows usat és la mida de la part emprada en la partició de Windows.\n" "\n" #. help text (non-graphical mode), continued @@ -450,8 +443,7 @@ "la instal·lació mínima de Linux.\n" "\n" "Per instal·lar Linux, primer heu d'arrencar Windows\n" -"i desinstal·lar algunes aplicacions o suprimir algunes dades per alliberar-" -"ne espai.\n" +"i desinstal·lar algunes aplicacions o suprimir algunes dades per alliberar-ne espai.\n" "\n" "Necessiteu com a mínim %1 MB d'espai lliure al dispositiu de\n" "Windows, comptant l'espai ocupat per l'estació de treball Windows i per a \n" @@ -528,9 +520,7 @@ #. popup text #: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:96 msgid "Your system can only be configured with the custom partitioning option." -msgstr "" -"El vostre sistema només pot configurar-se amb l'opció de partició " -"personalitzada." +msgstr "El vostre sistema només pot configurar-se amb l'opció de partició personalitzada." #. Win NT / 2000 #. The Windows version is Windows NT or Windows 2000. Tell the user that this is currently @@ -622,8 +612,7 @@ msgstr "" "Heu decidit suprimir completament la partició de Windows.\n" "\n" -"Totes les dades que es trobin en aquesta partició es perdran durant el " -"procés.\n" +"Totes les dades que es trobin en aquesta partició es perdran durant el procés.\n" "\n" "Esteu segur que voleu suprimir la partició de Windows?\n" @@ -668,11 +657,8 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." -msgstr "" -"No s'han trobat discos. Proveu d'utilitzar CD d'actualització per a la " -"instal·lació, si està disponible." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgstr "No s'han trobat discos. Proveu d'utilitzar CD d'actualització per a la instal·lació, si està disponible." #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on #. one hard disk - this selection is done here @@ -688,8 +674,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Tots els discos durs detectats automàticament al sistema\n" -"es mostren aquí. Seleccioneu el disc dur al qual voleu instal·lar el " -"&product;.\n" +"es mostren aquí. Seleccioneu el disc dur al qual voleu instal·lar el &product;.\n" "\n" #. help part 2 of 3 @@ -700,8 +685,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Posteriorment podeu seleccionar el lloc del disc dur on s'instal·larà el " -"&product;.\n" +"Posteriorment podeu seleccionar el lloc del disc dur on s'instal·larà el &product;.\n" "\n" #. help part 3 of 3 @@ -718,8 +702,7 @@ "\n" "Per als experts existeix l’opció Particionament personalitzat\n" "que permet tenir un control complet sobre les particions dels discos durs\n" -"i assignar les particions a punts de muntatge durant la instal·lació de " -"&productes;.\n" +"i assignar les particions a punts de muntatge durant la instal·lació de &productes;.\n" "\n" #. first step of hd prepare, select a single disk or "expert" partitioning @@ -802,8 +785,7 @@ "ensure that ownerships of home directories are set properly." msgstr "" "La partició /home no es formatarà. Després de la instal·lació,\n" -"assegureu-vos que els propietaris dels directoris de la carpeta de l'usuari " -"estiguin ben establerts." +"assegureu-vos que els propietaris dels directoris de la carpeta de l'usuari estiguin ben establerts." #. label text #: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:218 @@ -953,10 +935,8 @@ "" msgstr "" "\n" -"És molt probable que el disc dur seleccionat s'utilitzi per al Windows. No " -"hi ha \n" -"prou espai per a &product;. Es pot suprimir el Windows completament, " -"o bé,\n" +"És molt probable que el disc dur seleccionat s'utilitzi per al Windows. No hi ha \n" +"prou espai per a &product;. Es pot suprimir el Windows completament, o bé,\n" "encongir la partició per a obtenir espai lliure.\n" "" @@ -971,8 +951,7 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Si suprimiu el Windows, totes les dades que es trobin en aquesta partició es " -"perdran \n" +"Si suprimiu el Windows, totes les dades que es trobin en aquesta partició es perdran \n" "de forma irreversible durant la instal·lació. Si voleu encongir la\n" "partició del Windows, és molt recomanable fer una\n" "còpia de seguretat de les dades, ja que es realitzarà una\n" @@ -1010,8 +989,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "No heu assignat cap partició d'arrel per a la\n" -"instal·lació. Això no funciona. Assigneu el punt de muntatge d'arrel \"/\" a " -"una\n" +"instal·lació. Això no funciona. Assigneu el punt de muntatge d'arrel \"/\" a una\n" "partició.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1026,10 +1004,8 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Heu intentat muntar una partició fat en un\n" -"dels punts de muntatge següents: /, /usr, /home, /opt o /var. Això " -"probablement comportarà problemes.\n" -"Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers de Linux (ext3 o ext4) per a aquests punts " -"de muntatge.\n" +"dels punts de muntatge següents: /, /usr, /home, /opt o /var. Això probablement comportarà problemes.\n" +"Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers de Linux (ext3 o ext4) per a aquests punts de muntatge.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu utilitzar aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1043,8 +1019,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Heu intentat muntar una partició FAT sobre el punt de muntatge /boot.\n" -"Això probablement comportarà problemes. Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers " -"Linux\n" +"Això probablement comportarà problemes. Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers Linux\n" "com ara ext3 o ext4 per aquest punt de muntatge.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1059,8 +1034,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Heu muntat una partició amb Btrfs al punt de\n" -"muntatge /boot. Això probablement causarà problems. Feu servir un sistema de " -"fitxers Linux \n" +"muntatge /boot. Això probablement causarà problems. Feu servir un sistema de fitxers Linux \n" "com ara ext3 o ext4 per a aquest punt de muntatge.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1110,8 +1084,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Avís: No hi ha cap partició del tipus bios_grub present.\n" -"Per arrencar des d'un disc GPT fent servir el grub2 aquesta partició és " -"necessària.\n" +"Per arrencar des d'un disc GPT fent servir el grub2 aquesta partició és necessària.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1129,8 +1102,7 @@ "Really use the setup without /boot partition?\n" msgstr "" "Atenció: no existeix cap partició muntada com a /boot.\n" -"Si voleu fer l'arrencada des del disc dur necessitareu una petita partició /" -"boot (d'aproximadament %1).\n" +"Si voleu fer l'arrencada des del disc dur necessitareu una petita partició /boot (d'aproximadament %1).\n" " Tingueu en compte que se'n poden crear.\n" "Les particions assignades a /boot es canviaran de forma automàtica al tipus\n" "0x41 PReP/CHRP.\n" @@ -1150,11 +1122,9 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Atenció: en funció de la configuració, preteneu arrencar\n" -"la màquina des de la partició arrel (/). Malauradament, aquesta partició " -"acaba\n" +"la màquina des de la partició arrel (/). Malauradament, aquesta partició acaba\n" "en un cilindre per sobre de %1. Sembla que la BIOS no pot arrencar\n" -"les particions situades per sobre del límit de %1, la qual cosa significa " -"que la instal·lació \n" +"les particions situades per sobre del límit de %1, la qual cosa significa que la instal·lació \n" "de %2 no es podrà arrencar directament.\n" "\n" "Voleu fer servir realment aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1167,8 +1137,7 @@ "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" "Avís: alguns subvolums del sistema de fitxers d'arrel són tapats\n" -"pels punts de muntatge d'altres sistemes de fitxers. Això podria comportar " -"problemes.\n" +"pels punts de muntatge d'altres sistemes de fitxers. Això podria comportar problemes.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1182,12 +1151,10 @@ "\n" "Really use this setup?\n" msgstr "" -"Atenció: en funció de la configuració actual, és possible que la " -"instal·lació de %1\n" +"Atenció: en funció de la configuració actual, és possible que la instal·lació de %1\n" "no es pugui iniciar directament ja que\n" "els fitxers per sota de \"/boot\" es troben en un dispositiu RAID.\n" -"En algunes ocasions, l'inici del carregador d'arrencada falla en aquesta " -"configuració.\n" +"En algunes ocasions, l'inici del carregador d'arrencada falla en aquesta configuració.\n" "\n" "Realment voleu fer servir aquesta configuració?\n" @@ -1253,16 +1220,14 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap" -"\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" msgstr "" "\n" "No s'ha assignat cap partició d'intercanvi. Encara que això no és \n" -"del tot incorrecte, és molt recomanable crear i activar una partició " -"d'intercanvi.\n" +"del tot incorrecte, és molt recomanable crear i activar una partició d'intercanvi.\n" "Les particions d'intercanvi creades al sistema apareixen a la finestra\n" "principal amb el tipus \"Linux Swap\".\n" "Una partició d'intercanvi activada té el punt de muntatge \"swap\".\n" @@ -1279,8 +1244,7 @@ "particularly in any of the following cases:\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Heu triat fer una instal·lació en una partició ja existent que no es " -"formatarà.\n" +"Heu triat fer una instal·lació en una partició ja existent que no es formatarà.\n" "El YaST2 no pot garantir una instal·lació amb èxit, especialment en\n" "els casos següents:\n" @@ -1301,14 +1265,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:516 msgid "" "If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" -"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount " -"points\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" "like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" msgstr "" -"Si en teniu cap dubte, seria millor que tornéssiu enrere i que marquéssiu " -"aquesta partició\n" -"perquè es formati, especialment si està assignada a un dels punts de " -"muntatge estàndard\n" +"Si en teniu cap dubte, seria millor que tornéssiu enrere i que marquéssiu aquesta partició\n" +"perquè es formati, especialment si està assignada a un dels punts de muntatge estàndard\n" "com ara /, /boot, /opt o /var.\n" #. continued popup text @@ -1377,25 +1338,20 @@ "The device (%1) cannot be removed since it is a logical partition and \n" "another logical partition with a higher number is in use.\n" msgstr "" -"El dispositiu (%1) no es pot eliminar atès que es tracta d'una partició " -"lògica i \n" +"El dispositiu (%1) no es pot eliminar atès que es tracta d'una partició lògica i \n" "ja s'està fent servir una altra partició lògica amb un número més gran.\n" #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" -"La partició ampliada seleccionada conté les particions muntades en aquest " -"moment:\n" +"La partició ampliada seleccionada conté les particions muntades en aquest moment:\n" "%1\n" -"És altament recomanable desmuntar aquestes particions abans de suprimir la " -"partició ampliada.\n" +"És altament recomanable desmuntar aquestes particions abans de suprimir la partició ampliada.\n" "Trieu Cancel·la si no teniu coneixements de com funciona.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. @@ -1409,8 +1365,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "La partició ampliada seleccionada conté com a mínim una partició de LVM\n" -"assignada a un grup del volum. En primer lloc, elimineu totes les particions " -"dels grups de volum respectius, abans de suprimir la partició ampliada.\n" +"assignada a un grup del volum. En primer lloc, elimineu totes les particions dels grups de volum respectius, abans de suprimir la partició ampliada.\n" #. popup text, Do not translate RAID. #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:795 @@ -1559,32 +1514,26 @@ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" "to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" -"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is " -"disabled, \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" "this is not possible.\n" msgstr "" "Munta en /etc/fstab per:\n" "normalment, un sistema de fitxers que es munta es reconeix a /etc/fstab\n" -"pel nom de dispositiu. Aquest nom es pot canviar per trobar el sistema de " -"fitxers que\n" -"es muntarà si es cerca per UUID o per etiquetes de volum. No tots els " -"sistemes de fitxers\n" -"es poden muntar per UUID o per etiqueta de volum. Si una opció està " -"inhabilitada,\n" +"pel nom de dispositiu. Aquest nom es pot canviar per trobar el sistema de fitxers que\n" +"es muntarà si es cerca per UUID o per etiquetes de volum. No tots els sistemes de fitxers\n" +"es poden muntar per UUID o per etiqueta de volum. Si una opció està inhabilitada,\n" "això no serà possible.\n" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "Volume Label:\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" "Etiqueta del volum:\n" -"el nom que introduïu aquest camp s'utilitzarà com l'etiqueta del volum. En " -"general, només\n" +"el nom que introduïu aquest camp s'utilitzarà com l'etiqueta del volum. En general, només\n" "és recomanable quan activeu l'opció de muntar per etiqueta de volum.\n" "L'etiqueta de volum no pot contenir el caràcter / ni cap espai.\n" @@ -1607,7 +1556,6 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:516 -#| msgid "UUID" msgid "&UUID" msgstr "&UUID" @@ -1708,13 +1656,11 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "La partició seleccionada (%1) actualment està muntada a %2.\n" -"Si es canvia algun paràmetre (com ara el punt de muntatge o el tipus de " -"sistema de fitxers),\n" +"Si es canvia algun paràmetre (com ara el punt de muntatge o el tipus de sistema de fitxers),\n" "es pot malmetre la instal·lació de Linux.\n" "\n" "Desmunteu la partició si és possible. Si no n'esteu segur,\n" -"és recomanable cancel·lar l'operació. No continueu si no teniu " -"coneixements \n" +"és recomanable cancel·lar l'operació. No continueu si no teniu coneixements \n" "de com funciona.\n" "\n" "Voleu continuar?\n" @@ -1728,8 +1674,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "El YaST2 no pot reduir el sistema de fitxers de la partició.\n" -"Només fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 i reiser permeten la reducció d'un sistema de " -"fitxers." +"Només fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 i reiser permeten la reducció d'un sistema de fitxers." #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1308 @@ -1740,8 +1685,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "El YaST2 no pot reduir el sistema de fitxers del volum lògic.\n" -"Només fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 i reiser permeten la reducció d'un sistema de " -"fitxers." +"Només fat, ext2, ext3, ext4 i reiser permeten la reducció d'un sistema de fitxers." #. Popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1320 @@ -1801,8 +1745,7 @@ "Shrink the file system now?" msgstr "" "\n" -"Tot i que és possible reduir un sistema de fitxers reiser, aquesta funció " -"està\n" +"Tot i que és possible reduir un sistema de fitxers reiser, aquesta funció està\n" "poc provada. És recomanable fer una còpia de seguretat de les dades.\n" "\n" "Voleu reduir el sistema de fitxers?" @@ -1812,8 +1755,7 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "El dispositiu seleccionat conté particions muntades:\n" @@ -1873,9 +1815,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1552 msgid "Enable automatic snapshots for a Btrfs filesystem with snapper." -msgstr "" -"Habilita les instantànies automàtiques per al sistema de fitxers Btrfs " -"amb Snapper." +msgstr "Habilita les instantànies automàtiques per al sistema de fitxers Btrfs amb Snapper." #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1566 @@ -1975,19 +1915,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -"tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Aquest punt de muntatge correspon a un sistema de fitxers temporals, com " -"ara /tmp o /var/tmp.\n" +"Aquest punt de muntatge correspon a un sistema de fitxers temporals, com ara /tmp o /var/tmp.\n" "Si deixeu en blanc la contrasenya d'encriptació, el sistema crearà\n" -"una contrasenya aleatòria en iniciar el sistema. Això significa que perdreu " -"totes\n" +"una contrasenya aleatòria en iniciar el sistema. Això significa que perdreu totes\n" "les dades d'aquests sistemes de fitxers en apagar el sistema.\n" "\n" @@ -1997,20 +1934,16 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Si no recordeu la contrasenya, no podreu accedir a les dades del sistema de " -"fitxers.\n" -"Trieu la contrasenya amb deteniment. Es recomana que sigui una combinació de " -"lletres\n" -"i xifres. Com a mesura per a assegurar que l'heu introduïda correctament, " -"l'haureu\n" +"Si no recordeu la contrasenya, no podreu accedir a les dades del sistema de fitxers.\n" +"Trieu la contrasenya amb deteniment. Es recomana que sigui una combinació de lletres\n" +"i xifres. Com a mesura per a assegurar que l'heu introduïda correctament, l'haureu\n" "d'escriure dues vegades.\n" "\n" @@ -2020,15 +1953,13 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"S’ha de distingir entre majúscules i minúscules; a més, una contrasenya ha " -"de tenir com a\n" +"S’ha de distingir entre majúscules i minúscules; a més, una contrasenya ha de tenir com a\n" "mínim %1 de caràcters i no pot contenir cap caràcter especial\n" "(p. ex., lletres accentuades o amb dièresi).\n" "\n" @@ -2076,16 +2007,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select Skip. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "\n" "Si el sistema de fitxers xifrat no conté cap fitxer de sistema i, per tant,\n" -"l'actualització no és necessària, podeu seleccionar Omet. En aquest " -"cas,\n" +"l'actualització no és necessària, podeu seleccionar Omet. En aquest cas,\n" "no s'accedeix al sistema de fitxers durant l'actualització.\n" "\n" @@ -2106,8 +2035,7 @@ "\n" "És probable que no es pugui arrencar aquesta configuració.\n" "\n" -"Si necessiteu utilitzar aquest disc per a la instal·lació, hauríeu " -"d'eliminar\n" +"Si necessiteu utilitzar aquest disc per a la instal·lació, hauríeu d'eliminar\n" "l'etiqueta del disc amb el partidor en mode Expert.\n" #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:187 @@ -2145,8 +2073,7 @@ "Really do this?\n" msgstr "" "Heu seleccionat l’opció de no muntar automàticament un sistema de fitxers\n" -"durant l’inici que podria contenir fitxers necessaris per a un funcionament " -"correcte del sistema.\n" +"durant l’inici que podria contenir fitxers necessaris per a un funcionament correcte del sistema.\n" "\n" "Aquesta opció pot comportar problemes.\n" " \n" @@ -2161,8 +2088,7 @@ "nonloopbacked file system.\n" msgstr "" "Heu assignat un sistema de fitxers xifrats a una\n" -"partició amb un dels següents punts de muntatge: \"/\", \"/usr\", \"/boot" -"\",\n" +"partició amb un dels següents punts de muntatge: \"/\", \"/usr\", \"/boot\",\n" "/var\". Això no és possible. Canvieu el punt de muntatge o utilitzeu un\n" "sistema de fitxers que no sigui de bucle de retorn.\n" @@ -2199,8 +2125,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:225 msgid "Only swap devices may have swap as mount point." -msgstr "" -"Només els dispositius d'intercanvi poden tenir el punt de muntatge swap." +msgstr "Només els dispositius d'intercanvi poden tenir el punt de muntatge swap." #. && mount!="swap" ) #. error popup text @@ -2219,11 +2144,8 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." -msgstr "" -"Hi ha un caràcter no vàlid al punt de muntatge. No utilitzeu \"`'!%#\" en un " -"punt de muntatge." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgstr "Hi ha un caràcter no vàlid al punt de muntatge. No utilitzeu \"`'!%#\" en un punt de muntatge." #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:268 @@ -2332,8 +2254,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1050 msgid "It is not possible to resize the file system while it is mounted." -msgstr "" -"No es pot canviar la mida del sistema de fitxers mentre estigui muntat." +msgstr "No es pot canviar la mida del sistema de fitxers mentre estigui muntat." #. push button text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:80 @@ -2417,8 +2338,7 @@ "navigate to the view with detailed information about the device." msgstr "" "Si seleccioneu una entrada de taula podeu\n" -"navegar a la visualització que conté informació detallada sobre el " -"dispositiu." +"navegar a la visualització que conté informació detallada sobre el dispositiu." #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:233 @@ -2792,13 +2712,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" -"volume, select Encrypt Device. Changing the encryption on an " -"existing\n" +"volume, select Encrypt Device. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" "volume will delete all data on it.\n" msgstr "" "Si voleu encriptar totes les dades del\n" -"volum, seleccioneu Encriptar el dispositiu. Canviar l'encriptació " -"d'un volum ja existent\n" +"volum, seleccioneu Encriptar el dispositiu. Canviar l'encriptació d'un volum ja existent\n" "n'esborrarà totes les dades.\n" #. helptext @@ -2898,10 +2816,8 @@ "\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"El sistema de fitxers que s'utilitza en aquest volum és d'intercanvi. Podeu " -"deixar buida\n" -"la contrasenya d'encriptació però, en aquest cas, el dispositiu d'intercanvi " -"no es podrà\n" +"El sistema de fitxers que s'utilitza en aquest volum és d'intercanvi. Podeu deixar buida\n" +"la contrasenya d'encriptació però, en aquest cas, el dispositiu d'intercanvi no es podrà\n" "utilitzar per hibernar (suspendre al disc).\n" "\n" @@ -3012,8 +2928,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:359 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:692 msgid "The size entered is invalid. Enter a size between %1 and %2." -msgstr "" -"La mida que heu introduït no és vàlida. Introduïu una mida entre %1 i %2." +msgstr "La mida que heu introduït no és vàlida. Introduïu una mida entre %1 i %2." #. FIXME: To check whether the part. can be resized only #. after user tries to do that is stupid - in some cases @@ -3028,8 +2943,7 @@ msgstr "" "Esteu ampliant un sistema de fitxers muntat amb %1 Gigabytes.\n" "Això pot ser molt lent i podria trigar fins i tot hores. Podríeu considerar\n" -"desmuntar el sistema de fitxers, la qual cosa faria molt més ràpida la feina " -"de\n" +"desmuntar el sistema de fitxers, la qual cosa faria molt més ràpida la feina de\n" "redimensionar-lo. " #. label for log view @@ -3075,8 +2989,7 @@ msgstr "" "Aquesta visualització mostra tots els dispositius\n" "del mapador de dispositius, llevat dels que ja apareixen en alguna altra\n" -"visualització. Per tant, no es mostren els discs multicamí, els volums " -"lògics d'LVM ni els RAID de la BIOS.\n" +"visualització. Per tant, no es mostren els discs multicamí, els volums lògics d'LVM ni els RAID de la BIOS.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:161 @@ -3561,8 +3474,7 @@ "iSCSI disks, BIOS RAIDs and multipath disks and their partitions.\n" msgstr "" "Aquesta visualització mostra tots els discs durs, inclosos\n" -"els discs iSCSI, els RAID de la BIOS i els discs multicamí i les seves " -"particions.\n" +"els discs iSCSI, els RAID de la BIOS i els discs multicamí i les seves particions.\n" #. push button text (do not translate 'SMART', it is the name of the tool) #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:320 @@ -3640,8 +3552,7 @@ "software RAIDs and multipath disks.\n" msgstr "" "Aquesta visualització mostra tots els dispositius\n" -"que utilitza el disc dur seleccionat. La taula només està disponible per a " -"RAID de BIOS, RAID de programari i discs\n" +"que utilitza el disc dur seleccionat. La taula només està disponible per a RAID de BIOS, RAID de programari i discs\n" "multicamí.\n" #. tab heading @@ -3675,10 +3586,8 @@ "Linux systems with mount points. The old mount points are shown in \n" "the table.\n" msgstr "" -"El YaST2 ha escanejat els discos durs i ha trobat un o més sistemes " -"Linux\n" -"amb punts de muntatge. A la llista es mostren els punts muntatge que s'han " -"trobat.\n" +"El YaST2 ha escanejat els discos durs i ha trobat un o més sistemes Linux\n" +"amb punts de muntatge. A la llista es mostren els punts muntatge que s'han trobat.\n" #. help text, richtext format #: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:305 @@ -3740,8 +3649,7 @@ "and its logical volumes will be deleted:\n" msgstr "" "La partició seleccionada l'està usant el grup de volum \"%1\".\n" -"Per mantenir el sistema en un estat consistent, els següents grups de " -"volums\n" +"Per mantenir el sistema en un estat consistent, els següents grups de volums\n" "i els seus volums lògics s'eliminaran:\n" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:117 @@ -3844,13 +3752,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"Path Name of Loop File: This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Nom de camí del fitxer de bucle Ha de ser un camí absolut al " -"fitxer\n" +"Nom de camí del fitxer de bucle Ha de ser un camí absolut al fitxer\n" "que contingui les dades per configurar el dispositiu de bucle xifrat.\n" #. helptext @@ -3862,8 +3768,7 @@ "exists, all data in it is lost.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"Crea un fitxer de bucle Si aquesta opció està activada, el " -"fitxer es\n" +"Crea un fitxer de bucle Si aquesta opció està activada, el fitxer es\n" "crearà amb la mida indicada al camp següent. NOTA: si el fitxer \n" "ja existeix, es perdran totes les dades que contingui.\n" @@ -3889,10 +3794,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "NOTA: durant la instal·lació el YaST no pot fer cap comprovació\n" -"de coherència de les mides dels fitxers ni dels noms dels camins perquè no " -"es pot\n" -"accedir al sistema de fitxers. Es crearà al final de la instal·lació. Per " -"tant,\n" +"de coherència de les mides dels fitxers ni dels noms dels camins perquè no es pot\n" +"accedir al sistema de fitxers. Es crearà al final de la instal·lació. Per tant,\n" "aneu amb compte a l'hora d'assignar les mides i els noms dels camins.\n" #. input field label @@ -4073,9 +3976,7 @@ #. pop-up dialog message part 2: %1 is vol.group name #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:118 msgid "Really delete volume group \"%1\" and all related logical volumes?" -msgstr "" -"Segur que voleu suprimir el grup de volums \"%1\" i tots els volums lògics " -"que s'hi relacionen?" +msgstr "Segur que voleu suprimir el grup de volums \"%1\" i tots els volums lògics que s'hi relacionen?" #. error popup, %1, %2 and %3 are replaced by sizes #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:132 @@ -4083,8 +3984,7 @@ "The data entered is invalid. Insert a physical extent size larger than %1\n" "in powers of 2, for example, \"%2\" or \"%3\"" msgstr "" -"Les dades que heu introduït no són vàlides. Introduïu una mida física " -"ampliada\n" +"Les dades que heu introduït no són vàlides. Introduïu una mida física ampliada\n" "més gran que %1 en potències de 2, per exemple, \"%2\" o \"%3\"." #. error popup text @@ -4118,14 +4018,12 @@ #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:238 msgid "Enter the name and physical extent size of the new volume group." -msgstr "" -"Introduïu el nom i la mida física ampliada del grup de volums nou. " +msgstr "Introduïu el nom i la mida física ampliada del grup de volums nou. " #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:245 msgid "Select the physical volumes the volume group should contain." -msgstr "" -"Seleccioneu els volums físics que ha de contenir el grup de volums." +msgstr "Seleccioneu els volums físics que ha de contenir el grup de volums." #. label for input field #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:283 @@ -4158,8 +4056,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group." msgstr "" "Introduïu la mida així com també la quantitat i la mida\n" @@ -4177,13 +4074,10 @@ "Thin Volumes cannot have a Stripe Count." msgstr "" "Els anomenatsVolums Prims poden ser creats\n" -"amb una mida de volum arbitrària. L'espai necessari s'agafa segons les " -"necessitats \n" -"assignades per Thin Pool. Així podeu crear volums prims d'una mida " -"més grossa\n" +"amb una mida de volum arbitrària. L'espai necessari s'agafa segons les necessitats \n" +"assignades per Thin Pool. Així podeu crear volums prims d'una mida més grossa\n" "que la de Thin Pool. Evidentment, quan hi ha realment dades escrites al \n" -"volum prim, el Thin Pool assignat ha de ser capaç d'arribar a les " -"necessitats d'espai.\n" +"volum prim, el Thin Pool assignat ha de ser capaç d'arribar a les necessitats d'espai.\n" "Els Volums Prims no poden tenir Stripe Count." #. heading for frame @@ -4217,36 +4111,30 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Normal Volume.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of Thin Provisioning existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice" msgstr "" "Podeu declarar el volum lògic com a Volum normal.\n" -"És així per defecte i significa que els volums LVM eren com tots els volums " -"abans que la característica de Provisió Thin exisistís.\n" +"És així per defecte i significa que els volums LVM eren com tots els volums abans que la característica de Provisió Thin exisistís.\n" "Si en dubteu, aquesta és probablement l'opció bona." #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Pool.\n" -"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool." +"This means Thin Volumes allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool." msgstr "" "Podeu declarar el volum lògic com a Thin Pool.\n" -"Això significa que Volums Prims situa l'espai necessari segons les " -"necessitats d'aquest 'pool'." +"Això significa que Volums Prims situa l'espai necessari segons les necessitats d'aquest 'pool'." #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "You can declare the logical volume as a Thin Volume.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool</" -"b>." +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a Thin Pool." msgstr "" "Podeu declarar el volum lògic com a Volum Prim.\n" -"Això siginifca que el volum situa l'espai necessari segons les necessitats " -"de Thin Pool." +"Això siginifca que el volum situa l'espai necessari segons les necessitats de Thin Pool." #. heading for frame #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:827 @@ -4300,17 +4188,13 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" -"Ni hi ha prou dispositius sense utilitzar adients per crear un grup de " -"volums.\n" +"Ni hi ha prou dispositius sense utilitzar adients per crear un grup de volums.\n" "\n" -"Per a utilitzar LVM es necessita com a mínim una partició lliure del tipus " -"0x8e (o 0x83) o un\n" -"dispositiu RAID sense utilitzar. Modifiqueu la taula de particions segons " -"calgui." +"Per a utilitzar LVM es necessita com a mínim una partició lliure del tipus 0x8e (o 0x83) o un\n" +"dispositiu RAID sense utilitzar. Modifiqueu la taula de particions segons calgui." #. error popup #. error popup @@ -4520,8 +4404,7 @@ "will be lost if you exit the partitioner with %1.\n" "Really exit?" msgstr "" -"S'han canviat les particions o els paràmetres d'emmagatzematge. Aquests " -"canvis es perdran si sortiu\n" +"S'han canviat les particions o els paràmetres d'emmagatzematge. Aquests canvis es perdran si sortiu\n" "de l'editor de particions amb %1.\n" "Segur que voleu sortir-ne?" @@ -4542,12 +4425,8 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." -msgstr "" -"La configuració NFS no està disponible. Comproveu la instal·lació del paquet " -"yast2-nfs-client." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." +msgstr "La configuració NFS no està disponible. Comproveu la instal·lació del paquet yast2-nfs-client." #. heading #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:127 @@ -4578,26 +4457,21 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "RAID 0: This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.\n" +"There is NO redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.\n" msgstr "" "RAID 0: Aquest nivell incrementa el rendiment del disc.\n" -"NO existeix redundància en aquest mode. La recuperació de dades no és " -"possible si un dels discos falla.\n" +"NO existeix redundància en aquest mode. La recuperació de dades no és possible si un dels discos falla.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "RAID 1: This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data " -"on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.\n" msgstr "" "RAID 1 Aquest mode presenta la millor redundància. Es pot\n" -"usar amb dos discos, o més. Aquest mode manté una còpia exacta de les dades " -"d'un disc\n" +"usar amb dos discos, o més. Aquest mode manté una còpia exacta de les dades d'un disc\n" "als altres discos. Mentre funcioni almenys un disc, no es perdrà cap dada.\n" "Les particions usades haurien de ser aproximadament de la mateixa mida.\n" @@ -4605,16 +4479,11 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "RAID 5: This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost\n" msgstr "" -"RAID 5 Aquest mode combina l'administració d'un gran nombre de " -"discos i, malgrat tot, manté alguna redundància. Aquest mode es pot fer " -"servir en tres discos o més.\n" -"Si un dels discos falla, totes les dades segueixen intactes; mentre que si " -"en fallen dos de forma simultània, es perdran totes les dades\n" +"RAID 5 Aquest mode combina l'administració d'un gran nombre de discos i, malgrat tot, manté alguna redundància. Aquest mode es pot fer servir en tres discos o més.\n" +"Si un dels discos falla, totes les dades segueixen intactes; mentre que si en fallen dos de forma simultània, es perdran totes les dades\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:116 @@ -4623,8 +4492,7 @@ "name for the raid. This is optional. If name is provided, the device is\n" "available as <tt>/dev/md/<name></tt>.\n" msgstr "" -"Nom del RAID us ofereix la possibilitat de donar un nom " -"significatiu\n" +"Nom del RAID us ofereix la possibilitat de donar un nom significatiu\n" "al RAID. Això és òptim. Si li poseu un nom, el dispositiu serà\n" "disponible com a <tt>/dev/md/<nom></tt>.\n" @@ -4632,16 +4500,12 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</" -"p>\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).\n" msgstr "" "Afegiu particions al RAID. Segons el tipus de RAID,\n" -"la mida del disc que es pot utilitzar és la suma d'aquestes particions (RAID " -"0), la mida\n" -"de la partició més petita (RAID 1) o bé (N-1)*partició més petita (RAID 5).</" -"p>\n" +"la mida del disc que es pot utilitzar és la suma d'aquestes particions (RAID 0), la mida\n" +"de la partició més petita (RAID 1) o bé (N-1)*partició més petita (RAID 5).\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:136 @@ -4704,16 +4568,12 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "Chunk Size: It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.\n" msgstr "" "Mida elemental: És la massa de dades \"elemental\"\n" -"més petita que es pot escriure als dispositius. Una mida elemental raonable " -"per a RAID 5 és 128 KB,\n" -"per a RAID 0, 32 KB és un bon començament. Per a RAID 1, la mida elemental " -"no afecta gaire en l'escriptura de dades.\n" +"més petita que es pot escriure als dispositius. Una mida elemental raonable per a RAID 5 és 128 KB,\n" +"per a RAID 0, 32 KB és un bon començament. Per a RAID 1, la mida elemental no afecta gaire en l'escriptura de dades.\n" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 msgid "Parity Algorithm:" @@ -4723,12 +4583,10 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" "Algoritme de paritat per usar amb els RAIDS/6.\n" -"El simètric-esquerrà és el que ofereix el màxim rendiment en discos típics " -"amb plats rotatoris.\n" +"El simètric-esquerrà és el que ofereix el màxim rendiment en discos típics amb plats rotatoris.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:361 @@ -5009,23 +4867,17 @@ msgid "" "Default Mount by gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. Device Name uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path</" -"i>\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. Device ID and Device Path\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally UUID and\n" "Volume Label use the file systems UUID and label.\n" msgstr "" "Muntatge per defecte us dóna el muntatge per\n" -"mètode per a nous sistemes de fitxers creats. Nom del dispostiu usa " -"el nom del \n" -"dispostiu del nucli, que no és persistent. ID del dispositiu i " -"Camí del dispositiu\n" -"usen noms generats per udev des de la informació del maquinari. Això hauria " -"de ser\n" +"mètode per a nous sistemes de fitxers creats. Nom del dispostiu usa el nom del \n" +"dispostiu del nucli, que no és persistent. ID del dispositiu i Camí del dispositiu\n" +"usen noms generats per udev des de la informació del maquinari. Això hauria de ser\n" "persistent però malauradament no sempre és així. Finalment UUID i\n" -"Etiqueta del volum usen l'UUID i l'etiqueta dels sistemes de fitxers." -"\n" +"Etiqueta del volum usen l'UUID i l'etiqueta dels sistemes de fitxers.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:209 @@ -5034,25 +4886,19 @@ "system type for newly created file systems.\n" msgstr "" "Sistema de fitxers per defecte indica\n" -"el tipus del sistema de fitxers que s'ha d'aplicar als sistemes de fitxers " -"nous.\n" +"el tipus del sistema de fitxers que s'ha d'aplicar als sistemes de fitxers nous.\n" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "Alignment of Newly Created Partitions\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. cylinder is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. optimal aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.\n" msgstr "" "Alineació de les noves particions creades\n" -"determina com s'alineen les particions creades. Cilindre és " -"l'alineació tradicional als límits del cilindre del disc. Òptim " -"alinea les \n" -"particions per al millor rendiment segons els indicis que proporciona el " -"nucli de Linux \n" +"determina com s'alineen les particions creades. Cilindre és l'alineació tradicional als límits del cilindre del disc. Òptim alinea les \n" +"particions per al millor rendiment segons els indicis que proporciona el nucli de Linux \n" "o prova de ser compatible amb el Windows Vista i el Win 7.\n" #. helptext @@ -5144,8 +4990,7 @@ "all current changes. Really rescan unused devices?" msgstr "" "Si es tornen a escanejar els dispositius que no s'utilitzen,\n" -"es cancel·laran tots els canvis actuals. Segur que voleu tornar a escanejar-" -"los?" +"es cancel·laran tots els canvis actuals. Segur que voleu tornar a escanejar-los?" #. encoding: utf-8 #. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. @@ -5307,8 +5152,7 @@ msgstr "" "El fitxer de patró té un format no vàlid!\n" "\n" -"El fitxer ha de contenir línies amb una expressió regular i un nom de " -"classe\n" +"El fitxer ha de contenir línies amb una expressió regular i un nom de classe\n" "per línia. Exemple:" #. popup text @@ -5318,42 +5162,32 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:250 msgid "Ok to match devices to classes with these patterns?" -msgstr "" -"Esteu d'acord d'equiparar els dispositius a classes amb aquests patrons?" +msgstr "Esteu d'acord d'equiparar els dispositius a classes amb aquests patrons?" #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). " msgstr "" "Aquest diàleg serveix per definir classes per als dispositius RAID\n" -"continguts al RAID. Les classes disponibles són A, B, C, D i E però per a " -"molts casos\n" +"continguts al RAID. Les classes disponibles són A, B, C, D i E però per a molts casos\n" "se'n necessiten menys (per exemple, només A i B). " #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing " -"the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class." msgstr "" -"Podeu posar un dispositiu dins de la classe clicant amb el botó dret " -"sobre\n" -"el dispositiu i escollir-ne la classe apropiada amb el menú contextual. " -"Prement \n" -"Ctrl o Majúscules podeu seleccionar més d'un dispositiu i posar-los en una " -"classe\n" -"amb un sol pas. També podeu fer servir els botons \"%1\" to \"%2\" per posar " -"els que \n" +"Podeu posar un dispositiu dins de la classe clicant amb el botó dret sobre\n" +"el dispositiu i escollir-ne la classe apropiada amb el menú contextual. Prement \n" +"Ctrl o Majúscules podeu seleccionar més d'un dispositiu i posar-los en una classe\n" +"amb un sol pas. També podeu fer servir els botons \"%1\" to \"%2\" per posar els que \n" "ja estan seleccionats a la classe." #. dialog help text @@ -5379,15 +5213,11 @@ msgid "" "Interleaved uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" "class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" -"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will " -"follow." +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" -"Intercalat fa servir el primer dispositiu de la classe A, llavors el " -"primer de la \n" -"classe B, i llavors les classes següents amb els dispositius assignats. " -"Llavors, \n" -"el segon dispositiu de classe A, el segon dispositiu de classe B i així " -"successivament." +"Intercalat fa servir el primer dispositiu de la classe A, llavors el primer de la \n" +"classe B, i llavors les classes següents amb els dispositius assignats. Llavors, \n" +"el segon dispositiu de classe A, el segon dispositiu de classe B i així successivament." #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:369 @@ -5396,39 +5226,29 @@ "When you leave the pop-up the current order of the devices is used as the \n" "order in the RAID to be created." msgstr "" -"Tots els dispositius sense classe es passen al final de la llista de " -"dispositius.\n" -"Quan sortiu del menú, l'ordre vigent de dispositius es farà servir com a " -"odre per al RAID \n" +"Tots els dispositius sense classe es passen al final de la llista de dispositius.\n" +"Quan sortiu del menú, l'ordre vigent de dispositius es farà servir com a odre per al RAID \n" "que s'ha de crear." #. dialog help text #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"%1\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-" -"part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression." msgstr "" "Prement el botó \"%1\" podeu seleccionar un fitxer que contingui\n" -"línies amb una expressió regular i un nom de classe (per exemple: \"sda.* A" -"\"). Tots els dispositius que coincideixin\n" -"amb l'expressió regular es posaran a la classe en aquesta línia. L'expressió " -"regular es \n" +"línies amb una expressió regular i un nom de classe (per exemple: \"sda.* A\"). Tots els dispositius que coincideixin\n" +"amb l'expressió regular es posaran a la classe en aquesta línia. L'expressió regular es \n" "fa coincidir amb el nom del nucli (per exemple /dev/sda1), \n" -"el nom de ruta udev (per exemple /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-" -"scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) i l'identificador\n" +"el nom de ruta udev (per exemple /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) i l'identificador\n" "de udev (per exemple /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"La primera coincidència determina finalment la classe si el nom del " -"dispositiu coincideix amb més d'una\n" +"La primera coincidència determina finalment la classe si el nom del dispositiu coincideix amb més d'una\n" "expressió regular." #. headline text @@ -5453,8 +5273,7 @@ "Invalid Size specified. Use number followed by K, M, G or %.\n" "Value must be above 100k or between 1% and 200%. Try again." msgstr "" -"S'ha especificat una mida no vàlida. Feu servir un número seguit de K, M, G " -"o %.\n" +"S'ha especificat una mida no vàlida. Feu servir un número seguit de K, M, G o %.\n" "El valor ha de ser superior a 100k o entre 1% i 200%. Torneu-ho a provar." #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:290 @@ -5465,15 +5284,12 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "Tmpfs Size:\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory." msgstr "" "Mida de Tmpfs:\n" -"La mida es pot introduir amb un número seguit de K,M,G per a Kilo-, Mega- o " -"Gigabyte o bé\n" -"amb un número seguit d'un símbol de tant per cent que signifiqui el " -"percentatge de la memòria." +"La mida es pot introduir amb un número seguit de K,M,G per a Kilo-, Mega- o Gigabyte o bé\n" +"amb un número seguit d'un símbol de tant per cent que signifiqui el percentatge de la memòria." #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:311 @@ -5492,8 +5308,7 @@ "Enter the swap priority. Higher numbers mean higher priority.\n" msgstr "" "Prioritat d'intercanvi\n" -"Introduïu la prioritat d'intercanvi. Com més alt sigui el número més gran " -"serà la prioritat.\n" +"Introduïu la prioritat d'intercanvi. Com més alt sigui el número més gran serà la prioritat.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:481 @@ -5504,13 +5319,11 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 msgid "" "Mount Read-Only:\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write." msgstr "" "Munta només de lectura:\n" -"escriure al sistema de fitxers no és possible. Per defecte és fals. Durant " -"la instal·lació\n" +"escriure al sistema de fitxers no és possible. Per defecte és fals. Durant la instal·lació\n" "el sistema de fitxers sempre es munta com a lectura-escriptura." #. button text @@ -5525,12 +5338,10 @@ "Access times are not updated when a file is read. Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "Sense hora d'accés\n" -"L'hora de l'accés no s'actualitza quan es llegeix un fitxer. L'opció " -"predeterminada és fals.\n" +"L'hora de l'accés no s'actualitza quan es llegeix un fitxer. L'opció predeterminada és fals.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:511 -#| msgid "Mountable by &User" msgid "Mountable by User" msgstr "Muntable per l'usuari" @@ -5541,8 +5352,7 @@ "The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "Pot ser muntat per un usuari\n" -"Un usuari normal pot muntar el sistema de fitxers. L'opció predeterminada és " -"\"als\".\n" +"Un usuari normal pot muntar el sistema de fitxers. L'opció predeterminada és \"als\".\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:528 @@ -5555,17 +5365,13 @@ "Do Not Mount at System Start-up:\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></" -"tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.\n" msgstr "" "No es munta durant l'inici del sistema\n" -"El sistema de fitxers no es munta de forma automàtica en iniciar-se el " -"sistema.\n" +"El sistema de fitxers no es munta de forma automàtica en iniciar-se el sistema.\n" "S'ha creat una entrada a /etc/fstab i el sistema de fitxers es munta\n" -"amb les opcions apropiades quan s'introdueix l'ordre <tt>mount <" -"punt_muntatge></tt>\n" +"amb les opcions apropiades quan s'introdueix l'ordre <tt>mount <punt_muntatge></tt>\n" "(<punt_muntatge> és el directori on es munta el sistema de fitxers).\n" "L'opció predeterminada és fals.\n" @@ -5598,20 +5404,16 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact. \n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact. \n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact." -"\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact. \n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.\n" msgstr "" "Mode de registre de dades:\n" "determina el mode de registre per a les dades de fitxers.\n" "<tt>journal</tt>: les dades es desen al diari abans d'escriure's\n" "al sistema de fitxers principal. Té un impacte alt en el rendiment. \n" "<tt>ordered</tt>: les dades s'envien directament al sistema de fitxers\n" -"principal abans que les metadades es desin al diari. Té un impacte mitjà en " -"el rendiment. \n" -"<tt>writeback</tt>: no es conserva l'ordre de les dades. No té impacte en el " -"rendiment.\n" +"principal abans que les metadades es desin al diari. Té un impacte mitjà en el rendiment. \n" +"<tt>writeback</tt>: no es conserva l'ordre de les dades. No té impacte en el rendiment.\n" #. button text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:606 @@ -5647,24 +5449,18 @@ msgstr "&Valor d'opció arbitrari" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." -msgstr "" -"Hi ha caràcters no vàlids al valor d'opció arbitrari. No utilitzeu espais ni " -"tabulacions. Torneu-ho a provar." +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." +msgstr "Hi ha caràcters no vàlids al valor d'opció arbitrari. No utilitzeu espais ni tabulacions. Torneu-ho a provar." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "Arbitrary Option Value:\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /" -"etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.\n" msgstr "" "Valor d’opció arbitrari:\n" -"introduïu aquí qualsevol opció de muntatge que estigui permesa en el quart " -"camp de /etc/fstab.\n" +"introduïu aquí qualsevol opció de muntatge que estigui permesa en el quart camp de /etc/fstab.\n" "Si hi ha més d’una opció, se separaran per comes.\n" #. label text @@ -5679,8 +5475,7 @@ "Set the charset used for display of file names in Windows partitions.\n" msgstr "" "Conjunt de caràcters per als noms de fitxers\n" -"Definiu el conjunt de caràcters que s'utilitzarà per a mostrar els noms dels " -"fitxers de les particions del Windows.\n" +"Definiu el conjunt de caràcters que s'utilitzarà per a mostrar els noms dels fitxers de les particions del Windows.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:700 @@ -5691,12 +5486,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "Codepage for Short FAT Names:\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.\n" msgstr "" "Pàgina de codis per a noms FAT curts\n" -"Aquesta pàgina de codis s'utilitza per a convertir a caràcters de noms curts " -"en sistemes de fitxers FAT.\n" +"Aquesta pàgina de codis s'utilitza per a convertir a caràcters de noms curts en sistemes de fitxers FAT.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:720 @@ -5707,12 +5500,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "Number of FATs:\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2." +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2." msgstr "" "Nombre de FATS:\n" -"S'especifica el nombre de taules de localització de fitxers al sistema de " -"fitxers. El valor per defecte es 2." +"S'especifica el nombre de taules de localització de fitxers al sistema de fitxers. El valor per defecte es 2." #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:735 @@ -5723,14 +5514,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "FAT Size:\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable " -"for the file system size.\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.\n" msgstr "" "Mida de FAT\n" -"S'especifica el tipus de taula de localització de fitxers que s'utilitza " -"(12, 16 o 32 bit). Si s'indica Automàtic, el YaST2 selecciona automàticament " -"el valor més adequat per a la mida del sistema de fitxers.\n" +"S'especifica el tipus de taula de localització de fitxers que s'utilitza (12, 16 o 32 bit). Si s'indica Automàtic, el YaST2 selecciona automàticament el valor més adequat per a la mida del sistema de fitxers.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:755 @@ -5740,9 +5527,7 @@ #. popup text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:763 msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." -msgstr "" -"La mida mínima per a \"Entrades del directori arrel\" és 112. Torneu-ho a " -"provar." +msgstr "La mida mínima per a \"Entrades del directori arrel\" és 112. Torneu-ho a provar." #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:767 @@ -5762,12 +5547,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "Hash Function:\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names " -"in directories.\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.\n" msgstr "" "Funció Hash:\n" -"especifica el nom de la funció hash que s'utilitzarà per classificar els " -"noms de fitxers dels directoris.\n" +"especifica el nom de la funció hash que s'utilitzarà per classificar els noms de fitxers dels directoris.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:796 @@ -5778,16 +5561,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "FS Revision:\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.\n" msgstr "" "Revisió d'FS\n" -"Aquesta opció defineix la revisió de format reiserfs que s'utilitzarà. El " -"3.5 s'utilitza només per tenir compatibilitat amb els nuclis de les sèries " -"2.2.x. El 3.6 és més recent, però només es pot fer servir amb versions del " -"nucli iguals o superiors al 2.4.\n" +"Aquesta opció defineix la revisió de format reiserfs que s'utilitzarà. El 3.5 s'utilitza només per tenir compatibilitat amb els nuclis de les sèries 2.2.x. El 3.6 és més recent, però només es pot fer servir amb versions del nucli iguals o superiors al 2.4.\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5799,14 +5576,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.\n" msgstr "" "Mida dels blocs\n" -"Especifiqueu la mida del blocs en bytes. Les mides dels blocs vàlides són " -"512, 1024, 2048 i 4096 bytes per bloc. L'opció auto fa que s'utilitzi la " -"mida de bloc predeterminada de 4096.\n" +"Especifiqueu la mida del blocs en bytes. Les mides dels blocs vàlides són 512, 1024, 2048 i 4096 bytes per bloc. L'opció auto fa que s'utilitzi la mida de bloc predeterminada de 4096.\n" #. label text #. label text @@ -5822,8 +5595,7 @@ "This option specifies the inode size of the file system.\n" msgstr "" "Mida dels nodes d'identificació\n" -"Aquesta opció especifica la mida dels nodes d'identificació del sistema de " -"fitxers.\n" +"Aquesta opció especifica la mida dels nodes d'identificació del sistema de fitxers.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:847 @@ -5834,12 +5606,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "Percentage of Inode Space:\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.\n" msgstr "" "Percentatge de mida dels nodes d'identificació\n" -"Aquesta opció especifica el màxim percentatge d'espai dels sistemes de " -"fitxers que es pot adjudicar als nodes d'identificació.\n" +"Aquesta opció especifica el màxim percentatge d'espai dels sistemes de fitxers que es pot adjudicar als nodes d'identificació.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:884 @@ -5850,16 +5620,13 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 msgid "" "Inode Aligned:\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.\n" msgstr "" "Node alineat\n" -"Aquesta opció s'utilitza per especificar si la situació de nodes " -"d'identificació està alineada o no.\n" -"Per defecte, els nodes d'identificació s'alineen. L'accés alineat als nodes " -"d'identificació\n" +"Aquesta opció s'utilitza per especificar si la situació de nodes d'identificació està alineada o no.\n" +"Per defecte, els nodes d'identificació s'alineen. L'accés alineat als nodes d'identificació\n" "normalment és més eficaç que l'accés desalineat.\n" #. label text @@ -5881,12 +5648,10 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "Log Size\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the " -"aggregate size.\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.\n" msgstr "" "Mida dels registres\n" -"Determineu la mida dels registres (en megabytes). Si escolliu Automàtic, " -"s'establirà per defecte el 40% de la mida agregada.\n" +"Determineu la mida dels registres (en megabytes). Si escolliu Automàtic, s'establirà per defecte el 40% de la mida agregada.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:942 @@ -5916,24 +5681,17 @@ "RAID stripe as its argument.\n" msgstr "" "Longitud del pas en blocs\n" -"Determineu les opcions relacionades amb RAID per al sistema de fitxers. " -"Actualment, l'únic argument que s'admet\n" -"és \"pas\", en anglès \"stride\", que pren com a argument el nombre de blocs " -"en un llistat RAID.\n" +"Determineu les opcions relacionades amb RAID per al sistema de fitxers. Actualment, l'únic argument que s'admet\n" +"és \"pas\", en anglès \"stride\", que pren com a argument el nombre de blocs en un llistat RAID.\n" #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "Block Size:\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.\n" msgstr "" "Mida dels blocs\n" -"Especifiqueu la mida dels blocs en bytes. Les mides dels blocs vàlides són " -"1024, 2048 i 4096 bytes per bloc. Si hi ha seleccionada l'opció automàtica, " -"es determina la mida de bloc segons la mida del sistema de fitxers i l'ús " -"que se n'espera.\n" +"Especifiqueu la mida dels blocs en bytes. Les mides dels blocs vàlides són 1024, 2048 i 4096 bytes per bloc. Si hi ha seleccionada l'opció automàtica, es determina la mida de bloc segons la mida del sistema de fitxers i l'ús que se n'espera.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:996 @@ -5949,23 +5707,16 @@ "bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" "value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" "too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" -"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a " -"reasonable\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" "value for this parameter.\n" msgstr "" "Bytes per node d'identificació\n" -"Especifiqueu el coeficient de bytes per node d'identificació. El YaST2 crea " -"un node d'identificació per a cada\n" -"<bytes-per-node-i> bytes d'espai al disc. Com més gran sigui la " -"relació bytes per node d'identificació,\n" -" es crearan menys nodes d'identificació. Generalment, aquest valor no ha de " -"ser més petit que la mida\n" -"del bloc del sistema de fitxers ja que, en cas contrari, es crearia una gran " -"quantitat de nodes d'identificació.\n" -"Tingueu en compte que no es pot modificar el número de nodes d'identificació " -"d'un sistema de fitxers un cop\n" -"aquest s'ha creat, per la qual cosa heu de comprovar que introduïu el valor " -"correcte per al paràmetre.\n" +"Especifiqueu el coeficient de bytes per node d'identificació. El YaST2 crea un node d'identificació per a cada\n" +"<bytes-per-node-i> bytes d'espai al disc. Com més gran sigui la relació bytes per node d'identificació,\n" +" es crearan menys nodes d'identificació. Generalment, aquest valor no ha de ser més petit que la mida\n" +"del bloc del sistema de fitxers ja que, en cas contrari, es crearia una gran quantitat de nodes d'identificació.\n" +"Tingueu en compte que no es pot modificar el número de nodes d'identificació d'un sistema de fitxers un cop\n" +"aquest s'ha creat, per la qual cosa heu de comprovar que introduïu el valor correcte per al paràmetre.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1018 @@ -5978,23 +5729,14 @@ "The \"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root\" value is incorrect.\n" "Allowed are float numbers no larger than 99 (e.g. 0.5).\n" msgstr "" -"El valor per al \"percentatge de blocs reservats per l'arrel\" és " -"incorrecte.\n" +"El valor per al \"percentatge de blocs reservats per l'arrel\" és incorrecte.\n" "Es permeten valors amb coma flotant entre 0 i 99 (per exemple 0.5). \n" #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 -msgid "" -"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1." -msgstr "" -"Percentatge de blocs reservats per a l'usuari primari: " -"s'especifica el percentatge de blocs reservats per al superusuari. El valor " -"per defecte es calcula de manera que es reserva normalment 1 GB. El límit " -"màxim per defecte és 5.0 i el mínim, és 0.1." +msgid "Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root: Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1." +msgstr "Percentatge de blocs reservats per a l'usuari primari: s'especifica el percentatge de blocs reservats per al superusuari. El valor per defecte es calcula de manera que es reserva normalment 1 GB. El límit màxim per defecte és 5.0 i el mínim, és 0.1." #. checkbox text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1042 @@ -6022,8 +5764,7 @@ "Enables use of hashed b-trees to speed up lookups in large directories.\n" msgstr "" "Índex de directori:\n" -"Permet utilitzar arbres B amb la funció hash per accelerar les cerques en " -"directoris grans.\n" +"Permet utilitzar arbres B amb la funció hash per accelerar les cerques en directoris grans.\n" #. label text #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1096 @@ -6034,13 +5775,11 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "No Journal:\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" "Sense historial:\n" -"Ús suprimit de l'historial al sistema de fitxers. Activeu això només quan " -"estigueu segurs\n" +"Ús suprimit de l'historial al sistema de fitxers. Activeu això només quan estigueu segurs\n" "del que feu.\n" #. this version makes some problems with interpreter, above lookup/add is OK @@ -6169,8 +5908,7 @@ "Try again." msgstr "" "La contrasenya només pot contenir els caràcters següents:\n" -"del 0 al 9, la A a la Z, majúscules i minúscules, a més de qualsevol dels " -"signes \"@#* ,.;:._-+!$%&/|?{[()]}^\\<>\".\n" +"del 0 al 9, la A a la Z, majúscules i minúscules, a més de qualsevol dels signes \"@#* ,.;:._-+!$%&/|?{[()]}^\\<>\".\n" "Torneu-ho a provar." #. Label: get password for encrypted volume @@ -6268,10 +6006,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5177 -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." -msgstr "" -"No es poden crear particions ja que hi ha altres particions del disc en ús." +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgstr "No es poden crear particions ja que hi ha altres particions del disc en ús." #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5203 msgid "" @@ -6332,8 +6068,7 @@ "device %2, which contains data needed to perform the installation.\n" msgstr "" "\n" -"No es pot eliminar el dispositiu %1 perquè es modificaria de manera " -"indirecta\n" +"No es pot eliminar el dispositiu %1 perquè es modificaria de manera indirecta\n" "el dispositiu %2, que conté les dades necessàries per fer la instal·lació.\n" #. the check for verbose is needed for calls from StorageProposal (see bnc#871779) @@ -6473,8 +6208,7 @@ "the system. This field can be empty, e.g. for multipath disks." msgstr "" "L'opció Bus indica de quina manera es connecta el dispositiu\n" -"al sistema. Aquest camp pot ser buit, per exemple, en el cas de discs " -"multicamí." +"al sistema. Aquest camp pot ser buit, per exemple, en el cas de discs multicamí." #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:239 @@ -6621,29 +6355,23 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:346 msgid "" "Mount by indicates how the file system\n" -"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) " -"by\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" "L'opció Muntat per indica com està muntat\n" -"el sistema de fitxers: (Kernel) per nom de nucli, (Label) per etiqueta, " -"(UUID) per UUID de sistema de fitxers, (ID) per identificador del dispositiu " -"i (Path) per camí al dispositiu.\n" +"el sistema de fitxers: (Kernel) per nom de nucli, (Label) per etiqueta, (UUID) per UUID de sistema de fitxers, (ID) per identificador del dispositiu i (Path) per camí al dispositiu.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:356 msgid "" "A question mark (?) indicates that\n" "the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" -"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this " -"volume\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" "Un símbol d'interrogant (?) indica que\n" -"el sistema de fitxers no està llistat a <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. O bé està " -"muntat\n" -"manualment o per un sistema d'automuntatge. Quan es canviïn els paràmetres " -"d'aquest volum\n" +"el sistema de fitxers no està llistat a <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. O bé està muntat\n" +"manualment o per un sistema d'automuntatge. Quan es canviïn els paràmetres d'aquest volum\n" "el YaST no actualitzarà el contingut de <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry @@ -6659,8 +6387,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" "Un asterisc (*) després del punt de muntatge\n" @@ -6729,8 +6456,7 @@ "logical volumes and, if greater than one, the stripe size in parenthesis.\n" msgstr "" "L'opció Bandes mostra el nombre de bandes\n" -"dels volums lògics LVM i, si és més gran que 1, també mostra la mida de la " -"banda entre parèntesis.\n" +"dels volums lògics LVM i, si és més gran que 1, també mostra la mida de la banda entre parèntesis.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:439 @@ -6766,8 +6492,7 @@ "e.g. RAID or LVM. If not, this column is empty.\n" msgstr "" "L'opció Usat per mostra si un dispositiu\n" -"l'utilitzen, per exemple, el RAID o l'LVM. Si no utilitzeu cap d'aquests " -"gestors, és normal que sigui buida.\n" +"l'utilitzen, per exemple, el RAID o l'LVM. Si no utilitzeu cap d'aquests gestors, és normal que sigui buida.\n" #. helptext for table column and overview entry #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:469 @@ -7027,12 +6752,8 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." -msgstr "" -"No es pot redimensionar a causa d'incoherències al sistema de fitxers. " -"Comproveu el sistema de fitxers des del Windows." +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." +msgstr "No es pot redimensionar a causa d'incoherències al sistema de fitxers. Comproveu el sistema de fitxers des del Windows." #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6164 @@ -7080,10 +6801,8 @@ "enable automatic snapshots with snapper. This will also increase the\n" "size for the root partition." msgstr "" -"El sistema de fitxers per a la partició d'arrel es pot seleccionar a " -"través\n" -"del corresponent menú desplegable. Amb el sistema de fitxers BtrFS la " -"proposta pot\n" +"El sistema de fitxers per a la partició d'arrel es pot seleccionar a través\n" +"del corresponent menú desplegable. Amb el sistema de fitxers BtrFS la proposta pot\n" "habilitar instantànies automàtiques amb l'snapper. Això també incrementarà\n" "la mida de la partició d'arrel." @@ -7094,8 +6813,7 @@ "the home partition can be selected with the corresponding combo box." msgstr "" "La proposta pot crear una partició home separada. El sistema de fitxers\n" -"per a la partició home es pot seleccionar per mitjà del corresponent menú " -"desplegable." +"per a la partició home es pot seleccionar per mitjà del corresponent menú desplegable." #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6310 @@ -7103,8 +6821,7 @@ "The swap partition can be made large enough to be used to suspend\n" "the system to disk in most cases." msgstr "" -"La partició d'intercanvi es pot fer prou grossa per posar el sistema en " -"suspensió\n" +"La partició d'intercanvi es pot fer prou grossa per posar el sistema en suspensió\n" "al disc en la majoria de casos." #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6335 @@ -7233,23 +6950,18 @@ #~| msgid "Command line interface for the partitioner module is not available" #~ msgid "Command line interface for the partitioner module is not available." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "La interfície de la línia d'ordres per al mòdul de partició no està " -#~ "disponible" +#~ msgstr "La interfície de la línia d'ordres per al mòdul de partició no està disponible" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "You have mounted a partition with Btrfs to the\n" -#~ "mount point /. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file " -#~ "system,\n" -#~ "such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point or an extra partition for /" -#~ "boot.\n" +#~ "mount point /. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file system,\n" +#~ "such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point or an extra partition for /boot.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Really use this setup?\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Heu intentat muntar una partició FAT sobre el punt de muntatge /boot.\n" -#~ "Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers Linux (ext2, ReiserFS..) per aquest punt " -#~ "de muntatge.\n" +#~ "Utilitzeu un sistema de fitxers Linux (ext2, ReiserFS..) per aquest punt de muntatge.\n" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "Export Device Graph..." @@ -7281,8 +6993,7 @@ #~ "\n" #~ "Seleccioneu Cancel·la si no teniu coneixements de com funciona.\n" #~ "\n" -#~ "Si continueu, el YaST2 intentarà desmuntar el dispositiu abans de " -#~ "suprimir-lo.\n" +#~ "Si continueu, el YaST2 intentarà desmuntar el dispositiu abans de suprimir-lo.\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "Unmount of %1 failed.\n" @@ -7336,22 +7047,16 @@ #~ msgid "" #~ "\n" -#~ "This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -#~ "tmp.\n" -#~ "You may leave the crypt password empty. If you do this, the system will " -#~ "create \n" -#~ "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose " -#~ "all \n" +#~ "This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" +#~ "You may leave the crypt password empty. If you do this, the system will create \n" +#~ "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all \n" #~ "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" #~ "\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "\n" -#~ "Aquest punt de muntatge correspon a un sistema de fitxers temporals, com " -#~ "ara /tmp o /var/tmp.\n" -#~ "Podeu deixar en blanc la contrasenya crypt. Si ho feu, el sistema us " -#~ "crearà \n" -#~ "una contrasenya aleatòria a l'iniciar el sistema. Això significa que " -#~ "perdreu totes \n" +#~ "Aquest punt de muntatge correspon a un sistema de fitxers temporals, com ara /tmp o /var/tmp.\n" +#~ "Podeu deixar en blanc la contrasenya crypt. Si ho feu, el sistema us crearà \n" +#~ "una contrasenya aleatòria a l'iniciar el sistema. Això significa que perdreu totes \n" #~ "les dades d'aquests sistemes de fitxers en apagar el sistema.\n" #~ "\n" @@ -7415,20 +7120,15 @@ #~ "mètode de muntatge per als sistemes de fitxers nous." #~ msgid "To use these mount points, press Yes." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Si voleu seguir utilitzant aquests punts de muntatge premeu el " -#~ "botó Sí." +#~ msgstr "Si voleu seguir utilitzant aquests punts de muntatge premeu el botó Sí." #~ msgid "To ignore these mount points, press No." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Si voleu ignorar aquests punts de muntatge premeu el botó No</" -#~ "B>." +#~ msgstr "Si voleu ignorar aquests punts de muntatge premeu el botó No." #~ msgid "" #~ "Would you like to use these mount points\n" #~ "for your new installation?" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Voleu fer servir aquests punts de muntatge per a la instal·lació nova?" +#~ msgstr "Voleu fer servir aquests punts de muntatge per a la instal·lació nova?" #~ msgid "" #~ "A previous system with the following mount points was detected:\n" Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/support.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -44,9 +44,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:58 msgid "This will start a browser connecting to the SUSE Support Center Portal." -msgstr "" -"Això iniciarà un navegador que es connectarà amb el SUSE Support Center " -"Portal." +msgstr "Això iniciarà un navegador que es connectarà amb el SUSE Support Center Portal." #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:68 msgid "Open" @@ -162,9 +160,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:451 msgid "Include all log file lines, gather additional rotated logs" -msgstr "" -"Inclou totes les línies de fitxer de registre, recull registres rotats " -"addicionals" +msgstr "Inclou totes les línies de fitxer de registre, recull registres rotats addicionals" #. Support configure1 dialog contents #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:465 @@ -290,8 +286,7 @@ "Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing Abort now.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Avortar-ne l'inici:</big> \n" -"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració amb seguretat prement Avorta ara." -"\n" +"Avorteu la utilitat de configuració amb seguretat prement Avorta ara.\n" #. Write dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:44 @@ -353,10 +348,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big> \n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " -"Open SUSE Support Center.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " -"you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use Open SUSE Support Center.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.\n" msgstr "" @@ -367,8 +360,7 @@ "To run the supportconfig data collection tool, use Collect Data" msgstr "" "<big>Recopilació de dades</big> \n" -"Per executar l'eina de recopilació de dades supportconfig, useu Recopila " -"dades" +"Per executar l'eina de recopilació de dades supportconfig, useu Recopila dades" #. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:84 @@ -385,13 +377,11 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<big>Supportconfig Options</big> \n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " -"settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" "<big>Opcions de supportconfig</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu una opció per sobreescriue els predeterminats. Podeu usar els " -"paràmetres predeterminats,\n" +"Seleccioneu una opció per sobreescriue els predeterminats. Podeu usar els paràmetres predeterminats,\n" "recopilar un màxim de dades o només un mínim." #. Configure1 dialog help 2/3 @@ -402,8 +392,7 @@ "to select specific data sets to collect.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Paràmetres avançats</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu Usa els personalitzats i cliqueu a Configuració " -"avançada\n" +"Seleccioneu Usa els personalitzats i cliqueu a Configuració avançada\n" "per seleccionar dades específiques per recopilar.\n" #. Configure1 dialog help 3/3 @@ -411,50 +400,39 @@ msgid "" "<big>Options</big> \n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</" -"p>\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Opcions</big> \n" "Recopila informació addicional. Normalment aquestes opcions no són\n" -"necessàries, però es poden incloure si les circumstàncies requereixen més " -"informació.\n" +"necessàries, però es poden incloure si les circumstàncies requereixen més informació.\n" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<big>Default Options</big> \n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" "<big>Opcions per defecte</big> \n" -"Seleccioneu o desmarqueu cada conjunt de dades que vulgueu incloure a " -"supportconfig tarball." +"Seleccioneu o desmarqueu cada conjunt de dades que vulgueu incloure a supportconfig tarball." #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<big>Contact Information</big> \n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " -"include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." -"txt file." +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file." msgstr "" "<big>Informació de contacte</big> \n" -"Empleneu cada un dels camps de la informació de contacte que vulgueu " -"incloure\n" -"a la supportconfig tarball. Els camps es desen en un fitxer basic-" -"environment.txt." +"Empleneu cada un dels camps de la informació de contacte que vulgueu incloure\n" +"a la supportconfig tarball. Els camps es desen en un fitxer basic-environment.txt." #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<big>Upload Information</big> \n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " -"upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " -"filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " -"tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the tarball keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" "See man supportconfig(1) for further details." msgstr "" @@ -462,8 +440,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<big>Upload Target Examples</big> \n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball</" -"i> \n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=tarball \n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming \n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives" msgstr "" @@ -471,15 +448,11 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " -"service request.\n" +"Note: If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" msgstr "" -"Nota: Si esteu carregant una supportconfig tarball a Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"assegureu-vos d'incloure el número de petició de servei d'11 dígits des de " -"la vostra petició de servei obert.\n" +"Nota: Si esteu carregant una supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support,\n" +"assegureu-vos d'incloure el número de petició de servei d'11 dígits des de la vostra petició de servei obert.\n" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:137 @@ -494,29 +467,23 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<big>Collected Data Review</big> \n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " -"of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" "use Remove from Data and the selected file will be removed.\n" msgstr "" "<big>Resum de dades recopilades</big> \n" -"Reviseu les dades recopilades per supportconfig. Si no voleu compartir " -"algunes de les dades recopilades,\n" -"useu Suprimeix de les dades i el fitxer seleccionat se suprimirà.</" -"p>\n" +"Reviseu les dades recopilades per supportconfig. Si no voleu compartir algunes de les dades recopilades,\n" +"useu Suprimeix de les dades i el fitxer seleccionat se suprimirà.\n" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" " \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</" -"big> \n" -"Si voleu desar una còpia de la supportconfig tarball, seleccioneu-ne el " -"directori\n" +"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</big> \n" +"Si voleu desar una còpia de la supportconfig tarball, seleccioneu-ne el directori\n" "de destinació i assegureu-vos que l'opció està marcada.\n" " \n" @@ -525,15 +492,13 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<big>Upload URL</big> \n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " -"uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "<big>Càrrega d'URL</big> \n" -"Aquesta opció té la localització a la qual la supportconfig tarball es " -"carregarà\n" +"Aquesta opció té la localització a la qual la supportconfig tarball es carregarà\n" "com a valor per defecte.\n" "Canvieu-ne el valor només en casos especials.\n" "\n" @@ -552,16 +517,13 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b> \n" +"<big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big> \n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the Package with log files field.\n" " \n" msgstr "" -"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</" -"big> \n" -"Si ja heu creat la supportconfig tarball, escriviu-ne el camí complet al " -"camp\n" +"<big>Càrrega de supportconfig tarball a Global Technical Support</big> \n" +"Si ja heu creat la supportconfig tarball, escriviu-ne el camí complet al camp\n" "Paquet amb fitxers de registre.\n" " \n" @@ -627,8 +589,7 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:42 msgid "Information related to capturing a system core dump. crash.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb la captura de l'abocament del nucli. crash.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la captura de l'abocament del nucli. crash.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:45 msgid "Information related to cron and at. cron.txt" @@ -636,9 +597,7 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:48 msgid "Disk, file system mounts and partition information. fs-diskio.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació de particions i punts de muntatge del sistema de fitxers i del " -"disc. fs-diskio.txt" +msgstr "Informació de particions i punts de muntatge del sistema de fitxers i del disc. fs-diskio.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:51 msgid "Domain Name Service information. dns.txt" @@ -646,28 +605,19 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:54 msgid "Novell eDirectory health check information. novell-edir.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació de la comprovació de salut de Novell eDirectory. novell-edir.txt" +msgstr "Informació de la comprovació de salut de Novell eDirectory. novell-edir.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "" -"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." -"txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació de l'entorn del sistema, inclou sysctl i l'entorn d'arrel. env.txt" +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" +msgstr "Informació de l'entorn del sistema, inclou sysctl i l'entorn d'arrel. env.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " -"in /etc. etc.txt" -msgstr "" -"Obté recursivament *.conf files, juntament amb altres diversos fitxers de " -"configuració a /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" +msgstr "Obté recursivament *.conf files, juntament amb altres diversos fitxers de configuració a /etc. etc.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 msgid "Enterprise Volume Management System-related information. evms.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb Enterprise Volume Management System. evms.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb Enterprise Volume Management System. evms.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:66 msgid "Heartbeat/high availabilty cluster information. ha.txt" @@ -682,12 +632,8 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb LDAP, inclou una cerca arrel DSE. ldap.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " -"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb Novell Linux User Management, inclou un DSE " -"arrel, cerques d'UNIX Config i d'estació de treball. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb Novell Linux User Management, inclou un DSE arrel, cerques d'UNIX Config i d'estació de treball. novell-lum.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 msgid "Linux Volume Management-related information. lvm.txt" @@ -715,9 +661,7 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:96 msgid "Network-related information, including firewall rules. network.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb la xarxa, inclou les regles del tallafoc. network." -"txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la xarxa, inclou les regles del tallafoc. network.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:99 msgid "Network File System-related information. nfs.txt" @@ -744,12 +688,8 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb OpenWBEM. openwbem.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "" -"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " -"information. pam.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb el mòdul d'autenticació connectable, inclou " -"informació del compte de l'usuari. pam.txt" +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el mòdul d'autenticació connectable, inclou informació del compte de l'usuari. pam.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 msgid "Printing and CUPS-related information. print.txt" @@ -761,20 +701,15 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:126 msgid "Update daemon-related information. updates-daemon.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb el dimoni d'actualització. updates-daemon.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el dimoni d'actualització. updates-daemon.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:129 msgid "Update client related information. updates.txt" msgstr "Informació relacionada amb el client d'actualització. updates.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "" -"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " -"data files. sar.txt" -msgstr "" -"Informació relacionada amb informes d'activitat del sistema, inclou còpies " -"de fitxers de dades SAR. sar.txt" +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" +msgstr "Informació relacionada amb informes d'activitat del sistema, inclou còpies de fitxers de dades SAR. sar.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 msgid "SLES Real Time kernel-related information. slert.txt" @@ -786,10 +721,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " -"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " -"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -822,59 +755,32 @@ msgstr "Informació relacionada amb la virtualizació XEN. xen.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " -"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" -msgstr "" -"Indica a supportconfig de cercar tots els fitxers d'instàncies eDirectory al " -"sistema de fitxers. Si està establert, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST també està " -"establert automàticament. -e" +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgstr "Indica a supportconfig de cercar tots els fitxers d'instàncies eDirectory al sistema de fitxers. Si està establert, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST també està establert automàticament. -e" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "" -"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" -msgstr "" -"Una llista completa de fitxers que usen \"find\" del sistema de fitxers " -"d'arrel. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgstr "Una llista completa de fitxers que usen \"find\" del sistema de fitxers d'arrel. -L, fs-files.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "" -"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " -"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " -"available. -l" -msgstr "" -"Inclou tot el fitxer de registre sencer, inclou comentaris, en comptes de " -"només línies de VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT. Addicionalment els registres rotats " -"s'inclouen si estan disponibles. -l" +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" +msgstr "Inclou tot el fitxer de registre sencer, inclou comentaris, en comptes de només línies de VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT. Addicionalment els registres rotats s'inclouen si estan disponibles. -l" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 msgid "Minimizes the amount of disk information and detailed scanning. -d" msgstr "Minimitza la quatitat d'informació de disc i d'escaneig detallat. -d" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " -"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." -msgstr "" -"Normalment s'inclouen tots els registres de /var/log/YaST2/*. Aquesta opció " -"minimitza la quantitat que es recupera de cada fitxer." +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgstr "Normalment s'inclouen tots els registres de /var/log/YaST2/*. Aquesta opció minimitza la quantitat que es recupera de cada fitxer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " -"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" -msgstr "" -"Executa un rpm -V en cada paquet RPM instal·lat. Això triga força temps a " -"completar-se. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgstr "Executa un rpm -V en cada paquet RPM instal·lat. Això triga força temps a completar-se. -v, rpm-verify.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "" -"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " -"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" -msgstr "" -"Normalment només es llisten els tipus de serveis de base SLP. Aquesta opció " -"us permet cercar cada un dels tipus de serveis descoberts individualment. -" -"s, slp.txt" +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgstr "Normalment només es llisten els tipus de serveis de base SLP. Aquesta opció us permet cercar cada un dels tipus de serveis descoberts individualment. -s, slp.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 msgid "Company name to include in the basic-environment.txt" @@ -893,64 +799,36 @@ msgstr "Telèfon de contacte per incloure a basic-environment.txt" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "" -"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " -"entire file." -msgstr "" -"El nombre de línies per incloure quan s'obté un fitxer de registre. Zero " -"significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." +msgstr "El nombre de línies per incloure quan s'obté un fitxer de registre. Zero significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "" -"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " -"always used." -msgstr "" -"La localització de supportconfig tarball. S'usa sempre la primera " -"localització vàlida de la llista." +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." +msgstr "La localització de supportconfig tarball. S'usa sempre la primera localització vàlida de la llista." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " -"entire file." -msgstr "" -"El màxim nombre de línies de /var/log/messages a obtenir. Zero significa que " -"s'obté el fitxer sencer." +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." +msgstr "El màxim nombre de línies de /var/log/messages a obtenir. Zero significa que s'obté el fitxer sencer." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." -msgstr "" -"El màxim nombre de fitxers de registre del \"heartbeat policy engine\" per " -"incloure a supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "El màxim nombre de fitxers de registre del \"heartbeat policy engine\" per incloure a supportconfig tarball." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." -msgstr "" -"El màxim nombre de fitxers de dades SAR per incloure a supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "El màxim nombre de fitxers de dades SAR per incloure a supportconfig tarball." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " -"you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" -"Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." msgstr "" -"Quan està establert a 1, supportconfig s'executa en mode quiet. Aquesta " -"opció és útil si\n" -"teniu pensat executar supportconfig regularment en un \"cron job\", per " -"exemple. Establiu-ho amb -Q." +"Quan està establert a 1, supportconfig s'executa en mode quiet. Aquesta opció és útil si\n" +"teniu pensat executar supportconfig regularment en un \"cron job\", per exemple. Establiu-ho amb -Q." #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "" -"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " -"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " -"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." -msgstr "" -"Usat per especificar on es carregarà la supportconfig tarball, quan s'usa " -"l'opció d'inici -u srnum. Podeu especificar qualsevol servidor FTP que " -"suporti càrregues anònimes. Per defecte és el servidor públic ftp de SUSE." +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgstr "Usat per especificar on es carregarà la supportconfig tarball, quan s'usa l'opció d'inici -u srnum. Podeu especificar qualsevol servidor FTP que suporti càrregues anònimes. Per defecte és el servidor públic ftp de SUSE." #. Initialization dialog caption #: src/include/support/wizards.rb:147 Modified: trunk/yast/ca/po/yast2-apparmor.ca.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/ca/po/yast2-apparmor.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:03:38 UTC (rev 90696) +++ trunk/yast/ca/po/yast2-apparmor.ca.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) @@ -56,14 +56,11 @@ "After this operation the AppArmor module will reload the profile set." msgstr "" " ?\n" -"Després d'aquesta operació el mòdul d'AppArmor tornarà a carregar el conjunt " -"del perfil." +"Després d'aquesta operació el mòdul d'AppArmor tornarà a carregar el conjunt del perfil." #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " -"profile." +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." msgstr "Seleccioneu un perfil de la llista i premeu següent per suprimir-lo." #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 @@ -145,12 +142,8 @@ #. #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " -"AppArmor profile settings." -msgstr "" -"Aquesta operació ha generat l'error següent. Comproveu la instal·lació i la " -"configuració del perfil de l'AppArmor." +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." +msgstr "Aquesta operació ha generat l'error següent. Comproveu la instal·lació i la configuració del perfil de l'AppArmor." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:115 @@ -236,9 +229,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:270 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:310 #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:350 msgid "An email address is required for each selected notification method." -msgstr "" -"Es necessita una adreça de correu electrònic per a cada mètode de " -"notificació seleccionat." +msgstr "Es necessita una adreça de correu electrònic per a cada mètode de notificació seleccionat." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:394 msgid "Configuration failed for the following operations: " @@ -264,12 +255,10 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 msgid "" -"AppArmor Status This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -"enforcement \n" +"AppArmor Status This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning." msgstr "" -"Estat d'AppArmor Informa de si el mòdul de política d'aplicació " -"d'AppArmor \n" +"Estat d'AppArmor Informa de si el mòdul de política d'aplicació d'AppArmor \n" "està carregat i funcionant." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:444 @@ -277,18 +266,15 @@ "Security Event Notification Configure this tool if you want \n" "to be notified by email when access violations have occurred." msgstr "" -"Notificació d'esdeveniment de seguretat Configureu aquesta eina " -"si voleu \n" -"rebre notificacions per correu electrònic quan hagin ocorregut violacions " -"d'accés." +"Notificació d'esdeveniment de seguretat Configureu aquesta eina si voleu \n" +"rebre notificacions per correu electrònic quan hagin ocorregut violacions d'accés." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:447 msgid "" "Profile Modes Use this tool to change the way that AppArmor \n" "uses individual profiles." msgstr "" -"Modes de perfil Useu aquesta eina per canviar la manera en què " -"l'AppArmor \n" +"Modes de perfil Useu aquesta eina per canviar la manera en què l'AppArmor \n" "usa els perfils individuals." #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:462 @@ -359,26 +345,16 @@ msgstr "S'han detectat errors als perfils de l'AppArmor" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 -msgid "" -"These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " -"profile management tools can be used. " -msgstr "" -"Aquests problemes s'han de corregir abans que l'AppArmor es pugui iniciar " -"o que es puguin utilitzar les eines de gestió de perfils." +msgid "These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used. " +msgstr "Aquests problemes s'han de corregir abans que l'AppArmor es pugui iniciar o que es puguin utilitzar les eines de gestió de perfils." #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 msgid "Find a description of the AppArmor profile syntax by running " -msgstr "" -"Podeu trobar una descripció de la sintaxi del perfil de l'AppArmor " -"executant " +msgstr "Podeu trobar una descripció de la sintaxi del perfil de l'AppArmor executant " #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 -msgid "" -"Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " -"Administration guide located in the directory: " -msgstr "" -"A la Guia d'administració hi ha una àmplia documentació disponible sobre " -"l'AppArmor. La trobareu al directori " +msgid "Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgstr "A la Guia d'administració hi ha una àmplia documentació disponible sobre l'AppArmor. La trobareu al directori " #. encoding: utf-8 #. *************************************************************************** @@ -811,67 +787,43 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE." -"</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" msgstr "" "<ul><li>Sobreescriu l'accés DAC, inclòs l'accés d'execució ACL si \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] està definit. S'està excloent l'accés DAC cobert per " -"CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] està definit. S'està excloent l'accés DAC cobert per CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " -"defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions DAC pel que fa a la lectura i la " -"cerca \n" -"de fitxers i directoris, incloses les restriccions d'ACL si [_POSIX_ACL] " -"està definit. \n" +"<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions DAC pel que fa a la lectura i la cerca \n" +"de fitxers i directoris, incloses les restriccions d'ACL si [_POSIX_ACL] està definit. \n" "S'està excloent l'accés DAC cobert per CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " -"file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions de les operacions permeses en " -"fitxers,\n" -"on el propietari del fitxer ha de ser igual a l'identificador de l'usuari, " -"excepte si s'aplica CAP_FSETID.\n" +"<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions de les operacions permeses en fitxers,\n" +"on el propietari del fitxer ha de ser igual a l'identificador de l'usuari, excepte si s'aplica CAP_FSETID.\n" "No sobreescriu les restriccions MAC i DAC. </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " -"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " -"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " -"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " -"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -"implemented). </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Sobreescriu les següents restriccions: l'identificador de l'usuari " -"ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir " -"els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID al fitxer, que l'identificador del grup efectiu " -"(o un dels identificadors del grup suplementari) ha de coincidir amb " -"l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir el bit S_ISGID al " -"fitxer, que els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID es borrin en un retorn correcte des " -"de chown(2) (no implementat). </li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>Sobreescriu les següents restriccions: l'identificador de l'usuari ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID al fitxer, que l'identificador del grup efectiu (o un dels identificadors del grup suplementari) ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir el bit S_ISGID al fitxer, que els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID es borrin en un retorn correcte des de chown(2) (no implementat). </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of " -"the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Sobreescriu la restricció que l'identificador de l'usuari real o " -"efectiu d'un procés \n" -"que envia un senyal ha de coincidir amb l'identificador de l'usuari real o " -"efectiu del procés \n" +"<ul><li>Sobreescriu la restricció que l'identificador de l'usuari real o efectiu d'un procés \n" +"que envia un senyal ha de coincidir amb l'identificador de l'usuari real o efectiu del procés \n" "que rep el senyal.</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:79 @@ -879,10 +831,8 @@ "<ul><li>Allows setgid(2) manipulation </li> <li> Allows setgroups(2) </li> \n" "<li> Allows forged gids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Permet la manipulació de setgid(2) </li> <li> Permet setgroups(2) </" -"li> \n" -"<li> Permet gids falsificats a les credencials del sòcol que passen.</li></" -"ul>" +"<ul><li>Permet la manipulació de setgid(2) </li> <li> Permet setgroups(2) </li> \n" +"<li> Permet gids falsificats a les credencials del sòcol que passen.</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:85 msgid "" @@ -890,26 +840,19 @@ "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" msgstr "" "<ul><li>Permet la manipulació de setuid(2) (inclòs fsuid) </li> \n" -"<li> Permet pids falsificats a les credencials del sòcol que passen. </li></" -"ul>" +"<li> Permet pids falsificats a les credencials del sòcol que passen. </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:91 msgid "" "<ul><li> Transfer any capability in your permitted set to any pid, \n" "remove any capability in your permitted set from any pid</li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Transfereix qualsevol capacitat del conjunt permès a qualsevol " -"pid, \n" -"suprimeix qualsevol capacitat del conjunt permès des de qualsevol pid</li></" -"ul>" +"<ul><li> Transfereix qualsevol capacitat del conjunt permès a qualsevol pid, \n" +"suprimeix qualsevol capacitat del conjunt permès des de qualsevol pid</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</" -"li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li>Permet la modificació dels atributs de fitxer S_IMMUTABLE i " -"S_APPEND</li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li>Permet la modificació dels atributs de fitxer S_IMMUTABLE i S_APPEND</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 msgid "" @@ -926,8 +869,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" msgstr "" @@ -938,17 +880,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" "<li> Allows clearing driver statistics</li>" msgstr "" -"<li> Permet establir processos arbitraris / pertinença de grup de processos " -"en sòcols</li> \n" -"<li> Permet la vinculació a qualsevol adreça per a una transparència " -"d'intermediari (proxy)</li> \n" +"<li> Permet establir processos arbitraris / pertinença de grup de processos en sòcols</li> \n" +"<li> Permet la vinculació a qualsevol adreça per a una transparència d'intermediari (proxy)</li> \n" "<li> Permet establir TOS (tipus de servei)</li> \n" "<li> Permet establir el mode promiscu</li> \n" "<li> Permet la neteja de les estadístiques de controlador</li>" @@ -975,27 +914,22 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock " -"and\n" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" "mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Permet el bloqueig de segments de memòria compartida</li> <li> " -"Permet mlock i\n" +"<ul><li> Permet el bloqueig de segments de memòria compartida</li> <li> Permet mlock i\n" "mlockall (que no tenen relació amb l'IPC) </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:149 msgid "<ul><li> Override IPC ownership checks </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Sobreescriu les comprovacions del propietari de l'IPC </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> Sobreescriu les comprovacions del propietari de l'IPC </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</" -"li> \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Insereix i suprimeix mòduls del nucli - modifica el nucli sense " -"límit</li> \n" +"<ul><li> Insereix i suprimeix mòduls del nucli - modifica el nucli sense límit</li> \n" "<li> Modifica cap_bset </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:159 @@ -1004,8 +938,7 @@ "<li> Allows sending USB messages to any device via /proc/bus/usb </li></ul>" msgstr "" "<ul><li> Permet l'accés a ioperm/iopl</li> \n" -"<li> Permet enviar missatges USB a qualsevol dispositiu a través de /proc/" -"bus/usb </li></ul>" +"<li> Permet enviar missatges USB a qualsevol dispositiu a través de /proc/bus/usb </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:165 msgid "<ul><li> Allows use of chroot() </li></ul>" @@ -1017,8 +950,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:173 msgid "<ul><li> Allows configuration of process accounting </li></ul>" -msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Permet la configuració de la comptabilitat de processos </li></ul>" +msgstr "<ul><li> Permet la configuració de la comptabilitat de processos </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:179 msgid "" @@ -1063,15 +995,13 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " -"and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" msgstr "" "<li> Permet eliminar semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Usat a canvi de CAP_CHOWN a \"chown\" cues de missatges IPC, semaphores " -"i memòria compartida</li> \n" +"<li> Usat a canvi de CAP_CHOWN a \"chown\" cues de missatges IPC, semaphores i memòria compartida</li> \n" "<li> Permet bloquejar / desbloquejar un segment de memòria compartida</li> \n" "<li> Permet activar / desactivar la swap</li> \n" "<li> Permet forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -1081,14 +1011,12 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -"ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" "<li> Permet establir read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Permet establir geometria al controlador floppy</li> \n" "<li> Permet canviar DMA on/off al controlador xd</li> \n" -"<li> Permet l'administració de dispostius md devices (sobretot els de sobre, " -"però també alguns extra ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Permet l'administració de dispostius md devices (sobretot els de sobre, però també alguns extra ioctls)</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 msgid "" @@ -1104,14 +1032,12 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" msgstr "" -"<li> Permet llegir porcions no estandaritzades d'espai de configuració pci</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Permet llegir porcions no estandaritzades d'espai de configuració pci</li> \n" "<li> Permet depuració DDI ioctl al controlador sbpcd</li> \n" "<li> Permet configurar ports de sèrie</li> \n" "<li> Permet enviar ordres raw qic-117</li>" @@ -1124,8 +1050,7 @@ msgstr "" "<li> Permet habilitar/inhabilitar encuament etiquetat en SCSI controllers\n" " i l'enviament d'ordres arbitràries SCSI</li> \n" -"<li> Permet establir clau d'encriptació en un sistema de fitxers loopback </" -"li></ul>" +"<li> Permet establir clau d'encriptació en un sistema de fitxers loopback </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:232 msgid "<ul><li> Allows use of reboot() </li></ul>" @@ -1133,52 +1058,40 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " -"UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " -"processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<ul><li> Permet incrementar la prioritat i definir la prioritat en altres " -"processos (UID diferent)</li> \n" -"<li> Permet l'ús de la planificació round-robin i FIFO (en temps real) en " -"processos propis i la configuració \n" +"<ul><li> Permet incrementar la prioritat i definir la prioritat en altres processos (UID diferent)</li> \n" +"<li> Permet l'ús de la planificació round-robin i FIFO (en temps real) en processos propis i la configuració \n" "de l'algorisme de planificació utilitzat per un altre procés.</li> \n" -"<li> Permet la configuració de l'afinitat de la cpu en altres processos. </" -"li></ul>" +"<li> Permet la configuració de l'afinitat de la cpu en altres processos. </li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:245 msgid "" "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " -"resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" msgstr "" "<ul><li> Sobreescriu límits de recurs. Estableix límits de recurs.</li> \n" "<li> Sobreescriu límits de quota.</li> \n" "<li> Sobreescriu espai reservat en sistema de fitxers ext2</li> \n" -"<li> Modifica el mode d'historial de dades en sistema de fitxers ext3 (uses " -"journaling resources)</li>" +"<li> Modifica el mode d'historial de dades en sistema de fitxers ext3 (uses journaling resources)</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you " -"can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of keymaps </li></ul>" msgstr "" -"<li> NOTA: ext2 accepta fsuid en comprovar les sobreescriptures del recurs, " -"de mode que també podeu sobreescriure utilitzant fsuid \n" -"<li> Sobreescriu les restriccions de mida en cues de missatges de l'IPC</" -"li> \n" -"<li> Permet més de 64 Hz d'interrupcions des del rellotge en temps real</" -"li> \n" -"<li> Sobreescriu el número màxim de consoles a l'assignació de la consola</" -"li> \n" +"<li> NOTA: ext2 accepta fsuid en comprovar les sobreescriptures del recurs, de mode que també podeu sobreescriure utilitzant fsuid \n" +"<li> Sobreescriu les restriccions de mida en cues de missatges de l'IPC</li> \n" +"<li> Permet més de 64 Hz d'interrupcions des del rellotge en temps real</li> \n" +"<li> Sobreescriu el número màxim de consoles a l'assignació de la consola</li> \n" "<li> Sobreescriu el número màxim de mapes de tecles</li></ul>" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:261 @@ -1244,12 +1157,9 @@ "(into /var/log/audit/audit.log file), but still permitted, so \n" "that application's behavior is not restricted." msgstr "" -"El mode de queixa és un perfil d'estat d'entrenament que " -"registra \n" -"l'activitat d'aplicacions. Totes les violacions de regles de perfil " -"d'AppArmor es registren\n" -"(al fitxer /var/log/audit/audit.log), però tot i això són permeses, " -"per tant \n" +"El mode de queixa és un perfil d'estat d'entrenament que registra \n" +"l'activitat d'aplicacions. Totes les violacions de regles de perfil d'AppArmor es registren\n" +"(al fitxer /var/log/audit/audit.log), però tot i això són permeses, per tant \n" "el comportament de l'aplicació no es restringeix." #: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:43 @@ -1260,10 +1170,8 @@ "permitted to do so by the profile)." msgstr "" "Amb el perfil en mode de força, l'aplicació està protegida per \n" -"l'AppArmor. Les regles del perfil s'apliquen i si es violen queda " -"registrat,\n" -"però no és permès (p. e. una aplicació no pot accedir a fitxers, si no és " -"que \n" +"l'AppArmor. Les regles del perfil s'apliquen i si es violen queda registrat,\n" +"però no és permès (p. e. una aplicació no pot accedir a fitxers, si no és que \n" "el perfil li ho permet)." #. Button for showing active or all profiles @@ -1352,10 +1260,8 @@ "event must be to send an alert." msgstr "" "La pantalla de Security Event Notification us permet establir alertes \n" -"de correu electrònic per a esdeveniments de seguretat. Als passos " -"següents, \n" -"especifiqueu cada quant s'envien les alertes, qui les rep i com n'ha de ser " -"de \n" +"de correu electrònic per a esdeveniments de seguretat. Als passos següents, \n" +"especifiqueu cada quant s'envien les alertes, qui les rep i com n'ha de ser de \n" "greu l'esdeveniment perquè s'enviï una alerta." #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:38 @@ -1377,8 +1283,7 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" " For example: <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "" msgstr "" "Notificació de resum: mostra els esdeveniments de seguretat \n" @@ -1386,8 +1291,7 @@ "incloent la data de l'últim cop. \n" " Per exemple: <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:53 @@ -1400,8 +1304,7 @@ "and the type of file permission access that is permitted or rejected." msgstr "" "Notificació verbosa: mostra esdeveniments de seguretat \n" -"sense modificar, registrats per l'AppArmor. Us diu cada vegada que n'hi ha " -"un\n" +"sense modificar, registrats per l'AppArmor. Us diu cada vegada que n'hi ha un\n" "i escriu una línia al registre verbós. Aquests esdeveniments inclouen \n" "la data i l'hora en què s'han produït, quan el perfil de l'aplicació \n" "permet l'accés i quan el rebutja, i el tipus de permís d'accés que és \n" @@ -1446,8 +1349,7 @@ msgstr "" "<li> Introduíu l'adreça electrònica dels qui haurien de rebre \n" "les notificacions Terse (breu), Summary (resum), o Verboses. Si no hi ha \n" -"cap servidor SMTP local configurat per distribuir-les des d'aquest amfitrió " -"al \n" +"cap servidor SMTP local configurat per distribuir-les des d'aquest amfitrió al \n" "domini que heu introduït, poseu-hi per exemple <user>@localhost \n" "i habiliteu <user> per rebre correu del sistema, si no és un \n" "usuari root. </li>" @@ -1462,11 +1364,9 @@ "occur." msgstr "" "<li>Seleccioneu el nivell de seguretat més baix pel qual \n" -"s'ha d'enviar una notificació. Els esdeveniments de seguretat es " -"registraran \n" +"s'ha d'enviar una notificació. Els esdeveniments de seguretat es registraran \n" "i s'enviaran les notificacions a l'hora indicada per l'interval quan els \n" -"esdeveniments siguin equivalents o més grossos que el nivell de " -"seguretat \n" +"esdeveniments siguin equivalents o més grossos que el nivell de seguretat \n" "seleccionat. Si l'interval és 1 dia, la notificació s'enviarà diàriament \n" "si hi ha algun problema de seguretat." @@ -1488,8 +1388,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select Include unknown security events if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</" -"li>" +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" msgstr "" "<li>Seleccioneu Inclou esdeveniments de seguretat desconeguts si \n" "voleu incloure esdeveniments no puntuats amb un número de seguretat.</li>" @@ -1501,13 +1400,11 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control " -"module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" -"Aquest auxiliar presenta entrades generades pel mòdul de control d'accés " -"d'AppArmor \n" +"Aquest auxiliar presenta entrades generades pel mòdul de control d'accés d'AppArmor \n" "Podeu generar perfils altament optimitzats i robusts de seguretat \n" "a través dels suggeriments fets per l'AppArmor." @@ -1534,8 +1431,7 @@ msgstr "" "El text d'ajuda següent descriu el detall de la sintaxi del perfil\n" "de seguretat usat per l'AppArmor. En qualsevol moment, \n" -"podeu personalitzar l'entrada del perfil canviant-ne la resposta " -"suggerida. \n" +"podeu personalitzar l'entrada del perfil canviant-ne la resposta suggerida. \n" "Aquest resum us ajudarà amb les opcions. Consulteu les instruccions \n" "pas a pas de la Novell AppArmor Administration Guide. " @@ -1544,12 +1440,8 @@ msgstr "Modes d'accés " #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " -"modes:" -msgstr "" -"Els modes de permisos d'accés de fitxer consisteixen en combinacions dels " -"sis mòduls següents:" +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" +msgstr "Els modes de permisos d'accés de fitxer consisteixen en combinacions dels sis mòduls següents:" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 msgid "<li>r - read</li>" @@ -1718,41 +1610,28 @@ "bash(1), zsh(1)." #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<li>* can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" -msgstr "" -"<li>* es pot substituir per qualsevol nombre de caràcters, excepte " -"'/'<li>" +msgid "<li>* can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgstr "<li>* es pot substituir per qualsevol nombre de caràcters, excepte '/'<li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "" -"<li>** can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</" -"li>" -msgstr "" -"<li>** es pot substituir per qualsevol nombre de caràcters, inclòs " -"'/'</li>" +msgid "<li>** can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" +msgstr "<li>** es pot substituir per qualsevol nombre de caràcters, inclòs '/'</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 msgid "<li>? can substitute for any single character except '/'</li>" msgstr "<li>? es pot substituir per caràcter únic, excepte '/'</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<li>[abc] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li>[abc] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "<li>[abc] se substituirà pel caràcter únic a, b, o c</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "" -"<li>[a-c] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li>[a-c] will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "<li>[a-c] se substituirà pel caràcter únic a, b, o c</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<li>{ab,cd} will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match " -"cd</li>" -msgstr "" -"<li>{ab,cd} s'expandirà a una regla per coincidir amb ab, una regla " -"per coincidir amb cd</li>" +msgid "<li>{ab,cd} will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" +msgstr "<li>{ab,cd} s'expandirà a una regla per coincidir amb ab, una regla per coincidir amb cd</li>" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 msgid "Clean Exec - for sanitized execution" @@ -1769,10 +1648,8 @@ msgstr "" "L'opció d'execució neta per als permisos d'execució sense restriccions i \n" "el perfil discret proporciona una seguretat afegida extraient l'entorn que \n" -"ha estat heretat pel programa fill de les variables específiques. Se us " -"demanarà \n" -"d'escollir si voleu higienitzar l'entorn si escolliu \"p\" o \"u\" durant el " -"procés del perfil.\n" +"ha estat heretat pel programa fill de les variables específiques. Se us demanarà \n" +"d'escollir si voleu higienitzar l'entorn si escolliu \"p\" o \"u\" durant el procés del perfil.\n" "Aquestes són les variables:" #. Globalz @@ -1893,8 +1770,7 @@ #. Update table values #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:602 msgid "Entry will not be added. Entry name or permissions not defined." -msgstr "" -"L'entrada no s'afegirà. El nom o els permisos de l'entrada no estan definits." +msgstr "L'entrada no s'afegirà. El nom o els permisos de l'entrada no estan definits." #. Prompts the user for a hatname #. Side-Effect: sets Settings["CURRENT_HAT"] @@ -1925,27 +1801,17 @@ msgstr "" "No heu proporcionat un nom per al hat que voleu afegir.\n" "Si us plau \n" -"introduïu un nom de hat per crear un hat nou o premeu Interromp per " -"cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +"introduïu un nom de hat per crear un hat nou o premeu Interromp per cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 -msgid "" -"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name " -"or press Abort to cancel this wizard." -msgstr "" -"El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent o " -"premeu Interromp per cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgstr "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent o premeu Interromp per cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 -msgid "" -"View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " -"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog." -msgstr "" -"Visualitzeu i modifiqueu el contingut d'un perfil individual. Per a les " -"entrades existents, feu doble clic als permisos per accedir al diàleg de " -"modificació." +msgid "View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog." +msgstr "Visualitzeu i modifiqueu el contingut d'un perfil individual. Per a les entrades existents, feu doble clic als permisos per accedir al diàleg de modificació." #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:933 @@ -1957,21 +1823,15 @@ "U -unconstrained (*clean exec)</code>" msgstr "" "Definicions dels permisos: <code> r - lectura \n" -"w -escriptura l - enllaç m - mmap PROT_EXEC k - bloqueig de " -"fitxers \n" -"a - addició de fitxers x - execució i - hereta p - perfil " -"discret \n" +"w -escriptura l - enllaç m - mmap PROT_EXEC k - bloqueig de fitxers \n" +"a - addició de fitxers x - execució i - hereta p - perfil discret \n" "P - perfil discret (*execució neta) u - sense restriccions \n" " U -sense restriccions (*execució neta)</code>" #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 -msgid "" -"Add Entry: Select the type of resource to add from the drop " -"down list." -msgstr "" -"Afegeix una entrada: seleccioneu el tipus de recurs que voleu " -"afegir des de la llista desplegable." +msgid "Add Entry: Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list." +msgstr "Afegeix una entrada: seleccioneu el tipus de recurs que voleu afegir des de la llista desplegable." #. help text - part x1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:947 @@ -1981,59 +1841,46 @@ #. help text - part x2 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:951 msgid "<li>Directory Add a directory entry to this profile.</li>" -msgstr "" -"<li>Directori Afegeix una entrada de directori al perfil.</li>" +msgstr "<li>Directori Afegeix una entrada de directori al perfil.</li>" #. help text - part x3 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:955 msgid "<li>Capability Add a capability entry to this profile.</li>" -msgstr "" -"<li>Capacitat Afegeix una entrada de capacitat al perfil.</li>" +msgstr "<li>Capacitat Afegeix una entrada de capacitat al perfil.</li>" #. help text - part x4 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 msgid "" "<li>Include Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " -"time.</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" msgstr "" -"<li>Capçalera Afegeix una entrada de capçalera al perfil. Aquesta " -"opció \n" -"inclou el contingut de l'entrada del perfil d'un altre fitxer d'aquest " -"perfil en el moment de la càrrega.</li>" +"<li>Capçalera Afegeix una entrada de capçalera al perfil. Aquesta opció \n" +"inclou el contingut de l'entrada del perfil d'un altre fitxer d'aquest perfil en el moment de la càrrega.</li>" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li>Network Entry Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " -"profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" "<li>Entrada de xarxa Afegeix una regla de xarxa a aquest perfil. \n" -"Aquesta opció us permetrà especificar els privilegis d'accés a la xarxa per " -"al perfil. \n" +"Aquesta opció us permetrà especificar els privilegis d'accés a la xarxa per al perfil. \n" "Podeu especificar una família d'adreces de xarxa i un tipus de sòcol.</li>" #. help text - part x6 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 msgid "" "<li>Hat Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " -"selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a changehat\n" "aware application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see man changehat on your system " -"or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see man changehat on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" msgstr "" -"<li>Hat Afegeix un perfil secundari per a aquest perfil, denominat " -"Hat. \n" -"Aquesta opció és anàloga a la creació manual d'un perfil nou, que es pot " -"seleccionar \n" -"durant l'execució només en el context que es demani una aplicació " -"changehat aware. \n" -"Per obtenir més informació sobre changehat, consulteu man changehat " -"al sistema o la Guia de l'usuari de Novell d'AppArmor.</li>" +"<li>Hat Afegeix un perfil secundari per a aquest perfil, denominat Hat. \n" +"Aquesta opció és anàloga a la creació manual d'un perfil nou, que es pot seleccionar \n" +"durant l'execució només en el context que es demani una aplicació changehat aware. \n" +"Per obtenir més informació sobre changehat, consulteu man changehat al sistema o la Guia de l'usuari de Novell d'AppArmor.</li>" #. help text - part x7 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:977 @@ -2042,27 +1889,19 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 -msgid "" -"Delete Entry: Removes the selected entry from this profile." -msgstr "" -"Suprimeix l'entrada: Suprimeix l'entrada seleccionada des d'aquest " -"perfil." +msgid "Delete Entry: Removes the selected entry from this profile." +msgstr "Suprimeix l'entrada: Suprimeix l'entrada seleccionada des d'aquest perfil." #. help text - part y1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 msgid "" "*Clean Exec The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping " -"the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These " -"variables are:" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" msgstr "" -"*Execució neta L'opció d'execució neta per als permisos " -"d'execució \n" -"sense restriccions i el perfil discret proporciona una seguretat afegida " -"extraient l'entorn \n" -"que ha estat heretat pel programa fill de les variables específiques. " -"Aquestes són lesvariables:" +"*Execució neta L'opció d'execució neta per als permisos d'execució \n" +"sense restriccions i el perfil discret proporciona una seguretat afegida extraient l'entorn \n" +"que ha estat heretat pel programa fill de les variables específiques. Aquestes són lesvariables:" #. help text - part y2 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:998 @@ -2125,12 +1964,8 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 -msgid "" -"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " -"entries." -msgstr "" -"L'opció \"Inclou entrades\" no pot editar-se. Seleccioneu \"Afegeix\" o " -"\"Suprimeix\" per gestionar \"Inclou entrades\"." +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." +msgstr "L'opció \"Inclou entrades\" no pot editar-se. Seleccioneu \"Afegeix\" o \"Suprimeix\" per gestionar \"Inclou entrades\"." #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1294 @@ -2142,12 +1977,8 @@ msgstr "Seleccioneu el fitxer que voleu incloure" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "" -"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " -"directories: \n" -msgstr "" -"El fitxer de #capçalera no és vàlid. Els fitxers de capçalera s'han d'ubicar " -"en un d'aquests directoris: \n" +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" +msgstr "El fitxer de #capçalera no és vàlid. Els fitxers de capçalera s'han d'ubicar en un d'aquests directoris: \n" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 msgid "Save changes to the profile" @@ -2159,8 +1990,7 @@ "(Note: after saving, AppArmor profiles will be reloaded.)\n" msgstr "" "Voleu desar els canvis d'aquest perfil? \n" -"(Nota: després de desar els canvis, s'actualitzaran els perfils de " -"l'AppArmor.\n" +"(Nota: després de desar els canvis, s'actualitzaran els perfils de l'AppArmor.\n" #. We'll need this often - cache it #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1476 @@ -2192,111 +2022,39 @@ #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" -#~ "The View Archive Reports form enables you to view previously " -#~ "generated\n" -#~ "reports located in the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory. Use " -#~ "the checkboxes at the top to narrow-down the category of reports shown in " -#~ "the list to: SIR Reports, AUD Reports or ESS Reports. To see report " -#~ "details, select a report and click the View button. You " -#~ "can view reports from one or more systems if you move the reports to the /" -#~ "var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ " El formulari Mostra els informes arxivats us permetrà visualitzar els " -#~ "informes creats anteriorment ubicats al directori /var/log/apparmor/" -#~ "reports-archived. Les caselles de selecció de la part superior del " -#~ "formulari permeten limitar la categoria dels informes mostrats en la " -#~ "llista en funció de: informes SIR, informes AUD o informes ESS. Per a " -#~ "consultar els detalls dels informes, seleccioneu un informe i feu clic al " -#~ "botó Mostra. Podeu visualitzar informes d'un o més " -#~ "sistemes si desplaceu els informes al directori /var/log/apparmor/reports-" -#~ "archived." +#~ "The View Archive Reports form enables you to view previously generated\n" +#~ "reports located in the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory. Use the checkboxes at the top to narrow-down the category of reports shown in the list to: SIR Reports, AUD Reports or ESS Reports. To see report details, select a report and click the View button. You can view reports from one or more systems if you move the reports to the /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived directory." +#~ msgstr " El formulari Mostra els informes arxivats us permetrà visualitzar els informes creats anteriorment ubicats al directori /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived. Les caselles de selecció de la part superior del formulari permeten limitar la categoria dels informes mostrats en la llista en funció de: informes SIR, informes AUD o informes ESS. Per a consultar els detalls dels informes, seleccioneu un informe i feu clic al botó Mostra. Podeu visualitzar informes d'un o més sistemes si desplaceu els informes al directori /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived." #~ msgid "repConfHelp" #~ msgstr "repConfHelp" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" -#~ "<ul> <li>Policy Exceptions: When an application requests a " -#~ "resource \n" -#~ "that's not defined within its profile, a security event is generated.</" -#~ "li> \n" -#~ "<li>Policy Engine State Changes: Enforces policy for applications " -#~ "and \n" -#~ "maintains its own state, including when engines start or stop, when a " -#~ "policy \n" -#~ "is reloaded, and when global security feature are enabled or disabled.</" -#~ "li></ul> \n" -#~ "Select the report from the archive, then View to see the report " -#~ "details." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Informe d'incidències de seguretat (SIR): es tracta d'un informe " -#~ "que mostra els esdeveniments de seguretat d'interès a un administrador. " -#~ "Informa sobre les violacions de política per part d'aplicacions limitades " -#~ "localment durant el període de temps especificat. Aquests informes " -#~ "presenten les excepcions de la política dels informes SIR i els canvis " -#~ "d'estat del motor de la política. Aquests dos tipus d'esdeveniments de " -#~ "seguretat es defineixen de la manera següent: <ul> <li>excepcions de " -#~ "la política: quan una aplicació sol·licita un recurs que no està " -#~ "definit dins del seu perfil, es crea un esdeveniment de seguretat. " -#~ "<li>Canvis d'estat del motor de la política: aplica la política " -#~ "per a les aplicacions i manté el seu estat propi, fins i tot si el motor " -#~ "s'inicia o s'atura, si es torna a carregar una política i si s'habilita o " -#~ "inhabilita la funció de seguretat global. </ul> Seleccioneu l'informe de " -#~ "l'arxiu i després Mostra per a veure els detalls de l'informe." +#~ "<ul> <li>Policy Exceptions: When an application requests a resource \n" +#~ "that's not defined within its profile, a security event is generated.</li> \n" +#~ "<li>Policy Engine State Changes: Enforces policy for applications and \n" +#~ "maintains its own state, including when engines start or stop, when a policy \n" +#~ "is reloaded, and when global security feature are enabled or disabled.</li></ul> \n" +#~ "Select the report from the archive, then View to see the report details." +#~ msgstr "Informe d'incidències de seguretat (SIR): es tracta d'un informe que mostra els esdeveniments de seguretat d'interès a un administrador. Informa sobre les violacions de política per part d'aplicacions limitades localment durant el període de temps especificat. Aquests informes presenten les excepcions de la política dels informes SIR i els canvis d'estat del motor de la política. Aquests dos tipus d'esdeveniments de seguretat es defineixen de la manera següent: <ul> <li>excepcions de la política: quan una aplicació sol·licita un recurs que no està definit dins del seu perfil, es crea un esdeveniment de seguretat. <li>Canvis d'estat del motor de la política: aplica la política per a les aplicacions i manté el seu estat propi, fins i tot si el motor s'inicia o s'atura, si es torna a carregar una política i si s'habilita o inhabilita la funció de seguretat global. </ul> Seleccioneu l'informe de l'arxiu i després Mostra per a veu re els detalls de l'informe." #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Applications Audit Report (AUD): An auditing tool that reports " -#~ "which application servers are running and whether they are confined by " -#~ "AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming " -#~ "network connections. This report provides the host machine's IP Address, " -#~ "the date the Applications Audit Report ran, the name and path of the " -#~ "unconfined program or application server, the suggested profile or a " -#~ "placeholder for a profile for an unconfined program, the process ID " -#~ "number, the state of the program (confined or unconfined) and the type of " -#~ "confinement that the profile is performing (enforce/complain)." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Informe d'auditoria d'aplicacions (AUD): és una eina d'auditoria " -#~ "que informa sobre quins servidors d'aplicacions estan funcionant i si " -#~ "AppArmor limita les aplicacions. Els servidors d'aplicacions són " -#~ "aplicacions que accepten connexions de xarxa entrants. Aquest informe " -#~ "proporciona l'adreça IP de l'ordinador central, la data d'execució de " -#~ "l'informe d'auditoria d'aplicacions, el nom i el camí del programa sense " -#~ "limitacions o del servidor de l'aplicació, el perfil suggerit o un text " -#~ "variable per a un perfil d'un programa sense limitacions, el número " -#~ "identificador del procés, l'estat del programa (limitat o sense " -#~ "limitacions) i el tipus de limitació que està realitzant el perfil " -#~ "(aplicació/queixa). " +#~ msgid "Applications Audit Report (AUD): An auditing tool that reports which application servers are running and whether they are confined by AppArmor. Application servers are applications that accept incoming network connections. This report provides the host machine's IP Address, the date the Applications Audit Report ran, the name and path of the unconfined program or application server, the suggested profile or a placeholder for a profile for an unconfined program, the process ID number, the state of the program (confined or unconfined) and the type of confinement that the profile is performing (enforce/complain)." +#~ msgstr "Informe d'auditoria d'aplicacions (AUD): és una eina d'auditoria que informa sobre quins servidors d'aplicacions estan funcionant i si AppArmor limita les aplicacions. Els servidors d'aplicacions són aplicacions que accepten connexions de xarxa entrants. Aquest informe proporciona l'adreça IP de l'ordinador central, la data d'execució de l'informe d'auditoria d'aplicacions, el nom i el camí del programa sense limitacions o del servidor de l'aplicació, el perfil suggerit o un text variable per a un perfil d'un programa sense limitacions, el número identificador del procés, l'estat del programa (limitat o sense limitacions) i el tipus de limitació que està realitzant el perfil (aplicació/queixa). " #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "Executive Security Summary (ESS): A combined report, \n" -#~ "consisting of one or more high-level reports from one or more machines. " -#~ "This \n" -#~ "report can provide a single view of security events on multiple machines " -#~ "if each \n" +#~ "consisting of one or more high-level reports from one or more machines. This \n" +#~ "report can provide a single view of security events on multiple machines if each \n" #~ "machine's data is copied to the reports archive directory, which is \n" -#~ "/var/log/apparmor/reports-archived. This report provides the " -#~ "host \n" -#~ "machine's IP address, the start and end dates of the polled events, total " -#~ "number \n" -#~ "of rejects, total number of events, average of severity levels reported, " -#~ "and the \n" -#~ "highest severity level reported. One line of the ESS report represents a " -#~ "range \n" +#~ "/var/log/apparmor/reports-archived. This report provides the host \n" +#~ "machine's IP address, the start and end dates of the polled events, total number \n" +#~ "of rejects, total number of events, average of severity levels reported, and the \n" +#~ "highest severity level reported. One line of the ESS report represents a range \n" #~ "of SIR reports." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Resum executiu de seguretat (ESS): es tracta d'un informe " -#~ "combinat, que consta d'un o més informes d'incidències de seguretat d'un " -#~ "o més equips. Aquest informe proporciona una visualització simple dels " -#~ "esdeveniments de seguretat en diferents equips, si les dades d'aquests " -#~ "ordinadors es copien al directori d'arxiu d'informes /var/log/apparmor/" -#~ "reports-archived. Aquest informe proporciona l'adreça IP de " -#~ "l'ordinador, les dates d'inici i finalització del esdeveniments " -#~ "obtinguts, el nombre total de rebuigs, el nombre total d'esdeveniments, " -#~ "els nivells mitjans de gravetat registrats i el nivell màxim de gravetat " -#~ "registrat. Una línia de l'informe ESS representa un abast dels informes " -#~ "SIR. " +#~ msgstr "Resum executiu de seguretat (ESS): es tracta d'un informe combinat, que consta d'un o més informes d'incidències de seguretat d'un o més equips. Aquest informe proporciona una visualització simple dels esdeveniments de seguretat en diferents equips, si les dades d'aquests ordinadors es copien al directori d'arxiu d'informes /var/log/apparmor/reports-archived. Aquest informe proporciona l'adreça IP de l'ordinador, les dates d'inici i finalització del esdeveniments obtinguts, el nombre total de rebuigs, el nombre total d'esdeveniments, els nivells mitjans de gravetat registrats i el nivell màxim de gravetat registrat. Una línia de l'informe ESS representa un abast dels informes SIR. " #~ msgid "Archived Security Incident Report - Page " #~ msgstr "Informe d'incidències de seguretat arxivat: pàgina" @@ -2394,9 +2152,7 @@ #~| msgid "Illegal end date entered. Please retry." #~ msgid "Illegal end date entered. Retry." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "La data de finalització que heu introduït no és vàlida. Torneu a provar-" -#~ "ho." +#~ msgstr "La data de finalització que heu introduït no és vàlida. Torneu a provar-ho." #~ msgid "Access Type: " #~ msgstr "Tipus d’accés:" @@ -2477,15 +2233,13 @@ #~| msgid "" #~| "AppArmor Security Events\n" -#~| " This table displays the events found that match your " -#~| "search criteria." +#~| " This table displays the events found that match your search criteria." #~ msgid "" #~ "AppArmor Security Events\n" #~ "This table displays the events that match your search criteria.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Esdeveniments de seguretat d'AppArmor\n" -#~ " Aquesta taula mostra els esdeveniments trobats que " -#~ "coincideixen amb els criteris de cerca." +#~ " Aquesta taula mostra els esdeveniments trobats que coincideixen amb els criteris de cerca." #~ msgid "AppArmor Event Report Data" #~ msgstr "Dades de l'informe d'esdeveniments d'AppArmor" @@ -2542,17 +2296,13 @@ #~ msgstr "Esdeveniments DB no inicialitzats." #~ msgid "The events database has not been populated. No records exist." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha omplert la base de dades dels esdeveniments. No existeixen " -#~ "registres." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha omplert la base de dades dels esdeveniments. No existeixen registres." #~ msgid "Query Returned Empty List." #~ msgstr "La consulta ha retornat una llista buida." #~ msgid "The events database has no records that match the search query." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "La base de dades d'esdeveniments no té cap entrada que coincideixi amb la " -#~ "consulta de cerca." +#~ msgstr "La base de dades d'esdeveniments no té cap entrada que coincideixi amb la consulta de cerca." #~ msgid "Archived Event Report - Page " #~ msgstr "Informe d'esdeveniments arxivat: pàgina" @@ -2607,8 +2357,7 @@ #~ msgstr "Informe del resum executiu de seguretat" #~ msgid "No recognized report type selected. Try again." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha seleccionat cap tipus d'informe reconegut. Torneu-ho a intentar." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha seleccionat cap tipus d'informe reconegut. Torneu-ho a intentar." #~ msgid "AppArmor Report" #~ msgstr "Informe d'AppArmor" @@ -2700,9 +2449,7 @@ #~ msgstr "No es pot suprimir un informe d'estoc." #~ msgid "No name provided for retrieving SIR report page count." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "No s'ha proporcionat cap nom per recuperar el comptatge de la pàgina de " -#~ "l'informe SIR." +#~ msgstr "No s'ha proporcionat cap nom per recuperar el comptatge de la pàgina de l'informe SIR." #~ msgid "Mode Request" #~ msgstr "Sol·licitud de mode" @@ -2755,15 +2502,9 @@ #~ msgid "Audit" #~ msgstr "Revisa" -#~| msgid "" -#~| "SubDomain does not appear to be started. Please enable SubDomain and " -#~| "try again." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "AppArmor does not appear to be started. Please enable AppArmor and try " -#~ "again." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Sembla que no s'ha iniciat el subdomini. Habiliteu-lo i torneu-ho a " -#~ "provar." +#~| msgid "SubDomain does not appear to be started. Please enable SubDomain and try again." +#~ msgid "AppArmor does not appear to be started. Please enable AppArmor and try again." +#~ msgstr "Sembla que no s'ha iniciat el subdomini. Habiliteu-lo i torneu-ho a provar." #~| msgid "Updating AppArmor profiles in %s." #~ msgid "Can't find apparmor profiles in %s." @@ -2790,9 +2531,7 @@ #~ "Enter an application name to\n" #~ "continue generating a profile or press\n" #~ "Abort to cancel this wizard.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per " -#~ "a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +#~ msgstr "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" @@ -2801,9 +2540,7 @@ #~ "Enter an application name to\n" #~ "continue generating a profile or press\n" #~ "Abort to cancel this wizard.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per " -#~ "a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +#~ msgstr "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" @@ -2812,9 +2549,7 @@ #~ "Enter an application name to\n" #~ "continue generating a profile or press\n" #~ "Abort to cancel this wizard.\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per " -#~ "a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +#~ msgstr "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" @@ -2827,8 +2562,7 @@ #~ msgstr "" #~ "No heu proporcionat un nom per al hat que voleu afegir.\n" #~ "Escriviu \n" -#~ "\t\t\tun nom de hat per a crear un hat nou o premeu Interromp per a " -#~ "cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +#~ "\t\t\tun nom de hat per a crear un hat nou o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #~ msgid "Profiling" #~ msgstr "Assignació de perfils" @@ -2849,8 +2583,7 @@ #~ "una altra finestra i feu servir les seves funcions.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Un cop fet, seleccioneu el botó \"Escaneja\" per tal \n" -#~ "d'escanejar els registres del sistema i comprovar si existeixen " -#~ "esdeveniments d'AppArmor. \n" +#~ "d'escanejar els registres del sistema i comprovar si existeixen esdeveniments d'AppArmor. \n" #~ "\n" #~ "Per a cada esdeveniment d'AppArmor tindreu l'oportunitat \n" #~ "de triar si voleu permetre'n o denegar-ne l'accés." @@ -2885,8 +2618,7 @@ #~ msgstr "# Període: %s - %s\n" #~ msgid "# The following filters were used for report generation:\n" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "# S'han utilitzat els filtres següents per a la creació d'informes:\n" +#~ msgstr "# S'han utilitzat els filtres següents per a la creació d'informes:\n" #~ msgid "" #~ "# Filter: %s, Value: %s\n" @@ -2947,67 +2679,38 @@ #~ msgstr "Error: no s'ha pogut obrir %s. No s'ha creat l'informe ESS csv." #, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "Please refer to this for more detailed information about AppArmor" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Consulteu-ho per a obtenir informació més detallada sobre l'AppArmor</" -#~ "p>" +#~ msgid "Please refer to this for more detailed information about AppArmor" +#~ msgstr "Consulteu-ho per a obtenir informació més detallada sobre l'AppArmor" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions about allowed operations on files,\n" -#~ "where file owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID " -#~ "is \n" +#~ "where file owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is \n" #~ "applicable. It doesn't override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions de les operacions permeses en " -#~ "fitxers, on el propietari del fitxer ha de ser igual a l'identificador de " -#~ "l'usuari, excepte si s'aplica CAP_FSETID. No sobreescriu les restriccions " -#~ "MAC i DAC. </li></ul>" +#~ msgstr "<ul><li>Sobreescriu totes les restriccions de les operacions permeses en fitxers, on el propietari del fitxer ha de ser igual a l'identificador de l'usuari, excepte si s'aplica CAP_FSETID. No sobreescriu les restriccions MAC i DAC. </li></ul>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions that the effective user \n" -#~ "ID shall match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID " -#~ "bits on that \n" -#~ "file; that the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) " -#~ "shall match \n" -#~ "the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; that the " -#~ "S_ISUID and \n" -#~ "S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -#~ "implemented). </li></ul>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<ul><li>Sobreescriu les següents restriccions de que l'identificador de " -#~ "l'usuari efectiu ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del " -#~ "fitxer en establir els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID al fitxer; que " -#~ "l'identificador del grup efectiu (o un dels identificadors del grup " -#~ "suplementari) ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del " -#~ "fitxer en establir el bit S_ISGID al fitxer; que els bits S_ISUID i " -#~ "S_ISGID es borrin en un retorn correcte des de chown(2) (no implementat). " -#~ "</li></ul>" +#~ "ID shall match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that \n" +#~ "file; that the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) shall match \n" +#~ "the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; that the S_ISUID and \n" +#~ "S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +#~ msgstr "<ul><li>Sobreescriu les següents restriccions de que l'identificador de l'usuari efectiu ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID al fitxer; que l'identificador del grup efectiu (o un dels identificadors del grup suplementari) ha de coincidir amb l'identificador del propietari del fitxer en establir el bit S_ISGID al fitxer; que els bits S_ISUID i S_ISGID es borrin en un retorn correcte des de chown(2) (no implementat). </li></ul>" #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "The profile already contains the provided hat name. \n" -#~ "Please enter a different name to try again, or press Abort to cancel this " -#~ "wizard." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per " -#~ "a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." +#~ "Please enter a different name to try again, or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +#~ msgstr "El perfil ja conté el nom hat proporcionat. Escriviu un nom diferent per a tornar-ho a provar o premeu Interromp per a cancel·lar l'auxiliar." #, fuzzy #~ msgid "" #~ "Generate Reports Help If there were, in fact, \n" -#~ "going to be any help for you (which, incidentally, there isn't going to " -#~ "be), \n" -#~ "then you would indeed find said help, here.Thank you for your " -#~ "time, \n" +#~ "going to be any help for you (which, incidentally, there isn't going to be), \n" +#~ "then you would indeed find said help, here.Thank you for your time, \n" #~ "and have a nice day." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Ajuda sobre la creació d'informes En el cas que hi hagués algun " -#~ "tipus d'ajuda que, de fet, no està previst que n'hi hagi, aleshores " -#~ "trobaríeu ajuda aquí. Gràcies per a la vostra atenció i que tingueu un " -#~ "bon dia." +#~ msgstr "Ajuda sobre la creació d'informes En el cas que hi hagués algun tipus d'ajuda que, de fet, no està previst que n'hi hagi, aleshores trobaríeu ajuda aquí. Gràcies per a la vostra atenció i que tingueu un bon dia." #~ msgid "Weds" #~ msgstr "dc." -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe(a)opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner(a)opensuse.org

1 0

← Newer
1
...
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
...
28
Older →

Jump to page: